JP2023097254A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of maintaining interest in a game.SOLUTION: A pachinko machine 1 has a start pocket capable of receiving game balls hit into a game area 5a. When a game ball enters the start pocket, determination processing regarding winning is performed. Thereafter, variable display corresponding to a result of the determination processing is started and, if a winning pattern is displayed in the variable display, a winning game is executed. Accordingly, the pachinko machine 1 can perform a special performance as a performance associated with operation means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 60

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines (generally called "pachinko machines") and reel-type gaming machines (generally called "slot machines").

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as seen in Patent Document 1, for example, there has been known a gaming machine in which a special game is played in which a large amount of prizes can be obtained when a winning prize is won.

That is, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, first, it is determined whether or not there is a winning of a game ball into the starting hole. Then, when the game ball enters the starting hole, a judgment process for judging whether or not a hit is won is performed. Also, at this time, the special symbol is variably displayed on a predetermined display device for a predetermined variation time. Then, when a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the winning prize has been won, and the opening and closing member of the big prize opening is operated, thereby increasing the number of players. provide a special game in which a prize of

JP 2017-006393 A

In such a conventional game machine, an effect is often executed by the operating means, and it is desired to further improve the amusement of the game when the effect is performed by the operating means.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decline in amusement in a game.

Means 1:
a specific operation means operable by a player;
a determination means for determining;
privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege to a player based on the fact that a predetermined result is obtained in the judgment by the judging means;
operation state detection means capable of detecting the state of the specific operation means;
post-operation sound output means capable of outputting a post-operation output sound in response to the detection by the operation state detection means that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which the specific operation means is being operated;
message display means capable of displaying a message prompting an operation to the specific operation means,
Detection of being in the operation state is permitted a plurality of times as an operation valid state, which is a state in which output of the post-operation output sound can be started when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state, and the operation is performed. A multiple operation valid state is prepared in which the post-output sound can be output multiple times, and in the multiple operation valid state, both the message display and the message display are not displayed. A game machine
Among the multiple-operation valid states, it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state in the multiple-operation valid state of the type in which the message display is displayed, and a post-operation output sound is output in accordance with this detection. In this case, when it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from the operation state to a non-operation state in which the post-operation output sound is being output, the output sound is output. The post-operation output sound in the state can change with the detection as a trigger,
In the multiple operation valid state of the type in which the message display is displayed, a model image display imitating the specific operation means can be displayed,
When it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state in the multiple operation valid state of the type in which the message display is displayed, a plurality of types of post-operation output sounds can be output,
When it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state in the multiple operation valid state of the type in which the message display is displayed, the post-operation display can be displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by having another operation means different from the specific operation means as an operation means operable by a player.

According to the above configuration, it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state in the multiple operation effective state of the type in which the message display prompting the operation of the specific operation means is displayed among the multiple operation effective states. When the corresponding post-operation output sound is output, it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state in which the operation output sound is being output. Then, since the post-operation output sound in the execution state can be changed with the detection as a trigger, when the message display is displayed, the user can feel the tension as to whether or not to continue the operation of the specific operation means. It can be expected to maintain good performance (see, eg, paragraphs 1543, 2212, etc.).

According to this invention, it is possible to suppress a decline in amusement in a game.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front with a door frame opened from a main body frame and a main body frame opened from an outer frame; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the front; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the rear; FIG. It is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine. It is a right side view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled an outer frame and was seen from the front. (a) is a perspective view of the portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) exploded. be. (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed from the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and (b) is an outer upper hinge member; Fig. 10 is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the body-side upper hinge member is attached to the; It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect|action of the locking member in an outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 19; FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 19; FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 19; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a front perspective view of a door frame base unit in a door frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a front view of the production operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the production operation unit. (a) is the perspective view which looked at the production|presentation operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production|presentation operation unit from the back. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends; FIG. 34(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 34(a). FIG. 34B is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 34(b). (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 34(b), and (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the production|presentation operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the rear. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the decoration board unit of the effect operation unit, which is exploded and viewed from the front; FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which an operation button is pressed in the sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. 37; (a) is a view of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and a portion of the operation button is cut away to show the portion that is to be hidden by the first button decorative portion of the operation button, the button frame, or the like. (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a portion of an operation button to be hidden by a first button decorative portion, a button frame, or the like in a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the production operation unit as a perspective view seen from the front, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the production operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. . (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. is a perspective view. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame left side unit, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame left side unit, and was seen from the back. FIG. 47(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line LL. (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame right side unit. is a perspective view. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame right side unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame right side unit, and was seen from the back. FIG. 51(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 51(a). 51(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 51(a), and FIG. 51(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 51(a). (a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a front perspective view of the door frame top unit, and (c) is a rear perspective view of the door frame top unit. is. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame top unit, and was seen from the back. FIG. 57 is a cross-sectional view taken along line PP in FIG. 56; It is a front view of a game board. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a game board disassembled into main components and viewed from the front; FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the back. It is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 as seen from the front. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63, viewed from behind; FIG. It is an explanatory view showing the part of the function display unit enlarged from the front with the game board attached to the pachinko machine. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel in a form different from that of FIG. 63 as seen from the front together with the front structural member, the substrate holder, and the main control unit; FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 viewed from behind; It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board and a peripheral control board. FIG. 70 is a block diagram continued from FIG. 69; FIG. It is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input to and output from a game ball lending device connection terminal plate that relays electrical connections between a payout control board that constitutes the main board, a CR unit, and a frequency display board. FIG. 70 is a block diagram continued from FIG. 69; FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an outline of a peripheral control MPU; FIG. It is a block diagram around VDP with a built-in sound source in a liquid crystal and a sound control part. It is a block diagram showing the power supply system of the pachinko machine. FIG. 76 is a block diagram continued from FIG. 75; It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows a power failure monitoring circuit. 4 is a circuit diagram showing an inter-board communication interface circuit between a main control board and a peripheral control board; FIG. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit etc. of a payout control part. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit. FIG. 82 is a circuit diagram continued from FIG. 81; It is a circuit diagram showing a payout motor drive circuit. 4 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input/output circuit; FIG. 4 is an input/output diagram showing various input/output signals to/from a main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the arrangement of output terminals on an external terminal plate; 4 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit for drawing in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device; FIG. It is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board. 4 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board; FIG. 90 is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board in FIG. 89 to the peripheral control boards; FIG. It is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a main-control side power-on process. FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 92; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of main control side timer interrupt processing; 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when powering on a peripheral control unit; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V-blank interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of LOCKN signal history creation processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of connection failure determination processing; 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of connection recovery processing; 4 is a timing chart for explaining the timing of outputting a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the transmitter IC for the upper tray liquid crystal; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a special design and special electric accessary goods control processing (step S114). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting opening passage process (step S5232). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage process (step S5234). It is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process processing (step S5238). It is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal process (step S5280). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a jackpot determination process (step S5305). (A) is a diagram showing a big hit determination table, and (B) and (C) are diagrams showing symbol determination tables. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design stop design setting process (step S5281). It is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282). It is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation process (step S5283). It is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop processing (step S5284). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a normal design and normal electric accessary goods control processing (step S116). FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing the procedure of gate passage processing (step S5402). FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about normal design normal processing (step S5403). It is a diagram showing a determination table T1 of the effect pattern (fluctuation effect) referred to in the effect symbol variation start process when the game is in the normal game state. It is a figure which shows an example of a sound definition table. FIG. 120 is a diagram showing notification content, notification mode, notification time, and conditions for termination of notification (cancellation conditions) for each type of notification sound exemplified in FIG. 119; It is a front view of a game machine provided with a sword effect operation unit. It is a right side view of the game machine provided with the sword effect operation unit. It is a diagram showing an example of a selection table of the production pattern in the production mode in which the sword drawing production can be executed, (A) showing an example of a selection table for selecting the presence or absence of the sword drawing preparation transition production according to the type of variation pattern, (B) ) shows an example of a selection table for selecting whether or not to draw the sword. FIG. 4 is a state transition diagram for explaining the sword drawing operation of the sword decoration when the aura member is provided on the sword portion (blade portion) itself, (A) sword drawn state, (B) first sword drawn state, (C) second. Indicates the sword drawn state. FIG. 4 is a vertical cross-sectional view for explaining the operation of the aura member; FIG. 4 is a state transition diagram for explaining the sword drawing operation of the sword decoration when the aura member is provided on the sheath, showing (A) the sword drawn state, (B) the first sword drawn state, and (C) the second sword drawn state. FIG. 4 is a vertical cross-sectional view for explaining the operation of the aura member; It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production|presentation display apparatus in the princess ready-to-win production, and the operation|movement transition of the sword decoration. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production|presentation display apparatus in the princess ready-to-win production, and the operation|movement transition of the sword decoration. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production|presentation display apparatus in the princess ready-to-win production, and the operation|movement transition of the sword decoration. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining screen transitions of the effect display device, state transitions of the operation buttons, and movement transitions of the sword ornament in the ready-to-win effect including the operation effects of the operation buttons used in many ways. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining screen transitions of the effect display device, state transitions of the operation buttons, and movement transitions of the sword ornament in the ready-to-win effect including the operation effects of the operation buttons used in many ways. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining screen transitions of the effect display device, state transitions of the operation buttons, and movement transitions of the sword ornament in the ready-to-win effect including the operation effects of the operation buttons used in many ways. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining screen transitions of the effect display device, state transitions of operation buttons, and movement transitions of sword ornaments in the ready-to-win effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining screen transitions of the effect display device, state transitions of operation buttons, and movement transitions of sword ornaments in the ready-to-win effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining screen transitions of the effect display device, state transitions of operation buttons, and movement transitions of sword ornaments in the ready-to-win effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining screen transitions of the effect display device, state transitions of operation buttons, and movement transitions of sword ornaments in the ready-to-win effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining screen transitions of the effect display device, state transitions of operation buttons, and movement transitions of sword ornaments in the ready-to-win effect. It is a figure explaining the form of the sword ornament used for pseudo-continuous effect. When it is decided that either the operation button or the sword ornament is operational during the ready-to-win effect by lottery by the peripheral control board based on the variable effect (ready-to-win effect) of the variation pattern drawn by the main control board. 10 is a diagram showing a transition example of a ready-to-win effect in which the pre-operation suggestive effect of the first suggestive pattern is executed. FIG. When it is decided that either the operation button or the sword ornament is operational during the ready-to-win effect by lottery by the peripheral control board based on the variable effect (ready-to-win effect) of the variation pattern drawn by the main control board. 10 is a diagram showing a transition example of a ready-to-win effect in which the pre-operation suggestive effect of the first suggestive pattern is executed. FIG. As with the first suggestion pattern described above, when it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is to be operated during the ready-to-win effect, the pre-operation suggestive effect of the second suggestive pattern is executed. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition. Although the second suggestion pattern is performed as a pre-operation suggestion effect, the sword decoration does not become operationally valid, and the operation button becomes operationally valid once, and then the sword decoration becomes operationally valid. It is a figure which shows about the suggestion production|presentation before operation of a pattern. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an integrated model image; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of an integrated model image from the start to the end of the effective period; It is a time chart which shows the example about the 1A reception permission state. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 1A reception permission state. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect|effect of the variation pattern which the 1st A reception acceptance state generate|occur|produces. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 2A reception acceptance state. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 2A reception acceptance state. It is a figure which shows the example of a variation pattern production|presentation which the 2A reception permission state generate|occur|produces. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 3A reception permission state. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 3A reception permission state. It is a figure which shows the example of a variation pattern production|presentation which the 3A reception permission state generate|occur|produces. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 4A reception permission state. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 4A reception permission state. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect|effect of the variation pattern which the 4th A acceptance acceptance state generate|occur|produces. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 5A reception permission state. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 5A reception permission state. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect|effect of the variation pattern which the 5A acceptance acceptance state generate|occur|produces. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 6th A reception permission state. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 6th A reception permission state. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect|effect of the variation pattern which the 6th A acceptance acceptance state generate|occur|produces.

[1. Overall Structure of Pachinko Machine]
A pachinko machine 1 that is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 10. FIG. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the rear. FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the body frame and the body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame, game board, main body frame and outer frame and viewed from the front. FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view viewed from the rear after being disassembled into two parts; FIG.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and which is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable; and a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which game balls are hit by.

The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 is, as shown in FIGS. 20 are connected to each other and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear width. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the horizontal lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 .

The outer frame 2 includes a panel member 50 attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, and attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front. and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 . The body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached so as to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 .

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a vertically extending quadrangular outer shape when viewed from the front and having a through hole 111 penetrating back and forth, and a through hole of the door frame base unit 100.例文帳に追加A handle unit 300 which is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface below 111 and can be operated by a player to hit a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. A plate unit 320 attached to the lower part of the front surface below the plate unit 320 and a plate unit 320 attached to the center of the plate unit 320. According to the game state that changes when a game ball is hit into the game area 5a, the player can A performance operation unit 400 capable of presenting a participatory performance, and a door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left part on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320. , a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right portion on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320, a door frame left side unit 530, and a door frame right side unit 550. and a door frame top unit 570 attached to the front upper part of the door frame base unit 100 above the through hole 111 on the upper side of the door frame base unit 100 .

The body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 consists of a frame-shaped body frame base 600 which can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the body frame base 600. It is attached to both upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame. A main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the side lower hinge members 150 are rotatably attached, a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 in front view, and the main body frame base 600. A ball launching device 680 for hitting a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a right side surface of the main body frame base 600, which is attached to the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, and a locking unit 700 for locking between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and a reverse side mounted on the rear side along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 in the front view to pay out game balls to the player side. An L-shaped payout unit 800, a board unit 900 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a game board 5 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable and attached to the main body frame base 600. and a back cover 980 that covers the rear side of the.

The dispensing unit 800 of the main body frame 4 includes an inverted L-shaped dispensing unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a dispensing unit base 801 attached to the top of the dispensing unit base 801 and extending to the left and right to open upward. A box-shaped ball tank 802 for storing game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown), and a ball tank 802 attached to a payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802. A tank rail 803 extending to the left and right to guide, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the payout unit base 801 in front view and guiding the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guiding unit 820. The game balls guided by the ball guide unit 820 are detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 on the lower side, and are paid one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950. and a payout device 830 attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 to guide the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 downward and to release the game balls according to the state of storage of the game balls on the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. An upper full ball path unit 850 that discharges from either a normal discharge port 850d or a full tank discharge port 850e, and an upper full ball path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the dispensing unit base 801 and discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full ball path unit 850 A normal guiding path 861 that guides game balls forward and guides them from the front end to the through-ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 and guides forward game balls released from the full tank release port 850e to guide the game balls forward and guides the game balls forward from the front end to the full ball passage 273 of the door frame 3. and a lower full ball path unit 860 having a full guideway 862 leading to the tank ball receptacle 274 .

The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a lower part for bass sound which is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 in front view. A speaker unit 920 having a speaker 921 , a power supply board box 930 that is attached to the rear side of the board unit base 910 on the right side in front view and accommodates the power supply board inside, and is attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920 . An interface control board box 940 housing an interface control board inside, and a payout control board 951 installed across the power board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controlling the payout of game balls are housed therein. A payout control board box 950 is provided.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 defines the outer periphery of a game area 5a into which game balls are hit, and shoots game balls from the ball launching device 680 into the upper portion of the game area 5a. A front structural member 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 that guide to the front, and a flat plate-like game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a. there is

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a player rotates the handle 302 while game balls are stored in the upper tray 321, the ball launcher 680 shoots the game ball with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It is driven into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 . When the game balls hit into the game area 5a are accepted by the winning openings, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 by the paying-out device 830 according to the accepted winning openings. Since the payout of the game balls can enhance the interest of the player, the game balls in the upper tray 321 can be hit into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall configuration of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. FIG. FIG. 11 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. 13 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 14 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame exploded and viewed from the front. FIG. 16(a) is a perspective view of the upper hinge member on the outer frame side of the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) exploded. It is a diagram. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 which are separated vertically and extend left and right, and both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 are connected to each other. and a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 extending to. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear width. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the horizontal lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 . Further, the outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the laterally outwardly facing side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are flush with each other. It is

In addition, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in front view, a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, An outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in a front view and the left frame member 30 is provided. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be attached so as to be opened and closed by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 .

In addition, the outer frame 2 includes a panel member 50 attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, and attached to the rear side of the panel member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively; a flat plate-like left sliding member 81 attached to the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 at a position leftward from the center in the left-right direction; A flat plate-shaped right sliding member 82 attached to a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50 . The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) and attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40. As shown in FIG.

Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a left frame member 30, an upper frame member 10 and a right frame member 40, a lower frame member 20 and a left frame member 30, and a lower frame member 20 and a right frame member 40, respectively. A connecting member 85 is provided. In addition, the outer frame 2 includes an upper hooking member 90 and a lower hooking member 91 which are attached to the inside (left side surface) of the right frame member 40 and engage an outer frame hook 703 of a locking unit 700, which will be described later. , is equipped.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
An upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is made of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 has engaging cutouts 11 that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right ends. Upper lateral fixing portions 87 of an upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 are mounted in the engaging notch portion 11 . In addition, the upper frame member 10 has mounting steps 12 recessed from the general surface on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end in front view. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12 .

[2-2. Lower frame member]
A lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is made of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed so that its lateral length and vertical thickness are the same as those of the upper frame member 10, and its front and rear width is equal to that of the upper frame member 10. It is formed longer than the front and back width of the . The lower frame member 20 has engagement cutouts 21 that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at positions closer to the rear than the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right ends. In the engaging cutout portion 21, a lower lateral fixing portion 88 of a left lower connecting member 85C and a lower right connecting member 85D, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 is mounted.

In addition, the lower frame member 20 has front end notches 22 recessed rearward from the front surfaces of both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20 , the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10 . When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2 , the portion between the left and right front end cutouts 22 is inserted into the panel member 50 .

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed by extrusions of metal such as aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in mutually symmetrical shapes in plan view. When assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inward from a position rearward of the center in the front-rear direction to the vicinity of the rear end on the side surface that is the outer side in the left-right direction. It has concave portions 31 and 41, and protruding portions 32 and 42 which protrude from the side surfaces opposite to the concave portions 31 and 41 and have hollow interiors. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced by the protrusions 32 and 42 . Further, lower lateral fixing portions 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85 are inserted and attached into the projecting portions 32 and 42, respectively.

In addition, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on their surfaces. When the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility such as a game hall or is transported by the plurality of grooves, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held by a worker's finger, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held. The design of the appearance of the machine 1 can be enhanced.

[2-4. Curtain plate member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape with an open rear side. The curtain plate member 50 has a rear extension portion 51 extending rearward in a flat plate shape near the left end in the front view on the upper surface, and a U-shape with a size that allows a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extension portion 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates vertically, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates vertically in a size that allows the game ball to pass through on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension part 51, A vertical wall portion 54 extending upward in a flat plate shape from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rearwardly extending portion 51, and a front surface bulging forward from near the upper end of the vertical wall portion 54. and a return portion 55 that inclines toward the rear as it goes toward.

The curtain plate member 50 is mounted on the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51 on the front side and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51 . A horizontal portion 71, which will be described later, is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position that coincides with a later-described discharge hole 74 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state assembled to the outer frame 2 . Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in the assembled state with the outer frame 2 . The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52 .

Further, the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 on the right side of the rear extension portion 51 is inclined so that the front end side is lower. The curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the top surface, and a right mounting portion 56 for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the top surface. a portion 57; The bottom surface of the body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via the left sliding member 81 and the right sliding member 82 .

As shown in the figure, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-like decoration formed on the front surface. Although not shown, the panel member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned by a plurality of ribs in a grid pattern, thereby enhancing strength and rigidity. Further, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated therein.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper fixing portion 61 extending horizontally and having a rectangular outer shape, and a flat plate extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61. a front extending portion 62, a bearing groove 63 extending from the right end of the front extending portion 62 toward the front to the left-right center of the front extending portion 62 and penetrating vertically, and a plan view of the upper fixing portion 61 A flat plate-like lateral fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side, and a lateral fixing portion extending downward from the left end of the forward extending portion 62 to the portion where the bearing groove 63 opens around the front end thereof. A flat plate-shaped hanging portion 65 that is continuous with the portion 64 is provided (see FIG. 16(b), etc.).

In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by a screw (not shown). there is Further, the forward extending portion 62 extends forward beyond the front end of the upper frame member 10 . The horizontal fixing portion 64 is inserted into the recess 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30 from above and fixed to the left frame member 30 with screws.

The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 by inserting the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63 to move the main body frame 4. It can be supported so that it can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. lock member]
As shown in FIG. 16, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 consists of a band plate-shaped lock body 66a extending forward and backward with a predetermined width on both sides and an operation portion projecting rightward from the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66b, an elastically deformable bar-shaped elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a and then obliquely forward left, and a mounting hole penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66d and. This lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the forward extending portion 62 of the outer-frame-side upper hinge member 60 with a mounting screw 67 .

The rear end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is attached to a position behind the bearing groove 63 in the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame upper hinge member 60 through the attachment hole 66d. Further, when the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member. The hanging portion 65 of 60 extends forward so as to come into contact with the portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 18).

The tip of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a abuts the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame upper hinge member 60. As shown in FIG. The lock member 66 is biased in a direction in which the front end thereof rotates leftward about the mounting hole 66d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 near the front end is in contact with the drooping portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space capable of accommodating a body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the body frame side upper hinge member 620, which will be described later, is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock body 66a.

By operating the operation portion 66b, the lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. By operating the operation portion 66b to rotate the lock body 66a in a direction in which the front end thereof moves leftward, the lock body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view. can be in a state in which the As a result, the main body frame hinge pin 622 can be inserted into the bearing groove 63 or removed from the bearing groove 63 .

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 includes a flat plate-like horizontal portion 71 extending horizontally and a left side of the horizontal portion 71 which rises upward from a portion rearward of the center in the front-rear direction. A raised plate-shaped rising portion 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and the horizontal portion 71 are penetrated vertically and only one game ball can pass through. and a sized discharge hole 74 . The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 71 of the outer-frame-side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape with a narrower upper end than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to a leftward position near the front end of the horizontal portion 71 . The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with the center portion of the rising portion 72 in the front-rear direction and extend rightward from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 in an inverted U shape. This discharge hole 74 is formed to have substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 .

When the outer frame 2 is assembled, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the panel member 50 and the rear extension portion 51 . is fixed to the panel reinforcement member 80 by a screw (not shown) passing through the upper surface of the panel member 50 . When the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the front side of the protruding portion 32 with a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into the main body frame lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 . In cooperation with the hinge member 60, the body frame 4 can be attached so that it can be opened and closed.

In addition, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 is aligned with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 . Thereby, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52 . More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls that fall between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 move between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 as the main body frame 4 is closed. Since the gap between the two gradually narrows, the ball rolls to the rear side where the gap is wide, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 74 . At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the body frame 4 when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. A game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is discharged from the discharge hole 74 so that it can be easily prevented from rolling backward from the main body frame 4, and the outer frame side. It is possible to make it difficult for a game ball to stay at the part of the lower hinge member 70.例文帳に追加

[2-8. Connection member]
The connecting members 85 of the outer frame 2 include an upper left connecting member 85A connecting the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B connecting the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connection member 85D that connects the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40. As shown in FIG.

The connection member 85 includes a flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 86 extending horizontally, a flat plate-like upper lateral fixing portion 87 extending upward from one of the left and right sides of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and the horizontal fixing portion. A flat plate-shaped lower lateral fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the portion of 86 from which the upper lateral fixing portion 87 extends is provided. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper lateral fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing portion 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower lateral fixing portion 88 extends from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 87. extending downwards. That is, the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are provided with two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 spaced apart in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10 . The upper lateral fixing portions 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are inserted into the engaging notches 21 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the left and right ends of the upper frame member 10 . Further, the front lower horizontal fixing portions 88 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the inner side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 on the front side of the projecting portions 32 and 42, respectively. Further, the lower lateral fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is a screw that is inserted into the projecting portions 32, 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and screwed from the outer side surface. are fixed to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively.

In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes further rearward than the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and further protrudes further than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends downward beyond the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion protruding rearward. Further, the left lower connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 projecting from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. As shown in FIG. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20 . Also, the upper horizontal fixing portions 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to the inner side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 on the front side of the projecting portions 32 and 42, respectively. Further, the lower lateral fixing portions 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are inserted into the engagement notch portions 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the lateral end surfaces of the lower frame member 20, respectively. be.

[2-9. Lock Mechanism of Upper Hinge Member on Outer Frame Side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the locking mechanism of the lock member 66 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 with respect to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. will be described with reference to FIG. 17(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed from the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and (b) is an outer upper side view. FIG. 4 is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which a body-side upper hinge member is attached to a hinge member; 18A and 18B are explanatory diagrams showing the action of the locking member on the outer frame.

When the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c contacts the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. The lock body 66a is adapted to block a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a V-shape, and the tip portion of the lock body 66a does not block the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. A space is formed in the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 into which the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 can be inserted.

The support mechanism of the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in this embodiment is such that the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock body 66a is mounted. is close to the right drooping portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side of the front end of the lock body 66a and the right drooping portion 65, and they are in contact with each other). ), the centers of the body frame upper hinge pin 622 located at the deepest portion of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end face of the lock body 66a are diagonally shifted and opposed to each other. state.

In this normal axially supported state, the main body frame hinge pin 622 that supports the heavy main body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63. Almost no load is applied from 622 to the front end face of lock body 66a. In other words, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. As shown in FIG. Since the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, the lock member 66 can be smoothly rotated when the operating portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66. there is Also, in the drawing, the center of the arc of the front end face of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the center of rotation of the lock member 66).

Therefore, when the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is applied with an acting force F in a direction to pull out along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a dogleg shape, and comes into contact with the arc-shaped front end face of the lock body 66a, the acting force is applied. F is the component force F1 (in the normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a) acting on the contact portion between the main body frame hinge pin 622 and the arcuate front end surface, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 and the bearing groove 63. and the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface of one side, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (the rotation center of the lock member 66). , the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 does not rotate in the direction away from the right drooping portion 65, and the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is positioned between the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and the bearing groove 63. The state of being sandwiched between the side inner surfaces is maintained.

For this reason, even in a normal axially supported state or a state in which the acting force of the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is applied to the lock member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not always subjected to a load, and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. Therefore, it is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the elastic portion 66c, and prevent the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 from falling out of the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if the front end portion of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the rightward direction by applying an excessive force, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a abuts the drooping portion 65 and cannot move further. Since it does not rotate, the locking member 66 does not protrude outside the front extending portion 62 .

Even if the shape of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is not arcuate, the front end of the lock member 66 may be positioned toward the outside of the front extending portion 62 so that no rotational moment is generated by the action of the force component F1. By locating the center of rotation of the lock member 66 (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where a rotational moment is generated, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 at all times. Even if the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66 a only abuts the hanging portion 65 , so the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension portion 62 .

When the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 supports the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. Insert hinge pin 622 . When the main body frame hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the main body frame hinge pin 622 contacts the right side surface of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock body 66a is pushed against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates around the mounting screw 67 so as to move leftward. As a result, the lock body 66a closing the bearing groove 63 is retracted to open the bearing groove 63, so that the body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

When the body frame hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the body frame hinge pin 622 and the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock body 66a is released by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member 66 moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to its normal state. As a result, the main body frame hinge pin 622 is accommodated in the space on the front side of the front end of the lock body 66 a in the bearing groove 63 , and the main body frame hinge pin 622 can rotate in the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 . state is held (locked).

When removing the body frame upper hinge pin 622 from the bearing groove 63, the operation portion 66b of the lock member 66 is operated to rotate the lock member 66 so that the front end of the lock body 66a moves leftward, and the elastic portion The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the biasing force of 66c. As a result, the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the opening are in communication with each other, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63 .

[2-10. Crime Prevention Mechanism and Ball Engagement Prevention Mechanism at the Location of the Lower Hinge Member on the Outer Frame Side]
Ball biting prevention for preventing a game ball from being caught between a crime prevention mechanism at a portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. The mechanism will be explained.

In the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the front view left end portion of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. As shown in FIG. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer-frame-side lower hinge member 70 is attached in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the panel member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51 . The curtain plate member 50 has a standing wall portion 54 rising upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the rear side of the main body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, Since the tip of the unauthorized tool abuts against the standing wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, further insertion of the unauthorized tool to the rear side can be prevented. , tampering through the portion of the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side can be prevented.

In addition, since the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 is provided with a return portion 55 extending forward, when an unauthorized tool in contact with the standing wall portion 54 is bent upward, the return portion 55 bends the tip of the unauthorized tool. can be further folded forward, it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and fraudulent actions can be performed through the portion of the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side. can be reliably prevented.

By the way, when the standing wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the game ball is placed on the outer frame side in a state where the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. When dropped onto the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 is not discharged backward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the standing wall portion 54. There is a risk of being caught between On the other hand, in this embodiment, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extension portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50 are provided with a discharge hole 74 and a left discharge hole 52 through which the game ball can pass. , and the right ejection hole 53, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be ejected downward from the ejection hole 74 or the like, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be ejected downward. It is possible to reduce the pinching of the game ball between.

Therefore, if a game ball is caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the periphery of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 may be damaged, or the main body frame 4 may not be closed in a normal state. It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the body frame 4 and fraudulent acts using the gap.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 30. FIG. 19 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. 26 is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view cut along line BB in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a cross-section cut along line CC in FIG. It is a diagram. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into the main members and viewed from the back.

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the door frame 3 has a rectangular frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a door frame base unit 100 attached to the front lower right corner of the door frame base unit 100. a handle unit 300 attached to the door frame base unit 100, a plate unit 320 attached to the front lower portion of the door frame base unit 100, a performance operation unit 400 attached to the center of the plate unit 320, and a door frame base unit above the plate unit 320. A door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100, a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320, and a door frame left side unit 550 and a door frame top unit 570 attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 .

The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is a plate-like door frame base 110 having a through hole 111 penetrating in the front and rear directions, and has a vertically extending rectangular (quadrangular) outer shape when viewed from the front, although the details will be described later. , a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and attached to both upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side when viewed from the front, and attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge rotatable. A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and closing the through hole 111, a security cover 200 covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, The door frame 3 and the body frame 4, which are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to protrude forward through the door frame base 110 and can be opened and closed, and between the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 are locked. a ball feeding unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 for sending game balls to the ball shooting device 680; and a ball shooting device 680 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110. and a foul cover unit 270 for receiving a game ball which is shot by and does not reach the game area 5a and discharges it to the lower tray 322. - 特許庁

The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 rotates the game balls stored in the upper tray 321 according to the rotation angle of the handle 302 when the player rotates the rotatable handle 302, which will be described later in detail. The ball can be hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with a strong force.

The plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, which will be described later in detail, is attached to a portion below the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward. A production operation unit 400 is attached to the front end in the center in the left-right direction. The plate unit 320 includes an upper plate 321 for storing game balls to be hit into the game area 5a, and an upper plate 321 arranged below the upper plate 321 for receiving game balls supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. A lower tray 322 that can be stored, an upper tray ball extraction button 327 for extracting game balls stored in the upper tray 321 to the lower tray 322, and within the range of the balance of cash and prepaid cards thrown into the ball lending machine A ball lending button 328 for lending game balls to the player, a return button 329 for returning the cash or prepaid card after deducting the amount of the game balls lent from the ball lending machine, and the cash put into the ball lending machine. and a ball rental/return display unit 330 that displays the remaining number of prepaid cards, etc.; A lower tray ball ejection button 333 for discharging game balls downward from the tray unit 320 is provided.

The effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front part of the plate unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and can be pressed by the player and presents the effect image to the player. It is possible. Although the details will be described later, the effect operation unit 400 includes a large operation button 410 that can be operated by the player, and a door frame side effect that is arranged in the operation button 410 so as to be visible from the player side and can display the effect image. and a display device 460 .

The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 320 and to the left of the through hole 111 in the through hole 111 ( It decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a). The door frame left side unit 530 includes a left unit decoration lens member (not shown) that can be decorated with light emission.

The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3, which will be described later in detail, is attached to the front right portion on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320, and the through hole 111 ( It decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a). The door frame right side unit 550 protrudes farther forward than the door frame left side unit 530, and includes a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both left and right sides, and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided at the front end. A right unit decorative lens member 561 is provided. The door frame right side unit 550 can decorate the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 with light emission.

The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is mounted above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 and above the through hole 111 in the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100. It decorates the upper part of the frame 3. Although details will be described later, the door frame top unit 570 includes a pair of upper speakers 573 separated left and right, a top middle decorative member 576 projecting forward at the center of the front surface, and left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. A top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 are decorated. The door frame top unit 570 can decorate the top middle decorative member 576, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580 with light emission.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31-33. FIG. 31(a) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and FIG. 31(b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. Fig. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and Fig. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable (hinge rotatable) so that the left side in front view closes the front surface of the body frame 4 . The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 300 at the lower corner of the front surface, a plate unit 320 to which the effect operation unit 400 is attached at the lower front surface of the through hole 111, and a door frame left side unit 530 at the left outer front surface of the through hole 111. A door frame right side unit 550 and a door frame top unit 570 are attached to the right outer front surface of the through hole 111 and the upper outer front surface of the through hole 111, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the door frame base unit 100 is a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a vertically extending rectangular shape when viewed from the front and having a through hole 111 penetrating in the front and rear direction. , a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a frame-like reinforcing unit 130 attached to both upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side when viewed from the front, projecting forward from the door frame base 110 and projecting from the main body frame 4. A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150 rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640; A door frame left side decorative substrate 160 mounted on the left side of the view and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a glass unit 190 rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110 are detachably mounted. and a glass unit mounting member 170 for.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 is mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 110 at the lower right corner in front view, and is mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with a cylindrical handle mounting member 180 for mounting the handle unit 300. A glass unit 190 for closing the through-hole 111, a security cover 200 for covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, and an opening/closing cylinder unit attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and protrude forward. 210, a ball feeding unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110. - 特許庁

Further, although illustration is omitted, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decorative substrates provided in the door frame 3, a ball feed solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a single button operation sensor 312, Ball rental button 328, return button 329, ball rental return display unit 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, pressure detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461) , the upper speaker 573 , etc., and a door body relay board for relaying connection with the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900 in the body frame 4 .

[3-1a. door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame base 110 has a quadrangular (rectangular) shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The door frame base 110 penetrates in the front-rear direction, and has a through-hole 111 formed in a generally rectangular shape extending vertically in the inner peripheral shape when viewed from the front. The through-hole 111 has an upper side and both left and right sides forming the inner circumference thereof, and is close to the outer circumference of the door frame base 110 , and a lower side forming the inner circumference extends vertically from the lower end of the door frame base 110 . It is located at about 1/3 of the height of the direction. Accordingly, the door frame base 110 is formed in a frame shape as a whole with the through holes 111 penetrating therethrough in the front and rear directions. The door frame base 110 is integrally molded of synthetic resin.

The door frame base 110 has a handle mounting seat surface 112 which is formed at the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front and is inclined so that the left end side projects slightly forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 112 and a through hole 111. A cylinder mounting portion 113 to which a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is mounted is recessed from the rear surface toward the front near the right end in front view between the and the cylinder mounting portion 113, and the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 penetrates in the front and rear at the cylinder mounting portion 113. The cylinder insertion hole 114 through which the cylinder lock 211 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 are penetrated in the front-rear direction on the left side of the front view. and a ball feed opening 115 for facing the ball.

In addition, the door frame base 110 penetrates in the front and rear direction at a position on the left side of the center of the door frame base 110 in the left-right direction and at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112, so that the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270 faces forward. A passage opening 116 for a lower tray and a through-ball passage 273 of a foul cover unit 270 are penetrated in the front-rear direction so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the through-opening 111 near the left end of the door frame base 110 in front view. A plate passage opening 117, a glass unit mounting portion 118 recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner circumference of the through opening 111 and into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted, and both upper left and right sides of the door frame base 110. A speaker insertion opening 119 penetrates in the front and rear direction at the corner and through which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. reinforcement unit]
The reinforcement unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 and 33 and the like. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (the door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 extending to the left and right and attached along the upper edge of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 , and a middle reinforcing sheet metal extending to the left and right attached to the lower side of the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 . A sheet metal 132, a vertically extending left reinforcing sheet metal 133 attached along the front view left side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a vertically extending right reinforcement sheet attached along the front view right side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A metal plate 134 and a lock engaging portion 135 that is attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing metal plate 134 and engages the door frame hook 702 of the locking unit 700 .

In the reinforcement unit 130, the left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 by screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 by screws. Fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 which will be described later. Therefore, the reinforcement unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by an upper reinforcement sheet metal 131, a middle reinforcement sheet metal 132, a left reinforcement sheet metal 133, a right reinforcement sheet metal 134, and the like.

The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the lock engaging portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are each formed by appropriately bending a metal plate. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is formed with a notch 132a penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the upper tray passage opening 117 of the door frame base 110 .

Although not shown in detail, the reinforcement unit 130 includes an upper reinforcement sheet metal 131, a middle reinforcement sheet metal 132, a left reinforcement sheet metal 133, and a right reinforcement sheet metal 134, each of which has a portion bent in the front-rear direction. This part not only increases the strength and rigidity, but also prevents unauthorized tools such as piano wires and flathead screwdrivers from entering from the outside.

[3-1c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The door-frame-side upper hinge member 140 includes a door-frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 that is attached to the door-frame base 110 and has a pair of projecting pieces 141a that are separated vertically, and a pair of projections of the door-frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141. A columnar door frame upper hinge pin 142 that passes through the piece 141a and whose upper end is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620, and a pair of projecting pieces 141a on the door frame upper hinge pin 142. A disc-shaped flange member 143 attached at a position between and a hinge pin 142 on the door frame, which is interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower projecting piece 141a of the pair of projecting pieces 141a. and a lock spring 144 that urges the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward.

Although not shown, the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a flat mounting piece connecting the rear ends of the pair of protruding pieces 141a. It is shaped like a letter. The door-frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a mounting piece that connects a pair of protruding pieces 141a and is attached to the rear surface of the door-frame base 110 with screws.

The door frame upper hinge pin 142 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 at a portion (upper end) that protrudes upward from the upper projecting piece 141a. Further, although illustration is omitted, the door frame upper hinge pin 142 has a portion that protrudes downward from the lower projecting piece 141a and is bent in the horizontal direction. This bent portion abuts on the lower surface of the projecting piece 141a on the lower side, thereby restricting upward movement of the door frame upper hinge pin 142. As shown in FIG.

The flange member 143 is an E-ring and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer circumference of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 . The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be inserted, and has its upper end in contact with the flange member 143 and its lower end in contact with the lower projecting piece 141a. The lock spring 144 is interposed in a compressed state between the flange member 143 and the projecting piece 141a on the lower side, and biases the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward via the flange member 143. .

In the door-frame-side upper hinge member 140, the door-frame upper hinge pin 142 is biased upward by a lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door-frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes downward. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of the piece 141a. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes above the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 141a by a predetermined amount.

When an operator holds the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 and pulls the portion downward against the urging force of the lock spring 144, the door frame upper hinge member 140 is attached to the door frame. The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved downward as a whole, and the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be retracted below the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 141a. Therefore, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame upper hinge member 140 can be inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame upper hinge member 620 or removed downward. can be done. As a result, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame upper hinge member 140 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame upper hinge member 620, so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 in the front view is moved. , can be hinge-rotatably supported with respect to the body frame 4 .

Further, the door-frame-side upper hinge member 140 is configured such that a portion of the door-frame-side upper hinge pin 142 supported by a pair of protruding pieces 141a of the door-frame-side hinge shaft bracket 141 is attached to the door frame of the door-frame-side lower hinge member 150, which will be described later. It is supported coaxially with the lower hinge pin 152 . As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 in a favorable state by the door-frame-side upper hinge member 140 and the door-frame-side lower hinge member 150 .

[3-1d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32 and the like. The door-frame-side lower hinge member 150 includes a door-frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 that is attached to the door-frame base 110 and has a flat plate-like extension piece 151a that extends forward, and A columnar door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) projecting downward from the vicinity of the front end of the extending piece 151a.

The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a flat plate-like mounting piece (not shown) extending upward from the rear end of a horizontally extending flat plate-like extension piece 151a. is formed in a substantially L shape. The lower door frame hinge shaft bracket 151 has a mounting piece (not shown) attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with screws.

The lower door frame hinge pin 152 has a truncated cone shape that narrows downward. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into a door frame hinge hole 644 of a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 to be described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is arranged coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 .

The door frame side lower hinge member 150 can rotate the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 . can support

[3-1e. Door frame left side decorative board]
The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32 and the like. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 on the left side of the through hole 111 in front view. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 extends vertically from the height below the speaker insertion opening 119 on the left side of the door frame base 110 in the front view to the height near the center of the through opening 111 in the vertical direction. A frame left side upper decoration substrate 161 and a door frame left side lower decoration extending vertically from the height of the position below the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 161 to substantially the same height as the lower end of the upper tray passage opening 117 a substrate 162;

A door-frame left-side upper decorative board 161 and a door-frame left-side lower decorative board 162 of the door-frame left-side decorative board 160 are each provided with a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a capable of emitting light forward. These LEDs 161a and 162a are full-color LEDs.

The door frame left side decorative board 160 is positioned behind a door frame left side unit 530, which will be described later, with the door frame 3 assembled. By appropriately emitting light, the left unit decoration lens member of the door frame left side unit 530 can be decorated with light emission.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit mounting member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110 and is used to detachably mount the glass unit 190 . The glass unit mounting member 170 has a disk-shaped base portion 171 mounted rotatably about an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a rod-like member protruding from the base portion 171 in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. and a protrusion 172 that

The glass unit mounting members 170 are rotatably mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 below the pair of speaker insertion openings 119 and outside the glass unit mounting portion 118 .

The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the projecting portion 172 projects upward from the base portion 171, so that the projecting portion 172 is outside the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the rear. In this position, the glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 or removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118 .

With the glass unit 190 inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 , the glass unit mounting member 170 rotates so that the projecting portion 172 projects downward from the base portion 171 . The rear side of the mounting piece 191a of the unit 190 is brought into contact with the rear side of the glass unit 190 to restrict the upper portion of the glass unit 190 from moving rearward.

The center of gravity of the glass unit mounting member 170 is positioned within the projecting portion 172 because the protruding portion 172 protrudes from the disc-shaped base portion 171 that is rotatably attached to the door frame base 110 . . Therefore, when the glass unit mounting member 170 is freely rotatable, the projecting portion 172 projects downward from the base portion 171 and is stable. In the glass unit mounting member 170, when the projecting portion 172 is in the rotational position where the projecting portion 172 projects downward from the base portion 171, the rearward movement of the glass unit 190 is restricted by the projecting portion 172. Even if vibration or the like is applied to the member 170, the whole does not rotate so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes upward from the base portion 171, and the rearward movement restriction of the glass unit 190 is not naturally released. do not have.

When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the projecting portion 172 projects upward from the base portion 171, and the projecting portion 172 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass unit 190. By moving the glass unit 190 to the outside, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved rearward, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110 .

[3-1g. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The handle mounting member 180 is for mounting the handle unit 300 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 . 32 and 33, the handle mounting member 180 includes a cylindrical tube portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction, and a rear end of the tube portion 181 extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tube portion 181. An extended annular flange portion 182 and a plurality of ( In this example, three) ridges 183 and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 connecting the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182 and arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181 are provided. .

The handle mounting member 180 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 112 with screws while the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 .

The cylindrical portion 181 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301 a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300 . One of the three protrusions 183 is provided on the upper side inside the tubular portion 181 and the remaining two are provided on the lower side inside the tubular portion 181 . These three ridges 183 are formed on the handle base 301 at positions corresponding to the three grooves 301c. Therefore, in the handle mounting member 180, the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 181 only when the three protrusions 183 and the three groove portions 301c of the handle base 301 are aligned. The rotational position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) with respect to the door frame base 110 can be regulated.

Since the axis of the cylindrical portion 181 extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 182, the handle mounting member 180 can be attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 so that the cylindrical portion The axis 181 is tilted so as to extend forward right, and the handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in a similarly tilted state.

[3-1h. glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The glass unit 190 closes the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be visually recognized from the front. The glass unit 190 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment portion 118 , and a glass frame that closes the inside of the glass frame 191 and has a glass frame on the outer periphery. and two transparent glass plates 192 attached to 191 . The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space therebetween (see FIG. 26, etc.).

The glass frame 191 includes a pair of flat mounting pieces 191a extending outward from positions below the left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band projecting downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. and a plate-shaped locking piece 191b. A mounting piece 191 a of the glass frame 191 can abut against a projecting portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 . The locking piece 191b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

This glass unit 190 is obtained by inserting the locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 from the rear side of the door frame base 110 into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the reinforcing sheet metal 132 in the reinforcing unit 130 from above. , the front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated, and the projecting portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191. It is attached to the door frame base 110 by bringing it into contact with the rear surface of the door frame base 110 .

When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the procedure can be reversed. Thereby, the glass unit 190 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 110 .

[3-1i. Security cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is made of transparent synthetic resin. The crime prevention cover 200 includes a flat plate-shaped body portion 201 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, and a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 202 projecting short rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the body portion 201, and is spaced apart from the left and right. and a pair of locking pieces 203 that protrude forward from the body portion 201 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110 .

The body portion 201 of the crime prevention cover 200 is formed such that its lower end protrudes downward beyond the lower end of the glass unit 190 when attached to the door frame base 110 . Further, the upper end of the body portion 201 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a on the game board 5 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. More specifically, the upper end of the body portion 201 is shaped along a portion of an inner rail 1002, an out guide portion 1003, a portion of a lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005 of a front component 1000, which will be described later. It is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled to the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

The rear projecting piece 202 is formed along substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 201 . Therefore, the security cover 200 is formed into a shallow box-like shape that is opened rearward by the body portion 201 and the rear projecting piece 202, and has high strength and rigidity. 33, the rear projecting piece 202 also projects rearward from a part of the rear surface of the body portion 201 that is different from the outer peripheral edge of the body portion 201. As shown in FIG. A rear projecting piece 202 protruding rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body part 201 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front structural member 1000 of the game board 5 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. ing.

Note that the rear projecting piece 202 is not formed at a portion positioned between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1 . As a result, the game ball passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the game ball shot by the ball shooting device 680) does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200, and is within the game area 5a. It does not interfere with hitting the game ball into.

A pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110 . Thereby, the security cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110 .

When the security cover 200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 201 abuts the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191), and the part protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 is The removed rear projecting piece 202 is inserted into the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000, which will be described later. In addition, the security cover 200 is in a state in which the rear protrusion 202 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front structural member 1000 so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the front structural member 1000. . As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state by the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security concave portion 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire attempts to enter the game area 5a through between the crime prevention cover 200 and the front component member 1000 from the lower front of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 202 and the crime prevention concave portion 1008. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

[3-1j. Open/close cylinder unit]
The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to the cylinder attachment portion 113 located between the through hole 111 and the handle attachment seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 in front view, and cooperates with the locking unit 700 described later. It is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4.

The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 includes a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 having a keyhole 211a on the front surface and extending back and forth, and a locking unit attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 to rotate a key inserted into the keyhole 211a. A rotation transmission member 212 that transmits rotation to the key cylinder 710 of 700, and a cylinder mounting plate 213 that mounts the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcement unit 130).

The cylinder lock 211 can be rotated by inserting a corresponding key (not shown) into the keyhole 211a. can also be rotated by a predetermined angle in the direction of .

The rotation transmission member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear end, and is arranged at opposite positions across the central axis from the rear end toward the front. It has a pair of cutouts 212a that are cut out in the same direction. The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed so that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the body frame 4 can be inserted from behind, and projections of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 are inserted into the pair of notches 212a. Thus, the rotation of the rotation transmission member 212 (the key inserted into the keyhole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the lock unit 700 to rotate the key cylinder 710.

The cylinder mounting metal plate 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and has a convex shape that protrudes forward when viewed from above. More specifically, the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 includes a rectangular flat front plate portion 213a extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of flat plate-like side plate portions 213b extending rearward from both left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a. and a pair of mounting plate portions 213c extending in a flat plate shape from the respective rear sides of the pair of side plate portions 213b in directions away from each other. The cylinder lock 211 penetrates the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 from the rear at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. Of the pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213, the mounting plate portion 213c on the left side in front view is attached to the right end portion of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130, and the mounting plate portion 213c on the right side in front view is attached to the reinforcing unit 130. It is attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 . As a result, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 of the reinforcing unit 130 are connected by the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 .

When the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100 , the front end of the cylinder lock 211 projecting forward from the front plate portion 213 a of the cylinder mounting plate 213 extends from the rear side of the door frame base 110 into the cylinder insertion hole. 114 and protrudes forward from the door frame base 110. A front plate portion 213a and a pair of side plate portions 213b of a cylinder mounting metal plate 213 are accommodated in a box-shaped cylinder mounting portion 113 that is open rearward. ing.

[3-4. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 to 41 and the like. FIG. 34(a) is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the effect operation unit. Also, FIG. 35(a) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 35(b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the back. FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. 37 is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 34(a), and FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 34(b). FIG. 39(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 34(b), and (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). 40 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled into the main members and seen from the back. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front part of the dish unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and can be pressed by the player and can present the effect image to the player. is.

The production operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape, and the center side except for the outer peripheral edge is formed transparent, and the operation button 410 that the player can press and operate, and the production operation unit of the plate unit cover 326 surrounding the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the attachment portion 326a, a decoration board unit 420 arranged behind the operation button 410 and capable of decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415 with light emission, and a frame. A base unit 430 attached to the rear side of the unit 415 and having an operation button 410 and a decoration board unit 420 attached to the front side, and a base unit 430 attached to the base unit 430 so as to be visible from the player side through the operation button 410 and effecting A door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image is provided.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. FIG. 42(a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the front, and FIG. 42(b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the rear. The operation button 410 has a circular outer shape with a diameter slightly smaller than the height of the plate unit 320 in the vertical direction, and the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge is formed transparent. The operation button 410 has a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface (a shape of a part of a spherical surface) so that the outer circumference is circular and the center side bulges forward. It has an annular button frame 412 attached thereto, and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 . The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are made of a member that does not easily transmit light.

The button lens 411 is formed with a substantially constant thickness as a whole. Further, the button lens 411 is formed to have a smooth curved surface without unevenness on the front side. The button lens 411 extends for a predetermined length toward the center (inner side) in a recessed state with a W-shaped cross section from the rear surface of the button frame 412 and is arranged in rows in the circumferential direction. A first button decorative portion 411a extends on an axis toward the center in a recessed state with an arcuate cross section from the back surface at a position on the outer peripheral side of the first button decorative portion 411a, and is arranged in a circumferential direction within a predetermined angular range. and a plurality (six) of second button decoration portions 411b provided.

As shown in the drawing, the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends toward the center from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 when assembled to the operation button 410. It extends longer toward the center than

The plurality of second button decorative portions 411b of the button lens 411 each extend in an arc shape on the same circumference, and are formed three each on the left and right sides. These second button decorative portions 411b are formed to face from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412, and protrude forward such that the front side thereof is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412. As shown in FIG.

The button lens 411 exerts a lens effect of refracting light due to unevennesses having a W-shaped cross section or an arc-shaped cross section formed on the back surface of the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button decorative portion 411b. Therefore, the rear side cannot be seen clearly.

The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and has a plurality (six) of frame openings 412a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the circumferential direction in an arc shape with a predetermined length. The six frame openings 412 a are provided three each on the left and right sides, corresponding to the six second button decorations 411 b of the button lens 411 . This button frame 412 has a plated layer with metallic luster on its surface.

The button base 413 includes a substantially cylindrical main body portion 413a that extends short in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 413b that protrudes outward from the front end of the main body portion 413a, and an annular flange portion 413b that protrudes outward from the front end of the main body portion 413a. A plurality of (four) guide boss portions 413c projecting rearward along the outer periphery of the main body portion 413a at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and from the rear side of the flange portion 413b along the outer periphery of the main body portion 413a. A plurality (three) of detection pieces 413d protruding rearward in the form of a band plate and arranged in the circumferential direction, and a detection piece 413d extending forward and backward through the flange portion 413b on the outer side of the main body portion 413a and along the outer circumference for a predetermined length. A plurality (six) of base openings 413e are formed in the circumferential direction, and a base opening 413e extends forward from the front end of the main body 413a. and an inner extending portion 413f that narrows toward (center side).

The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 and the front surface of the flange portion 413b. The four guide boss portions 413c are respectively arranged at portions corresponding to the four upper, lower, left, and right corners with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a. These four guide boss portions 413c are slidably inserted into holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, respectively. 413 d of three detection pieces are arrange|positioned at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction so that two may be distribute|arranged to the upper side and one to the lower side with respect to the circumferential direction of the main-body part 413a. These three detection pieces 413d are detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430 when the operation button 410 is pressed.

The six base openings 413e are provided three each on the left and right sides, corresponding to the second button decorative portion 411b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. As shown in FIG. At the base opening 413e of the button base 413, part of the main body 413a and the inner extension 413f are recessed inward from the outer circumference. The inner diameter of the inwardly tapering front end of the inner extending portion 413 f substantially matches the inner diameter of the button frame 412 .

The front surface of the operation button 410 bulges forward in a curved surface shape (the shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface), and is formed transparently. can be viewed from the front. The operation button 410 has four guide bosses 413c slidably inserted into holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, and an operation button spring 438 inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431. is urged forward by The front side of the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 abuts against the frame unit 415 due to the biasing force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430 . By pressing against the , it moves rearward until the rear end abuts the front surface of the base unit 430 . When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413 d is detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430 . Detection of the detection piece 413d by the press detection sensor 440 means that the operation button 410 has been operated.

In addition, the operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference so as to extend from the inner peripheral end of the button frame 412 in the transparent button lens 411 to the center side in a state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled. The portion 411a makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the operation button internal decoration member 432 of the base unit 430 .

Further, the operation button 410 has a button lens 411 and a button frame 412 that close the front end opening of a cylindrical button base 413 . A transparent portion that allows the rear to be visually recognized is formed so as to narrow from the outer periphery to the inner side with respect to the outer diameter of 410 . The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the operation button inner decorative member 432 of the base unit 430 .

In addition, when the operation button 410 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400 , the rear end of the cylindrical button base 413 (main body portion 413 a ) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decoration board unit 420 and extends from the front surface of the decoration board unit 420 . It will protrude backwards. As a result, the lights emitted forward from the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b mounted on the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 of the decoration board unit 420 are emitted from the button. It is possible to prevent leakage from the outside of the base 413 to the inside, and the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433, the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434, the operation button top interior decoration substrate 435, and the operation button bottom interior of the base unit 430 can be prevented. It is possible to prevent light emitted forward from the LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate 436 from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413 . Therefore, the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b of the decoration board unit 420, the operation button left inner decoration board 433 of the base unit 430, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button It is possible to prevent the LEDs mounted on the lower interior decoration board 436 from illuminating the parts other than the part to be luminous decoration, and the luminous decoration can be performed with good appearance.

[3-4b. frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery of the operation button 410 from the front side, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 is formed in a shape that matches the front end side of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a.

The frame unit 415 includes a frame-shaped frame main body 416 attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 and having a circular central opening 416a, and frame main bodies 416 on both left and right sides of the central opening 416a. a pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached from the rear side to the frame, and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached from the front side to the frame body 416 above the central opening 416a. there is

The frame main body 416 has a circular central opening 416a that is smaller in diameter than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. A plurality (six) of outer peripheral openings 416b extending in an arc along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a and arranged in rows in the circumferential direction, and a notch 416c having a predetermined width in the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. , is equipped with The central opening 416 a is formed to have substantially the same diameter as the outer peripheral side of the frame opening 412 a of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410 . As a result, the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 can come into contact with the outer peripheral rear side of the frame opening portion 412a.

The six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided three each on both left and right sides of the central opening 416a, and are closed by frame side lenses 417 from the rear side. The cutout portion 416c also penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

The frame main body 416 also has a substantially tubular inner tubular portion 416d extending rearward from a position slightly outside the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a. The inner cylindrical portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening portion 416a and the outer peripheral opening portion 416b, and has a cutout portion corresponding to the cutout portion 416c. In the state where the production operation unit 400 is assembled, the inner cylindrical portion 416d is arranged so that the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 of the decoration board unit 420 are respectively arranged. and partitions between the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b (see FIG. 38).

Further, the frame body 416 has a pair of mounting portions 416e that extend outward from the upper left and right sides of the outer periphery, respectively, and are mounted to the effect operation unit mounting portions 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. As shown in FIG. The frame main body 416 (effect operation unit 400) is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 at the left and right portions of the pair of attachment portions 416e and the notch portion 416c.

The frame main body 416 has a metal cover on substantially the entire surface except for a portion having the same width as the cutout 416c on the side opposite to the cutout 416c side (the side where the frame top lens 418 is attached) across the central opening 416a. A glossy plated layer is formed.

The frame side lenses 417 close outer peripheral openings 416b formed on the left and right sides of the frame main body 416 three each, from the rear side. The frame side lens 417 has a smooth surface without unevenness on the front side, and a plurality of unevenness along the periphery of the central opening 416a on the rear side (see FIGS. 39 and 46). Light is refracted by these multiple unevennesses, so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 cannot be seen.

The frame top lens 418 has a substantially rectangular outer shape so as to be fitted into the cutout portion 416c of the frame main body 416 from the front side. The frame top lens 418 has a smooth front surface. In addition, the frame top lens 418 has a plurality of concave and convex portions extending in a zigzag pattern along the periphery of the central opening 416a on the rear surface side and arranged in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 37 and 46). reference). The rear side of the frame top lens 418 cannot be seen because light is refracted by these unevennesses.

In the frame unit 415, in a state in which the production operation unit 400 is assembled, the pair of frame side lenses 417 are connected to the second LEDs 422b and 423b of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 of the decoration board unit 420, respectively. , and the frame top lens 418 is positioned in front of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 of the base unit 430, and the second LEDs 422b, 423b, etc. mounted thereon can be decorated with light. .

[3-4c. Decoration board unit]
The decoration board unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 43 and the like. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the decoration board unit of the effect operation unit, viewed from the front. The decoration board unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can decorate the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 with light emission. Vibration can be applied to the operation unit 400 .

The decoration board unit 420 includes a C-shaped board base 421 whose upper side is open, and an operation button left external decoration board 422 and an operation button right external decoration board 423 attached to the left and right front surfaces of the board base 421, respectively. , and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424 .

The board base 421 has an inner circumference that is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and an outer diameter that is larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413. Moreover, it is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415 .

The operation button left external decoration board 422 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the board base 421 . The operation button left external decoration board 422 has a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted along the inner periphery of the board base 421 on the front side, and a plurality of first LEDs 422a on the inner periphery of the board base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 422a. and a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along. The operation button right external decoration board 423 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the board base 421 . The operation button right outer decoration board 423 has a plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted along the inner periphery of the board base 421 on the front side, and a plurality of first LEDs 423a on the inner periphery of the board base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 423a. and a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along. Both front and rear surfaces of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 are white.

The vibration motor 424 has an eccentric weight 424a attached to the rotating shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a.

When the decoration board unit 420 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400 , the rear end side of the cylindrical main body part 413 a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the board base 421 . Further, in the decoration board unit 420, the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 are positioned behind the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410, respectively. The second LEDs 422b, 423b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. As shown in FIG. In addition, in the state assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the frame The inner tubular portion 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 38).

Therefore, the decoration board unit 420 illuminates only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 with light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423, respectively. At the same time, only the frame side lenses 417 of the frame unit 415 can be illuminated with light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b.

Further, the decoration board unit 420 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424, and can vibrate the entire presentation operation unit 400. FIG.

[3-4f. Effects of production operation unit]
Operations and effects of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46 and the like. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the operation button is pressed in the sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. 37. FIG. FIG. 45(a) is a view of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and a part of the operation button is cut away to be hidden by the first button decorative portion of the operation button, the button frame, or the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows a site|part, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site|part which is going to be hidden by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of the production|presentation operation unit. FIG. 46(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the production operation unit as a perspective view seen from the front, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the production operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. is.

The effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment can show the effect image to the player according to the game state that changes when the game ball is hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the player can operate the effect operation unit 400. The player can be entertained by participating in the performance presented to the player by operating the button 410.例文帳に追加

The performance operation unit 400 is formed to have a total height substantially equal to the height of the portion below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 . Further, the performance operation unit 400 is formed to have a full width slightly larger than 1/3 of the full width of the door frame 3. - 特許庁The effect operation unit 400 is arranged at the center in the left-right direction under the game area 5a (the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110) when viewed from the front.

The effect operation unit 400 has the upper part of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326 a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 . When the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the plate unit 320, a gap is formed between the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 serving as the bottom surface and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. is formed. That is, the effect operation unit 400 is attached only to the upper portion of the plate unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

In addition, in the effect operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. installed as. As a result, in the effect operation unit 400, the central axis line CL of the transparent operation button 410 that protrudes forward in a curved surface shape (the shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line. It is inclined so that it moves upward as it goes forward. Thus, when the player sits down in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the player's head is placed above the plate unit 320 (the performance operation unit 400). Since it is positioned in front of the center of the game area 5a on the game board 5, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes through the vicinity of the player's head. Therefore, when the player looks down from the game area 5a to the effect operation unit 400 (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to the front view (projection view from the direction parallel to the central axis CL). Therefore, the operation button 410, the door frame side effect display device 460 inside the operation button 410, and the like can be visually recognized in good condition.

The effect operation unit 400 has four guide bosses 413c of the operation button 410 slidably inserted into four holding holes 431b of the base unit 430, and is biased forward by an operation button spring 438. As shown in FIG. In a normal state (a state in which the operation button 410 is not pressed), the operation button spring 438 pushes the front end of the flange portion 413 b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 toward the frame unit 415 . It abuts on the rear surface of the frame body 416 near the central opening 416a.

In the normal state, the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 from the vicinity of the inner periphery of the button frame 412 (center axis line CL side). there is In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that protrudes forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface), a portion protruding forward from the inner circumference (inside) of the button frame 412 is , protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 (see FIG. 37, etc.).

Incidentally, in this embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415 is set to about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end thereof) is located in the frame unit with respect to the direction of the central axis CL of the operation button 410. It protrudes about 4 cm forward from the front of 415.

In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 , the operation button 410 moves backward along the center axis CL against the biasing force of the operation button spring 438 . When the rear end of the operation button 410 contacts the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is restricted and the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the player presses the button lens 411, which bulges forward in a curved surface shape (shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface).

Since the operation button 410 has a very large outer diameter compared to the performance operation button provided in the conventional pachinko machine, the vicinity of the peripheral edge away from the central portion of the button lens 411 is pressed. likely to be To be more specific, the operation buttons for presentation in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that their central axes extend substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation buttons 410 of the presentation operation unit 400 of the present embodiment are attached. is installed with the central axis CL inclined with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above as in the conventional pachinko machine, as indicated by the white arrow in FIG. A portion of the operation button 410 away from the center axis CL is pressed.

By the way, since the operation buttons for performance in the conventional pachinko machine are formed on a flat surface to be pressed by the player, if the operation buttons are enlarged while the portions to be pressed are flat surfaces, When a part of the operation button deviated from the center is pressed, the surface to be pressed is tilted so that the pressed part retreats first, and the operation button cannot be retracted straight. There is a possibility that the pressing operation becomes impossible.

On the other hand, in the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the portion (button lens 411) pressed by the player has a curved surface shape (partial shape of a substantially spherical surface) that bulges forward. Therefore, when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed over the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight backward. can be done. Therefore, even if any position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without being tilted. You can fully enjoy the performance to operate.

In addition, the effect operation unit 400 has the vibration motor 424 attached to the lower front surface of the board base 421 of the decoration board unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part is plated so that the effect operation unit 400 can be suspended. Since it is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the unit cover 326, when the weight 424a is rotated by the vibration motor 424 to generate vibration, the vibration is generated at the part farthest from the attachment part. , the entire effect operation unit 400 can be greatly (strongly) vibrated, and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is touching the effect operation unit 400. - 特許庁In addition, since the vibration motor 424 is arranged directly below the position (the position of the white arrow in FIG. 44) that is relatively easy for the player to press, the player pressing the operation button 410 It is possible to transmit strong vibrations to the player, and the player can be surprised and entertained with the performance.

Furthermore, the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the plate unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the lower surface and the bottom plate of the plate unit cover 326 form the lower surface. Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed downward or struck, the frame is not held until the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i. The mounting portion 416e of the unit 415, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326, and the like bend downward, thereby absorbing the impact. Further, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the effect operation unit 400 is restricted, and the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the plate unit cover 326 are attached to the effect operation unit. It is possible to avoid applying an excessive force to the portion 326a and the like, and to prevent damage to the effect operation unit 400 and the like. Therefore, when the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 is pressed and an effect is presented to the player, even if the operation button 410 is pressed or hit with a strong force, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit is not pressed. Since the 400 and the like are not damaged, it is possible to avoid the interruption of the game due to the damage, suppress the decline in the interest of the player, and reduce the increase in the burden on the game hall side by making it difficult to damage. can be suppressed.

As described above, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 to be pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) protruding forward, so that the button lens 411 is formed in a flat plate shape. The strength and rigidity of the button lens 411 are higher than those of the conventional case, and even if the button lens 411 is hit strongly, the impact can be dispersed over the entire button lens 411, making it difficult to break.

46, the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, the frame top lens 418, and the operation button inner decorative member 432 are made of transparent members. The decoration by unevenness such as the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the first button interior decoration portion 432f, and the second button interior decoration portion 432g formed on the back side is located on the front side (player side). ). In addition, since the plate thickness changes in the parts where these uneven decorations are formed, the light is refracted in a complicated way, so it is difficult to see the rear side through the parts where the uneven decorations are formed. .

Since the effect operation unit 400 includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 toward the center, the first button decoration portion 411a is decorated with unevenness. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to see the rear at the outer peripheral portion of the portion inside the button lens 411 . Behind the portion where the first button decorative portion 411a is formed (rear in the direction of the center axis CL), there are the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall portion of the inner decorative member 432 of the operation button. 432a, and the first button decorative portion 411a located in front of the gap is positioned from the front side (player side) to close the gap on the outer circumference of the operation button inner decorative member 432. can be made invisible. As a result, even if the operating button interior decoration member 432 whose position is fixed is provided inside the operating button 410 that can be pressed, it is possible to prevent the operating button 410 from deteriorating in appearance. It is possible to prevent the player from having an unpleasant feeling, and it is possible to arrange the operation button internal decoration member 432 in the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, and to improve the appearance of the operation button 410.例文帳に追加

More specifically, the effect operation unit 400 is configured such that the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 are arranged so that the outer circumference of the operation button interior decoration member 432 of the base unit 430 is adjusted. The unit base 431, the decoration board unit 420, and the like on the rear side (back side) of the outer side are formed so as not to be seen from the player side through the transparent button lens 411.例文帳に追加Specifically, in FIG. 45, the cross-hatched portion surrounded by the dashed-dotted line is made invisible to the player. In this way, since the operation button 410 is provided with the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outer side and the inner side of the operation button interior decoration member 432 are difficult to see and hidden. It is possible to improve the appearance of the operation button 410 and, in turn, the effect operation unit 400 as a whole.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in rows in the circumferential direction. A second button interior decoration portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button interior decoration member 432 arranged inside and behind the operation button 410 extends in a modified octagonal shape around the center axis CL. As shown in FIG. 46, the concave-convex line of the first button decoration portion 411a and the concave-convex line of the second button inner decoration portion 432g intersect with each other. The decoration can be shown to the player.

In addition, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g are separated from each other in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the central axis CL extends). With the second button inner decoration part 432g, a deep and three-dimensional geometric pattern can be shown to the player, and the decoration including the inside of the operation button 410 can be enjoyed.

Furthermore, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second inner button decoration portion 432g are separated in the front-rear direction. Since the degree of overlap between the line and the concave-convex line of the second button interior decoration portion 432g changes, the player can see the decoration with movement, and the player can be entertained.

In this way, the effect operation unit 400 provides a moving and three-dimensional decoration to the player by using the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button interior decoration portion 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432. Since it can be shown, the pachinko machine 1 can strongly attract the player's interest and have a high appeal.

In addition, in the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412), behind the operation button inner decorative member 432, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button An upper interior decoration board 435 and an operation button lower interior decoration board 436 are arranged, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surfaces thereof emit light, thereby causing the operation button interior decoration member 432 in the operation button 410 to emit light. can be decorated. That is, the inside of the operation button 410 can be illuminated by the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433 , the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434 , the operation button upper interior decoration substrate 435 , and the operation button lower interior decoration substrate 436 . As shown in FIG. 38, the LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433, the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper interior decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower interior decoration substrate 436 are as follows. As viewed from the direction in which the central axis CL extends, the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is arranged inside the cylindrical main body portion 413a, so that the light from them does not leak to the outside of the main body portion 413a. , only the inside of the operation button 410 can be favorably illuminated.

In addition, the effect operation unit 400 is arranged behind the second button decoration portion 411b facing from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 positioned near the outer periphery of the operation button 410, and the operation button left external decoration substrate 422 in the decoration substrate unit 420 is positioned behind the second button decoration portion 411b. A first LED 422a and a first LED 423a of the operation button right external decoration board 423 are arranged, and by lighting these first LEDs 422a and 423a, the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are decorated with light emission. can be done. As shown in FIG. 38, the first LED 422a of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right external decoration board 423 are formed by the cylindrical body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the frame unit. 415 and the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame main body 416, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outer side of the inner cylindrical portion 416d. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be favorably illuminated.

Furthermore, the effect operation unit 400 is arranged behind the frame side lens 417 facing from the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415, the second LED 422b of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board A second LED 423b of 423 is arranged, and the frame side lens 417 can be decorated with light emission by causing the second LEDs 422b and 423b to emit light. The second LED 422b of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right external decoration board 423 are located between the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416. The light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame body 416, and only the frame side lenses 417 of the frame unit 415 can be decorated with good light. .

In addition, the production operation unit 400 has a frame top lens decoration substrate 437 in the base unit 430 arranged behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and a plurality of lenses mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437. , the frame top lens 418 can be decorated with light emission. A plate-shaped light shielding wall portion 431c protrudes forward from the lower side of the portion of the base unit 430 to which the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 of the unit base 431 is attached to near the rear end of the lower end of the frame top lens 418. Light from the LED of the top lens decoration substrate 437 does not leak to the side of the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be favorably illuminated.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. FIG. Fig. 47 (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. 1 is a perspective view seen from . FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the door-frame left-side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the door-frame left-side unit viewed from the back. FIG. 50 is a sectional view taken along line LL in FIG. 47(a). The door frame left side unit 530 is arranged above the tray unit 320 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162 (door frame left side decorative board 160). It is attached to the front left part on the left side of the through hole 111 in 100 . The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front.

The door frame left side unit 530 includes a vertically extending strip-shaped left unit base 531 attached to the left side of the through hole 111 in the front view of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and the left unit base 531. A transparent strip-shaped left unit diffuser lens member 532 attached to the front surface, and a translucent property arranged in front of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 and having a polyhedral decoration at the front end. A left unit decorative lens member (not shown), and a left unit top that is attached to the upper front surface of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member, protrudes forward in a cylindrical frame shape, and extends vertically. a decoration base 534, a left unit lower decoration base 535 attached to the front lower portion of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decoration lens member and protruding forward in a frame shape shorter than the left unit upper decoration base 534; A transparent left unit decorative cover 536 attached to the front side of the left unit base 531 so as to cover the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front sides of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the left unit lower decorative base 535, and the left unit. and a plurality of decorative members 537 attached to the front side of the decorative cover 536 .

A left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open rear side, and has a plurality of openings 531a penetrating in the front and rear directions. As illustrated, the plurality of openings 531a include circular holes and vertically extending rectangular holes. The left unit base 531 has LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 160 (door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and door frame left side lower decorative board 162). It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face forward. The openings 531a of the left unit base 531 are formed so that the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are positioned substantially at the center in the vertical direction when the door frame 3 is assembled. The left unit base 531 is made of an opaque member.

Further, the left unit base 531 has a left reflecting vertical wall portion 538 (see FIGS. 5 and 23) erected toward the front side from the glass plate 192 disposed so as to close the through hole 111. As shown in FIG. ing. In the left reflecting vertical wall portion 538, the inner surface which has a flat planar shape and is provided so as to face the through hole 111 is provided as a reflecting surface capable of reflecting light. This reflective surface can be provided not only by forming the inner surface itself of the left reflecting vertical wall portion 538 from a reflective material such as metal or resin, but also by attaching a reflective seal to the inner surface. It is possible. As will be described later, the left reflecting vertical wall portion 538 is formed by the left unit base 531 and serves as a portion (left portion) of the reflecting vertical wall portion 33 described above.

The left unit diffuser lens member 532 is made of a transparent member and is vertically divided into an upper diffuser lens member 532A and a lower diffuser lens member 532B. The left unit diffuser lens member 532 includes a circular lens portion 532a that is circular in front view and corresponds to the circular opening 531a in the left unit base 531, and a rectangular lens portion that is square in front view and corresponds to the square opening 531a. and a lens portion 532b. When the door frame left side unit 530 is assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are positioned immediately after the center of the circular lens portion 532a and square lens portion 532b. formed.

A circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 is formed in a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. With this circular lens portion 532a, the light from the LEDs 161a and 162a arranged in the rear can be emitted forward in the form of dots. The circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member can be decorated with light emission by the light emitted forward from the circular lens portion 532a.

The square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 includes a central diffuse reflection portion 532c recessed rearward in a conical shape at the center of the front surface, and a front diffusion lens portion 532d formed outside the central diffuse reflection portion 532c on the front surface. , an input lens portion 532e that bulges rearward in a curved surface shape at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffuse reflection portion 532c), and an input lens portion 532e on the rear surface that extends forward as it moves away from the input lens portion 532e. and a forward reflecting portion 532f that is slanted for movement.

The front diffuser lens portion 532d of the square lens portion 532b is formed of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially from the central diffuse reflection portion 532c. More specifically, the front diffuser lens portion 532d has grooves recessed rearward in an arc shape in a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and a mountain portion between the grooves extends forward. It bulges in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wave shape. In addition, the front diffusion lens portion 532d is formed so that the groove portions and the peak portions are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with respect to the radially extending line that divides it in the circumferential direction.

The front reflecting portion 532f of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially from the input lens portion 532e. These plurality of grooves are recessed in a V shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest portions are formed in an arc shape. The front reflecting portion 532f has a triangular cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, with peaks between grooves sharpening rearward, and is formed in a serrated shape. The front reflecting portion 532f is formed such that the grooves and peaks move forward as the distance from the center increases. In addition, the front reflecting portion 532f is formed so that groove portions and mountain portions are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with respect to the radially extending line dividing the portion in the circumferential direction. The radially extending line that divides in the circumferential direction coincides with the radially extending dividing line in the front diffuser lens portion 532d.

When the rectangular lens portion 532b is assembled to the door frame 3, the corresponding LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are positioned immediately after the input lens portion 532e.

Light emitted forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is input into the square lens portion 532b from the input lens portion 532e. Since the input lens portion 532e bulges rearward into a curved surface (convex lens shape), it refracts the light that spreads forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a so that it travels forward in parallel. Almost all of the light can be guided to the conical central diffuse reflection portion 532c. The light guided to the central diffuse reflection portion 532c is directed perpendicularly to the longitudinally extending axis (parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160) by the inclined conical surface of the central diffuse reflection portion 532c. direction), and travels outward along the front surface of the square lens portion 532b from the center side. Further, the light reflected by the central diffuse reflection portion 532c travels from the central side to the outside (direction away from the center line of the central diffuse reflection portion 532c) over the entire thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction.

When the light reflected outward from the central side in the rectangular lens portion 532b substantially parallel to the front surface of the left side decorative substrate 160 of the door frame reaches the saw-shaped forward reflecting portion 532f, it is reflected forward by the surface of the forward reflecting portion 532f. reflect to the side. At this time, since the rear surface of the front reflecting portion 532f is inclined so as to move forward as it moves away from the central diffuse reflecting portion 532c, the thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction becomes thinner as it moves away from the center. (see Figure 50). As a result, light that is reflected outward over the entire thickness of the square lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction by the central diffuse reflection portion 532c is sequentially forwardly reflected by the front reflection portion 532f as it goes outward from the center side. can be reflected.

The light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 532f passes through the front diffusion lens portion 532d and is emitted forward from the rectangular lens portion 532b. At this time, since the front diffusion lens portion 532d has a wavy cross section, the light reflected forward by the front reflection portion 532f can be diffused in various directions. light can be emitted substantially uniformly forward (the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) from the front surface of the .

In the front diffusion lens portion 532d and the front reflection portion 532f, the square lens portion 532b is formed by dividing a plurality of concentric grooves by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then forming a plurality of concentric arc grooves with the dividing lines as boundaries. are shifted in the radial direction, and the concentric arc-shaped grooves are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that the light emitted forward from the front surface of the rectangular lens portion 532b has a concentric striped pattern of light and shade. It is possible to prevent the light from becoming light, and it is possible to irradiate the light forward with more uniform light and shade. As a result, the multifaceted decorative portion in front of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the left unit decorative lens member can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission.

A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536 . The left unit decorative lens member includes a circular decorative portion formed in a portion positioned in front of the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 and a portion positioned in front of the square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532. and a multifaceted decorative part formed on the part. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer circumference of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and which extends short in the front-rear direction. The polyhedral decorative part has a plurality of square pyramid-shaped parts arranged in a vertical direction on the front surface of a rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a polyhedron consisting of a plurality of triangles arranged in a vertical direction on both sides of the rectangular parallelepiped part. It is shaped like this. The circular decorative portion and the multifaceted decorative portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative portion 561a and the multifaceted decorative portion 561b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 of the door frame right side unit 550, respectively.

The left unit decorative lens member can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536 . Also, the left unit decorative lens member has a circular decorative portion that is projected forward from the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532, and the multifaceted decorative portion is projected forward from the rectangular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532. By the light irradiated to each of them, they are decorated with light emission.

The left unit upper decorative base 534 has a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and is formed in the shape of a rectangular tube extending back and forth. The left unit upper decorative base 534 has a portion forming a lower surface on the outer periphery, which is inclined so as to protrude downward from the front end side to the rear end side, and the lower portion of the portion penetrates in the front-rear direction. The left unit upper decoration base 534 is made of an opaque member.

The left unit lower decorative base 535 is formed in a U shape that opens upward when viewed from the front. The left unit lower decorative base 535 is inclined from the approximate center in the vertical direction at the front end to the rear end so that the upper side moves rearward as it goes upward. The left unit lower decoration base 535 is formed of an opaque member.

The left unit decorative cover 536 extends vertically over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530 . The left unit decorative cover 536 has a vertically intermediate portion that is bent rearward. A V-shaped part whose upper part is bent backward along the front end of the unit lower decorative base 535 connects the lower end of the upper V-shaped part and the upper end of the lower V-shaped part. It is composed of a linear part and a.

The left unit decorative cover 536 is attached at both upper and lower ends to the front surface of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the front surface of the left unit lower decorative base 535, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 536 is made of a transparent member, and the left unit decorative lens member arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

The decorative members 537 extend short in the vertical direction and are attached to the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 537 is made of an opaque member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 51 to 55 and the like. Fig. 51(a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame right side unit. 1 is a perspective view seen from . 52 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 54 is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 51(a). FIG. 55(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 51(a), and FIG. 55(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 51(a). The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320 .

The door frame right side unit 550 includes a vertically extending box-shaped right unit base 551 attached to the right side of the through hole 111 in the front view of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface of the right unit base 551. and a door frame right side decorative board 552 attached to the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 552, which is mounted on the front side of the right unit base 551 on the left side of the front view center and extends in the vertical direction and the front and back direction. A transparent plate-like right unit left diffusion lens member 553, a sheet-like right unit left decoration member 554 attached to the left side surface of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and decorated, and a right unit left decoration member. and a transparent plate-like right unit left cover 555 attached to the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of 554 .

In addition, the door frame right side unit 550 is located on the front side of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 and on the right side of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 in front view, and on the front side of the right unit base 551 on the right side of the center in front view and the right unit left diffusion lens. A transparent plate-shaped right unit right diffusion lens member 556 that is attached to the member 553 and extends in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, and is attached to the right side surface of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 and is decorated. and a right unit right cover 558 in the form of a transparent plate attached to the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decorative member 557. there is

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is arranged between the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556, and is open on the front and right sides. A box-shaped opaque right unit left light shielding member 559 and an opaque right light shielding member 559 attached to the left side of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 so as to close the open right side of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and a right unit right light shielding member 560 having a flat plate shape.

The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556, and has a translucent right diffuser having a polyhedral decoration on the front end. It is mounted on the front surface of the right unit base 551 so as to cover the unit decorative lens member 561 , the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561 , the front end sides of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 . A frame-shaped right unit decoration base 562 penetrating in the front and rear direction, a transparent right unit cover 563 attached to the front side of the right unit decoration base 562 so as to close the front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562, and a right unit cover. and a plurality of decorative members 564 attached to the front side of 563 . Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached so as to vertically penetrate the right unit base 551, and is connected to the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570. A connection cable for connecting with the top unit relay board 589 is provided.

The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 has a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. It is The right unit base 551 is made of an opaque member.

In addition, the right unit base 551 has a right reflecting vertical wall portion 568 (see FIGS. 6 and 24) erected toward the front from the glass plate 192 disposed so as to close the through hole 111. ing. In the right reflecting vertical wall portion 568, the inner surface which has a flat planar shape and is provided so as to face the through hole 111 is provided as a reflecting surface capable of reflecting light. As with the inner surface of the left reflective vertical wall portion 538, the inner surface of the right reflective vertical wall portion 568 itself is made of a reflective material such as metal or resin. It is also possible to provide such as by attaching a seal for use. As will be described later, the right reflecting vertical wall portion 568 is formed by the right unit base 551 and serves as a portion (right portion) of the reflecting vertical wall portion 33 described above.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. The door frame right side decorative board 552 includes a plurality of left LEDs 552a mounted on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, a right LED 552b mounted on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, and a left LED 552b mounted on the center of the front surface in the left-right direction. and a plurality of medium LEDs 552c. The left LED 552 a of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 is for lighting up the right unit left decoration member 554 via the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 . Also, the right LED 552b is for lighting up and decorating the right unit right decoration member 557 via the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 . The middle LED 552c is for decorating the right unit decorative lens member 561 with light.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed white on both front and rear surfaces. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is vertically divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative board 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B is connected to the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 552A is connected to the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. It is connected to the.

The right unit left diffusing lens member 553 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 553a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall portion 553b projecting from the rear side of the main body portion 553a to the right in front view in a short flat shape, A plurality of notch portions 553c are cut out in a rectangular shape leftward from the right end of the rear wall portion 553b when viewed from the front, and a plurality of notch portions 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. 554, input lens portions 553e protruding rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a and provided in a plurality in the vertical direction, and the right surface side of the main body portion 553a in front view. A plurality of side reflection portions 553f are arranged in the vertical direction so that the input lens portion 553e is positioned at the center in the vertical direction.

The body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 has a vertically extending quadrangular shape in side view. It is formed in a shape that is slanted to move to the Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body portion 553a is aligned with the vertical line of the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so as to move to the right in front view as it goes forward from the rear end side. Slightly slanted. The front end of the body portion 553 a projects forward to a greater extent than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 when assembled to the door frame 3 .

The right end of the rear wall portion 553 b extends to substantially the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 . The left end of the rear wall portion 556b of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 contacts the right end of the rear wall portion 553b.

A plurality of cutouts 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and some of them correspond to the LEDs 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 . When the door-frame right-side unit 550 is assembled, the inner LEDs 552c of the door-frame right-side decorative substrate 552 face forward from the plurality of cutouts 553c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 emits light by the plurality of inner LEDs 552c. can be decorated.

The housing recess 553 d has a flat bottom surface, and the shape of the outer circumference substantially matches the outer shape of the left decorative member 554 of the right unit. Thereby, the right unit left decorative member 554 can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens portions 553e protrude rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a. Specifically, when the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is vertically divided into 6 equal parts, it is formed at substantially the center in the vertical direction. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the input lens portion 553e has a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending square protrudes rearward, and a concave portion forward from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion so as to be curved in a spherical shape. It has a part and a. These input lens portions 553e are positioned immediately before the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 in the assembled state of the door frame right side unit 550 respectively. Thereby, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be widely diffused within the main body portion 553a.

A plurality (six) of the side reflecting portions 553f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflection portion 553f is formed of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially from the input lens portion 553e. In each of the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 553a, and the surface on the side farther from the input lens portion 553e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 553a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 553f has a cross-sectional shape, when cut in the radial direction centered on the input lens portion 553e, formed in a sharp triangular shape in which the peaks between the grooves face toward the center. , the whole is formed in a saw-like shape. In addition, the side reflecting portions 553f are formed so that groove portions and ridge portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with radial lines separating the plurality of concentric arcuate grooves in the circumferential direction. ing.

In this right unit left diffusion lens member 553, the light emitted forward from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is directed into the body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 553e. is incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, the light from the left LED 552a is refracted by the curved surface so that the light from the left LED 552a spreads. will be radially diffused toward the front from the center.

The body portion 553a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door-frame right-side decorative substrate 552 so as to move to the right in front view as the whole goes forward. Light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decoration board 552 and incident on the main body 553a through the input lens 553e hits the flat left surface of the main body 553a. However, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not radiated to the outside from the left surface of the body portion 553a due to the incident angle with respect to the left surface of the body portion 553a, and is reflected toward the side reflecting portion 553f on the inner surface of the left surface. becomes.

The light incident forward into the body portion 553a from the input lens portion 553e hits the sawtooth side reflecting portion 553f and is reflected leftward in the front view, and then outward from the left surface of the body portion 553a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted outward (to the right in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflecting portion 553f) of the main body portion 553a. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light shielding member 559 passes through the main body portion 553a and is irradiated to the left side. . Therefore, from the left surface of the main body portion 553a, the light reflected leftward by the side reflecting portion 553f in the main portion 553a and the light emitted rightward from the side reflecting portion 553f are emitted from the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559 to the left. Since the light reflected to the right and passed through the body portion 553a is irradiated to the left, the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the body portion 553a can be decorated with good brightness. can.

In the side reflection portion 553f, a plurality of concentric circular grooves are divided by a plurality of lines extending radially, and the plurality of concentric circular grooves are shifted in the radial direction with respect to the dividing lines to form concentric circular grooves. are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, the light emitted outward (leftward) from the left surface of the main body 553a is prevented from becoming light with concentric striped pattern shading. This makes it possible to irradiate leftward light with more uniform intensity. As a result, the right unit left decorative member 554 housed in the housing recess 553d on the left surface of the main body 553a can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission.

Since the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is made of a transparent member, the side reflection lens member 553 formed on the opposite side from the front view left side of the main body portion 553a (the side where the accommodating recessed portion 553d is formed) A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves and radially extending lines in the portion 553f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern of the side reflection portion 553f of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion. portion can be decorated with the side reflecting portion 553f.

The right unit left decorative member 554 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and decorations such as the logo of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo in line with the concept of the performance presented to the player on the game board 5 are translucent. It is designed to have The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 .

The right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is formed substantially bilaterally symmetrical with the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, and has the same configuration. More specifically, the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 556a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, and a rear wall projecting short to the left in front view from the rear side of the main body portion 556a. 556b, a plurality of notch portions 556c that are cut out in a rectangular shape from the left end of the rear wall portion 556b to the right when viewed from the front and are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction; A front view of a housing recess 556d that is shallowly recessed to accommodate the unit right decorative member 557, a plurality of input lens portions 556e that protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a and are provided in the vertical direction, and the main body portion 556a. A plurality of side reflection portions 556f are arranged in the vertical direction so that each input lens portion 556e is centered in the vertical direction on the left side.

The main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 has a vertically extending quadrangular front end with an upper corner notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and a lower side extending upward toward the front. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move to the right direction, and has substantially the same outer shape as the main body portion 553 a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 . Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body portion 556a is aligned with the vertical line of the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so as to move leftward in the front view as it goes forward from the rear end side. Slightly slanted. The front end of the body portion 556 a projects forward farther than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 when assembled to the door frame 3 .

The left end of the rear wall portion 556b extends to substantially the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction when assembled with the door frame right side unit 550 . The right end of the rear wall portion 553b of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 abuts against the left end of the rear wall portion 556b.

A plurality of cutouts 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and some of the cutouts 556c correspond to the LEDs 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. As shown in FIG. The plurality of cutouts 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of cutouts 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 . Therefore, in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, a square opening penetrating back and forth between the notch portion 553c of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the notch portion 556c of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. is formed, and the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the opening, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be favorably decorated with light emission by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c.

The housing recess 556 d has a flat bottom surface, and the shape of the outer circumference substantially matches the outer shape of the right decorative member 557 of the right unit. Thereby, the right decorative member 557 of the right unit can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens portions 556e protrude rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a. Specifically, when the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is vertically divided into six equal parts, it is formed at the approximate center in the vertical direction. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the input lens portion 556e has a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending square protrudes rearward, and a recessed forward from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion so as to be curved in a spherical shape. It has a part and a. These input lens portions 556e are positioned immediately before the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 in the assembled state of the door frame right side unit 550 respectively. Thereby, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be widely diffused within the main body portion 556a.

A plurality (six) of the side reflecting portions 556f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflection portion 556f is formed of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves circumferentially divided by lines extending radially from the input lens portion 556e. In each of the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 556e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 556a, and the surface on the side farther from the input lens portion 556e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 556f has a cross-sectional shape, when cut in the radial direction centered on the input lens portion 556e, formed in a sharp triangular shape in which the peaks between the grooves face toward the center. , the whole is formed in a saw-like shape. In addition, the side reflecting portions 556f are formed so that the groove portions and the ridge portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with respect to the radial line that divides the plurality of concentric arcuate grooves in the circumferential direction. ing.

In this right unit right diffusion lens member 556, the light emitted forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is directed into the body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e. is incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 556e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, the light from the right LED 552b is refracted by the curved surface so that the light from the right LED 552b spreads. will be radially diffused toward the front from the center.

The main body portion 556a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the main body portion 556a moves leftward in a front view as the whole goes forward. Light emitted from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decoration board 552 and incident on the main body 556a through the input lens 556e strikes the flat right surface of the main body 556a. However, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not radiated to the outside from the left surface of the body portion 556a due to the incident angle with respect to the right surface of the body portion 556a, and is reflected toward the side reflecting portion 556f on the inner surface of the right surface. becomes.

The light incident forward into the body portion 556a from the input lens portion 556e hits the sawtooth side reflecting portion 556f, is reflected rightward in front view, and travels outward from the right surface of the body portion 556a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted outward (to the left in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflecting portion 556f) of the main body portion 556a. Since it is a member, the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit right light shielding member 560 passes through the main body portion 556a and is irradiated to the right side. . Therefore, from the right surface of the main body portion 556a, the light reflected rightward by the side reflecting portion 556f in the main portion 556a and the light emitted leftward from the side reflecting portion 556f are emitted to the right side of the right unit right light shielding member 560. Since the light reflected to the right direction and passed through the body portion 556a is irradiated to the right side, the right decorative member 557 of the right unit attached to the right side of the body portion 556a can be decorated with good brightness. can.

In the side reflection portion 556f, the plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and the plurality of concentric arc grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing lines as boundaries to form the concentric arc grooves. are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, the light irradiated outward (rightward) from the right surface of the main body portion 556a is prevented from becoming light with concentric striped pattern shading. It is possible to irradiate rightward light with more uniform density. As a result, the right unit right decorative member 557 accommodated in the accommodation recess 556d on the right surface of the main body portion 556a can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission.

In addition, since the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is made of a transparent member, it is formed on the opposite side from the right side of the main body portion 556a in front view (the side on which the housing recess 556d is formed). A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves and radially extending lines in the portion 556f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit right decorative member 557, the pattern of the side reflection portion 556f of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion. portion can be decorated with the side reflecting portion 556f.

The right decorative member 557 of the right unit is formed in a thin sheet shape, and decorations such as the logo of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo in line with the concept of presentation presented to the player on the game board 5 are translucent. It is designed to have The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decorative member 557 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 . The right unit right decorative member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed substantially bilaterally symmetrical with the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit left cover 555 . Further, the decoration applied to the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 may be the same decoration or different decorations.

The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 when viewed from the side. The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape that is open on the front and right sides. The right unit left light shielding member 559 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 559a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall portion 559b projecting from the rear side of the main body portion 559a to the right in front view in a short flat shape, and a rear wall portion 559b. A plurality of notch portions 559c are cut leftward from the right end of the wall portion 559b in a front view and have a plurality of cutout portions 559c formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. A plurality of flat reinforcement portions 559d extending from the wall portion 559b to the front end of the main body portion 559a are provided.

The main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 has a vertically extending rectangular shape in which the upper corners on the front end side are notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side extends upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape inclined so as to move, and has substantially the same outer shape as the body portions 553 a and 556 a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 .

The left end of the rear wall portion 559b extends to the right from the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 . The left surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 contacts the right end of the rear wall portion 559b.

A plurality of cutouts 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and some of the cutouts 559c correspond to the LEDs 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 . The plurality of notches 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notches 553c and 556c of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, respectively. Therefore, when the door frame right side unit 550 is assembled, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of cutouts 559c, and the plurality of middle LEDs 552c emit light from the right unit decorative lens member 561. can be decorated.

The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided in three sets spaced apart by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction, one pair of reinforcing portions 559d having a height substantially equal to the left and right widths and spaced apart in the vertical direction. Each set of reinforcing portions 559 d is formed at a position behind a decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563 . The strength and rigidity of the entire door frame right side unit 550 are enhanced by the plurality of reinforcing portions 559d.

The right light shielding member 560 of the right unit has a shape in a side view, which is a vertically extending quadrangular shape in which the upper corner of the front end side is obliquely notched in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower side moves upward as it goes forward. It is formed in an inclined shape, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body portion 559 a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 . The right unit right light shielding member 560 closes the right opening opened to the right of the right unit left light shielding member 559 formed in a shallow box shape in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 .

The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are each formed of a white member. The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 as shown in FIG. It is arranged so as to be close to the body portions 553 a and 556 a of the left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 . As a result, the main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are separated from each other in the horizontal direction, forming a space extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction with a predetermined width in the horizontal direction. . Through the space formed between the body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560, light emitted forward from the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is emitted from the right unit decoration. The rear side of the lens member 561 is irradiated.

In addition, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are formed of an opaque member, and the left LED 552a, the middle LED 552c, and the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 illuminate forward, respectively. The light emitted is prevented from interfering with each other. Only the middle LED 552c can be used for luminous decoration.

Further, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are arranged behind each of the divided spaces because the internal space is vertically divided into four by the three sets of reinforcing parts 559d. It is possible to prevent light from interfering between the spaces by the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552, which is located in front of each space of the right unit decorative lens member 561. , can be decorated independently. That is, the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550 can be vertically divided into a plurality of (four) areas, and each area can be decorated with light independently.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape along the front end shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 . The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a formed in a circular shape in a front view, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b extending vertically and formed with a plurality of polyhedrons. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer circumference of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and which extends short in the front-rear direction. The polyhedral decorative portion 561b has a plurality of rows of quadrangular pyramid-shaped parts arranged vertically on the front surface of a rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a plurality of rows of polyhedrons made up of a plurality of triangles on the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped part. It is formed into a shape as shown.

More specifically, the right unit decorative lens member 561 has a plurality of circular decorative portions 561a and multifaceted decorative portions 561b divided into four spaces by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d of the right unit left light shielding member 559. In the three regions located in the front, the circular decorative portion 561a arranged in the center in the vertical direction is provided with one multifaceted decorative portion 561b on each of the upper and lower sides. It is formed so that only the portion 561b is arranged.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 . The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563 . The right unit decorative lens member 561 is decorated with light emission by the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 arranged in the rear.

The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a tubular frame shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in a shape that follows the shapes of the front and upper ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 . The right unit decoration base 562 is formed so as to be able to cover both the left and right outer sides near the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 and the left and right sides of the right unit decoration lens member 561 . The front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 slightly protrudes forward from the front end of the right unit decorative base 562 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 . This right unit decorative base 562 is formed of an opaque member.

The right unit cover 563 is formed so as to be able to close the front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562 . The right unit cover 563 is made of a transparent member, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

The decorative members 564 extend short in the vertical direction and are attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 564 is made of an opaque member. The three decorative members 564 vertically divide the right unit cover 563 (right unit decorative lens member 561) into four.

When the door frame right side unit 550 is assembled to the door frame 3, the door frame left side unit 530 protrudes forward in a large plate shape, and slightly forward than the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. there is The door frame right side unit 550 includes a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both projecting left and right sides, and a right unit decorative lens member 561 provided at the front end. can be decorated with luminescence.

Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-shaped and protrudes greatly forward, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 is adjacent to the pachinko machine on the right side. It is possible to exhibit a function and effect like a partition between. As a result, the players playing the pachinko machine 1 can be given the illusion that they are playing in a private room, and the players can play in a relaxed atmosphere without worrying about other players around them. can be done.

In addition, since the door frame right side unit 550 protrudes greatly forward, in a game hall where the pachinko machines 1 are arranged side by side, even if the door frame right side unit 550 is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, the island facility can be installed. The pachinko machine 1 can be visually recognized even from the lateral direction along the line, and the pachinko machine 1 can be conspicuous in a game hall where many pachinko machines are arranged. Therefore, if the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on both the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are decorated with light, even if the pachinko machine 1 is not positioned near the front of the pachinko machine 1, the book can be seen from a distance. The existence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to the players.

Furthermore, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a problem such as a ball jam or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens on both left and right sides By making the member 561 or the like luminous and decorated in a peculiar manner, it is possible to immediately notify the staff of the game hall of the occurrence of the trouble and make them recognize it, so that the trouble can be dealt with quickly. Therefore, the interruption of the game by the player can be resolved early, and the player's frustration and loss of interest in the game can be suppressed.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 56 to 59 and the like. Figure 56 (a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a view of the door frame top unit from the back. It is a perspective view. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 59 is a cross-sectional view taken along line PP in FIG. The door frame top unit 570 is mounted above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 above the through hole 111 in the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 .

The door frame top unit 570 is mounted on the left and right sides of the center base 571 that is mounted in the center in the horizontal direction above the through hole 111 in the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 . A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 attached to the front surfaces of the pair of side bases 572, and extending to the left and right, with the center in the left and right direction protruding forward. A pair of openings 574a passing through the pair of upper speakers 573 in front of the pair of upper speakers 573 in a box-like shape with an open rear, and a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the pair of openings 574a to the vicinity of the center. It has a plurality of slits 574b (three on each side) extending vertically and penetrating them in the front-rear direction. A unit main body 271, and a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal, which is arranged on the front side of the pair of upper speakers 573 and attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 so as to close the pair of openings 574a. ing.

Here, although illustration is omitted, the pair of side bases 572 (the left side base 572a and the right side base 572b) each have an internal space that is open only toward the side where the opening window is provided. In the internal space of the opening window, the outer periphery outer light emitting part 34 (left outer outer light emitting part 34a, right outer outer light emitting part 34b) provided so as to emit light from outside the outer periphery into the outer periphery of the opening window, and from inside the outer periphery of the opening window outer peripheral light detectors 35 (left outer peripheral outer light detector 35a, right outer outer light detector 35b) for detecting the light outside the outer periphery.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 at the center in the left-right direction, and is attached to the top inner decorative member 576 having translucency, and to the rear side of the top inner decorative member 576. A door frame top middle decorative substrate 577 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the cage, and a plurality of slits 574b attached to the front surface of the unit body 271, respectively, and left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576. A plurality of transparent plate-shaped light guide members 578 (three on each side) extending from the vicinity to the vicinity of the left and right ends of the unit main body 271 across the opening 574a, and a top inner decoration member 576 on the front surface of the unit main body 271. A top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 attached to the left and right sides and respectively covering the front surfaces of a plurality (three) of light guide members 578, and a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decoration. A top center left decorative member 581 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front side of each lens member 580 and extends from both left and right sides of the top center decorative member 576 to near the center side end of the opening 574a, and A top middle right decorative member 582 is provided.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the inner side of the left and right side surfaces of the unit main body 271, respectively, and LEDs are mounted on portions facing the left and right outer ends of the plurality (three) of light guide members 578, respectively. A door frame top left decorative board 583 and a door frame top right decorative board 584 pass through, and a plurality of (three) slits 574b formed on both left and right sides of the center in the left and right direction on the rear side of the unit body 271. A pair of substrate bases 585 attached to the respective parts, and a door attached to the front surfaces of the pair of substrate bases 585 and having a plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a mounted behind the slit 574b of the unit main body 271. It is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 on the front side of the frame top center left decoration board 586 and the door frame top center right decoration board 587, the door frame top center left decoration board 586 and the door frame top center right decoration board 587, respectively. A pair of light blocking members 588 are provided.

In addition, the door frame top unit 570 includes a door frame top unit relay board 589 attached to the front surface of the central base 571 within the unit main body 271, and a central base 571 so as to cover the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589. An attached relay board cover 590, an upper cover 591 attached to the unit main body 271 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit main body 271, and a unit cover 591 so as to close the lower opening 574d of the unit main body 271. and a lower cover 592 attached to the main body 271 .

A central base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a rectangular shape extending left and right when viewed from the front. The center base 571 is formed in a box shape that is open rearward, and has a plurality of unevenness on the front surface. A pair of side bases 572 are attached to the left and right ends of the central base 571, respectively. A pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front surface of each side base 572, respectively. When the pair of upper speakers 573 are assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the respective front surfaces thereof are obliquely attached so that the side closer to the center of the door frame top unit 570 in the left-right direction moves rearward. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone speakers capable of outputting sound over a wide frequency band.

The unit main body 271 is formed in such a shape that the lower portions near the left and right ends of a square extending in the left and right direction bulge downward when viewed from the front. In other words, the unit main body 271 is formed in such a shape that a square extending in the left and right direction is notched with a trapezoid narrowing upward from the lower end side when viewed from the front. The unit main body 271 has a rectangular shape extending to the left and right in a plan view, and a portion of about 1/2 of the total width (length in the horizontal direction) centered on the center in the horizontal direction on the front edge side of the rectangle. A trapezoid protruding forward and a quadrangle protruding short forward with the front end side of the trapezoid as a long side are combined to form a shape. Therefore, the unit main body 271 is arranged such that both sides of the portion protruding forward at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface are aligned with the lines connecting the left-right end portions of the unit main body 271 and the left-right direction end portions of the front ends of the portions protruding forward. It is located posteriorly (recessed).

The unit main body 271 has openings 574a penetrating in the front-rear direction at portions extending from the right and left ends of the front surface to positions outside the portions projecting forward. In addition, the unit body 271 has a plurality of slits that extend left and right at a predetermined height in the vertical direction and that penetrate in the front-rear direction at a portion that protrudes forward in a trapezoidal shape on the front surface and that extends obliquely. 574b is formed. The plurality of slits 574b extend laterally from the vicinity of the front end of the front surface of the unit main body 271, which extends obliquely forward, to the vicinity of the opening 574a. Also, the plurality of slits 574b are formed on both sides of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction so as to be separated vertically by three.

The unit main body 271 has an upper opening 574c formed by notching forward from the rear end toward the front in the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and a lower opening 574d formed by notching from the rear end toward the front in the left-right direction on the lower surface. , is equipped with An upper opening 574c of the unit main body 271 is closed by an upper cover 591. As shown in FIG. Also, the lower opening 574 d is closed by a lower cover 592 .

The unit main body 271 also has a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f extending vertically at both left and right ends. The front surface of the top left decorative portion 574e is formed at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decorative portion 574f is formed such that its front surface is located forward of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. This unit main body 271 is formed of an opaque member.

The top middle decorative member 576 is attached to the front end of a portion that protrudes forward from the front surface of the unit main body 271 at the center in the left-right direction. The top middle decorative member 576 has a shape when viewed from the front that is a modified pentagon bent so that the center of the lower side of the substantially square in the horizontal direction is positioned downward, and extends laterally outward from the upper ends of the left and right sides of the modified pentagon. It is formed in a shape as if it were a combination of a substantially right-angled triangle connecting the tip of the edge and the lower ends of the left and right sides of the pentagon. The top middle decorative member 576 is inclined such that the modified pentagonal portion on the front surface moves backward as it goes downward. The top middle decorative member 576 is formed in a three-dimensional shape as a whole and has translucency.

The door frame top middle decorative board 577 is arranged behind the top middle decorative member 576 in a state in which the front surface is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward so as to follow the front surface of the modified pentagonal portion of the top middle decorative member 576 . side mounted. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the door frame top interior decoration substrate 577, and the interior top decoration member 576 can be decorated with light emission by causing the LEDs to emit light.

The light guide member 578 is made of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape along the left and right outer sides of the front end of the front surface of the unit main body 271 protruding forward. The side near the left and right ends of the unit main body 271 is defined as the end side, and the side near the center is defined as the center side. 578a, and an arc portion 578b extending in an arc shape with a large radius so as to move forward from the central end side of the straight portion 578a toward the central side. The straight portion 578a of the light guide member 578 has a depth in the front-rear direction smaller than the height in the vertical direction, and the arc portion 578b has a depth in the front-rear direction larger than the height in the vertical direction. The straight portion 578a of the light guide member 578 has a constant vertical height, and the circular arc portion 578b has a vertical height that decreases toward the center. When the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is positioned immediately before the opening 574a of the unit body 271, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit body 271 from the front. there is

The light guide member 578 includes a diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a and formed of sawtooth irregularities, a diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface side of the circular arc portion 578b and formed of a plurality of irregularities, It has

When the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, both left and right outer ends of the light guide member 578 face the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584. At the same time, the diffusion input portion 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top center left decorative board 586 or the door frame top center right decorative board 587. FIG. When the light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from both left and right outer ends, the light is transmitted to the straight portion 578a. As the light travels toward the center inside, the light is sequentially reflected forward from the end side by the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and the light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is arranged in front of the light guide member 578, and the portion in front of the straight portion 578a of them is decorated with light emission.

Light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top center left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top center right decorative substrate 587 enters the light guide member 578 from a diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b. Then, the light is diffused widely into the arc portion 578b by the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. As a result, the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the arc portion 578b can be decorated with light.

In this way, the light guide member 578 is connected to the LEDs 583 a and 586 a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 , or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 . By guiding the light from the LEDs 584a and 587a, the entire top left decorative lens member 579 or top right decorative lens member 580 arranged in front can be decorated with good (uniform) light.

The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction on the front surface of the unit main body 271 . The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that accommodate the three light guide members 578 independently from the front. A decorative lens portion 579 a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578 and covers the front surface and both upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578 . On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a, concavities and convexities of truncated square pyramids protruding forward are arranged in rows on the left and right sides.

The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative portion 574 e of the unit body 271 . That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 . The top left decorative lens member 579 is illuminated by the LEDs 583 a and 586 a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top center left decorative substrate 586 via three light guide members 578 .

The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the right side of the center in the horizontal direction on the front surface of the unit main body 271 . The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a that accommodate the three light guide members 578 independently from the front. A decorative lens portion 580 a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578 and covers the front surface and both upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578 . On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 580a, concavities and convexities of truncated square pyramids projecting forward are arranged in rows on the left and right sides.

The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decorative portion 574 f of the unit body 271 . That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 . The top right decorative lens member 580 is illuminated by LEDs 584 a and 587 a of a door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and a door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 via three light guide members 578 .

The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top left decorative lens member 579 between the left opening 574 a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576 . The top center left decorative member 581 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 in the state assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front surface is the top left. It protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative lens member 579 . The top middle left decorative member 581 is formed of an opaque member.

The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580 between the right opening 574 a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576 . The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 in the state assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front surface is the top right. It protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative lens member 580 . The top center right decorative member 582 is formed of an opaque member.

The door frame top left decorative board 583 is attached to the inside of the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted directed rightward. The door frame top left decorative board 583 has an LED 583a mounted at a position facing the left end surface of three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the left side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 59). ). The three LEDs 583a can be made to emit light independently. A portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 located in front of the opening 574a on the left side of the unit main body 271 is illuminated by the LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578. Can be decorated with luminescence.

The door frame top right decorative board 584 is attached to the inside of the right side surface (top right decorative portion 574f) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted directed leftward. On the door frame top right decorative board 584, an LED 584a is mounted at a position facing the right end surfaces of three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the right side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 59). ). The three LEDs 584a can be made to emit light independently. By means of the LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, the portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the opening 574a on the right side of the unit main body 271 is illuminated via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578. Can be decorated with luminescence.

The pair of board bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the portion in the unit main body 271 where the plurality of slits 574b are formed. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrical with each other. The substrate base 585 includes side walls that are substantially square in side view and have sides that extend vertically and forward and backward, a rear wall that is square in front view and extends outward in the horizontal direction at right angles from the rear sides of the side walls, and a front end of the upper side of the side wall. The line connecting the upper sides of the side walls to the middle is the oblique side, and the upper side of a substantially right-angled triangle connects the upper sides of the side wall and the back wall. and a right-angled triangular lower wall, and is formed in a triangular prism-like box shape with an open space between upper and lower oblique sides. The board base 585 is attached to the unit main body 271 so that the open portion is closed by the unit main body 271 . A door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 or a door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587 is attached to the substrate base 585 so that the open portion is closed.

The door frame top center left decorative board 586 is attached to the board base 585 so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front in the board base 585 attached to the left rear side of the left-right center of the unit main body 271 . be done. The door frame top center left decorative board 586 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585 so that the front surface moves forward toward the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. It becomes inclined. As a result, when the door frame top center left decorative board 586 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the front surface thereof is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b are formed on the left side of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. becomes a state approximately parallel to .

A plurality of LEDs 586 a are mounted on the door frame top center left decorative board 586 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574 b of the unit body 271 . As a result, when the door frame top center left decorative board 586 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570 , a plurality of LEDs 586 a face forward from the three slits 574 b on the left side of the center of the unit body 271 . The door frame top center left decorative substrate 586 emits light from a plurality of LEDs 586a to light-embellish a portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 near the top center decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is mounted on the board base 585 mounted on the rear side of the unit main body 271 on the right side of the left-right center so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front. be done. The door frame top center right decorative board 587 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585 so that the front surface moves forward toward the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. It becomes inclined. As a result, when the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the front surface thereof is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b are formed on the right side of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. becomes a state approximately parallel to .

A plurality of LEDs 587 a are mounted on the door frame top center right decorative board 587 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574 b of the unit body 271 . As a result, when the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570 , a plurality of LEDs 587 a face forward from the three slits 574 b on the right side of the center of the unit body 271 . The door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 emits light from a plurality of LEDs 587a to light-embellish a portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 near the top middle decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

A pair of light shielding members 588 are attached to the front rear side of the unit main body 271 at positions between the door frame top center left decorative substrate 586 and door frame top right decorative substrate 587 and the unit main body 271 . The pair of light shielding members 588 are formed substantially bilaterally symmetrical with each other by an opaque member. The light shielding member 588 is provided between the upper and lower portions of the plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top center left decorative substrate 586 and the door frame top center right decorative substrate 587 which are arranged in rows corresponding to the three slits 574b in the unit main body 271. partitioning. With this light shielding member 588, light can be guided forward only by the LEDs 586a and 587a positioned immediately after each light guide member 578, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 579 can be guided forward. The decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 can be satisfactorily light-emitting and decorated in an independent state.

The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front surface of the central base 571 . The door frame top unit relay board 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decorative board 577, a door frame top left decorative board 583, a door frame top right decorative board 584, a door frame top middle left decorative board 586, and a door. It relays the connection between the frame top center right decorative board 587 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 . The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door main body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided in the door frame right side unit 550 . The front side of the door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered with a relay board cover 590 .

The door frame top unit 570 has a top middle decorative member 576 protruding forward in the center in the left-right direction, and the front surfaces of both left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 are curved backward. Therefore, the player can be given the illusion that only the top middle decorative member 576 protrudes greatly forward, and the player's interest in the pachinko machine 1 can be strongly attracted.

In addition, the door frame top unit 570 attaches the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 arranged in the center to the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 . It is formed so as to extend from both sides to a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f formed on both left and right ends of the unit main body 271. As shown in FIG. As a result, the front upper portion of the door frame 3 can be entirely decorated with the door frame top unit 570 .

At this time, in the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is protected by a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal behind each in the vicinity of both left and right ends where the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are arranged. The speaker cover 575 faces forward from between the three decorative lens portions 579a and 580a that are separated vertically from the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 can be listened to by the player in good condition, and the player can enjoy high-quality stereo sound.

Further, the door-frame top unit 570 has a top left decorative lens member 579 and a plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top right decorative lens member 580, so that the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 583 are arranged. Light from substrate 584, door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, and door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 can be directed to top left decorative lens member 579 and top right decorative lens member 580, and top left decorative lens member. 579 and the entire front surface of the top right decorative lens member 580 can be well decorated with light emission. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can light-embellish the entire upper front surface of the door frame 3 including the front side of the left and right upper speakers 573 .

[3-8. Effects of door frame]
Effects of the door frame 3 will be described. The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has a through-hole 111 penetrating through the front and rear of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and is made larger in the vertical and horizontal directions than the conventional pachinko machine. , the vertical height of the plate unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 is reduced in accordance with the enlargement of the through hole 111, and the horizontal width of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 is reduced. is made smaller. As a result, the front surface of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen as widely as possible from the player (front) through the through hole 111 (glass unit 190). , corresponds to a game board 5 having a wide game area 5a.

The door frame 3 has an effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) having a large hemispherical operation button 410 at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 protruding forward below the through hole 111. , and the front surface of the lower half (the portion below the upper plate 321) on both the left and right sides of the production operation unit 400 (the front surface of the front lower decorative portion 326c) is hollowed backward (dish unit 320 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the production operation unit 400, the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of the production operation unit 400 are positioned rearward. ing. As a result, the performance operation unit 400 attached to the front surface of the plate unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction appears to protrude forward greatly, so that the performance operation unit 400 is made conspicuous and emphasized to the player. , and the effect operation unit 400 can be strongly focused.

The door frame 3 tilts the performance operation unit 400 arranged in front of the plate unit 320 below the through hole 111 so that the large semispherical transparent operation button 410 faces obliquely upward and forward. Therefore, when the player sits down in front of the pachinko machine 1, the operation buttons 410 face the player's head (face), and the player lowers his/her line of sight and presses the effect operation unit 400. When viewed, the operation button 410 can be seen almost in the front, and the large and round operation button 410 can be strongly recognized, and the expectation for the performance using the operation button 410 can be heightened. At the same time, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 arranged in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good condition, and the effect image can be sufficiently enjoyed.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with the operation button 410 which is large in diameter and bulges forward in a round manner and has approximately the same diameter as the total height of the plate unit 320, when operating the operation button 410, the hand can be moved over a short distance. Any part of the operation button 410 can be touched, and the "quick press" of the operation button 410 can be performed relatively easily. In addition, since the operation button 410, which has a large diameter and bulges forward in a round shape, is mounted in a tilted state, it can be pressed from above like the operation button of a conventional pachinko machine. It can be operated satisfactorily even from the front or from the front, and the operation button 410 with good operability can make the performance using the operation button 410 more enjoyable.

In addition, the door frame 3 is mounted with the production operation unit 400 in a state of being suspended by the plate unit 320, and is provided with a vibration motor 424 for generating vibrations in the lower part of the production operation unit 400. When vibration is generated by rotating the vibration motor 424 according to the state, a strong vibration can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the upper part of the operation button 410, and the player is startled by pressing the operation button. The production using 410 can be made even more enjoyable.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (effect operation unit 400) extending over the entire height of the plate unit 320 at the center of the front surface of the plate unit 320. Since the lower plate 322 underneath is less conspicuous, it is possible to make it easier for players who are familiar with the conventional pachinko machine to recognize that it is clearly different, and appeal strongly attracting the interest of the players. The pachinko machine 1 with high power can be obtained.

In addition, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening 326d that opens on the left side of the effect operation unit 400 on the front surface of the plate unit 320. Therefore, the capacity of the lower tray 322 can be increased with respect to the size of the lower tray opening 326d, and the number of game balls stored in the lower tray 322 can be sufficiently secured. In addition, since the rear part of the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400, when the player puts his or her left hand into the lower plate 322 or puts his or her finger on the lower plate opening 326d, Since it is difficult for the fingertips to touch the wall behind the lower tray 322, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel a sense of incongruity, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game and increasing the size of the lower tray opening 326d. The fact that the lower plate 322 has a larger volume than that can also be made tactilely recognizable.

Further, the door frame 3 has a lower tray ball supply port 323c through which game balls from the upper tray 321 are discharged to the lower tray 322, and a lower outlet for discharging game balls from the lower tray 322 to a dollar box or the like below the tray unit 320. The countersunk ball extraction hole 322a is linearly arranged in the front-rear direction, and is arranged on the right outside of the lower dish opening 326d (right side of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400) in front view. That is, the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a are connected to the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outer side of the lower plate opening 326d) in the plate unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower plate cover 340. Since the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a are not visible from the player side, the appearance of the tray unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) can be improved. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

Further, in the lower tray 322 of the door frame 3, the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is arranged in front of (directly in front of) the lower tray ball supply port 323c. As a result, the game ball discharged from the upper tray 321 or the like to the lower tray 322 is immediately discharged from the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a to the dollar box or the like below as soon as it enters the lower tray 322. At this time, since the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a cannot be seen from the player side, the flow of game balls discharged from the upper tray 321 and the like to the dollar box through the lower tray 322 is also prevented. can't see This allows the player to have the illusion that the game balls on the upper tray 321 or the game balls or the like paid out from the payout device 830 with the upper tray 321 being full are directly discharged to the cash box. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower tray 322, and to make the player concentrate on the game (striking operation of the game ball, effect images, etc.) and suppress the decline in interest. can.

In the lower tray 322, the door frame 3 is provided with a lower tray ball removal hole 322a at a position closer to the front left of the lower tray ball supply port 323c, and the lower tray 322 is erected on the right side of the lower tray ball removal hole 322a. Since the raised wall part is obliquely curved to face the direction of the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, the game ball supplied from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray 322 is directly discharged. It can be guided to the hole 322a, or it can be reflected by the wall on the right side and indirectly guided to the ball hole 322a. As a result, while the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a remains open, the game ball supplied to the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c is located in the area on the left side of the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a in the lower tray 322. (Lower tray first area A1), since it can be ejected downward from the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, the game ball circulating in the lower tray 322 is not visible to the player. Game balls can be discharged downward (dollar box), and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

In addition, the door frame 3 has a lower plate opening 326d of a plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 faces forward, between the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a (the performance operation unit 400) and the lower speaker port 326e. Therefore, even if the player puts his hand on the lower tray opening 326d or puts his hand into the lower tray 322, the front of the lower speaker port 326e is not blocked by the player's hand. The sound from the lower speaker 921 in the board unit 900 can be favorably output forward, and the sound of the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. In addition, when the player puts his or her hand into the lower tray 322 or approaches it, the player can feel the vibration caused by the deep bass sound from the lower speaker 921 forwardly output from the lower speaker port 326e. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the door frame 3 is provided with the door frame right side unit 550 which is plate-shaped and protrudes greatly forward from the right side of the through hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door Since the frame right side unit 550 can exert an effect like a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, the player playing the pachinko machine 1 can play in a private room. It is possible to give the illusion that the player is there, and to play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without worrying about other players around.

Further, the door frame 3 can be decorated with light on the front end and the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550, which is plate-shaped and protrudes greatly forward. In the pachinko machine 1, even if it is not positioned in front of the pachinko machine 1, the existence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified even from a distance such as from a lateral direction along the island facility, and the pachinko machine has a high appeal to the players. machine 1.

In addition, the door frame 3 is provided with a top inner decorative member 576 protruding forward at the center in the left-right direction in the door frame top unit 570 above the through hole 111, and the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the top inner decorative member 576 are The top middle decorative member of the door frame top unit 570 is more concave than the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576. 576 is formed in a concavely curved shape so that the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of 576 are positioned rearward. As a result, only the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 appears to protrude greatly forward, so that the top middle decorative member 576 can be conspicuously emphasized to the player, and the top can be seen to be emphasized. Strong attention can be drawn to the middle decorative member 576 .

By the way, the upper part of the door frame in the conventional pachinko machine is provided with a pair of upper speakers spaced apart from each other to the left and right, and the two upper speakers stand out. On the other hand, in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, the door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper side of the through hole 111 has a pair of upper parts whose front surfaces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal on both left and right ends. A speaker 573 is provided, and a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 extending from both left and right sides of a central top middle decorative member 576 through the front of a speaker cover 575 to both left and right ends are provided. The entire front surfaces of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with light. As a result, the upper part of the front face of the door frame 3 can be decorated as a whole, so that the pair of upper speakers 573 are not conspicuous in the upper part of the door frame 3, and the decoration is clearly different from that of the conventional pachinko machine. The pachinko machine 1 can be made to be highly appealing to the player by allowing the player to recognize at a glance that it is there, and the pair of upper speakers 573 can entertain the player with high-quality stereo sound. can.

In this way, the door frame 3 of this embodiment has the effect operation unit 400 attached to the plate unit 320 and the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 below and above the through hole 111. Since each of them protrudes greatly forward at the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to present to the player a decoration with a sense of unity in the top and bottom in which the imaginary line passing through the center in the left-right direction is conspicuous, and at the same time, the decoration gives a sophisticated feeling. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous than other pachinko machines and has a high appeal.

In addition, since the door frame 3 has the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 and the production operation unit 400 arranged vertically in the center in the left-right direction protrude forward, the top middle decorative member 576 When the effect operation unit 400 is decorated with light, the player can see a light emitting line extending vertically at the center of the front surface of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction, and the line of sight of the player is arranged at the center in the left-right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 of the production operation unit 400 or the like.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 60 to 66 and the like. FIG. 60 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. 63 is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit, FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 and viewed from the front, and FIG. 65 is the game board of FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled and was seen from the back. FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram showing the part of the function display unit enlarged from the front with the game board attached to the pachinko machine.

The game board 5 has a game area 5a into which game balls are struck by the player operating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. As shown in FIG. The game board 5 includes a front structural member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and a front structural member 1000 that is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 to cover the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 that partitions, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200, and the game is played by hitting the game ball into the game area 5a. and a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 for controlling the game contents to be played. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game balls are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion within the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (not shown).

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 which displays the game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of 1100, a game board side effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the front surface of the game panel 1100. and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. A game board side performance display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the game board side performance display device 1600. - 特許庁

The game panel 1100 has a transparent flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000, and holds the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. and a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 includes a plurality of general winning openings 2001 which are always open to accept the game balls hit into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 at different positions in the game area 5a. A first starting port 2002 which is always open to accept a ball, a gate portion 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003. A second start port 2004 that enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by this, and the first special lottery that is drawn by accepting the game balls to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. A large prize winning opening 2005 is provided in which game balls can be accepted either according to the result of the lottery or the result of the second special lottery.

In addition, the front unit 2000 is attached directly above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002 and a big winning port 2005. A start port unit 2100 and a start port unit A lower side unit 2200 that is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of 2100 when viewed from the front and has a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and a side unit attached above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. It has an upper part 2300 and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a gate part 2003 and a second starting port 2004 attached substantially in the center of the game area 5a.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape with an open front and a back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the board-side effect display device 1600 is provided.

Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back left middle decoration unit 3050 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 from the center in the vertical direction on the left side in front view, and a back left center decoration unit 3050 attached below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back top left movable effect unit 3200 attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and on the left side in the front view, and the back box. A back left movable production unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view in the back box 3010, and a back upper middle attached from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A movable effect unit 3400 and a back bottom front movable effect unit 3500 attached in front of the back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 are provided.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front constituent member 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65 and the like. The front structural member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and an inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc shape clockwise from the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in a front view, passing through the upper end of the center in the left-right direction in a front view, and extending obliquely upward to the right; The game is played on the inner rail 1002 which is arranged inside the front structural member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front to the oblique upper left when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front. and an out-guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

The front structural member 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 which is linearly inclined from the right end of the out-guiding portion 1003 in front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front structural member 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher, and the lower right rail 1004. from the right end of the front structural member 1000 along the right side of the front structural member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001, the upper portion of which is curved inwardly of the front structural member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail 1001 and the impact part 1006 with which the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 abuts.

The front structural member 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front structural member 1000 and the front view clock. The backflow prevention member is rotatable only between the open position where it is rotated in the surrounding direction to open the gap with the outer rail 1001, and is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

Further, the front component member 1000 includes the outer side of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 near the lower end extending substantially vertically, the outer side of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each part has a security recess 1008 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security concave portion 1008 projects backward from the security cover 200 on the door frame 3. inserted. As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state by the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security concave portion 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire attempts to enter the game area 5a through between the crime prevention cover 200 and the front component member 1000 from the lower front of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 202 and the crime prevention concave portion 1008. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

The front component 1000 also has a plurality of positioning projections 1009 projecting rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002 . By inserting these positioning protrusions 1009 into inner rail fixing holes 1116 formed in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 , the inner rail 1002 can be positioned and fixed to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 .

Further, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1010 projecting rearwardly from the rear surface. The plurality of mounting bosses 1010 can be positioned between the panel holder 1120 (the game panel 1100) by being inserted into the mounting holes 1128 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. FIG.

The front structural member 1000 also has a notch portion 1011 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This notch 1011 is aligned with the notch 1127 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, these notches 1011 and 1127 are passed through the lower full ball path. Front end openings of a normal guideway 861 and a full tank guideway 862 of the unit 860 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62, FIGS. 64 and 65, and the like. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110 is held. and a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

A panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently held even if obstacle nails are implanted in the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. (8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel plate 1110 is made of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 has an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the lower end at the lowest position in the game area 5a. In addition, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed through the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction for mounting the front unit 2000 thereon.

In addition, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of fitting holes 1113 which are circular holes arranged near the outer circumference and penetrate in the front-rear direction, and long holes 1114 arranged near the outer circumference at the lower left portion and penetrate in the front-rear direction and extend in the vertical direction. , is equipped with These fitting holes 1113 and elongated holes 1114 are arranged outside the game area 5 a and are used for positioning with the panel holder 1120 . Further, the panel plate 1110 is provided with stepped engaging stepped portions 1115 recessed on the front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side. These engaging stepped portions 1115 are cut out to approximately half the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110, and are arranged outside the game area 5a like the fitting hole 1113 and the long hole 1114, It is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1110 to the panel holder 1120 .

In addition, the panel plate 1110 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1116 at predetermined positions. By fitting and fixing a positioning projection 1009 projecting from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 into the inner rail fixing hole 1116, the inner rail 1002 can be fixed at a predetermined position.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 is large enough to include the panel plate 1110, has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 1120 is made of synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 detachably holds the panel plate 1110, and has a holding stepped portion 1121 recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and an inside of the holding stepped portion 1121 having a size substantially equal to that of the game area 5a and extending in the front-rear direction. and a through hole 1122 penetrating through.

The depth from the front surface of the holding step portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120 is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110 , and the front surface of the panel plate 1110 held in the holding step portion 1121 is the same as the panel holder 1120 . Almost flush with the front surface. Further, the holding stepped portion 1121 is formed in such a size that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 on the front inner peripheral surface thereof. Due to this clearance, even if the panel plate 1110 expands and contracts relatively due to changes in temperature and changes over time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is arranged at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1113 and the elongated hole 1114 formed in the panel plate 1110 held by the holding stepped portion 1121, and extends forward from the front surface of the holding stepped portion 1121. It extends and has a plurality of projecting pins 1123 that can be fitted into and inserted into the fitting holes 1113 and long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110 . By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1123 into the fitting holes 1113 and long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110, the panel holder 1120 and the panel plate 1110 can be positioned relative to each other.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an engaging claw 1124 and an engaging piece 1125 that engage with the engaging stepped portion 1115 at positions corresponding to the engaging stepped portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 . More specifically, the engaging claw 1124 is arranged above the holding stepped portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120, corresponds to the upper engaging stepped portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110, and extends forward from the front surface of the holding stepped portion 1121. It protrudes toward and elastically engages with the engaging stepped portion 1115 . The engaging claw 1124 is sized so that the tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120 .

The engaging piece 1125 of the panel holder 1120 is arranged below the holding stepped portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120 and corresponds to the lower engaging stepped portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 . The engaging piece 1125 is arranged along the front surface of the panel holder 1120 on the upper side ( center side) by a predetermined amount. By engaging the engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging claws 1124 and the engaging pieces 1125 , the panel plate 1110 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1120 .

In addition, the panel holder 1120 has an out port 1126 penetrating back and forth at the lowest position in the game area 5a. In the panel holder 1120, the rear lower side of the out port 1126 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the out port 1126. - 特許庁

Further, the panel holder 1120 has a notch portion 1127 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This notch 1127 is aligned with the notch 1011 of the front structural member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, these notches 1011 and 1127 penetrate the lower full ball path unit 860. Front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full-tank guideway 862 face forward.

The panel holder 1120 also has a plurality of mounting holes 1128 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front structural member 1000 . By inserting the mounting bosses 1010 of the front structural member 1000 into the plurality of mounting holes 1128, the panel holder 1120 can be mounted on the rear side of the front structural member 1000, and the panel holder 1120 can be attached to the front structural member 1000. 1120 (game panel 1100) can be positioned.

In addition, the panel holder 1120 has a square insertion hole 1129 penetrating in the front-rear direction above the notch 1127 . The rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted through the insertion hole 1129 .

When the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 , the out port 1126 of the panel holder 1120 is opened to the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front structural member 1000 . As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1126 by the out guide section 1003 and discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 .

[5-2a. Second embodiment of game panel]
Next, a game panel 1150 of an embodiment different from the game panel 1100 described above will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel in a form different from that of FIG. 63, seen from the front together with the front structural member, substrate holder, and main control unit. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 viewed from behind. The game panel 1150 is made of a wood board material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm). This game panel 1150 is formed to have the same thickness as the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 described above.

The game panel 1150 is formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer shape of the front component 1000 . The game panel 1150 is provided with an out port 1151 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out guide portion 1003 of the front structural member 1000 in the lower part of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. In the game panel 1150, the rear lower side of the out port 1151 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the out port 1151.例文帳に追加

In addition, the game panel 1150 has a cutout portion 1152 having the same shape as the cutout portion 1011 of the front structural member 1000 and a cutout portion 1152 which penetrates in the front-view left side of the lower end in the front-rear direction and which is open downward, and which is located above the cutout portion 1152 in the vertical direction. and a square insertion hole 1153 through which the rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted.

In addition, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of inner rails penetrating in the front-rear direction so that the positioning projections 1009 can be fitted in positions corresponding to the plurality of positioning projections 1009 projecting rearward from the inner rails 1002 of the front component member 1000. A fixing hole 1154 is provided. In addition, the game panel 1150 has a plurality of mounting holes 1155 penetrating back and forth at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front structural member 1000 . By inserting the mounting bosses 1010 of the front component 1000 into the plurality of mounting holes 1155, the game panel 1150 can be attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, and the game panel 1150 can be attached to the front component 1000. 1150 can be positioned.

Furthermore, although illustration is omitted, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of openings penetrating back and forth for mounting the front unit 2000 in the same manner as the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 described above. ing.

The game panel 1150 is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 , and the out port 1151 is opened to the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front structural member 1000 . As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1151 by the out guide section 1003, and discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1150 through the out port 1151.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box that is open at the top and front, and the bottom surface is inclined downward toward the center in the left-right direction. This board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from below when assembled on the game board 5 . As a result, all of the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the rear unit 3000 can be received. It is possible to discharge downward from the discharging portion 1201 that is positioned.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65 and the like. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 . The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 for controlling game content, game ball payout, etc., and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. .

The main control board box 1320 has a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When one sealing mechanism is used to close the main control board box 1320, the sealing mechanism is destroyed to open the main control board box 1320. The opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be traced. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against tampering with the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

Each of the various board boxes 930, 950, 1320, 1520, and 3042 including the main control board box 1320 is provided as a transparent member so that visual confirmation from the outside is possible. there is That is, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in particular, the payout control board 951 in the payout control board box 950 and the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 have surfaces inferior in fraud prevention performance. Since a mounting area is provided, it is important to ensure such transparency in order to obtain various effects related to anti-fraud measures, which will be described later.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the play area 5a, as shown. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 66). This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the game state (game situation), the ordinary lottery result, the special lottery result, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 66, the function display unit 1400 includes a status indicator 1401 consisting of one LED for displaying the game status, and four LEDs for displaying the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing game balls through the gate section 2003. Ordinary pattern display 1402 consisting of, normal holding indicator 1408 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings related to the passage of the game ball to the gate part 2003, and the lottery by accepting the game ball to the first start port 2002 A first special design indicator 1403 consisting of eight LEDs displaying the first special lottery result, and a first special reservation consisting of two LEDs displaying the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls to the first start port 2002 A number indicator 1404, a second special symbol indicator 1405 consisting of eight LEDs displaying the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the second start port 2004, and a second start port 2004 A second special reservation number indicator 1406 consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls, and when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" etc., the big winning opening 2005 A round indicator 1407 consisting of three LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening/closing pattern is mainly provided.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, patterns, etc., can be displayed by lighting, extinguishing, blinking, etc. of the provided LEDs as appropriate.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIG. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 . The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses the peripheral control board 1510. ing. Although illustration is omitted, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling light emission effects, sound effects, movable effects, etc., and an effect display control part for controlling effect images. .

[5-7. Game board side effect display device]
Next, the game board side effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. FIG. The game board side effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 . More specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back wall of the back box 3010 at substantially the center thereof. This game board side effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in the assembled state of the game board 5 . This game board side effect display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED as a backlight, and can display still images and moving images.

The game board side effect display device 1600 includes two left fixed pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side surface when viewed from the front, and a right fixed piece 1602 protruding outward from the right side surface when viewed from the front. This game board side effect display device 1600 has two fixed grooves which are open on the left inner circumferential surface in a front view inside a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010 described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. The two left fixing pieces 1601 are inserted into 3010c from the oblique rear of the back box 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 is moved forward, and the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020 to lock. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding the mechanism 3020 downward.

[5-8. front unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. FIG. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, and the front end projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112. , and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 .

The table unit 2000 of the present embodiment is capable of receiving a game ball hit into the game area 5a, and has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are located within the game area 5a. A first starting port 2002 that is always open to accept game balls at different positions, a gate part 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and a game ball A second starting port 2004 that enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing through the part 2003, and the lottery by accepting the game balls to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and a big prize winning port 2005 which enables acceptance of game balls according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery.

A plurality of general winning holes 2001 are arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is arranged substantially directly below the impact portion 1006 on the upper right side in the front view in the game area 5a. The second starting port 2004 is arranged right below the gate portion 2003 to the right in front view. The big winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening 1126 .

In addition, the front unit 2000 is attached directly above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002 and a big winning port 2005. A start port unit 2100 and a start port unit A lower side unit 2200 that is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of 2100 when viewed from the front and has a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and a side unit attached above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. It comprises an upper part 2300 and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 which is attached substantially in the center of the game area 5a and has a gate part 2003 and a second starting port 2004. - 特許庁

The starting port unit 2100 is arranged directly above the out port 1126 in the vicinity of the lower end portion of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. In this starter opening unit 2100, the first starter opening 2002 opens upward to a size capable of receiving only one game ball at a time, and the big winning opening 2005 receives a plurality of game balls at once ( For example, 4 to 6 pieces) extend to the left and right with an acceptable size, and are formed so as to be openable and closable according to the game state.

The lower side unit 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The lower side unit 2200 has a plurality of general winning holes 2001 capable of receiving game balls at all times.

The upper side unit 2300 is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front in the game area 5a, at the upper left side of the lower side unit 2200 in the front view, slightly below the center in the vertical direction. When the upper side unit 2300 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the left end of the shelf is close to the inner rail 1002, and the game ball that has flowed down along the inner rail 1002 is directed to the right (game area 5a). center in the left-right direction).

The center accessory 2500 is arranged above the starter unit 2100 and the lower side unit 2200 in the game area 5a and slightly above the center when viewed from the front. installed. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and through the frame, the game board side effect display device 1600 arranged behind the game panel 1100 and the effect units provided in the back unit 3000 are visually recognized from the front. be able to. The center accessory 2500 has a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004 .

The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 over the entire circumference except for the lower side, and a game ball hit into the game area 5a is projected inside the frame. It is impenetrable.

The center accessory 2500 has a warp entrance 2520 which is open on the outer peripheral surface on the left side in the front view so that game balls in the game area 5a can enter, and a game ball which has entered the warp entrance 2520 can be released into a frame. It has a warp exit 2522 that is open and a stage 2530 that rolls the game ball discharged from the warp exit 2522 in the left-right direction and then discharges it into the game area 5a. A starting port unit 2100 is arranged directly below the stage 2530, and when a game ball is released downward from the center of the stage 2530, the game ball is received in the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

[5-9. back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 on the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. FIG. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 on the game panel 1100 . Also, behind the back unit 3000, a game board side effect display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached.

The rear unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape with an open front. A box-shaped performance drive board box 3042 is provided so as to be rotatable around an axis extending left and right along the line and housing the performance drive board.

The back unit 3000 includes a back left center decorative unit 3050 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 from the center in the vertical direction on the left side in front view, and a back left center decoration unit 3050 attached below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back top left movable effect unit 3200 attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and on the left side in the front view, and the back box. A back left movable production unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view in the back box 3010, and a back upper middle attached from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A movable effect unit 3400 and a back bottom front movable effect unit 3500 attached in front of the back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 are provided.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape with an open front, and has a square opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall and a plate frame-like shape protruding backward from the periphery of the opening 3010a with a gap therebetween. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, and two fixing grooves 3010c recessed outward from the inside of the frame on the left side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b in rear view, into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the game board side effect display device 1600 is inserted. , and a notch portion 3010d to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached from the rear end to the rear wall of the back case 3010 at the center in the vertical direction of the right side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b in rear view.

The opening 3010 a is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600 . Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the game board side effect display device 1600 to be fitted in the frame. The back box 3010 has a lock mechanism 3020 attached to the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface in a vertically slidable manner.

In addition, the back box 3010 has a flat fixing piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixing piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with its front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. As shown in FIG. The back box 3010 has bosses, mounting holes, etc. for mounting each movable effect unit and the like at appropriate positions.

The back unit 3000 includes a back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100, a back top left movable effect unit 3200, a back left movable effect unit 3300, a back top middle movable effect unit 3400, and a back bottom front movable effect unit 3500, etc. , luminous effect, movable effect, display effect, etc. can be performed, and the player can be entertained by various effects, and the decline of the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

[6. Game content]
Next, game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 are released by the player rotating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. , the ball passes between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 and is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a, and the game with the game ball is started. A game ball hit to the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. The hitting strength of the game balls can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 302, and the more the handle 302 is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the ball can be hit. , the game ball can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and game balls are placed on the obstacle nails. By abutting, the falling speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are imparted to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates when the game ball abuts is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball hit to the upper part of the center role 2500 enters the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 from the highest part in front view, it hits a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown), The area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 will flow down. When the game ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center role 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opening on the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 , it is supplied from the warp exit 2522 to the stage 2530 .

The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530, moves left and right, and is released forward. When a game ball is released into the game area 5a from the center of the stage 2530, it is received by the first start hole 2002 with a high probability because it is positioned directly above the first start hole 2002. - 特許庁When the game balls are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released into the game area 5a from other than the center, it flows down toward the starting port unit 2100. - 特許庁A game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received by the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, the open big winning opening 2005, or the like.

By the way, if the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it will be moved to the center in the left-right direction by the upper side unit 2300, There is a possibility that it will be accepted in the starting port 2002 or the like. Then, when the game balls are received in the general winning hole 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

On the other hand, when the game ball hit to the upper part of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 (so-called right hitting), On the downstream side, the water flows through a region provided with the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 .

Then, when the right-handed game ball passes through the gate part 2003, a normal lottery is performed in the main control board 1310, and if the lottery result of the normal lottery is "normal hit", the second start port 2004 is opened for a predetermined time ( For example, between 0.3 to 10 seconds), it becomes an open state, and the reception of game balls to the second start port 2004 becomes possible. Then, when the game ball is received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, 4) game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. be.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game ball passing through the gate section 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery to the indication of the ordinary lottery result (for example, 0.5 hours). 01-60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5 . The second starting port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

If the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 before the normal lottery result is indicated after the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, the normal lottery result cannot be suggested. The start of the suggestion of the result is put on hold until the previous suggestion of the result of the ordinary lottery ends. Further, the upper limit of the number of reserved lottery results is set to four, and even if the game balls pass through the gate section 2003, the game balls exceeding the upper limit are discarded without being reserved. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the holdings.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game ball is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 sets an advantageous game state (for example, "jackpot", " A lottery for the special lottery result that generates a medium hit, a small win, a variable probability win, a reduced time win, etc. is performed. Then, the special lottery result of the lottery is indicated to the player over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also called special fluctuation time). In addition, the special lottery results drawn by receiving the game ball in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 include "loss", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", " 15R big hit”, “probability change (probability change) hit”, “time saving (time reduction) hit”, “probability change time saving hit”, “probability change time saving hit”, etc.

If the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is a special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state , After the elapse of the special fluctuation time, the large winning opening 2005 is in a state in which it is possible to receive game balls in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. When game balls are received in the big winning opening 2005 when the big winning opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls are sent from the payout device 830 by the main control board 1310 and the payout board. is dispensed to the upper tray 321 . Therefore, when the big winning hole 2005 can receive the game balls, by making the big winning hole 2005 accept the game balls, a lot of game balls can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

If the special lottery result is a "small win", the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a predetermined short period of time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds) to accept a game ball. Repeat the opening and closing pattern multiple times (eg, twice). On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed after the large winning opening 2005 is in an open state capable of accepting a game ball, or the opening to the large winning opening 2005 When any of the conditions of acceptance of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is satisfied, a predetermined opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern is referred to as one round) that makes the game ball unacceptable in a closed state is set. Repeat a number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, 2 rounds for "2R big win", 5 rounds for "5R big win", and 15 rounds for "15R big win" are repeated to generate an advantageous game state advantageous to the player.

In addition, in the "big hit", after the end of the big win game, change the probability that the special lottery result such as "big hit" will be drawn ("variable hit"), or change the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result. There is a "hit" to do ("time saving hit").

In this embodiment, the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2002 and the first start port 2002 and the second Since the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started when the game ball is accepted in the second start port 2004, the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. be. The number of reserved special lottery results to be reserved is up to four for the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, respectively. Even if the game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without being held. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the holdings.

This special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the game board side effect display device 1600 . The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the result of the special lottery. Suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 is performed by repeatedly lighting and extinguishing a plurality of LEDs to flash for a predetermined time, and then suggesting the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, the game board side effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and a special lottery result is suggested as a effect image. The effect image suggesting the result of the special lottery on the game board side effect display device 1600 is variably displayed by changing each symbol row in a state in which three symbol rows consisting of a plurality of symbols are arranged in the horizontal direction. The pattern rows are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the respective pattern rows are stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three stopped and displayed pattern rows are combined corresponding to the result of the special lottery. When the special lottery result is other than "losing", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a finalized image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, An advantageous game state (for example, a small winning game, a big winning game, etc.) occurs according to the drawn special lottery result.

It should be noted that the time indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (LED flashing time (fluctuation time)) and the time indicating the special lottery result on the game board side effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates). A longer time is set for the function display unit 1400 than the time until the finalized image is displayed.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 400 on the door frame 3 is displayed according to the special lottery result. Operation button 410, door frame side effect display device 460, various decorations of center accessory 2500, various decorations of back unit 3000, back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100, back upper left movable effect unit 3200, back left movable effect By appropriately using the unit 3300, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, the back lower front movable effect unit 3500, etc., it is possible to perform light emission effect, movable effect, display effect, etc., and the game can be played by various effects. It is possible to keep the player's interest in the game from declining.

[Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The door frame 3 in this embodiment is the door unit of the present invention, the main frame 4 in this embodiment is the main unit of the present invention, and the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 of this embodiment is the present invention. , the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment and the operation button 410 in the second effect operation unit 400A The button lens 411 corresponds to the first decorative body of the present invention, and the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 in this embodiment corresponds to the first decorative portion of the present invention.

In addition, the decorative member inside the operation button of the base unit in this embodiment, the main screen 471 and sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A are the second decorations of the present invention, The second button interior decoration portion 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432, the peripheral edge decoration portion 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decoration member 476, and the peripheral edge decoration member 478 each correspond to the second decoration portion of the present invention. .

Further, each LED and sub-screen decoration substrate mounted on the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433, the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper interior decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower interior decoration substrate 436 in this embodiment. The LED 477a of 477 is the luminous body of the present invention, the door frame side effect display device 460 of the present embodiment is the back side decoration means of the present invention, the frame unit 415 of the present embodiment, the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, and The unit bases 451 of the second base unit 450 each correspond to the base portion of the present invention.

[8. Characteristic effects of the present embodiment]
Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation of the effect operation unit 400 (or the second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the front surface of the plate unit 320 protruding forward in the door frame 3 is performed. When the button lens 411 of the button 410 is viewed from the outside, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (or the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A) The peripheral edge decorative portion 472a, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral edge decorative member 478, etc.) overlapped decoration, the first button decoration portion 411a and the door frame side effect display device 460 overlapped decoration, etc. Since it is possible to show the player the decoration full of decorativeness with a sense of perspective, it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player and to differentiate it from other pachinko machines. The pachinko machine 1 can be made expensive.

In addition, the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A (screen unit 470)), the door frame side effect display device 460, etc. are arranged in the movement direction of the button lens 411 (operation button 410). In addition, since the button lens 411 is supported by the unit base 431 (unit base 451) so that it can be moved by the player's operation, the player operates (presses) the button lens 411 to move it. Then, the first button decorative portion 411a and the second inner button decorative portion 432g (or the peripheral edge decorative portion 472a, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral edge decorative member 478, etc.) approach or separate, The distance between the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral edge decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral edge decoration member 478, etc.) changes, so that the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 411a It is possible to change the perspective of the decoration that appears to overlap with the button interior decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral edge decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral edge decoration member 478, etc.). The decoration (intersection mode) by the second button interior decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral edge decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral edge decoration member 478, etc.) can be changed by the player himself, and the player can It is possible to entertain and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the center of the button lens 411 bulges outward, which is the side opposite to the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A), the first decorative body Since a space is formed between the second decorative body and the player, the distance from the button lens 411 to the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button of the operation button inner decorative member 432 The distance to the inner decorative portion 432g (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) is greatly different, and the button lens 411 is operated to move it. When the position of the player's eyes moves even when the screen is not on, the first button decorative portion 411a and the second inner button decorative portion 432g (or the peripheral edge decorative portion 472a, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral edge decorative member 478, etc.) are displayed. Since the intersecting state (overlapping condition) with the decoration changes, the moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

Furthermore, since the outer peripheral edge of the transparent button lens 411 is provided with the first button decoration portion 411a having a radial decoration toward the center, the central side of the button lens 411 where the first button decoration portion 411a is not provided The operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) and the door frame side effect display device 460 on the back side can be visually recognized well through the first button decoration portion 411a. The player's line of sight can be directed to the center of the button lens 411 by the decoration of , and through the center of the transparent button lens 411, the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) or the door frame It is possible to draw the player's attention to the side effect display device 460 strongly.

In addition, since the operation button interior decoration member 432 is provided with the second button interior decoration portion 432g having a plurality of polygonal decorations concentrically centered around the center, the button lens 411 can be seen from the outside. The decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a and the decoration of the second button interior decoration portion 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432 intersect with each other, so that the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decoration portion 432g The pachinko machine 1 can be made to have a high appeal to the players by making the decoration by the first button decoration part 411a and the second button interior decoration part 432g conspicuous. can.

In addition, since the decoration of the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 has a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centering on the center, the second button inner decoration portion 432g By the decoration, the player's line of sight and interest can be directed to the door frame side effect display device 460 visible in the center of the operation button inner decorative member 432, and the decoration (effect image) of the door frame side effect display device can be enjoyed. can.

Furthermore, each LED mounted on the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433, the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper interior decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower interior decoration substrate 436 (or the sub-screen decoration substrate 477) When the LED 477a) emits light, the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the sub-screen decorative member 476) can be decorated with light emission, and the button lens 411 can also be decorated with light emission. In addition to the decoration of the button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decoration portion 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476), the player can also be entertained by light emission decoration. At this time, the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) are formed by the second button inner decoration portion 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476). Since the light from each LED (or LED 477a) of the decoration substrate 436 can be diffused, in the second button interior decoration portion 432g, the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433, the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434, and the operation button top Direct light from each LED (or LED 477a) of the interior decoration substrate 435 and the operation button lower interior decoration substrate 436 emits light for decoration. Indirect light diffused by the portion 432g (or the sub-screen decorative member 476) is used for luminous decoration, while the second button inner decorative portion 432g (sub-screen decorative member 476) is strongly luminous-decorated. Since the first button decoration portion 411a is weakly illuminated, the LEDs of the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433, the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper interior decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower interior decoration substrate 436 are illuminated. (or the LED 477a) is illuminated, and the perspective is emphasized when the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) are viewed from the outside. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing by showing the decoration to the player and strongly attracting the interest of the player.

In addition, since the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) is arranged in the moving direction of the button lens 411, the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the door There is no need to secure a space for the button lens 411 to move to a portion outside the outer circumference of the frame-side second effect display device 460A), and the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the door frame The side second effect display device 460A) can be spread outward to be made as large as possible, and the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be enlarged. 460A) can be highlighted. In addition, as described above, since it is not necessary to secure a space for movement outside the button lens 411, by arranging the frame unit 415 outside the button lens 411, the whole pachinko machine 1 can be The pachinko machine 1 can be made highly decorative and highly appealing to strongly attract the interest of players by improving its appearance.

In addition, since the center of the button lens 411 bulges outward, the button lens 411 has a flat shape when the player hits the button lens 411 to give an impact to a part of the surface. As compared with the case, the applied impact force is easily distributed over the entire button lens 411, so that the button lens 411 can be made difficult to break (hard to break). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the breakage of the button lens 411 during the game, which interrupts the game and makes some players feel frustrated and lose interest. By making it difficult, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game area 5a of the game board 5 arranged in the main body frame 4 can be viewed from the front through the through hole 111 in the door frame 3. The unit base 431 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 protruding forward on the side has an outer diameter of 10 cm. Operation buttons 410 that are movable (advance and retreat) by being operated by the player with a circular shape of about 15 cm within a range of ~30 cm, and decoration inside the operation buttons that can be seen from the front through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation buttons 410 Since the member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the frame-shaped frame unit 415 in which the operation button 410 is arranged in the frame are attached, the conventional Since the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) having as large an operation button 410 as possible can be seen at a position where the storage tray for the game balls is conspicuous in the pachinko machine, the player can see the performance operation unit 400 at a glance. The pachinko machine 1 can be made to recognize that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 is highly appealing. The frame unit 415 is provided with a translucent frame side lens 417, and a translucent second button decoration is provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) so as to be adjacent to the frame side lens 417. 411b, and attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) on the rear side of the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b. First LEDs 422a and 423a for decorating the second button decoration part 411b with light emission and second LEDs 422b and 423b for decorating the frame side lens 417 with light emission are provided, and the frame side lens 417 and the second button are provided. An inner tubular portion 416d of the frame main body 416 partitioning the decorative portion 411b, and a main body portion 413a and an inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 partitioning the second button decorative portion 411b and the central side of the button lens 411. Therefore, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the center side of the frame side lens 417 and the button lens 411, or the second LED 422b , 423b can be prevented from illuminating the second button decoration portion 411b, and the adjacent frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be independently decorated with light emission. can. Therefore, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be clearly decorated with light emission, and a good-looking light emission effect can be performed. In addition, by appropriately combining lights off, lighting, blinking, brightness, color, etc., for the frame side lenses 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b that are adjacent to each other, various patterns of light emission effects can be performed. This makes it difficult for the player to get bored, entertains the player, and suppresses the decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the first LEDs 422a and 423a that decorate the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the second LEDs 422b and 423b that decorate the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are combined into one operation button left outer decoration. Since the operation button left external decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right external decoration substrate 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the second button decoration portion Compared to the case where 411b (operation button 410) is provided with a substrate, the first LEDs 422a and 423a can be kept away from the second button decoration portion 411b as much as possible, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a can be sufficiently emitted. It is possible to irradiate the second button decoration portion 411b in a diffused state. Therefore, since the second button decoration portion 411b can be uniformly decorated with light emission, the appearance of the light emission decoration of the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 can be improved, and the player's interest is strongly attracted. At the same time, the player can be entertained, and the decline in interest of the player can be suppressed.

Further, since the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (the second base unit 450), the operation button left external decoration board 422 moves along with the movement of the operation button 410. Also, the wiring connected to the operation button right external decoration board 423 is not bent or stretched, and disconnection of the wiring due to fatigue can be eliminated. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 (the second button decoration portion 411b) is moved, the wiring will not be disconnected. The player can be entertained with the luminous decoration without any problem, and the loss of interest of the player can be suppressed.

In addition, since the second button decorative portion 411b is provided on the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the transparent button lens 411 can be passed through the rear operation button inner decorative member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460. When looking at (the door frame side second effect display device 460A), the outer edge of the operation button inner decorative member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) is the second button decoration portion 411b. is decorated, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. By appropriately lighting the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b, the operation button internal decorative member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be seen behind. As described above, the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417, which decorate the outer edge of the button lens 411, can be decorated with light emission in various patterns. It can be strongly attracted to the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the light emission effect, the operation of the operation button 410, and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be strongly attracted. It is possible to entertain the effect image or the like by the effect display device 460A) and suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, since the button lens 411 (operation button 410) provided with the second button decorative portion 411b on the outer edge can be operated by the player, the operation button 410 can be operated by the player during execution of the player participation type production. By allowing the operation, the player can enjoy the operation of the operation button 410 (player-participation type performance), and the player's interest in the game can be suppressed. Then, when executing the player-participation type production, the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are decorated with light emission, thereby attracting the interest of the player to the operation button 410. Therefore, the player can be prompted to operate the operation button 410, and the player can be entertained by participating in the player participation type production.

Furthermore, since only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 is provided with the opaque main body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f that can be decorated by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 can be The portion closer to the center than the button decoration portion 411b is not decorated (illuminated) by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and the center side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) is brightened so that it is positioned backward. It is possible to prevent the operation button inner decorative member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) from becoming difficult to see from the front. Therefore, the second button decoration part 411b can be decorated with light emission in a good state, and the transparent button lens 411 can pass through the transparent button lens 411 to the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460). The display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can be sufficiently entertained with decorations, light-emitting effects, and the like, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, since the inner cylindrical portion 416d extends from the rear side of the frame unit 415 having the frame side lenses 417, on the rear side of the frame unit 415, the frame side lenses 417 and the second button decoration of the operation button 410 are arranged. The portion 411b can be completely partitioned by the inner cylindrical portion 416d. On the other hand, at the end (rear end) of the inner tubular portion 416d near the operation button left external decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right external decoration substrate 423, light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b is emitted. Since the rear end of the inner cylindrical portion 416d is positioned closer to the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 than the diffusion range, the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external Even if a gap is formed between the decoration substrate 423 and the front surface, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the frame side lens 417, and the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b illuminates the second button decoration portion 411b. never do. Therefore, it is possible to realize the pachinko machine 1 that reliably blocks the light by the inner cylindrical portion 416d and reliably exhibits the above-described effects.

In addition, since the body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f of the button base 413 extend from the rear side of the operation button 410 (the button lens 411), the rear side of the operation button 410 has the second button decorative portion 411b. and the central side of the button lens 411 can be completely partitioned by the body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f. On the other hand, the operation button left external decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right external decoration substrate 423 are located near the end (rear end) of the main body 413a near the operation button left external decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right external decoration substrate 423. , the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not pass through the rear end of the main body portion 413a, and the entrance of the light to the central side of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 is completely blocked. can be done. Therefore, the second button decoration part 411b can be illuminated in a favorable state by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and the transparent button lens 411 can be passed through the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 ( The door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can be sufficiently entertained with the decoration and the light emission effect, thereby suppressing the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, when viewed from the front, the second button decoration is placed in front of the outer portion of the operation button inner decorative member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) arranged behind the operation button 410 (button lens 411). Since the portion 411b is positioned, the operation button inner decorative member 432 (the door frame side second The second button decoration portion 411b can make the outside member and the rear side (back side) of the effect display device 460A) difficult to see, and the deterioration of the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented. Also, at this time, if the second button decoration portion 411b is decorated with light emission by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the brightness of the second button decoration portion 411b is changed by the operation button interior decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect Since the outer side and the rear side of the display device 460A) are relatively dark, the members on the outer side and the rear side of the operation button inner decorative member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be made difficult to see. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the frame unit 415, the operation button inner decorative member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), etc. can be further improved, and the player can A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, since the outer peripheral shape of the operation button 410 is circular, the second button decoration portion 411b provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) and the frame adjacent to the second button decoration portion 411b The side lens 417 has an arcuate shape. Therefore, by appropriately emitting light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b, it is possible to create a light emission effect such that the light circulates around the outer edge of the operation button 410, or light emission such that the light spreads from the inside to the outside of the operation button 410. Since it is possible to show the player an effect, a light-emitting effect in which light converges from the outside to the inside of the operation button 410, etc., the player can be kept from getting bored with various light-emitting effects, and the player can enjoy it. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper tray 321 used for the game by hitting the game balls stored in the tray unit cover 326 of the tray unit 320 in the door frame 3 into the game area 5a is formed. At the same time, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is detachably attached to the front side and lower side of the upper plate 321 to create a mounting space of a predetermined size behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). A remaining space of the mounting space 326j is formed, a portion corresponding to the lower plate first region A1 of the lower plate main body 325 is arranged on the left side of the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and the remaining space of the mounting space 326j is formed from that portion. Since the part corresponding to the lower plate second region A2 in the lower plate main body 325 is extended inside to attach the lower plate 322 capable of storing game balls, the lower plate 322 looks small when viewed from the front. As a result, the lower plate 322 can be made inconspicuous, and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be relatively conspicuous. Therefore, when the present pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) can be seen at the position where the upper tray and the lower tray are vertically aligned in the conventional pachinko machine. A highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of making a player recognize that it is different from a conventional pachinko machine at a glance and strongly attracting the interest of the player. can.

In addition, in the portion of the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322, it extends upward from the upper end of the main body vertical wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer periphery, and extends to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. Since lower tray covers 340, 340A for regulating the movement of game balls are provided, the game balls in the lower tray 322 are prevented from coming into contact with the rear side of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A). , the game balls supplied to the lower tray 322 and the game balls stored in the lower tray 322 contact or press the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). can be prevented. Therefore, the game ball does not come into contact with the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and the game ball does not damage the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to the breakage of the performance operation unit 400 (the second performance operation unit 400A), thereby preventing the player from losing interest, and the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

In addition, lower plate covers 340 and 340A are provided in the lower plate second area A2 of the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322 to prevent game balls from moving to the remaining space side of the main body vertical wall portion 325b and the mounting space 326j. , it is possible to prevent game balls from entering (spilling out) from the lower tray main body 325 into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost or uncomfortable due to the game ball entering the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, thereby enhancing the player's interest in the game. can be suppressed.

In addition, since the portion of the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322 is covered by the lower plate covers 340 and 340A, the game ball supplied into the lower plate 322 bounces within the lower plate 322. Even if it jumps up, it can be reliably prevented from entering the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved. In addition, since the portion of the lower tray second area A2 of the lower tray main body 325 is covered by the lower tray covers 340 and 340A, the player can easily move the lower tray main body 325 toward the lower tray first area A1 (lower tray opening). 326d) into the lower tray second area A2, the lower tray covers 340 and 340A can prevent the fingertips from entering the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. etc. can be prevented from being injured by touching the lower surface of the upper plate 321 or the rear side of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), and the player can play in a safe state. can be done.

Furthermore, since there is a gap between the lower plate covers 340, 340A and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), impact and pressure due to the contact of the game ball against the lower plate covers 340, 340A is not transmitted from the lower tray covers 340, 340A to the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), and damage to the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is ensured. can be prevented.

Further, in the portion of the lower tray second region A2 in the lower tray main body 325 of the lower tray 322, since the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is provided in front of the lower tray ball supply port 323c, the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is opened. In this state, the game balls discharged from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can enter the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a as it is and be discharged downward (dollar box), and the game balls can be discharged downward (dollar box). It is possible to make it difficult to reach the front end side of the standing wall portion 325b. Even if the game ball jumps over the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, since the lower tray covers 340 and 340A are provided as described above, the game ball will not reach the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Since it is possible to prevent contact with the rear side, it is possible to prevent damage to the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), reduce the interruption of the game, and reduce the player's interest in the game. can be suppressed.

In addition, since the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower plate main body 325 near the front end of the lower plate 322 is higher toward the front, the game ball heading toward the front end side of the main body vertical wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 is tilted. By climbing the bottom, the moving speed of the game ball can be attenuated. Therefore, since the speed of the game ball contacting the lower tray covers 340, 340A can be slowed down, the lower tray covers 340, 340A reliably restrict the movement of the game ball to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. In addition, it is possible to reduce the impact when the game ball contacts the lower tray covers 340, 340A and the main body vertical wall portion 325b, thereby suppressing damage to them.

Further, since at least the lower tray covers 340, 340A are formed as separate members, when the lower tray covers 340, 340A are damaged, they can be easily repaired by simply replacing the lower tray covers 340, 340A. 1 can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the center of the front surface in the left-right direction bulges most forward below the game area 5a of the game board 5 where a game such as receiving game balls into the general winning opening 2001 or the like is performed. After the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 is provided, the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A are detachably attached to the most forwardly bulging portion thereof, and the upper plate 321 is attached to the plate unit cover 326. and a lower plate 322, and the storage plate (upper plate 321 and lower plate 322) is provided with the outer side of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) when viewed from the front. It has a lower tray first area A1 and a lower tray second area A2 positioned in the rear space of the mounting space 326j behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) when viewed from the front. Therefore, when viewed from the front, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be conspicuous, and the storage plate (upper plate 321 and lower plate 322) can be made small and inconspicuous. can. Therefore, since the conspicuous production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be seen in the part where the upper tray and the lower tray were visible in the conventional pachinko machine, the game machine is different from the conventional pachinko machine for the player. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing and capable of strongly attracting the player's interest.

In addition, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached to the center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, the portion of the surface of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is open is Although it is smaller, the lower plate main body 325 having the lower plate second region A2 located in the space behind the installation space 326j behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in front view. Since the extension part 325B, the second extension part 325C, and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are provided, game balls can be stored in a range (lower plate second area A2) of the lower plate 322 that cannot be seen from the front. can. Therefore, since a sufficient amount of game balls can be secured contrary to the appearance from the front, the player can concentrate on the game without worrying about the remaining amount of game balls in the lower tray 322.例文帳に追加This allows the player to enjoy the game and suppress the loss of interest.

Further, the lower tray main body 325 and the main body portion 325A having the lower tray first area A1, the lower tray covers 340 and 340A having the lower tray second area A2, the first extension section 325B and the second extension section Since the lower plate 322 is configured by attaching (combining) the portion 325C, a plurality of lower plate covers 340, 340A, the first extension portion 325B, the second extension portion 325C, and the like having different sizes are prepared in advance. , By attaching the lower plate covers 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B and the second extension part 325C of sizes corresponding to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size of the mounting space 326j in the plate unit cover 326, etc. The volume of dish 322 can be optimized. Further, as described above, by rearranging (replacing) the lower tray covers 340, 340A, the first extension portion 325B, and the second extension portion 325C, it is possible to correspond to the size of the space behind the mounting space 326j. Since the size of this rear space depends on the rearward projection amount of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), various production operation units 400 (second production operation unit 400A) with different rearward projection amounts can be used. The lower plate 322 can be adapted to the production operation unit 400A), and the versatility of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

In addition, since the lower plate 322 is provided with a bottom wall portion 325a and a main standing wall portion 325b rising from the outer peripheral end of the bottom wall portion 325a, the lower plate 322 becomes a downwardly recessed container-like shape and a game ball. can be reliably stored. In addition, since the lower tray covers 340 and 340A have the cover vertical wall section 340a that rises from the upper end of the main body vertical wall section 325b of the lower tray main body 325, various shapes of the lower tray covers 340 and 340A are prepared in advance. By combining (attaching) the lower tray covers 340 and 340A having shapes corresponding to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size (shape) of the space behind the mounting space 326j, etc., various forms can be accommodated. It is possible to achieve the same effects as those described above.

In the lower tray 322 composed of the lower tray main body 325 and the lower tray covers 340 and 340A, the lower tray covers 340 and 340A are combined (attached) to the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower tray main body 325. Therefore, since the part of the lower tray 322 on which the game balls are placed becomes the lower tray main body 325, the lower tray main body 325 and the lower tray covers 340, 340A are placed on the part where the load of the game balls is increased due to the storage. Boundaries (joints, dividing lines PL) are never located. Therefore, since the load of the stored game balls is received only by the lower tray main body 325, even if many game balls are stored, the lower tray covers 340 and 340A are separated from the lower tray main body 325 by a force. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lower tray covers 340 and 340A from coming off the lower tray main body 325.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, an upper plate capable of storing game balls is provided below and in front of the game area 5a of the game board 5 where a game is performed such that the game balls are accepted in the general winning opening 2001 or the like. 321 and a lower plate 322, and a lower plate ball supply port 323c and a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322 by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) arranged in the center in the left-right direction. Since more than half of the lower plate 322 including the and is made invisible from the front (player), the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be made neat and attractive, and the player is interested. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing, capable of strongly attracting . In addition, since the game ball heading from the lower dish ball supply port 323c to the lower dish ball extraction hole 322a is made difficult to see by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), the player can play the game inside the lower dish 322. It is possible to prevent the player from being distracted by making it difficult to notice the flow of the ball, and to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, by the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), the bottom plate ball supply port 323c and the bottom plate in the bottom plate 322 for guiding the game ball from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a Since the part between the ball extraction hole 322a and the game ball guided by the guide means such as the ball guide part 322c and the buffer part 322d is made difficult to see, if the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is kept open, , the game balls supplied to the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c are guided by the guiding means and are smoothly (immediately) discharged downward from the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a. It is possible to create the illusion that the game balls are discharged below the lower tray 322 (dollar box) without passing through the lower tray 322.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to make the player less likely to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower tray 322, and to make the player concentrate on the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), more than half of the lower plate 322 including the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate ball removal hole 322a, etc. is made invisible from the front, so it is probable that In addition, the lower tray ball supply port 323c, the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, and the like are positioned behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). That is, since half or more of the lower plate 322 is made to wrap around behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), the size of the lower plate 322 seen from the front is different from the actual size of the lower plate. Since the size (capacity) of 322 is large, it is possible to secure a sufficient amount of game balls stored in the lower tray 322 compared to its appearance.

Also, in the state where the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is open, the game ball released into the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c is transferred to the lower tray ball supply port 323c on the bottom surface of the lower tray 322 Since the guide means such as the ball guide portion 322c and the buffer portion 322d, which are located between the ball hole 322a, the ball can be smoothly guided to the lower plate ball hole 322a and discharged to the bottom of the lower plate 322 (dollar box). , the game ball can be prevented from circulating in the lower tray 322, and the game ball circulating in the lower tray 322 can be reliably made invisible from the front (player). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the flow of the game balls in the lower tray 322, thereby preventing the player from being distracted and suppressing the loss of interest in the game.

Furthermore, if the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is left open, the game ball supplied from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray 322 is immediately released by the ball guiding part 322c or the like without the player noticing it. Since the ball can be discharged downward from the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, the player is given the illusion that the game ball is discharged below the lower tray 322 (dollar box) without passing through the lower tray 322.例文帳に追加can be done. As a result, it is possible to make the player less likely to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower tray 322, and to make the player concentrate on the game and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), more than half of the storage area (storage area) of the game ball in the plan view of the lower plate 322 is made invisible from the front, so the lower plate visible from the front Since the actual lower tray 322 is larger than the visible size of the lower tray 322, it is possible to secure a sufficient amount of game balls to be stored in the same manner as the lower tray of the conventional pachinko machine.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the door frame 3 protruding forward below the game area 5a of the game board 5 where a game such as receiving game balls into the general winning opening 2001 or the like is performed. Effect operation unit attachment for attaching a large effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) having the same height as the total height of the plate unit cover 326 at the center in the left-right direction of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320. In addition to having a portion 326a, the lower plate front decorative portion 326c on the left and right sides of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 is recessed so as to be scooped out rearward from the center in the vertical direction. Because of the shape, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a can be seen to protrude greatly forward, and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect The operation unit 400A) can be conspicuous. Therefore, the large production operation unit 400 (the second production operation unit 400A) can be seen in an emphasized state at the position where the upper tray and the lower tray were arranged vertically in the conventional pachinko machine. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to be highly appealing by making the player recognize that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine just by looking at it. The lower plate 322 is recessed rearward from the plate front lower decorative portion 326c recessed rearward on both the left and right outer sides of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. A part is wrapped around the back of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and the amount of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 (volume of the lower plate 322) can be sufficiently secured. The player does not have to worry about the lower plate 322 being filled with game balls while playing, and the player can concentrate on the game, enjoy the game, and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since a part of the lower plate 322 wraps around behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), when the player puts his or her hand into the lower plate 322 from the front, the fingertips are placed in the lower plate. It is possible to make it difficult to touch the rear wall of 322 (the front surface of the plate unit base 323), the lower plate cover 340, and the like. As a result, it is possible for the player to perceive that a sufficient amount of game balls is secured even by touch, and in a state in which the game balls are stored in the lower tray 322, Since it can be recognized that many game balls are stored in the game, the player can be given a feeling of satisfaction, and the game can be enjoyed and the decline in interest can be suppressed. In addition, since the fingertips of the hand placed in the lower tray 322 do not easily touch the rear wall of the lower tray 322, the lower tray cover 340, etc., the player feels the same as the lower tray in the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the sense of incompatibility given to a player who is used to the conventional pachinko machine, and to reassure the player and suppress the decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, since the lower plate 322 is formed so as to become wider toward the back side (rear), even if the front side is small, a sufficient storage amount of game balls can be secured. In other words, since the portion on the front end side of the lower plate 322 is made small, the lower plate 322 is made inconspicuous on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 (the plate front lower decorative portion 326c) where the lower plate 322 is open. , and the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A) can be relatively conspicuous. Therefore, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be provided while securing a sufficient amount of game balls stored in the lower plate 322, and the appeal to the player can be enhanced, and the player can be attracted. It is possible to entertain and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the lower tray cover 340 covers the sides and upper part of the portion of the lower tray 322 that wraps around behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), the player can move inside the lower tray 322. When a player puts his or her hand in, it is possible to prevent the fingertip or the like from touching the inner surface of the plate unit cover 326 or the rear surface of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) and get injured. The game can be played in a safe state. Also, the lower tray cover 340 can prevent game balls from entering (spilling out) from the lower tray 322 into the tray unit cover 326 .

Furthermore, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is arranged in the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be operated from the player side. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous and highly appealing, capable of strongly attracting the interest of the players, and the decoration by the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) can be easily seen. By doing so, it is possible to keep the player entertained with decorations and effects of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), thereby suppressing a decrease in interest of the player.

In addition, since the lower tray 322 is provided with a lower tray ball supply port 323c that can communicate with the upper tray 321 and a lower tray ball extraction hole 322a that penetrates vertically so as to be openable and closable, the conventional pachinko machine can be used. Since it has the same function as the lower tray 322, when a player accustomed to the conventional pachinko machine plays a game with this pachinko machine 1, the function of the lower tray 322 will not be confused and the same as the conventional one. The game can be played with a relaxed feeling, and the player can concentrate on the game and enjoy the game. In addition, since the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball extraction hole 322a are respectively arranged behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), when viewed from the front, the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball extraction hole 322a are arranged. A pachinko machine with a high appealing power, in which a lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is not visible from the player side, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. machine 1.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the dish unit 320 protruding forward below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 facing the game area 5a of the door frame 3. A door frame side effect display device 460 capable of presenting effects to the player on the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326. The operation button interior decoration member 432 (the screen unit 470 of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side) that decorates the outside of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (the screen unit 470) is attached, and the outer periphery of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) is surrounded. An operation button 410 having a transparent button lens 411 whose diameter is about 15 cm and whose center bulges in a direction (outward) away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) is attached. A cylindrical button base 413 that includes a first button decoration portion 411a, a second button decoration portion 411b, and a button frame 412 and protrudes from the button lens 411 side toward the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side. , the first button decorative portion 411a, the button base 413, etc. allow the operation button inner decorative member 432 (door frame side second It is possible to reduce visibility of the outer edge and the back side (rear side) of the screen unit 470) of the two-effect display device 460A, and the appearance of the operation buttons 410 can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the appearance of the operation button 410, the operation button inner decorative member 432 provided inside, the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A), etc., and improve the appearance of the player. A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 of the operation button 410 allow the button lens 411 and the button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) to pass through the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470). Since it is possible to make the outer edge and inner side of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) difficult to see, by increasing the outer diameter of the operation button 410, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) can be 470) is relatively large, it can be satisfactorily hidden by the first button decoration part 411a and the like, so that while preventing deterioration in appearance, a large operation button with an outer diameter of about 15 cm can be used. 410 (button lens 411) can be implemented without problems. Therefore, since the operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be enlarged, the pachinko machine 1 can be made conspicuous and the player's interest is strongly enhanced. The pachinko machine 1 can be made attractive and highly appealing.

Further, since the button base 413 (main body portion 413a) projecting in a cylindrical shape from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side is provided, the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decorative member 432 ( When the gap between the screen units 470) is viewed obliquely, the inner wall of the button base 413 can shield the objects outside the operation button inner decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) so that they cannot be seen. The appearance of the button 410 can be further improved.

In addition, since the transparent button lens 411 has a three-dimensional shape (hemispherical shape) that bulges in a direction (outward) away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450), the outer periphery of the button lens 411 The surface is a plane formed by the front end side opening of the button base 413 (a plane perpendicular to the direction in which the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) and the button lens 411 are aligned, that is, the advancing/retreating direction of the operation button 410). ), the light is easily refracted when viewed from the player's side. Therefore, the first button decorative portion 411a, the second button decorative portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 provided on the outer peripheral edge are combined to form the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decorative member 432 (screen unit 470). ), the outer edge of the operation button internal decorative member 432 (screen unit 470), the inner side, and the like can be made difficult to see through the gap, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

In addition, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape that bulges outward, the volume inside the operation button 410 increases. The side effect display device 460 (the second door frame side effect display device 460A) can be made larger or made easier to move, and the door frame side effect display device can entertain the player through the operation button 410.例文帳に追加460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be easily provided, and the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain the players more can be embodied.

Furthermore, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape, the operation button 410 is provided with design (decorativeness). can be made to face, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to be played.

In addition, in the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 provided on the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411, the button frame 412 is made opaque. It is possible to reliably hide the inner side of the operation button 410, the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470), etc. from being seen through the gap between the lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470). It is possible to improve the appearance by reducing deterioration in the appearance of the button 410 and the like.

In addition, the button frame 412 is provided with an opaque button frame 412 covering the entire circumference with a predetermined width from the outer peripheral end of the button lens 411 to the inside, and cooperates with the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 411b to allow the player to Since the gap between the body portion 413a of the button base 413 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) in the operation button 410 can be made difficult to see from the side, the body portion 413a and the operation button interior decoration member 432 ( The gap between the screen unit 470 and the screen unit 470) can be increased, and the space for moving the operation button 410 and the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A can be easily secured. can be moved well.

Furthermore, since the outer periphery of the button lens 411 is cylindrical, the operation button 410 can be moved smoothly and easily because there is no directivity in the outer periphery compared to the polygonal shape. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is enlarged, it can be pressed without any problem, and the player can surely enjoy the player-participation type performance using the operation button 410, thereby suppressing the loss of interest.

In addition, since the operation button 410 is made large, when the player participatory effect is executed in which the player operates the operation button 410, it is possible to easily operate the operation button 410 without confirming the position of the operation button 410. Since the operation button 410 can be easily touched and pressed, the player can easily participate in the player-participation type performance using the operation button 410, which amuses the player and reduces interest. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is provided in the operation button 410, the player's interest is manipulated by presenting the effect image according to the game state. It can be strongly attracted to the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the button 410, and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) In addition to being able to entertain the performance, the player can be prompted to operate the operation button 410 by means of a performance image or light-emitting performance by the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A). , the decline in interest can be suppressed by making the player actively participate in the player-participation type performance and amusing it. In addition, by executing the performance within the operation button 410, it is possible to make some players think that something good will happen, thereby heightening the expectation for the game and suppressing the decrease in interest. can be done.

In addition, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized through the transparent button lens 411 of the large operation button 410 (the portion inside the first button decorative portion 411a). Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the operation buttons 410 of the pachinko machine 1 are clearly different from the operation buttons of the conventional pachinko machine, and the appeal to the players is high. It can be used as a pachinko machine 1, and at the same time, heightens the player's expectation for the performance using the operation button 410 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) in the operation button 410.例文帳に追加It is possible to suppress the decline in interest of the player.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments. and design changes are possible.

That is, in the above-described embodiment, the game machine is applied to the pachinko machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be applied, and even in this case, the same effects as those described above can be obtained.

In the above embodiment, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 is formed with the first button decorative portion 411a on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the button lens 411 without the first button decorative portion 411a may be used.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the operation button 410 has the opaque button frame 412 attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A decorative portion for hiding the rear side may be formed along the entire circumference at a portion of the lens 411 corresponding to the button frame 412 .

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, in the operation button 410, the base unit 430 (second Although the button base 413 (main body portion 413a) projecting cylindrically toward the second base unit 450) side is shown, it is not limited to this, and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button and the second effect on the door frame side are shown. At least one projection may protrude toward the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) so as to partially surround the entire outer periphery of the display device 460A. The shape of the button base 413 may be a shape that follows the outer circumference of the button lens 411 or a shape that does not follow the outer circumference of the button lens 411 . The button base 413 may have decorations (planar decorations such as pasting stickers or printing, or three-dimensional decorations such as unevenness such as reliefs) on at least the inner wall side. Furthermore, the button base 413 may be translucent or opaque. Also, the button base 413 may be colored or may be colorless and transparent. Also, when the button base 413 is transparent, it is desirable that at least one of the inner wall side and the outer wall side is subjected to light diffusion processing such as embossing, slits, prisms, and the like.

In the above embodiment, the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward only from the left outer portion of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326, but this is the case. but not limited to, recessed backward from both left and right sides of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), and a lower plate that is connected to each other behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) 322 may be used, and only the part on the right outside of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is recessed rearward, and a part of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) wraps around to the rear. You can let it be.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the shape of the portion (front lower decorative portion 326c) of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward (the shape of the front end of the lower plate 322) is curved rearward. Although an example of a recessed shape has been shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the front surface may be recessed in the shape of a polygonal prism or a polyhedron.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached to the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. , ``equipped with a rotating body having a decoration on its surface,'' ``equipped with a decoration with a decoration and a movable device for moving the decoration,'' and ``a game Equipped with decorations that three-dimensionally imitate characters, items, logos, and scenes (diorama), etc. in line with the concept of the game machine", "Characters, items, logos in line with the concept of the game machine, and predetermined models A member such as a unit or a panel having decorations such as "," etc. applied by stickers, printing, etc. may be attached. Moreover, the member attached to the attachment space 326j (the performance operation unit attachment portion 326a) does not have to be one, and a plurality of (two or more) members may be attached. For example, separate members may be attached, such as a member attached to the upper half of the attachment space 326j and a member attached to the lower half of the attachment space 326j.

In the above-described embodiment, the dish unit cover 326 is provided with the frontwardly opening effect operation unit attachment portion 326a for attaching the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A). However, the plate unit cover (for example, a panel-shaped cover portion) that does not have an opening (effect operation unit mounting portion 326a) for mounting the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) A space corresponding to the mounting space 326j (or the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) may be formed behind the plate unit cover. In addition, on the front surface of such a plate unit cover, decorations such as characters, items, logos, predetermined models, etc. in accordance with the concept of the game machine can be applied by stickers, printing, attachment of decorative members, etc. desirable.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, an area slightly larger than half of the storage area (storage area) of the game balls in the plan view of the lower plate 322 is covered by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) as a cover. Although an example is shown in which it is difficult to see from the front, the present invention is not limited to this. The entire plate 322 may be made invisible from the front.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are arranged in an arc shape partially in the circumferential direction. , and the second button decorative portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 may be formed in an annular shape extending over the entire circumference.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the second button inner decorative portion 432g of the operation button inner decorative member 432 in the effect operation unit 400, a decoration having a plurality of concentric polygons centered on the center is shown. The second inner button decoration portion 432g may be a decoration having a plurality of concentric circles (including ovals) centering on the center.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, through the transparent button lens 411 (front member) of the operation button 410, the operation button inner decorative member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460, and the door frame side second effect are arranged on the rear side. Although the rear member such as the display device 460A is shown to be visible at all times, it is not limited to this. may be provided with a variable light transmitting means that allows the rear side to be visually recognized by satisfying the above. Here, as the variable light transmission means, there are ``things like a magic mirror that makes the rear side visible due to the difference in brightness between the front side and the rear side'', and ``things like liquid crystal film that become transparent when the power is turned on/off. or become opaque so that the rear side can be visually recognized”, and the like. In addition, the front member and the rear member may be relatively movable, or relatively non-movable.

At least one of the front member and the rear member has a variable light transmission means, so that only the front member or the front member and the rear member are visible in a normal state, The decoration of the visible member can be shown to the player. In a special state, by satisfying a predetermined condition, a rear member (a rear member or a member arranged behind the rear member) that cannot be seen in a normal state can be seen. A member and a back member, or a front member, a back member and a member behind the back member can show overlapping decorations. Therefore, the front member and the rear member can be used to show various decorations (decorative effects) to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and entertaining the player. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in.

More specifically, for example, when the front member has variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, in a normal state, only the front member is decorated by darkening the rear side of the front member. It can be visually recognized by the player. Then, when the space between the front member and the rear member or the rear side of the rear member is brightened by light from a light emitting part such as an LED, the sufficient condition of the variable light transmission means in the front member is satisfied, and the rear member passes through the front member. The member can be visually recognized, and the player can see the decoration in which the decoration of the front member and the decoration of the rear member overlap.

Alternatively, if the front member is transparent and the rear member has variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, the surface of the rear member can be seen through the front member in a normal state. A player can see the surface and decoration of the When the rear side of the rear member is brightened with light from a light-emitting portion such as an LED, the conditions for satisfying the variable light transmission means in the rear member are satisfied, and the rear side can be visually recognized through the rear member. Through the member, the member on the rear side of the rear member (for example, a display device, a decoration such as a character) can be seen by the player.

Furthermore, when both the front member and the rear member have variable light transmission means such as a magic mirror, in a normal state, only the decoration of the front member can be seen by the player, and the front member and the rear member can be When the space between the rear member and the rear member is brightened by light emitted from a light-emitting portion such as an LED, the condition for the variable light transmitting means in the front member is satisfied, and the surface of the rear member can be visually recognized through the front member. The decoration by the rear member can be shown to the player. On the other hand, the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of the light emitting part such as the LED (or the space between the front member and the rear member and the rear side of the rear member are made bright by the light of the light emitting part such as the LED at the same time). ), and the conditions for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the front and rear members are satisfied, respectively, and the member behind the rear member (for example, a display device, a decoration such as a character) through the front member and the rear member. can be shown to the player. Accordingly, by appropriately selecting the portion to be brightened by the light of the light emitting portion, the visible range can be changed in multiple stages, and the player can enjoy various decorations.

In the above specific example, since the variable light transmission means is like a magic mirror, it looks like a mirror when the rear side is darkened. A glittering decoration can be shown to the player.

Also, in the above specific example, the variable light transmitting means is explained as something like a magic mirror. In addition, if a liquid crystal film or the like is used as the variable light transmission means, it can transmit light even in an opaque state (it has translucency). If the rear side of the member can be brightened (or decorated with light emission) by the light of the light emitting part such as the LED, the player can see more various effects such as light emission effects and decoration effects. .

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, the control board for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 74. FIG. FIG. 69 is a block diagram of the main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board, FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 69, and FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 69; FIG. 74 is a block diagram showing an outline of a peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 74 is a block diagram around a VDP with built-in sound source in a liquid crystal display control section.

The pachinko machine 1, as its control configuration, as shown in FIG. 69, in addition to the process of generating the control power supply (for example, +5V, etc.), the first control unit MCG that performs the control related to the game including the payout of prize balls. , and a second control unit SCG for performing effects related to the game progressed by the first control unit MCG.

More specifically, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment employs a structure in which various controls are shared by preparing a plurality of boards. , a payout control board 951, and a power supply board 931, and a peripheral control board 1510 is provided as the second control unit SCG. Hereinafter, in explaining the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931 are explained in this order. 2 The control unit SCG (peripheral control board 1510) will be described.

[7-1. Main control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, the main control board 1310, which controls the progress of the game, controls power-on processing executed when the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. A main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor that stores various control programs such as a main control program that controls game operations, a ROM that stores various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc., and various A main control input circuit 1310b to which the detection signal from the detection switch is input, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external board or the like, and a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids. , and a blackout monitoring circuit 1310e that monitors signs of blackout or momentary blackout of a predetermined voltage.

The main control MPU 1310a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"). In addition, a watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT 1310af") for monitoring the operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are also built-in.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a incorporates a non-volatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM pre-stores a unique ID code assigned by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a to identify the individual (there is only one code in the world). Since the ID code assigned once is stored in a non-volatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can retrieve the ID code from the non-volatile RAM and refer to it.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a includes a hard random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in A hard random number circuit 1310an” is built in. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of 0 as the minimum value to 32767 as the maximum value is preset), A predetermined value is not fixed as an initial value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and the circuit is configured so that a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value to a clock signal ( Based on a clock signal output from a main control crystal oscillator (to be described later), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without overlapping at high speed, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When finished, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a without duplication. Extract one after another. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeats such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a wins the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a random number for judgment.

The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with reset terminals for forcibly resetting information to which detection signals from various detection switches are input to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. In other words, in the main control input circuit 1310b, the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset described later, so that the various signals based on the information It is configured as a circuit output from an output terminal.

The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND). A main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function having a reset terminal provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the received information, and a main control output circuit without a reset function 1310cb having no reset terminal and not having a reset function. and consists of The main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset, which will be described later, is input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function resets the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by resetting the main control system, which will be described later. is configured as a circuit in which no signals based on are output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. In other words, the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb does not reset the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by the main control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit that outputs signals based on it from its various output terminals.

As shown in FIG. 60, a first starting hole sensor 4002 that detects a game ball entering the first starting hole 2002, a second starting hole sensor 4004 that detects a game ball entering the second starting hole 2004, and general A detection signal from the general winning hole sensor 4020 that detects a game ball that has entered the winning hole 2001 and a signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e are sent to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. is entered in 60, a gate sensor 4003 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003, a count sensor 4005 for detecting a game ball that has entered the big winning opening 2005, and the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. A detection signal from a magnetism detection sensor 4024 attached to detect fraudulent activity using a magnet is supplied to a panel relay board 4161 attached to the game board 5, and a predetermined input of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. Input to the input terminal of the port.

The main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca based on the detection signal from each of these switches. 1310ca outputs a control signal to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and outputs a drive signal from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the starter solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay board 4161, or outputs a drive signal to the predetermined output port. By outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the panel relay board 4161, and through the function display unit 1400 first special symbol display 1403 , second special symbol indicator 1405, first special pending number indicator 1404, second special pending number indicator 1406, normal symbol indicator 1402, state indicator 1401, and round indicator 1407 or output a drive signal do.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) about the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, thereby controlling payout from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. By outputting various information (game information) related to the game to the board 951 or outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function, the main control with the reset function A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the control output circuit 1310ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

In this embodiment, non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches are used for the first starting sensor 4002, the second starting sensor 4004, the gate sensor 4003, and the count sensor 4005. For the general winning hole sensors 4020, 4020, contact type ON/OFF mechanical switches are used. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting hole 2002 and the second starting hole 2004 and frequently passes through the gate part 2003, so the first starting hole sensor 4002, the second starting hole sensor 4004, and the Detection of game balls by the gate sensor 4003 also occurs frequently. For this reason, long-life proximity switches are used for the first starter sensor 4002, the second starter sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. FIG. Also, when a big winning game state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning opening 2005 is opened and game balls enter frequently, so that the count sensor 4005 frequently detects the game balls. For this reason, the count sensor 4005 also uses a long-life proximity switch. On the other hand, in general winning openings 2001 and 2201 into which game balls do not enter frequently, detection by general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 does not occur frequently. For this reason, the general prize winning opening sensors 4020, 4020 use mechanical switches that have a shorter life than the proximity switches.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, thereby controlling payout from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function. Various commands are transmitted to the substrate 951 as serial data. When the payout control board 951 completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, it outputs to the main control board 1310 a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data in the main control input circuit 1310b, thereby inputting the predetermined serial input port from the main control input circuit 1310b. Various commands are received as serial data at the terminal. When the main control MPU 1310a completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, it sends a signal (main pay ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output with a reset function. It outputs to the circuit 1310ca, and outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to the payout control board 951 from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function. , various commands are transmitted as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function.

Here, the main peripheral serial transmission port for transmitting various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 as serial data will be briefly described. The main control MPU 1310a is configured around a main control CPU core 1310aa, and in addition to the main control built-in RAM, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae, which is one of the main control serial I/O ports, etc., are connected to the bus 1310ah. (See FIG. 79). The main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae transmits various commands as main peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 1510, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 1310aea, a transmission buffer register 1310aeb, a serial management unit 1310aec, etc. (Fig. 79). The main control CPU core 1310aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec. It is transferred to the transmission shift register 1310aea to start transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. In this embodiment, the transmission buffer register 1310aeb has a storage capacity of 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 1310aa continuously transmits multiple commands to the peripheral control board 1510 by outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec after setting multiple commands in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb.

The power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a "capacitor") as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined period of time even when the power is cut off. ) and BC0 (see FIG. 75). This capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM even when the power is cut off. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 described later is operated within a predetermined period from power on. Is output from the payout control board 951, through the main control input circuit 1310b, is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU1310a, and is completely erased from the main control built-in RAM by the main control MPU1310a (cleared).

[7-2. Payout control board]
Out of the first control unit MCG, a payout control board 951 for controlling the payout of game balls, etc. includes, as shown in FIG. and an error LED indicator 860b for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, the operation switch 954, which also functions as a RAM clear switch, controls the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") based on the detection signal output by being operated. .) outputs a RAM clear signal to completely erase the information stored in the memory.

[7-2-1. Payout control unit]
As shown in FIG. 70, a payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout controls power-on processing that is executed when the power is turned on, and also controls the payout of game media that is executed after a predetermined time has passed since the power is turned on. A payout control MPU 952a, which is a microprocessor containing various control programs including a payout control program that controls operations, a ROM that stores various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc., and detection from various detection switches related to payout A payout control input circuit 952b to which signals are input, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to an external board or the like, and a payout motor drive circuit for outputting drive signals to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830. 952 d and a CR unit input/output circuit 952 e for exchanging various signals with the CR unit 6 . The payout control MPU 952a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in RAM") and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in ROM"). It also has built-in functions such as a watchdog timer that monitors its operation (system) and functions to prevent fraud.

Under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control program serially converts various information (game information) on the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands on payout to the main payout serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b. to receive serial data. In addition, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command) when an error occurs in the game ball payout operation, and operates the operation switch 954 as an error cancellation unit. A 16-bit (2-byte) error cancellation navigation command (equivalent to the first error cancellation command) is created based on the signal (detection signal), and these error generation commands and error cancellation navigation commands are sent as serial data to the payer. As a signal, serial data is output to the reception port of the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port 952b (command transmission means). In addition, this payout control program, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power is turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main processing is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is executed and payout control is started, the payout When an error occurs in the operation, the error is canceled based on the detection signal generated by the operation of the operation switch 954, and the output of warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

In addition, this payout control program outputs a door frame open command (first door open command) when a detection signal (door frame open detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the door frame open switch 618. , when a detection signal (body frame open detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the body frame open switch 619, a body frame open command (first body frame open command) is output. On the other hand, this payout control program issues a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) when a detection signal (door frame closing detection signal) associated with the closing operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. When a detection signal (body frame closing detection signal) associated with the closing operation is input from the body frame open switch 619, a body frame closing command (first body frame closing command) is output.

The payout control input circuit 952b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information that the detection signals from the various detection switches are input to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. That is, the payout control input circuit 952b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals by the payout control system reset described later, so that the various signals based on the information It is configured as a circuit output from an output terminal.

The payout control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and various signals are input to its various input terminals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like. A payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the received information, and a payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb having no reset terminal and having no reset function. and consists of The payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset, which will be described later, is input. That is, the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function resets the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by the payout control system reset described later. is configured as a circuit in which no signals based on are output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. In other words, the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb does not reset the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by the payout control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit that outputs signals based on it from its various output terminals.

A ball run-out detection sensor 827 for detecting the running out of game balls in the supply passage of the ball guiding unit 820 of the payout unit 800, and a payout detection sensor 842 for detecting game balls released from payout outlets 831b and 832b of the payout device 830. A detection signal from a blade rotation detection sensor 840 that detects the rotation of the payout blade 839 is inputted to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a through a payout control input circuit 952b. Note that, for the sake of explanation later, the blade rotation detection sensor 840 is simply referred to as the rotation detection sensor 840 in this specification.

Detection signals from the door frame open switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame open switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are applied to the payout control input circuit 952b. input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

Further, a detection signal from a full tank detection sensor 279 for detecting whether or not the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. It is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the board 931 and the payout control input circuit 952b.

The payout control MPU 952a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b in the form of serial data at the input terminal of its serial input port, and receives an operation signal (detection command) of the operation switch 954. signal) is output to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. When the payout control MPU 952a completes the normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, it outputs a payout control signal with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting to the circuit 952ca, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output to the main control board 1310 from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function.

In addition, the payout control MPU 952a transmits various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the serial output port to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb. Various commands are transmitted from the output circuit 952cb to the main control board 1310 as serial data.
When the main control board 1310 completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, it outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to the payout control board 951 to that effect. This signal (primary payment ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control input circuit 952b.

In addition, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. Outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor drive circuit 952d, outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 834, or outputs the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the error LED indicator By outputting the drive signal for displaying on 860b to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, the drive signal is outputted from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the error LED indicator 860b.

The error LED indicator 860b is a segment indicator, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, graphics, and the like. Contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator 860b are as follows. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is notified that it is "abnormal connection" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and It informs that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 951), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out) Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, it informs that there is no game ball in the supply passage of the dispensing device 830), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is "ball caught" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the payout rotator and the game ball engage near the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the payout device 830, and the payout rotator becomes difficult to rotate. ), and when the number "3" is displayed, it indicates that it is a "payout detection sensor error" is occurring), and when the number "5" is displayed, it indicates that it is a "retry error" (specifically, that the number of retries for the dispensing operation has reached the preset upper limit). is displayed, and when the number "6" is displayed, it indicates that the tank is "full" (specifically, based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 is stored). game ball is full), and when the number "7" is displayed, it is "CR unconnected" (electrical connection at any point from the payout control board 951 to the CR unit 6 is disconnected), and when the number "9" is displayed, it is "in stock (with prize ball stock (not paid out))" (specifically, game balls that have not yet been paid out has reached the predetermined number of balls).

In addition, the payout control MPU 952a outputs the number of game balls actually put out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. , the number of game balls actually put out is output to the external terminal plate 784 via a resistor (not shown).

In addition, the payout control board 951 outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 784 via resistors (not shown). The external terminal plate 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (infrared LED and photo IC built-in). ), the number of game balls and various information (game information, contents of errors related to the payout operation of game balls, or the fact that there was an error) are communicated to the hall computers installed in the game balls.
The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer are in a state of being electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers. It is designed to prevent the computer from malfunctioning or breaking down. It is designed not to malfunction or break down due to application of abnormal voltage. The hall computer monitors the game played by the player by grasping the number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

A game ball lending request signal from the ball lending button 328 and a prepaid card return requesting signal from the return button 329 are first sent to the frequency display plate 365, the main door relay terminal plate 880, and then the game ball lending device connection terminal plate. 869 to the CR unit 6. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 in a serial manner, and this signal is transmitted to the CR unit. It is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the input/output circuit 952e. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls, and sends a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the ball lending/returning display unit 330. This signal is output to the lending device connection terminal plate 869 , the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the frequency display plate 365 , and this signal is input to the ball lending/returning display section 330 . In addition, the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball lending/returning display section 330 receives the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. ing.

In addition, the power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 has a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 75) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 951 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. there is Due to this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 952a can store various kinds of information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power-off processing even when the power is cut off. Various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, when the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, the operation signal is transmitted through the payout control input circuit 952b to the payout control MPU 952a. It is input to the input terminal of the input port, and the payout control MPU 952a judges it as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. It is designed to be completely erased (cleared). This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb, and is also output to the main control board 1310 from the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb.

[7-2-2. Exchanging various signals with the connection terminal board for rental equipment such as game balls]
Here, exchange of various signals between the payout control section 952 and the CR unit 6 and exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display plate 365 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 71, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 not only relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 951, but also connects the CR unit 6 and the frequency display plate 365. (To be exact, the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 is electrically connected to the frequency display plate 365 via the main door relay terminal plate 880. , the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay The terminal plate 880 and the degree display plate 365 are electrically connected). Between the board between the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, between the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the payout control board 951, between the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay The terminal plate 880 is electrically connected to the substrate, and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the frequency display plate 365 are electrically connected by wiring (harness). AC 24 V, which will be described later, is supplied from the power supply board 931 to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 . The CR unit 6 generates a predetermined voltage VL (in this embodiment, DC +12V (DC+12V, hereinafter referred to as "+12V")) from the supplied AC 24V by a built-in voltage generating circuit (not shown), and generates the voltage together with the ground LG. , to the payout control board 951 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 , and to the frequency display plate 365 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 . .

A ball lending button 328, which is a push button switch, is mounted on the component surface of the frequency display plate 365 at a position corresponding to the ball lending button 328, and a push button switch is mounted at a position corresponding to the returning button 329 of the ball lending unit 360. A return button 329 is mounted, and a ball rental/return display section 330 as a segment display is mounted at a position corresponding to the remaining rental display section 363 of the rental ball unit 360 .

The ball lending button 328 and return button 329 are electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 . When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the ball lending button 328 is switched on (ON), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game. It is designed to be input to the CR unit 6 via a ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 . When the return button 329 is pressed, the return button 329 is switched on (ON), and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is connected to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball rental device. Input is made to the CR unit 6 via the terminal board 869 .

The ball lending/returning display unit 330 is composed of three segment displays arranged in a row, and the segment displays of the three digits are sequentially driven one by one by a so-called dynamic lighting method. The lighting of the digit segment indicators is controlled. With such lighting control, the ball lending/returning display section 330 displays the balance of the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 6 or displays an error in the CR unit 6 . The ball rental/return display unit 330 includes digit signals DG0 to DG2 (three signals in total) for designating a single-digit segment display out of three-digit segment displays, and the designated single-digit segment display. segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (7 signals in total) for designating the contents to be displayed by lighting the CR unit 6 to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal When input through the plate 880, the 1-digit segment displays are sequentially illuminated according to the input digit signals DG0-DG2 and segment drive signals SEG-A-SEG-G, and these 3-digit segment displays are displayed. The content of the luminescence of the vessel can be visually recognized through the remaining lending display portion 363 .

A CR unit lamp 365 d is mounted on the degree display plate 365 adjacent to the ball lending/returning display section 330 . A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input to the CR unit lamp 365 d via a game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and a main door relay terminal plate 880 . A predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lendable signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via a CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from AC 24 V supplied from the power supply board 931 with a built-in voltage creation circuit, and when the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are valid and the ball lending state is possible controls the logic of the ball lendable signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light. Further, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball lending/returning display section 330 through the current limiting resistance mounted on the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 .

In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button 328 is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is sent from the frequency display plate 365 through the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. When input, the ball rental request signal BRDY is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. Then, the CR unit 6 issues a single payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of rental balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, which is equivalent to 100 yen as an amount) in one payout operation. BRQ is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) through the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. The payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) to which BRDY and BRQ are input, outputs EXS, which is a signal for notifying the start or end of one payout operation, to the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. to output to the CR unit 6 via the terminal board for connecting the machine for renting game balls, etc. 869 to the CR unit 6. For example, if the hall clerk or the like has set the CR unit 6 in advance so that game balls worth 200 yen are paid out when the ball lending button 328 is pressed, one payout operation is performed. is performed twice in a row, and when 25 balls worth 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls worth 100 yen will be paid out, and a total of 50 balls worth 200 yen will be paid out. Become.

In the CR unit 6, when the return button 329 is pressed, the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input from the frequency display plate 365 through the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. Then, the prepaid card is ejected from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount obtained by subtracting the amount corresponding to the number of game balls paid out as a result of pressing the ball lending button 328 .

[7-3. Power supply board 931]
Next, the power board 931 of the first control unit MCG will be briefly described. The power board 931 includes a power switch 934 that can electrically connect or disconnect 24 volts AC (24 VAC) supplied from the pachinko island facility, and a power control unit 935 that generates various power sources. , and a shooting control section 953 for performing shooting control by the shooting solenoid 682 of the ball shooting device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG.

[7-3-1. Power control section]
The power control unit 935 operates a power switch 934 to operate a synchronous rectification circuit 935a that rectifies 24 volts AC (24V AC) supplied from the pachinko island facility, and improves the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectification circuit 935a. A power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c for smoothing the power whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 935b, and various direct currents to be supplied to various substrates from the power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 935c. and a power generation circuit 935d for generating power.

[7-3-2. Launch control unit]
A firing control section 953 that performs firing control by the firing solenoid 682 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 255 mainly includes a firing control circuit 953a. The shooting control circuit 953a receives an operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 that electrically adjusts the intensity (shooting intensity) at which the game ball is shot toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle 302, and an operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307. A detection signal from the handle touch sensor 310 that detects whether or not a finger is touching, and a single button operation sensor 312 that detects whether or not the game ball is forcibly stopped (shooting) by the player's will. , and are inputted via the handle relay terminal board 315 . In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected to the launch control circuit 953a, a CR connection signal is input via the payout control board 951 to notify that effect. .

The shooting control circuit 953a adjusts the driving current for launching (shooting) the game ball toward the game area 5a based on the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307, and controls the output to the shooting solenoid 682. On the other hand, by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 via the handle relay terminal plate 315, the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit 250 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, Control is performed to send the game ball received by the ball sending member to the batted ball launching device 650 side.

[7-4. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control board 1510 of the second control section SCG performs performance control based on various commands from the main control board 1310 with respect to the first control section MCG. 19, a performance display drive board 4450 for drawing the display area of the door frame side performance display device 460, a peripheral control unit 1511 for exchanging control commands and various information (various data), a game board side performance display device 1600 and a door. While performing drawing control of the frame side effect display device 460, a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 performing sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, calendar information specifying the date and time A real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as "RTC") control unit 4165 that holds time information specifying seconds, and the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are controlled by rotating the knob. and a volume adjustment volume 1510a that is adjusted by operation.

[7-4-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control unit 1511, which performs performance control, controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on processing that is executed when the power is turned on. Peripheral control ROM 1511b for storing various control programs such as sub-control programs that are executed and control performance operations, various data, various control data and various schedule data, Various information that continues across the peripheral control unit steady-state processing that is executed each time a blank signal is input (for example, schedule data that defines the screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and light emission modes such as various LEDs and information for managing the schedule data that defines the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and various information that continues over the day (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the jackpot game state and special A peripheral control SRAM 1511d for storing information for managing performance flags, etc.) and a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control external WDT 1511e") for monitoring whether the peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally ”.) and are provided.

The peripheral control RAM 1511c can retain the stored contents only for a period of time when the power is immediately restored after an instantaneous power failure occurs, and the power is cut off for a long time (when the power is cut off for a long time). ), the peripheral control SRAM 1511d loses its contents, whereas the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (not shown) provided on the power supply board 931 (hereinafter referred to as "SRAM electrolytic capacitor"). As a result, the stored contents can be retained for about 50 hours. By providing an SRAM electrolytic capacitor on the power supply board 931, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. It loses its contents as it can no longer be held.

The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control. When this timer expires, it is reset by hardware. That is, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset when it does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period (until the timer expires). When the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a fixed period, the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e can be restarted, so the reset is not applied.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a incorporates a plurality of parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and when various commands from the main control board 1310 are received, each decoration board of the game board 5 is controlled based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to multiple LEDs etc. The game board side motor drive data for transmitting to the drive board 4170 and for outputting drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are sent to the motor drive board serial Door-side motor drive for transmitting from the I/O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, or for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3 Data is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Peripheral control output of door-side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to the plurality of LEDs etc. provided on each decoration board in 3 from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration driving amplifier board LED It is transmitted to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 via the circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 .

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Also, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 provided in the effect operation unit 400 and a press detection switch for detecting the operation of the press operation unit 405 is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized effect operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. , the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and via the peripheral control input circuit, are input to the serial I/O port for detecting the performance operation unit of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photosensors, etc.) for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are sent to the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180 . Serialized by the serial transmission circuit, this serialized movable object detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit through the peripheral control input circuit to the serial I/O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. there is The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input/output of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control built-in WDT"). It is diagnosed whether or not

[7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, which is a microcomputer, will be described. As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control MPU 1511a comprises a peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 1511ac, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and various peripheral control serial I/O controllers. /O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, peripheral control analog/digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A/D converter) 1511ak, and the like.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads/writes various data from/to the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via the internal bus 1511ah. Various data are read from and written to the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag and the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 1511b via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h. Various data are read and written via an internal bus 1511ah, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and an external bus 1511h.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d. /O port 1511ag and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak and other input/output devices, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. to DMA3.

Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a storage device of a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a, a peripheral control various serial I/O port 1511ae built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and a peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af. , peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, and other input/output devices, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, to transfer data independently. In addition, while reading and writing the storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab via the internal bus 1511ah, peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and Reading and writing are performed with respect to input/output devices such as the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, such as a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Between input/output devices such as O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, In order to transfer data independently, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are read and written via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the external bus 1511h. Serial I/O port 1511ae, WDT 1511af with built-in peripheral control, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, and other input/output devices are connected via peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511ai. to read and write.

A peripheral control bus controller 1511ad controls an internal bus 1511ah, a peripheral bus 1511ai, and an external bus 1511h to control a central processing unit of a peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control RAM 1511c. Storage devices such as SRAM 1511d, input/output devices such as peripheral control serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A/D converters 1511ak It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

Peripheral control serial I/O ports 1511ae are serial I/O port for lamp drive board, serial I/O port for motor drive board, serial I/O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, frame decoration drive amplifier board LED , a serial I/O port for the frame decoration driving amplifier board motor, a serial I/O port for the main control board, and a serial I/O port for acquiring the performance operation unit information.

A peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 1511af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control. It has become. In other words, if the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer within a certain period (until the timer expires) to the WDT 1511af with built-in peripheral control, it will be reset. will be required. When the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the WDT 1511af with built-in peripheral control within a certain period of time, the timer count can be restarted, so the reset is not applied.

The peripheral control parallel I/O port 1511ag outputs various latch signals such as the game board side motor drive latch signal and the door side motor drive light emission latch signal. Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. and outputs a movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit at the serial I/O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. This LED is a high-intensity white LED, and serves as a decision notice lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the big win game state has been decided. In this embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control parallel I/O port 1511ag are directly connected electrically, the path between the LED and the peripheral control parallel I/O port 1511ag can be shortened. Therefore, noise countermeasures can be taken for the lighting control of the LED, which has a significant meaning in the game. The lighting control of the LEDs is executed in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing described later, and the other LEDs except for this LED are executed in the peripheral control unit regular processing described later. It has become.

The peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak is electrically connected to the volume control volume 1510a, and its resistance value is varied by rotating the knob of the volume control volume 1510a. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value and converted to a value of 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, the values of 1024 steps are divided into 7 and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, and the board volume 6 is set to the maximum sound volume. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source to be described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. FIG. In this manner, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotating operation of the knob.

In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying pachinko machine 1 clerk or the like of the occurrence of a problem with the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent acts on the pachinko machine 1, and contents related to game effects are announced. (For example, to make the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 more powerful, or to notify the player that there is a high possibility of shifting to a game state that is advantageous to the player, etc.). The notification sound also flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound are designed to flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, and from mute to maximum volume. can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source to be described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from mute to maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into 7 steps described above. As a result, for example, even if the hall clerk or the like rotates the knob of the volume control volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the music, sound effects, etc. that flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are produced. Although the sound becomes smaller, when the pachinko machine 1 has a problem or when the player commits a fraudulent act, a notification sound set to a large volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be emitted. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk from noticing the occurrence of a problem or the player's fraudulent behavior due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to the music and sound effects, the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 can be made more powerful by increasing the volume of the sound, or the game state can shift to an advantageous game state for the player. You can also notify them of high prices.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and music. There are sound generation schedule data for generating sound effects, etc., and electrical drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The schedule data for screen generation is configured by arranging screen data that defines the structure of the screen in time series, and the order of the screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is defined. It is The schedule data for generating the light emission mode is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects are played. This sound command data includes an output channel number for indicating which output channel is to be used among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, which will be described later, and the VDP built-in sound source 1512a. and a track number for indicating in which track among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source the sound data such as music and sound effects are to be incorporated. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines operations of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Some of the various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and executed. Some are read and executed. Various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are also read directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and are stored in various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, which will be described later, when the power is turned on. In some cases, what is copied in is read out.

In addition, in the peripheral control ROM 1511b, as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165, a program for correcting the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600 is stored. A brightness correction program is included. This luminance correction program corrects the decrease in luminance due to aging of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of the LED type. The date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the current date and time, brightness setting information, etc. are acquired from the internal RAM of the RTC control unit 4165, which will be described later, and the acquired brightness setting information is used based on the correction information. to correct. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. As will be described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in a range of 100% to 70% in increments of 5%. and the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the set game board side effect display device 1600. For example, the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on and the current date and time. Therefore, when six months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the luminance When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness of 80% obtained by adding 5% which is the acquired correction information to this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on. If December has already passed, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, and the effect display device on the game board side is displayed. When lighting the backlight of 1600, the game board is based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 85%, which is obtained by adding 10%, which is the acquired correction information, to this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is a backup that exclusively stores information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A managed work area 1511ca, a backup first area 1511cb and a backup second area 1511cc for exclusive storage of copies of various information stored in the backup managed work area 1511ca, and a peripheral control ROM 1511b. Various control program copy area 1511cd for exclusively storing copies of various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and copies of various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. various control data copy areas 1511ce for dedicated storage; backup unmanaged work areas 1511cf for dedicated storage of various types of information updated by execution of various control programs that are not backed up; is provided.

When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when the power is restored due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written into the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf to be cleared to zero. For the work area 1511ca to be managed, the first backup area 1511cb, and the second backup area 1511cc, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a power-on state command (see FIG. 89) from the main control board 1310 starts the RAM clear effect. and to indicate the game state (for example, to indicate the start of an effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on). Sometimes cleared to zero.

The backup management target work area 1511ca is performance information (1fr ) as a backup target, and effect information (1ms), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing executed each time a 1ms timer interrupt described later occurs, is backed up. Bank 0 (1 ms) that is exclusively stored as an object. The names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms) will be briefly explained here. The following "0" means a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. In other words, "Bank0" means that the size of the normally used storage area is the minimum management unit. "Bank 1", "Bank 2", "Bank 3", and "Bank 4" provided in an area extending from a backup first area 1511cb to a backup second area 1511 cc, which will be described later, are of the same storage area as "Bank 0". It means that it has a size. "(1fr)" is, as will be described later, when the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU 1511a A V blank signal is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a to indicate that it is ready to receive screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Since the peripheral control unit steady process is executed every time, "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" are respectively appended (effect information (1fr) and effect Backup information (1fr) is also used with the same meaning). As will be described later, "(1 ms)" means that the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. and "Bank4" (effect information (1 ms) and effect backup information (1 ms), which will be described later, are also used in the same sense).

Bank0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a reception command storage area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and a schedule data storage area 1511cae. etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 is set, and in the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the frame decoration driving amplifier board side LED, lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting for a plurality of LEDs, etc. provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 are stored. This is a storage area in which door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting signals is set. In the received command storage area 1511cac, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received and the received various commands are stored. The RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad is a storage area where various information acquired from the RTC control unit 4165 (an RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a described later) is set. is a storage area in which various schedule data corresponding to commands received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) are set. In the schedule data storage area 1511cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy area 1511ce are read and set, and various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. Some are set

Bank 0 (1 ms) includes frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah, presentation operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai, and A drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak and the like are provided. Door-side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3 is stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. In the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, which is a storage area to be set, a drive signal for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid that operates various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is stored. This is a storage area in which the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set. This is a storage area in which various types of information obtained by acquiring the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies are set. Rotation (direction of rotation) of the dial operation unit 401 and operation of the pressing operation unit 405 (for example, dial created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the production operation unit 400) Rotation (rotation direction) history information of the operation unit 401, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) is set, and the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak has an effect display drive board 4450 on its periphery. Drawing data is received from the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source of the control board 1510, and if the received drawing data is determined to be abnormal data, the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 output based on the LOCKN signal described later to notify that fact. This is a storage area in which various kinds of information obtained by acquiring the frequency of troubles and the state of occurrence of troubles between connections with the effect display drive board 4450 are set.

The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa in Bank 0 (1 fr), the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511 cab, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf in Bank 0 (1 ms). and the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag are each divided into two areas, a first area and a second area.

In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa when the peripheral controller steady-state processing described later is executed. , when the next peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, and the peripheral control unit steady-state Each time the process is executed, the game board side emission data SL-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when game board side emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa in the current peripheral control unit steady process, the previous peripheral When the control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa.

In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, when the peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL is stored in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. -When DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration driving amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. Every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door-side light emission data STL-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame-decoration driving amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. be. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the transmission data storage area 1511cab for frame decoration driving amplifier board side LED in this peripheral control unit steady process, When the previous peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed, the process proceeds based on the door-side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame-decoration driving amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. It's becoming

In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later is executed, the door When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. -DAT is set, and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door side is stored in the first area and the second area of the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. Motor drive data STM-DAT are alternately set. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. When set, the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing was executed. Based on this, the process proceeds.

In the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. Then, when the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, in the current peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Sometimes, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing was executed, the processing proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. It's like

Next, a backup first area 1511cb and a backup second area 1511cc dedicated to storing copies of performance information, which are various types of information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, will be described. In the first backup area 1511cb and the second backup area 1511cc, two pairs of two banks are managed as one page. Effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is used as effect backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Effect information (1 ms), which is copied to the first backup area 1511cb and the second backup area 1511cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is the normally used storage area. , as effect backup information (1 ms), is sent to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. Copied quickly. Consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks that constitute the page match.

Specifically, in the backup first area 1511cb, Bank1 (1 fr) and Bank2 (1 fr) are set as one pair, and Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) are set as one pair, and a total of two pairs are managed as one page. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are transferred to Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1frame). Memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. This page is copied to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. This is done depending on whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) match.

In the backup second area 1511cc, one pair of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) and one pair of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) are managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are transferred to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1frame). Memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. It is copied to Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. This is done depending on whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) match.

In this way, in the present embodiment, the first backup area 1511cb has Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair. The backup second area 1511cc is an area for management as a page. This is an area for managing as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the first backup area 1511cb and the second backup area 1511cc.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored as performance backup information (1fr) by the peripheral control unit every 1 frame. Each time a routine process is executed, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to the first backup area 1511cb and the second backup area 1511cc, and the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is the normally used storage area. is backup first area 1511cb and backup second area 1511cc each time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and a peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed as effect backup information (1ms). The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac executes high-speed copying by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in common. That is, in this embodiment, the performance information (1fr) and the performance information (1ms) are managed by a common management method (common program execution).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
A peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a backup management target work area 1511da for exclusively storing information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs; A backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc are provided for exclusively storing copies of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da. It should be noted that the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are the power-on state command from the main control board 1310 (see FIG. 89) when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when the power is restored due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure). indicates the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state (for example, when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from the power-on, it instructs the start of the effect). ), it is not cleared to zero. This point is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area 1511ca, the first backup area 1511cb, and the second backup area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are cleared to zero. Further, when the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. It is designed to be By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, for each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (for example, the history of the occurrence of the jackpot game state) etc.), on the other hand, the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. This point is also completely different between the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

The backup management target work area 1511da includes performance information (SRAM), which is various information that continues over the course of the day (for example, information for managing the history of the occurrence of a big hit game state and for managing a special performance flag). information, etc.) to be backed up. Here, the name of Bank0 (SRAM) will be briefly explained. As described above, "Bank" is the minimum management unit representing the size of the storage area for storing various information. The following "0" means a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. In other words, "Bank0" means that the size of the normally used storage area is the minimum management unit. "Bank 1", "Bank 2", "Bank 3", and "Bank 4" provided in an area extending from a first backup area 1511db to a second backup area 1511dc, which will be described later, are the same storage areas as "Bank 0". It means that it has a size. "(SRAM)" is for backing up various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. , and “Bank 4” (effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM), which will be described later, are also used with the same meaning).

Next, a backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc dedicated to storing a copy of performance information (SRAM), which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da, will be described. The first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc are managed as one page, with two banks forming one pair. Effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored as effect backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed for each frame. Then, it is copied to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks that constitute the page match.

Specifically, in the first backup area 1511db, a pair of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are transferred to Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) by peripheral control DMA each time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame. This page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

In the backup second area 1511dc, Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) are paired, and this pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are transferred to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) by peripheral control DMA each time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame. This page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

As described above, in this embodiment, the first backup area 1511db is an area for managing a pair of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one page. 1511dc is an area for managing a pair of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc.

[7-4-2. Liquid crystal display control unit]
A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 for performing drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 and sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is shown in FIG. As described above, a sound source for controlling sounds such as music and sound effects is built in (hereinafter referred to as "internal sound source"), and the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are drawn. Sound source built-in VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 1512a for control, various character data of the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 In addition, various kinds of music, sound effects, etc. A liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b for storing sound data, an audio data transmission IC 1512c for transmitting serialized music, sound effects, etc. as audio data to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194, and the door frame side effect display device 460. The serialized drawing data is sent to the effect display drive board 4450 which is arranged near the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is stored in the plate unit 320. A differential circuit 1512e that differentiates the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d and the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, into a positive signal and a negative signal. Then, in addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, and when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, this signal is a forced switching circuit 1512f that is connected so as to transmit the signal, and is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not input; It has The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b stores sprite data used for displaying screens and images, which will be described later, such as ring image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display object (annular display object), and for displaying an operation menu background image, which will be described later. Operation menu background image data to be used, selected display object image data used to display at least one selected display object described later, tone adjustment background image data used to display a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale to be described later, volume adjustment icon to be described later In addition to volume setting icon image data used for display, body frame back image data used to display the body frame back image that allows the position of each part on the back of the body frame 4 to be visually recognized from the player's point of view, display of the service mode screen Service mode screen image data used for , break timer setting screen image data used for displaying the rest timer setting screen, and during rest screen image data used for displaying the during rest screen are stored. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b also stores suggestive display object image data used to display a suggestive display object for prompting the user to operate the pressing operation section 405 (operation section) of the effect operation unit 400. FIG.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 extracts the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. 1511cae is set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the top screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511. After extracting from the control data copy area 1511ce and outputting to the built-in sound source VDP 1512a, when a V blank signal (to be described later) is input, the first screen data is extracted according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The following screen data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is output to the tone generator built-in VDP 1512a. In this manner, the peripheral control MPU 1511a stores the screen data arranged in time series in the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae every time the V blank signal is input. Then, the screen data is output one by one from the first screen data to the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator.

Also, the peripheral control MPU 1511a copies the head sound command data of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. It is extracted and set to 1511cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. After extracting from various control data copy areas 1511ce of the control RAM 1511c and outputting them to the tone generator built-in VDP 1512a, when the V blank signal is input as a trigger, the leading data is extracted according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The next sound command data following the sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is output to the tone generator built-in VDP 1512a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, and receives the V blank signal. Each time, the sound command data is output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a one by one from the top sound command data.

[7-4-2a. Sound source built-in VDP]
When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a in addition to the above-described built-in tone generator, the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source controls the game board from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, as shown in FIG. The side character data and the top dish side character data are extracted to create sprite data, and drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is generated. A built-in VRAM (hereinafter referred to as "internal VRAM") for The sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs the drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 among the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM, and outputs the drawing data for the door frame side effect display device 460. Drawing data is sent from channel CH2 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. By outputting (transmitting) to the door frame side effect display device 460, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are synchronized.

The drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, while the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is relayed from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame periphery. A terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an effect display stored in the plate unit 320 by being arranged near the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the drive board 4450 . As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, so that the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board side effect display device 1600 Although the length of the wiring required for the path from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is short due to being attached to the game board 5 respectively, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 can The peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5 because the control board 1510 outputs to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 . On the other hand, since the effect display drive board 4450 is housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, from the channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450. Since the length of wiring required for the path of CH1 is much longer than that of the channel CH1, it is extremely susceptible to noise. For this reason, for channel CH2, in which the wiring for sending drawing data is much longer than channel CH1, THine Electronics Co., Ltd.'s "V-by-One ( By adopting a differential communication system called "Registered Trademark", it is a mechanism that is less susceptible to noise.

Channel CH1 uses a serial differential interface called LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling), whereas channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data output from channel CH2 is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. is serialized by the door frame side performance transmitter IC 4610d and stored in the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 . The serialized various signals are restored to parallel signals in the effect display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460 .

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs screen data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a Based on this input screen data, character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b to create sprite data for one screen to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460. frame) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and among the generated drawing data, image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and the door frame side is output. Image data for the performance display device 460 is sent from the channel CH2 to a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and a performance display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via. That is, the "screen data for one screen (one frame)" means that the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is stored in the built-in VRAM. It is the data for generating above.

In addition, the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and displays image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from channel CH2. Output to the door frame side effect display device 460 through the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. Then, it outputs a V blank signal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a to notify that it is ready to accept screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a. In this embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, a V blank signal is output. The interval is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 1511a executes peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, in response to the input of this V blank signal. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 . Also, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may vary slightly in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the tone generator built-in VDP 1512a are mounted.

Note that the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source adopts a frame buffer system. This "frame buffer method" is to hold drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM). , drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in this frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 .

In addition, when the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a based on the command from the main control board 1310, the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source displays the music stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b as shown in FIG. By extracting sound data such as sound and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and used according to the output channel number. The output channel is set, and the music, sound effects, and the like flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound volume, the sound data and the sound volume of the notification sound for notifying the hall clerk of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and the fraudulent action against the pachinko machine 1 are adjusted. subvolume values to be included. Specifically, for the effect sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 1510a. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by operating the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the effect operation unit 400 and shifting to a later-described setting mode.

The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the channel to be output. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is Actually, it is amplified up to the master volume value which is the sound volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, serializes the amplified effect sound, and outputs it as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, it is amplified to the master volume value, so that it flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The volume is set to the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the sound effect, among the multiple tracks, the sound data of the sound effect incorporated in the track to be used and the sub volume value for adjusting the volume of the sound effect incorporated in the track to be used By synthesizing the set volume adjustment volume 1510a with the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob, the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the volume actually flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. is amplified to the master volume value, and this amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. Synthesizing the maximum volume without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part of the volume adjustment volume 1510a set as a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used, The volume of this synthesized notification sound is amplified to a master volume value that is the volume actually flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. .

Here, when the performance sound is being played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the control of playing the notification sound to notify the pachinko hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a problem with the pachinko machine 1 or of an illegal act on the pachinko machine 1 is simple. First, the sub-volume value of the track containing the sound effect is forcibly set to mute, the sound data of the track containing this sound effect, the sub-volume value set to mute, and the Synthesize the sound data of the track in which the sound is embedded and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the informational sound is set to the maximum volume, and change the volume of the synthesized effect sound and the volume of the informational sound It amplifies to the master volume value which becomes the sound volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, serializes the amplified effect sound and notification sound, and outputs them as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

In other words, the sounds that actually flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are only the notification sounds with the maximum volume. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, the effect sound does not flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the effect sound progresses according to the above-described sound generation schedule data. In this embodiment, the notification sound is played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period of time (for example, 90 seconds). The volume of the effect sound progressing according to the schedule data for the production is set again as the sub-volume value by the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume control volume 1510a (at this time, the dial of the effect operation unit 400 When the operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is operated to shift to the setting mode and adjust, the sub-volume value of the adjusted effect sound is set), and the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 flowing.

In this way, when the performance sound is played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, when the notification sound is played to notify the pachinko hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or a fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 1, Although the volume of the effect sound is muted and the informational sound flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the muted effect sound progresses according to the schedule data for sound generation, so that the predetermined period of time has elapsed. When the sound stops flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the effect sound does not start playing again from the point at which the information sound started to flow, but continues according to the sound generation schedule data until a predetermined period has elapsed since the information sound started to flow. It starts to flow again from where it progressed.

[7-4-2b. Liquid crystal and sound control ROM]
The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b stores, as shown in FIG. are stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, effect sound, notification sound, notification sound, etc. are also stored in advance.

[7-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
The audio data transmission IC 1512c receives the serialized audio data from the VDP 1512a with the built-in sound source, and converts the right audio data into positive and negative signals as differential serial data to a peripheral control output circuit (not shown) and frame peripheral relay. It is transmitted to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 via the terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and is output to a peripheral control output circuit (not shown) as differential serial data in which the left audio data is a positive signal and a negative signal. , the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 , and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 . As a result, music, sound effects, and the like are reproduced in stereo from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 in accordance with various presentations.

The audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data as differential serial data between the boards from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, for example, the plus signal of the left audio data, Even if the negative signal is affected by noise, when the noise component on the positive signal and the noise component on the negative signal are synthesized by the frame-decorating drive amplifier board 194 into one left-side audio data, Since noise components are removed by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[7-4-2d. Transmitter IC for door frame side production]
As shown in FIG. 74, the door-frame-side performance transmitter IC 1512d receives drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source. Channel CH2 uses a parallel interface as described above. The drawing data is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. , the green video signal, and the blue video signal each consist of 8 bits, for a total of 24 bits. In this embodiment, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are each 6 bits, for a total of 18 bits. It is input to the side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Since the lower 2 bits are extremely weak color information that is difficult for the human eye to distinguish, the lower 2 bits including the weak color information are invalidated although they are output from the tone generator built-in VDP 1512a.

Three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, which are drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source. is input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d transmits three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, a horizontal synchronizing signal, and a vertical synchronizing signal. and a clock signal, and a differential serial signal (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by Thine Electronics Co., Ltd., and serialized with only a differential 1-pair cable. These various signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 , the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 , and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 .

As described above, since the drawing data output from the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, the path from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 Although the length of the wiring required for (the first path) is short, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is transferred from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and then the door. Since it is output (sent) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the frame 3, the route from the channel CH2 to the door frame side effect display device 460 (the first 2 path) is much longer than the wiring length required for the first path, it is very susceptible to noise.

Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported to be freely opened and closed with respect to the body frame 4 shown in FIG. For example, from the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 to the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 provided in the door frame 3, on the main body frame 4 side. It is necessary to pass various wirings for electrically connecting the various substrates provided and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side. However, on the closing side of the main body frame 4, in addition to the payout device 830, the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 can be guided to the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and the upper plate 321 can guide the game balls. A full-tank branching unit 770 capable of branching and guiding paid-out game balls to the lower tray 322 side when the tank becomes full is arranged.
Further, below the main body frame 4, a payout unit 800 shown in FIG. In this way, various wirings for electrically connecting various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side are drawn near the dispensing device 830, the full-tank branch unit 770, the power supply substrate 931, and the like. In addition to the noise caused by the driving of the payout motor 834 provided in the payout device 830, the noise caused by the electrostatic discharge caused by the game ball and the power line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The environment is subject to noise, etc.

For this reason, for channel CH2, in which the wiring for sending drawing data is much longer than channel CH1, the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side presentation provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is provided by Thine Electronics Co., Ltd. By adopting a differential system communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)", the system is less susceptible to noise. In the present embodiment, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, a door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, As described above, a differential 1-pair cable is used as a wiring for electrically connecting between the connections of the transmitter and the receiver. is a twisted pair cable, not just parallel wires. This twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted together, and is also called a twisted pair wire.

Here, a case in which parallel lines are employed as a differential one-pair cable for electrically connecting the transmitter and the receiver will be briefly described. For the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source that the length of the wiring for sending the drawing data is much longer than the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, THine Electronics Even if a differential system communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" is adopted by Co., Ltd. to make it less susceptible to noise, such a hardware configuration alone will not cause damage due to electrostatic discharge of game balls. When the serial data on the parallel lines is affected by noise, noise intruding into the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the effect display is stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. Since the noise is not canceled (removed) when received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the drive board 4450, the serial data is received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 in the affected state. , the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as distorted data different from normal data, and in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, it appears like a so-called sandstorm. There is a problem that an image is displayed and it becomes impossible to recognize what the image is at all.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the door frame side provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is used for the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator, which has a much longer wire length for sending the drawing data than the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator. In the performance transmitter IC 1512d, THine Electronics Co., Ltd.'s "V-by-One (registered trademark)" differential method communication is adopted to make it less susceptible to noise, and in addition to such a hardware configuration Therefore, even if differential serial data is affected by noise that enters the wiring, a twisted pair cable that can cancel (remove) the noise on the receiving side is electrically connected between the transmitter and the receiver. It was adopted as a differential 1-pair cable. As a result, even if the serial data is affected by the twisted pair cable due to noise caused by electrostatic discharge of game balls, noise intruding into the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the door frame Since the noise is canceled (removed) when received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC 0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of No. 3, the channel of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a Drawing data output from CH2 is reliably received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460. As a result, the image generated by the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 can be reliably displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460. FIG. By canceling (removing) the noise, it is possible to prevent the door frame side effect display device 460 from displaying an image such as a sandstorm that makes it impossible to recognize what kind of image it is. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play due to the influence of the noise.

In this embodiment, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, which will be described later, are provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. , that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are interposed. This is because the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not integrally constructed, but are separately assembled and attached to the main body frame 4, and the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame. After the work of attaching the door frame 3 to the door frame 4, various wiring such as harnesses and twist cables from various boards provided on the door frame 3 side are electrically connected to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the body frame 4 side. Thus, various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side can be electrically connected. With such a configuration, maintenance of the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be reduced by removing the door frame 3 from the main body frame 4 after the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 and various wirings are removed. However, if the defect occurring in the door frame 3 cannot be resolved, another door frame 3' is attached to the body frame 4 in place of the defective door frame 3, and the door frame 3 is replaced. By electrically connecting various wirings from various boards provided on the side of the body frame 4 to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 provided on the side of the body frame 4, various boards provided on the side of the body frame 4 and various wirings provided on the side of the door frame 3' can be connected. and the substrate can be electrically connected.

Further, in this embodiment, as described above, the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side presentation provided on the peripheral control board 1510 adopts differential communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Thine Electronics Co., Ltd. In addition to such a hardware configuration, even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by noise that enters the wiring, the noise is canceled (removed) on the receiving side. ) was employed as the differential one-pair cable to electrically connect between the transmitter and the receiver. Specifically, between the substrates between the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, between the substrates between the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and between the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the effect display drive The substrates 4450 and 4450 are electrically connected to each other by twisted pair cables, while power supply wiring and wiring for transmitting various signals are electrically connected by harnesses. As a result, in the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting the differential serial data transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, Power supply wiring patterns and various signal wiring patterns for transmitting various other signals are mixed. For this reason, on the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, the wiring patterns for video transmission are formed separately from the power wiring patterns and various signal wiring patterns by a predetermined distance. Since the path from the transmitter to the receiver straddles a plurality of relay terminal boards such as the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, video transmission terminals formed on these multiple relay terminal boards are provided. Between the input and output of the wiring pattern, a part of the signal transmitting serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is reflected and becomes noise, and the output level of the signal is lowered. occurs. Therefore, in the present embodiment, impedance matching is applied to the video transmission wiring patterns formed on the plurality of relay terminal boards.

Further, in this embodiment, as described above, between the substrates between the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, between the substrates between the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and between the substrates of the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 The terminal plate 882 and the effect display drive board 4450 are electrically connected by twisted pair cables, while the power supply wiring and wiring for transmitting various signals are electrically connected by harnesses. However, one wire of the twisted pair cable is red and the other wire is gray, and of the harness, the wire that supplies power is red and the other multiple wires are gray. . Note that the wiring for supplying power may be yellow instead of red.

[7-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differential circuit]
Signals output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are sent to the forced switching circuit 1512f, the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is designed to be transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 that is housed. LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, is supplied to the forced switching circuit 1512f in addition to the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d. is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e and input. The differential circuit 1512e serializes the LOCKN signal output request data into differential serial signals (serial data). This LOCKN signal output request data is used for the period during which the startup screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, or for the period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 is in a waiting state for a customer to perform a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600. During this period, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, which is provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and will be described later. , that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, is transmitted as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side effect display device 460 . The forced switching circuit 1512f, when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input, connects the circuits so as to transmit these two signals. When the two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the conversion circuit 1512e, the circuit is configured so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. It is As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected to each other so as to transmit the two signals. , is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, while in the differential circuit 1512e When the two differential signals of the plus signal and the minus signal are not input, the door frame side effect transmitter is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. A signal output from the IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. The peripheral control MPU 1511a displays the start screen on the game board side effect display device 1600 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and performs a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state. During the period, the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted toward the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510).

When a serial signal (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later, the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 serializes various and a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V that restores a signal to a parallel signal and outputs it to the door frame side effect display device 460.

Door frame side presentation receiver IC SDIC0 receives the drawing data from VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, and if it judges that the received drawing data is abnormal data, it transmits a LOCKN signal (to be described later) to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. , and output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 . This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control section 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 . Peripheral control MPU 1511a controls VDP 1512a with built-in sound source to generate an image for notifying that a predetermined condition is established based on the input LOCKN signal, and outputs the image to game board side effect display device 1600. is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 to notify.

Further, when the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 determines that the received two signals are LOCKN signal output request data, it outputs a LOCKN signal, which will be described later, to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 . As a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input. While it can be determined that there is no problem with the performance display drive board 4450 housed in 320, it is assumed that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is not input. It is determined that the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3 has a problem, and a notification image (for example, "There is a problem with the upper tray side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk.") is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, and a notification sound to that effect (for example, "A problem has occurred in the upper tray side liquid crystal display device ) is output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, and the notification sound is played from the speaker provided in the door frame 3. As a result, the notification can be made by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly played from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3 . At this time, all the various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and various decorative substrates provided on the game board 5 may be turned on.

[7-4-3. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 72, the RTC control unit 4165, which holds calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second, is mainly composed of the RTC 4165a. The RTC 4165a incorporates a RAM 4165aa (hereinafter referred to as "RTC built-in RAM 4165aa") that holds calendar information and time information. The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is used in this embodiment) as a drive power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. In other words, the RTC 4165a is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1) without receiving any power from the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1). As a result, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a can update and hold the calendar information and time information by power supply from the battery 4165b.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets them in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described above, and stores the acquired calendar information and time information. Based on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be unfolded. As such effects, for example, on December 25th, a screen of a Christmas tree and reindeer will be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and on New Year's Eve, a New Year countdown will be displayed. The screen to be executed is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and the like. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of shipment from the factory.

In addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores and holds LED brightness setting information when the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type backlight. there is The peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and adjusts the brightness of the backlight by PWM control when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of the LED type. . The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in a range of 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, and brightness adjustment information for the currently set game. The brightness of the LEDs that are the backlights of the board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are included.

In addition to the calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa also stores calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information as information on the date and hour, minute, and second first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. Input date and time information is also stored.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a performs ON/OFF control of the backlight or only ON when the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are of the cold cathode tube type. It is designed to

Various types of information such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date and time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa are set on the production line of the game machine manufacturer. In order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side effect display device 1600 on the production line, the year when the input date and time information was input on the production line as the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on. It is set to the date and time of manufacture, which is the month, day, hour, minute, and second.

In this way, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores, in addition to calendar information and time information, brightness setting information and input date and time information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of the LED type. , the information that needs to be maintained independently of the model information of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the probability of occurrence of a jackpot game state with a low probability or a high probability) can be stored.

In addition, depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the luminance setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright for the backlight luminance of the game board side effect display device 1600 set at the date and time of manufacture. , sometimes too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the effect operation unit 400, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. When the dial operation part 401 or the pressing operation part 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, if the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the production operation unit 400 is operated during the period in which the demonstration by the game board side production display device 1600 is being performed in the customer waiting state, the setting mode is performed. is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 . By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the calendar information and time information can be reset, and the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be set as desired. brightness can be adjusted. The adjusted desired brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is overwritten (updated) as the brightness of the LEDs stored in the brightness setting information.

In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the above-described brightness correction program, so that if the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type backlight, the game board side effect This corrects the decrease in luminance that accompanies aging of the display device 1600 . Peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires input date and time information from RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date and time when game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, and uses calendar information and time to specify the year, month, and day. Acquire time information specifying minutes and seconds to specify the current date and time, and adjust the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%. Luminance setting information including luminance adjustment information for playing and the currently set luminance of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, is acquired. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on the correction information pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b.

For example, based on the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first powered on and the current date and time, if six months have already passed since the time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first powered on, Acquire the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is lit, this 75% Based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted so that the brightness is 80%, which is the correction information acquired by adding 5%. and lights up, and if 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. When the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the acquired correction information of 10% is added to this 75% to obtain 85%. Based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on so as to achieve the brightness.

Note that the current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current time information acquisition processing of step S1002 in the control unit power-on processing. and the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 to specify the current date and time.

[834. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume control volume 1510a can adjust the volume of music, sound effects, etc., which are output from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob. As described above, the sound volume control volume 1510a is adapted to vary the resistance value by rotating the knob portion thereof, and the electrically connected peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak is connected to the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted into values in 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the values of 1024 steps are divided into 7 and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, and the board volume 6 is set to the maximum sound volume. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. FIG.

In this manner, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotating operation of the knob. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to the music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying the hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a problem with the pachinko machine 1 or a fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 1, and a game effect (For example, the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is made more powerful, or the possibility of shifting to an advantageous game state for the player is announced. etc.) also flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound are designed to flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, and the sound is muted. to the maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control section 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator) by a program.

The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from mute to maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into 7 steps described above. As a result, for example, even if the hall clerk or the like rotates the knob of the volume control volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the music, sound effects, etc. that flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are produced. Although the sound becomes smaller, when the pachinko machine 1 has a problem or when the player commits a fraudulent act, a notification sound set to a large volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be emitted. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk from noticing the occurrence of a problem or the player's fraudulent behavior due to the notification sound.

In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to the music and sound effects, the screen displayed on the game board side production display device 1600 and the door frame side production display device 460 is produced more powerfully by increasing the volume of the sound, which is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility of shifting to a game state.

In this embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, the dial operation unit 401 of the effect operation unit 400 and the By operating the push operation unit 405, it is possible to shift to a setting mode and adjust the volume of music and sound effects. When the dial operation part 401 or the pressing operation part 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, if the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the production operation unit 400 is operated during the period in which the demonstration by the game board side production display device 1600 is being performed in the customer waiting state, the setting mode is performed. is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 . By operating the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the presentation operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob of the volume control volume 1510a from an analog value to a digital value, and the converted value is By adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the effect operation unit 400, the value of the substrate volume can be increased or decreased. there is This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for the track in which the sound data of the production sound such as music and sound effects is incorporated, among the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a. However, it is not reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the notification sound and notification sound described above.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of music or sound effects is adjusted by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the dial operation unit 401 or pressing operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400 is used. and adjusting the volume of music or sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of . Since the volume control volume 1510 a is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 , the body frame 4 must always be left open from the outer frame 2 . Then, the person who can rotate the knob of the volume control volume 1510a is the store clerk in the hall. However, with the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, the player may find the music and sound effects to be too soft and difficult to hear, and the player may feel loud and the music and sound effects loud. Therefore, within a predetermined period of time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 are operated, and a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed in the customer waiting state. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated during the period during which the effect is being performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the presentation operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. As a result, the player can adjust the volume of the music and sound effects to a desired volume. The dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 can be operated to increase the volume to a desired level. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of 400, the volume can be reduced to a desired volume.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is in a non-playing state for a predetermined period of time and the customer waits for customers, the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times). , the volume adjusted by the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing the game last time is canceled and the volume is initialized. In the initialization of the volume, the volume is set to the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob of the volume control volume 1510a. As a result, when a player who has played a game while sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time feels that the adjusted sound volume is too small to hear the music and sound effects, the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 this time. A player who plays a game can operate the dial operation part 401 and the pressing operation part 405 of the effect operation unit 400 to increase the volume to a desired volume, and the player sat in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time and played a game. If the player who has been playing the game feels that the adjusted volume is loud and the music and sound effects are loud, this time, the player who sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game can turn the dial operation unit 401 of the production operation unit 400. By operating the pressing operation unit 405, the volume can be reduced to a desired volume.

[8. power supply system]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. FIG. FIG. 75 is a block diagram showing the power supply system of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. First, the power supply board 931 will be described, and then the power supplied to each control board and the like will be described. The grounds (GND) of various substrates and the grounds (GND) of various terminal plates are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power substrate 931 and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power supply board 931]
The power board 931 is electrically connected to a power cord, and the plug of this power cord is inserted into the power outlet of the pachinko island facility. When the power switch 934 is operated, power supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the power board 931, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 can be turned on.

The power board 931 includes a power control section 935 and a firing control section 953, as shown in FIG. The power control unit 935 is a circuit that creates various DC voltages from the 24 volts AC (24V AC) supplied from the pachinko island facility and supplies backup power to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. A section 953 is a circuit for driving and controlling the shooting solenoid 682 of the ball shooting device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG.

The power control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 935a, a power factor improvement circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c, a power generation circuit 935d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. AC 24V supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the power supply board 931, and is also supplied to the synchronous rectification circuit 935a. This synchronous rectification circuit 935a rectifies the AC 24 volts (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island facility and supplies it to the power factor improvement circuit 935b. The power factor correction circuit 935b improves the power factor of the rectified power to generate DC +37V (DC+37V, hereinafter referred to as "+37V") and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 935c. This smoothing circuit 935c removes the supplied +37V ripple, smoothes the +37V, and supplies it to the firing control circuit 953a and the power generating circuit 935d of the firing control section 953, respectively.

Capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the capacitor BC1 is built into the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951. It supplies backup power to the RAM (withdrawal control built-in RAM).

The shooting control circuit 953a of the shooting control unit 953 uses +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c as a drive power source, and shoots the game ball with a launching strength (launching strength) corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 302. While adjusting the drive current for striking (firing) toward the ball and controlling the output to the firing solenoid 682, the ball of the ball feeding unit 250 is output by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250. A feeding member receives one game ball stored in the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320, and controls feeding of the game ball received by the ball feeding member to the shot ball launching device 650 side.

The power source generation circuit 935d supplies from +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c to DC +5V (DC+5V, hereinafter referred to as "+5V"), DC +12V (DC+12V, hereinafter referred to as "+12V"), and DC +24V (DC+24V, hereinafter referred to as "+24V") is generated and supplied to the payout control board 951 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, respectively. A power system to which +5V is applied is a +5V power line, a power system to which +12V is applied is a +12V power line, and a power system to which +24V is applied is a +24V power line.

The +5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d is supplied to the payout control board 951 as described later. +5V supplied to the payout control board 951 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control filter circuit 951a, and is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM through the diode PD0. ing. +12V generated by the power generation circuit 935d is supplied to the +5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. This +5V creation circuit 1310g creates +5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a from +12V from the payout control board 951. The +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a through the main control filter circuit 1310h and to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM through the diode MD0. ing.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 is grounded (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 951, and the payout The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the control board 951 is also electrically connected. In other words, the +5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 flows toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM, which is forward due to the diode PD0, and the capacitor BC1. The positive terminal is designed to allow current to flow toward it. In this way, the capacitor BC1 is connected to +5V by an electrical connection method in which +5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is returned to the payout control board 951 and then again from the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. is supplied and can be charged. As a result, when the +5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d is no longer supplied to the payout control board 951, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 951 as payout VBB. Therefore, although the current does not flow to the power terminal of the payout control MPU 952a because it is blocked by the diode PD0, the payout control MPU 952a does not operate, but the memory content is retained by supplying the payout VBB to the power terminal of the payout control built-in RAM. It has become so.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 is grounded (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. , and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 on the main control board 1310 . In other words, the +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 in the forward direction due to the diode MD0. A current flows in the direction of Thus, the capacitor BC0 is supplied with +5V and charged by an electrical connection method in which +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. You can do it. As a result, the +12V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the +5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the +5V creation circuit 1310g can create +5V. When it is exhausted, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied as the main VBB to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. Therefore, a diode is connected to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Although the current is blocked by MD0 and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the main VBB is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM so that the memory contents are retained. Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit for supplying backup power to the main control built-in RAM is composed of the diode MD0 and the capacitor BC0.

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board, etc.]
Next, the outline about the voltage supplied to each control board etc. is demonstrated, Then, the voltage mainly supplied to the payout control board and the voltage supplied to the main control board are demonstrated.

The three types of voltages +5V, +12V, and +24V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the payout control board 951, as shown in FIG. Two voltages of +24 V are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 . The three types of voltages +5 V, +12 V, and +24 V created by the power source creation circuit 935d of the power supply substrate 931 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and through the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, are supplied to the peripheral They are supplied to the control board 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 respectively.

The three voltages of +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 are applied to the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 and the drive source drive circuit of the motor drive board 4180, as shown in FIG. 4180a, respectively. The lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 outputs various signals such as a lighting signal, a blinking signal and a gradation lighting signal to various decoration boards of the game board 5, and the drive source drive circuit 4180a of the motor drive board 4180 A drive signal is output to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid for the board 5 .

The peripheral control board 1510 includes a +3.3V generating circuit 1510b that generates DC 3.3V (DC+3.3V, hereinafter referred to as "+3.3V") from +5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. ing. The +3.3V generated by the +3.3V generation circuit 1510b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600. FIG. In addition, +12V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the backlight power source 1600b of the game board side effect display device 1600. FIG.

On the other hand, the three voltages of +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 as shown in FIG. 76(b). The frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 has a +9V generating circuit 194a that generates DC +9V (DC+9V, hereinafter referred to as "+9V") from +12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. +9V generated by the +9V generation circuit 194a and +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to various decorative substrates of the door frame 3 and the like.

In addition, +12V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is supplied to the upper tray side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x. The upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x generates +3.3V from +12V. The +3.3 V generated by the upper tray liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x is supplied to various electronic components constituting the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V shown in FIG. and the door frame side effect display device 460, respectively. The voltage generated by the upper tray side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450 y is supplied to the door frame side effect display device 460 .

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the payout control board 951 includes a payout control filter circuit 951a and the like in addition to the payout control MPU 952a and the like. This payout control filter circuit 951a is supplied with +5V from the power supply board 931, and removes noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 931 via the diode PD0, and is also supplied to the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952, for example. +12V from the power supply board 931 is supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952, and is supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal plate 784 via the payout control board 951. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal plate 784 is a circuit for outputting a signal that conveys the number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, etc., to a hall computer installed in the game hall (hall). is. The hall computer monitors the game played by the player by ascertaining the number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, etc. from signals output from the external communication circuit 784a. In addition, +24 from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 without being used at all in the payout control board 951 .

[8-2-2. Voltage supplied to the main control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 includes a +5V generation circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, etc., in addition to the main control MPU 1310a. The +5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied with +12V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and creates +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from this +12V. In the main control board 1310, the +5V power line is a power supply system to which +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g is applied and supplied. In this embodiment, the +5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 and the +5V power supply line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected. Therefore, the +5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control board 1310, and the +5V power supply of the main control board 1310 The +5V power supply line created by the creating circuit 1310g is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as other boards other than the main control board 1310, either.

The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with +5V produced by the +5V production circuit 1310g, and removes noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 931 via the diode MD0, and is also supplied to the main control MPU 1310a, for example. +12V from the payout control board 951, for example, is supplied to the main control input circuit 1310b and the like, +24V from the payout control board 951, for example, is supplied to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is supplied with +12V and +24V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and monitors signs of power failure or momentary power failure of these +12V and +24V. When the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e detects signs of power failure or momentary power failure of +12V and +24V, it outputs a power failure notice signal as a power failure notice to the main control MPU 1310a. The power failure warning signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a through the main control board 1310 and the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control board 951. Also, the power outage warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310 . 76(b), the power failure warning signal is input to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. At the same time, they are input to the decoration substrates of the door frames and the like via the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 .

In this embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the voltage applied to each of the +12V power line and the +24V power line by monitoring the voltage applied to either the +12V power line or the +24V power line. Signs of power failure such as power failure or momentary power failure can be detected more accurately than when monitoring the voltage applied to the power supply.

[9. Main control board circuit]
Next, the circuit etc. of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. FIG. 77 is a circuit diagram showing the circuit of the main control board, FIG. 78 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 79 is a circuit showing an interface circuit for communication between the main control board and the peripheral control board. It is a diagram. First, the main control filter circuit 1310h shown in FIG. 75 will be explained, followed by the power supply created by the main control board 1310, the main control system reset, the main control crystal oscillator, the main control input circuit, the power failure monitoring circuit, the main control MPU Various input/output signals to and from the main control board 1310 and the interface circuit for communication between the peripheral control boards 1510 will be described.

The main control board 1310 includes a main control MPU 1310a, a main control input circuit 1310b, a main control output circuit 1310c, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, a +5V generation circuit 1310g, and a main control MPU 1310a shown in FIGS. In addition to the control filter circuit 1310h, peripheral circuits include a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal and a main control crystal oscillator MX0 that outputs a clock signal (24 megahertz (MHz )).

[9-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 77, the main control filter circuit 1310h is mainly composed of a main control 3-terminal filter MIC0. This main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, magnetically shielded with ferrite, and has excellent attenuation characteristics. The main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 has its 1st terminal applied with +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g, its 2nd terminal connected to the ground (GND), and its 3rd terminal to remove noise components. +5V is output. The +5V applied to the No. 1 terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0, one end of which is grounded (GND), so that the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) is first removed. smoothed.

The +5 V output from the third terminal is electrically connected to the other ends of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF)), one end of which is grounded (GND). , the ripple is further removed and smoothed. This smoothed +5V is applied to the power terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the like. It should be noted that the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is supplied with the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off. It is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after it is generated.

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC3, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the +5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. A VSS terminal, which is a ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is grounded (GND).

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor MC3. The cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and one end of the capacitor MC4 is connected to the ground (GND). is electrically connected to the other end of the The VBB terminal of this main control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4. electrically connected to the terminal. That is, the +5 V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and is applied to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC0 through the diode MD0. is intended to be applied to the positive terminal of As a result, as described above, the +12V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. When the circuit 1310g cannot generate +5V, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB, so the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a Although the main control MPU 1310a does not operate because the current is blocked by the diode MD0, the stored contents are retained by applying the main VBB to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM.

[9-2. Main control system reset]
The +5 V from which noise components have been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the power terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 as shown in FIG. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, and includes a delay circuit. The delay capacitor terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC5, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the delay time of the delay circuit is set by the capacity of this capacitor MC5. It is possible to do so. Specifically, the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the elapse of the delay time when +5 V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (eg, 4.25 V).

The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal, which is the reset terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type capacitor, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1 electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the other end of which is grounded (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of MC6. Ripple is removed and smoothed by this capacitor MC6. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is higher than the threshold, the output terminal is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI. While being input to the reset terminal of the circuit 1310ca, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is applied to the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. Input to the reset pin respectively. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold, the main control MPU 1310a and the reset function The main control output circuit 1310ca with is reset. One end of the power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC7 grounded to the ground (GND), and the +5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. Also, the ground terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the NC terminal is electrically unconnected to the outside.

[9-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
The +5 V from which noise components have been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, as shown in FIG. This VDD terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC8, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the +5V input to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VDD terminal, this smoothed +5 V is also applied to the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal and ST terminal, which are output frequency selection terminals. The main controlled crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a 24 MHz clock signal from the F terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying +5 V to these A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal.

The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and receives a 24 MHz clock signal. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main controlled crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded (GND), and the D terminal that outputs the divided frequency of the F terminal of the main controlled crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically unconnected to the outside. state.

[9-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 1310b detects signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, and the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. In addition to signals, this is a circuit to which an operation signal (RAM clear signal) or the like from an operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is input. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, the circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is input will be described here.

[9-4-1. Circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch is input]
First, as described above, the operation switch 954 is a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 and the main control of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the power on. It is operated to clear the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the MPU 1310a, or to cancel the error when an error is reported after the power is turned on. A function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, and an error cancellation after the power is turned on (after the period during which the RAM clear function has passed, that is, after the predetermined period has passed since the power was turned on). and a function to perform Since the main control board 1310 does not have the function of canceling the error that the payout control board 951 has, when the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input within a predetermined period from the time the power is turned on, the main control It is judged as a RAM clear signal for clearing the built-in RAM, and processing for clearing the main control built-in RAM is performed.

The main control board 1310 receives an operation signal whose logic is LOW from the payout control board 951 when the operation switch 954 is not operated. becomes HI is input from the payout control board 951 (detailed description of this point will be given later).

The transmission line that transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 within a predetermined period from the time of power-on is, as shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via the resistor MR3. The base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the resistor MR3, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR4 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor MTR0 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor MR5, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC10 (non-inverting buffer ICMIC10 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC10A) without inverting it.) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

The circuit that outputs the operation signal from the operation switch 954 in the payout control board 951 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is transmitted. The line is pulled up to +12V by pull-up resistor MR2. The main control board 1310, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW and is input, while the operation switch 954 is operated. When it is on, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 and the logic becomes HI and is input.

A circuit composed of the resistors MR3 and MR4 and the transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by an operation signal from the operation switch 954. FIG.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, an operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, thereby turning off the transistor MTR0 and also turning off the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR5, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. be done. When the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, the main control MPU 1310a instructs to perform RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM. to decide.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, an operation signal pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor MR2 and logic becomes HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, thereby turning on the transistor MTR0 and switching the switch. The circuit is also turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. be done. The main control MPU 1310a instructs to perform RAM clear for erasing information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW. I judge.

It should be noted that the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input through the payout control board 951 . That is, between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951, in order to suppress the influence of noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards, the control reference voltage is higher than +5V A voltage of +12V is used to improve signal reliability. Therefore, in this embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, and the second starting opening sensor 4004, which are directly input to the main control board 1310, are pulled up to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor. While being pulled up, the detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, the general winning opening sensor 4020, and the gate sensor 4003, which are input via the panel relay board 4161 shown in FIG. Since it is not directly input, it is pulled up to the +12V side by a pull-up resistor like the operation signal from the operation switch 954 .

[9-5. Power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 is supplied with two voltages of +12 V and +24 V from the power supply board 931 through the payout control board 951, and +12 V and +24 V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. ing. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors signs of a power failure or momentary power failure of +12V and +24V, and when a power failure or momentary power failure sign is detected, a power failure warning signal is sent as a power failure warning to the main control MPU 1310a and a payout control board. It is output to the payout control MPU 952 a of 951 and the peripheral control board 1510 . Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described first, followed by the monitoring of +24 V power failure or momentary power failure, +12 V power failure or momentary power failure monitoring, and the output of a power failure warning signal.

[9-5-1. Configuration of blackout monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 78, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e mainly includes a shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D-type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

The REF terminal, which is the reference voltage input terminal, and the K terminal, which is the cathode terminal, of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20 are electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR20, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. +5V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (2.495 V is set in this embodiment) that serves as a comparison reference voltage for the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC20, one end of which is grounded (GND). AC component) is removed and smoothed. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded (GND).

The comparator MIC21 has two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used to compare the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V with the reference voltage Vref, and the other one (MIC21B) , +12V are used to compare the monitor voltage V2 and the reference voltage Vref. A monitoring voltage V1 of +24 V is applied to the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21A, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the second terminal, which is the negative terminal of the MIC 21A. A monitoring voltage V2 of +12 V is applied to the fifth terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21B, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the sixth terminal, which is the negative terminal of the MIC 21B. These comparison results are input to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. This D-type flip-flop MIC22 has two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in this embodiment. The Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC21, one end of which is grounded (GND). , the ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21, is connected to the ground (GND).

[9-5-2. +24V blackout or momentary blackout monitoring]
The +24V power failure or momentary power failure is monitored by the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 comparing the +24V monitor voltage V1 and the reference voltage Vref as described above. As shown in FIG. 78, the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21A of comparator MIC21 to which +24V monitoring voltage V1 is applied, is connected to resistor MR21, one end of which is electrically connected to the +24V power supply line, and the other end of resistor MR21. is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR22 grounded to the ground (GND), the other ends of the resistors MR21 and MR22 and the other end of the capacitor MC23 grounded to the ground (GND); are electrically connected. The monitoring voltage V1 of +24V applied to the No. 3 terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is divided by +24V according to the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC23. . The values of the resistors MR21 and MR22 are such that when +24V is interrupted or instantaneously interrupted, the voltage starts to drop from +24V and becomes the preset power failure detection voltage V1pf (in this embodiment, it is set to 21.40V). The monitor voltage V1 of +24V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

The first terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor MR23 electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC24, one end of which is grounded (GND), and is electrically connected to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

When the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the No. 1 terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is +5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. A signal that has been pulled up to the side and has a logic HI is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the +24V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is the ground (GND). A signal whose logic is LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-3. +12V blackout or momentary blackout monitoring]
The +12V power failure or momentary power failure is monitored by the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 comparing the +12V monitor voltage V2 and the reference voltage Vref as described above. As shown in FIG. 78, the fifth terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 to which the +12V monitor voltage V2 is applied, is a resistor MR24 whose one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR25 grounded to the ground (GND), the other ends of the resistors MR24 and MR25 and the other end of the capacitor MC25 grounded to the ground (GND); are electrically connected. The monitoring voltage V2 of +12V applied to the 5th terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is divided by +12V according to the resistance ratio of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC25. . The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 are such that, when +12V power failure or momentary power failure occurs, the voltage starts to drop from +12V and becomes the preset power failure detection voltage V2pf (10.47V in this embodiment). The monitor voltage V2 of +12V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref when the reference voltage Vref is applied.

The 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output, and is electrically connected to the 1st terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A. A preset D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor MR23 which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of a capacitor MC24 having one end grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is a terminal. Capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter as described above.

When the +12V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the +12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is +5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. A signal that has been pulled up to the side and has a logic HI is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the +12V voltage is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the +12V monitoring voltage V2 is lower than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is the ground (GND). A signal whose logic is LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-4. Power failure warning signal output]
The D-type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, according to the change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal, and stores this stored value. (logic) is output from the 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal, and a value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal. When the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a signal whose logic is LOW at the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, it releases the latched state and resets the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal. The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal (at this time, the logic of the signal output from 1Q is inverted, that is, the same logic as the signal input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal). (a logic signal is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal). On the other hand, when a logic HI signal is input to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, the latch state is set. In addition, when the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is configured to set the latch state by inputting a signal whose logic is HI to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, the logic of the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal, is LOW. is input, the state of outputting a signal with logic HI from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, is maintained (at this time, the signal output from 1Q with the logic inverted is negative logic maintains the state of output from the 1Q terminal).

In the present embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a D input terminal 1D terminal and a clock input terminal 1CK terminal that are both grounded (GND). The circuit is configured so that there is no change in the edge of the input clock signal, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, is stored and is not output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. ing. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a PR terminal, which is a preset terminal. Alternatively, a signal from the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors momentary power failure, is input, and based on these signals, a signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. The Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC22, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the voltage is applied to the Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. +5V is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor MC22, the GND terminal as the ground terminal is grounded (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal that inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal as the output terminal is electrically connected to the outside. It is in an unconnected state.

In the present embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a through the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal. This power failure clear signal is designed to be stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed after starting to be output in the main control side power-on processing (to be described later) performed by the main control MPU 1310a. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function with the logic being LOW. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is designed to release the latched state when a power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal. is output from the 1Q terminal.

On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic becomes HI through the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function and is input to the CLR terminal. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is designed to set a latch state when the power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches the input state when the logic is LOW to the PR terminal.

The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. A signal output from the 1Q terminal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning signal. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, and resets the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The functionless main control output circuit 1310cb outputs to the payout control board 951 as a payout power outage warning signal, and outputs to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal.

The main control input circuit 1310b electrically connects the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the amplifier MIC22, is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor MR26 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via a resistor MR27. It is connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor MR27, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR28 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC23 (Non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC23A) without inverting it.). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

A circuit composed of the resistors MR27, MR28 and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning off the transistor MTR20. , the switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side, turning on the transistor MTR20. The switch circuit is also turned ON.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the logic HI signal is preset to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal which is the terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 becomes LOW in logic and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR29, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes HI through the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is output to the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Input to PA1.

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HIGH in logic and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. This turns on the transistor MTR20. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes LOW through the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is output to the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Input to PA1.

In addition, the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the payout control board 951 as the payout power outage warning signal is open as shown in FIG. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is connected via the resistor MR30. It is electrically connected to the base terminal. The base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR30, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR31, one end of which is connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 via a resistor MR33. The base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR33, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR34 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the wiring is connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via (harness). In addition, when the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control unit 952 shown in FIG. 70 in the payout control board 951 In the circuit 952b, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. connected.

A circuit composed of the resistors MR30 and MR31 and the transistor MTR21 of the preceding stage is a switching circuit of the preceding stage, and a circuit composed of the resistors MR33, MR34 and the transistor MTR22 of the succeeding stage is a switching circuit of the latter stage, and is a D-type flip-flop. It is turned ON/OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 22 .

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor in the previous stage is pulled down. MTR21 is turned off, and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned off, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR32. As a result, the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the latter stage is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is pulled up to the +5V side, turning on the transistor MTR21. The switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, thereby The transistor MTR22 is turned off, and the subsequent switch circuit is also turned off.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are met, the logic HI signal is preset to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal PR, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. transistor MTR21 is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, thereby turning on the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 through the wiring (harness), so that the payout power outage warning signal whose logic becomes LOW is issued. It is input to the control board 951 .

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HIGH in logic and is applied to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21. The input turns ON the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, thereby turning off the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness). A payout power outage warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951 .

In addition, the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as the peripheral power outage warning signal is open as shown in FIG. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. is electrically connected to The base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor MR35, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR36, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness), the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control section 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. , one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Connected.

A circuit composed of the resistors MR35 and MR36 and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning off the transistor MTR23. , the switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the +5V side to turn on the transistor MTR23. The switch circuit is also turned ON.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the logic HI signal is preset to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal which is the terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. is input to the peripheral control board 1510 .

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HIGH in logic and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. This turns on the transistor MTR23. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness). 1510.

In this way, a main control input circuit 1310b that transmits a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the main control MPU 1310a as a blackout warning signal, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. A main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function that outputs a signal output from a peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure warning signal and a main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function each have one transistor. While the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal input to the control board 1510 is the same logic, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 is issued to the payout control board 951. The main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function that outputs a power failure warning signal has two transistors, a front stage and a rear stage. The logic is the inversion of the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal input to the control board 1510, and is different from the logic of the power outage warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal.

The collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the main control MPU 1310a through the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage of the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb is connected via wiring (harness) to the payout control board. In the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in 951, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to a pull-up resistor one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). It is connected to the. This is because the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the main control MPU 1310a are located between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. 1310, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board, whereas the power failure warning signal logic (ON / OFF signal) using +5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a 951 and between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, the main control MPU 1310a, A power failure warning is performed by the power failure warning signal logic (ON/OFF signal) using +12V, which is a voltage higher than +5V which is the control reference voltage of the payout control MPU 952a and the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

[9-6. Various input/output signals to the main control MPU]
Next, various input/output signals to the main control MPU 1310a will be described with reference to FIG. The RXA terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the main control MPU 1310a, receives the serial data from the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 as the payer serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 1310b. . On the other hand, the TXA terminal and TXB terminal, which are the serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 1310a, use the serial data transmitted from the TXA terminal to the payout control board 951 as the main payment serial data transmission signal. A main payment serial data transmission signal is transmitted to the circuit 1310cb and the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function is transmitted to the payout control board 951, and the serial data to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. A peripheral serial data transmission signal is transmitted to the main control output circuit 1310 cb without reset function, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the main control output circuit 1310 cb without reset function to the peripheral control board 1510 .

In addition to the above-described operation signal (RAM clear signal) being input to each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a payout signal indicating the completion of normal reception of the main payment serial data reception signal described above A payer ACK signal from the control board 951 is input via the main control input circuit 1310b, and detection signals from various switches such as the first starting port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69 are input via the main control input circuit 1310b. respectively entered or equal.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a main payment ACK signal indicating the completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned payer serial data reception signal is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. Then, a main payment ACK signal is output to the payout control board 951 from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, and a drive signal is sent to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function for the starting solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. and output a drive signal from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the starting port solenoid 2107 via the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and various displays such as the first special symbol display 1403 shown in FIG. For the device, a drive signal is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, and a drive signal is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to various displays, and various information (game information) related to the game is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, and various information (game information) related to the game is output to the payout control board 951 from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function.

[9-7. Interface circuit for communication between main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, an interface circuit for communication between main control board 1310 and peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIG. The main control board 1310 is supplied with +12V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. ing. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is affected by noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress this, +12V, which is a higher voltage than +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, is used for transmission, thereby increasing its reliability.

Specifically, the main control board 1310 causes the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function to function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly comprises a resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and a transistor MTR50. It is On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 includes, as a communication interface circuit, a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photo IC built-in). It is composed mainly of

+12 V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 1310 through the payout control board 951, and the negative terminal is grounded to the ground (GND) to the cathode terminal of the diode MD50. is electrically connected to the positive terminal of an electrolytic capacitor MC50 (capacitance: 220 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment). The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, and is also electrically connected to the anode terminal (terminal 1) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). It is connected to the.
As a result, for example, due to a power failure or momentary power failure, when the power from the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 +12V can be continuously applied from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510 .

As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in this embodiment, the capacitance is 470 μF) shown in FIG. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a serially manages at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The data can be transferred to the transmission shift register 41aea by the unit 1310aec and transmitted from the transmission shift register 1310aea as main peripheral serial data.

The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 as described above. In order to suppress the influence of intruding noise, the reliability is enhanced by transmitting using +12V, which is higher than +5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, +12 V is charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 so that it is applied from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a transfers the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to the transmission shift register 41aea by the serial management unit 1310aec and transmits it. When transmitted from the shift register 1310aea as main cycle serial data, a main cycle serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI at +12V can be transmitted from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50.

In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a is 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, data of up to 10 packets are stored in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. Also, in this embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a is set to 19200 bps.

The cathode terminal (third terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 on the main control board 1310 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). A resistor AR10 of the peripheral control board 1510 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

A TXB terminal for outputting a main peripheral serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 via. The base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the resistor MR51 and also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR52, one end of which is connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded (GND).

A circuit composed of the resistors MR51 and MR52 and the transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit, and when the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded (GND). As a result, the transistor MTR50 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, forward current does not flow through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main-peripheral serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR50, turning on the transistor MTR50 and also turning on the switch circuit. . As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on.

+5 V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 1510 through the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is grounded (GND). It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the grounded electrolytic capacitor AC10. The cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10 and also electrically connected to the Vcc terminal (terminal 6) which is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (4th terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal (5th terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to the +5V side by AR11 and electrically connected to the input terminal of the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. By turning ON/OFF the photocoupler AIC10, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is transmitted as the main peripheral serial data transmission signal to the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. is input to the input terminal of

As a result, as described above, when the +5 V supplied from the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 due to, for example, a power failure or momentary power failure, The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 as +5V. When a power outage or momentary power failure occurs, +5V is applied from the electrolytic capacitor AC10, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the main control MPU 1310a. The transmission of the data set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the built-in main-circumference serial transmission port 1310ae can be completed. The peripheral control board 1510 can reliably receive the data without missing or missing data.

When the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off by turning off the MTR50, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor AR11, and the logic becomes HI. While the serial data transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR50 to turn on the transistor MTR50, thereby turning on the photocoupler AIC10. The voltage applied to the collector terminal is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the serial I/O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. . Thus, the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. It is the logic of

Thus, in this embodiment, a +5V power line to which +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, is applied, and a +12V power line to which +12V, which is the communication voltage applied via the diode MD50, is applied. , measures are taken when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage and communication voltage drop. That is, for the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a, the +5V power supply line, the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h as the first auxiliary power supply, are electrically connected in parallel, even if a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the +5V power supply line drops, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 1310h which is the first auxiliary power supply By applying the control reference voltage from the positive terminal of MC2, it is possible to maintain the state in which the control reference voltage is applied. +12V applied to the +12V power supply line is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 as a communication voltage for the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function that functions as a communication interface circuit. and the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power supply, are electrically connected in parallel, so that a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the communication voltage is applied from the +12V power supply line through the diode MD50. Even if the voltage drops, the state in which the communication voltage is applied can be maintained by applying the communication voltage from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power supply. there is As a result, the command being transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented from being interrupted, and the command can be prevented from being lost. can do. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the command from being missed immediately after the occurrence of a power failure or during an instantaneous power failure.

In addition, a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a are all used as main peripheral serial data, and are composed of the resistor MR50, the resistors MR51 and MR52, and the transistor MTR50. 470 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h so that transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function that functions as a communication interface circuit. and 220 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50. As a result, even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs during transmission from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the multiple commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb are reset so that all of them function as interface circuits as main peripheral serial data. Since transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the non-functioning main control output circuit 1310cb, the peripheral control board 1510 does not interrupt or drop multiple commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. can be received without fail.

[10. Circuit of Payout Control Board]
Next, the circuit etc. of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 85. FIG. 80 is a circuit diagram showing the circuit of the payout control unit, etc., FIG. 81 is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit, FIG. 82 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 81, and FIG. 83 is a payout motor drive FIG. 84 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input/output circuit, and FIG. 85 is an input/output diagram showing various input/output signals to/from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. is. First, the payout control filter circuit will be explained, and then the circuit of the payout control unit, various input/output signals with the main control board, and various output signals to the external terminal board will be explained.

[10-1. Dispensing Control Filter Circuit]
As shown in FIG. 80, the payout control filter circuit 951a is mainly composed of a payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0. This payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, magnetically shielded with ferrite, and has excellent attenuation characteristics. The 1st terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is applied with +5V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75, and is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0 whose one end is grounded (GND). The +5V from the power supply board 931 is first smoothed by removing the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) by the capacitor PC0. The 2nd terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is grounded (GND), and the 3rd terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 outputs +5V from which the noise component is removed.

The third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 has one end grounded (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment). By being electrically connected to each other, the +5V output from the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is further smoothed by removing ripples. This smoothed +5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, the VCC terminal that is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, the VDD terminal that is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, etc., which will be described later. . It should be noted that the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, is supplied with the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off. It is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after generation.

The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC3 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the +5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC3. ing. A VSS terminal, which is a ground terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, is grounded (GND).

Moreover, the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor PC3. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a, and one end is grounded (GND) and the capacitor PC4 which is grounded. is electrically connected to the other end of the The VBB terminal of this payout control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4. electrically connected to the terminal. That is, +5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and through the diode PD0, the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC1 is intended to be applied to the positive terminal of As a result, as described above, when the +5V generated by the power source generation circuit 935d of the power source substrate 931 shown in FIG. Since it is designed to be supplied to the payout control board 951 as, the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the payout control MPU 952a does not operate. The memory contents are held by applying VBB. Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit for supplying backup power to the payout control built-in RAM is composed of the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1.

[10-2. Circuit of Payout Control Unit]
The payout control unit 952 includes a payout control MPU 952a, a payout control input circuit 952b, a payout control output circuit 952c, a payout motor drive circuit 952d, a CR unit input/output circuit 952e, and peripheral circuits as shown in FIG. It mainly consists of a payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a signal and a payout control crystal oscillator PX0 that outputs a clock signal (8 megahertz (MHz) in this embodiment). Here, the payout control system reset will be described first, followed by the payout control crystal oscillator, payout control input circuit, payout motor drive circuit, CR unit input/output circuit, and various input/output signals to the payout control MPU.

[10-2-1. Dispensing control system reset]
+5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, as shown in FIG. The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and incorporates a delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC5, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the delay time of the delay circuit is set by the capacity of this capacitor PC5. It is possible to do so. Specifically, the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time elapses when +5V input to the power terminal reaches a threshold value (eg, 4.25V).

The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal, which is the reset terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type capacitor, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR1 electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the other end of which is grounded (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of PC6. This capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low-pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is greater than the threshold, the output terminal is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR1 and the logic becomes HI, and this logic is the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output with reset function While input to the reset terminal of the circuit 952ca, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is applied to the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. Input to the reset pin respectively. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold, the payout control MPU 952a and the reset function The attached payout control output circuit 952ca is reset. One end of the power supply terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of a capacitor PC7, and the +5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. Also, the ground terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the NC terminal is electrically unconnected to the outside.

[10-2-2. Dispensing Control Crystal Oscillator]
+5V from which noise components have been removed and smoothed by the payout control filter circuit 951a is input to the VCC terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, as shown in FIG. This VCC terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC8, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the +5V input to the VCC terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VCC terminal, this smoothed +5V is also applied to the OE terminal, which is the output enable terminal of the payout controlled crystal oscillator PX0. The payout controlled crystal oscillator PX0 outputs a clock signal of 8 MHz from the OUT terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying +5V to its OE terminal.

The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and an 8 MHz clock signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout controlled crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to the ground (GND).

[10-2-3. Payout control input circuit]
The payout control input circuit 952b receives payout power failure notice signals from the door frame open switch 618, the body frame open switch 619, and the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. circuit, handle relay terminal plate 315 shown in FIG. 70, a circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input via the power supply board 931, a circuit to which the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input, and the like. . First, the circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame open switch is input will be explained, followed by the circuit to which the detection signal from the body frame open switch is input, the circuit to which the output power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input, A circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input and a circuit to which the operation signal from the operation switch is input will be described. In addition, the full tank detection sensor 279 and various detection switches such as the ball out detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from the switch is input is almost the same, the circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input will be described here.

[10-2-3(a). Circuit where the detection signal from the door frame open switch is input]
The door frame open switch 618 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and when the door frame 3 is opened from the body frame 4 as shown in FIG. 3 is closed by the body frame 4, the switch is turned off (disconnected). The second terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is grounded (GND), while the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is a pull-up resistor PR20, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. terminal and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via a resistor PR21. The base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor PR21, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR22 whose one end is grounded (GND). Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC20, one end of which is grounded (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR23, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC20 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC20 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC20A) without inverting it.) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR20 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as a door opening signal.

Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21. and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 through the resistor PR24. The base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the resistor PR24, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR25, one end of which is connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line (not shown). It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR21, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door open information output signal.

Further, the No. 1 terminal of the door frame open switch 618 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through the resistor PR21. , and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 through the resistor PR24. ing. The base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the resistor PR26, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR27 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR22 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as the main frame door opening signal.

A circuit composed of a pull-up resistor PR20 and a capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generating circuit, and when the door frame 3 is opened from the body frame 4 or when the door frame 3 is closed with the body frame 4, It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the door frame opening switch 618 due to a flapping phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the door frame opening switch 618 repeat ON/OFF for a short period of time.

A circuit composed of resistors PR21, PR22 and transistor PTR20, a circuit composed of resistors PR24, PR25 and transistor PTR21, and a circuit composed of resistors PR26, PR27 and transistor PTR22 are door frame opening switches. It is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by a detection signal from 618 .

When the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on. Therefore, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor PTR20 is turned on. It turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, and the door frame open signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. be. Further, when the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor The PTR 21 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off.
As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 through the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes HI. is input to the external terminal plate 784 . Further, when the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor The PTR 22 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 through the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to the main control board 1310 .

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed from the body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is off, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR20. , the transistor PTR20 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the door frame open signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is raised to +5 V, thereby turning the transistor PTR21 on. Then, the switch circuit is also turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the external terminal plate 784. FIG. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is raised to +5V, thereby turning the transistor PTR22 ON. Then, the switch circuit is also turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the main frame door open signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the main control board 1310 .

In this way, when the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, the door frame open signal whose logic is HI is sent to the input terminal of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a by turning on the door frame open switch 618. The outer end frame door open information output signal which is input to PA0 and whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal plate 784, and the main frame door open signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310, When the door frame 3 is closed to the body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is turned off, so that the door frame open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. , the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal plate 784 , and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310 .

[10-2-3(b). Circuit where the detection signal from the body frame open switch is input]
The body frame opening switch 619 is of a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and when the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 shown in FIG. 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the switch is turned off (disconnected). The No. 2 terminal of the body frame open switch 619 is grounded (GND), while the No. 1 terminal of the body frame open switch 619 has a pull-up resistor PR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power line. , and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via a resistor PR29. The base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor PR29, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR30 whose one end is grounded (GND). In addition, the first terminal of the body frame open switch 619 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC21 whose one end is grounded (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21, and is connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness). electrically connected. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line (not shown). It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR23 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer edge frame door open information output signal.

The first terminal of the body frame open switch 619 is pulled up to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR28 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via the resistor PR29. and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via the resistor PR31. The base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the resistor PR31, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR32 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 described above, and the wiring (harness) shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 . When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR24 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as the main frame door opening signal.

A circuit composed of a pull-up resistor PR28 and a capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generating circuit, and when the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 or when the body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage variations from the body frame open switch 619 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts forming the body frame open switch 619 repeat ON/OFF for a short period of time.

A circuit composed of resistors PR29, PR30 and transistor PTR23 and a circuit composed of resistors PR31, PR32 and transistor PTR24 are switch circuits that are turned ON/OFF by a detection signal from body frame open switch 619. FIG.

When the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 619 is ON, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor PTR23 is turned on. It turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 through the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes HI. is input to the external terminal plate 784 . In addition, when the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 619 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor The PTR 24 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 through the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to the main control board 1310 .

On the other hand, when the body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 619 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. , the transistor PTR23 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side at the external terminal plate 784 through the wiring (harness), and the outer edge frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is generated. It is input to the external terminal board 784 . When the body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 619 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR28. , the transistor PTR24 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the main frame door opening signal whose logic becomes LOW is generated by the main control board. 1310.

In this way, when the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 619 is turned ON, and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal plate 784. A main frame door open signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310. On the other hand, when the main body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main body frame open switch 619 is turned off to turn off the logic. is input to the external terminal plate 784 , and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310 .

In this embodiment, as described above, one or both of the state in which the door frame 3 is closed with the main body frame 4 and the state in which the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 69, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 receives the main frame door opening signal. Although it cannot be determined whether the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 based on the door frame 3 and / or It is possible for the player to determine that the body frame 4 is open, which does not occur during a normal game, and that the outer end frame door open information output signal is sent to the external terminal plate 784. Since the outer end frame door open information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784, the hall computer outputs the door frame door open information output signal based on the outer end frame door open information output signal. 3 is released from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the door frame 3 and/or the main body frame 4 are opened. It can be determined that a state that does not occur during a normal game has occurred.

In this embodiment, as described above, the door frame open switch 618 and the body frame open switch 619 are normally closed switches. Even if the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, and the main body frame open switch 619 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on (conducting), the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. By adopting normally closed switches for the door frame open switch 618 and the body frame open switch 619 in this manner, it is possible to output the main frame door open signal to the main control board 1310 even in the event of a short circuit, and A frame door open information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 .

If the door frame open switch 618 and the body frame open switch 619 are changed from normally closed switches to normally open (normally open (NO)) switches (door frame open switch 618' and body frame open switch 619'), , the door frame open switch 618' is turned ON (conducting) when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, and turned OFF (disconnected) when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4. . The body frame open switch 619 ′ is turned on (conducting) when the body frame 4 is closed from the outer frame 2 and turned off (disconnected) when the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 . Then, even if the door frame open switch 618' is disconnected for some reason and the switch is turned OFF (disconnected), the door frame 3 will be in a state of being released from the body frame 4. Even if the frame release switch 619' is broken and the switch is turned OFF (disconnected), the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. FIG. In this way, even if normally open switches are used for the door frame open switch 618' and the body frame open switch 619', the main frame door open signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even when the wire is broken. An outer end frame door open information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 .

[10-2-3(c). Circuit to which output power failure warning signal from power failure monitoring circuit is input]
A transmission line for transmitting a power outage warning signal from a power outage monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 has one end electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR40 electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and the other end of the resistor PR40. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR40 via PR41. The base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the resistor PR41, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR42, one end of which is connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor PTR40 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR43, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC40 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40A) without inverting it.) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR40 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as the payout power failure warning signal.

A circuit composed of resistors PR41, PR42, and transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by a payout power failure warning signal from a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310. FIG.

As described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors signs of power failure or momentary power failure of the two voltages of +12 V and +24 V from the power supply board 931, and when the power failure or momentary power failure signs are detected, the reset function is disabled. A payout power outage notice signal is output to the payout control board 951 as a power outage notice through the main control output circuit 1310cb. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the +12V and +24V voltages for signs of power failure or momentary power failure, and as described above, the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, and the +12V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When both conditions of the large condition are established, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW. While the payout power failure warning signal is input to the payout control board 951, one of the conditions that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf When the condition is established, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 described above through the wiring (harness), and the output power failure warning signal whose logic becomes HI. is input to the payout control board 951 .

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, that is, there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the voltages of +12V and +24V. Occasionally, since a payout power outage notice signal whose logic is LOW is input to the payout control board 951, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, thereby turning off the transistor PTR40. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the +5V side by resistor PR43. As a result, the payout power outage warning signal whose logic is HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, the voltage of +12V and/or +24V. When there is a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951, so that the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40. The voltage applied to the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 to turn on the transistor PTR40, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the payout power outage notice signal in which the logic of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

In this way, when there is a sign of power failure or instantaneous power failure of the voltage of +12V and / or +24V, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a, When there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the voltages of +12V and +24V, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. As described above, when there is a sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the voltage of +12V and/or +24V, a power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, when there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the voltages of +12V and +24V, the power failure warning signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, so that the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e The logic of the payout power outage notice signal input to the payout control MPU 952a and the logic of the power outage notice signal input to the main control MPU 1310a are the same logic.

[10-2-3(d). Circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input]
A detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 provided in the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. is entered in The output terminal of this full tank detection sensor 279 is circuit-configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line in the payout control board 951. is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a, and is electrically connected to the first terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. This three-terminal filter PIC50 for a full-tank detection sensor is a T-type filter circuit, magnetically shielded with ferrite, and has excellent attenuation characteristics.

The 2nd terminal of the full tank detection sensor 3-terminal filter PIC50 is grounded (GND), and the 3rd terminal of the full tank detection sensor 3-terminal filter PIC50 is connected to the full tank detection sensor 3 via a resistor PR44b. It is electrically connected to the first terminal of the terminal filter PIC50, and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 via the resistor PR45. As a result, the detection signal of the full-tank detection sensor 279 is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 after noise components are removed in the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full-tank detection sensor. The base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the resistor PR45, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46 whose one end is grounded (GND), and is electrically connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the electrically connected capacitor PC40. Capacitor PC40 plays a role as a low-pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR47 having one end electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC40 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40B) without inverting it.) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR41 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as a full tank signal.

A circuit composed of resistors PR45, PR46, and transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279. FIG.

The full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full of stored game balls, as described above. In this embodiment, when the accommodation space is not full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full-tank detection sensor 279 is applied via the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931, In the payout control board 951, a signal pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a and the logic becomes HI is input to the payout control board 951, while the housing space is filled with the stored game balls. , the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and the logic becomes LOW. is input to the payout control board 951 .

When the accommodation space is not filled with the stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is applied to the handle relay terminal plate 315, and through the power supply board 931, to the payout control board 951. A signal pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a and logic HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41, thereby turning on the transistor PTR41 and also turning on the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the full tank signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

On the other hand, when the accommodation space is full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full-tank detection sensor 279 is applied to the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931 via the payout control board. At 951, the signal pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41, thereby turning off the transistor PTR41 and also turning off the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor PR47, and the full tank signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

In this embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to a switch circuit composed of a resistor PR45, a resistor PR46, and a transistor PTR41 via a full tank detection sensor 3-terminal filter PIC50. Although it was a circuit configuration, the detection signals from various detection switches such as the ball out detection sensor 827 and the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. It has a circuit configuration in which it is directly input to each switch circuit without going through. Since the full-tank detection sensor 279 is provided in the foul cover unit 270 attached to the door frame 3, compared with the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, etc. provided in the payout device 830 attached to the main body frame 4. , the path through which the detection signal is transmitted is extremely long, and is extremely susceptible to noise.

The full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is filled with stored game balls. Based on the detection signal from 279, when it is determined that the accommodation space is full of stored game balls, the drive control of the payout motor 834 is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of game balls by the payout rotator. It is designed to control. In other words, when noise enters the transmission path (transmission line) that transmits the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 279, the payout control MPU 952a detects that the game balls in which the accommodation space is stored are not full, but the payout motor 834 In some cases, the drive control is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of game balls by the payout rotating body, and the payout motor 834 is driven even though the accommodation space is full of game balls stored. When the game balls are filled up to the upstream side of the winning ball passage by controlling and rotating the payout rotor to continue the payout of the game balls, the payout rotor itself cannot rotate and the payout motor 834 is abnormally loaded, the payout motor 834 is overloaded and abnormally heats up and breaks down. be. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is first filtered by the full tank detection sensor 3-terminal filter PIC 50 to remove the noise component so that such a problem does not occur. adopted.

[10-2-3(e). Circuit to which the operation signal from the operation switch is input]
The first and second output terminals of the operation switch 954 are grounded (GND), and the third and fourth output terminals of the operation switch 954 are pulled to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR48. It is pulled up and electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 via a resistor PR49. The base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the preceding stage is electrically connected to the resistor PR49, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR50 whose one end is grounded (GND). The fourth terminal, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 954, is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48, and is also electrically connected to the ground (GND) at one end and the other end of the capacitor PC41. ing. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR51, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 via a resistor PR52. The base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor PR52, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR53, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR54, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40C) without inverting it.). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. By turning ON/OFF the transistors PTR42 and PTR43 in the preceding stage and the subsequent stage, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage changes, and the signal is the RWMCLR signal input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. is entered in

The third and fourth output terminals of the operation switch 954 are pulled up to +5 V by a pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 via a resistor PR49. It is pulled up to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 through a resistor PR55. The base terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the resistor PR55, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR56, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor MR2 electrically connected to the power supply line. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR44 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a RAM clear signal.

A circuit composed of a pull-up resistor PR48 and a capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the operation switch 954 is pressed, the contact forming the operation switch 954 repeats ON/OFF for a short time. It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the operation switch 954 caused by .

A circuit composed of resistors PR49, PR50 and transistor PTR42 is a switch circuit in the previous stage, a circuit composed of resistors PR52, PR53 and transistor PTR43 is a switch circuit in the latter stage, and resistors PR55, PR56 and transistor PTR44. is a switch circuit, which is turned on/off by an operation signal from the operation switch 954 .

As described above, the operation switch 954 is set to the RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. It is operated to clear the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM), or to cancel the error when an error is reported after the power is turned on. A function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, and to cancel an error after the power is turned on (after a period of time during which the RAM is cleared, that is, after a predetermined period has passed since the power was turned on). It has a function and The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is a RAM clear signal in the function of clearing the RAM within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. ), it becomes an error cancellation signal.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the third and fourth output terminals of the operation switch 954 are pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. The voltage is input to the base terminal of PTR42 to turn on the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage, and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned on. When the voltage applied is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, the transistor PTR43 in the latter stage is turned off, and the switch circuit in the latter stage is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor PR54, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic has become HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs RAM clear for erasing information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. It is determined that the error is not instructed, and error cancellation is performed when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on). It is judged that it is not instructive.

Further, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the third and fourth output terminals of the operation switch 954 are pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48, and the operation signal whose logic becomes HI is generated by the transistor PTR44. , the transistor PTR44 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the RAM clear signal whose logic becomes LOW is sent to the main control board 1310. is entered. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives a RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, as described above. is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is raised to the +5V side by the resistor MR5, and the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a judges that when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, it is not an instruction to perform RAM clear for erasing information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the operation signal whose logic becomes LOW is output to the preceding transistor. The voltage is input to the base terminal of PTR42 to turn off the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage, and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned off. When the voltage applied is pulled up to +5V by the resistor PR51, the transistor PTR43 in the latter stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the latter stage is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic has become LOW is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs RAM clear for erasing information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. After the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW, the error is cleared. It is judged to be an instruction.

Further, when the operation switch 954 is being operated, the third terminal and the fourth terminal, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48. A signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 to turn off the transistor PTR44, thereby turning off the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A clear signal is input to the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives a RAM clear signal whose logic is HI within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, as described above. is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, it is an instruction to perform RAM clear for erasing information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

[10-2-4. Dispensing Motor Drive Circuit]
Next, a payout motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 shown in FIG. 5 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, the payout motor drive circuit 952d is mainly composed of a voltage switching circuit 952da and a drive ICPIC60. The power input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 952da are electrically connected to the +12V power line and the +5V power line, respectively, and +12V and +5V are applied, respectively, and the ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is connected to the ground (GND). Grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to a power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. It is designed to be The power supply output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is electrically connected to the third terminal and the tenth terminal which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC 60 via the Zener diode PZD60, and is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout motor 834. , and +12 V or +5 V is applied as a motor drive voltage to the cathode terminal of the drive ICPIC 60 via the Zener diode PZD 60 based on the voltage switching signal input to the voltage switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. It is supplied to the terminal and the tenth terminal, respectively, and also supplied to the dispensing motor 834 .

The drive ICPIC 60 includes four Darlington power transistors. In this embodiment, the emitter terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, 6th terminal and 7th terminal, are grounded (GND) respectively, and the base terminal of the drive ICPIC 60 is grounded. A payout motor drive signal is input to certain 1st, 5th, 8th and 12th terminals via resistors PR60 to PR63. The 2nd, 4th, 9th and 11th terminals that are the collector terminals of the drive ICPIC 60 are connected to the 1st, 5th, 8th and 12th terminals that are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, respectively. Correspondingly, when the payout motor drive signal is input to the 1st terminal, 5th terminal, 8th terminal, and 12th terminal, which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, through the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively, the excitation signal A certain drive pulse is output to each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) corresponding to the payout motor 834, respectively. This payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the drive ICPIC60 via the resistors PR60 to PR63. Outputs are made to base terminals 1, 5, 8 and 12, respectively. These drive pulses are generated by switching exciting currents flowing through the phases (/B phase, B phase, A phase, and /A phase) of the payout motor 834 to rotate the payout motor 834 . When the driving pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) is interrupted by this switching, a back electromotive force is generated. If this back electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC 60, the drive ICPIC 60 will be damaged. Therefore, as a protection, the Zener diode PZD0 is electrically connected to the front stage of the 3rd and 10th terminals, which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC 60. A circuit configuration that

[10-2-5. CR unit input/output circuit]
Next, a CR unit input/output circuit 952e for inputting/outputting various signals to/from the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 71 will be described. The payout control board 951 receives the ball rental request signal BRDY and the one-time payout operation start request signal BRQ from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 as described above. , are supplied, and a predetermined voltage VL (+12 V) and ground LG created from AC 24 V supplied from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 71 are supplied. Through the terminal plate 869, an EXS signal to inform that one payout operation has started or ended, and a PRDY signal to inform that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible or impossible. and output As shown in FIG. 84, the input/output circuit for inputting/outputting these various signals and the like is mainly composed of photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (which incorporate an infrared LED and a phototransistor).

A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via the resistor PR70. A cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 . A resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned ON, while the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. At times, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via the resistor PR71. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of PTR71. The collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71, and is also electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR73, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line.

The base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR74, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR75 having one end electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is a non-inverting buffer. 80 through ICPIC80 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80A) without inverting it.). is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR70 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70, and the signal is input as the CR connection signal 1 to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is not only electrically connected to the resistor PR72, but also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR76 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply substrate 931 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 931 via a wiring (harness), one end of the power supply board 931 is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line. is electrically connected to the other end of the The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR71 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71, and the signal is input to the power substrate 931 as a CR connection signal.

A circuit composed of resistors PR71, PR74, and transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by turning on/off the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, thereby turning on the transistor PTR70 and the switch circuit. It turns ON. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned ON, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR70 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. be.

A circuit composed of resistors PR72, PR76 and transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned on/off by turning on/off the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, thereby turning on the transistor PTR71 and the switch circuit. It turns ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the power supply substrate 931 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic is LOW is input to the power supply substrate 931. be.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR71 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the power supply substrate 931 through the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the power supply substrate 931. be done.

A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77. BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. A resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON while the photo When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. there is The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR78, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80B) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. When the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 changes, and the signal is input as the BRDY signal to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the BRDY signal whose logic has become LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. , The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR78, and the BRDY signal whose logic has become HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. Thus, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is the same as the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6. FIG.

A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71, but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via the resistor PR79. BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. A resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON while the photo When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. there is The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR80, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80C) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. The logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is changed by turning ON/OFF the photocoupler PIC72, and the signal is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a as a BRQ signal.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC72 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the BRQ signal whose logic has become LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. , The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR80, and the BRQ signal whose logic has become HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. Thus, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is the same logic as the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6. FIG.

An EXS signal that tells that one payout operation has started or ended from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is output to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb, and is output to the payout control output circuit without reset function. 952cb is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR81. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR82, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. A resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 through the resistor PR82, EXS output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function When the logic of the signal is LOW, while the photocoupler PIC73 is ON, +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 through the resistor PR82, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a When the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of through the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned OFF. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded with the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is connected to the CR unit 6 through the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 by the pull-up resistor PR83. is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. The ON/OFF of the photocoupler PIC73 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73, and the signal is input to the built-in controller of the CR unit 6 as EXS.

When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 through the resistor PR82, EXS output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the EXS whose logic is LOW becomes the CR unit. 6 is input to the built-in controller. On the other hand, when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 through the resistor PR82, the output is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb. When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned OFF, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to the predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83, and the logic becomes HI. The resulting EXS is input to the built-in controller of the CR unit 6 . Thus, the logic of the EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. It has the same logic.

A PRDY signal, which indicates that the payout operation for paying out rental balls from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is possible or impossible, is sent via a resistor PR84 to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74. is entered in The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR85, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. A resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 through the resistor PR85, PRDY output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function When the logic of the signal is LOW, while the photocoupler PIC74 is ON, +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 through the resistor PR85, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a The photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF when the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of through the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb is HI. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded with the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is connected to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 by the pull-up resistor PR86. is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. By turning ON/OFF the photocoupler PIC74, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as PRDY.

When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 through the resistor PR85, PRDY output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned ON, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the PRDY whose logic is LOW is the CR unit. 6 is input to the built-in controller. On the other hand, when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 through the resistor PR85, the output is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb. When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to the predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86, and the logic becomes HI. The resulting PRDY is input to the built-in controller of the CR unit 6 . Thus, the logic of the PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. It has the same logic.

[10-2-6. Various input/output signals to payout control MPU]
Next, various input/output signals input/output from input/output terminals of various input/output ports of the payout control MPU 952a will be described.

As shown in FIG. 80, the RXD terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU 952a, receives serial data from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b as a main payment serial data reception signal. be done. On the other hand, from the TXD terminal, which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU 952a, the serial data to be sent to the main control board 1310 is sent as the payer serial data transmission signal to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb. A payout serial data transmission signal is transmitted to the main control board 1310 from the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb.

Each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a receives the above-described RWMCLR signal, payout power outage notice signal, door open signal, full tank signal, various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection signal 1, etc.), etc. are input, for example, a main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310, which notifies completion of normal reception of the payer serial data reception signal described above, is sent via the payout control input circuit 952b. Also, detection signals from the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, the rotation detection sensor 840, etc. shown in FIG. 70 are inputted via the payout control input circuit 952b.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a, the above-mentioned EXS signal and PRDY signal are output to the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function, and the EXS signal and the PRDY signal are output from the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input/output circuit 952e, the voltage switching signal is output to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and the voltage switching signal is sent from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca to the voltage switching circuit 952da. Alternatively, the payout motor drive signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and the payout motor drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the payout motor 834 via the payout motor drive circuit 952d. In addition, for example, the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function outputs the payout control output circuit 952ca with a payout ACK signal that informs the completion of normal reception of the main payment serial data reception signal, and the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca outputs the payout control output circuit 952ca. Output the ACK signal to the main control board 1310, or output the drive signal of the error LED indicator 860b shown in FIG. For example, output to the error LED indicator 860b.

[10-3. Various input/output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input/output signals between the payout control board 951 and the main control board 1310 and various output signals from the payout control board 951 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG.

[10-3-1. Various input/output signals with the main control board]
The payout control board 951 exchanges various input/output signals with the main control board 1310 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85(a), the payout control board 951 controls the above-described payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door open signal, etc. is output to the main control board 1310 . These output signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310. FIG.

On the other hand, the payout control board 951 provides, in addition to the above-described main payment serial data reception signal, main payment ACK signal, and operation signal (RAM clear signal), a main prize number information output signal, a 15 round big hit information output signal, And 2 rounds jackpot information output signal such as jackpot information output signal, information output signal during probability fluctuation, special pattern display information output signal, normal pattern display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, starting entrance winning information output signal etc. A game information signal, a payout blackout warning signal, and the like are input from the main control board 1310 . These input signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951.

[10-3-2. Various output signals to external terminal board]
The payout control board 951 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85(b), in addition to the above-described outer end frame door open information output signal, the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 reaches 10 balls. Jackpot information including a prize ball number information output signal, a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15 round big win information output signal and a 2 round big win information output signal from the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. Game information signals such as an output signal, a probability fluctuation information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a time saving information output signal, and a start winning prize information output signal are output to the external terminal plate 784. do. These output signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 . In other words, the external terminal plate 784 outputs two signals, the outer end frame door opening information output signal from the payout control board 951 side and the prize ball number information output signal, and the main prize ball number from the main control board 1310 side. Information output signal, 15-round jackpot information output signal, 2-round jackpot information output signal, information output signal during probability fluctuation, special pattern display information output signal, normal pattern display information output signal, information output signal during time saving, and starting entrance winning information Eight signals called output signals are output via (passing through) the payout control board 951 .

A signal output from the external terminal plate 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a game hall (not shown), and the hall computer monitors the games played by the players. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal or the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hall computer outputs the number of jackpots with two rounds (2-round jackpot ) and the number of big wins with 15 rounds (the number of occurrences of 15-round big wins) is the sum of the number of big wins of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加For this reason, the hall computer cannot grasp the number of occurrences of 2-round big wins and the number of occurrences of 15-land big wins from the total number of big wins. , it is not possible to grasp whether it is a 2-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot. A data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko machine 1, and some players refer to the number of occurrences of the jackpot game state displayed on the data counter to select whether or not to play the game. Some do.

However, the number of occurrences of the big win game state displayed on the data counter may actually be biased toward the number of occurrences of the two-round big win, so even when the player starts playing, only the two-round big wins occur. Sometimes the 15 round jackpot doesn't happen easily. In this way, the number of occurrences of the big win game state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, but may unnecessarily stir up the gambling spirit of the player.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, by separately outputting the 15 round big win information output signal and the 2 round big win information output signal as the big win information output signal to the hall computer, the hall computer can output the number of occurrences of the 2 round big win, The number of 15-round big hits and the number of occurrences can be accurately grasped. Therefore, the hall computer can grasp whether the number of big wins actually occurring in the pachinko machine 1 is the 2-round big win or the 15-round big win, and the data counter stores 15 rounds. Since the number of occurrences of the big win and the number of occurrences of the 2-round big win can be separately displayed or only the number of occurrences of the 15-round big win can be displayed as the number of occurrences of the big win game state, it is possible to stimulate the gambling spirit of the player more than necessary. do not have.

In the present embodiment, the 2-round big win information output signal is output to the hall computer during the period from the occurrence of the 2-round big win to the end of the 2-round big win, and the 15-round big win information output signal is also in the state where the 15-round big win occurs. It is in a state of being output to the hall computer during the period from generation to termination. In addition to the method of outputting the 2-round big win information output signal and the 15-round big win information output signal to the hall computer as in the present embodiment, for example, when a 2-round big win occurs, the 2-round big win information output signal is output for a predetermined period. The 2-round big win information output signal and the 15-round big win information are output to the hall computer, and when the 15-round big win occurs, the 15-round big win information output signal is outputted to the hall computer for a predetermined period. A method of outputting the output signal to the hall computer only for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

[11. Arrangement of Output Terminals on External Terminal Board]
Next, the arrangement of the output terminals of the external terminal board 784 for outputting various signals to the hall computer installed in the game hall (hall) will be described with reference to FIG. The external terminal plate 784 is attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base attached to the rear surface of the body frame base 600, and the rear side thereof is covered with an external terminal plate cover 786. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing the arrangement of the output terminals of the external terminal plate.

As described above, the external terminal plate 784 outputs the outer end frame door opening information output signal, the prize ball number information output signal, the main prize ball number information output signal, the 15 round big win information output signal, and the 2 round big win information output signal. When the jackpot information output signal, the probability fluctuation information output signal, the special symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display information output signal, the time saving information output signal, and the start opening winning information output signal are input from the payout control board 951, It outputs to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 .

Briefly describing these various signals, the outer end frame door open information output signal is not generated during a normal game when the player says that the door frame 3 and/or the body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 are open. This is a signal that conveys that a state has occurred, and the prize ball number information output signal is generated each time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10. The main prize number information output signal is the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, the general winning holes 2001 and 2201, and the big winning hole 2005 shown in FIG. It is a signal to inform that each time the number of game balls scheduled to be put out as prize balls based on the entered game balls reaches 10 balls, and the 15-round big win information output signal is a 15-round big win. The 2-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that indicates that a 2-round jackpot is occurring, and the information output signal during probability fluctuation is a signal that a probability fluctuation occurs. The special symbol display information output signal is a signal indicating that the special symbol display information output signal is the first special symbol display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. It is a signal that informs that the variable display is finished (stopped). It is a signal that tells that it is in a stopped state, the time saving medium information output signal is a signal that tells that a time saving state is occurring, and the start winning prize information output signal is the first start shown in FIG. Each time a game ball enters the opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, it is a signal to notify that effect.

As shown in FIG. 86, the output terminals PT1 to PT10 are horizontally arranged in a line on the external terminal plate 784 . The output terminal PT1 is colored white and outputs a prize number information output signal. As described above, the prize ball number information output signal is a signal that notifies each time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. In the embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT1 for 0.105 seconds. When the number of prize balls information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer causes the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 to generate 10 prize balls each time the number of prize balls information output signal is input to the hall computer. It is possible to grasp that the game balls of the balls have been put out as prize balls, and to grasp the total number of game balls put out by the Pachinko machine 1 by counting the number of the put out game balls.

The output terminal PT2 is colored green and outputs an outer end frame door open information output signal. As described above, the outer end frame door open information output signal indicates that the door frame 3 and/or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT2 while the door frame 3 and/or the body frame 4 are opened. When the outer end frame door opening information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer controls the door frame 3 and the pachinko machine 1 while the outer end frame door opening information output signal is being input. / Or it can be grasped that the body frame 4 is opened.

The output terminal PT3 is colored gray and outputs a special symbol display information output signal. As described above, the special symbol display information output signal terminates (stops) the variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol display device 1403 and the second special symbol display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the end (stop) of the special symbol fluctuation display in the first special symbol indicator 1403 and the second special symbol indicator 1405 of the function display unit 1400 from the output terminal PT3 It is designed to be output for 0.128 seconds at times. When the special symbol display information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the special symbol display information output signal, the first special symbol of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp that the variable display of special symbols has ended (stopped) on the display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405, and count the number of times to display the first special of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. The total number of times the special symbols are variably displayed on the symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 can be grasped.

The output terminal PT4 is colored yellow and outputs a start winning prize information output signal. As described above, the starting hole winning information output signal is a signal that notifies each time a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004 shown in FIG. , Every time a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 from the output terminal PT4, it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the starting hole winning information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2002 of the pachinko machine 1 each time the starting hole winning information output signal is inputted. It is possible to grasp that the game ball has entered the starting hole 2004, count the number of times the starting hole winning prize information output signal is input, and send it to the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004 of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to grasp the total number of game balls entered.

The output terminal PT5 is colored black and outputs a 15-round jackpot information output signal. The 15-round jackpot information output signal is, as described above, a signal that indicates that a 15-round jackpot is occurring. It is designed to be output. When the 15-round big win information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer keeps the pachinko machine 1 generating 15-round big wins while the 15-round big win information output signal is being input. The state can be grasped, and the total number of occurrences of the 15-round big win in the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped by counting the number of times the 15-round big win information output signal is input.

The output terminal PT6 is colored pink and outputs a 2-round jackpot information output signal. The 2-round big win information output signal is, as described above, a signal that indicates that a 2-round big win is occurring. It is designed to be output. When the 2-round big win information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is inputted to the hall computer, the hall computer keeps the 2-round big win in the pachinko machine 1 while the 2-round big win information output signal is being inputted. The state can be grasped, and the total number of occurrences of the 2-round big win in the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped by counting the number of times the 2-round big-win information output signal is inputted.

The output terminal PT7 is colored blue and outputs a normal symbol display information output signal. The normal symbol display information output signal is, as described above, a signal that informs that the variable display of normal symbols has ended (stopped) on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, it is designed to be output from the output terminal PT7 for 0.128 seconds at the end (stop) of the normal symbol fluctuation display on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400. FIG. When the normal symbol display information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the normal symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. In 1402, it is possible to grasp that the variable display of normal symbols has ended (stopped), count the number of times, and display the total number of variable displays of normal symbols on the normal symbol display device 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. The number of times can be grasped.

The output terminal PT8 is colored red and outputs a time saving information output signal. As described above, the information output signal during time saving is a signal that conveys that the time saving state has occurred, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT8 while the time saving state is occurring. ing. When the time saving information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer grasps that the pachinko machine 1 is in the time saving state when the time saving information output signal is input. In addition, it is possible to grasp the total number of times that the pachinko machine 1 is in the time saving state by counting the number of times that the information output signal during time saving is input.

The output terminal PT9 is colored orange and outputs a probability fluctuation information output signal. As described above, the information output signal during probability fluctuation is a signal that indicates that a probability fluctuation is occurring. It has become so. When the information output signal during probability fluctuation is input from the external terminal plate 784 to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the information output signal during probability fluctuation, and the pachinko machine 1 is in a state where the probability fluctuation is occurring. In addition, it is possible to grasp the total number of occurrences of probability fluctuations in the pachinko machine 1 by counting the number of times the probability fluctuation information output signal is input.

The output terminal PT10 is colored light blue and outputs a main prize number information output signal. As described above, the main prize ball number information output signal is input to various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2201, and the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. This is a signal that notifies each time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 based on the played game balls, and is output from the output terminal PT10 for 0.128 seconds in this embodiment. It has become so. When the main prize number information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the pachinko machine 1 outputs 10 prize balls each time the main prize number information output signal is input to the hall computer. It is possible to grasp that game balls are scheduled to be put out as prize balls, and to grasp the total number of game balls to be put out by the pachinko machine 1 by counting the number of game balls to be put out. can do. It should be noted that game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls based on game balls that have entered various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2201, and the big winning opening 2005 When the number of balls reaches 20 or more and the main prize number information output signal is output multiple times, the main prize number information output signal is 0.256 (= 0.128 seconds x 2 times) seconds, It is designed to be output with an interval of 0.128 seconds as if it were one continuous signal.

Of the output terminals PT1 to PT10 of the external terminal plate 784, the output terminals PT1 and PT2 output various signals output on the payout control board 951 side, while the output terminals PT3 to PT10 output the main control board. Various signals output on the 1310 side are arranged to be output via (pass through) the payout control board 951 . The output terminals PT1 to PT10 are colored, respectively. By electrically connecting wirings having connectors colored in the same colors to the output terminals PT1 to PT10, respectively, it is possible to mistakenly connect other wirings. It is possible to prevent an unintended connection. Various signals output on the payout control board 951 side and various signals output on the main control board 1310 side are not mixed, and various signals output on the payout control board 951 side are transmitted to the hall computer. The output terminals PT1 and PT2 are arranged in a line on the left side of the external terminal board 784, and the output terminals PT3 to PT10 for transmitting various signals output on the main control board 1310 side to the hall computer are arranged on the external terminal board 784. By arranging them in a row from the left side of the center toward the right side, wiring for transmitting various signals output on the payout control board 951 side to the hall computer and various signals output on the main control board 1310 side It is possible to prevent erroneous electrical connection with the wiring for transmitting the signal to the hall computer.

In addition, in this embodiment, the winning ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side and the main winning ball number information output signal output on the main control board 1310 side are respectively sent from the external terminal board 784 to the hall. configured to communicate to a computer. This is because, for example, game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 are not supplied to the prize ball tank 720 shown in FIG. 1 due to some trouble in the pachinko island equipment. When the number of game balls is running low, if the pachinko machine 1 happens to hit a 15-round jackpot, the number of game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 for paying out the game balls as prize balls is insufficient, so the game balls are paid out. (For example, if ball clogging or ball entanglement occurs in the payout device 830, game balls cannot be paid out unless this is resolved). Then, as described above, the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches ten. Since it is a signal that conveys that every time, when game balls cannot be paid out, the payout control board 951 outputs a winning ball number information output signal and transmits it to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784. become unable. When the game balls are not paid out, the player calls a hall clerk or the like. A hall clerk or the like checks, for example, a hose-shaped replenishment nozzle or the like for supplying game balls from the pachinko island facility to the prize ball tank 720 to identify the position of the clogged ball (or, for example, to Then, by specifying the position of the clogged ball or the position of the jammed ball and resolving it, the game ball will be returned to the state of being paid out.

However, since the game by the main control board 1310 is in progress even when the hall clerk or the like is proceeding with the work, the game balls are paid out by the work of the hall clerk or the like after the jackpot of 15 rounds is completed. When the state is restored, the payout control board 951 will pay out the game balls that have not been paid out one after another, and the payout control board 951 is in a period when the 15 round big win is completed and the 15 round big win is not occurring. Every time the number of game balls actually put out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 reaches 10, it outputs a prize number information output signal to notify that effect and transmits it to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784. It will happen. As a result, an extremely large number of game balls are put out even though the 15-round jackpot has not yet occurred. , there arises a problem that the hall computer cannot accurately grasp the relationship between .

Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether or not the payout motor 834 is drive-controlled by the payout control board 951 and the prize balls are actually paid out, that is, the number of prize balls information output signal output by the payout control board 951 is different. As a signal, the main control board 1310, the game ball that entered various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2201, and the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. Each time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10, a main prize number information output signal is output as a signal to that effect, and the payout control board 951 and the external terminal plate 784 are output. A system was adopted in which the information is transmitted to the hall computer via the system. As a result, even if the above-described troubles (ball clogging in the replenishment nozzle, etc., ball clogging in the payout device 830, ball jamming, etc.) occur, the game state of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout in this game state The relationship between the number of game balls to be put out and the relationship can be accurately transmitted to the hall computer. Therefore, the hall computer can accurately grasp the relationship between the game state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls to be paid out in the game state.

[12. Circuit of effect display drive board]
Next, the circuit of the effect display drive board 4450 for drawing the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the effect display drive board 4450 is arranged near the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and housed in the plate unit 320. A liquid crystal module circuit 450V for drawing the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is mainly configured. FIG. 87 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit for drawing in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device.

[12-1. Liquid crystal module circuit]
As shown in FIG. 87, the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive board 4450 is mainly composed of the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0.

The liquid crystal module circuit 450V is a serial signal (serial data) by a differential method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Thine Electronics Co., Ltd. from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. are sent as a plus signal and a minus signal, they are input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 through the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, respectively, and the positive signal and the negative signal are input by the common mode choke coil SDL0. Noise can be separated from negative signals. The noise-separated plus signal and minus signal are input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, respectively. A resistor SDR0 is electrically connected between the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal. This resistor SDR0 is a termination resistor (terminator) and prevents the plus signal and the minus signal from being reflected at the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively, thereby preventing disturbance of the serial signal.

The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 outputs three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, based on the serial signals (serial data) respectively input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, and It restores to three synchronizing signals, a horizontal synchronizing signal, a vertical synchronizing signal, and a clock signal (that is, restores to a parallel signal before being serialized). Although the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source are each 8 bits as described above, , the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are each 6 bits, for a total of 18 bits.

The liquid crystal module circuit 450V receives serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control section 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 in addition to the signal from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510 as described above. Two signals obtained by differentiating certain LOCKN signal output request data into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e of the peripheral control board 1510 are also inputted. As described above, the forced switching circuit 1512f of the peripheral control board 1510 transmits two signals that are differentially differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e. On the other hand, when the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. The circuit is configured so that the circuit is connected so as to As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected to each other so as to transmit the two signals. , is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. When the two differential signals of the positive signal and the negative signal are not input to the motion circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. A signal output from the transmitter IC 1512d for frame side effect is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. is transmitted to the liquid crystal module circuit 450V.

The forced switching circuit 1512f outputs the signal output from the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the door-frame From the transmitter IC 1512d for side effects, the serial signal (serial data) by THine Electronics Co., Ltd.'s "V-by-One (registered trademark)" differential method is used as a positive signal and a negative signal, and from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board. 868, and through the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, it is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0, and is input to the RXIN+ terminal and RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, respectively, while the differential circuit 1512e. When two signals differentially converted into a plus signal and a minus signal are input from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, these two signals are It is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0, and is input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, respectively. Door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 judges that it is a LOCKN signal output request when two signals that are differentially differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in differential circuit 1512e are input, A LOCKN signal is output from a LOCKN terminal, which will be described later, to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 . This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 .

As described above, the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, is used to produce the startup screen on the game board side when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. During the period during which the display is displayed on the display device 1600, or during the period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 is in the customer waiting state and the demonstration is being performed, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display In order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the door frame side effect display device 460 is operated. This is sent as an operation confirmation request. Although the LOCKN signal output request data in this embodiment is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differentiation circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, THine Electronics Co., Ltd. The data format is completely different from the company's "V-by-One (registered trademark)" differential serial signal (serial data). Therefore, when the LOCKN signal output request data is received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 judges that the signal is not output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, and an abnormal event occurs. Assuming that it is data, a LOCKN signal is output from a LOCKN terminal, which will be described later. In other words, in this embodiment, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal, which will be described later, by utilizing the function of the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 to output the LOCKN signal when it is determined that the received data is abnormal data. In order to forcibly output LOCKN signal output request data having a structure different from that of the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 By outputting it, it is possible to confirm whether or not the device called the door frame side presentation receiver ICSDIC0 is operating normally. This makes it possible to check whether there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

+3.3 V generated by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x shown in FIG. The GND terminal, GNDO terminal, LVDSGND application form, PLLGND terminal, EDGE terminal, OE terminal, MODE0, and MODE1 terminals of the frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are each grounded.

The VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a digital circuit, and a capacitor SDC0 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GND terminal that serves as the ground for this digital circuit, and the +3.3 V power supply is supplied to the VDD terminal. It removes high frequency noise from the line.

The VDDO terminal is a power supply terminal for TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logic) output, and a capacitor SDC1 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GNDO terminal that serves as the ground for this TTL output. It removes high frequency noise from the +3.3V power supply line.

The LVDSVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) input. A capacitor SDC2 is electrically connected between the terminal and the LVDSGND terminal that serves as the ground for this LVDS input, and the capacitor SDC2 is supplied to the LVDSVDD terminal. It removes high frequency noise from the +3.3V power supply line.

The PLLVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit, and a capacitor SDC3 is electrically connected between the terminal and the PLLGND terminal that serves as the ground for this PLL circuit, and the power is supplied to the PLLVDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the +3.3V power supply line.

When +3.3 V is supplied (applied) to the PDWN terminal, the logic becomes HI, indicating normal operation. It is a terminal to transmit. The PDWN terminal is supplied with +3.3V via a resistor SDR1 and is electrically connected to the other end of a varistor SDZ0, one end of which is grounded. This varistor SDZ0 suppresses noise and overvoltages on the +3.3V electrical line supplied through resistor SDR1.

The EDGE terminal transmits various signals output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, and D0 terminal to D17 terminal) based on the clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal, which will be described later. (logic transitions from LOW to HI) or falling edge (logic transitions from HI to LOW). As shown, the falling edge is designated by grounding the EDGE terminal. By the way, if the EDGE terminal is connected to +3.3V, a rising edge can be specified.

The OE terminal instructs whether or not to permit output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals, D0 to D17 terminals, and CLKOUT terminal) to be described later. As described above, by grounding the OE terminal, the output is always enabled. By the way, if the OE terminal is connected to +3.3V, it will be in a state where it cannot be output.

The MODE0 terminal and the MODE1 terminal are terminals for selecting an operation mode, and the operation mode can be selected by grounding both of them. Operation modes include a normal mode and a handshake mode. In normal mode, three video signals (18-bit video signals) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal are generated based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal. and three synchronous signals (3-bit synchronous signals) of a horizontal synchronous signal, a vertical synchronous signal, and a clock signal. be. In the shake hand mode, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is connected. In this mode, a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirmation (recovery). This shake hand mode is automatically switched.

For example, three video signals (18-bit video signals) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, For some reason, the parallel signal restored by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is abnormal. When it is difficult to draw on the door frame side effect display device 460 with such data, the normal mode is automatically switched to the shake hand mode and the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the damping resistor SDR2, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and controls the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. It is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control board 1510 . The peripheral control MPU 1511a sends a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d in order to inform the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the establishment of a predetermined condition based on the input LOCKN signal. to output When this connection confirmation signal is input to the INIT terminal, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is connected to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for restoring is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 through the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 to the effect display drive board 4450. Send to receiver IC SDIC0. When such a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is received by the door frame side presentation receiver ICSDIC0, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver can be easily restored. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. The INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door. A direct electrical connection may be made via the relay terminal plate 882 .

As described above, the LOCKN terminal is connected between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. This is a terminal for outputting a request to transmit a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the terminals. The LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistance SDR2, which is the damping resistor of the performance display drive board 4450, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and It is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control section 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the control board 1510 .

The SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals output three synchronizing signals, a horizontal synchronizing signal, a vertical synchronizing signal, and a clock signal, which are restored based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal. terminal. In this embodiment, since the restored three synchronization signals, ie, the horizontal synchronization signal, the vertical synchronization signal, and the clock signal, are not used, the SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals are unconnected terminals.

The DE terminal is a terminal for outputting a clock signal output from the CLKOUT terminal and a DE signal for notifying whether the data output from the D0 to D17 terminals, which are data output terminals, are valid or invalid. A DE signal output from the DE terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via a resistor SDR3, which is a damping resistor.

The CLKOUT terminal is a terminal for outputting a clock signal DCLK generated by a PLL circuit incorporated in the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0. The clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR4, which is a damping resistor.

The D0 to D17 terminals receive three video signals (18 This is a data output terminal for outputting a 1-bit video signal). Blue video signals B0 to B5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals D0 to D5 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the blue video signals B0 to B5 is a damping resistor. They are respectively input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA0. Green video signals G0 to G5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals D6 to D11 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the green video signals G0 to G5 is a damping resistor. They are respectively input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA1. Red video signals R0 to R5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals D12 to D17 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the red video signals R0 to R5 is a damping resistor. They are respectively input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA2.

The peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the effect display drive board 4450, and the door frame side effect display device 460 are electrically connected to the same ground. It's becoming

[13. Various commands related to transmission and reception of the main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, FIG. 89 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and FIG. is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 89, and FIG. 91 is a table showing an example of various commands received by the main control board from the payout control board. First, the prize ball command, which is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, will be described, followed by various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and received by the main control board. Various commands from the payout control board will be explained.

[13-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 detects various winning switches such as the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. When the signal is input, based on these detection signals, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicate with the pachinko machine 1 and drive the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 (payout device 830) to the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322 which are storage trays (a device that pays out game balls as rental balls) is electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is called a "CR machine"), as shown in FIG. 88(a), the main control board Command 10H to command 1EH ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared as prize ball commands to be transmitted from 1310 to the payout control board 951. Command 10H designates one prize ball, and command 11H. , 2 prize balls are specified, . . . , 15 prize balls are specified by command 1EH. The payout control board 951 controls to drive the payout motor 834 to pay out game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 and a ball lending machine (a device that directly pays out game balls to the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322, which are storage trays, as rental balls) are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall). 1 and the ball lending machine are electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is called a "general machine"), as shown in FIG. Commands 20H to 2EH are prepared as the prize ball commands to be sent to , command 20H designates one prize ball, command 21H designates two prize balls, and command 2EH designates a prize ball. 15 spheres are specified. The payout control board 951 controls to drive the payout motor 834 to pay out game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

As a command common to the CR machine and the general machine, a command 30H is prepared as shown in FIG. 88(c), and this command 30H designates self-check. If an ACK signal output from the receiving side as confirmation of receipt of the command is not input for a predetermined period after the command is transmitted, the transmitting side transmits the command 30H and checks whether or not the ACK signal is input. Check connection status. In the case of the CR machine in this embodiment, the payout control board 951 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6 .

[13-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) and a mode showing variations of effects having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

Various commands, as shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, are related to special figure 1 synchronization effect, special figure 2 synchronization effect related, jackpot related, power on, normal figure synchronization effect related, normal electric role effect related, notification display, status classified into display and others.

[13-2-1. Special figure 1 synchronization production related]
The special figure 1 synchronization effect relation is based on the detection signal from the first start opening sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, and as shown in FIG. Consists of commands named special figure 1 synchronization effect start, special symbol 1 designation, special figure 1 synchronization effect end, and state designation at the time of fluctuation. These various commands are assigned a status of "A*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special figure 1 synchronization production start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronization production with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the special pattern 1 specification command specifies loss, specific jackpot, and non-specific jackpot. , Toku-zu 1 synchronization production end command is intended to indicate the end of Toku-zu 1 synchronization production, the state designation command at the time of fluctuation indicates the probability and time saving state. In the probability and time saving state, a low probability time saving state that indicates that it is a low probability state and a time saving state, a high probability state that indicates that it is a time saving state, and a low probability It consists of a low-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a state and not a time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a high-probability state and not a time-saving state (as a normal game state, A low probability non-time saving state is set). Here, the high probability state is a state in which the probability of hitting the jackpot is set higher than the low probability state (normal game state), and the time saving state is, for example, normal by the normal symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. By shortening the time during which patterns are variably displayed as compared with a non-time-saving state (normal game state) and stop-displaying in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the ordinary lottery result, the ordinary lottery result by the ordinary lottery to be described later in a predetermined time is obtained. The number of times of stop display is increased compared to the non-time saving state, and the period for opening and closing the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 is increased compared to the non-time saving state (normal game state). By increasing the acceptance rate (entrance rate) of the game ball to the second start port 2004 shown, it is possible to obtain a special symbol lottery opportunity without reducing the number of balls (in other words, compared to the non-time saving state By increasing the number of determinations as to whether or not to open and close the pair of movable pieces, and by lengthening the period of the opening and closing operation of the pair of movable pieces when the pair of movable pieces are to be opened and closed, the second starting port 2004 It is a state of increasing the acceptance rate (entrance rate) of game balls to.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special pattern 1 tuning production start command is transmitted at the start of the special pattern 1 fluctuation, and the special pattern 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the special pattern 1 tuning production start, and the special pattern 1 tuning The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 fluctuation time elapses (when the special symbol 1 is confirmed), and the state designation command at the time of fluctuation is transmitted immediately after the special symbol win-loss information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

[13-2-2. Special Figure 2 Synchronization Production Related]
The special figure 2 synchronization effect related is based on the detection signal from the second start opening sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69, and as shown in FIG. It consists of a command named special figure 2 synchronization effect start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 synchronization effect end regarding the second special symbol display device 1405 of. These various commands are assigned a status of "B*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special figure 2 synchronization production start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronization production with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the special pattern 2 specification command specifies loss, specific jackpot, and non-specific jackpot. , The end of the special figure 2 synchronization production instructs the end of the special figure 2 synchronization production.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 2 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 2 fluctuation, and the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special figure 2 tuning effect, special figure 2 tuning The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 fluctuation time elapses (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-3. Jackpot related]
As shown in FIG. 89, the section related to big win includes big win opening, big win 1 open Nth time display, big win 1 closed display, big win 1 count display, big win ending, big win pattern display, small win opening. , small-hit open display, small-hit count display, and small-hit ending commands. These various commands are assigned a status of "C*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The jackpot opening command instructs the start of the jackpot opening, and the big win 1 open Nth display command is the start of the big win 1 open in the 1st to 16th rounds (starting opening unit 2100 shown in FIG. 8). During or start of opening of the N-th round of the large winning opening 2005), the large winning opening 1 closed display command is the start of closing the large winning opening 1 between rounds (opening of the starting opening unit 2100). 69), and the large winning opening 1 count display command indicates that the number of game balls from 0 to 10 has been counted (shown in FIG. 69). The number of game balls that entered the big winning hole 2005 detected by the count sensor 4005) is transmitted, the big winning ending command instructs the start of the big winning ending, and the big winning design display command It instructs the display of pattern information.

In addition, the small hit opening command instructs the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is the start of the small hit opening (during the opening of the large winning opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100 at the time of the small hit or opening start), and the small hit count display command is a small hit middle and big winning opening winning effect (when a game ball entering the big winning opening 2005 during a small hit is detected , and the small-hit ending command instructs the start of the small-hit ending.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the jackpot opening command is sent at the start of the jackpot opening, and the big win opening 1 Nth display command is when the big win 1 is opened in the 1st to 16th rounds (of the starter unit 2100 When the large winning opening 2005 is opened for the Nth round), the large winning opening 1 closed display command is transmitted when the large winning opening 1 is closed (start closing the large winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100), The large winning opening 1 count display command is used when the large winning opening 1 is opened and when the count changes to the large winning opening 1 (when opening the large winning opening 2005 of the starter unit 2100 and when the game ball entering the large winning opening 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005), the jackpot ending command is sent when the jackpot ending starts, and the jackpot pattern display command is sent when the jackpot is opened (when the jackpot 2005 of the starter unit 2100 is opened) ).

In addition, the small winning opening command is transmitted at the start of the small winning opening, and the small winning opening display command is transmitted at the time of opening the small winning (at the time of opening the big winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 at the time of the small winning), The small hit count display command is transmitted when the small hit middle and large winning opening is won (when the game ball entering the big winning opening 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005 during the small winning), and the small winning ending command is , Sent at the start of the small winning ending. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 89, the category of power-on consists of a command named "power-on state" and "return destination of main control at power-on". These various commands are assigned a status of "D*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The power-on state command instructs the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state. When the power is turned on (including when the power is restored when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure in addition to when the power is turned on), the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. Information to instruct when the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM, and when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and when the power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure). .) In the above-mentioned, low probability short working hours state, high probability short working hours state, low probability non-short working hours state, and high probability non short working hours state Information that indicates whether to return in which state (probability and short working hours state) , and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. The model code of this pachinko machine, for example, when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, which work belongs to which copyright, what kind of game specifications (for example, probability fluctuation occurs) In addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big win game state occurs, the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times) (so-called ST machine), etc.). In other words, the information on the model code of a pachinko machine consists of a series code for specifying which type of machine type is the max type, middle type, or sweet digital type, and a series code for specifying the copyright of the work. and the game specification (for example, when a probability change occurs, the game specification that the state will continue until the next big hit game state occurs, in addition to the probability change in a state where the number of special symbol fluctuations is limited and a game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine, etc.) that causes

The main control return destination command at power-on instructs the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The main control return destination command at power-on mainly consists of information instructing the drive state of the starter solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69 and information instructing the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. ing.

As for the transmission timing of the power-on state command and the main control recovery target command at power-on, when the main control board power is turned on ) is sent to Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when recovering from a power failure or momentary power failure, the main control side power on time processing described later is executed and the peripheral control board command of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing is executed. In the transmission process, a power-on status command and a power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

[13-2-5. Related to Futsuzu Synchronization Production]
The general pattern synchronization production relation is based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69, and as shown in FIG. Consists of commands with the names of normal pattern synchronization production start, normal pattern designation, general pattern synchronization production end, and change state designation regarding the device 1402. These various commands are assigned a status of "E*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The normal pattern synchronization production start command instructs the start of the general pattern synchronization production with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the general pattern specification command specifies a loss, a specific jackpot, and a non-specific jackpot. The figure synchronous production end command indicates the end of the normal figure synchronous production, and the state designation command at the time of fluctuation indicates the probability and the time saving state. In the probability and time saving state, as described above, a low probability time saving state indicating that it is a low probability state and a time saving state, and a high probability state indicating that it is a time saving state High probability time saving state It consists of a state, a low-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a low-probability state and not a time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a high-probability state and not a time-saving state (usually As a game state, a low probability non-time saving state is set).

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the general pattern synchronization production start command is sent at the start of normal pattern 1 fluctuation, the general pattern designation command is sent immediately after the general pattern synchronization production start, and the general pattern synchronization production end command is , It is transmitted when the normal pattern fluctuation time elapses (normal pattern is determined), and the state designation command at the time of fluctuation is transmitted immediately after the normal pattern win-loss information is designated. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-6. Ordinary electric role production related]
8, which are opened and closed by driving the starting solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. It consists of commands named hit opening, general electric open display, and general drawing ending. These various commands are assigned a status of "F*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The general pattern per opening command is to instruct the general pattern per opening to start, and the general pattern open display command is the start of general pattern open state, or when expanding), and the ending command per normal pattern instructs the start of ending per normal pattern.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the general pattern opening command is sent at the start of the general pattern opening, and the general pattern open display command is sent when the general pattern is opened (a pair of movable When spreading in the direction), the ending command per normal pattern is sent at the start of the ending per normal pattern. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the classification of the notification display consists of commands named Winning Abnormal Display, Connection Abnormal Display, Disconnection/Short Circuit Abnormal Display, Magnetic Detection Switch Abnormal Display, Door Open, and Door Close. These various commands are assigned a status of "6*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The winning abnormality display command is issued when the game ball enters the big winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 when the winning opening is entered except during the big winning (when the condition device is in operation). is detected by the count sensor 4005). It instructs the start of connection abnormality notification when there is a connection abnormality. 4005 or the like, it instructs the start of disconnection/short-circuit abnormality display. It instructs the start of the magnetism detection switch abnormality notification when a

Further, the door open command is based on the detection signal (open signal) from the door frame open switch 618 input via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. In the open state, the door frame closing command instructs the door open notification, and the door frame closing command causes the door frame 3 to close with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618 . When it is in the state of being opened, the end of the door open notification is instructed. On the other hand, the body frame open command is based on the detection signal (open signal) from the body frame open switch 619 input via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. When the body frame is in the open state, the body frame closing command instructs the body frame open notification. It instructs the end of the notification of the opening of the body frame when the door is in the closed state.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the winning abnormality display command is transmitted when winning a large winning opening other than during the jackpot (during operation of the condition device), and the connection abnormality display command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 It is sent when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 951 at the time of command transmission to, and the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command is the first start sensor 4002, the second start sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, etc. The magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is detected. Further, the door open command is transmitted when door opening is detected (when the door frame 3 is in a state of being opened with respect to the body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618), and the door is opened. The frame closing command is transmitted when door closing is detected (when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618). The main body frame open command is transmitted when the main body frame opening is detected (when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 619), and the main body is opened. The frame closing command is transmitted when the body frame closing is detected (when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame open switch 619). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the status display is divided into commands named Frame status 1 command (equivalent to error occurrence command), Error cancellation navigation command (equivalent to error cancellation command) and Frame status 2 command. there is These various commands are assigned a status of "7*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The frame state 1 command, the error cancellation navigation command, and the frame state 2 command are commands each having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 951, and detailed descriptions thereof will be given later. . When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the frame state 1 command, the error cancellation navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, as shown in FIG. Along with setting the status, the received command is set as the mode as it is. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the frame state 1 command, the error cancellation navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, the additional information "7*H" is added to these received commands. is formatted into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

The formatted frame state 1 command is transmitted when power is restored, when the frame state changes, and during error cancellation navigation, the error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during error cancellation navigation, and the frame state 2 command is transmitted when power is restored. , and when the frame state changes. Note that these formatted frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-9. test related]
As shown in FIG. 90, the test-related section consists of various commands named test. This test command is assigned a status of "8*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The test command instructs various tests of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the lamp drive board 4170, the motor drive board 4180, and the frame decoration board shown in FIG. 72). This is for inspecting various substrates such as the driving amplifier substrate 194).

As for the transmission timing of the test command, it is transmitted at times other than the RAM clear when the main control board power is turned on and the RAM clear. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when recovering from a power failure or momentary power failure, and when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 is operated, the main control side power-on processing described later is performed. A test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-10. others]
Other divisions include, as shown in FIG. 90, start-up winning, variable reduction operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, normal symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect, and It consists of a command named special symbol 2 memory look-ahead effect. These various commands are assigned a status of "9*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The start opening winning command instructs the start of starting opening winning effect, and starts the effect when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002. , the start of the effect when the game ball enters the second starting hole 2004 based on the detection signal from the second starting hole sensor 4004, respectively. The high-probability end designation command instructs the state transition from the high-probability state to the low-probability state, and the special symbol 1 storage command. , special symbol 1 reserved 0 to 4 (a game ball enters the first start port 2002 shown in FIG. The number of balls that have not been held (number of reservations)), and the special symbol 2 storage command is 0 to 4 special symbols 2 reservations (the game ball enters the second start port 2004 shown in FIG. 8) The second special symbol display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 conveys the number of balls (number of reservations) that has not yet been used for the variable display of special symbols, and the normal symbol storage command is normal symbol 1 reservation 0 to 4 It conveys the number of balls (the number of balls (reserved number) that have passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8 and have not yet been used for normal symbol fluctuation display on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400). There is, and the special symbol 1 storage look-ahead production command is read ahead before the special symbol 1 reservation is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 1403 of the function display unit 1400 It is intended to instruct the start of the look-ahead effect to notify the advance notice of the display result by the first special symbol display device 1403 based on, the special symbol 2 storage look-ahead effect command is the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is the special symbol 2 hold Before being used for the variable display of special symbols in the device 1405, it prefetches and instructs the start of the prefetching performance to announce the advance notice of the display result by the second special symbol display device 1405 based on the special symbol 2 reservation.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the starting entrance winning command is issued at the time of starting entrance winning (when the game ball enters the first starting entrance 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting entrance sensor 4002, or when the game ball enters the second When the game ball enters the second starting hole 2004 based on the detection signal from the starting hole sensor 4004), the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. The command to specify the end of the fluctuation reduction operation is sent at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation is fixed after the specified number of fluctuation reductions have been completed (after the stop period has passed), and the high-probability end designation command is , In the case of "high probability N times", it is transmitted at the end of the stop period after the high probability number of times has been digested (after the stop period has passed), and the special symbol 1 storage command is the special symbol 1 operation pending ball number change When the game ball enters the first start port 2002 and the first special symbol display device 1403 of the function display unit 1400 has a reserved number that is not yet used for variable display of special symbols, further the first start When the game ball enters the mouth 2002 and the number of reservations increases, or when the number of reservations decreases by using the first special symbol display device 1403 for variable display of special symbols from the number of reservations). , The special symbol 2 storage command is used when the number of special symbol 2 operation pending balls changes (a game ball enters the second start port 2004 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 changes the special symbol. In a state where there is a reserved number that has not been used yet, when the game ball enters the second start port 2004 and the reserved number increases, or from the reserved number, the second special pattern display 1405 fluctuates the special design. used for display and the number of reservations has decreased), and the normal design memory command is transmitted when the number of normal design 1 operation reservation balls changes (the game ball passes through the gate section 2003 and the normal design of the function display unit 1400 In a state where there is a reserved number that has not yet been used for variable display of normal symbols on the display device 1402, when the game ball passes through the gate part 2003 and the reserved number increases, or from the reserved number, the normal symbol display device 1402 is displayed. ), and the special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect command is sent when the number of reserved balls has decreased by using it for variable display of normal symbols, and when the number of special symbol 1 operation reserved balls increases (the game ball is in the first start port 2002 The special symbol 2 memory look-ahead effect command is sent when the number of reserved balls in the second start port 2004 increases (the game ball enters the second start port 2004 and the number of reserved balls increases). increased). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

By the way, as described above, the starting opening winning command is issued when the starting opening wins (when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002, or when the second starting opening When the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the sensor 4004), it is transmitted from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 mainly to notify that effect by voice. How the peripheral control board 1510 shown in 72 uses the start-up winning command may vary depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is designed to be used not only to notify by voice from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 but also to monitor the presence or absence of fraud. On the other hand, in other pachinko machines, there are specifications in which the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the start-up winning command and does not give voice notification from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 .

[13-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 951 received by the main control board 1310 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 91, various commands from the payout control board 951 are divided into commands named frame state 1, error cancellation navigation, and frame state 2. Frame state 1, error cancellation navigation, and The order of priority is set in the order of frame state 2.

The frame state 1 command (equivalent to the error occurrence command) includes out-of-ball, full tank, stock of 50 or more, abnormal connection, and unconnected CR. represents a bit.) is set to 1, bit 1 (B1) is set to 1 when the tank is full, bit 2 (B2) is set to 1 when 50 or more stocks are in stock, and connection failure A value of 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and a value of 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) when the CR is not connected. Bits 5 (B5) through 7 (B7) of the Frame State 1 command have a value of 1 in B5, a value of 0 in B6, and a value of 0 in B7.

The error cancellation navigation command (equivalent to the error cancellation command) is prepared for ball catching, payout detection sensor error, and retry error. An error sets bit 3 (B3) to the value 1, and a retry error sets the value 1 to bit 4 (B4). Here, the "payout detection sensor error" indicates whether or not the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70 is malfunctioning. A "retry error" indicates that an inconsistent game ball was repeatedly put out by a retry operation. Bit (B0), bit (B1), and bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the error cancellation navigation command have a value of 0 in B0, a value of 0 in B1, a value of 0 in B5, a value of 1 in B6, A value of 0 is set in B7.

The frame state 2 command is prepared as "draw ball", and bit 0 (B0) is set to "1" during ball draw. Bits 1 (B1) through 7 (B7) of the Frame State 2 command have a value of 0 in B1, a value of 0 in B2, a value of 0 in B3, a value of 0 in B4, a value of 1 in B5, a value of 1 in B6, and A value of 0 is set in B7.

As transmission timings for these various commands, the frame state 1 command is transmitted at power restoration, frame state change, and error cancellation navigation, the error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during error cancellation navigation, and the frame state 2 command is transmitted at the time of error cancellation navigation. is sent when power is restored and when frame status changes. Incidentally, these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process of step S558 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process described later.

[14. Various control processing of the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. FIG. FIG. 92 is a flow chart showing an example of main control side power-on processing, FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 92, and FIG. 94 is an example of main control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flow chart showing. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, followed by the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on processing, and the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[14-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a random number for judging a big hit for use in determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state, and a reach (reach loss) when not generating a big hit game state. Reach determination random number for use in the determination, shown in FIG. 69, the variation for use in determining the variation display pattern of the special symbol that is displayed in variation with the first special symbol indicator 1403 and the second special symbol indicator 1405 A random number for a display pattern, a random number for a jackpot pattern to be used for determining a jackpot pattern derived and displayed by a first special pattern display device 1403 and a second special pattern display device 1405 when a jackpot game state is generated, and the jackpot pattern. A random number for determination of the initial value of the big hit symbol for use in determining the initial value of the random number for the symbol, and derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 1403 and the second special symbol display device 1405 when generating the small winning game state. A small-hit symbol random number for use in determining a small-hit symbol and a small-hit symbol initial value determination random number for use in determining the initial value of the small-hit symbol random number are prepared. In addition to these random numbers, the normal symbol hit determination random number used to determine whether or not to open and close the movable piece shown in FIG. A random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit, and a random number for normal symbol variation display pattern for use in determining the variation display pattern of the normal symbol to be variably displayed on the normal symbol display device 1402 shown in FIG. prepared.

Of the various random numbers used for such game control, the big hit determination random numbers are updated by hardware, while the other random numbers are updated by software.

For example, the big hit judging random number is directly updated by hardware by a main control internal hardware random number circuit 1310an incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first receives a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a with a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value. (a clock signal output from the main controlled crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When the extraction is completed, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. do. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeats such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a wins the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a random number for judgment.

On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for determining a normal symbol is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range ranging from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range ranging from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed, the value is incremented by 1 to count up. This counter counts up from the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter updating method is called an "initial value updating type counter". The random number for determining the initial value for judging a normal pattern hit can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the random number for judging a normal pattern hit. .

In this embodiment, when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. The game information stored in the main control built-in RAM is regarded as a numerical value, and the checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the total is stored in the main control side power failure processing (power failure). When the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared, such as when the checksum value (sum value) does not match, the random number for determining the initial value for determining per normal symbol is the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. extracts the ID code from its built-in non-volatile RAM, and based on this extracted ID code, performs an initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol per determination. It is a mechanism that executes and sets this derived fixed value. That is, the random number for determining the initial value for determining a normal winning pattern is always overwritten with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value deriving process. In this way, the value to be set to the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal per symbol is derived using the ID code, and the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 1310a The first security measure is that the ID code cannot be rewritten even if the ID code is stored in the external device, and the initial value derivation process is executed when the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared. A second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on .

Here, the advantage of taking out the ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a and using the taken out ID code as the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal per symbol will be described. For example, a person who illegally obtains game balls to be paid out as prize balls obtains the game board 5 by some means, disassembles it, and uses the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number obtained illegally and the normal symbol hit determination value coincide with each other, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the code is attached, it is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a' provided in the other game board 5'. That is, in the other game board 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number coincides with the normal symbol hit determination value is completely different from that of the obtained game board 5'. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in the other game board 5', that is, in the other pachinko machine 1', so it is disassembled and analyzed. Even if a momentary power failure is generated at each predetermined interval, and the game ball is passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8 at each predetermined interval, the movable piece shown in FIG. A game state in which a game ball can be received into the starting port 2004 cannot be generated.

[14-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 1310a is circuit-configured such that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default.
This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after terminating a subroutine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

92 and 93, the above-described main control program performs main control side power-on processing under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. FIG. When this main control side power-on process is started, the main control program sets RAM access permission under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, it is possible to update the main control built-in RAM (game storage section).

Following step S10, the main control program performs initial value setting and activation setting of the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S12). Here, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as " A timer setting value is set in the WDT control register), the main control built-in WDT 1310af is activated, and time measurement is started until the main control MPU 1310a is reset. When the main control built-in WDT 1310af is activated, the main control built-in WDT 1310af starts clocking, and the watchdog timer clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a ( hereinafter referred to as "WDT clear register"), the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT 1310af is activated and time measurement is started, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the measured time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, The clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared and clocking is restarted. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a operates normally by repeating the process of clearing the clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af until the time set by the timer set value is reached and restarting the clocking. It is possible to monitor whether or not

Following step S12, the main control program performs power failure clear processing (step S14). In this power clearing process, first, output of a power failure clear signal to the power failure monitor circuit 1310e shown in FIG. 78 is started. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is composed of a comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, and a D-type flip-flop MIC22. A comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, compares +24V with a reference voltage or +12V with a reference voltage, and outputs the comparison results. The result of this comparison is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, with logic HI when no power failure or momentary power failure has occurred. Its logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

In the power clearing process, first, by starting to output a power failure clear signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, the output of the power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is started. This power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC, via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, with the logic being LOW from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a. be done. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can release the latched state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. It is possible to invert and output from the 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal, and to monitor the signal from the 1Q terminal.

Subsequently, in the power clearing process, wait timer processing is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or momentary power failure (phenomenon in which power supply is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops, and when it becomes smaller than the power failure forecast voltage, a power failure forecast signal is input as a power failure forecast from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage during the period from when the power is turned on until it rises to the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, in the wait timer process, after the power is turned on, the process waits until the voltage becomes larger than the blackout warning voltage and becomes stable. In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is set to 200 milliseconds (ms). It is Determination of whether or not the power failure warning signal is input is performed based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, as the power failure warning signal.

If the power failure warning signal is not input even after waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage after the power is turned on and stabilized, the main control program outputs the power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Stop output. Here, the power failure clear signal is sent from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the logic HI, and passes through the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC. is entered in As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can set the D-type flip-flop MIC22 to the latch state. When the D-type flip-flop MIC22 latches the state in which the PR terminal, which is its preset terminal, is LOW in logic, it outputs a power failure notice signal from its 1Q terminal, which is its output terminal.

Following step S14, the main control program makes it possible to execute RAM clear processing for initializing the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) for a predetermined time after the power is turned on (when the game side power is turned on). operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether or not the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs an error cancellation navigation command (first error cancellation command) based on the operation signal (detection signal) associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 to the main control MPU 1310a. This is done depending on whether or not the Based on the logic value of the operation signal, the main control program determines that when the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI, it is not an instruction to perform RAM clear, and the operation switch 954 is operated. On the other hand, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that the operation switch 954 is being operated by judging that it is an instruction to clear the RAM.

In step S16, the main control program sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG when the operation switch 954 is operated (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). That is, the main control program can execute a RAM clear process for initializing the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (that is, the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit)) for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on. State (game control side power-on operation control means). The above-described RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG indicates whether or not to erase game information related to games such as probability fluctuations, unpaid prize balls, etc., stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU 1310a. It is set to a value of 1 when the game information is erased, and set to a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S18 and S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time waiting process, the system for performing drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. do). In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting.

Following step S22, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage drops below the power failure forecast voltage, a power failure forecast signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure forecast. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power failure warning signal. When it is determined in step S24 that there is an input of the power failure warning signal, the main control program returns to the determination of step S24 and repeats the determination of step S24 as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, and the clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared to restart the clocking. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. After that, the main control program, under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, performs the main control side power-on processing again. A detailed description of the fact that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby process in step S22 will be given later.

When it is determined in step S24 that there is no power failure warning signal input, the main control program determines whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the game information is erased, and is set to a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 in step S26, that is, when the game information is not erased, a checksum is calculated (step S28). This checksum is calculated by regarding the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating the total.

Following step S28, the main control program compares the calculated checksum value (sum value) with the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (at power-off) described later. It is determined whether or not they match (step S30). If they match, the main control program determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG stores and retains game backup information such as game information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG value in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power failure processing described later. It is set to a value of 1 when the main-control-side power-off process has been completed normally, and set to a value of 0 when the main-control-side power-off process has not been completed normally. In the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the calculation of the checksum in step S28 and the determination in step S30 are performed. , will be described later.

When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S32, that is, when the main-control-side power-off process is normally terminated, the main control program sets the work area of the main-control built-in RAM as when the power is restored ( step S34). For this setting, the power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the main control MPU 1310a (that is, the main control built-in ROM), and this power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game information is read out from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to this game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. "Restoration of power" refers to the state in which the power is turned on after the power has been cut off, the state in which the power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage, and fraudulent means (e.g. A state in which the main control board 1310 is irradiated with a high frequency from a hidden high frequency output device) and the main control MPU 1310a itself is reset and then restored is also included.

Following step S34, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to 0 (step S36). As a result, the game information, the checksum value (sum value), etc. are changed as a result of the subsequent various processes being performed, so that the main control side power failure processing, which will be described later, is normally terminated, and the backup flag BK- is set. If FLG is not set to 1, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared, as will be described later.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S26, that is, when game information is erased, or when the checksum value (sum value) does not match in step S30 , or when the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0) in step S32, that is, when the main control side power failure processing is not normally completed, the main control program writes all of the main control built-in RAM. Clear the area (step S38). That is, the main control program executes the game control side RAM clear processing triggered by the input of the detection signal associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 (payout control side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program writes the value 0 to the main control built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read and set a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as the initial value. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a executes processing when the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 instructs RAM clearing and the game information is erased, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power is cut off. When not completed normally, the unique ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is taken out, and based on this taken out ID code, the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for normal design per determination. Perform an initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from, and this fixed value is set to the normal symbol per determination initial value determination random number for use in determining the initial value of the normal per symbol determination random number described above. do.

Following step S38, the main control program sets the working area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is carried out by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting is to set the interrupt period when the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control program performs serial communication initialization (step S44). Here, various serial input/output ports built in the main control MPU 1310a (for example, serial input/output ports (reception channel and transmission channel) for the payout control board 951, serial input/output ports for the peripheral control board 1510 (reception channel and transmission channel ), the transmission serial port prescaler is set for the communication speed and the presence or absence of parity, and the transmission serial port control register is set for initialization of the transmission circuit and transmission permission.

Following step S44, the main control program initializes the test signal output port (step S46). Here, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various test information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on in the game machine testing facility.

Following step S46, the main control program performs activation setting of the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 69 (step S48). Here, among various random numbers related to the game, a hardware random number control register built in the main control MPU 1310a for updating the jackpot determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game state by hardware In addition to setting the hardware random number setting register to latch and acquire the random number, the hard random number setting register is set to activate the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is activated by these settings, a high-speed predetermined clock signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a (a clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77). Other values within the numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication, and when all values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is again extracted, Based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are rapidly extracted one after another without duplication. When the main control MPU 1310a acquires a random number (random value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, it outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. A random number (random value) extracted by the built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is obtained from a hard random number latch register built into the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the obtained random number as a big hit determination random number.

Following step S48, the main control program sets a reservation for a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, in order to notify that the power has been turned on (power has been restored), FIG. A power-on state command and a main control return destination command at power-on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, even if the game information is read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to this game information are stored. be. In such a case, after completion of transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are subsequently transmitted. These commands are transmitted in main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. A detailed description of the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 will be given later.

Following step S50, the main control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). By this setting, the main control-side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly performed at the interrupt period set at step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

Subsequent to step S52, the main control program issues an error cancellation navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 (operation switch) when a predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on, that is, when the main control side main processing is started. Execution of game control side RAM clear processing triggered by receipt will be regulated (normal operation control means). As described above, the main control program uses the concept of time sharing based on the concept of time-sharing to use the detection signal input in accordance with the operation of the operation switch 954 as an error cancellation navigation command for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on. Triggered by the input, the RAM clear processing is executed (game control side power-on operation control means), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the execution of the RAM clear processing is regulated even if the error cancellation navigation command is input ( Game control side normal operation control means), handled as a release switch for releasing the error notification accompanying the error that occurred. In other words, the operation switch 954 (error canceling unit), which was originally supposed to be used to cancel an error that occurred in the payout operation, is replaced as a game memory unit for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on. Main control built-in RAM (and payout control built-in RAM as a payout storage unit to be described later) function as an operation unit for executing RAM clear processing for starting initialization, or after the predetermined time has elapsed, the game It can be made to function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred regarding the ball dispensing operation.

Next, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S54). As described above, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage drops below the power failure forecast voltage, a power failure forecast signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure forecast. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power failure warning signal.

When there is no power failure warning signal input in step S54, the main control program performs non-hit-lose random number update processing (step S56). In this non-hit-lose random number update process, the above-described ready-to-win determination random number, variable display pattern random number, big win symbol initial value determination random number, small winning symbol initial value determination random number, etc. are updated. In this way, in the non-hit-lose random number update process, software updates the random numbers that are not related to the hit-lose determination (big hit determination). Incidentally, the above-mentioned normal symbol hit determination random number, normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number, normal symbol variation display pattern random number, etc. are also updated by this non-hit-lose random number update process.

After step S56, the process returns to step S54, and the main control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. Then, steps S54 to S56 are repeated. The processing of steps S54 to S56 is called "main control side main processing".

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not performed, preventing writing to the main control built-in RAM and protecting the game information from being rewritten.

Following step S58, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process for starting to output the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process of step S14 is performed. Thereby, the main control program can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S60, the main control program is shown in FIG. , 2nd special reservation number display 1406, normal design display 1402, normal design memory display 1188, state display 1401, round display 1407 etc. stop the drive signal which is output (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by considering the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, as numerical values.

Following step S64, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control program sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). By setting the RAM access prohibition, access to the main control built-in RAM (game storage section) becomes impossible, so that updating of the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game storage section) can be prevented.

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, and the clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the clocking starts again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. After that, the main control program, under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, performs the main control side power-on processing again. The processing of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power failure processing".

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when there is a power failure or momentary power failure.

In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control internal RAM is normal. are inspecting. By double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM in this way, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information has been stored by fraud.

Here, it will be described that the determination of the presence/absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, regarding the problem in the case where there is no determination of the presence or absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24, that is, when the value of the RAM clear flag is determined in step S26 following the wait time standby processing in step S22, and the subsequent processing proceeds. I will explain the problems in

The VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, charges the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. The charge is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power failure or momentary power failure occurs. In other words, even if the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off due to a momentary power failure or power failure, the power from the pachinko island facility will be restored by applying +5V charge charged to the hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2. The main control-side power-off processing can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the power has been cut off. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, when a main control-side main process or a main-control-side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed, a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the pachinko island facility is interrupted. When the power is cut off, the main control side power cut-off processing can be completed without fail.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, during the wait time standby process of step S22 when power is restored, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. A waiting time (boot timer: in this embodiment, 2.5 seconds is set) until the system that controls drawing of the device 460 starts to count, and immediately before reaching the waiting time. If an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, the charge charged in hardware such as the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5 V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, but within a period of about 7 ms, step S42 , the interrupt initialization is performed, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. It may not be possible to complete the main control side power-off processing in the power-on processing. Therefore, the main control side power-on processing is started again when the power is restored without storing the value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

Then, when the power is restored this time, the main control side power-on processing is started, and the wait time standby processing of step S22 is completed without occurrence of an instantaneous power failure or power failure. and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM just before the momentary power failure or power failure occurred. Instead, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared in step S38. In other words, when the power is restored, the operation switch 954 is operated by the hall clerk or the like, and even if the hall clerk or the like does not express the intention of clearing the RAM, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (cleared). ).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process for determining whether or not the power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure warning signal is input, Returning to the determination of step S24, the determination of step S24 is repeatedly performed as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, and the clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared to restart the clocking. is disabled, the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Before performing the wait time waiting process of step S22, although a value is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S18 or step S20, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is mainly Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, even if RAM access permission is set in step S10, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process for determining whether or not the power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure warning signal is input (that is, step When it is determined by the determination of step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of S22), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, By repeating the determination in step S24, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 1310 can be restarted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game information from being updated, so that the checksum calculation result does not fluctuate. As a result, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it determines that the checksum calculation result in step S28 matches the checksum calculation and stored value in step S64. Therefore, the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM and held immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is not initialized. Therefore, when the power is restored, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure from being initialized.

Further, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure warning signal is not input (that is, step S22 When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is progressing the game, the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is supplied with power from the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the processing of steps S58 to S68 and the processing at the time of power failure on the main control side, which is composed of an infinite loop. When the control MPU 1310a is restarted, the control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation result in the backup process (that is, the checksum calculation and stored value in step S64) match. Since the determination is made, the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM and held immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is not initialized. That is, the main control board 1310 can be activated by restoring the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs.

Furthermore, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that a power failure warning signal has been input, the main control built-in WDT 1310af causes the main control MPU 1310a to forcibly reset the contents of the main control built-in RAM. On the other hand, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal has not been input in step S24, the power failure warning signal has not been input. As a result, the main control side power failure processing can be reliably completed within the "power supply securing period for momentary power failure or power failure" of about 7 ms by hardware. That is, in the present embodiment, when power is restored from the main control MPU 1310a and the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure while the main control side power-on processing is being performed. The charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal, as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power failure or momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power failure processing cannot be completed within the "instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed. Immediately after step S24, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal is input. When a power failure warning signal is input, the process returns to the determination of step S24, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, step S24 is performed. By repeating the determination, the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, and the clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared and restarted. When the clock cannot be started, the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. By forcibly resetting the main control MPU 1310a by the main control built-in WDT 1310af by such software, steps after step S24 (specifically, interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, and then step S52 It is possible to prevent the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) from being updated by preventing the progress to the control flow of setting interrupt permission and starting the main control side timer interrupt processing described later). adopted the mechanism. In this way, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, the part provided by software so that the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM will not be changed at all, and the power supply on the main control side The contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) are covered by hardware so that the interruption processing is surely completed and the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all. game information) can be reliably prevented from being changed.

Next, a description will be given of the fact that a command to be transmitted at power-on is reserved in step S50. In step S50, as described above, based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, it is determined that the power has been turned on (power has been restored). In order to convey this, the power-on state command and the main control return destination command at power-on shown in FIG. As described above, the main control return destination command at power-on mainly consists of information instructing the drive state of the starter solenoid 2107 and information instructing the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. there is Here, first, when the main control return destination command at power-on does not include the information instructing the drive state of the starter solenoid 2107 and the information instructing the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. , that is, the problem in the case where the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on as the main control return destination command at power-on is not performed in step S50.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the big win game state screen (for example, the big win game effect screen) in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. drives the attacker solenoid 2108 to open the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in S34, by restoring the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurred, the attacker Driving of the solenoid 2108 is started, and the state in which the large prize winning port 2005 is closed by the opening/closing member 2107 is shifted to the state in which it is opened.

However, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. Then, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the probability and time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 generates a jackpot game state as a game state, an instantaneous power failure or a power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 will be the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from, the screen can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the probability and the time saving state and can be returned. It is not possible to display at all which round of the jackpot game state. That is, for example, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 and is detected by the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. Even if the main control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the game ball that entered the big winning hole 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if the number can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, it is not possible to display at all which round (that is, what round) of the jackpot game state.

In such a situation, the main control board 1310 stops driving the attacker solenoid 2108 and the large winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening/closing member 2107, for example, when finishing the 4th round (fourth round) of the jackpot game state. Peripheral control from the main control board 1310 of the large prize winning port 1 closing display command instructing the transition from the closed state to the closed state (that is, start of closing between rounds of the large winning port 2005 of the starting port unit 2100) When the information is sent to the board 1510 and the main control board 1310 starts the 5th round (fifth round) of the jackpot game state, the attacker solenoid 2108 is started to be driven and the big winning opening 2005 is closed by the opening/closing member 2107. A 5th large winning opening opening display command for instructing the transition from the state to the open state (that is, the opening of the 5th round of the large winning opening 2005) is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. do. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen of the start of the 5th round of the jackpot game state from the screen corresponding to the probability and time saving state described above, and displays it in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. becomes.

In addition, for example, a screen that informs the player that the game state is such that the game ball can be received into the second start port 2004 and that the game state is advantageous to the player (for example, a screen that indicates that the movable piece is expanded When the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the screen to be communicated to the player in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the starting solenoid 2107 to display the pair shown in FIG. When an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs when the movable piece of the is expanded in the left and right direction, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 stores the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting, by restoring to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the starting port solenoid 2107 is started to drive and paired. The movable piece moves from a state in which it rises substantially vertically to a state in which it spreads in the left-right direction.

However, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. , and then when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in the game state in which the game ball can be received into the second start port 2004 as the game state and the game state is generated in an advantageous game state for the player, an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and can be returned, it becomes a game state in which the game ball can be received into the second start port 2004 and becomes a game state advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the screen for telling the presence of the player in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 at all. Therefore, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine is surprised at the momentary power failure or power failure, and when the power is restored, the game ball is accepted into the second start port 2004 just before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. In some cases, it is possible to forget that the game state is enabled, and in such a case, the game state is returned to the game state in which the game ball can be accepted to the second start port 2004 as the game state at the time of power restoration. In spite of this, when the power is restored, the screen for instructing the game (that is, the screen for instructing the game to enter the game ball into the second start port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Therefore, there is also a problem that the player does not know what kind of game should be played.

As described above, in the two examples described above, there is a problem that the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure cannot be quickly restored after the power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a stuck state, a so-called frozen state, and misunderstands that it has failed. There was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including when the power is turned on, and when power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure), the power-on state command and a command to return to main control at power-on to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the state command at power-on and the command to return to main control at power-on classified into power-on shown in FIG. is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in main control-side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 receives from the main control board 1310 based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, for example, in the above-described example, in the 4 rounds of the jackpot game state, When an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the attacker solenoid 2108 is started to be driven as a return destination of the main control board 1310, and the large prize winning opening 2005 is opened from the closed state by the opening and closing member 2107. Since it is possible to transmit to the peripheral control board 1510 that the transition to the state of ) cannot be displayed in the display area of the game board-side effect display device 1600, but in the jackpot game state, the attacker solenoid 2108 is started to be driven and the big winning port 2005 is opened by the opening/closing member 2107. (For example, a screen that conveys a message to the player, ``This is a big win. A display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be displayed to instruct a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine to enter a game ball into the big winning hole 2005 after the power is restored, and For example, in the above-described example, in the state in which the game ball can be received into the second start port 2004 and the game state is advantageous to the player, an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, and then it is restored. When the power is turned on, a screen (for example, "Movable piece The peripheral control board 1510 displays the display area of the game board side production display device 1600 (a screen that conveys the message to the player). can be displayed to instruct a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine to enter a game ball into the second starting port 2004 after power is restored. As a result, when power is restored after an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the main control board 1310 can give detailed instructions on the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 . Therefore, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure can be quickly restored after power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a stuck state, a so-called frozen state, and misunderstands that it has failed. can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection. Calculation and determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the main control board configured by the above-described backup processing of steps S58 to S68 and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off processing, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, in step S30 In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot match, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared in step S38. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is performed in step S50, the power-on state command and the main control return destination command at power-on shown in FIG. 89 are created. By storing the transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, only two commands, the state command at power-on and the main control return destination command at power-on, can be stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. is stored in As for these commands, in the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later, the power-on state command is first transmitted, and then the main control return destination command at power-on is transmitted. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the main control board 1310 issues a power-on status command as the first command. It will be sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

By the way, as described above, the power-on status command is shown in FIG. When the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown is operated to perform RAM clearing, information to instruct that effect, and when power is turned on (in addition to turning on the power, a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power is (Including when the power is restored.) Return in any state (probability and time saving state) from the above-mentioned low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state, low probability non-working time saving state, and high probability non working time saving state and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, a problem in the case where the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine is not included in the power-on state command will be described.

As described above, the model code of the pachinko machine is used for the copyright of any work when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310). What kind of game specifications (for example, when a probability change occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, It is possible to specify whether it is a game specification (such as a so-called ST machine) in which a probability change occurs in a state where the game is played 30 times or 70 times).

In the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control boards 1310, there are cases where the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of a plurality of types of works coexist.
Then, the worker of the production line is the owner of the copyright of which work out of the copyrights of multiple types of works (for example, the copyright of works such as movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, manga E, and manga F). It becomes unclear whether the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright of the work called movie D) among the copyrights of multiple types of works. Although the main control board 1310 is being sent to the production line to manufacture 1310, the main control board 1310 is required to manufacture the main control board 1310 for other copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work Manga F). There is also an assumption and misunderstanding that it flows to the production line. For this reason, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the worker of the production line may It is not possible to confirm which work the manufactured main control board 1310 is copyrighted, and even if the same work is copyrighted, which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type) type), and what kind of game specification (game specification or ST machine that when a probability change occurs, that state is continued until the next big win game state occurs). As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works coexists, the main control board for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is produced. The main control board 1310 is sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5 with the 1310 mixed. For this reason, the operator of the game board assembly line sometimes attaches to the game board 5 the main control board 1310 that does not correspond to the game board 5 with respect to the copyright of the work. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is lowered.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and when the power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure), the model code of the pachinko machine In order to transmit to the peripheral control board 1510 a power-on state command including information indicating the power-on state command and the main control return destination command at power-on shown in FIG. is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in main control-side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later.

As a result, an operator on the production line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection device can operate the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the above-mentioned max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the series code for specifying which type it is, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when the probability fluctuation occurs, the next big hit game state In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until it occurs, a game specification code for specifying the game specification (such as ST machine) that the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is limited; Based on this, by visually checking the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor, it is possible to determine which work the main control board 1310 belongs to. The model type (max type, middle type, and sweet digital type), and what kind of game specifications (if the probability change occurs, the state will continue until the next big win game state occurs) It is also possible to discriminate whether it is a game specification or ST machine). As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board inspection process of the production line The operator can visually check the inspection monitor to accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications, so that the main control board 1310 for the copyright of the work can be sorted into the following. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. The operator of the game board assembly line can surely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board 1310 not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent the production efficiency of the game board 5 from being lowered by the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5 . Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5 .

[14-3. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, main control side timer interrupt processing will be described. This main-control-side timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed at an interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIGS. 92 and 93 .

When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, in the main control board 1310, the main control program switches register banks under the control of the main control MPU 1310a, as shown in FIG. 94 (step S100). The general-purpose storage elements (general-purpose registers) of the main control MPU 1310a have two register banks consisting of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the main control side power-on process described above, while the first register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine. In step S100, in order to use the second register bank in the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, switch the register bank to the other register tank. In this embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine is started, the processing of saving each register to the stack is not required.

Following step S100, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time when the first special symbol indicator 1403 and the second special symbol indicator 1405 are lit according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric auditors control process described later, the normal In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1402 lights up according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the symbol and normal electric auditors control process, various commands sent by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) are sent to the payout control board 951. Time management such as ACK signal input judgment time set as a judgment condition when judging whether or not the payer ACK signal indicating that the receiver has been received normally is input. Specifically, when the variation time of the variation display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the variation time is subtracted by 4 ms. When the subtraction result becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S102, the main control program performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control program detects, for example, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 shown in FIG. A detection signal from the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69 that detects a game ball that has entered the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8, and a game ball that has entered the first start opening 2002 shown in FIG. A detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, and a detection signal from the second starting hole sensor 4004 shown in FIG. , a detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69 that detects a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. The detection signal and the payout control board 951 indicating that the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 normally received the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later are read, respectively, and the input information is read. is stored in the input information storage area. In addition, the detection signal from the first start hole sensor 4002 that detects the game ball that entered the first start hole 2002, the detection from the second start hole sensor 4004 that detects the game ball that entered the second start hole 2004 When each signal is read, the corresponding start-up winning command shown in FIG. 90 and classified as others is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first starter sensor 4002, a starter winning command corresponding thereto is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and there is a detection signal from the second starter sensor 4004. Then, a start-up winning command corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area.

In this embodiment, detection signals from general winning gate sensors 4020 and 4020 that detect game balls that have entered the general winning gates 2001 and 2201, and a count sensor 4005 that detects game balls that have entered the big winning gate 2005 A detection signal from, a detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 4002 that detects a game ball that has entered the first starting hole 2002, and a second starting hole sensor 4004 that detects a game ball that has entered the second starting hole 2004. The detection signal from the gate 2003 and the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 that detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 2003 are read for the first time when the switch input process is started, and read for a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs ), each is read again for the second time. Then, the result of the second reading is compared with the result of the first reading. It is determined whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again for the third time, and the result of the third reading is compared with the result of the second reading. It is determined again whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again for the fourth time, and the result of the fourth reading is compared with the result of the third reading. It is determined again whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the result is the same, it is treated as if there is no entry of the game ball.

Thus, in the switch input process, the main control program receives the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003, By performing double reading for a total of two times by comparing the 1st to 3rd times and comparing the 2nd to 4th times, the effect of chattering, noise, etc. Since it is possible to avoid erroneous detection, detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003 Reliability can be improved.

Following step S104, the main control program performs win/lose random number update processing (step S106). In this win/lose random number update process, the above-described random numbers for the big-hit design and random numbers for the small-hit design are updated. Also, in addition to these random numbers, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol, which is updated in the non-win/lose random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for small winning symbols is also updated. The random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol are updated in the main control side main process and this main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, thereby enhancing the randomness. . On the other hand, since the random number for the big win pattern and the random number for the small win pattern are related to the win/lose judgment (big win judgment), each counter counts up only each time the win/lose random number update process is performed. Incidentally, the above-described normal symbol hit determination random number and normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number are also updated by this win/lose random number update process.

For example, the counter for updating the random number for determining per normal symbol is, as described above, an initial value update type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range ranging from the minimum value to the maximum value, and this minimum value to the maximum value is counted up by incrementing the value by 1 each time this main control side timer interrupt processing is performed. The random number for determining the initial value for judging normal symbol hit is counted up to the maximum value, and then the random number for determining the initial value for judging normal symbol hit is counted up from the minimum value. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the hit/lose random number update process updates the initial value determination random number for big hit determination. The random number for determining the initial value for judging a normal pattern hit can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the random number for judging a normal pattern hit. .

In this embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol are set to the non The win/lose random number update process and the win/lose random number update process of step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine, are updated respectively, but each time an interrupt timer occurs, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven. If the number of executions of the non-win-lose random number update process in step S56 is random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol , and the small-hit symbol initial value determination random number may be updated only in the non-hit-lose random number update process of step S56.

Following step S106, the main control program performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control process, the input information is read out from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, a prize ball command shown in FIG. When the number of scheduled game balls reaches 10, the output of the main prize number information output signal is set to notify that effect, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area, or A self-check command shown in FIG. 88 for checking the connection state between the control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is created. Then, the generated prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 shown in FIG. has reached 10 balls, the output of the main prize number information output signal is set to notify that effect, the output information is stored in the output information storage area, and the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 951. Or, when the payout control board 951 does not receive the payout ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 951 has received the prize ball command normally, the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is confirmed. A self-check command is created and transmitted to the payout control board 951 . If the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls exceeds 10, as in the case of creating a prize ball command to pay out 15 balls as prize balls, the number of balls in excess will be added to the number of balls in the next game. In the prize ball control process, the input information is read out from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls is added, and the added number of game balls is calculated. is reached, the output of the main prize number information output signal is set to notify that effect, and is stored in the output information storage area as the output information.

Following step S108, the main control program performs frame command reception processing (step S110). In the payout control board 951, the payout control program executes various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (eg, frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command) classified into the state displays shown in FIG. to send. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error cancellation navigation command based on the detection signal of the operation switch 954 .
In the frame command reception process described above, when the main control program normally receives these various commands as payer serial data, the information to notify the payout control board 951 is stored as output information in the main control built-in RAM. store in the area. In addition, the main control program formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified by state display in FIG. 90 (frame state 1 command, error release The navigation command and frame state 2 command)) are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. The frame state 1 command here corresponds to the first error generation command, and the error cancellation navigation command corresponds to the first error cancellation command.

Following step S110, the main control program performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraudulent act detection process, an abnormal state regarding the prize balls is checked. For example, when the input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 is input in the non-jackpot game state (when the game ball enters the big winning hole 2005), etc. 90 as an abnormal state, a winning abnormality display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 90 is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S112, the main control program performs special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. (random number) is acquired from the hard random number latch register built into the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a, and this acquired random number is set as a jackpot determination random number. And the big hit judgment random number (that is, the random value obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) and the big hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, whether or not (Determine whether or not to generate a big hit game state (referred to as "special lottery")), take out the value of the counter for updating the random number for the big hit pattern, and store it in advance in the main control built-in ROM It determines whether or not it matches the probability variation per determination value (determines whether or not to generate probability variation). Here, "probability change" means that the probability of winning a big hit changes to a high probability (probability variable time) set higher than the normal time (low probability). In this embodiment, as the range of the above-described jackpot determination value (jackpot determination range), a value of 32668 to a value of 32767 is set for a low probability. ~ value 32767 is set and read from the probability variation time determination table. Thus, in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process of step S114, the random number for judging the big hit (that is, the random value obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU 1310a with built-in main control) and the built-in main control When determining whether or not the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the ROM matches, the jackpot determination random number (that is, the random value obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) is included in the jackpot determination range.

When these determination results are based on the first start sensor 4002, while creating various commands related to the special figure 1 tuning effect shown in FIG. In some cases, create various commands related to the special figure 2 tuning performance shown in FIG. Set the output of the lighting signal to the first special symbol indicator 1403 or the second special symbol indicator 1405 so as to light the device 1403 or the second special symbol indicator 1405, and store it in the output information storage area described above as the output information do. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when it becomes a big win game state, various commands (big win opening command, big winning mouth 1 open Nth time display command, big winning mouth 1) classified as related to big win shown in FIG. Closed display command, big win opening 1 count display command, jackpot ending command, and jackpot pattern display command) are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, or the opening and closing member 2107 shown in FIG. 8 is opened and closed. The output of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area. The output of the lighting signal to the 2nd round display lamp 1407a of the round indicator 1407 shown in FIG. At some point, the output of the lighting signal to the 15th round indicator lamp 1407b of the round indicator 1407 shown in FIG. The output of the lighting signal to the status indicator 1401 is set so that the presence or absence of variation is lit in a predetermined color, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area.

Following step S114, the main control program performs normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric accessary product control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the gate winning process is performed based on this input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 has been input to the input terminal. Based on the result of this determination, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the value of the counter for updating the random number for determining per normal symbol is extracted as gate information, and the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is extracted. memorize to

This gate information storage area has 0th to 3rd divisions (four divisions), and the gate information is stored in the order of the 0th division, the 1st division, the 2nd division, and the 3rd division. It's like For example, if the gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, and the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in the 3rd section of the gate information storage. do.

The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information in the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information in the second section of the gate information storage is stored in the first section of the gate information storage, and the gate information is stored in the first section of the gate information storage. The gate information in the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, respectively, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes a free area. For example, when gate information is stored in the first and second sections of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information of the first section is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two partitions is shifted to the first partition of the gate information storage, and the second partition of the gate information storage and the third partition of the gate information storage become empty areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first section to the third section of the gate information storage, the above-described gate information so that the total number of the stored gate information is used as a holding ball and the normal symbol storage display 1188 is lit. Based on this, the output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol memory display 1188 is set, and stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above.

Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the value of the random number for determining per normal symbol is taken out from the read gate information and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value (referred to as "normal lottery"). Whether or not to open and close the movable piece is determined based on the determination result (lottery result by ordinary lottery). When the opening/closing operation is performed by this determination, the pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left-right direction, so that the second start opening 2004 becomes a game state in which the game ball can be received, which is advantageous to the player. It becomes a game state. This determination and the corresponding normal symbol variation display pattern are determined based on the above-described normal symbol variation display pattern random numbers, and various commands classified into the normal symbol synchronization effect shown in FIG. 89 are created and sent as transmission information. While storing in the above-described transmission information storage area, set the output of the lighting signal to the normal design display device 1402 so as to light the normal design display device 1402 according to the determined normal pattern variation display pattern, and set the output of the lighting signal to the normal design display device 1402 as the output information Store in the output information storage area. In addition, for example, when the value of the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number matches the normal symbol hit determination value pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the normal electric role effect shown in FIG. is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, the output of the drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2107 is set so as to open and close the movable piece, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above. , When the value of the extracted normal symbol per determination random number does not match the normal per symbol determination value pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol variation is based on the above-described normal symbol variation display pattern random number. Determine the display pattern, create various commands classified into the normal pattern synchronization effect shown in FIG. 89, store as transmission information in the above-described transmission information storage area, and normal The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 is set so as to light the symbol display 1402, and is stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above.

Following step S116, the main control program performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on this output information. This main control program, for example, from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information, when the various commands from the payout control board 951 has been normally received, the payout control board 951 the main payment ACK signal , or when in a jackpot game state, output a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 that performs the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing member 2107 of the big winning port 2005, and output a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2107 that performs the opening and closing operation of the movable piece. In addition to outputting, main prize number information output signal, 15 rounds big hit information output signal, 2 rounds big hit information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, Various information (game information) signals related to the game such as time saving information output information, start winning prize information output signal, etc. are output to the payout control board 951.

Following step S118, the main control program performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In the peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program reads transmission information from the transmission information storage area and transmits the transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. This transmission information includes various commands classified into special figure 1 tuning effect related, shown in FIG. Commands, various commands classified as related to big wins (for example, big wins based on the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 (see FIG. 69) when a game ball entering the big win opening 2005 (see FIG. 8) is detected Large winning mouth 1 count display command equivalent to mouth count command), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to general pattern synchronization effects, various commands classified as related to ordinary electric role effects, Fig. 90 , various commands classified as notification display (door open command, door frame close command, body frame open command, body frame close command, etc.), various commands classified as status display (frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation commands and frame state 2 commands), various commands classified into test-related commands, and various commands classified into others are stored. One packet of the main circumferential serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data includes a status indicating a command type having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status and a sum value calculated by considering the mode as a numerical value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, the main control program transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute various commands as main peripheral serial data. As described above, when a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied as +5 V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. The data can be transferred to the register 41aea and transmitted from the transmission shift register 1310aea as the main-circumference serial data. When the power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, to notify that the power has been restored in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. In addition, the power-on status command and the main control return destination command at power-on shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM , as main peripheral serial data, the status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the state command at power-on, are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. The mode and the sum value are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order. In addition, in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, game information is read from the game backup information in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process, and the game information is read according to this game information. various commands may be stored. In such a case, after completion of transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are subsequently transmitted.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a frame state 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control unit ) (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command having the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the frame state 1 command having the form shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives an error cancellation navigation command (first error cancellation command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error cancellation navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the error cancellation navigation command in the form shown in FIG.

Furthermore, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main body frame open command (first main body frame open command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 A main body frame open command (second main body frame open command) is transmitted to (rendering control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame open command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the body frame open command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 ( A main body frame closing command (second main body frame closing command) is transmitted to the production control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG.

In addition, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door opening command (first door opening command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG.

Following step S120, the main control program clears the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S122), and ends this routine. The clearing of the main control built-in WDT 1310af in step S22 is performed by setting the timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a. As a result, the clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared. Then, the main control built-in WDT 1310af restarts the clocking, thereby preventing the main control MPU 1310a from being forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af.

In addition, as described above, the main control board 1310 has the above-described backup function for storing the game information according to the progress of the game before the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is progressing. The process can be executed and completed, and at the time of power restoration, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information that has executed the backup process as a return destination for the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. 89, which instructs the driving state of the starting solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108, which are the electrical driving sources, by the port output processing in step S118 in this routine. It is designed to be able to output to That is, the main control board 1310 is the main controller in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the control built-in RAM, in order to notify that the power has been turned on (power has been restored), a power-on state command and a power-on state command classified into power-on shown in FIG. A control return destination command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then the status, mode, and sum value that constitute the power-on main control return destination command are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. Send to Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510, based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310, sets the game board side effect display device 1600 as the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Effect display can be performed in the display area of . As a result, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs while a player is playing a game and power is subsequently restored, the game state immediately before the power failure or power failure can be quickly restored after the power is restored. In addition, the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and notified, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a stuck state, a so-called freeze. It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the device is out of order because the player sees the device in the broken state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player from misunderstanding a malfunction by quickly returning to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after power is restored.

In addition, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, as described above, as shown in FIG. At step S38 in the main control side power-on processing, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is performed in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same processing, the power-on state command classified into the power-on shown in FIG. and the main control return destination command at power-on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in this routine, the main peripheral serial data constitutes the power-on state command, The status, mode, and sum value are sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in that order, and then the main control board inspection is performed in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitutes the main control return destination command at power-on. Send to the inspection equipment in the process. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process configures the information representing the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information representing the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , the series code for specifying which type is the above-mentioned model type from the max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (For example, when a probability change occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big win game state occurs, the game specification that the probability change occurs in a state where the number of special symbol changes is limited (ST machine), etc.), and detailed model information is displayed on the inspection monitor in the main control board inspection process.

[16-1. Various control processing of the peripheral control unit]
[16-1-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral controller power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 performs a peripheral control unit power-on process as shown in FIG. When this peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the performance control program performs initial setting processing under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the effect control program performs the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a itself, the hot start/cold start determination process, and the process of setting the wait timer after reset. The peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a process of initializing itself, but the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a enters a state in which the interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing to be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs from the main control board 1310, shown in FIGS. , various commands such as commands relating to the control of game effects and commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be received.

In the hot start/cold start determination process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. ) are compared, and effect backup information (1 ms), which is the content backed up in Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms), is compared, and Bank3 (1 fr) and Bank4 (1 fr) in the backup second area 1511cc are compared. The performance backup information (1 fr), which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (1 ms), and the performance backup information (1 ms), which is the content backed up in Bank 4 (1 ms), are compared, and the contents of the comparison are compared. 73, the performance backup information (1fr) which is the content stored in Bank1 (1fr) for Bank0 (1fr), which is the normally used storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. While performing a hot start by copying back the effect backup information (1 ms), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1 ms), to Bank0 (1 ms), when the compared contents do not match (i.e. , mismatch), a value of 0 is forcibly written into each of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), which are normally used storage areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, to perform a cold start.

In the hot start/cold start determination process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. (SRAM), and the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the content backed up in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) in the second backup area 1511dc. When the compared contents match, the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) is stored in Bank0 (SRAM) which is the normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. ) is copied back to perform a hot start, and when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value is stored in Bank0 (SRAM) which is a normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Write 0 forcibly to make a cold start. Following such a hot start or cold start, the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 is forcibly written with a value of 0 to be cleared to zero. After performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 to reset the peripheral control MPU 1511a. I try not to get caught.

Following step S1000, the effect control program performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. is set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. In addition, in the current time information acquisition process, the luminance setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and sets the brightness of the LEDs included in the acquired brightness setting information to the brightness of the game board. Processing for adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 and lighting it is performed. As described above, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%. It includes the set brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 .

Specifically, in the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75%, and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is set to 75%. is lit, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the brightness stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 80% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. Lights up by adjusting the brightness. In the brightness setting processing of the liquid crystal display device, correction similar to the above-described brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. It is not done at all. This is because a correction program similar to the brightness correction program is incorporated into the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% every time the brightness setting processing of the liquid crystal display device is executed. This is to prevent

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once when the power is turned on. After performing the current time information acquisition process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.

Following step S1002, the effect control program sets the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later. are set to the value 0 when not executed. The V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted is input from the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator. A value of 1 is set in the partial V blank signal interrupt process. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. After setting the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 0, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. there is

Following step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is value 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (is 0), the process returns to step S1008 to repeatedly determine whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not. By repeating such a determination, a standby state is established until the peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed. After determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to reset the peripheral control MPU 1511a. I try not to get caught.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S1009). The steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and set to a value of 0 when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

Following step S1009, the effect control program performs 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer start processing, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is started, and the number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed by starting this 1 ms interrupt timer is counted. 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting is set to 1 to initialize the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the effect control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs continuous DMA serial transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. Here, serial I/O port continuous transmission for the lamp drive board is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When this lamp drive board serial I/O port continuous transmission is started, the data shown in FIG. Game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 is created by a lamp data creation process to be described later. is set by default.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The first byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored at the top address is sent to the lamp drive board serial I/O port via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. transfer and write to the transmit buffer register of As a result, the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side emission clock signal SL-CLK to transmit 1 byte of the transmission shift register. data is started to be transmitted bit by bit.

Every time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board occurs, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the transmission buffer register for the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board The 1-byte data written is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty because there is no more 1-byte data.), the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa is transmitted 1 byte at a time via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai, By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board, the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, In synchronism with the board-side light emission clock signal SL-CLK, transmission of 1-byte data in the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed through the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board.

In the lamp data output process, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. Here too, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is used to perform serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration driving amplifier board LED. When this frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port continuous transmission is started, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. In 1511cab, door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 is generated by the lamp data generation process described later. is set by default.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area. The first byte of the door-side light emission data STL-DAT stored at the top address of 1511cab is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial signal via the external bus 1511h, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to the transmit buffer register of the I/O port. As a result, the serial I/O port for the frame decoration driving amplifier board LED transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door-side light emission clock signal STL-CLK to the transmission shift register. Start transmitting 1-byte data bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac receives a transmission interrupt request for the frame-decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port (in this embodiment, the frame-decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port). 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty because there is no more 1-byte data.), peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, the remaining door side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the frame decoration driving amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab is transmitted byte by byte to the external bus 1511h and the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad. , and by transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port via the peripheral bus 1511ai, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port receives this written data. The data in the transmission buffer register is transferred to the transmission shift register, and in synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK, transmission of 1 byte data in the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED Continuous transmission is performed by the serial I/O port.

Following step S1012, the production control program performs production operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this production operation unit monitoring process, in the production operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the operation button 410 and the like are operated based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the production operation unit 400. Based on the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. determine as appropriate whether or not to reflect

Following step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator from channels CH1 and 2 shown in FIG. Output to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 . As a result, various screens are drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 . In the display data output process, if the drawing exceeds the drawing capability of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is sent to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect. The output to the display device 460 is canceled. Although this makes it possible to prevent a delay in the processing time, so-called dropped frames may occur. Various effects from the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. It is a mechanism that allows you to prioritize synchronization with the production of music and sound effects that match the time.

Following step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the performance control program outputs sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in the sound data creation process described later to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data, In addition to music and sound effects, sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds are output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data. When serialized audio data is input from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, the audio data transmission IC 1512c converts the right audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data with positive and negative signals. At the same time, the left audio data is transmitted to the frame-decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data with positive and negative signals. As a result, music, sound effects, and the like in accordance with various effects are stereo-reproduced from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and notification sounds and notification sounds are also stereo-reproduced.

Following step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the performance control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. For example, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in time series that constitute the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, what number screen data from the first screen data is stored in the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator. Update the pointer to indicate whether to output.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in time series that constitute the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the number of light emission data from the top light emission data is changed to light emission of various LEDs. Update the pointer to indicate which mode to use.

In the scheduler update process, the sound data such as music and sound effects, and the sound data of the notification sound and notification sound arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae are instructed. Of the sound command data, the pointer is updated to indicate what order of the sound command data from the top sound command data is to be output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

In the scheduler update process, among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the first drive data is The pointer is updated to indicate the order of the drive data to be output. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which constitute the electric drive source schedule data, are repeatedly executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt, which will be described later. It is updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing, which is repeatedly executed each time this 1ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive sources such as the motor and solenoid are driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in chronological order is executed. Update the pointer to the data and update the pointer each time you do your own work. In other words, the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process. Even if another drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be instructed, the scheduler update process is forcibly instructed to the drive data that should be originally instructed.

Following step S1020, the effect control program performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, the effect control program, the information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, various Various commands received in the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing (command receiving means), which will be described later, are analyzed (command analyzing means). Based on the information transmitted from the performance display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the performance control program generates screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound. The schedule data for generation, the electric drive source schedule data, etc. are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. do. In addition, the effect control program, the command from the main control board 1310 received in this peripheral control unit command interrupt processing, for example, starting mouth winning command for instructing the start of the starting mouth winning effect, the number of normal symbols pending Normal pattern storage command for identifying (0 to 4), pattern synchronization production start command for instructing the start of the pattern synchronization production, pattern storage command output when the number of starting reservations changes, large winning opening 2005 A large winning opening 1 count display command (large winning opening count command) output each time a game ball is accepted, or a frame state 1 command (second error generation command, It analyzes (command analysis means) whether it is a full tank error generation command or not, and recognizes which game state it is at present. In addition, this effect control program, after a predetermined time has passed since the power is turned on, the command received by this peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is a body frame open command, a body frame close command, a door open command or a door frame close Analyze whether it is a command or not. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the received command storage area 1511cac of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. , The effect control program analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 1511cac. Various commands, shown in FIG. , various commands classified as related to normal figure synchronization effects, various commands classified as related to normal electric role effects, various commands classified as notification display shown in FIG. 90, door frame open command , door frame close command, body frame open command, body frame close command, error cancellation navigation command (equivalent to second error cancellation command) and frame state 1 command (equivalent to second error generation command), etc. There are various commands that are grouped, various commands that are grouped into test-related, and various commands that are grouped into others.

Following step S1022, the effect control program performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, furthermore, when the command analyzed by the received command analysis process of step S1022 as described above includes various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. The schedule data for screen generation, the schedule data for emission mode generation, the schedule data for sound generation, the electric drive source schedule data, etc., which are set in the abnormality display mode for executing the abnormality notification, are sent to the peripheral control unit 1511. It extracts from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and sets them in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. In addition, in the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in the order of the priority registered in advance, and the abnormality notification is automatically changed to the remaining abnormality notification after the abnormality is resolved. It is designed to Thus, a plurality of abnormalities can be simultaneously monitored without losing information that one abnormality has occurred due to the occurrence of another abnormality after the occurrence of one abnormality and before the abnormality is resolved. can be done.

Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the commands analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process (step S1022) described above are classified into the status displays shown in FIG. In the case of various commands, for example, an error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command), by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 in a manner different from the normal production mode accompanying the production operation, for example, the game board side Effect display device 1600 (effect device), door frame side effect display device 460 (effect device), lamp (effect device) is used to visually warn the outside, or a speaker is used to audibly warn the outside ( error reporting means). By doing so, when a malicious player tries to input an error cancellation navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 in spite of being in the game state, Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to issue a warning to the outside, it is possible to prevent cheating on the main control board 1310, which may affect the progress of the game.

Next, following step S1024 described above, the effect control program performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the performance control program stores in the calendar information storage unit acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 and set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. calendar information and the time information stored in the time information storage section are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update processing, the hour, minute, and second, which are the time information stored in the time information storage unit, are updated, and based on the updated time information, the year, month, and month, which are the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit. date is updated.

Following step S1026, the effect control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer is designated among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. game board side light emission data SL- for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decoration boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. DAT is created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. In addition, the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 stores the door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to the plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3. Alternatively, it is created by extracting it from various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the transmission data storage area 1511cab for frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG.

Following step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the presentation control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and out of the screen data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation, the screen data indicated by the pointer. are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the tone generator built-in VDP 1512a. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, creates sprite data, and displays the effect display device on the game board side. 1600 and the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the effect display device 460 on the side of the door frame are generated in the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer points out of the sound instruction data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation. The sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is output to the tone generator built-in VDP 1512a. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b and controls the built-in sound source to generate the sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated in accordance with the track number specified in the data, and the output channel to be used is set in accordance with the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak shown in FIG. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob 1510a is converted into 1024 steps of values from 0 to 1023. In this embodiment, the values in 1024 steps are divided into 7 and managed as board volumes 0 to 6. Board volume 0 is set to mute and board volume 6 is set to maximum volume. Each is set so that the volume increases toward the volume 6. - 特許庁The sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled so that the sound volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and the audio data is transmitted as audio data serialized in the sound data output processing of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the IC 1512 c, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 .

In addition, the notification sound and notification sound are designed to flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob. The VDP 1512a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into 7 levels described above. For example, even if a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume to a low volume, the effect sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are small. However, when there is a problem with the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk from noticing the occurrence of a problem or the fraudulent act of the player due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to the music and sound effects, the screen displayed on the game board side production display device 1600 and the door frame side production display device 460 is produced more powerfully by increasing the volume of the sound, which is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility of shifting to a game state.

Following step S1032, the effect control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the effect control program stores the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up in a first backup area 1511db and a second backup area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is backed up every frame in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. Lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, reception command storage area 1511cac, RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and Effect information (1fr) stored in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is used as effect backup information (1fr). The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the second backup area 1511cc.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) are specified to be copied to Bank1 (1fr) in the first backup area 1511cb, and the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) are copied to the end address of Bank0 (1fr). The contents up to the stored content are copied in sequence from the top address of Bank1 (1fr) of the first backup area 1511cb in a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) increments, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa performs a peripheral control DMA controller. 1511ac specifies to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank2 (1fr) in the first backup area 1511cb, and copies the contents stored in the top address of Bank0 (1fr) to Bank0 (1fr ) up to the end address of Bank 2 (1fr) of the first backup area 1511cb in sequence from the start address of Bank 2 (1fr) of the first backup area 1511cb.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, ) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) are successively stored by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) at the start address of Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. , and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Then, the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) are continuously transferred to Bank4 ( 1fr) are copied in order from the first address.

In the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is backed up every frame in the backup target work area 1511da shown in FIG. Effect information (SRAM) stored in Bank0 (SRAM) is transferred to Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) of backup first area 1511db as effect backup information (SRAM) by peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac at high speed. , and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) of the second backup area 1511dc.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) are specified to be copied to Bank1 (SRAM) in the first backup area 1511db, and the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) are copied to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). The contents up to the stored content are copied in sequence from the head address of Bank 1 (SRAM) of the first backup area 1511db by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte). 1511ac is specified to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank2 (SRAM) in the first backup area 1511db, and the contents stored in the top address of Bank0 (SRAM) are copied to Bank0 (SRAM ) up to the end address of Bank2 (SRAM) of the first backup area 1511db are copied in sequence from the start address of Bank2 (SRAM) of the first backup area 1511db.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, ) to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) are continuously backed up by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) at the start address of Bank3 (SRAM) of the second area 1511dc. , and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Then, the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) are continuously transferred to Bank4 of the backup second area 1511dc by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte). SRAM) are copied in order from the first address.

Following step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.

Following step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 to the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG as execution completion of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, V blank signal detection flag VB -FLG is initialized by setting a value of 0, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until a value of 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later. That is, in step S1008, the system waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006. Thus, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing from step S1009 to step S1038 is called "peripheral control unit regular processing".

This peripheral control unit steady processing, effect control program, first step S1009 peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed and starts from setting the value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG, 1 ms in step S1010 , and step S1036, and finally, in step S1038, the normal processing flag SP-FLG is set to 0 as execution completion of the peripheral controller normal processing. is set to complete. The peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V blank signal is input from the built-in tone generator VDP 1512a to indicate that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted. A value of 1 is set in peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later. In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. The interval at which blank signals are input is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). In other words, the peripheral controller steady-state processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[16-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, as shown in FIG. 72, the V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 can be received is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. A description will be given of the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing which is executed with the . When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. 96 (step S1045). As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. Each of them is set to a value of 0 when the processing is completed.

If the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S1045, that is, if the peripheral controller steady-state processing is being executed, this routine ends. On the other hand, when the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 (step S1050), Exit this routine. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing. Each of them is set to a value of 0 when no part-stationary processing is executed.

In this embodiment, in step S1045, it is determined whether or not the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. In some cases, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 in step S1050. When the signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1, it is determined in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. Since the peripheral controller steady-state processing is forcibly canceled halfway and the execution of the peripheral controller steady-state processing is started from the beginning, in order to prevent this, in step S1009 in the peripheral controller power-on processing (peripheral controller steady-state processing) of FIG. By setting the value 1 to the processing in-progress flag SP-FLG, the effect that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed is transmitted to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, and the peripheral control unit power supply in FIG. By setting the value 0 to the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG in step S1038 in the processing at the time of turning on (peripheral control unit steady-state processing), the completion of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is indicated by the peripheral control unit V blank which is this routine. By notifying the signal interrupt processing, it is determined in step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, whether or not the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed. It is determined whether or not it is completed. In other words, this is a measure to be taken when the peripheral controller steady-state processing cannot be completed until the next V-blank signal is input after the V-blank signal is input.

As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady-state processing, if the processing cannot be completed within a time of about 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next time is determined in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. is in a standby state until the V blank signal is input. In other words, the time required to execute the current peripheral controller steady-state processing that failed is approximately 66.6 ms. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is normally executed every time a 1 ms interrupt timer occurs due to activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit regular processing) in FIG. is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process, but if there is the current peripheral control unit steady process that failed as described above, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed 64 times. is executed only 32 times. In other words, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, are not consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral controller steady-state processing fails, it is possible to reliably match the state of progress of the presentation.

[16-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral controller regular processing of the peripheral controller power-on processing of FIG. 95, will be described. . When this peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. is determined (step S1100). As described above, this 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by this routine after the 1ms interrupt timer is started by the 1ms interrupt timer start processing of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times that a certain peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. The interval at which blank signals are input is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed at intervals of about 33.3 ms, after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. is executed, the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the second, . will occur.

If the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33 in step S1100, that is, if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine ends. If the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the priority of the interrupt processing is given to the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to this 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, , the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is newly started due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt. ing.

On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (incremented, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed increases by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the schedule data for the electric drive sources set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 are arranged in time series. Of the drive data for electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids, according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. is driven, the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series, and the pointer is updated each time this motor and solenoid drive processing is executed.

Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is performed. Here, serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration driving amplifier board motor is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When the serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is started, first, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c are transmitted. To output a drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the production operation unit 400 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series. The door-side motor drive data STM-DAT is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the frame decoration drive of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. It is set in the amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores transmission data for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor. The first byte of the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored at the top address of the area 1511caf is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. transfer and write to the transmit buffer register of the serial I/O port for As a result, the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door-side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK. starts transmitting 1-byte data bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac receives a transmission interrupt request for the frame-decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port (in this embodiment, the frame-decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty because there is no more 1-byte data.), peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, the remaining door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is transferred 1 byte at a time to the external bus 1511h and the peripheral control bus controller. 1511ad and via the peripheral bus 1511ai to the transmission buffer register of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port for writing, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port receives this write data. transfer the data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, start transmitting the 1-byte data of the transmission shift register bit by bit in synchronization with the door-side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and frame decoration drive amplifier board Continuous transmission is performed by the motor serial I/O port.

In the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Here too, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is used to perform serial I/O port continuous transmission for the motor drive board. When the motor drive board serial I/O port continuous transmission is started, first, the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c are configured. A motor for moving various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. and the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting the drive signal to the solenoid is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and created. 73 is set in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores it in the top address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. The first byte of the received game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is sent to the transmission buffer of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to a register. As a result, the serial I/O port for the motor drive board transfers the data written in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK. Start sending byte data bit by bit.

Every time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I/O port for the motor drive board occurs, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the transmission buffer register for the serial I/O port for the motor drive board The 1-byte data written is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty because there is no more 1-byte data.), the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is using the bus. If not, the rest of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is transmitted 1 byte at a time via the external bus 1511h, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and peripheral bus 1511ai. , by transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board, the serial I/O port for the motor drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, In synchronization with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK, 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed through the serial I/O port for the motor drive board.

Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable object information acquisition process, history information (for example, original position history information) of detection signals from various detection switches is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input. , movable position history information, etc.) and sets it in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The original positions, movable positions, etc. of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired from the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah.

Following step S1106, effect operation unit information acquisition processing is performed (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, history information (for example, operation Operation history information of the button 410, etc.) is created and set in the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Whether or not the operation button 410 is operated can be acquired from history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai.

Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition process, the history information of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. It is set in the control MPU 1511a and the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak of the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c. As described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. When a determination is made, it is a signal that is output to notify that effect. , that is, a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. The door frame side effect display device acquires the frequency of failure and the failure occurrence state between the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display drive board 4450 from the history information of the LOCKN signal set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak. 460 drawing state can be obtained.

Following step S1110, backup processing is performed (step S1112), and this routine ends. In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up in the first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is executed every time a 1ms interrupt timer occurs in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. Each time, Bank 0 (1ms) which is a backup target includes a transmission data storage area 1511caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor, a storage area 1511cag for the motor drive board side transmission data, and a storage area 1511cah for acquiring movable body information. , and effect information (1 ms), which is the content stored in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai, is stored in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) of the first backup area 1511cb as effect backup information (1 ms). The control DMA controller 1511ac performs high-speed copying, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac performs high-speed copying to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511cc.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) are specified to be copied to Bank1 (1 ms) in the first backup area 1511cb, and the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1 ms) are copied to the end address of Bank0 (1 ms). The contents up to the stored content are copied in sequence from the top address of Bank1 (1 ms) of the first backup area 1511cb in a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) increments, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa executes the peripheral control DMA controller. 1511ac specifies to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank2 (1ms) in the first backup area 1511cb, and copies the contents stored in the top address of Bank0 (1ms) to Bank0 (1ms). ) up to the end address of Bank 2 (1 ms) of the first backup area 1511cb in sequence from the start address of Bank 2 (1 ms) of the first backup area 1511cb.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank3 (1ms) of the backup second area 1511cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, ) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) are continuously backed up by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) at the start address of Bank3 (1 ms) of the second area 1511cc. , and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank4 (1ms) of the backup second area 1511cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Then, the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) are successively transferred to Bank 4 ( 1ms) are copied in order from the first address.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effects of steps S1104 to S1108 described above are executed within a period of 1ms as the progress of the effects. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. are doing. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, Therefore, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt causes the peripheral control unit After forcibly canceling the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt processing and restarting the 1 ms interrupt timer again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed by newly generating the first 1 ms timer interrupt. 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started. In other words, consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, which is timer interrupt control, is maintained. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the state of progress of the production.

Also, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. The interval at which the V blank signal is output may vary slightly even in the manufacturing lot of the mounted peripheral control board 1510 . In this embodiment, the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute the part V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt, this It is possible to absorb the time lag due to slight changes in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[16-1-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 start to be transmitted as serial data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 1-byte (8-bit) information is loaded into the reception buffer by the substrate serial I/O port, and when this loading is completed, an interrupt is generated and the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing is performed. One packet of the main-circumference serial data consists of 3 bytes. The 1st byte is the status, the 2nd byte is the mode, and the 3rd byte is the status and mode. is assigned a sum value calculated from

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 98 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received.

When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, when it is within the period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received, the peripheral The 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I/O port for the main control board built in the control MPU 1511a is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (incremented, step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times the main circumference serial data is read out from the reception buffer. When it is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 2, and when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 3. An initial value of 0 is set to the reception counter SRXC when the power is turned on.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC is 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumferential serial data, has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status, which is the first byte of the main-circumference serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main-circumference serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, are sequentially sent from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

When the reception counter SRXC is not 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status which is the 1st byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode which is the 2nd byte of the main circumference serial data, and the 3rd byte of the main circumference serial data. is not taken out from the reception buffer in order, a 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine ends. A 1-byte reception period timer is set in step S1208, thereby setting a period during which the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, or the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, can be received.

On the other hand, when the value of the reception counter SRXC is 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status, which is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the 3 of the main circumference serial data. When the sum value of the byte is sequentially taken out from the reception buffer, the initial value 0 is set to the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). This calculation is performed by considering the status, which is the first byte of the main-circumference serial data, and the mode, which is the second-byte of the main-circumference serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, as numerical values, and summing them (sum value ) is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumferential serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1214). The sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main-circumference serial data among the main-circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from a pachinko island facility, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, they generate static electricity and generate noise, so the pachinko machine 1 is affected by the noise. in a sanding environment. Therefore, in this embodiment, on the side of the peripheral control unit 1511, the status assigned as the first byte of the received main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data are regarded as numerical values. The total (sum value) is calculated using the main control board 1310, and does this calculated sum value match the sum value assigned as the 3rd byte of the main peripheral serial data among the main peripheral serial data from the main control board 1310? is determining whether or not As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data between the main control substrate 1310 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 has changed to different main peripheral serial data due to the influence of noise. be able to.

In step S1214, when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212, the received main-circumference serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are stored in the received command storage area 1511cac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. (step S1216) and terminate this routine. This received command storage area 1511cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main circumferential serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main circumferential serial data are It is stored in the 1511cac peripheral controller receive ring buffer. This "peripheral controller reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the beginning of the buffer are connected. Remember. It should be noted that the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the status assigned as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the status assigned as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data when storing in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216. is stored in association with the mode assigned, and the sum value assigned as the third byte is discarded.

On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received is exceeded. Alternatively, in step S1214, if the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, this routine is executed as it is. finish.

[16-1-5. Peripheral control unit blackout warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, as shown in FIG. 75, a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310. Interrupt processing will be described. When this peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. signal) is input (step S1302). If the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in this judgment, the routine ends as it is.

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1320 has passed 2 microseconds. If two macroseconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the routine returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. If the signal has been input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have passed. In other words, in the determination of step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input for 2 microseconds after the start of the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine.

If the power failure warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is started in step S1304, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is extinguished, the excitation of the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5 is turned off, various LEDs are extinguished, and so on. By suppressing the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the peripheral control MPU 1511a can operate.

Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, a period of at least 17 milliseconds is set so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a can receive the commands being transmitted. It is supposed to wait. When a command is received, the above-described peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, and the received command storage area 1511cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. ) stores the received command.

Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In this command backup process, the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank2 (1fr) at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc at high speed.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copying of the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Copy the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the first backup area 1511cb as the request factor of the control DMA controller 1511ac Then, a predetermined number of bytes (for example, , 1 byte) in sequence from the top address of the received command storage area contained in Bank1 (1fr) of the first backup area 1511cb. copy the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the received command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and store in Bank0 (1fr) From the contents stored at the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored at the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr), each predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) is continuous. are copied in order from the first address of the received command storage area contained in Bank2 (1fr) of the first backup area 1511cb.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa stores the content stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and includes it in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. specified to be copied to the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr), and stored from the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr). 1511cc of the backup second area 1511cc. 1511aa transfers the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. Copy is specified, and the content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is copied to a predetermined address. Bytes (for example, 1 byte) are successively copied from the start address of the received command storage area contained in Bank 4 (1fr) of the second backup area 1511cc.

After step S1310, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input (step S1312). When the power failure warning signal is input in this determination, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clearing process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset. .

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal has not been input in step S1312, or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input. In other words, it is endlessly determined whether or not a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input. By endlessly continuing determination in this way, when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sends a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e. is not output, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1312, WDT clear processing is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 95 is started again.

As described above, when the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) continues in the infinite loop in the determination in step S1312, the WDT clearing process is executed in step S1314 to perform the peripheral control immediately before the power failure state. The MPU 1511a is designed not to be reset. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power failure warning signal is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop, the WDT clear processing is not executed. The output of the clear signal is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral controller power outage warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise is generated for a period of 2 microseconds or more, and the judgment in step S1302 is passed, step If it is determined in S1312 that the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not continued and canceled in the infinite loop, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset because the WDT clearing process of step S1314 is not executed. Therefore, such noise can be dealt with by automatically resetting.

[16-1-6. LOCKN signal history creation process]
Next, the LOCKN signal history creation process executed as one process of the drawing state information acquisition process of step S1110 in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 97 will be described. In this LOCKN signal history creating process, the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created. As described above, the LOCKN signal is the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. When it is determined that the data is abnormal, it is a signal that is output to notify that effect. This signal is output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the side effect receiver IC SDIC0 and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal history creation process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72, as shown in FIG. LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1500). This LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is stored in 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). The history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 is stored in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak as LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. remembered.

Following step S1500, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 (step S1502). In this determination, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door-frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door-frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 judges that the drawing data received from the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. , a transmission request for a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door-frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the drawing data received from the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC1512d is not abnormal (normal data). predetermined data for confirming (recovering) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the transmission of the pattern (SYNC pattern) is not requested.

When there is a LOCKN signal from the receiver for effect on the door frame side ICSDIC0 in step S1502, shift processing of LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1504). In this LOCKN signal detection history information shift process, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1500 is shifted to the highest bit B7←B6, B6←. B5, B5.rarw.B4, B4.rarw.B3, B3.rarw.B2, B2.rarw.B1, B1.rarw.least significant bit B0.

If the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1504, the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is set to 1 (step S1506), and this routine ends.

On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1508). In the shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information, the same processing as the shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information in step S1504 is performed. The signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is converted to the least significant bit B0 in such a manner that the most significant bit B7←B6, B6←B5, B5←B4, B4←B3, B3←B2, B2←B1, B1←least significant bit B0. , toward the most significant bit B7 by one bit.

If the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1508, the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is set to 0 (step S1510), and this routine ends.

In this manner, each time the LOCKN signal history creation process is executed, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted by one bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7, and then shifted to the least significant bit B0. Since a value of 1 or 0 is set, it is possible to create a history of the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0.

[16-1-7. Connection failure determination process]
Next, a description will be given of connection failure determination processing executed as one processing of the warning processing in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. In this connection failure determination process, based on the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not there is a problem between the connection between the effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

72, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1520). As described above, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. FIG. As described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. When it is determined, it is a signal output to notify that effect. and to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

Subsequent to step S1520, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 (step S1522). This determination is to determine whether or not the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value. This connection confirmation determination value is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. has a value of 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In step S1522, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value.

In step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read out in step S1520 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the peripheral control board 1510 is prepared. It is determined that there is no problem between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. and exit this routine.

On the other hand, in step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read out in step S1520 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective. Then, the communication check counter CC-CNT is incremented by 1 (step S1524). Each time this routine is executed, the communication check counter CC-CNT counts up the number of times it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver in step S1522. (to count the cumulative number of times). The communication check counter CC-CNT is set to 0 and reset when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. It is designed to restore the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT immediately before the moment or power failure.

Following step S1524, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the accumulated count upper limit value CC-LMT (step S1526). In this determination, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative count upper limit value CC-LMT, the cumulative number of times it is determined that there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative count. While it is determined that the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the accumulated count upper limit value CC-LMT, a problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the cumulative number of times determined to be in the state of having reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT.

In step S1526, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative count upper limit value CC-LMT, that is, the cumulative count determined as a state in which a failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative count. If the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, the communication error flag CC-FLG is set to 0 (step S1528), and this routine ends. On the other hand, in step S1526, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the accumulated count upper limit value CC-LMT, it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the calculated cumulative number reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT, the communication error flag CC-FLG is set to 1 (step S1530), and this routine ends. The communication error flag CC-FLG indicates that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not established when the accumulated number of times that it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver reaches the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT. is a flag that indicates whether or not a problem has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state of being in the accumulated state has not reached the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, the value is set to 0 respectively. The communication error flag CC-FLG is set to 0 and reset when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. In some cases, the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG immediately before a power failure occurs is restored.

[16-1-8. Connection recovery process]
Next, the connection recovery process executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95 will be described. This connection recovery process is executed following the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. and to confirm (restore) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. We will notify you to that effect.

When the connection recovery process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72, as shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020, it is determined whether or not the schedule data for screen generation among the various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 is being activated (step S1540). In this determination, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation, the order of screen data from the first screen data to be output to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is indicated. Then, it is determined whether the pointer has been updated. In other words, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is being updated, the presentation progresses according to the screen generation schedule data. When performance is completed along with the data and updating of the pointer is all completed, it is determined that the schedule data for screen generation has not started. In addition, in this determination, the period during which the startup screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or the time period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 is in a customer waiting state and a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. It can be judged based on the schedule data for screen generation whether or not it is a period of time, and the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. When the game board side effect display device 1600 is in a customer waiting state and a demonstration is being performed by the game board side effect display device 1600, the process proceeds to step S1542 to be described later, while the startup screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side. During the period displayed on the effect display device 1600, or when the game board side effect display device 1600 is not in the customer waiting state and the demonstration is performed by the game board side effect display device 1600 (simple state of waiting for customers), This routine is terminated as it is.

In step S1540, when the effect is progressing according to the schedule data for screen generation, that is, when the schedule data for screen generation is being activated, this routine ends as it is. When the presentation is completed and the pointer is completely updated, that is, when the schedule data for screen generation is not activated, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0 (step S1542). 101. As described above, the communication check counter CC-CNT is set in step S1522 of the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. Count up the number of times it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. (count the cumulative number of times). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the number of times it is determined that there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is even one.

If the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0 in step S1542, that is, if it has not been determined that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, then this process is performed as it is. While terminating the routine, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 in step S1542, that is, if it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, even once. If there is, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is 0 (step S1544). As described above, this communication error flag CC-FLG is set when the accumulated number of times that it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver reaches the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT. A flag that indicates whether or not a problem has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. is set to 0 when the accumulated number of times that it is determined that there is a problem in the connection of , does not reach the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT.

When the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is 0 in step S1544, that is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. If not, SYNC pattern output processing is performed (step S1546), and this routine ends. In this SYNC pattern output process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side effect provided on the peripheral control board 1510, thereby The transmitter IC 1512 d outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 . This predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and is output to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0. It restores the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

On the other hand, when the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is not 0 (it is 1) in step S1544, that is, when there is definitely a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, communication error display processing is executed. (step S1548) and terminate this routine. In this communication error display process, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. process to draw to the . For example, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a message is displayed that reads, "There is a problem with the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk." Further, in the communication error display process, the period during which the startup screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the game board side effect display device 1600 in the customer waiting state are displayed. During the period, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted from the peripheral control MPU 1511a as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side effect display device 460, and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 is LOCKN. As a response signal to the transmission of the signal output request data, a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. It is determined that a problem has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460, and a notification image to that effect (for example, "A problem has occurred in the upper tray side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk.") is displayed in the game. In addition to performing processing to display in the display area of the board-side effect display device 1600, a notification sound (for example, "There is a problem with the upper tray-side liquid crystal display device.") is repeated from a speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. Do the flow process. At this time, it is also possible to perform a process of lighting all the LEDs for lighting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decoration substrates provided on the game board 5 .

Next, the timing at which the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 74 will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

First, a brief description will be given of the decorative symbols variably displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. The variable display of the decorative pattern is executed by the unit steady processing etc., and the main control side of the main control side power on time processing shown in FIG. The first special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball to the first start port 2002 shown in FIG. When the result of the second special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball into the start opening 2004 is "big hit", the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening and closing operation of the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 is 1 round to 15 rounds. Up to 15 rounds in total, and in each round, within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), when game balls enter the big winning opening 2005 and the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls), The round is completed, and every time one game ball enters the big winning hole 2005, a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of game balls are paid out.

The first special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the first start port 2002, or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the second start port 2004, from the main control board 1310 Based on the command, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, so that left side decorative symbols are displayed on the left side of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and central decorative symbols are displayed in the center. Then, on the right side, the variable display of the right decorative pattern is started, and after a predetermined time has passed, the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is stopped, and the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery. can be recognized by the player, and at this time, the first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol indicator 1403 or the second special symbol indicator 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The first special lottery result or the second special lottery result can be confirmed even in the design or the second special design. When the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design are variably displayed, the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design become translucent to the extent that the background image can be visually recognized, and the left decorative design is displayed. The reels rotate from the upper left side to the lower left side of the area, the center decorative pattern from the upper center to the lower center of the display area, and the right decorative pattern from the upper right to the lower right of the display area. When the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design are stop-displayed, the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right-hand decorative design correspond to the stop-displayed left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design. The left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design are opaque so that the background image at the position is difficult to see. In this way, the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is stopped and started to be displayed in the first special symbol display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 66, The left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern, which are displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and stopped, are synchronized.

Peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, the first special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball to the first start port 2002, or the second lottery drawn by the acceptance of the game ball to the second start port 2004 Upon receipt of a command from the main control board 1310 to convey the result of the special lottery, the game board shown in FIG. When the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (timing K0), the peripheral control unit steady state of the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the process, the first screen among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Since the pointer is updated to indicate which screen data is to be output to the built-in tone generator VDP 1512a from the data, that is, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is updated, the data is displayed according to the schedule data for screen generation. Since the effect is in progress, the schedule data for screen generation is being activated, and while the schedule data for screen generation is being activated, that is, the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started. 102 is executed in the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. , the determination in step S1540 in the connection recovery process is such that the routine is forcibly terminated.

As a result, the communication check counters CC-CNT are counted during the period from the start of the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 until the display is stopped. Even when the value is not 0, that is, between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, between the transmitter and the (connection between the transmitter and the receiver) is determined to be in a state of failure even once, the SYNC pattern output processing in step S1546 in the connection recovery processing is not performed, and the transmitter and the receiver are connected. and communication error display processing in step S1548 in the connection recovery processing is not performed. There is a problem with the side liquid crystal display device. Please call the store clerk." In addition to invalidating the LOCKN signal from the door-frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door-frame-side effect display device 460 displays an image based on the drawing data received by the door-frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC1512d. display.

When the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (timing K1), the peripheral control section shown in FIG. 95 is turned on. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the hour process, the effect is completed in accordance with the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Since all the updates have been completed, that is, while the schedule data for screen generation has not been activated in the scheduler update process, and the schedule data for screen generation has not been activated, the power supply to the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. In the judgment of step S1540 in the connection recovery process shown in FIG. When the value of CNT is 0, that is, when it has not been determined that there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the routine ends as it is, while the communication check counter When the value of CC-CNT is not 0, that is, when it is determined that there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver even once, the process proceeds to step S1544 in the same process. When the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is 0, that is, the accumulated number of times that it is determined that there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the accumulated number of times upper limit value CC-LMT is reached. If not, the process proceeds to step S1546 in the same process, performs the above-described SYNC pattern output process, and terminates the routine. That is, when there is definitely a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the process proceeds to step S1548 in the same process, the above-described communication error display process is performed, and the routine ends. In other words, while the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC 1512d are displayed. If there is even one failure in the connection with ICSDIC0, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and the failure occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number determined to be present does not reach the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output processing is always performed, so that the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, In other words, while processing is performed to restore the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the accumulated number of times that it is determined that there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver reaches the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT. (that is, there is definitely a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver), by always performing the communication error display process, for example, " A problem has occurred in the liquid crystal display on the upper tray side. Please call the store clerk." The LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, which conveys that the data is valid, is validated.

In the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern is started and stopped, and again the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern is performed. In the interval period until is started, the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, so as described above, The LOCKN signal from the door-frame-side performance receiver IC SDIC0, which informs that the drawing data received from the door-frame-side performance transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data, is validated, and the door-frame-side performance transmitter IC 1512d and the door-frame-side performance receiver IC DIC0 are validated. If there is even one failure in the connection with the receiver ICSDIC0, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the failure occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the cumulative number of times determined to be is not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output processing is always performed, so that the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 In other words, while processing is performed to restore the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in a state of failure reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. When it reaches (that is, there is definitely a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver), the communication error display process is always performed, so that, for example, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 A message "A problem has occurred in the liquid crystal display device on the upper tray side. Please call a clerk."

When the variable display of the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design is started again (timing K2), as described above, the schedule data for screen generation is being activated, so the left decorative design and the central decorative design are displayed. , and until the right decorative pattern is stopped and displayed (timing K3), even when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, the door frame side presentation provided on the peripheral control board 1510 The number of times it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver) is 1. Even if there are times, the SYNC pattern output process of step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and the process of recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not performed. Communication error display processing in step S1548 is not performed, and, for example, the message "There is a problem with the liquid crystal display on the upper plate side. Please call a clerk." Therefore, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, which informs that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data, is invalidated, and the door frame side effect display device. 460 displays an image based on the drawing data received from the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d.

In this way, the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and then stopped, and then the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are displayed again. In the interval period until the start of the variable display of the pattern, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, which informs that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data, is validated. On the other hand, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter is operated until the variable display of the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern is started and stopped. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side rendering receiver IC SDIC0, which informs that the drawing data received from the IC 1512d is abnormal data, is invalidated. This is because the result of the stop display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is the most interesting information for the player. Since the player can determine whether or not a jackpot game state in which a Then, until the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, the effect image drawn in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is disturbed due to the influence of noise, etc. and is not correct. Even if it becomes impossible to draw, instead of interrupting the effect on the way and recovering to the state where it can be drawn correctly, the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the By stop-displaying the right decorative pattern, the drawing of the information that the player is most interested in is completed.

In this respect, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the startup screen on the game board side effect display device 1600 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the customer waiting state. This is very different from the case where the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted to the differential circuit 1512e provided on the peripheral control board 1510 during the period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 is performing a demonstration. This LOCKN signal output request data is used for the period during which the startup screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, or for the period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 is in a waiting state for a customer to perform a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600. During the period of execution, it is transmitted from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and is transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. This is sent as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differentiation circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510, as described above, the differential Two signals that have been differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the conversion circuit 1512e are input to the forced switching circuit 1512f provided in the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. The forced switching circuit 1512f performs circuit connection so as to transmit the two signals when two signals that are differentially differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input. Two signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 . When the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 of the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V provided in the effect display drive board 4450 determines that the received two signals are the LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal output request data is As described above, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d has a different data format. Output to the control MPU 1511a. As a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input, and tells the effect display drive board 4450. While it can be determined that no trouble has occurred, when the LOCKN signal is not input, a trouble has occurred in the effect display drive board 4450 assuming that a trouble has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. A notification image (for example, "There is a problem with the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk.") is displayed on the game board side effect display device by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. 1600, and by controlling the sound source built-in VDP 1512a and outputting a notification sound to that effect (for example, "There is a problem with the liquid crystal display on the upper tray side") to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. A notification sound is emitted from a speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3 . As a result, the notification can be made by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly played from the speaker provided on the door frame 3 or the like. At this time, all the various LEDs mounted on various decoration substrates provided on the door frame 3 and various decoration substrates provided on the game board 5 may be turned on.

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data, the forced switching circuit 1512f can receive the LOCKN signal output request data at the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The circuit is connected so that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which has received the LOCKN signal output request data, outputs the LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 to the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a response signal. Therefore, when the LOCKN signal is input, it can be determined that there is no failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and that there is no failure in the door frame side effect display device 460. When the signal is not input, it can be determined that the door frame side effect display device 460 is malfunctioning because the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is malfunctioning. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that the door frame side effect display device 460 is malfunctioning, the communication error display processing of step S1548 in the connection recovery processing of FIG. 102 can be executed as notification processing. It has become. In other words, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a discovers a defect in the door frame side effect display device 460, it can notify the store clerk or the like of the fact by executing the notification process. A hall clerk or the like can very easily check whether or not the door frame side performance display device 460 has a problem before the player plays the game, and the check can be done without much trouble. ing. Therefore, the malfunction of the door frame side effect display device 460 can be found without much effort.

In addition, as described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. When it is determined that there is, it is a signal that is output to notify that effect. Since it is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the ICSDIC0 and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, it is used for door frame side effects. When the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d cannot be received normally, the receiver IC SDIC0 receives the image due to a communication failure between the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. A LOCKN signal can be output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 in order to notify that the drawn data is abnormal. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, to which the LOCKN signal is input, generates a connection confirmation signal indicating the start of transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0. By outputting to the frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d, it is possible to eliminate communication problems during image communication. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can detect a failure of the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication failure during image communication at an early stage, and can work on the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to eliminate the problem. It's like Therefore, by finding and eliminating the problem of the door frame side effect display device 460, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.

Further, the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 which receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and outputs it to the door frame side effect display device 460 receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. When normal reception is not possible, the effect control microprocessor outputs a LOCKN signal, which is a communication problem occurrence signal, to indicate that a communication problem has occurred between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. Since it is possible to output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of a certain peripheral control unit 1511, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input controls the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, causing a communication problem. This generated image is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. can be displayed and notified. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a quickly discovers a malfunction of the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication malfunction during image communication, and notifies the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 to that effect. Since the player can inform the hall clerk or the like or directly inform the hall clerk or the like who happens to pass in front of the pachinko machine 1, the hall clerk or the like can be notified when the trouble occurs. You can start working on resolving the problem at an early stage. Therefore, by early detection and elimination of the malfunction of the door frame side effect display device 460, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.

Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 controls the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect provided in the effect display drive board 4450 during the period from the timing K1 to the timing K2 (interval period). If there is even one failure in the connection between the side effects receiver ICSDIC0, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and the failure occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for activating the LOCKN signal and eliminating communication failures during image communication when the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state of being in the state of being in the state of being in the state of accumulation does not reach the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT. is transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d until the cumulative number of times reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. , can be output repeatedly. Thereby, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 fluctuates the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 Since the connection confirmation signal can be repeatedly output only during the period in which the game is not progressed by starting and displaying the stop display, the communication failure can be resolved.

Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 controls the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect provided in the effect display drive board 4450 during the period from the timing K1 to the timing K2 (interval period). If there is even one failure in the connection between the presentation receiver ICSDIC0, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the failure occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state of being in the state of being in the state of being in the accumulated state does not reach the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is generated to validate the LOCKN signal and eliminate the communication failure during image communication. The door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d sends a connection confirmation signal to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to inform the start of transmission to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0. While continuing to output repeatedly, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts fluctuating the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 and plays the game. , the output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped, and when the connection confirmation signal output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a is stopped and the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side effect stops outputting the connection confirmation signal. (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, and the image generated by the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 can be output to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. It's like Thereby, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 fluctuates the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 By continuing to output a connection confirmation signal, which is a signal for resolving a problem, only during the period in which the game is not progressing by starting and displaying a stop display, the communication problem can be resolved. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 and stops displaying. Only during the period in which the progress of the game is not executed, when the connection confirmation signal is repeatedly output, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 displays the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. Even if the first special symbol or second special symbol game is started to fluctuate and the progress of the game is started again, the distortion of the effect progressing on the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460 (disturbance of the image) Each time the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 restarts and ends the progress of the game (every time (interval period) between timing K1 and timing K2), it can be made to go in the direction of elimination.

According to the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 comprises the main control board 1310 of FIG. 69 and the payout control board 951 of FIG. The main control board 1310 includes a first start port 2002 and a second start port 2002, which are starting regions in which game balls fired by the ball shooting device 650 toward the game region 5a defined on the game board 5 are provided in the game region 5a. A main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 69, which is a game control microprocessor for controlling the progress of the game based on the fact that the ball has entered the mouth 2004, is installed. The payout control board 951 is a payout control microprocessor that controls the payout of game balls by the payout device 830 based on the prize ball commands shown in FIGS. 70 payout control MPU 952a is mounted.

The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, has at least a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in RAM can store game information even after the power is cut off.

The payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control built-in RAM can store information on payout even after the power is turned off.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment further comprises an operation switch 954 shown in FIG. When the operation switch 954 is operated within the period from when the power is turned on to when the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 92 is performed, the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM is erased. The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, is output as a RAM clear signal in FIG. A RAM clear function that outputs the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, as a RAM clear signal for erasing the stored information related to payout, and a main control side power supply of FIG. When the operation is performed after the period during which the determination process of step S16 in the process at the time of power-on is performed (or the period during which the process at the time of power-on of the payout control unit is performed after the power is turned on) has passed, the error that occurred regarding the payout device 830 is canceled. 82 as an error release signal for the error release signal to output to the payout control MPU952a payout control microprocessor without outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. .

In this way, when the operation switch 954 is operated within a period during which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. The RAM clear signal of FIG. 77 for erasing the information about is output to the main control MPU 1310a which is the game control microprocessor, and when the operation is performed within the period during which the payout control unit power-on process is performed from the time of power-on, A RAM clear function that outputs the RWMCLR signal of FIG. When the operation is performed after the period during which the determination process of step S16 is performed in the main control side power-on process (or the period during which the payout control unit power-on process is performed after the power is turned on), the payout device 830 An error release function to output to the payout control MPU 952a which is the payout control microprocessor without outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. Since it has both functions, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 with two different functions, a RAM clear function and an error canceling function, respectively, by operating one operation switch 954 . Therefore, the RAM clear function and the error cancellation function can be provided while contributing to cost reduction.

[Sensor signal input section of panel relay board 4161]
The sensor signal input part of the panel relay board 4161 is connected to various detection sensors arranged on the game board, for example, the general winning opening sensor 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, and the vibration detection sensor. , a circuit to which detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the like are input. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each detection sensor is input is the same, here, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is taken as an example of the detection sensor, and the circuit to which the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is described. do.

Attempts to gain unfair profits by manipulating the falling state of game balls at will by bringing magnets (e.g., permanent magnets or electromagnets) closer to game balls hit into the game area in a game machine. There is no end to illegal gaming behavior.

In order to detect such fraudulent gaming behavior and suppress fraudulent behavior by means of light-emitting means, sound alarms, etc., magnetism detection sensors 4024 capable of detecting magnetism are provided corresponding to predetermined positions in the gaming area. there is

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the control of the game progress and effects will be summarized below.

As described above, the main control board 1310 executes various processes for controlling the pachinko machine 1 as a whole, and outputs various control signals (control commands) according to the results of the processes. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the control signal (control command) output by the main control board 1310, the display mode of the effect display device 1600 (design, various background images, characters, display images such as characters), It controls the display mode and operation mode of various members (the performance operation unit 400, movable members, etc.) that contribute to the performance.

In particular, the main control board 1310 performs a special symbol process every time an interrupt process is performed. In this special control process, first, the first and second start opening winning process is performed. In this first and second starting opening winning process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the starting opening, and when it is determined that the winning has been made, the processing of increasing the number of reservations on the corresponding special symbol side by 1, etc. done.

If the processing flag is 0 when finishing the first and second starting opening winning processing, the fluctuation start processing is executed. In this fluctuation start process, on the condition that the number of reservations is 1 or more, the jackpot determination in the pending state is digested and executed, and after memorizing the result of this jackpot determination (hitting or losing, its type, etc.) , update the processing flag to "1".

On the other hand, if the processing flag is 1 when finishing the first and second starting opening winning processing, the variation pattern setting processing is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern of the special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device based on the stored result of the big hit determination and the current game state ( After determining and setting the fluctuation time from the start of the variable display of the special pattern until the stop display, etc., and the stop pattern (jackpot pattern, losing pattern, etc.), the processing flag is updated to "2".

On the other hand, if the processing flag is 2 when the first and second starting opening winning processing is finished, the processing during fluctuation is executed. In this process during fluctuation, the fluctuation time determined and set in the fluctuation pattern setting process is monitored by a timer, and based on the time-out, the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device to stop After that, when the result of the big win determination stored in the variation start process is a big win, the process selection flag is updated to "3", and when the result of the big win determination stored in the change start process is not a big win (loss). , the process selection flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the fluctuation start process is restarted.

On the other hand, if the processing flag is 3 when the first and second starting opening winning processing is finished, the jackpot game processing is executed. In this jackpot game process, a condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, is operated to set the mode of the jackpot game (for example, the number of rounds) determined based on the type of jackpot won, Based on this, the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing member 2106 is controlled. In addition, when the jackpot game ends, processing is performed to stop the operation of the condition device, and when the type of the jackpot won is a special type, it is controlled to be in an advantageous state such as a time-saving state or a variable probability state. After updating the game state flag as shown, the processing flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the process is restarted from the fluctuation start process.

As the variation pattern, a plurality of types of variation patterns are stored. The variation pattern determines the time from the start to the end of the symbol variation of the special symbol, and the effect that appears in the effect display device 1600 by transmitting the information to the peripheral control board 1510. It can determine the type of pattern. In this embodiment, the plurality of types of variation patterns can be classified into a variation pattern for big hit variation, a variation pattern for loss reach variation, and a variation pattern for loss variation. The big win variation is a change that is performed when the result of the big win determination is a big win, and in the performance display device 1600, after the ready-to-win performance, the variable display of the decorative pattern is finally developed so that the big win pattern is fixed and stopped. The effect to be performed is executed. The loss reach variation is a variation that is performed when the result of the big hit determination is a loss and it is determined that the reach is performed by the reach determination based on the reach random number. An effect is executed in which the variable display of the symbols is finally developed so that the symbols are fixed and stop-displayed. The loss variation is a variation that is performed when the result of the big hit determination is a loss and it is not determined that the reach is performed in the reach determination based on the reach random number, and the effect display device 1600 does not go through the reach effect. , an effect is executed in which the variable display of the decorative symbols is finally expanded so that the missing symbols are fixed and stopped. Further, the variation pattern is defined so as to be able to specify which variation pattern is the first special symbol side or the second special symbol side.

That is, the peripheral control board 1510 acquires the game information such as the result of the big hit determination from the main control board 1310 and refers to it, thereby making it possible to appear such a variation pattern of decorative symbols. In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to causing the effect display device 1600 to appear a variation pattern of decorative symbols based on the acquired game information, the effect display (background and reserved image) related to the degree of expectation is changed, and the effect It executes control to change the mode (display and movement) in the operation unit 400 and to operate movable members such as the behind-the-bottom movable production unit 3100 and the like.

Next, game control of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric accessary product control process (FIG. 94: step S114).

Now, assuming that the main control program is shifted to the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (FIG. 94: step S114), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. On the condition that the detection signal by the first starting hole sensor 4002 is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first starting hole 2002) (YES in step S5231), the random number for judging the first big hit is acquired from the random number counter. The first start opening passage processing such as storing this in the first special symbol reservation storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S5232). Also, on the condition that the detection signal by the second starting port sensor 4004 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second starting port 2004) (YES in step S5233), the second special random number of the second special symbol ( Second big hit determination random number) is acquired from the random number counter and stored in the second special symbol holding storage area of the main control built-in RAM (step S5234).

Next, it is determined whether or not a big-hit execution flag indicating that the big-hit game state is being controlled is set (step S5235), and if the big-hit execution flag is set, the big-hit game state is controlled. Big hit control processing (step S5240a) is executed.

In addition, in the jackpot control process according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
・When the result of the judgment processing for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting either "8R probability variable jackpot A" or "8R normal jackpot", the big prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the big winning opening 2005, the opening and closing pattern (round game) is repeated eight times. Control to 8R jackpot game state,
・When the result of the judgment processing for the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped becomes a mode that suggests "16R probability variable jackpot", the big prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) After that, or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have won in the big winning opening 2005, the opening and closing pattern (round game) to be closed is repeated 16 times to control to a 16R big win game state,
・When the result of the judgment process for the display mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the second special symbol is a mode that suggests "8R probability variable jackpot B", the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds ) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that 9 game balls have entered the big winning opening 2005, the opening/closing pattern (round game) to be closed is repeated 8 times to control to the 8R jackpot game state,
・When the result of the judgment processing for the display mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the second special symbol is a mode suggesting "2R normal jackpot", the big prize opening 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds). A 2R jackpot game state in which an opening/closing pattern (round game) to be closed after playing is repeated twice is controlled.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the situation where the time-saving control is executed, right-handed hitting is more advantageous for the player than left-handed, and in situations where the time-saving control is not executed, it is more advantageous than right-handed hitting. As described above, hitting left-handed is advantageous for the player. In this regard, in the left-handed state, even if a jackpot is won as a result of the lottery for the first special symbol corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball into the first start port 2002, the jackpot game is open for a long time of 8 rounds at maximum. Only the state (approximately 1000 game balls can be acquired) occurs.

On the other hand, in the right-handed state, if the jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball into the second start port 2004, the probability is about 50% (the allocation rate of the winning species ), 16 rounds of long open jackpot game state (approximately 2000 game balls can be obtained) are executed, and the expected value of the prize balls that can be obtained when winning the jackpot Therefore, when the ball is shifted to the right-handed state, it can be expected to obtain a larger amount of prize balls than in the left-handed state.

In the big hit control process, when starting the opening control of such a big winning hole 2005, first, the process of starting the operation of the condition device, the process of resetting the fluctuation number counter described later, and the like are performed.

In addition, in the jackpot control process, after such opening control of the jackpot 2005 is performed, as shown in FIG. Execute each set processing of the flag and the time saving flag.

The high-probability flag is a flag indicating a high-probability state, and is used in the big-hit determination process shown in FIG. 109 to be described later. It is set when the big hit game state based on the probability variable big hit, 8R probability variable big hit B) is ended, and when the next big hit occurs, the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 114 to be described later or the second special symbol stop processing (not shown) is reset by

The time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time saving control is being executed (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state), and as shown in FIG. 110, time saving control (high probability time saving state) after the jackpot game state It is set when ending the big hit game state based on the big hit (8R probability variable big hit A, 16R probability variable big hit, 8R probability variable big hit B), and when the next big hit occurs, the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 114 to be described later. Or it is reset by the second special symbol stop processing (not shown). Alternatively, when the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is digested 100 times without winning the jackpot after the occurrence of the low-probability time-saving state, the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 114 to be described later. Or it is reset by the second special symbol stop processing (not shown).

The variation number counter is a counter that indicates the number of variations of the special symbols after the variation number counter is reset, and is used in the first variation pattern setting process (second variation pattern setting process) shown in FIG. 112 to be described later. It is updated (for example, counted up) when the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are changed, and at least a specific type of jackpot (16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot B) It is reset when starting a big hit game state based on.

Also, if the big hit executing flag is not set (NO in step S5235), then as the process of step S5236, whether or not the small hitting executing flag indicating that the small hitting game state is controlled is set. determine whether And as a result, if the small hit execution flag is set, small hit control processing (step S5240b) for controlling the small hit game state is executed. In addition, in the small hit control process, the process of opening the big winning opening 2005 only for a specific opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds) is performed.

Here, in the small hit control process (step S5240b), unlike the case of the big hit control process (step S5240a), after the opening control of such a big winning opening 2005 is performed, a high probability flag, a time saving flag, a time saving Each set processing such as the number counter is not performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110(a), a small win is never won in the big win determination.

Also, if the small hit running flag is not set (NO in step S5236), the value of the second special reservation number counter indicating the number of the second big hit determination random numbers stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area On the condition that it is "0" (step S5237), the first special symbol process including the lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S5238).

On the other hand, if the value of the second special reservation number counter indicating the number of the second big hit determination random numbers stored in the second special design reservation storage area is not "0" (step S5237), the second special design 2nd special design process processing including the lottery processing concerning the display mode at the time of fluctuation display stop is executed (step S5239). As a result, as long as the game is played so as not to lose the lottery for the second special symbol in the pending state (unless the value of the second special pending number counter is "0"), the first special symbol Only the lottery for the random number for judging the second big hit is performed continuously without interruption (priority execution), regardless of the pending status of the lottery.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the time-saving state (high-probability time-saving state), the player simply maintains hitting the game ball to the right side of the center accessory 2500 (right hitting). Only the lottery (judgment processing) for the two big hit judging random numbers can be performed continuously without interruption.

In addition, the special game (symbol variation) using the second special symbol (second special symbol) is limited to those that are executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol (first special symbol) Instead, for example, the execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and the start winning prize occurs. In this case, a table is provided for storing data capable of specifying the order in which the starting prizes are generated, and execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It should be possible to determine whether

FIG. 105 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the above-described first starting opening passage processing (step S5232).

Now, in the process of step S5231, if it is determined that the first starting hole sensor 4002 is in the ON state and a game ball has entered the first starting hole 2002, as shown in FIG. 2, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as the processing of step S5241, first, each random number on the first special symbol side (random number for judging the big hit, random number for judging the reach, random number for the big winning design, random number for the fluctuation display pattern ) from the random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the first special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the number of reservations of the first special symbol is the maximum value. It is determined whether or not the (upper limit) is "4" (step S5242). In the process of step S5242, when it is determined that the number of reservations of the first special symbol is not the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol (determination process for the first special symbol) is newly suspended. , the following steps S5243 to S5245 are performed.

That is, first, as the process of step S5243, the first special reservation number counter is counted up (1 is added). Then, as the process of step S5244, each random number obtained in step S5241, the first special design reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reservation number counter of the storage area of the main control built-in RAM store in

And then, the first special figure prefetching process for executing the first special figure side prefetching effect is executed, and the process is terminated (step S5245). As will be described later, the look-ahead effect on the side of the first special symbol is a effect that suggests in advance the determination result (or its degree of expectation) of the first special symbol before starting the variable display of the first special symbol. In this first special figure look-ahead processing, the peripheral control board 1510 side is required to determine whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect and the content of the look-ahead effect (information related to win-loss for look-ahead determination, information related to symbol type for look-ahead determination information, information on the variation pattern number for pre-reading determination, etc.) is generated and stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510 . At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the first special symbol, the command may include information about the stop symbol of the special symbol as information suggesting the type of the big win game. For example, the information of the stage before being finally determined, such as the SP reach group, the normal reach group, the latent hit group, and the small hit group among the symbol types, may be transmitted as the look-ahead command.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5242, when it is determined that the number of reserved first special symbols is the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S5243 to S5245, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly suspended.

FIG. 106 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second start opening passing process (step S5234).

Now, in the processing of step S5233, if it is determined that the second starting hole sensor 4004 is in the ON state and a game ball has entered the second starting hole 2004, as shown in FIG. 2, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as the process of step S5251, first, each random number on the second special symbol side (random number for second big hit determination, random number for second reach determination, second big hit symbol random number, random number for the second fluctuation display pattern) is obtained from the random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the second special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the number of reservations of the second special symbol is the maximum value. is "4" (step S5252). In the processing of this step S5252, when it is determined that the number of reservations of the second special symbol is not the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol (lottery for the second special symbol) is newly suspended. , the following steps S5253 to S5255 are performed.

That is, first, as the process of step S5253, the second special reservation number counter is counted up (1 is added). Then, as the process of step S5254, each random number obtained in step S5251, the second special design reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special reservation number counter of the storage area of the main control built-in RAM store in

And next, the second special figure prefetching process for executing the second special figure side prefetching effect is executed, and the process is terminated (step S5255). As will be described later, the look-ahead effect on the side of the second special symbol is an effect that preliminarily suggests the determination result (or its degree of expectation) of the second special symbol before starting the variable display of the second special symbol. In this second special figure look-ahead processing, the peripheral control board 1510 side generates information (win-lose information, symbol type, variation pattern number, etc.) required for determining whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect and the content of the effect, It is stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510 . At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the second special symbol, the command may include information about the stop symbol of the special symbol as information suggesting the type of the jackpot game. For example, the information of the stage before being finally determined, such as the SP reach group, the normal reach group, the latent hit group, and the small hit group among the symbol types, may be transmitted as the look-ahead command.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5252, when it is determined that the number of pending of the second special symbol is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S5253 to S5255, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended.

When the number of reserved first special symbols changes based on the game ball entering the first starting port 2002, a command for instructing the number of reserved first special symbols in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) (First hold number designation commands 0 to 4) are set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 . Further, when the number of reserved second special symbols changes based on the game ball entering the second starting port 2004, the number of reserved second special symbols is indicated in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). (second hold number designation commands 0 to 4) are set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 .

FIG. 107 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S5238). In addition, the first special symbol process process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric auditors control process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric auditors control process are the same. , and only the random numbers and tables used for determination are different, so only the first special symbol process processing executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing will be described here. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five processes is selectively executed according to the first special symbol process flag.

1. A random number for judging a big hit corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the main control built-in RAM is read out, and based on the random number for judging a big hit, a lottery process for a display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, etc. is performed first special symbol normal processing (step S5280)

2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281 )

3. Executed in correspondence with the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 1403 based on the random number for the variation display pattern and the special symbol on the performance display device (game board side performance display device) 1600 First variation pattern setting processing (step S5282) in which lottery processing etc. are performed for the variation mode of the effect display to be performed

4. 1st special design fluctuation processing (step S5283) which waits until the fluctuation display of the 1st special design in the 1st special design indicator 1403 is stopped

5. So that the mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped determined based on the result of the determination process for the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped is displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 First special symbol stop processing (step S5284) for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol

In addition, the initial value of the first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S5280) should be performed.

FIG. 108 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal process (step S5280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process of 2, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display of the first special symbol in the pending state based on the counter value of the first special pending number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display of the first special symbol in the pending state, then as the process of step S5302, it is stored in the first special symbol pending storage area of the main control built-in RAM. The earliest memory of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first jackpot determination random number, the first reach determination random number, the first jackpot symbol random number, and the first fluctuation display pattern random number) The random number stored in the area is read from the same main control built-in RAM. And then, as the processing of steps S5303 and S304, while counting down the first special reservation number counter, the first special stored in each storage area of the first special symbol reservation storage area of the main control built-in RAM First-in first-in random numbers related to the display mode when the fluctuation display of the pattern is stopped (for example, the first jackpot judgment random number, the first reach judgment random number, the first jackpot pattern random number, the first fluctuation display pattern random number) Shift operation is performed in the First-Out mode.

Specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol reservation storage area a to first special symbol reservation storage area d), and the start winning prize to the first start port 2002 Random numbers extracted according to occurrence are stored in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, when the random number is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area and a start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1-th (n=1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the conditions for starting the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage area are satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the variable display of the first special symbol occurs is stored so as to be identifiable, and the variable display is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). . Similarly, the second special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas (second special symbol reservation storage area a to second special symbol reservation storage area d), and according to the occurrence of the start winning prize to the second start port 2004 Random numbers extracted by the first (earliest) area are stored in order. Then, when the random number is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area and the start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1-th (n=1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the conditions for starting the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage area are satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the variable display of the second special symbol occurred is stored so as to be identifiable, and the variable display is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). .

After that, as the process of step S5305, a big hit determination process, which is a process of determining whether or not the big win is hit or lost, is performed based on the read-out first big hit determination random number. After that, when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S5306) so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281), this process is terminated.

FIG. 109 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process (step S5305).

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is, if the current gaming state is a high probability state (high probability time saving state, high probability non-time saving state) (step S5311), at the time of high probability shown in FIG. 110 (A) Select the jackpot determination table (step S5312), if the current game state is a low probability state (step S5311), select the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability shown in FIG. 110 (A) (step S5313), select The big hit determination table and the random number for big hit determination read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process are compared (step S5314).

As shown in FIG. 110 (A), the jackpot determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and when the game state is low probability for each type of special random number (random number for first jackpot determination, random number for second jackpot determination) (Low probability non-time-saving state, low probability time-saving state) Jackpot judgment table at low probability used in the case, and high probability to use when the game state is high probability (high probability non-time-saving state, high probability time-saving state) and a jackpot determination table at the time of probability. In the low-probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the first jackpot determination random numbers, 204 kinds of first jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 65332 The random numbers for judging the first big hit (65536 types) are respectively associated so that the random number for judging the first big hit of the type matches the loss judgment value indicating that it is a loss (the probability of a big hit at low probability; "1/321"). On the other hand, in order to compare with the second special symbol jackpot determination random number (second jackpot determination random number) in the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric auditors control process In the low-probability jackpot determination table to be referred to, 204 types of second jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination value indicating that the player won the jackpot, and 65,332 types of second jackpot determination random numbers are the losers. The random numbers for judging the second big hit are associated with each other so as to coincide with the judgment value indicating that the odds are the same (probability of a big hit at a low probability; roughly "1/321").

In addition, in the high-probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the first jackpot determination random numbers, 2040 types of first jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination values, and 63496 types of first jackpot determination random numbers match. The random numbers for judging the first big hits are associated with each other so that the random numbers match the judgment value for winning (big hit probability at high probability; approximately "1/32"). On the other hand, in the high-probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the second jackpot determination random number in the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric auditors control process , 2040 types of random numbers for judging the second big hit match the big hit judging value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and the random numbers for judging the second big hit of 63496 types match with the judgment value indicating that the above-mentioned loss. The random numbers for judging the second big hit are associated with each other (probability of big win at high probability; approximately "1/32"). It should be noted that the jackpot determination value set in the jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number and the jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the second jackpot determination random number (jackpot determination value The number may be the same and the jackpot judgment values may be different (the jackpot probability is the same), or the number of jackpot judgment values may be different (the jackpot probability is different)). In this case, at least one of the low-probability big-hit determination table and the high-probability big-hit determination table should have different jackpot determination values (both may be made different). .

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected jackpot determination table with the jackpot determination random number read out in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing, and when it is determined to be a jackpot (step S5315 ), a big hit flag indicating that the variation has been won as a big hit is set (step S5316), and the big hit determination process is terminated.

Further, in step S5315, when it is determined that the big hit has been lost, the read-out big-hit determination random number coincides with the small-hit determination value indicating that the small-hit has been won based on the selected big-hit determination table. It is determined whether or not (step S5317). However, as described above, in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing (second special symbol process processing) of this example, since the random number for big hit determination that matches the small hit determination value is not read out (small hit probability; 0/65536), and in this step S5317, it is determined that a small hit has not been won (determined as a loss).

On the other hand, if it is determined to be lost in step S5317, the reach determination table is compared with the reach determination random number read out in step S5302 (step S5319).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the game state is in a high probability non-time-saving state. A ready-to-reach determination table in a high-probability time-saving state used in case 1 and a ready-to-reach determination table in a low-probability state used in a case of a low-probability state of a game state (low-probability non-time-saving state) are provided.

Here, in the reach determination table at the time of the high probability time saving state, the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach determination random number reaches, and the reach determination value indicating that 71 types of reach determination random numbers do not reach The random numbers for reach determination are associated with each other so as to match with . However, in the reach determination table in the high-probability time-saving state, in order to maximize the progress speed of the game when in the time-saving state, all 72 types of reach determination random numbers match the reach determination value that indicates that the reach is not reached. By doing so, it may be prevented from matching with the reach determination value indicating reach.

In addition, in the reach determination table in the low probability state, five types of reach determination random numbers including the same reach determination random number as the reach determination random number set in the reach determination table in the high probability time saving state reach. The random numbers for reach determination are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination value shown and match the reach determination value indicating that the 67 types of random numbers for reach determination do not reach. Thus, in this embodiment, at the time of the low probability state, the reach determination value indicating reaching is increased from the time of the high probability time saving state, and is obtained with a predetermined probability.

Furthermore, in the reach determination table in the high-probability non-time-saving state, the same reach-judgment random number as the reach-judgment random number set in the reach-judgment table in the high-probability time-saving state and the low-probability state Five types of reach judgment including random numbers The random numbers for reach determination are associated so that the random numbers for reach match with the reach determination values indicating reach, and the random numbers for reach determination of 67 kinds match with the reach determination values indicating that the random numbers for reach do not reach. Thus, in this embodiment, in the high probability non-working time saving state, the reach determination value indicating reaching is made the same as the low probability non-working time saving state.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach determination random number read in step S5302 (step S5319), and when it is determined that the reach is lost (YES in step S5120) , a reach flag indicating that the change is a reach is set, and the process ends (step S5121).

FIG. 111 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 111, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the big hit determination process (step S5305) is determined. The result of the lottery process is determined by determining whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S5331).

If the big hit flag is set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a selects the symbol determination table shown in FIG. and the selected symbol determination table to determine the jackpot symbol as a mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped (step S5332).

As shown in FIG. 110 (B), in the symbol determination table on the first special symbol side, the random number for the first big hit symbol (here, total 200 Random numbers for the first jackpot pattern) are stored in a form associated with each other. In addition, as shown in FIG. 110 (C), the symbol determination table on the side of the second special symbol contains the second big hit symbol random number ( Here, a total of 200 second jackpot symbol random numbers) are stored in association with each other.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of the big hit by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired random number for the big win design. The symbol determination table of this example is set so that the kind of big win determined based on the random numbers for the first big-hit pattern and the kind of big-win determined based on the random numbers for the second big-hit pattern are different. . More specifically, the distribution rate (allocation) between the probability variable jackpot that triggers the transition to the high probability state and the normal jackpot that does not trigger the transition to the high probability state is the same, but for the first jackpot pattern The expected value of the game balls that can be acquired by the big win determined based on the second big win symbol random number is larger than the expected value of the game balls that can be acquired by the big win determined by the random number. ing.

The following is a concise summary of specific game and performance contents for each type of jackpot.
1. After the big winning symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, the big winning hole 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have won the big winning hole 2103. By repeating the opening and closing pattern (round game) eight times to be closed when detected, the game ball is controlled to an 8R big win game state in which it is possible (easy) to enter the big winning opening 2103, and after this 8R big win game state is controlled to a high-probability time-saving state until the next big-hit game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 8R big-hit game state, a battle production (battle victory production) is performed in which a specific character wins, and in the high-probability time-saving state 8R probability variable jackpot A controlled to the production mode shown in the production display device 1600 to be in a relatively advantageous state

2. After the big winning symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, the big winning hole 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have won the big winning hole 2103. By repeating the opening and closing pattern (round game) eight times to be closed when detected, the game ball is controlled to an 8R big win game state in which it is possible (easy) to enter the big winning opening 2103, and after this 8R big win game state is controlled to a low-probability time-saving state until the special symbol fluctuation display is digested 100 times (or a jackpot is won within the period until 100 times digested), and during the execution period of the 8R jackpot game state A battle performance (battle defeat performance) in which a specific character is defeated is performed, and in a low-probability time-saving state, the 8R normal jackpot is controlled to a performance mode in which a performance display device 1600 indicates a relatively disadvantageous state.

3. After the big winning symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, the big winning hole 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have won the big winning hole 2103. By repeating 16 times the opening and closing pattern (round game) that is closed when detected in , the game ball is controlled to a 16R big win game state in which it is possible (easy) to enter the big winning opening 2103, and after this 16R big win game state is controlled to a high probability time saving state until the next big hit game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 16R jackpot game state, the production of whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (16 rounds) ) is performed, and after a predetermined period of time from being controlled to the high-probability time-saving state has passed, the effect display device 1600 indicates that it is in a relatively advantageous state. 16R variable jackpot

4. After the big winning symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, the big winning hole 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have won the big winning hole 2103. By repeating the opening and closing pattern (round game) eight times to be closed when detected, the game ball is controlled to an 8R big win game state in which it is possible (easy) to enter the big winning opening 2103, and after this 8R big win game state is controlled to a high-probability time-saving state until the next big hit game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 8R jackpot game state, the production of whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (16 rounds) ) is performed, and after a predetermined period of time from being controlled to the high-probability time-saving state has passed, the effect display device 1600 indicates that it is in a relatively advantageous state. 8R probability variable jackpot B

5. After the big winning symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, the big winning opening 2103 is opened for a short period of time (for example, 0.6 seconds), or the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have won the big winning opening 2103. By repeating the opening and closing pattern (round game) that is closed when detected in 2 times, the game ball is controlled to the 2R big win game state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the big winning hole 2103, and after this 2R big win game state, special A low-probability time-saving state is controlled until the fluctuation display of patterns is completed 100 times (or a jackpot is won within the period until 100 times are completed), and a specific character is selected during the execution period of the 2R jackpot game state. performs a battle performance (battle defeat performance) in which is defeated, and in a low-probability time-saving state, the 2R normal jackpot is controlled to a performance mode in which the performance display device 1600 indicates that it is in a relatively disadvantageous state.

In the left-handed state, the game ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003, and the movable piece (not shown) for opening the second starting port 2004 is not driven. Therefore, in the left-handed state, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 does not occur, and only the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 occurs, and there is a reserved ball of the second special symbol. Except for the case, only the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 1403 is performed, and the big hits (8R probability variable big hit A, 8R normal big hit) related to the first special symbol are generated. Similarly, the game ball does not enter the first starting port 2002 in the right-handed state. Therefore, in the right-handed state, only the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 occurs, and the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 1186 except when there is a reserved ball of the first special symbol Only the variable display is executed, and the big hits (16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot) related to the second special symbol are generated.

In addition, in the big hit related to the first special symbol, the opening and closing pattern of opening the big winning hole 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) is repeated eight times at maximum, and only about 1000 game balls are paid out. In the big hit related to the second special symbol, it is possible to pay out about 2000 game balls by repeating 16 times the opening and closing pattern in which the big winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) at maximum.

In addition, when the 8R probability variation big hit A is determined in the first special symbol stop pattern setting process, the 8R probability variation big hit A symbol is determined as the big hit pattern, and when the 8R normal jackpot is determined, the 8R normal jackpot pattern is determined as the big hit pattern. decide. In addition, although not shown, when the 16R probability variation big hit is determined in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, the 16R probability variation big hit pattern is determined as the big hit pattern, and when the 8R probability variation big hit B is determined, the 8R probability variation big hit pattern is determined as the big hit symbol. The B symbol is determined, and when the 2R normal jackpot is determined, the 2R normal jackpot pattern is determined as the jackpot pattern.

Also, if the big hit flag is not set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 then determines whether or not the small hit flag is set as the process of step S5333. And as a result, if the small hit flag is set in the process corresponding to the step S5333 in the second special symbol process process (step S5239), the small hit symbol ( After determining (step S5334), the process moves to step S5337.

Furthermore, if the small hit flag is not set in step S5333, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 decides on the losing design as the aspect of stopping the fluctuation of the special design (step S5336), and then shifts to step S5337. do.

Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs the process of step S5337 as the process of step S5337. (It may be one that instructs the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol)) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set. And after that, as the process of step S5338, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282).

In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command (left, middle, and right decorative symbols are variably displayed, and the left decorative pattern → right decorative pattern → Stop and display in the order of the middle decorative pattern (the left, middle and right decorative patterns may be synchronously displayed with the same pattern and stopped and displayed at the same time)). For example, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines a combination in which three left, middle, and right decorative symbols are aligned when a type other than the 2R normal jackpot is won as a jackpot. On the other hand, when a 2R normal jackpot is obtained, a specific pattern combination (a combination in which at least one of left, middle and right decorative patterns is not the same as other patterns) is determined. In addition, when the reach loss is specified, the lost pattern with the reach (the left and right decorative patterns are a combination of the same patterns "0" to "9" and the middle decorative patterns are different; the reach loss When the missing pattern is specified, the missing pattern (combination of left, middle and right decorative patterns in which at least the left and right decorative patterns are different) is determined. The stop symbol thus determined is displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has passed (when the game effect is finished).

In any case, when a win is obtained as a result of progress of the game, the peripheral control MPU 1511a causes the effect display (special display mode) at the time of the win to appear before the start of the big win game, so that the big win game can be played. is started, the effect display during the jackpot game is made to appear.

FIG. 112 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets the big hit flag as shown in FIG. If it is (step S5341), select the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the type of big hit determined in step S5332 of the first special symbol stop design setting process (step S5342), small hit flag is set (step S5343), the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of the small hit is selected (step S5344), and if the reach flag is set (step S5345), the variation pattern table at the time of reach ( (not shown) is selected (step S5346), and if none of the big hit flag, the small hit flag and the reach flag are set, that is, if it becomes a normal loss (a loss that does not execute the reach effect), at the time of loss is selected (step S5347).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table and the random number for the variation display pattern read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process (step S5348), and the determined variation pattern is started. A variable pattern command for notifying the peripheral control board 1510 is set to start the variable display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 1403 (step S5349). In addition, the main control MPU 1310a sets the variation time set corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the variation timer (step S5350). Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S5355) so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S5283), this process is terminated. As a result, the variable display control of the first special symbol is performed by the first special symbol display device 1403 only for the variation time thus determined, and the effect display device 1600 performs the effect control in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. will take place.

In addition, the variation pattern table of this example is a random number for judging the big hit (random number for judging the first big hit, random number for judging the second big hit) and random number for the big hit design (random number for the first big hit design, random number for the second big hit design). A plurality of types are provided for each determination result based on. In addition, the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table includes a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for variation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). They are stored so as to be associated with the random numbers for the first variation display pattern. Thus, the main control MPU 1310a reads in step S5302 of the selected variation pattern table and the first special symbol normal process among the plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the random number for judging the big hit and the random number for the big hit symbol. By comparing with the random number for the fluctuation display pattern, and obtaining the fluctuation time information associated with the read random number for the fluctuation display pattern from this table, the special design (first special design, second special design) determine the variation pattern of As a result, the determination process for the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The variation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

However, as described above, in this example, since there is no winning of a small hit, the variation pattern table at the time of a small win is not used. In this example, a small win is not won, but a small win may be won.

In addition, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach in this example, it is set to determine the mode type of reach effect to be executed by comparing the judgment value indicating which reach effect is to be executed and the random number for the variation display pattern. It is For example, in the non-time saving state, 164 types of variable display pattern random numbers out of 241 types of variable display pattern random numbers are set as determination values (0 to 163) indicating that one of the normal reach effects is executed, and 59 Random numbers for variation display patterns of types are set as determination values (164 to 222) indicating execution of one of super ready-to-win performances with low expectations for big wins, and 18 types of random numbers for variation display patterns have high expectations for big wins. It is set as a determination value (223 to 240) indicating that one of the super ready-to-win effects is executed.

In addition, the super reach performance (SP performance) is a player who has a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach performance, and a player who wants to generate a big hit game state when the super reach performance is executed. expectations are rising. That is, such a super ready-to-win effect has the highest selection rate in the variation pattern table at the time of the big win, and even if a loss is finally displayed by this, the player's expectation of the big win game state. will be able to increase However, in reality, in order to sufficiently raise the player's expectations for the jackpot game state, during the period when the super reach effect is being executed, a high-expectation notice effect that is drawn separately from the fluctuation pattern appears. It is required to do (combine).

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of loss used when determining the fluctuation time of the first special symbol provided corresponding to the random number for the first big hit determination and the random number for the first big hit pattern, the non-time saving state and the time saving state , and a fluctuation time of 12 seconds is set in common. On the other hand, in the variation pattern table at the time of loss provided corresponding to the second big hit determination random number and the second symbol random number and used when determining the variation time of the second special symbol, 0.1 seconds to as a time saving state A variable time of 12 seconds can be set, and a variable time of 12 seconds is set as a non-time saving state. In this way, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is the same during the time saving state and during the non-working time saving state, and during the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the time saving state, the winning of the game ball to the second start port 2004 As well as prompting, the time for the player to enter the game ball to the second start port 2004 is ensured.

Also, if 0.1 second is selected from the variation time at the time of losing the second special symbol, each game ball that is driven into the game area 5a at intervals of 0.6 seconds in a time saving state (such as a high probability time saving state) Discharge without being subjected to lottery processing is suppressed.

That is, the right-handed game ball is supplied to the area directly above the gate portion 2003 . Then, when the same game ball is received in the gate unit 2003 from this area when in a time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.), a hit as a normal pattern is obtained (for example, winning probability is 100%), The movable piece involved in opening and closing the second starting port 2004 is maintained in the open state for a long period of time (5.5 seconds in this example). As a result, in a situation where the second starting port 2004 can be accepted one after another (almost all of the game balls hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500 can be received by the second starting port 2004). Even if there is, every time those game balls are accepted, the lottery on the second special symbol side can be digested one after another with a high jackpot probability (probability in a high probability state) around "approximately 1/32". become possible.

And in this example, since the game ball is fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds when the player is operating the handle 302, in the time saving state (high probability time saving state etc.), the second Game balls are often received at the starting port 2004 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. In this regard, in this example, as described above, the variation pattern table when the second special symbol is lost based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 2004 is extremely It can be set to a short time of 0.1 seconds. That is, in this case, when a loss is obtained, the pattern variation is completed only in the time (0.1 seconds) less than the shooting interval (0.6 seconds) of the game ball, so 0.6 seconds. Even in a situation where game balls launched at intervals are received one after another in the second starting port 2004, the game balls are prevented from being discharged without being subjected to lottery processing. .

FIG. 113 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S5283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As a process of (1), 1 is subtracted from the variable timer in which the variable time corresponding to the variable pattern determined in the lottery process (step S5282) for the variable pattern is set. As a result, when it is determined that the variable time timer is 0, that is, the randomly selected variable time has passed (step S5372), the process proceeds to step S5373. That is, in the process of this step S5373, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so as to shift to the first special symbol stop process (step S5284), this process is terminated.

It should be noted that, even though the variable timer is decremented by 1 (step S5371), if the variable time timer is not 0, until the variable time timer becomes 0 (until the time at which the design should be fixed and stopped), Each time the timer interrupt process is performed, the processes of steps S5371 and S5372 are performed.

FIG. 114 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop process (step S5284).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process of , display control is performed to display the stop symbol determined by the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display device 1403, and the first special symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600. A stop display command for instructing derived display of the display result of the decorative pattern corresponding to the stop pattern is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S5382).

Further, when the big hit flag is set (YES in step S5386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a big win start command indicating to start the big win game state (step S5387), The standby time until the start of the jackpot game state (time for displaying the start of the jackpot game state, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S5388). Then, a jackpot execution flag indicating that the jackpot game state is being executed is set, and if the high-probability flag is set, the high-probability flag is reset, and if the time-saving flag is set. The time saving flag is reset (step S5389), and the variation counter is reset, and the first special symbol process flag is the initial value. When the process is updated to the first special symbol normal process (step S5394), this process ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the jackpot executing flag is set in the processing of step S5235, and the jackpot game is played in the jackpot control processing (step S5240a). state will be executed.

Incidentally, the jackpot start command is a command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot. In step S5387, the jackpot start command (8R probability variable jackpot A command, 8R normal jackpot command, 16R probability variable jackpot) according to the type of jackpot (8R probability variable jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot, 16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot) Jackpot command, 8R probability variable jackpot B command, 2R normal jackpot command) are set. As a result, the production of the jackpot game state (battle production or additional challenge production) corresponding to the type of jackpot indicated by the jackpot start command is executed by the production display device 1600, lamps/LEDs, speakers, and the like.

On the other hand, in the processing of step S5386, when it is determined that the jackpot flag is not set (NO in step S5386), first, it is determined whether or not the low probability time saving state (step S5390). Then, when it is in the low-probability time-saving state, it is determined whether the number of fluctuations of the special symbols digested after being controlled in the low-probability time-saving state has reached a predetermined upper limit value (here, 100 times) ( step S5391). That is, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol digested after being controlled to the low probability time saving state reaches the predetermined upper limit value (100 times), the conditions for ending the low probability time saving state are satisfied, and time saving The function is stopped and the normal game state (low-probability non-time-saving game state) is entered (step S5392).

Then, after the processing related to the time saving function is performed in this way, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S5393). And as a result, when it is determined that the small hit flag is set (YES in step S5393), a small hit start command indicating starting the small hit game state is set (step S5394), and the small hit game is set. Waiting time until the start of the state (time for displaying the effect of starting the small winning game state, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S5395). Then, set a small winning in-execution flag indicating that the small winning game state is being executed (step S5396), so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal processing which is the initial value of the first special symbol process flag (step S5394), this process ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the small hit executing flag is set in the process of step S5236, and in the above-described small hit control process (step S5240b) A small winning game state is executed. Incidentally, unlike when a big win is won, the game state is not changed when such a small win game state is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set (NO in step S5393), the first special symbol process is performed without performing the processing related to the big hit or the small hit as a loss. When the flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S5394), this process is terminated. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the flag during execution of the big hit or the flag during execution of the small hit is not set (steps S5235, S236), and a new game is started according to the state of suspension. (Lottery and symbol control) processing related to progress is performed (steps S5237 to S5239).

FIG. 115 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S116).

Now, in the processing of step S5401, if it is determined that the detection signal by the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310, as the process of step S5402, executes the gate part passing process such as acquiring the normal random number of the normal symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol holding storage area of the RAM. do.

Then, in the normal design process processing, one of the following five process processing is selectively executed according to the normal design process flag.

1. Ordinary symbol normal processing (step S5403) in which the ordinary random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read out, and lottery processing for the display mode at the time when the fluctuation control of the ordinary symbol is stopped is performed based on the read ordinary random number (step S5403)
2. Ordinary design fluctuation time determination processing (step S5404) in which lottery processing etc. are performed for the fluctuation mode (variation time) of the ordinary design displayed on the ordinary design display device 1402 based on the ordinary design fluctuation random number.
3. Normal symbol variation processing (step S5405) to wait until the normal symbol variation display on the normal symbol display 1402 is stopped.
4. Variation display of the normal symbols so that the mode when the variation control of the normal symbols is stopped determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variation control of the normal symbols is stopped is displayed on the normal symbol display device 1402. Normal design stop processing (step S5406) to stop
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the normal pattern becomes a mode suggesting "normal pattern winning", the movable piece is opened and the game ball is accepted to the second start port 2004. Ordinary electric accessary product opening process (step S5407)

In addition, the normal design process flag is operated so that the initial value indicates that the normal design normal process (step S5403) should be performed.

FIG. 116 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the gate passage processing (step S5402).

Now, in the processing of step S5401, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the counter value of the normal holding number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a as the process of step S5411. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved normal symbols is the maximum value of "4".

In the processing of this step S5411, when it is determined that the number of suspensions of the normal symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S5412 to S5414 in order to newly suspend the variable display control of the normal symbols processing will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S5412, the normal pending number counter is counted up (1 is added). Next, as the process of step S5413, the normal random number and the normal pattern fluctuation random number are obtained from the random number counter. Then, as the process of step S5414, each random number thus obtained is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value of the normal reservation number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a.

However, in the process of step S5411, when it is determined that the number of reserved normal symbols is the maximum value, the fluctuation display control of the normal symbols is not newly reserved. That is, by not executing the processing of steps S5412 to S5414, the variable display control of the normal symbols is not newly suspended.

FIG. 117 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the normal symbol normal process (step S5403).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. Based on the counter value of the normal reserved number counter, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the normal symbols in the reserved state. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbols in the pending state, then as the process of step S5422, the normal symbols stored in the normal symbol pending storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a The random number stored in the first storage area among the random numbers related to the display mode of the pattern (for example, normal random number, normal pattern fluctuation random number) is read out from the same RAM. Then, as the processing of steps S5423 and S5424, the normal reservation number counter is counted down, and when the fluctuation display of the normal symbols stored in each storage area of the normal reservation storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is stopped Random numbers related to the display mode (normal random numbers, normal fluctuation random numbers) are shifted in the first-in first-out mode.

Specifically, the normal symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted according to the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003 are sequentially selected from the first (earmost) area. Remember. Then, when the random number is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area and the game ball passes through the gate section 2003, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1-th (n=1 to 3) storage area. When the condition for starting the variable display based on the random number stored in the first storage area is established, the various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area is read. , are moved to the N-1th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the normal symbols occurred is memorized so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). .

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, if the current gaming state is a time saving state (high probability time saving state) (step S5426), selects a normal figure hit determination table (not shown) during time saving ( Step S5426), if the current gaming state is non-time saving state (low probability non-time saving state, high probability non-time saving state) (step S5425), select the normal figure per determination table (not shown) during non-time saving ( Step S5427), it compares with the normal random number which is read out with normal design per decision table and normal design normal processing step S5422 which is selected (step S5428).

In addition, the normal pattern hit determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a, and is used when the game state is time saving (high probability time saving state). It is provided with a normal pattern hit determination table for non-working time saving used in the case of time (low probability non-working time saving state, high probability non-working time saving state). Then, in the time-saving normal pattern hit determination table that is referenced for comparison with the normal random numbers, all 255 types of normal random numbers match the normal pattern per decision value, which indicates that the normal pattern has been elected. The normal random numbers are associated with each other so as not to coincide with the normal pattern deviation judgment value indicating that it is lost. In this way, when the game ball passes through the gate part 2003 during the time saving, the game ball is always won in the normal game, and the movable piece is opened and the game ball to the second start port 2004 Acceptance is controlled. Not all of the 255 types, but more normal random numbers than in the non-time saving state may be matched with the normal pattern per judgment value indicating that the normal pattern is won.

In addition, in the non-short-time normal pattern hit determination table that is referenced for comparison with the normal random numbers, all 255 types of normal random numbers can match the normal pattern per decision value indicating that they have been elected per normal pattern. Instead, the normal random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the normal pattern deviation determination value indicating that the normal pattern is out. In this way, in the non-working time, even if there is a passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003, because there is no winning per normal figure, the movable piece 2106 is in the open state second start opening There is no control over the acceptance of gaming balls into 2004. However, as described above, it may be possible to obtain a normal pattern hit even in a non-time-saving state, in this case, the winning probability (eg, 50%) is lower than the time-saving state, and the lottery result of the normal pattern is a hit. When the movable piece of the second starting port 2004 is opened for a shorter time than the time saving state, for example, for 2 seconds to allow the reception of the game ball to the second starting port 2004, then move forward again to the second You may make it impossible to accept a game ball to the second starting port 2004. - 特許庁

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected normal pattern per determination table with the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal pattern normal processing, and when it is determined that it is per normal pattern (step S5429 ), after setting the normal pattern per flag indicating that the variation is elected per normal pattern (step S5430), per normal pattern as a mode at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the normal pattern (stop pattern of the normal pattern) Design is determined (step S5431), on the other hand, as a result of comparison between the selected normal pattern per determination table and the normal random number read in step S5422 of normal design normal processing, when it is determined that it is lost, the normal pattern fluctuation A general pattern loss pattern is determined as a form (normal pattern stop pattern) at the time of control stop (step S5432). And after that, when the above-described normal design process flag is updated (step S5433) so that the process shifts to the normal design fluctuation time determination process (step S5404), this process is terminated.

While such control by the main control MPU 1310a is being performed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the above-described various commands transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a, thereby performing the above-described peripheral control unit steady-state processing (received command analysis processing ( In step S1022)), the game situation is grasped each time, and an effect can be executed according to the game situation.

More specifically, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not there is a situation in which starting winning has occurred, and when in this situation, performs control related to pending display and look-ahead effects in response to starting winning. And after that, by updating the process flag based on the grasped gaming situation, the following variation pattern designation command reception waiting processing, production design fluctuation start processing, production design fluctuation processing, production design fluctuation stop processing, jackpot display processing , jackpot game processing, or jackpot end effect processing.

Variation pattern specification command reception waiting process: During the period until the variation pattern command related to the variation pattern is received from the main control MPU 1310a, the design is not in a variation state and the control related to the big hit is not performed (demonstration etc.) While performing control, when receiving a variation pattern command related to the variation pattern from the main control MPU 1310a, the process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the performance symbol variation start process.

Production pattern variation start processing: Various production contents (production pattern, advance notice production, etc.) in the pattern fluctuation period are determined based on the fluctuation pattern command, etc., and the variation of the decoration pattern is started based on the determined production contents. to control. After that, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process during effect symbol fluctuation. Of the variation patterns (effect patterns), many of the "variation patterns (effect patterns) that stop with a big hit pattern" are prepared in a pair with "variation patterns (effect patterns) that stop with a losing pattern". By functioning as the same variation pattern (production pattern), the production is provided as to whether a big hit pattern appears or a losing pattern appears. Therefore, hereinafter, when describing the variation pattern (production pattern), when describing "predetermined variation pattern" or "specific variation pattern", unless otherwise noted, "stop with a big hit pattern It means both "predetermined variation pattern (specific variation pattern)" and "predetermined variation pattern (specific variation pattern) that is stopped with a losing pattern", and as a result of the progress of the production content in the same manner It will arrive at a branching point where either a big hit pattern or a losing pattern appears.

Production design fluctuation processing: Various production contents determined in production design fluctuation start processing are controlled to start at each timing during the design fluctuation period, and when the fluctuation time ends, the value of the process flag is changed to production design Update to the value corresponding to the fluctuation stop processing.
Effect design fluctuation stop processing: Based on the reception of a command (design determination command) instructing to stop all designs, stop the fluctuation of the decorative design and perform control such as deriving and displaying the display result (stop design). When the decorative pattern is to be stopped by the big win pattern, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big win display process, and when the decorative pattern is to be stopped by the losing pattern, the value of the process flag is changed to the variation pattern designation command reception waiting process. Update to the corresponding value.

Big win display processing: Controls effects (such as display effects for notifying the occurrence of a big win on the effect display device 1600) during the period from when the decorative symbols stop with the big win symbols until the start of the big win game. After that, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process during the big-hit game.

During jackpot game processing: Various effects are controlled during the occurrence of the jackpot game state. When the jackpot game state ends, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect processing.

Big hit end effect processing: In the effect display device 1600, the effect (such as a display effect for informing the player that the big win game state has ended) is controlled during the period from the end of the big win game state to the change allowable state. . Then, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern specifying command reception waiting process.

FIG. 118 is a diagram showing a determination table T1 of an effect pattern (fluctuation effect) referred to in the effect symbol variation start process when the game is in the normal game state.
As shown in FIG. 118, in the determination table T1, an effect pattern (variation effect) is associated with each of the variation numbers 1 to 22 indicated by the variation pattern command. Therefore, when the variation pattern command is acquired from the main control MPU 1310a, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines the effect pattern (variation effect) associated with the variation pattern command based on the determination table T1, and determines the determined effect pattern. Based on (variation performance), control is performed so that the variation of the decorative pattern is started.

Note that the effect pattern (variation effect) does not necessarily have to correspond one-to-one with the variation number indicated by the variation pattern command. For example, one variation number indicated by a variation pattern command is associated with a plurality of production patterns (variation production), and one of these production patterns (variation production) is determined based on a production lottery or game situation. You may make it As will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment also associates some of the variable numbers 1 to 22 with a plurality of effect patterns.

In addition, although this will also be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, after thus determining the effect pattern (variation effect), a notice lottery (determination process of the notice effect) is performed based on the result of the big hit determination, the symbol type, and the change pattern. , the notice effect won in the notice lottery is controlled to appear at a predetermined timing while the determined effect pattern (variation effect) is performed (process during effect pattern fluctuation), so that a plurality of effect contents are displayed. The degree of expectation for the appearance of the jackpot pattern is suggested by the mode of appearance of those patterns, which can be combined.

And conventionally, among such composite effects, there are cases where the same specific advance notice effect (for example, timer effect) is executed by making a plurality of appearances while one effect pattern (variable effect) is being executed. By doing so, it is expected that the interest in the game will be maintained. However, since the advance notice effect can be combined only when the expectation for the appearance of the big hit pattern is high, the frequency of executing a plurality of timer effects while one effect pattern (fluctuation effect) is being executed naturally decreases. , it was considered difficult to sufficiently improve the interest in gaming.

As will be described later, the "timer effect" refers to a predetermined effect that appears during execution of the effect pattern (variable effect), and the count display toward the timing at which the predetermined effect is performed is set to a first predetermined numerical value. (e.g. "60 seconds") to a second predetermined value (e.g. "0 seconds"). is. That is, in this case, when the count display (for example, countdown) from the first predetermined numerical value is started as the timer effect, it is guaranteed that some effect will always occur when the second predetermined value is reached. Become. Alternatively, an effect (for example, a conversation notice or a cut-in A , B, etc.) are subject to the timer effect, it is guaranteed that an advantageous effect result will always occur when the second predetermined value is reached. However, in the timer effect (particularly, the advance notice side timer effect executed as a result of the advance notice lottery), at least when the count display is started, which effect is the object of the effect is kept secret. It is desirable to In addition, the ``target of the timer effect'' is the effect that appears when the count display (for example, countdown) from the first predetermined value as the timer effect reaches the second predetermined value (for example, "0 seconds"). That is, in the timer effect, a count display is performed toward the timing at which the effect object occurs.

In the "timer effect" according to this embodiment, the elapsed time from the start of counting is displayed to the second decimal place, and the number of seconds and the like are displayed accurately. However, it does not necessarily have to be executed as such a timer effect, and if it is executed as a count effect in which a count display such as count up or countdown is performed, the elapsed time since the count started ( seconds, etc.).

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, in addition to the timer effect (notice side timer effect) as the effect content that appears only when winning the advance notice lottery, the effect pattern ( It is possible to execute a timer effect (fluctuation side timer effect) incorporated in advance as the effect content of the variable effect). That is, in this case, if the count effect display is executed as "the content of the effect of the advance notice effect that functions so as to increase the expectation of the big hit with respect to the effect pattern determined based on the variation pattern command", the timer effect on the notice side is executed. However, by executing it as ``the content of the performance pattern itself determined based on the variation pattern command'', the expectation level of the big hit indicated by the performance pattern determined based on the variation pattern command is changed from the expectation level. It is possible to cause the count effect display (timer effect) to appear without wastefully adding up (accumulating the degree of expectation by satisfying the condition of "winning in advance notice lottery"). For example, when the expected degree of jackpot when a specific effect pattern determined based on the variation pattern command appears is ``20%'', the expected degree of big win is increased by the function of compound effect when the advance notice side timer effect is further executed. As a result, it becomes "40%", for example, and the frequency of appearance has to be reduced accordingly, whereas a big hit is expected when a variable side timer effect is executed as the effect content of the specific effect pattern itself. It is possible to execute the timer effect with the degree set to "20%" (it can appear only by selecting a specific variation pattern), and the frequency of appearance can be preferably maintained.

It should be noted that the degree of expectation for a big hit when an effect pattern (variable effect) appears in the determination table T1 differs depending on the variation number (further, the effect pattern), and basically, the greater the variation number, the greater the expectation for a big win. It tends to be higher. For example, in the effect patterns corresponding to the variable numbers 5 (6), 9 (10), and 17 (18), variable side timer effects are executed in which "conversation notice" is the effect target for all of the effect contents. The appearance ratio is variation number 5 (6) > variation number 9 (10) > variation number 17 (18), whereas the jackpot expectation at the time of appearance is variation number 5 (6) < variation number 9 ( 10) It is set so that <variation number 17 (18). Also here, for convenience of explanation, only the determination table referred to in the normal game state will be described in detail, but even in the determination table referred to in the low probability time saving state and high probability time saving state, the effect content of the effect pattern itself A production pattern (count fluctuation pattern) in which a variable-side timer production can be executed is included, and can appear at a probability different from that in the normal game state.

Also, in the determination table T1, all of the variation numbers 3 to 6 are the same in that the same normal ready-to-win effect is performed, but for the variation numbers 5 and 6, the variable side timer effect with conversation notice as the object of effect can be executed. It is different from variation numbers 3 and 4 in that respect. In addition, variation numbers 7 to 14 are the same in that the same character reach effect is performed, but variation numbers 9 and 10 execute a variable side timer effect for effecting a conversation notice, and variation numbers 11 and 10 12 executes a variable timer effect with cut-in A as the object of effect, and with variable numbers 13 and 14, a conversation notice and cut-in A are executed, and a variable timer effect with them as object of effect is executed. different in that they can be Variation numbers 15 to 22 are the same in that the same SP ready-to-win effect is performed. At 20, a variable timer effect is executed with cut-in B as the object of effect, and at variable numbers 21 and 22, a conversation notice and cut-in B are executed, and a variable timer effect with them as the object of effect is executed. different in that they can be Note that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher when the variable-side timer effect with the cut-ins A and B as the target is performed than when the variable-side timer effect with the conversation notice as the target is performed. is set so that the degree of expectation for a big hit tends to be higher when the variable-side timer effect for both the conversation notice and the cut-ins A and B is executed.

In addition, "conversation notice" is a production that can appear at a relatively early stage after the production pattern (decorative pattern variation production) is executed, and is often made with a relatively low level of expectation. On the other hand, cut-ins A and B can appear at a relatively late stage after the performance pattern (decorative design variation performance) is executed, and have a relatively high degree of expectation. It is a production that is often performed (or a production that always builds up a relatively high degree of expectation). Therefore, the "conversation notice" is set to have a higher appearance rate (execution probability) than other effects with higher expectations (cut-ins A, B, character A actions, B, etc., which will be described later). It is supposed to be In addition, the "cut-in" that appears as the content of the variable effect is executed in a manner equivalent to the cut-in A that appears as the content of the effect of the notice effect in the character reach, whereas in the SP reach, the notice It is executed so as to correspond to cut-in B instead of cut-in A appearing as the effect content of the effect.

Moreover, in the determination table T1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 118, the effect contents (effect pattern ) is assigned as a variable side timer effect. On top of this, if the variation pattern is "predetermined type such as shortened variation or normal reach effect with low expectation (for example, variation numbers 1 to 6, etc.)", the count effect display as the notice side timer effect is displayed. The variation pattern is "variation pattern for executing the variable timer effect ( count variation patterns of variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22, etc.)”, the variation pattern is of the predetermined type (for example, variation (numbers 1 to 6, etc.) are designed to be low.

Here, 14 variation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) are prepared as count variation patterns for which the variation side timer effect is executed, and two of them (0 Only the variation patterns (variation numbers 5 and 6) corresponding to the above-mentioned predetermined types (variation numbers 1 to 6, etc.) correspond to the above-mentioned predetermined types (variation numbers 1 to 6, etc.), so the applicable ratio is "2/14". On the other hand, 8 variation patterns (variation numbers 1 to 4, 7, 8, 15, 16) are prepared as variation patterns in which the variation side timer effect is not executed, and 4 variation patterns (variation Numbers 1 to 4) correspond to the predetermined types (variation numbers 1 to 6, etc.), so the applicable ratio is "4/8".

In such a configuration, when the effect content of the variation pattern is one that can perform the count effect display (variation side timer effect) (count variation pattern), the advance notice is higher than the case of the variation pattern that does not perform the variable side timer effect. The ratio of determining that the count effect display (notice-side timer effect) cannot be executed as the effect content of the effect is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the appearance of a plurality of count displays within one production pattern (variable production) without increasing the level of expectation uselessly and lowering the frequency of appearance.

Further, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the effect pattern (variation effect) determined in the effect symbol variation start process is count variation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22). ), the rate at which the above-mentioned advance notice timer effect appears differs depending on which count variation pattern the count variation pattern is. For example, as shown in FIG. 118, when the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 5 and 6 are executed, the advance notice timer effect does not appear at all, and the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 9 to 14 are executed. The timer effect on the advance notice side can appear with a moderate probability of lottery, and when the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 17 to 22 are executed, the timer effect on the advance notice side can appear with a high probability of lottery. ing.

It should be noted that even when the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 5 and 6 are executed, the above-described advance notice-side timer effect may appear at a low probability. In addition, even if any of the performance patterns corresponding to the variable numbers 15 to 22, in which the timer performance on the announcement side can appear with a high lottery probability, is actually executed, the big hit is more likely than the loss. The announcement side timer effect can appear with a higher lottery probability for the performance pattern that wins the 2nd prize, and the variation number 22 can appear with a higher lottery probability than the variation number 16.例文帳に追加ing.

With such a configuration, the count effect display can be performed in advance depending on whether the change pattern is the first count change pattern (for example, change number 10) or the second count change pattern (for example, change number 22). The ratio of execution as the content of the effect (notice-side timer effect) will be different. Therefore, among the count variation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) in which the rate of appearance of a plurality of count displays in one production pattern (variation production) is high, the type Depending on the situation, it is possible to further increase the rate at which a plurality of count displays appear, so that it is expected that the interest in the game will be maintained in a favorable manner.

In particular, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, even if the same reach type effect content appears in the effect pattern (for example, character reach, SP reach), the variable side timer effect is included as the effect content. In the effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 17 to 22), the notice-side timer is set within the execution period of the effect pattern compared to the effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 15 and 16) that does not include the variable timer effect as the effect content. The rate at which the effect appears (the rate at which it is determined by the preliminary lottery that the timer effect on the advance notice side is to be executed) is set to be high. That is, in this case, two timer effects (fluctuation side timer effect, advance notice side timer effect) appear in one effect pattern only by requiring the degree of expectation for a big hit that one advance notice side timer effect is won in the advance notice lottery. As a result, the double timer performance opportunity can be realized without uselessly increasing the degree of expectation for a big win.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the production pattern (variation production) determined in the production pattern variation start process is the count fluctuation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22). Even in this case, there are variable side timer effects (variable side count effect display) in which "conversation notice" is the object of production and variable side timer effects (variable side count effect display) in which "cut-in" is the object of production. , the mode of count display (the form and color of the count number, etc.) is different. That is, in this case, even if a production pattern (for example, variation numbers 9 and 11) having the same ready-to-win production as the production content is executed, the state of count display of the variable side timer production (variable side count production display) is confirmed. By doing so, coupled with ``the ratio of appearance of the above-mentioned advance notice timer effect is set to differ according to which count fluctuation pattern it is,'' it is possible to recognize the likelihood of appearance of the advance notice timer effect. can be expected.

Regarding the mode of the count display that appears in the notice-side timer effect (prediction-side count effect display), regardless of whether or not the effect target is the same (conversation notice, cut-in), the variable-side timer effect (variation-side It may be different from (or at least different from) the count display mode (conversation notice, cut-in) appearing in the count effect display), or may be the same as the same mode (or at least the same as either) .

However, it is relatively expected that the count display executed as the notice-side timer effect (preview-side count effect display) will be executed in a common manner regardless of the type of effect that is the object of the effect. This is useful in making the player aware that the forewarning-side timer effect, which is set to a high degree, is appearing, thereby improving the player's sense of anticipation. In this sense, it is more desirable that the notice-side timer effect be different from any of the count display modes (conversation notice, cut-in) appearing in the variable-side timer effect (variation-side count effect display). A plurality of modes with different expectations (for example, blue count, red count, etc.) are prepared for the above-mentioned common aspect of the advance notice side timer effect (prediction side count effect display), and one of them is executed. You may do so.

In addition, in order to more preferably recognize that the advance notice-side timer effect is being executed, the count display when the advance notice-side timer effect is executed and the count display when the variable timer effect is executed are displayed. It is desirable to make the count speed (for example, the speed at which numbers change during count-up and count-down) different. With such a configuration, after the timer effect is started, even during the period in which the count display is in progress, the count speed of the timer effect is made to be watched, and the expectation is relatively low. It is possible to make the player interested in which one of the advance notice side timer performance with a high degree of expectation is being executed and to suitably maintain the game interest during the timer expiration period.例文帳に追加

Also, at this time, in the variable timer effect, depending on the effect object (conversation notice, cut-in), the count display is performed at a speed relatively close to (or the same speed as) the count speed of the advance notice timer effect ( cut-in) and a mode (conversation notice) in which the count is displayed at a speed not relatively close to the count speed of the timer effect on the notice side, it is possible to determine whether the timer effect on the notice side is being executed. It is possible to make it more interesting by varying the difficulty of judging. In addition, in the variable side timer effect (or advance notice side timer effect), the count number is displayed by repeating the appearance and disappearance of the count number, whereas in the notice side timer effect (or fluctuation side timer effect), the count number is displayed continuously. You may make it count-display by displaying.

According to such a configuration, when a situation occurs in which the count display of the variable-side timer effect and the count display of the advance notice-side timer effect are executed at the same time, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the advance notice-side timer effect is being executed. It is expected that it will be possible to play games, and that the interest in games will be improved.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the count display is performed for the variation patterns (count variation patterns such as variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, and 17 to 22) corresponding to the variation side timer effects. A plurality of production patterns with different start timings or end timings (total count or time required to complete all counts) are set as selectable production patterns. Then, when a variation pattern corresponding to the variable side timer effect is acquired, one of the plurality of effect patterns is determined based on a random number for effect, etc., and the count display of the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer are performed. By making the easiness of simultaneous execution with the count display of the effect different (for example, the larger the total number of counts, the easier it is to overlap), the easiness of determining whether or not the advance notice timer effect is being executed can be made different. I try to make it interesting

In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of production patterns (the production target of the timer production and the reach The content of the production is the same), but there are multiple production patterns with different start timings or end timings of the count display (total count or time required to complete all counts) (however, they are not subject to timer production. The type of effect to be executed and the type of ready-to-win effect to be executed as the effect content of the variation pattern are the same for each effect pattern), and a plurality of different variation patterns may be prepared for one-to-one correspondence.

In addition, the number of counts displayed (total number of counts) when appearing in the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect are different, or even if the same specific count display number can be selected, the variable side timer effect and the notice By making the selection rate of the specific count display number different between the side timer effect and the side timer effect, the difficulty of judging whether or not the advance notice side timer effect is being executed can be differentiated to add interest. .

Also, if the timer effect on the notice side is executed by countdown display, and the timer effect on the variable side is executed by display of countup, it is possible to definitely grasp whether or not the timer effect on the notice side is being executed. It is expected that it will become possible to play games and greatly improve the interest in games. Also, while the notice-side timer effect is executed with a countdown display, the variable-side timer effect for a specific effect (e.g., conversation notice) is executed with a count-up display, and a different effect from the specific effect (e.g., (Cut-in) is executed with a countdown display, the difficulty of judging whether or not the notice-side timer effect is being executed is made different according to the effect object, making it more interesting. be able to give.

Further, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, there are cases where the same effect is targeted for the variable side timer effect and the advance notice side timer effect, and there are cases where different effects are targeted for the effect. to control. And when the same effect (for example, a conversation notice) is targeted for the variable timer effect and the advance notice timer effect, compared to the case where different effects are targeted for the variable timer effect and the advance notice timer effect. It is set so that the rate of lowering the expectation of a big hit is high, and even if the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is targeted for the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, each count display The end timing is made different.

That is, in this case, even if the same effect (for example, a conversation notice) is the object of effect in the variable timer effect and the advance notice timer effect, one of the variable timer effect and the advance notice timer effect is displayed first by a predetermined value. is reached and terminated, whereas the other count display continues. It looks as if Then, after that, the other count display that has been continued will reach a predetermined value in a manner that makes it clear that the same effect (for example, a conversation notice) is the object of effect and will be terminated. Even if the timer effect on the end side reveals that a relatively low-expectation conversation announcement is targeted for effect, a different effect that can appear after that is targeted for effect ( It is expected that the sense of anticipation for the fact that the timer effect is being executed in a manner with a relatively high degree of expectation will be maintained, and that the interest in the game will be improved.

Also, in this way, when the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is targeted for effect in the variable timer effect and the advance notice timer effect, the timing when the variable timer effect reaches a predetermined value and the advance notice timer effect are predetermined. It is desirable to display separate indications corresponding to the end of the count (for example, "count successful!", "chance up!", etc.) at the timing when the numerical value is reached.

More specifically, a variable-side timer effect and an advance-notice-side timer effect for effecting "conversation notice" executed as a change-side or advance-notice-side effect appear within one effect pattern. In this case, the count display of the variable side timer effect and the count display of the advance notice side timer effect are performed simultaneously. While the count display progresses according to the fluctuation side specific production ("Count success!", Effects according to the appearance of the conversation notice, etc.), the notice side timer production is related to the "conversation notice" Count display according to the notice side specific effect that occurs as the notice side effect ("Chance UP!", timer end display that appears according to the start timing of the conversation notice (or a predetermined number of seconds before the start of the effect), etc.) By advancing the game, different indications corresponding to the end of the count will appear at different timings.

By the way, the effects of the conversation notice and the cut-in are required to be executed without fail when they are the object of the variable-side timer effect (when the count variation pattern is determined). In particular, conversation notice and cut-in are effects that can be executed in a plurality of modes with different degrees of expectation. It is required to appear in a highly anticipated manner. Therefore, the effect to be the effect target of the variable timer effect is incorporated in advance as the effect contents of the above effect pattern (variable effect), and the variable timer effect and the effect object can be changed only by executing the effect pattern. It is desirable to make it possible for each of the effects to be performed (a mode with a relatively high degree of expectation) to appear. However, instead of this, it is also possible to perform control so that when the variable timer effect is executed, the effect (a mode with a relatively high degree of expectation) to be targeted for the effect is always selected in the advance notice lottery. .

In addition, if each effect of the conversation notice and cut-in is not subject to the effect of the variable timer effect, it will be determined whether or not it will appear as the effect content of the notice in the notice lottery described later. A judgment is made as to what mode (relatively high or low expectations) should be made to appear as the content of the side effect, and the appearance is controlled based on the result of the determination. .

Hereinafter, the production pattern determination processing using FIG. 118 will be summarized.
That is, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the variation pattern command, the symbol type command, etc. from the main control MPU 1310a, first, based on the variation number indicated by the variation pattern command and the symbol type indicated by the symbol type command, the current game Refer to the determination table according to the state. For example, if the production pattern is determined based on the pattern type, it is possible to give bias (expectation) to the probability variation expectation when a specific production pattern appears, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state, etc. become.

Then, as the effect pattern associated with the variable number, a plurality of effect patterns (such as a plurality of effect patterns with different start timings or end timings of the count display that appears in the variable timer effect, etc.) are prepared to be selectable. If so, one of a plurality of performance patterns with different start timings or end timings of count display is selected based on the hit/loss of the big hit determination. At this time, if the big hit judgment is won, the effect pattern is set so that the start timing or end timing of the count display is delayed at a high rate, and this makes it possible to set the start timing or end timing of the count display. The later it is, the higher the possibility that a big hit pattern will appear.

Also, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the count fluctuation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) is obtained when a special effect condition is established. Even in such a case, a performance pattern set so that the variable timer performance does not appear is selected from among the plurality of performance patterns.

Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, after the production pattern (the production from the start of the fluctuation of the decorative pattern to the stop of the fluctuation) that appears during the pattern fluctuation is thus selected, what kind of advance notice production is to be performed within the execution period of the production pattern. It will be decided whether to additionally execute (combine) in such a manner (advance lottery).

FIG. 119 shows a specific channel (hereinafter referred to as channel X) out of a finite number of prepared channels for sound control by the fixed channel system for various notification sounds (payout notification sound and abnormality notification sound) excluding the effect sound. ) shows an example of the sound definition table in the case of realizing the process of outputting only in the In this sound definition table, for each sound name, definitions of playback priority, left/right pan initial value, up/down pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, seek point, playback type setting, and output type setting are managed. are doing. For convenience of explanation, only the definitions of the notification sounds 1 to 7 are shown here, and the definitions of the other notification sounds and dramatic sounds are omitted. In addition to the definition by the fixed channel method, the effect sound may be defined by the automatic channel method for each channel other than the channel X to which the notification sound is assigned.

Priority is a parameter used to determine which of the notification sounds should be assigned to channel X to be output when a plurality of notification sounds respectively satisfy the output conditions. A high notification sound is assigned to the channel X and output regardless of the assignment state of the notification sound having a lower priority numerical value to the channel X. As will be described later, if the priorities are the same, the notification sound assigned first to channel X is given priority, and after the output of the notification sound is completed, the notification sound assigned to channel X is output. It will be done.

The left/right pan initial value represents the sound image localization initial position of the sound by the left and right speakers that are a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the setting value of the left and right pans during sound reproduction, a difference is generated in the sound volume output from the left and right speakers individually, and a sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the left and right speakers. For example, if it is set to "0x00", it indicates that it is output only from the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L). The difference in volume output from the left and right speakers, which are a combination of the left and right speakers 921L, the upper right speaker 573R, and the lower right speaker 921R, is 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the left and right speakers. For example, a setting of "0xFF" indicates output from only the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R).

The initial value of vertical panning is the sound image localization of sound by upper and lower speakers such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). It represents the initial position. By dynamically changing the setting value of the upper and lower pans during sound reproduction, a difference in the volume output from the upper and lower speakers can be created, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the upper and lower speakers. . For example, if it is set to "0x00", it indicates that it is output only from the pair of upper speakers 573. For example, if it is set to "0x80", it indicates the volume difference that is individually output from the upper and lower speakers that are a combination of them. becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, a setting of “0xFF” indicates output from only the pair of lower speakers 921 .

The volume initial value represents the volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be set within a setting range from "0x00" to "0xFF", for example. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each sound described above. The playback type setting is loop playback (corresponding to "LOOP" in the figure) that repeatedly plays back the target sound, or 1SHOT playback (corresponding to "1SHOT" in the figure) that plays back the target sound once. It represents whether The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is to be reproduced in monaural or stereo.

FIG. 120 is a table showing, for each type of notification sound illustrated in FIG. 119, notification content, notification mode, notification time, and conditions for termination of notification (cancellation conditions). In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a finite notification time is set for each notification sound. This is a measure to maintain the status and refrain from outputting the notification sound after that.

As shown in FIG. 120, notification sound 1 (magnetism abnormality) indicates a state in which magnetism is detected by the magnetism detection sensor 4024 (a state in which there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act using a magnet is being performed). It informs you of something. And, as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "boo, magnetism detected", and a display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "magnetism detected") ) and lighting by various lamps (light-emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed respectively. The notification time is 60 seconds (equivalent to repeating the notification sound six times) from the time when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 detects the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound such as "boo, magnetism detected". However, the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the lighting of various lamps are continued until the cancellation condition "return power on" is satisfied. It's becoming

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly), the vibration sensor 2405 detects the vibration (there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act is being performed by a pounding act). state), and the count sensor 4005 (first big winning opening sensor or second big winning opening sensor or A notification sound to notify that the detection by the winning opening sensor) is performed (a state in which there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act of forcibly opening the large winning opening in the closed state to win a game ball is being performed) 3 (large prize winning abnormality) is regarded as belonging to the first notification group when there is a high possibility that some kind of fraudulent act has been performed, and the notification sounds belonging to the first notification group are The notification mode, notification time, and cancellation conditions are all set to be common.

For example, in the notification sound 2 (abnormal vibration), as its notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "Boo-boo vibration detected" and a display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, , "Vibration detected") and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed respectively. 60 seconds (equivalent to repeating the notification sound for 6 times) from when there is, the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound is terminated. Execution of the lighting is continued until the canceling condition "return power on" is satisfied. In addition, in the notification sound 3 (big prize abnormality), as its notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "Boo Boo, a big prize abnormality detected", and a Display (for example, "A big winning error has been detected") and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed, and as the notification time, 60 seconds after the detection by the count sensor 4005 (equivalent to repeating the notification sound for 6 times), the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound is terminated. The display and the lighting of various lamps are continued until the canceling condition of "turning on the power again" is satisfied.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group each adopt a different display mode. Regarding lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the frame 3 and the game board 5, the same lighting mode (all of the various lamps must be lit) is set for each of the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group. It does not have to be a form) is adopted. In addition, for the notification sound to be looped, the notification sound 1, such as "boo-boo", plays a role of notifying that it belongs to the first notification group (a state in which there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act has been committed). 3, and a message sound (unique sound) that plays a role of informing individual identification as to which content is to be notified. The warning sound consists of a monotonous sound to give a warning under a tense fraudulent situation, and the message sound consists of a variety of sounds to clarify the distinction from other notification sounds. It is desirable to ensure that

In other words, when reporting something belonging to the first reporting group (a state in which there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act has been committed), rather than specifying which reporting type it belongs to, the pachinko parlor should respond to the fraudulent activity. It is important to expedite the initial action of In this respect, according to the above configuration, only by outputting a "boo-boo" notification sound or lighting modes unique to the first notification group by various lamps (light-emitting devices), those belonging to the first notification group (fraudulent behavior) Since it is possible to recognize that it is a state where there is a high possibility that it has been committed, it is expected to speed up the initial response of the hall side to the fraudulent act. Furthermore, a message sound indicating which type of notification is being output so as to follow the notification sound of "boo-boo", or display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. Therefore, it is expected that the treatment after the initial response to the hall side will be performed smoothly.

On the other hand, notification sound 4 (door open) is a state in which the door frame open switch 618 detects that the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4 (the possibility that a fraudulent act is being performed by opening the door). However, it is possible that the door has been opened by the hall side's emergency response measures). The notification mode includes a loop process that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "The door is open ping-pong ping-pong" and a display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "The door is open. ”) and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed respectively. The notification time is 30 seconds (equivalent to repeating the notification sound three times) from the time when the door frame open switch 618 detects the loop processing that repeatedly outputs the notification sound such as "the door is open ping-pong ping-pong." ), the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the lighting of various lamps are canceled by the release condition "Door closed detection (door frame open switch 618 turns on the main body frame 4 On the other hand, the execution is continued until the condition "Detection of closed door frame 3" is satisfied.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 4 (door open), the body frame open switch 619 detects that the body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2 ( Although there is a possibility that fraudulent acts are being carried out by opening the body frame, the body frame may be opened by the hall side due to abnormal measures). , is regarded as belonging to the second notification group when there is a medium degree of possibility that some kind of fraudulent act has been committed and it cannot be denied, and the notification sounds belonging to the second notification group are The mode, notification time, and cancellation conditions are all set to be common.

For example, in notification sound 5 (frame open), as its notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "the frame is open ping-pong ping-pong" and a display ( For example, "the frame is open") and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed respectively, and as the notification time, the main body frame open switch 619 30 seconds (equivalent to repeating the notification sound three times) from the time of detection, the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound is terminated, while the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, Execution of lighting by various lamps is continued until the release condition "detection of frame closure (detection of body frame 4 being closed with respect to outer frame 2 by body frame open switch 619)" is satisfied. It will happen.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group adopt different display modes. Regarding the lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the frame 3 and the game board 5, the same lighting mode (all of the various lamps must be lit) is set for the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group. It does not have to be a form) is adopted. However, the lighting mode of the lamp (light emitting device) when belonging to the second notification group is different from the lighting mode of the lamp (light emitting device) when belonging to the first notification group. In addition, with regard to the notification sounds to be looped, the message sound (unique sound) that plays the role of notifying individual identification as to what the content of the notification is, and the sound that belongs to the second notification group (fraudulent behavior A state in which there is a medium degree of possibility that the there is

That is, in the case of notifying those belonging to the second notification group (the state in which there is a medium degree of possibility that cheating has been performed), it is possible to not make the person who is playing a proper game feel disgust. It is important to be able to take measures to deal with abnormalities on the hall side as quickly as possible. In this regard, according to the above configuration, as the notification sound, first, as in the case of belonging to the third notification group described later, a message sound for notifying which notification type it belongs to is output. Therefore, it is expected that a person who is playing a proper game will be less likely to feel disgust. On the other hand, an alarm sound such as "ping-pong ping-pong" follows the message sound, although the alarm sound is different from that in the case of belonging to the first notification group, in order to make it difficult for the person who is playing a proper game to feel disgust. In order to make it difficult for a person who is playing a proper game to feel disgust, the lighting mode is different from that in the case of belonging to the first information group, but is output in the case of belonging to the third information group. It is expected that the emergency countermeasures on the hall side will be speeded up to some extent by giving notification by lighting various lamps that are not used.

On the other hand, the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is in the non-time-saving state. The passage is detected by the gate sensor 4003 (the game is being played in a manner that is disadvantageous to the player and should be corrected to a proper manner (left-handed)). This is to inform you that And, as the notification mode, loop processing for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed", and display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "Please return to left-handed") ”) are executed respectively. In addition, as the notification time, both the loop processing that repeatedly outputs the notification sound "Please return to the left hand" and the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 are in a non-time saving state. It is designed to end in 20 seconds (equivalent to repeating the notification sound twice) from the time when the gate sensor 4003 detects it.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance), the full tank detection sensor 279 detects that the lower tray 322 is full of game balls (lower tray A notification sound 7 (ball removal guide) for notifying that the game ball is in a state where the game ball in the 322 is in a state where the game ball should be removed is performed as a game guide for properly progressing the game although the possibility of cheating is low. It is regarded as belonging to the third notification group when it is in the power state, and for the notification sounds belonging to the third notification group, the notification mode, notification time, and cancellation conditions are all set to be common. and

For example, in notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance), as its notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "Please remove the ball from the lower tray" and Display (for example, "Please remove the ball from the lower tray") is executed respectively, and loop processing for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "Please remove the ball from the lower tray" as the notification time, and a game board Both the display in the display area of the side effect display device 1600 and the display are completed in 20 seconds (equivalent to repeating the notification sound twice) after detection by the full tank detection sensor 279. .

However, with regard to the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and the notification sound 7 (ball-out guidance), the sensor 2401, When 279 is still in the detection state, the notification processing (notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and notification sound 7 (ball-out guidance)) is executed again from the beginning.

In addition, in the third notification group according to this embodiment, only message sounds are output as the notification sounds 6 and 7, but more strictly speaking, for example, after the message sounds for 5 seconds have been output, silence for 5 seconds is output. Data is assigned to channel X and a corresponding sound (silent output) is output, and loop processing is performed to repeat a notification sound for 10 seconds with the message sound and silent data as a set. It has become. Since the notification sounds 6 and 7 are designed to output silent data for the same amount of time, they function as unique notification modes different from those of the first notification group and the second notification group. Even the hall side can properly recognize that the notification belongs to the third notification group only by confirming the silent data portion instead of the message sound portion which is difficult to hear in the noisy hall. As for silent data, it is desirable to prepare in advance as one sound data (10 seconds of sound data) including a message sound, and to perform loop processing while assigning this to channel X.

By the way, there may be silent portions in the notification sounds used in the first notification group and the second notification group (between the warning sound and the message sound, etc.), but these are very short to give a "pause". It is clear that it is temporal and is fundamentally different from the above-mentioned relatively long duration silences (third reporting group) which have a group identification function.

According to such a configuration, an alarm sound such as "boo-boo" or "ping-pong-ping-pong" is not output, and only the message sound is repeatedly output with a predetermined silent time interposed. It is possible to notify the player about the game guidance without making the player feel disgust.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the same priority order is set for the notification sounds belonging to the same notification group. You may do so. Also, as the playback type setting, loop playback that repeatedly plays back the target sound is adopted, but this is not necessarily the case, and 1SHOT playback that plays back the target sound once may be adopted. . In addition, "boo-boo", which is commonly used in the notification sounds belonging to the first notification group, and "ping-pong ping-pong", which is commonly used in the notification sounds belonging to the second notification group, have a connection with the message sound. The sound data may be prepared separately for each notification sound, or may be prepared as sound data separate from the message sound, and when outputting, sound data is created by combining the message sound and the warning sound. You may assign it to a channel afterward.

[A game machine equipped with a plurality of production operation units]
By the way, in the above description, the gaming machine having the plate unit 320 provided with the effect operation unit 400 capable of being pressed by the player and capable of presenting the effect image to the player has been described. With reference to 121 to 143, a gaming machine capable of further motivating the player to operate will be described. Note that the effect control of the effect operation unit described below is performed by the peripheral control board 1510 .

FIG. 121 is a front view of a game machine provided with a sword rendering operation unit 5000. FIG. FIG. 122 is a right side view of a game machine provided with a sword rendering operation unit 5000. FIG. Here, the sword effect operation unit 5000 arranged on the door frame 3 of the game machine 1 will be described, and the same reference numerals will be given to the same components as those described above, and the description will be omitted as appropriate.

The sword effect operation unit 5000 is provided on the front surface of the door frame 3 on the right side when viewed from the front. The sword effect operation unit 5000 contains a blade part 5010 having a blade part 5011, a handle part 5012, and a collar part 5013 sandwiched between the blade part 5011 and the handle part 5012, and the blade part 5011 of the blade part 5010. A sword decoration 5001 is composed of a sheath 5020 that can be used.

The sword decoration body 5001 is provided on the door frame 3 so that the sheath part 5020 can be moved in the left and right direction when viewed from the front. In addition, the blade portion 5010 is provided so as to be movable in the sword drawing direction and the sword retracting direction. The sword portion 5010 is normally in a sheathed state in which the blade portion 5011 is housed in the sheath portion 5020, and in the sword drawing effect, the sword blade portion 5011 becomes visible to the player by drawing the sword. Then, the sword section 5010 in the drawn state can function as an operation means for receiving the player's sword sheathing operation and returning to the sword sheathed state.

Here, with reference to FIG. 123, a description will be given of an execution opportunity for the sword drawing effect accompanied by the movement of the sword effect operation unit 5000 (sword ornament 5001). FIG. 123 is a diagram showing an example of a selection table of effect patterns in the effect mode in which the sword drawing effect can be executed. (B) shows an example of a selection table for selecting the presence or absence of the drawing effect.

The production patterns described here include a pattern in which the sword drawing preparation transition production is performed after the sword drawing preparation transition production is executed, a pattern in which the sword drawing preparation transition production is performed without performing the sword drawing preparation transition production in advance, and a sword drawing preparation transition production is performed in advance. In spite of this, there is a pattern in which the sword drawing production is not performed, a pattern in which the sword drawing preparation transition production is performed and the sword drawing production is not performed. Two patterns are provided: a form with an aura member and a form without an aura member.

As shown in FIG. 123(A), depending on the type of variation pattern that is determined by the main control board 1310 and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, whether or not to execute the drawing preparation transition effect is selected. Here, the plural types of variation patterns are classified into a variation pattern for big win variation at the time of big win, a variation pattern for small win variation at the time of small win, and a variation pattern for loss variation at the time of loss, and variations that result in advantageous results for the player. The pattern is set so that the probability of execution of the drawing preparation transition effect increases as the pattern increases. Concretely, the sword drawing preparation transition effect is executed with a probability of 50% in the case of the fluctuation pattern for big hit fluctuation, executed with a probability of 30% in the case of fluctuation pattern for small hit fluctuation, and executed with a probability of 30% in the case of fluctuation pattern for loss fluctuation. 20% chance of execution. In addition, the variation pattern at the time of losing variation may change the probability according to the presence or absence of the ready-to-win effect so that the probability of executing the sword drawing preparation transition effect is higher when the ready-to-win effect is performed than when it is not performed. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(B), whether or not to execute the sword drawing main effect is selected according to the type of variation pattern and the presence or absence of the sword drawing preparation transition effect. Even if the types of variation patterns are the same, when the sword drawing preparation transition performance is executed, the probability of execution of the sword drawing preparation transition performance is set to be higher than when the sword drawing preparation transition performance is not executed. In addition, it is set such that the more advantageous the result for the player is the variation pattern, the higher the probability of execution of the sword draw main effect. Here, even if the advantage of the variation pattern is low, the execution of the sword drawing preparation transition effect is set to increase the probability of execution of the sword drawing main effect. Specifically, when the sword drawing preparation transition performance is executed in the variation pattern for losing variation, the probability of execution of the sword drawing preparation transition performance is higher than when the sword drawing preparation transition performance is not executed in the small hit variation variation pattern. It should be noted that, in the case of the variation pattern for the big hit variation, regardless of the presence or absence of the drawing preparation transition presentation, the sword draw main presentation is always executed.

In addition, when the main draw effect is executed, the draw preparation transition effect is executed in advance, and the probability of executing the main draw sword effect with the aura member increases as the variation pattern becomes more advantageous for the player. is set to It should be noted that here, in the case of the variation pattern for the small hit variation, the drawing main effect of the form with the aura member is not selected.

(State transition and operation of the aura member by drawing the sword ornament)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 124 to 127, the sword drawing action of the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword drawing effect (sword drawing preparation transition effect and sword drawing main effect) will be described. In addition, when the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword portion 5010 (blade portion 5011) capable of receiving the sheathing operation by the player, and the sword portion 5010 is deformed by its own constituent member (aura member 5030) (Fig. 124, 125), the aura member 5035 is provided in the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 that houses the sword portion 5010 (blade portion 5011), and the sword portion 5010 is united with the member (aura member 5035) on the door frame 3 side. The operation of the aura members 5030 and 5035 will be described in the case of forming an integral decoration (FIGS. 126 and 127).

124A and 124B are state transition diagrams illustrating the sword drawing operation of the sword decoration 5001 when the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword portion 5010 (blade portion 5011) itself. (C) shows the second drawn state. FIG. 125 is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining the operation of the aura member 5030. FIG. 125 is a vertical cross-sectional view showing a state in which the blade portion 5011 is pulled out from the sheath portion 5020 in order to facilitate understanding of the operation of the aura member 5030. FIG.

The sword ornament 5001 in the normal state is in a sheathed state in which the blade portion 5011 is housed in the sheath portion 5020, as shown in FIG. 124(A). In the sword decoration body 5001 after the sword drawing operation in the sword drawing preparation transition presentation, as shown in FIG. 124(B), only the part of the habaki 5011a fitted to the hand of the blade part 5011 is removed from the sheath part 5020 and visible to the player. It becomes the first unsheathed state. 124(C), the blade part 5011 of the sword decoration body 5001 after the sword drawing operation in the sword drawing main effect is further drawn from the scabbard part 5020, and most of it becomes visible to the player. state. Here, the sword ornament 5001 in the second drawn state can function as an operation means capable of accepting the player's sheathing operation.

The aura member 5030 provided on the blade portion 5011 is configured to be operable independently of the action of drawing the blade portion 5011 . In the case where the sword decoration 5001 is in the form with an aura member, the aura member 5030 is in the sheath when the blade portion 5011 changes from the sheathed state (Fig. 124(A)) to the first drawn state (Fig. 124(B)). Inside the portion 5020, the movable range is moved from the closed state (Fig. 125(A)) to the open state (Fig. 125(B)) as much as possible (maximum movement), and the blade portion 5011 is deformed. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the aura member 5030 even when the blade portion 5011 deformed by the aura member 5030 changes from the first drawn state to the second drawn state (FIG. 124(C)). As will be described later, since the aura member 5030 is positioned below the habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011 even when it is fully moved, the player cannot visually recognize the aura member 5030 in the first drawn state.

The aura member 5030 in the normal state (closed state) is contained in the blade portion 5011 as shown in FIG. 125(A). The aura member 5030 is provided below the habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011, and meshes with the right aura member 5031, the left aura member 5032, and the rack 5031a provided on the right aura member 5031 and the rack 5032a provided on the left aura member 5032. and a pinion 5033. The pinion 5033 of the aura member 5030 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front by driving means (not shown), so that the rotational force is converted into linear motion in the rightward direction of the rack 5031a and in the leftward direction of the rack 5032a. As shown in (B), the right aura member 5031 and the left aura member 5032 each stop at a position (open state) projecting outward from the outline of the blade portion 5011 .

In addition, an LED board 5011c having a plurality of LEDs is included in the blade shaft 5011b below the habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011. As shown in FIG. By emitting light from these LEDs, it is possible to decorate the blade portion 50011 (aura member 5030) with light emission.

Here, regarding the operation timing of the aura member 5030, when the sword decorative body 5001 (sword portion 5010) shifts from the sheathed state to the first drawn state, the closed state is changed to the open state. has been shown as an example in which the sword ornament 5001 changes from the first drawn state to the second drawn state, but the present invention is not limited to this. The aura member 5030 may start to operate (deform) after the sword ornament 5001 is in the second drawn state. The final mode based on the production pattern set until the sword ornament 5001 in the second drawn state functions as the operation means (not limited to the mode of maximum movement, but also includes the mode of stopping the movement in the middle) ).

126A and 126B are state transition diagrams for explaining the sword drawing operation of the sword ornament 5001 when the aura member 5035 is provided on the sheath 5020. (A) the sword drawn state, (B) the first sword drawn state, and (C). The second drawing state is shown. FIG. 127 is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining the operation of the aura member 5035. FIG. 127 is a longitudinal sectional view showing a state in which the blade portion 5011 is extracted from the sheath portion 5020 in order to facilitate understanding of the operation of the aura member 5035. FIG. 125 and 126 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

As shown in FIGS. 126(A) to (C), the aura member 5035 provided in the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 that houses the sword portion 5010 (blade portion 5011) is similar to the above-described blade portion 5010 (blade portion 5011). While the aura member 5030 provided in itself is movable in the horizontal direction, it is movable in the vertical direction. Also, the aura member 5035 is provided so as to surround the outer circumference of the blade portion 5011 . In the case where the sword ornament 5001 is in a form with an aura member, the aura member 5035 maintains the relative positional relationship between the blade portion 5011 and the aura member 5035 in the sheathed state, while changing the state of the blade portion 5011 (sword sheathed state). ⇔ first drawn state ⇔ second drawn state). As a result, the sword portion 5010 (blade portion 5011) can be united with the frame-side member (aura member 5035) to appear as an integral decoration.

The aura member 5035 in the normal state (completely housed state) is housed in the sheath 5020 as shown in FIG. 127(A). The aura member 5035 is provided so that the upper end is below the habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011 in the fully housed state, and a hollow columnar surrounding aura member 5036 is provided so as to surround the outer circumference of the blade portion 5011. and a right pinion 5037a and a left pinion 5037b that mesh with the right rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, respectively. The enclosing aura member 5036 rotates the right pinion 5037a counterclockwise in front view and the left pinion 5037b clockwise in front view by driving means (not shown). This is converted into upward linear motion of the rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, and as shown in FIG. At this time, the aura member 5035 is in a completely appearing state in which the surrounding aura member 5036 is movable (maximum movement) to the upper limit of the movable range.

Although not shown, the blade portion 5011 includes an LED substrate having a plurality of LEDs, and the blade portion 5011 and the aura member 5035 can be decorated with light.

Here, regarding the operation timing of the aura member 5035, according to the state change of the sword ornament 5001 (sword portion 5010) (sword sheathed state ⇔ first sword drawn state ⇔ second sword drawn state), the relative positional relationship is maintained. 5011 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. The aura member 5035 may start to operate (combine) after the sword ornament 5001 is in the second drawn state. The final mode based on the effect pattern set until the sword ornament 5001 in the second drawn state functions as an operation means (including the form with aura member of the state). Also, the aura member 5035 may be united with the blade portion 5011 so as not to be visually recognized by the player in the state from the sheathed state to the first drawn state.

(Other production pattern 1 using sword decoration 5001)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 128 to 130, another ready-to-win effect using the aforementioned sword ornament 5001 will be described. 128 to 130 are diagrams for explaining screen transitions of the effect display device 1600 and motion transitions of the sword ornament 5001 in the princess ready-to-win effect. Here, the sword decoration 5001 described above differs mainly in the following points. First, the sheathed sword ornament 5001 functions as an operation means, and detects the player's sword drawing operation. Secondly, the sheath portion 5020 provided on the door frame 3 is configured to be movable in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front. It is possible to operate up to the front center.

When the changing pattern forms the ready-to-win state, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the variable display of the three decorative patterns becomes the ready-to-win state (FIG. 128 (A1)), and the start image of the princess ready-to-win is displayed (FIG. 128 (A2)). Here, above the display area of the effect display device 1600, a specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) that can be moved in the vertical direction is provided. In a normal state, the specific decorative member SDY does not overlap the display area of the effect display device 1600 when viewed from the front, and is stationary above the display area in a state (initial state) in which a part of the blind is visible to the player. there is Further, at this time, the sword ornament 5001 is in the sheathed state.

In the princess ready-to-win effect, after an image of the princess facing behind the blind is displayed (Fig. 128 (A3)), an operation effect suggesting image suggesting an operation effect is displayed (Fig. 128 (B1)). Then, the operation effect of the sword decoration 5001 is started, and the operation effective period for accepting the operation of the sword decoration 5001 is started, and at the same time, the display area of the effect display device 1600 prompts the player to draw the sword decoration 5001. An operation prompting image and a gauge indicating the operation valid period are displayed (FIG. 129 (B2)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific decoration member SDY are moved up and down in small increments from the display of the operation effect suggesting image to the display of the operation promotion image and the gauge indicating the operation effective period. good too. Then, when the player's sword drawing operation is detected, an effect is performed according to a preset development pattern or end pattern.

The sword drawing operation by the player means an operation of pulling out the blade part 5011 from the sheath part 5020 by grasping the handle part 5012 of the sheathed sword ornament 5001 and lifting the sword part 5010 upward. When the sword ornament 5001 changes from the sheathed state to the second drawn state, the player's sword draw operation is detected, and a detection notification operation is performed to notify the player of the detection. The detection notification action may be any action that the player can feel through the handle 5012 gripped by the player, such as moving the sword 5010 (or the handle 5012) up and down, vibrating, and other actions other than the action of drawing the sword. Just do it. Also, the detection notification operation is performed for a certain period of time after the operation is detected, and the operation can be visually recognized even if the player releases the handle 5012 . Therefore, since the player can visually confirm the detection of the operation, unnecessary contact with the sword ornament 5001 (grabbing again to confirm the detection, etc.) can be reduced, and failure or damage of the movable body can be prevented. can be done.

Here, when the player draws the sword, the aura member 5030 (5035) does not appear. However, when the player draws the sword, the aura member 5030 (5035) appears visibly from the player according to the degree of expectation. You may do so.

When the end pattern is performed, when the player's sword drawing operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY does not overlap the display area of the effect display device 1600 and remains stationary above the display area (initial state). state) is maintained, and a screen showing the end of the operation presentation by the sword ornament 5001 is displayed (Fig. 129 (C1)). Then, the decorative pattern is stop-displayed in the missing mode "767" (Fig. 129 (C2)). At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is returned to the sheathed state at the timing when the stop result in FIG. You may do so.

On the other hand, when the development pattern is performed, when the player's sword drawing operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is placed in the center of the front overlapping the display area of the effect display device 1600 (below the display area). It is dropped and moved to a state where only the reserved display area is visible (completely dropped state) (Fig. 129 (D1)).Then, the shadow of the princess is projected in the display area of the effect display device 1600. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 maintains the second sword drawn state (FIG. 129 (D2)).At this time, the display of the shadow of the princess projected in the display area of the effect display device 1600 may be provided in a plurality of patterns. By changing the color and size of the shadow, and the comments to be displayed afterwards, the degree of expectation of the lottery result by Princess Reach (expectation of winning, game profit when winning, etc.) may be suggested. .

Then, after a predetermined period of time has passed since the sword decoration body 5001 is in the second sword-drawn state by the player's sword-drawing operation, that is, after the shadow of the princess is projected in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the second sword-drawn state is reached. The sword decoration 5001 moves to the center of the display area of the effect display device 1600 in the front-left and right direction by moving the sheath 5020 provided on the door frame 3 (FIG. 129 (D3)). Then, when the sword decoration 5001 reaches the front center position of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the specific decorative member SDY returns from the completely fallen state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 with good visibility becomes An image of a surprised princess with the blinds removed is displayed (Fig. 130 (D4)). After that, the sword ornament 5001 returns to the original position where the sword drawing operation was performed, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, when the result of the variable display this time is a win, the win is announced with a smiling princess. An image is displayed (FIGS. 130 (E1) and (E2)), and an image announcing the loss is displayed along with a sad princess (FIGS. 130 (F1) and (F2)).

When the player's sword drawing operation is detected, the detection notification operation is performed as described above. If the player cannot move because the player is holding the sword when executing , an announcement or display such as "please release the sword" is performed. Even if the player does not stop gripping the sword decoration 5001, the effect itself proceeds. If it is held in the performed position, it will cause a delay in the left and right direction movement effect. However, regardless of whether or not the movement effect in the horizontal direction of the sword decoration body 5001 has been executed, the effect executed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the falling movement effect of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) progress. Since it is configured so that the progress of the game is not stagnated. Note that the sword decoration 5001 may be configured such that when the player releases the holding of the sword decoration 5001, the movable effect in the horizontal direction is immediately performed, or the movable effect is not performed. may

As described above, in the princess ready-to-win production, the specific decorative member SDY that suggests the operation production (effective operation) of the sword decoration 5001 is dropped and moved by the player's drawing operation (vertical movement) of the sword decoration 5001. At the same time, the sword ornament 5001 itself, which has been operated outside the display area of the effect display device 1600, is moved forward of the effect display device 1600 (to the operating position) by moving the sheath 5020 provided on the door frame 3. to the left). That is, based on the player's sword drawing operation, the sword decorative body 5001 itself can be moved to an operating position different from the operating position where the sword drawing operation was performed, thereby increasing the player's operational value and increasing the player's desire to operate. can suppress the decline of In addition, since one operation means can be operated in different stages (vertical direction at the time of operation, horizontal direction after operation) according to the operation by the player, an effect using a plurality of movable modes is provided. It is possible to increase the operational value of the operating means compared to the conventional operating means having only one movable mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

It should be noted that the effect of moving the sword decoration body 5001 in the horizontal direction is for the purpose of performing an effect integrally with the effect image performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain). Although the operation position outside the display area of the device 1600 is displaced to the action position in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the sword decoration 5001 is positioned in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the sword is drawn, the sword decoration 5001 is moved to be positioned outside the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is also possible to perform a left-right movement effect in which the player is displaced to the left (the left end of the frame). In addition, since the operation of the sword decoration 5001 of this example by the player is an action in the vertical direction (sword drawing action of pulling up the sword portion 5011 from the bottom), the sword decoration 5001 is operated after the operation based on the operation. For the movable effect, it is desirable that the sword ornament 5001 moves in a direction (horizontal direction as in this example) different from the motion direction (vertical direction in this case) when operated by the player.

Further, when the player's sword drawing operation is detected, a detection notification operation is performed to notify the player of the detection via the operation unit (sword unit 5010) operated by the player, so the player can accurately determine the operation end timing. can be judged. In addition, since the detection notification operation is performed for a certain period of time so that the player can visually confirm it, it is possible to suppress unnecessary contact such as touching the operation unit again to confirm the detection. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing the operation, delaying the movement performance of the sword ornament 5001, or damaging the movable body due to unnecessary contact. Furthermore, even after the detection notification operation, if the movement effect cannot be executed due to contact with the sword ornament 5001, a warning such as an announcement is made to the player to let go of the player's hand, and the operation is requested during the operation valid period. Since even the contact is prohibited after the operation means finishes the detection notification operation, the operational value of the operation means can be increased.

(Another production pattern 2 using the sword decoration 5001)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 131 to 133, another ready-to-win effect using the aforementioned sword ornament 5001 will be described. 131 to 133 are diagrams for explaining the screen transition of the effect display device 1600, the state transition of the operation button 410, and the action transition of the sword ornament 5001 in the ready-to-win effect including the operation effect of the operation button 410, which is used in many ways. be. Here, as the operation effect of the operation button 410, there is a pattern ((A) (B) → N in the figure) in which an expectation level suggestion effect is performed to suggest the level of expectation that the variation during execution will be a big hit, and the operation of the operation button 410. A pattern ((A) (B)→M in the figure) in which the suggestion and development of the operation presentation of the sword ornament 5001 is performed as the presentation will be described.

In the ready-to-win effect here, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, when the variable display of the three decorative symbols is in the ready-to-win state (FIG. 131(A)), first, the operation effective period for accepting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is Then, an operation prompting effect is performed to prompt the player to press the operation button 410 (FIG. 131(B)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image of an operation means (operation button 410) to be operated and an operation effective period are displayed, and the operation button 410 to be operated is decorated with light. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 maintains the sheathed state. Then, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, an effect is performed according to a preset effect pattern.

First, in the pattern in which the expectation degree suggesting effect is performed by pressing the operation button 410, when the player's pressing operation to the operation button 410 is detected, an effect image is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. After that (Fig. 131 (N1)), an image suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit is displayed (Fig. 132 (N2)). After that, the results of the current variation display (big win, loss) are notified (Fig. 132 (N3) or (N4)). It should be noted that a look-ahead effect may be performed instead of the expectation level suggesting effect for the variable display being executed. A character that changes the displayed pending display may appear.

In addition, in the pattern in which the operation effect of the sword decorative body 5001 is suggested and developed by pressing the operation button 410, when the player's pressing operation to the operation button 410 is detected, the display area of the effect display device 1600 131 (M1) in which an effect image is displayed, suggesting that an operation presentation requesting sheathing operation of the sword ornament 5001 will be performed. Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a start image of the operation effect of the sword ornament 5001 (here, a message of the title "Chance to draw the sword" and the operation explanation "I want you to put the sword away") is displayed. At the same time, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the sheathed state to the second drawn state. The sword ornament 5001 at this time is in the form with an aura member in which the blade portion 5011 is deformed by the maximum movement of the aura member 5030 (Fig. 133 (M2)). Subsequently, when a predetermined period of time elapses after the second sword is drawn and the effective period of operation of the sword ornament 5001 begins, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain accessory) is moved in the initial state in small increments in the vertical direction. In the display area of the display device 1600, an operation prompting image for prompting the player to sheathe the sword ornament 5001 and a gauge indicating the effective period of operation are displayed (FIG. 133 (M3)). Then, when the player's sword sheathing operation is detected, an effect based on the result of the current variation display is performed.

If the result of the variable display this time is a big hit, when the player's sword sheathing operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is moved from the initial state to the completely falling state ( Figure 133 (M4)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is returned to the initial state, a big hit is notified in the display area of the performance display device 1600 where the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is cancelled. An image (decorative pattern stop mode “777”, message “Good job”) is displayed (FIG. 133 (M5)). On the other hand, if the result of the variable display this time is a failure, when the player's sword sheathing operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) simply stops moving in small increments in the initial state. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (decorative pattern stop mode "767") is displayed to notify the loss (FIG. 133 (M6)).

In this way, by pressing the operation button 410, various effects such as suggesting the degree of expectation or developing an operation effect of other operation means (sword ornament 5001) are possible. Subsequent expansion cannot be specified at the time of manipulating . Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the operation of the operation button 410, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the desire to operate and the decrease in interest in the game, which are concerns due to the monotonous presentation after the operation.

In addition, in the series of ready-to-win effects, the first operation (pressing operation of the operation button 410) and the second operation (sword sheathing operation of the sword ornament 5001) have different operation modes (pressing operation and sword sheathing operation). (press operation of the operation button 410). Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in participating in the operation, and to suppress the decrease in interest in the game, which is a concern due to monotonous operation.

In this example, the operation button 410 is used as an effective operation means as the first operation opportunity, and the second operation opportunity (sword sheathing operation of the sword ornament 5001) is provided based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410. However, it is not limited to this. As the first operation opportunity, the sword sheathing operation of the sword ornament 5001 may be an effective operation. In this case, the operation means to be effective in the second operation opportunity is the sword decoration 5001 rather than the operation button 410 which is relatively less expected than the sword decoration 5001 of the first time. is desirable.

(Other production pattern 3 using sword decoration 5001)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 134 to 138, another ready-to-win effect using the aforementioned sword ornament 5001 will be described. 134 to 138 are diagrams for explaining screen transitions of the effect display device 1600, state transitions of the operation buttons 410, and operation transitions of the sword ornament 5001 in the ready-to-win effect. Here, a pattern ((A) (B1) (B2) → O in the figure) that becomes a big hit when the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is moved based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, and the operation button 410 Even if the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) does not move and is displayed in the missing mode based on the pressing operation of , the pattern display in the missing mode is changed again, and the player is given an opportunity to operate again. Patterns ((A) (B1) (B2) → (P1) to (P4) → Q when given the opportunity to operate the sword ornament 5001 / R when given the opportunity to operate the operation button 410) will be explained.

In the ready-to-win effect here, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, when the variable display of the three decorative symbols is in the ready-to-win state (FIG. 134 (A)), first, the start image of the operation effect of the operation button 410 (here , and the message ``Move the movable body with a single push of the button'') is displayed (FIG. 134(B)). An operation facilitating presentation to prompt is performed (FIG. 134(C)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of operations, and the effective period of operation are displayed, and the operation button 410 to be operated is decorated with light. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 maintains the sheathed state. Then, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, an effect is performed according to a preset effect pattern. Note that the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is not limited to one hit (one time), and may be repeated hits (multiple times). In addition, in order for the player to easily grasp the object (movable body) that is moved by the operation, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is moved up and down in small steps in the initial state during the operation valid period of the operation button 410. You may do so. Further, when the sword decoration 5001 is to be operated later, the sword decoration 5001 may be changed from the sword sheathed state to the second sword drawn state at this point.

In the pattern in which the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is movable and becomes a big hit, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is completely dropped from the initial state. (Fig. 135 (O1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY is returned to the initial state again, an image (decorative design of A stop mode "777" and a message of "good job") is displayed (Fig. 135 (O2)). At this time, the operation button 410 may be vibrated.

In the pattern in which the specific decorative member SDY (blinds) is not movable, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decorative members SDY (blinds) are only stopped moving in small steps, and can be dropped. not. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the decorative pattern in the shifted mode ("767") is oscillatingly displayed in the center of the screen (FIG. 136 (P1). A pattern (FIG. 136 (P2)) in which the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state ("767"), or a resurrection pattern in which the ready-to-win state is revived is developed.

In the resurrection pattern, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a resurrection start image ("not A samurai image) is inserted (Fig. 136 (P3)), and the decorative pattern is again in the ready-to-reach state and displayed in a reduced size in the upper right corner of the screen. is displayed (the face of an ally samurai with his eyes closed) is displayed (FIG. 136 (P4)). As time elapses, the eyes of the displayed samurai are enlarged, and the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is moved up and down in small steps in the initial state (FIG. 136 (P5)). As a result, the player's sense of expectation for performance using the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is heightened. Also, at this time, the operation button 410 may be decorated with light emission in a high-speed flashing mode, or the sword decoration 5001 may be moved up and down by changing from the sheathed state to the first drawn state. Then, depending on the effect pattern to be set, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 functions as an effective operation means. (Sudare Yakumono) is performed. The pattern in which the operation button 410 is operated is set to have a lower degree of expectation than the pattern in which the sword ornament 5001 is operated.

When the operation button 410 is used as the operation means, an image (operation button confirmation image) in which the samurai's forehead is dripping with sweat in the operation effective suggesting image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed, and the operation button is pressed. 410 is decorated with light emission (Fig. 137 (R1)). Then, while the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) continues to move in small steps, the operation button 410 is decorated with light, and the operation effective period of the operation button 410 starts, prompting the user to press the operation button 410. Promotion effect is performed (Fig. 137 (R2)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image of an operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of times of operation, and an effective period of operation are displayed. Here, when the operation button 410 is operated a required number of times, it is no longer illuminated.

Then, when the result of the variable display is a big hit, when the player's pressing operation of the operation button 410 is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is moved from the initial state to the completely falling state. (Fig. 137 (R3)). At this time, the decoration pattern displayed at the upper right of the screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is stopped and displayed so as to be visible to the player at the lower right of the screen. It should be noted that, at this time, it may be made difficult for the player to grasp the mode of the decoration pattern, as in the case of the above (FIG. 133 (M4)). Next, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is returned to the initial state from the completely fallen state, and the screen An image (decorative design stop mode “777”, message “Good job”) announcing a big hit is displayed in the center (Fig. 137 (R4)).

On the other hand, when the result of the variable display is a failure, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the small movement of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is stopped, and the effect display device 1600 is displayed. In the display area, a decorative design in a displaced mode ("767") is stopped and displayed in the center of the screen (Fig. 137 (R5)).

When the sword ornament 5001 is used as the operation means, an image (sword ornament finalized image) is displayed, and the sword ornament 5001 is changed from the sheathed state to the second drawn state with the aura member (FIG. 138 (Q1)). At this time, the sword decoration 5001 may be decorated with light. The player can understand from the image in the display area that the sword ornament 5001, not the operation button 410, is operable. can be understood by actually looking at the sword decoration 5001 . Next, while the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is moved in small steps, the second sword is drawn and a predetermined period of time elapses. In the area, an operation prompting image for prompting the player to sheathe the sword ornament 5001 and a gauge indicating the effective period of the operation are displayed (FIG. 138 (Q2)).

Then, if the result of the variable display this time is a big hit, when the player's sword sheathing operation is detected, the effect transition similar to that of FIGS. Q3) and (Q4)). On the other hand, if the result of the variable display is a loss, when the player's sword sheathing operation is detected, the effect transition similar to that of FIG. 137 (R5) is followed (FIG. 138 (Q5)).

In this way, since the degree of expectation is suggested according to the falling state of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) executed based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the degree of expectation is more powerful than the degree of expectation suggested by the image. Suggestions can be provided, and a decrease in interest in games can be suppressed. Also, even if the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is not moved down based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the player is given the opportunity to operate either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 again. be done. Since the degree of expectation can be suggested by the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game, which is a concern due to monotonous operation presentation without changing.

128 to 138 described above show three examples of production patterns of ready-to-win production using the sword decorative body 5001, but various production modes may be combined. As a result, it is possible to provide a wide variety of presentations, and to further increase the interest in the game.

(Form of sword decoration)
The form of the sword ornament 5001 of this example will be described with reference to FIG. The form of the sword ornament 5001 described above has two types, a form with an aura member and a form without an aura member. are provided in two types.

FIG. 139 is a diagram for explaining the shape of the sword ornament 5001 used for pseudo-continuous effect. The sword decoration 5001 here is provided so as to be able to change its shape in two stages by deformation of the handle 5012, and is provided inside the sheath 5020 of the door frame 3, and the player can see from the left and right sides of the sheath 5020. It is characterized by having an aura member 5040 that appears visibly in the The aura member 5040 is provided inside the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 in the same manner as the aura member 5035 described above, but its operation mode is the same as that of the aura member 5030 described above. 139(A) to (D) are diagrams showing the types (step change) of the form of the sword ornament 5001 in the sheathed state, showing the stage 0 form to stage 3 form in order. The sword ornament 5001 takes any form from stage 0 to stage 3 depending on the presentation.

As shown in FIG. 139A, the stage 0 configuration is the configuration in the normal state similar to FIGS. showing morphology. As shown in FIG. 139(B), the stage 1 form shows a form in which the aura member 5040 appears outside the side surface of the sheath 5012 by the action of the aura member 5040 from the stage 0 form. As shown in FIG. 139(C), the stage 2 form is a form in which the handle 5012 from the stage 1 form spreads and moves so as to be divided into two parts to the left and right from the center, and the first decorative part 5012a appears from inside. show. As shown in FIG. 139(D), in the stage 3 form, the second decorative part 5012b is moved upward from the inside of the handle part 5012 in the stage 2 form to form a decoration integrated with the first decorative part 5012a. showing morphology. Here, the stage 1 to stage 3 modes enable the form change without the sword ornament 5001 being in the second drawn state. Furthermore, since the sword part 5010 capable of accepting the operation by the player as the operation part of the operation means and the sheath part 5020 which does not operate operate together to form an integral decoration, a more powerful operation means can be provided. can be done.

(Suggestion effect before operation using specific decorative member SDY)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 140 to 143, the pre-operation suggestive effect executed before the operation valid period during which the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 becomes operational valid in the ready-to-win effect will be described. In the pre-operation suggestion effect, it is possible to suggest whether the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 among the plurality of operation means will be operationally valid by the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory). . Specifically, as a suggestive pattern by the pre-operation suggestive effect using the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain), the operation effective period is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is positioned at the initial position. There are a first suggesting pattern and a second suggesting pattern that generates an operation valid period in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is moved from the initial position to the suggesting position. ) is operationally effective, the second suggestion pattern is executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern. Specifically, the pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern (FIG. 140(B)) that generates the operation valid period with the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) positioned at the initial position even during the operation valid period. is performed, the sword ornament 5001 becomes operable with a probability of 30%, and the operation button 410 becomes operable with a probability of 70%. On the other hand, when the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 142 (AA1)) generated by the operation valid period is performed in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is moved to the suggestion position. , the sword ornament 5001 becomes operable with a probability of 70% (including the step-up pattern), and the operation button 410 becomes operable with a probability of 30%. A description will be given below of a production transition example corresponding to the action of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) in the first suggestive pattern and the second suggestive pattern of the pre-operation suggestive production.

(First suggested pattern)
140 and 141, either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 is displayed during the ready-to-win effect by the lottery by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the variation effect (ready-to-win effect) of the variation pattern drawn by the main control board 1310. is a diagram showing a transition example of a ready-to-win effect in which a pre-operation suggestive effect of the first suggestive pattern is executed when it is determined that the operation is valid. In this ready-to-win effect, when the three decorative patterns in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are in the ready-to-win state (FIG. 140(A)), the operation buttons pre-determined to be operationally valid by lottery of the peripheral control board 1510 The pre-operation suggesting effect of the first suggesting pattern is executed before the operation valid period for the operating means of either 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is generated. As a specific effect content of the first suggestion pattern, an operation effect suggesting image (aura rotation) suggesting that the operation means becomes operationally valid is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation effective period is generated. is displayed (FIG. 140(B)), and at this time, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) maintains its initial position. Also, there is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 .

Then, while the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is maintained at the initial position, an operation effective period is generated for the operation means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) whose operation is predetermined to be effective. Let In this example, when the operation button 5001 is activated, the first suggestion pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the second suggestion pattern (described later) as the pre-operation suggestion effect. In other words, when the operation valid period occurs while the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is in the initial position, the operation button 410 is operated at a higher rate than the sword ornament 5001. It becomes possible to suggest to the player.

When the operation button 410 becomes operationally valid, as shown in FIG. 140(C), the operation valid period for the operation button 410 is generated while the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) maintains its initial position. Let At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation prompt effect is performed in which an operation prompt image prompting the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation effective period are displayed. Also, at this time, the operation button 410 is decorated with light so that the player can easily recognize the operation target. Further, even when the sword ornament 5001 is operationally valid, the pre-operation suggesting effect may be executed in the first suggesting pattern, although at a lower rate than the operation button 410 . At that time, as shown in FIG. 140(D), an effective period of operation for the sword decoration 5001 is generated while the specific decorative member SDY (blinding accessory) maintains its initial position. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation prompting effect is performed in which an operation prompting image prompting the player to sheathe the sword decorative body 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation effective period are displayed. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is changed from the sword sheathed state to the second sword drawn state (form with aura member), and the player can sheath the sword.

140(C) or (D), when an operation to an operation means (operation button 410 or sword ornament 5001) that is effective for operation is detected, and if the result of this variable display is a big hit, The specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is moved to fall from the initial state to the fully fallen state (Fig. 141 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is returned to the initial state, a big hit is notified in the display area of the performance display device 1600 where the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is cancelled. An image (decorative pattern stop mode "777", message "Good job") is displayed (Fig. 141 (CC2)). On the other hand, if the result of the variable display this time is a failure, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) remains in its initial state and is not moved, and the failure is notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600. An image (decorative design stop mode "767") is displayed (Fig. 141 (CC3)).

(Second suggested pattern)
FIG. 142 shows that when it is determined that either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is to be activated during the ready-to-win effect, the pre-operation suggestive effect of the second suggestive pattern is performed. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the reach production|presentation performed. In addition, in FIG. 143, even though the second suggestion pattern is performed as the pre-operation suggestion effect, the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is not enabled, and the operation button 410 is temporarily enabled. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a pre-operation suggestion effect of a step-up pattern in which a body 5001 becomes operationally valid.

As shown in FIG. 142 (AA1), the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001, which is pre-determined to be operable by a lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. is executed before the operation validity period for the operation means of is generated. As a specific effect content of the second suggestion pattern, an operation effect suggesting image (aura rotation) suggesting that the operation means becomes operationally valid is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation effective period is generated. Is displayed. The operation effect suggesting image displayed at this time is the same as the image displayed in the first suggesting pattern, but in the second suggesting pattern, the operation effect suggesting image is displayed and the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is displayed. It operates from the initial position to a small falling state (suggested position) overlapping the upper part of the display area of the effect display device 1600 in front view, and the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) moves up and down between the initial position and the suggested position. It is moved in small steps in a direction. At this time, there is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword decoration.

Then, while the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is moved to the suggested position, the operation effective period for the operation means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) whose operation is predetermined to be effective is set. generate. In this example, when the operation of the sword ornament 5001 is enabled, the second suggestive pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the first suggestive pattern as the pre-operation suggestive effect. In other words, when the operation valid period occurs while the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is in the suggested position, the operation of the sword ornament 5001 is made valid at a higher rate than the operation button 410. It becomes possible to suggest to the player.

When the sword decoration 5001 becomes operationally valid, as shown in FIG. 142 (AA3), the operation valid period for the sword decoration 5001 is set in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is moving to the suggested position. generate At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation prompting effect is performed in which an operation prompting image prompting the player to sheathe the sword decorative body 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation effective period are displayed. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is changed from the sword sheathed state to the second sword drawn state (aura-attached state), and the player can sheath the sword. Further, even when the operation button 410 becomes operationally valid, the pre-operation suggestion effect may be executed in the second suggestion pattern, albeit at a low rate. At that time, as shown in FIG. 142 (AA2), an operation effective period for the operation button 410 is generated in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is moving to the suggested position, and at the same time, the effect display device 1600 In the display area, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image prompting the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation effective period are displayed. In the second suggestion pattern, when the player's operation is detected in the operation prompting presentation, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is moved from the suggested position to the initial state. Also, the movement of the specific decorative member SDY (blind blind) to the fully fallen state or the initial state may be performed from the state of operation to the suggested position without being returned to the initial state.

142 (AA2) or (AA3) described above, when an operation to the operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001) is detected, the above-described FIG. 140 (C) or (D) Similarly, when the result of the variable display this time is a big hit, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is moved from the initial state to the fully fallen state (Fig. 141 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is returned to the initial state, a big hit is notified in the display area of the performance display device 1600 where the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is cancelled. An image (decorative pattern stop mode "777", message "Good job") is displayed (Fig. 141 (CC2)). On the other hand, if the result of the variable display this time is a failure, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) remains in its initial state and is not moved, and the failure is notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600. An image (decorative design stop mode "767") is displayed (Fig. 141 (CC3)). The effect transition after the operation-promoting effect is the same as the effect transition after the operation-promoting effect in the first suggestion pattern.

Note that the operation pattern of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) in the second suggestive pattern is not limited to the pattern in which it is moved to the suggested position, and a plurality of operation patterns may be provided. For example, when a plurality of types of action patterns are provided so that the rate at which the sword decoration 5001 becomes operationally effective, the player's interest in the action can be heightened. It is possible to enhance interest in the used pre-operation suggesting effect and operation promoting effect.

(step up pattern)
When the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern generated by the operation effective period is performed in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is moved to the suggested position, and the sword decoration 5001 becomes operationally valid, 142 (AA1) → (AA3) until the sword decoration 5001 becomes operationally valid, in addition to the basic pattern of following the effect transition of FIG. A step-up pattern is provided to enable operation.

As shown in FIGS. 143(BB1) to (BB4), the step-up pattern pre-operation suggestion effect is an operation valid period for the sword ornament 5001 whose operation is pre-determined by the lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. is generated, that is, before the operation prompting effect for the sword ornament 5001 shown in FIG. 142 (AA3) is performed.

In the step-up pattern, first, an image suggesting an operation effect (rotating aura) similar to that in FIG. 142 (AA1) is displayed and the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is moved in small steps (FIG. 143 (BB1). ). Next, an operation effective period for the operation button 410 is generated while the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is moved to the suggested position. At the same time, the operation button 410 is decorated with light emission, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image prompting the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation effective period are displayed. (FIG. 143 (BB2)). Here, even if the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected during the operation effective period of the operation button 410, the result notification as shown in FIG. A suggested image (most blackout image) is displayed (FIG. 143 (BB3)). The switching suggestion image is displayed when the player presses the operation button 410 or when the effective period of operation of the operation button 410 expires. After that, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword sheathed state to the second sword drawn state (with aura), and the display area of the effect display device 1600 shows that the operation buttons 410 to the sword decoration 5001 are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. 143 (BB4). During this time, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is in the suggested position. Then, when the operation valid period of the sword decoration 5001 is generated, the operation promoting effect of the sword decoration 5001 shown in FIG. 142 (AA3) is performed. The effect transition after the operation-promoting effect is the same as the effect transition after the operation-promoting effect (FIG. 141) in the above-described second suggestion pattern.

It should be noted that only the image display of the button operation 410 may be performed without enabling the button operation 410 (no operation prompting effect) at the time of FIG. 143 (BB2) described above. It is sufficient if the player can be made to operate the sword ornament 5001 after turning the player's attention to the button operation 410 once. Also, the step-up pattern may be selectable not only when it becomes the second suggestive pattern, but also when it becomes the first suggestive pattern.

In this way, in the pre-operation suggesting effect of this example, before the operation effective period of the operation means in which one of the plurality of operation means is operational-effective is generated, the specific decorative member SDY ) can be changed, and an operation means that can be operated according to the position is suggested. Specifically, in the first suggestion pattern (FIG. 140(B)) in which the operation valid period is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is located at the initial position, the operation button 410 is operated. The second suggestion pattern (in FIG. 142 (AA1), the sword decoration body 5001 Therefore, the player pays attention to the state of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) in order to grasp which operation means is effective. It is possible to enhance the interest of the production.

In addition, in the second suggestive pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is moved in small steps in the vertical direction in the pre-operation suggestive effect. And, since the action effect (falling effect) of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is also used for the notification of the result after the operation of the operation means (Fig. 141), a sequence of the motion effect (falling effect) from the suggestive effect before the operation, from the upward and downward movement, to the falling effect. It is possible to show the effect of this, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest. In the above description, the state of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain), that is, the degree of expectation that the operating means that becomes operable by the movable body is operable is shown. A display may be provided to indicate expectations. In addition, when the operation means to be effective is determined, the operation button 410 is turned on, or the sword ornament 5001 is changed to the second drawn state, and the operation means to be effective is moved by vibration or the like. You can

In addition, in the second suggestive pattern, in the state where the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is located at the suggestive position, the operation button 410 is once activated (or after it is pretended to be activated). 2) A step-up pattern is provided in which the sword ornament 5001 becomes operable. As a result, the player is interested in both operation means. In addition, even if the operation button 410 becomes operationally valid immediately after the pre-operation suggesting effect, it is possible to have an expectation that the sword ornament 5001 may become operationally valid after that, so that the desire to operate is reduced and the interest in the game is reduced. can be suppressed.

In addition, in the first suggestion pattern of the pre-operation suggestion effect, the operation effect suggestion image before the operation valid period in which any one of the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001) is valid is displayed. At the timing (FIG. 140(B)), similar to the second suggestive pattern (FIG. 142(AA1)), the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is displayed from the initial position in the front view of the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is also possible to operate in a small drop state (suggested position) that overlaps with the upper portion, and move in small increments in the vertical direction between the initial position and the suggested position. It should be noted that the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is returned to the initial position (rest) when the valid operation period is to be generated thereafter. As a result, the motion of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) in the first suggestion pattern is partly the same as the motion in the second suggestion pattern at the same timing, so that the player is suggested an operation effect according to the first suggestion pattern. Even when the image is displayed, it is possible to make the user think that the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is being executed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to expect that the operation of the sword ornament 5001 will be valid even when the pre-operation suggestive effect based on the first suggestion pattern is being executed. Since the player strongly desires that the operation effective period occurs in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) that is operated at the display timing of the operation effect suggestion image is moved to the suggestion position, the pre-operation suggestion is performed. It is possible to improve the interest of the production.

[Specific operation-related effects]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when a specific result is obtained in the effect determination according to the result of the big hit determination, the game board side effect display device 1600 performs a specific effect Execute the rendition with the pattern. During the performance period during which a specific performance pattern is executed, a specific performance reception period (effective period) for establishing a specific performance execution condition by an operation by a player can be generated, and the operation is performed within the specific performance reception period. , it is possible to execute a specific operation-time effect (such as an effect suggesting the degree of expectation for granting a privilege) based on the establishment of a specific effect execution condition. The degree of expectation for awarding a privilege suggested as a result of a specific operation-time effect may be 100% or 0%.

Also, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as an operation means provided for such an effect at the time of operation (such as an effect suggesting the degree of expectation for granting a privilege when operated), an operation In addition to the button 410, it is possible to further provide another operation means (sword ornament 5001, etc.). In this regard, in a specific production pattern, based on the result of the production determination, the operation button 410 is provided with an opportunity to operate (when the operation button 410 is operated, a specific production execution condition is established). There is a case where an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (sword ornament 5001, etc.) (when a specific effect execution condition is established when another operation means is operated). Then, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (sword decoration body 5001, etc.), even if no operation is performed at the operation opportunity, the pre-operation effect in which the operation opportunity is given is generated. The player can recognize that the degree of expectation (big hit expectation) for awarding the privilege is higher than when the operation button 410 is given the opportunity to operate. The degree of expectation for awarding a privilege suggested when an opportunity to operate another operation means (sword ornament 5001, etc.) may be 100% or 0%.

According to such a configuration, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword decoration 5001), the operation time corresponding to the operation to the other operation means (such as the sword decoration 5001) It is possible to improve the amusement of the game in the pre-stage where the performance is not yet performed and in the situation where the operation is about to be performed. That is, in this case, the desired effect result (such as a effect result suggesting that the degree of expectation for awarding a privilege is high) does not appear in the operation-time effect corresponding to the operation of another operation means (such as the sword ornament 5001). Even if the operating means cannot be operated within the specific effect acceptance period (effective period), the game interest can be improved through such operation-related effects. Become.

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, an operation opportunity is given to any of the plurality of operation means (operation buttons 410, sword ornaments 5001, etc.) having such effects. In such a case, a common operation-related effect (see, for example, FIG. 142 (AA1)) can be executed at the time of granting these operation opportunities.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, at least
・After the “specific operation-related effect” that can appear even when the operation on the sword ornament 5001 is activated (makes it possible to accept the effect), the operation of the operation button 410 is activated (makes it possible to receive the effect). ), and the operation of the operation button 410 is enabled without the “specific operation-related effect” being started (making the effect acceptable). A plurality of presentation modes are prepared, such as a second presentation mode that generates an effective period (a presentation reception period) that is set, and by executing one of these presentation modes, the operation of the operation button 410 is validated (a presentation is performed). It is designed to generate an effective period (drawing acceptance period) during which the performance can be accepted.

According to such a configuration, there may be a period during which the operation of the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) among the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001, etc.) can be received for the effect. In either case of a period during which an operation means other than the specific operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001) can receive the effect, a common (specific ) can be executed, it becomes possible to make it interesting to see which of the specific operation means and another operation means can receive the effect. By allowing the player to perform the operation while the is being performed, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

In addition, in such a common (specific) operation-related effect, when a predetermined time elapses after the effect is started, one of the plurality of operation means (for example, the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001) is activated. At least at the time when the effect is started, it is determined which of the operation means (for example, the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001) the effect reception period will occur. should be kept confidential. In addition, for each operation-related effect exemplified below, an operation opportunity is given to any of the plurality of operation means (for example, the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001) before the effect acceptance period occurs. It may be possible to indicate whether the performance is to be performed (appear the effect result display), or during the period after the effect reception period occurs, including at the same time as the effect reception period occurs, multiple operations It is also possible to indicate which of the means (for example, the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001) to which the operation opportunity is given (appear the effect result display), and to what timing the operation-related effect is executed. It is possible to change it as appropriate.

[Auto button effect status]
In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, control to an automatic button effect state (specific effect state) can be executed, and when being controlled to this automatic button effect state, When the effect reception period for the operation button 410 (more precisely, a predetermined effect pattern in which the effect reception period for the operation button 410 is set) occurs based on the result of the big hit determination, the player can Even if the performance of the operation is not received, it is possible to execute a process (automatic performance function) for causing the same change to the performance as when the performance of the operation by the player is accepted within the performance acceptance period. According to such an automatic button effect state, even if the user does not operate the button each time the effect reception period occurs, the post-operation effect is generated when the button is operated, thereby suppressing the decrease in the interest in the game due to forgetting to operate the button. be able to As for the automatic effect function, the same effect reception as when the operation is actually performed may be generated when the automatic effect function functions, so that the process corresponding to the effect reception may be performed, or the effect reception may be generated. Alternatively, the same processing as when the performance reception is received may be performed.

In the embodiments relating to the "automatic effect function" described below, the above-described operation-related techniques, effects, settings, etc. may be appropriately combined and used, or may be used in place of each other.

Here, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the automatic button is operated by operating the operating means a plurality of times during the period in which the demo screen in which the pattern variation is not executed is displayed. Setting to the performance state is made possible. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by the first operation of the operation button 410, the menu screen is displayed by the second operation of the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). The "Various Settings" screen is displayed by selecting the "Various Settings" screen, and the "Various Settings" screen is displayed by the third operation of the operation button 410 (or by an operation means different from the operation button 410). When the "automatic button effect state setting" displayed inside is selected, the automatic button effect state is set. It should be noted that only the operation button 410 may be operated a plurality of times, or the operation of the operation button 410 and the operation of a different operation means may be operated a plurality of times.

On the other hand, during the period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state, the operation button 410 is operated only once to set the automatic button effect state. It is possible to set an automatic button performance state while keeping an eye on the progress of performance during pattern variation. However, there are some players who want to actively operate the operation buttons 410 regardless of whether or not the valid period has expired. If the automatic button effect state is set just by operating the button, the interest in the game may decrease. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in order to set the automatic button effect state during the period in which the symbol variation is being executed, the operation state of the operation button 410 must be held for a predetermined time ( Here, it is required to operate this once in a mode (so-called "long-press mode") that is maintained for 2 seconds). As a result, even if the operation button 410 is positively operated irrespective of whether or not the effective period has occurred during the period in which the pattern variation is in the execution state, the automatic button presentation state is entered. It becomes possible to make it difficult to cause erroneous setting. It should be noted that it is desirable that the automatic button effect state is not set even if the operation is performed in the long-pressing mode when at least the effect acceptance period is occurring during the period in which the pattern variation is in the execution state. .

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as a method of canceling the automatic button effect state in the state in which it is set, the demo screen in which the symbol variation is not yet executed is displayed. Different operation modes are required during the displayed period and during the period in which the symbol variation is being executed.

That is, during the period in which the demo screen is displayed in the state where the pattern variation is not executed, the setting of the automatic button effect state can be canceled by operating the operating means a plurality of times. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by the first operation of the operation button 410, the menu screen is displayed by the second operation of the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). The "Various Settings" screen is displayed by selecting the "Various Settings" screen, and the "Various Settings" screen is displayed by the third operation of the operation button 410 (or by an operation means different from the operation button 410). When the "cancel the automatic button effect state" displayed inside is selected, the setting of the automatic button effect state is canceled.

On the other hand, during the period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state, the setting of the automatic button effect state can be canceled by operating the operation button 410 only once. It is possible to cancel the setting of the automatic button performance state while keeping an eye on the development of the performance during the pattern variation. However, unlike the case of setting the automatic button effect state, the operation button 410 can be positioned to the operation state without maintaining the operation state for the operation button 410 for a predetermined time (even if the operation mode is not long press). The setting of the automatic button effect state is canceled only by detecting that the button has been pressed (only by operating in a single-shot operation mode). That is, it can be said that the fact that an operation button 410 has been operated in some way indicates that there is a desire to operate the operation button 410. By canceling the setting of the state and returning to the normal presentation state early, it is expected that the game interest is favorably maintained.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment is configured with a plurality of operation means including the operation button 410 . In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the operation button 410 is in the automatic button effect state set by the operation, the operation button 410 differs from the operation button 410 based on the result of the big hit determination. An effect reception period during which an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, a sword decoration 5001, etc.) (more precisely, a predetermined effect pattern in which an effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001, etc. is set) occurs, and even if the player's operation (operation on the sword decoration 5001) is not received within the effect reception period, the player's operation (operation on the sword decoration 5001) is not performed within the effect reception period. It is possible to execute a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change to the effect as when the effect is received. According to such a configuration, whether there is a period during which the operation of the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001, etc.) can receive the effect, or whether another operation means (for example, , sword ornament 5001) is executed (specific operation-related effect (see FIG. 164 (AA1), etc.)), the effect As a result, even if any of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 can receive the effect, there is no need to worry about forgetting to operate it, so that the user can enjoy such a specific operation-related effect with peace of mind. Become.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment,
When a first-side effect reception period occurs in which the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) among the plurality of operation means is set as an operation target while being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). , when the first operation means is not operated within the first side effect acceptance period, automatic processing can be executed to cause the same change in the effect as when the first operation means is operated. Yes (first automatic production means),
・The second side effect receiving period set as the operation target for the second operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001) among the plurality of operation means when being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) When it occurs, when the second operation means is not operated within the second side effect acceptance period, automatic processing is executed to cause the same change in the effect as when the second operation means is operated. Possible (second automatic production means)
With such a configuration, regardless of whether the first-side effect reception period or the second-side effect reception period occurs, when the same specific time has passed since the period occurred, the second Automatic processing by the first automatic effect means or automatic processing by the second automatic effect means can be executed.

According to such a configuration, when the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is controlled, the first side effect acceptance period in which the first operation means is set as the operation target, and the second operation means is the operation target. Even if any of the second side effect acceptance period set as occurs within the execution period of the pattern fluctuation, the automatic effect function can function when the same specific time has elapsed since the occurrence of those periods As a result, you can enjoy the production with peace of mind.

However, in the event that a first-side effect reception period occurs in which the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is set as an operation target, when a specific time has passed after the occurrence of the first-side effect reception period When the automatic processing by the first automatic performance means is executed, and when the time different from the specific time has passed since the first side performance reception period occurred, the automatic processing by the first automatic performance means is executed. It is also possible to make the performance progress within the pattern variation as there is a case. According to such a configuration, it was assumed that the automatic processing by the first automatic effect means would be executed when the specific time has passed since the first side effect acceptance period occurred, but the timing is different from this. Since the production reception is made and the production after the operation is automatically generated, it can be made to function as a surprise production.

In addition, when it is controlled to a specific production state (automatic button production state), the operating means is given more opportunities to operate within the pattern fluctuation period than when it is not controlled to a specific production state (automatic button production state). You may make it so that the ratio which the production|presentation acceptance period which is carried out generate|occur|produces becomes high. That is, in this case, as the frequency of occurrence of the production reception period increases, it can be assumed that the frequency of forgetting to operate within the production reception period also increases, but even if the operation is forgotten, automatic production Since the performance after the operation is executed by the functioning of the function, the performance reception period can be generated with a higher frequency while suppressing the deterioration of the game interest due to frequent forgetting to operate. Incidentally, when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), it is desirable to increase the rate of occurrence of both the effect reception period for the first operation means and the effect reception period for the second operation means. However, it is more desirable to make the degree of increase in the rate of occurrence different between the effect receiving period for the first operating means and the effect receiving period for the second operating means.

Also, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment,
When the effect acceptance condition is satisfied within the effect acceptance period, the post-operation effect can be executed (post-operation effect execution means),
・It is possible to execute a process for establishing a performance reception condition based on the fact that the player has performed an operation within the performance reception period (player operation reception means),
・When the player does not perform an operation within the effect acceptance period, it is possible to execute a process to establish the effect acceptance condition without receiving an operation by the player at a specific timing within the effect acceptance period (automatic effect acceptance means )
However, the specific timing within the effect reception period is set so that it does not arrive until at least half of the time set as the effect reception period has passed since the effect reception period started. I am planning to As a result, it is possible to give the player a sufficient margin to operate the player himself until the automatic effect function functions, and it is possible to leave the option of causing the effect acceptance by the player's operation. , the game interest can be maintained favorably.

In this case, the automatic processing by the first automatic effect means is executed when a specific time has passed since the first side effect reception period occurred, and the specific time after the first side effect reception period has occurred When the automatic processing by the first automatic effect means is executed when a different time has passed, when the effect progresses within the pattern variation, the above "specific time" or the above "specific time Any of the "time different from" is set as a time value longer than at least half of the time set as the first-side effect reception period.

Here, when the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs during the execution period of the symbol variation when the automatic button effect state is controlled, and the effect is accepted for the operation of the operation button 410 within the effect acceptance period. , the process of generating the post-operation effect in response to the reception of the effect is executed. However, at this time, in addition to the process of generating the post-operation effect in response to the reception of the effect, the process of canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state may also be performed.

Also, in this case, during the execution period of the pattern variation when the automatic button effect state is controlled, an effect acceptance period occurs for an operating means (sword ornament 5001, etc.) different from the operation button 410, and the effect acceptance occurs. Even when the operation to the sword decoration body 5001 is received during the period, the processing for generating the post-operation performance corresponding to the acceptance of the performance and the processing for canceling the setting of the automatic button performance state are executed respectively. is desirable. Also in this case, regarding the "post-operation effect in response to the effect reception", the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs during the period when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, and the sword decoration is performed during the effect reception period. It will be executed as an effect having the same content as the post-operation effect that is executed when the operation to the body 5001 is accepted.

That is, after being controlled to the automatic button production state (specific production state), the desire to return to the production state (normal production mode) in which the production can progress depending on the player's own operation (specific production state) a desire to terminate the state) may arise. Such a desire often arises when an effect reception period occurs during which an operation opportunity is given to the player, but there is a limited time from the start of the effect reception period to the end of the effect reception period. It is difficult to perform both an operation to end a specific production state and an operation to accept an operation within the system, and as a result, the opportunity to operate may be lost. If so, the interest in gaming may decline. In this regard, in the above configuration, when an effect reception period related to a specific effect occurs while being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation buttons to which the operation opportunity is given during the effect reception period 410 or sword ornament 5001 is operated only once (by being operated in a single-shot operation mode), the process of ending the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) and the process of causing a change in the effect. (processing to execute the effect after the operation) and are performed respectively, so that the desire to end the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) and progress the effect depending on the player's own operation is received. Even if it occurs within the period, it is possible to smoothly switch the presentation state.

However, regarding the setting change (setting change to automatic button effect state, setting cancellation of automatic button effect state) related to automatic button effect state during the period when the demo screen is displayed (symbol change is not executed) , the settings can be changed without requiring any operation on the sword ornament 5001. In other words, the sword ornament 5001 has a lower frequency of being given an operation opportunity than the operation button 410 during the execution period of the pattern variation, and when the operation opportunity is given by that amount, the expectation of a big hit is higher than that of the operation button 410. It is made high. Therefore, the sword ornament 5001 is not allowed to be operated only for the purpose of changing the setting of the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), and thus the sword ornament 5001 is given an opportunity to operate. It can be said that it is more desirable to maintain the amusement of the game by increasing the sense of premium when playing the game. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, while the demo screen in which the pattern variation is not yet executed is displayed, among the plurality of operation means, operation means (operation buttons) other than the sword ornament 5001 410 or another operation means) can be set to or canceled from the automatic button effect state by operating the button a plurality of times.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the automatic button effect state can be entered without requiring the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 even during the execution period of the pattern variation when the automatic button effect state is not controlled. Settings can be changed. That is, as described above, if the operation button 410 is operated once in the "long-press mode", it is controlled to the automatic button effect state. For the purpose of this, the operation on the sword ornament 5001 is not permitted.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the case where the settings related to the automatic button effect state can be changed by operating the sword ornament 5001 means that the pattern when it is controlled to the automatic button effect state. It is limited to a case where an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 occurs during the execution period of the variation, an operation for the sword decoration 5001 is received during the effect reception period, and an effect after the operation corresponding thereto appears. . According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the setting to the automatic button presentation state by operating the sword decoration 5001 without impairing the premium feeling when the sword decoration 5001 is given an opportunity to operate. become.

In addition, as a plurality of operation means provided in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when in the automatic button effect state, "auto In addition to operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) that can be subject to the "effect function", special operation means that are not subject to the "automatic effect function that generates the effect at the time of operation without being operated within the effect acceptance period" may further include. That is, in this case, when the symbol variation is in the execution state, an effect accepting period occurs during which an opportunity to operate the special operating means is given, and if the effect is accepted during the effect accepting period, the operation for the special operating means is accepted. The degree of expectation for a big hit is suggested by the post-operation production in response to the reception of the production. However, even if the state is controlled to the automatic button effect state, if the operation for the special operation means is not received within the effect acceptance period, the same effect after the operation as when the above effect is accepted will appear. no. However, in this case, the same post-operation effect as when the effect is accepted does not appear, but if the effect is different from when the effect is accepted, it may be made to appear.

In addition, regarding the setting to the automatic button effect state using the operation button 410 (operation in the mode of long pressing), the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs during the period in which the pattern variation is in the execution state. In addition to the time, the effect reception period for the operation means other than the operation button 410 (the effect reception period in which the degree of expectation is suggested by operating the sword ornament 5001, or the degree of expectation is suggested by operating the special operation means It is desirable that this is not allowed even if a performance reception period, etc.) is occurring. That is, if the automatic button effect state is generated by operating the operation button 410 (operating in the form of a long press) during the effect acceptance period for an operation means different from the operation button 410. In the middle of the performance reception period, the original performance reception (operating means different from the operation button 410) is activated by activating the "automatic performance function that generates the performance at the time of operation without operating within the performance reception period". If the player is unfamiliar with the automatic button effect state, the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 may occur without any operation. This is because the user may be puzzled as to whether there is an effect receiving period for an operation means different from the above, and it is feared that this will reduce the interest in the game.

Also, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the precursor effect can be executed prior to the occurrence of the effect reception period. A sign effect that appears prior to the occurrence of the effect reception period when it is not, and a sign effect that appears prior to the occurrence of the effect reception period when it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). You may enable it to be performed as a display mode different from. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to preliminarily recognize whether or not there is a performance state in which the automatic performance function can function within the specific performance reception period, and the performance can be enjoyed without anxiety.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a specific image suggesting the remaining time (for example, "bar display" suggesting the remaining time) is displayed during the effect acceptance period. However, when the effect reception period occurs, at least until the specific image (for example, "bar display" indicating the remaining time) is displayed, the specific image is displayed so that the specific image is displayed. An effect image different from the specific image (for example, an image in which lightning strikes the specific region) may be displayed outside the area (forecast effect). That is, in this case, when the effect reception period occurs, by confirming the movement of the effect image different from the specific image, the user can pay attention to the part where the hidden "specific image indicating the remaining time" will appear. can be urged, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player's operation is not completed in time and the specific effect acceptance period ends, and furthermore, Even if the operation by the player is not in time, the automatic effect function functions to execute the effect after the operation, so that it is expected that the interest in the game is preferably maintained.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute the state setting and setting cancellation related to the automatic button effect state by the operation of the player. Based on this, the state may be set to the automatic button effect state or the setting of the automatic button effect state may be canceled according to the progress of the game or effect. As an example of the state setting and setting cancellation according to the progress of the game or effect, for example, "While it is controlled in the normal game state, it is controlled as an automatic button effect state, but the jackpot game state Or, when the state is shifted to a high-probability time-saving state, the automatic button effect state is canceled. A control mode such as "generate a production pattern that cancels the setting when a predetermined time has passed since the occurrence" or "generate an automatic button production state over a period in which multiple symbol variations are executed" It is possible to adopt a control mode such as . Alternatively, the pachinko machine 1 may be always controlled to the automatic button presentation state, and in this case, the automatic button presentation state is not set and released, and the "automatic button presentation state" is set and released. This process itself will disappear.

In addition, the timing at which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions may be when the remaining time of the effect reception period is exhausted, or at a predetermined timing after that, or when the remaining time of the effect reception period is left. It may be an intermediate timing (specific timing). When the remaining time of the production reception period is consumed, or when the above-mentioned automatic production function functions at a predetermined timing after that, the production after the operation will be performed as if the production reception was made after the production reception period ended. will be executed. On the other hand, if the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at the middle timing (specific timing) when the remaining time of the effect acceptance period is left, the above-mentioned automatic effect function will function in the same way as when there is an actual operation. At the point of time (specific timing), the effect reception period ends and the post-operation effect is executed.

However, in order to ensure a sense of security that a post-operation effect will occur even if the button is not operated when it is controlled to the automatic button effect state, it is necessary to wait until the end of the effect reception period (effect reception period). It is important to make the above-described automatic effect function function at a specific timing within the period, and to start the post-operation effect corresponding to this. That is, in this case, when the above-described automatic effect function does not function even though the specific timing within the effect reception period has arrived, the player himself/herself operates after the specific timing arrives to generate the post-operation effect. This makes it possible to reduce the feeling of uneasiness when being controlled to the automatic button effect state It is possible that the effect after the operation is recognized, and the effect after the operation may not be confirmed”, “The automatic effect function may not function due to some trouble, and the effect after the operation may not be confirmed”, etc.) be able to

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has a characteristic technique related to such an automatic button effect state. Characteristic techniques related to the automatic button effect state will be described in order below. You may make it use combining suitably.

In describing each of the characteristic techniques below, it is assumed that in a specific production state (automatic button production state), when control is not normally performed to the specific production state (automatic button production state) When a performance reception period occurs, the same post-operation performance as when the operation is performed is generated even if the operation is not performed within the performance reception period. However, instead of this, a specific display effect (display effect that can be selected based on the result of the big hit determination) that can be executed only when it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is prepared, When a specific effective period related to the specific display effect occurs while the specific display effect is being performed, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is performed is generated even if the operation is not performed within the specific effective period. can be According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance (improvement of the performance by permitting the occurrence of a specific display performance) when being controlled to a specific rendering state (automatic button rendering state). Of course, even if a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is occurring, the automatic effect function may not function during a different effect acceptance period set when the specific display effect is not being performed. On the other hand, during a specific valid period when a specific display effect is being performed, an automatic effect function functions to save the trouble of operating, so that a VIP feeling can be enjoyed. Therefore, it is expected that the amusement of the game will be favorably enhanced. It should be noted that it is not necessary to prevent the automatic effect function from functioning during all of the different effect reception periods set when a specific display effect is not being performed, and at least part of the effect reception period is an automatic effect. If the function is disabled, the above effects will occur when the specific effective period occurs while the specific display effect is being performed (when the effect reception period occurs during which the automatic effect function always functions). can be expected. Further, even when such a specific effective period occurs, if there is no operation by the player until the specific timing within the specific effective period arrives, the above-described automatic effect function is activated at the specific timing. It is desirable to start the post-operation production corresponding to this.

Further, after preparing at least a first specific display effect, a second specific display effect, and a third specific display effect as specific display effects that can be executed based on the result of the big hit determination,
・When the first specific effective period occurs while the first specific display effect is being executed, the automatic effect described above occurs at the timing when the first predetermined time has passed since the first specific effective period occurred. While the function functions to terminate the first specific validity period and generate a post-operation effect corresponding to this,
- If the second specific effective period occurs while the second specific display effect is being executed, a second predetermined period longer than the first predetermined period after the occurrence of the second specific effective period. At the timing of the elapse of, the above-described automatic effect function functions to end the second specific valid period and generate a post-operation effect corresponding to this, and further,
・If the third specific effective period occurs while the third specific display effect is being executed, the third specific effective period is reached despite being controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state). Each processing may be performed in a specific state of performance such that if there is no operation before the end of the operation, the same post-operation performance as when the operation was performed cannot appear. According to such a configuration, even if an effect reception period (specific effective period) occurs while being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the effect reception period starts from the time when the effect reception period occurs. The above-mentioned automatic effect function functions when the predetermined time elapses, or the above-described automatic effect function does not function until a second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time elapses, Even if the performance acceptance period ends, the above-described automatic performance function may be disabled in the first place. Therefore, even if it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), it is confirmed which type of specific display effect was performed when the effect acceptance period (specific valid period) occurred. For example, when the above-described automatic effect function does not function even after the first predetermined time has passed, the above-mentioned It is possible to develop the performance with a sense of tension such as whether the automatic performance function of the above functions or whether the above-mentioned automatic performance function does not function in the first place. Note that the first specific effective period, the second specific effective period, and the third specific effective period are all set when the operating means (for example, the operation button 410) to be operated is in an operated state (so-called When the one-shot operation is performed), the effect is accepted and the effect after the operation is generated.

It should be noted that the first specific display effect, the second specific display effect, and the third specific display effect can only be executed when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). There may be. In this way, when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), a display mode that cannot appear when not controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) can be displayed. In this case, it is possible to favorably maintain the amusement of the game in the specific effect state (automatic button effect state). In addition, a first specific display effect (first specific effective period) and a second specific display effect (second specific effective period) are prepared, and a third specific display effect (third specific effective period) is prepared. does not necessarily have to be prepared. Further, the post-operation effects that occur when the effects are accepted in the first specific effective period, the second specific effective period, and the third specific effective period may have different effect contents.

Also, in the case where the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions to generate the effect after the operation, it is necessary to determine at what timing within the effect acceptance period the automatic effect function functioned In order to make it possible to recognize the remaining time of the production acceptance period, the automatic production function functioned for the bar display (display that changes the image (here, the area changes) with the passage of time). The post-operation effect may be generated in a state in which it is displayed instead of being hidden at this time. According to such a configuration, for example, by checking the remaining time indicated by the "bar display" that is continuously displayed when the automatic effect function functions, the effect reception period is the first specified effective period ( A period in which the automatic effect function functions when the first predetermined time, which is a relatively early stage after the effect reception period occurs, and a second specific effective period (relatively after the effect reception period occurs) It becomes possible to recognize whether it was a period in which the automatic effect function functions when the second predetermined time, which is a late stage, has passed.

In this sense, when the first specific effective period (the period in which the automatic effect function functions when the first predetermined time has passed since the effect acceptance period occurred) occurs, and the second specific effective period ( A period in which an automatic performance function functions when a second predetermined time elapses after the occurrence of the performance acceptance period) is different in the degree of expectation for a big hit (for example, the second specific valid period is more advantageous). It is desirable to Further, in this case, the first specific display effect and the second specific display effect may not necessarily be executed. However, when the first specific display effect and the second specific display effect are executed, a big hit is expected when the first specific display effect appears and when the second specific display effect appears. different degree (for example, the second specific display effect is more advantageous). In addition, when the post-operation effect is generated by the player's operation within the effect acceptance period, the "bar display" may be hidden in the state where the post-operation effect is generated, or the automatic effect function described above may be used. function, the post-operation effect may be generated in a state in which the "bar display" is displayed instead of being hidden. The post-operation effect may not be executed as a display change on the effect display device 1600, but may be executed as light emission by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or an action by a movable decorative body, for example. good too.

Further, when the post-operation effect is generated by the functioning of the above-described automatic effect function, the player does not get involved in the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) that is the object of operation. Since the effect is automatically generated, there is a concern that the player may not be able to grasp which operation means the automatically generated post-operation effect corresponds to. Therefore, when the above-described automatic effect function is activated to generate the post-operation effect, first, an operation target suggesting image (for example, an operation target operation In addition to displaying an image display imitating means, even if the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions, the operation target suggesting image is not hidden, but is displayed to generate a post-operation effect. It is desirable to In this case, the display mode (for example, color or transmittance) of the operation target suggestion image before and after the post-operation effect is generated may not necessarily be the same. It suffices if it can be recognized even in the state where the post-operation effect has occurred. On the other hand, if the post-operation effect is generated by the player's operation within the effect reception period, the operation object suggesting image may be hidden in the state where the post-operation effect is generated, or the above-described automatic display may be performed. As in the case where the effect function functions, the post-operation effect may be generated in a state in which the operation target suggesting image is displayed instead of being hidden. When the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions, such as when the automatic effect function functions within the above-mentioned first specific effective period or when the automatic effect function functions within the above-described second specific effective period, always The post-operation effect may be generated in a state in which the operation target suggesting image is displayed instead of being hidden.

Further, at this time, if the post-operation effect is generated in a state in which the operation object suggesting image is displayed in one of a plurality of modes with different degrees of expectation for the big win, both the mode of the operation object suggesting image and the mode of the post-operation effect can be generated. can be confirmed at the same time, and the amusement of the game can be improved. Further, the post-operation effect may not be executed as a display change on the effect display device 1600, but may be executed as light emission by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or an action by a movable decorative body, for example. There may be.

For example, even if the pachinko machine 1 is not equipped with the above-described automatic effect function, the degree of expectation of a big win (for example, it appears only when a big win is obtained) as an image suggesting an operation object (such as a simulated image imitating an operation means). A plurality of modes are prepared with different ratios of execution of post-operation effects in non-existent mode), and when an operation is accepted by an operation by a player, the operation target is started at the time when the post-operation effects are started to be executed based on the operation acceptance. If the suggestive image (such as a simulated image imitating an operation means) is displayed in one of the plurality of modes with different degrees of expectation, the mode of the suggestive image to be operated and the mode of the post-operation effect can be changed. Both can be confirmed at the same time, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Also, when generating an effective period (effect reception period) during which the model image is displayed, the type of the effective period (effect reception period) type, etc.), the display area is reduced as time passes (the first valid period generated by the establishment of the first condition), and the display area is reduced as time passes It is desirable that there is a case where no display is performed (a second effective period that occurs when the second condition is satisfied). In other words, during the valid period in which the display area is reduced as time passes and no display is performed, it becomes difficult to recognize how much time is left to accept the operation. It becomes possible to suitably maintain the tension inside. It should be noted that "does not display the specific image in such a manner that the display area of the specific image decreases over time" means, for example, that normally (the first effective period), the gauge is displayed in such a manner that the display area decreases over time. Where the image is displayed, it can be realized by not displaying the gauge image itself during the second valid period, or by adopting a method in which the gauge image is displayed but the display area is not reduced with the passage of time. be.

In this regard, when the operation is accepted during the second effective period (when the display area is not reduced as time passes), changes (display change, lamp emission, etc.) It is desirable that the model image is displayed instead of being hidden when the execution of at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effects is started. As a result, it becomes possible to grasp that the operation was accepted while the model image was displayed (before the expiration of the valid period). can be removed.

In this case, the display mode of the model image (for example, color transmittance, etc.) may not necessarily be the same, and the simulated image may be in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize it with another image, and the operation reception will be able to tell which operation means was the operation target. It is sufficient if the corresponding change (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as display change and lamp emission) is recognizable. However, in order to preferably obtain such an effect, at least at the time when the change corresponding to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as display change and lamp emission) is started. It is desirable that the display state of the model image is maintained in the manner in which it was displayed before the operation was accepted, and that the model image is not obscured by other images. Therefore, if the simulated image is displayed dynamically during the valid period during which operation acceptance is permitted, at least one of the changes (display change, lamp emission, etc. caused by the post-operation effect) corresponding to the operation acceptance ) is started, it is desirable to continue the dynamic display. On the other hand, within the first valid period, if a change (at least one of the changes caused by the effect after the operation, such as a display change or lamp emission) occurs due to the operation by the player, the change The model image may be hidden when an event (display change, lamp light emission, etc.) occurs. A change (display change, lamp light emission, etc.) may be generated in response to operation reception in the state.

However, even during the valid period in which "the display area of the specific image is not reduced over time", a simulated image simulating the operation means to be operated is displayed. For images, it is desirable to display them as moving images that progress at a particular speed. With such a configuration, although the remaining time is not suggested by the gauge image, it is difficult to grasp the remaining time during which operation reception is permitted depending on how much the moving image based on the model image has progressed. It is expected that it will be possible and that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this example includes the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) and the second operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001) as the operation means. There are cases where a valid period (effect acceptance period) is generated during which operation acceptance for the second operating means is allowed (effect acceptance period), and there are cases where a valid period (effect acceptance period) where operation acceptance for the second operating means is allowed is generated. Of these, during the valid period during which acceptance of operations on the first operating means is permitted, a first simulated image simulating the first operating means is displayed, and during the valid period during which acceptance of operations on the second operating means is permitted, the second operating means is displayed. The second simulated image is displayed. In addition, between the effective period during which operation reception is permitted for the first operating means and the effective period during which operation reception is permitted for the second operating means, the degree of expectation for a big win suggested when the operation is accepted (post-operation effect As a result, the ratio of execution of the mode that appears only at the time of the big hit) is different. In addition to the effective period during which operation reception is permitted for the first operation means (effect reception period) and the effective period during which operation reception is permitted for the second operation means (effect reception period), effective periods different from these are defined. It may be possible to generate more. In this regard, when the operation is accepted in the valid period in which the expectation of the big hit is high (for example, the valid period in which the acceptance of operation on the second operation means is allowed), the change according to the operation acceptance (display change, , lamp lighting, etc.), the model image (second model image) is not hidden but displayed.

As a result, in addition to the case where the operation is accepted in the situation shown in FIG. In spite of this, the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is erroneously operated, and the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) remains in the operation state (the operation is performed). Even if the second operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001) is operated and the operation is accepted, the player side is made to recognize that the performance is accepted properly. be able to

In this case, the display mode of the model image (for example, color transmittance, etc.) may not necessarily be the same, and the simulated image may be in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize it with another image, and the operation reception will be able to tell which operation means was the operation target. It is sufficient if the corresponding change (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as display change and lamp emission) is recognizable. However, in order to preferably obtain the above-described effects, at least at the time when the change corresponding to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as display change and lamp emission) is started, the operation It is desirable to maintain the display state of the model image in the manner in which it was displayed before the reception was made, and to prevent the gauge image from becoming difficult to see due to other images. Therefore, if the simulated image is displayed dynamically during the valid period during which operation acceptance is permitted, at least one of the changes (display change, lamp emission, etc. caused by the post-operation effect) corresponding to the operation acceptance ) is started, it is desirable to continue the dynamic display. In addition, in order to make the player side recognize that the effect has been properly accepted, changes (display changes, lamp emission, etc.) according to the operation acceptance by the operation by the player are made within the first effective period. Even if it occurs, the model image (first model image) is not hidden in the state where the change (display change, lamp light emission, etc.) , lamp emission, etc.).

According to such a configuration, "determination means for making a determination, production means for performing an effect based on the result of determination by the determination means, and based on the fact that a predetermined result is obtained in the determination by the determination means and a specific operation receiving portion (operating button 410 that can be displaced between a normal position and a pressed position) provided to be displaceable between a first position and a second position. ), a first detection unit capable of detecting a specific action (pressing operation) by the player based on the displacement of the specific operation receiving unit to the second position, and a special operation receiving unit different from the specific operation receiving unit (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is provided with a second detection unit capable of detecting a special action (for example, sword sheathing operation) by the player, A plurality of effect reception periods including a first effect reception period and a second effect reception period are prepared as the effect reception period (different types), and the first effect reception period is specified by imitating the specific operation receiving unit. A model image is displayed, and an effect reception is performed by detection by the first detection unit. During the second effect reception period, a special model image simulating the special operation receiving unit is displayed, 2. The performance reception is performed by the detection by the detection unit 2, and the specific action by the player despite the fact that the special model image imitating the special operation reception unit is displayed during the second performance reception period. When the specific operation receiving portion is displaced from the first position to the second position by the second detection, even if the special action is performed by the player while maintaining the specific operation receiving portion at the second position, the second detection Effect reception is performed by detection by the unit, and the post-operation effect can be executed based on the reception of the effect.

In such a configuration, "Even if the special action is performed by the player while the specific operation receiving section is maintained at the second position, the effect reception is performed by the detection by the second detection section, and the effect is received. At the time when the post-operation production is started to be executed based on the reception of the production, the special model image imitating the special operation receiving part is not hidden and is kept displayed, so that the side who made the operation by mistake can The player side can be made to recognize that the post-operation effect is being executed as an operation on the proper side.

When the special model image is displayed in one of a plurality of modes with different degrees of expectation for big hits, the post-operation effect is started in the displayed mode. If the effect is accepted without such an erroneous operation being performed, the model image may be left displayed instead of being hidden at the time when the post-operation effect is started to be executed. The model image may be hidden at the time when the performance is started.

By the way, the frequency of occurrence of the second effect receiving period during which the special operation receiving part is provided with the opportunity to operate is lower than that of the first effect receiving period during which the opportunity to operate is given to the specific operation receiving part. In many cases, this is considered to be one of the causes of operational errors. Therefore, at the occurrence of the second effect reception period in which the special operation receiving part is given an operation opportunity, it is suggested that the reception of the effect is permitted or that the reception of the effect is permitted. It is desirable to output the acceptable reception sound. As a result, the player can recognize that the second effect acceptance period has occurred, and it is expected that an operation error is less likely to occur. The "acceptable sound" means that when a sound is started to be output, an acceptable acceptability state (effective period) always occurs while the sound is being output (while sound data is assigned). It is a sound whose allowable state (effective period) has already occurred. In other words, it indicates that the output is started within the set time during which reception of the performance is permitted and the state is reached in which reception of the performance is permitted, or before the start of the set time during which reception of the performance is permitted. It is something that suggests that the output is started at this time and that the reception of the effect will be permitted.

However, even at the occurrence of the first effect acceptance period in which the specific operation receiving part is given an opportunity to operate, it indicates that the effect acceptance is permitted or that the effect acceptance will be permitted. An acceptable acceptance sound may be output. However, in this case, it is desirable that the form (tone color, etc.) of the allowable acceptance sound is different between when the first effect accepting period occurs and when the second effect accepting period occurs. Alternatively, during the first effect reception period, even if the effect reception is made while the reception permission sound is being output, the reception permission sound that is in the output state is continued without being ended, but in the second effect reception period. In (3), if the effect is accepted while the acceptable acceptance sound is being output, it is desirable to end the acceptance acceptable sound in the output state in the middle. Both of these configurations may be adopted. According to such a configuration, it becomes easy to grasp which of the first effect receiving period and the second effect receiving period will occur, and an operation to the specific operation receiving section and a special operation receiving period can be performed. It becomes possible to properly grasp which of the operation on the part and the operation on the part has been accepted.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, after displaying a gauge image (small gauge image) having a relatively small display area, the display area of the gauge image (small gauge image) is reduced as time elapses. (For example, the display area is finally set to "0") to generate a small gauge effective period (effect reception period) that suggests the remaining time for which operation reception is permitted. After displaying a relatively large gauge image (large gauge image), the display area of the gauge image (large gauge image) is reduced over time (for example, the display area is finally set to "0"). There is a case where a large gauge effective period (effect reception period) is generated that suggests the remaining time for which operation reception is permitted by performing a display to accept the operation. The effective period of the small gauge in which the image of the small gauge is displayed and the effective period of the large gauge in which the image of the large gauge is displayed are different from each other. The rate at which a mode that does not appear is executed is different (for example, the large gauge valid period has a higher expectation of a big hit). In addition to the small gauge valid period and the large gauge valid period, a valid period different from these may be generated. The small gauge valid period and the large gauge valid period may provide an operation opportunity to the same operation target, or may provide an operation opportunity to different operation targets.

In this regard, when an operation is accepted during the effective period of the large gauge, the change corresponding to the operation acceptance (at least one of the changes caused by the effect after the operation, such as a display change or lamp emission) is started at the time when the execution is started. It is desirable to keep the large gauge image visible rather than hidden. In addition, even at the time when a change (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as display change and lamp emission) in response to the operation acceptance starts to be executed, the large gauge image becomes smaller as time passes. It is desirable to ensure that the display is not terminated and continues. As a result, while the large gauge image was displayed, there was a sense of security that it seemed that there was a lot of remaining time left, but after the operation was accepted, it was questioned whether the operation was properly accepted. This makes it possible to make the user feel a sense of uneasiness, and to appropriately maintain the sense of tension.

In this case, the display mode of the gauge image (for example, color and transmittance, etc.) may not necessarily be the same, and the gauge image may be in a state where it is difficult to see the gauge image with another image. However, in order to preferably obtain the above-described effects, at least at the time when the change corresponding to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as display change and lamp emission) is started, the operation It is desirable to maintain the display state of the gauge image in the manner in which it was displayed before the reception was made, and to prevent the gauge image from becoming difficult to see due to other images. On the other hand, if the player's operation causes a change (at least one of the changes caused by the effect after the operation, such as a change in the display or the light emission of the lamp) in response to the reception of the operation by the player during the effective period of the small gauge, the change occurs. The gauge image (small gauge image) may be hidden when something (display change, lamp light emission, etc.) occurs. ) may be displayed instead of being hidden, and a change (display change, lamp emission, etc.) may be generated according to the reception of the operation.

In addition, when the large gauge effective period occurs, it is desirable to output a reception acceptance sound that suggests that the reception of the performance is permitted, or that the reception of the performance is permitted. . As a result, the player can recognize that the large gauge effective period has occurred, and the sense of security until the operation is accepted can be emphasized. The "acceptable sound" means that when a sound is started to be output, an acceptable acceptability state (effective period) always occurs while the sound is being output (while sound data is assigned). It is a sound whose allowable state (effective period) has already occurred. In other words, it indicates that the output is started within the set time during which reception of the performance is permitted and the state is reached in which reception of the performance is permitted, or before the start of the set time during which reception of the performance is permitted. It is something that suggests that the output is started at this time and that the reception of the effect will be permitted.

However, even when the small gauge effective period occurs, a reception acceptance sound may be output to suggest that the performance reception is permitted or that the performance reception is permitted. However, in this case, it is desirable to change the form (tone color, etc.) of the acceptability sound between when the small gauge valid period occurs and when the large gauge valid period occurs. Alternatively, during the effective period of the small gauge, even if the effect is received while the permitted reception sound is being output, the permitted reception sound that is in the output state is continued without being terminated, but during the effective period of the large gauge. It is desirable to end the acceptable acceptance sound in the output state when the effect acceptance is made while the acceptance acceptable sound is being output. Both of these configurations may be adopted. According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily grasp which of the small gauge valid period and the large gauge valid period will occur, and operation reception during the small gauge valid period and the large gauge valid period can be performed. It becomes possible to properly grasp which of the operation acceptance and the operation reception in the period is performed.

The large-gauge image and the small-gauge image may not only differ in size, but may also differ in shape (such as images that are not similar).

Note that, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above (or later), during the period in which operation reception is permitted, the simulated image is displayed dynamically so as to depict how the operation receiving portion is displaced. It is what is displayed. In this regard, the model image is not hidden and remains displayed at the time when the change (at least one of the changes caused by the effect after the operation, such as the display change and the light emission of the lamp) corresponding to the operation reception starts to be executed. In this case, the dynamic display of the model image may be continued without being terminated.

Further, the model image and the gauge image may be displayed as an integrated model image, which is described later, in which they are integrated.

In each example of effect described above and each example of effect described later, "operation reception" means detection by mechanical operation means such as buttons, as well as by detecting contact with a specific operation receiving part with a touch sensor. It may be one in which the operation is accepted, or one in which the operation is accepted by detecting the movement of the player in the specific area without contact.

In addition, when the effect that generates the effect acceptance period in which the operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any of the plurality of operation means) is referred to as "operation-related effect", the operation-related effect is not related to this. It may be executed in parallel with another specific effect (for example, movable body effect, count effect, etc.) without. However, in this case, when the "operational effect" is executed but "another specific effect unrelated to this" is not executed, the "operational effect" and "another unrelated effect" It is desirable that the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a higher rate than in the effect situation in which the "specific effect" is paralleled. In other words, when there is a production situation in which "operation-related production" and "another specific production unrelated to this" are performed in parallel, it is assumed that the production reception is not performed in the "operation-related production" and the post-operation production is not executed. Also, since ``another specific effect unrelated to this'' is in the execution state, the decline in gaming interest can be suppressed, whereas the ``operation-type effect'' is executed but ``another specific effect unrelated to this'' is being executed. When there is a production situation in which the "specific production" is not executed, if the production reception is not performed in the "operation system production" and the production after the operation is not executed, it will be in a situation where no production is executed. Therefore, a decline in interest in gaming is inevitable. Therefore, when the "operational effect" is executed but "another specific effect unrelated to this" is not executed, the "operational effect" and "another specific effect unrelated to this" By making the rate at which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions higher than in the effect situation in which "effect" is paralleled, it is possible to preferably maintain the game interest when the operation system effect occurs. become. The percentage may be 100%. By the way, the premonition effect that is performed before the effect reception period occurs, and the effect that the operation means to be operated operates are executed as "operation system effect" or related effects. It can be said that it is a thing. In addition, as the ``other specific effect'', for example, if it is generated before the start of the effect acceptance period (preferably, the premonitory effect), it is suggested in advance that the above-mentioned automatic effect function will function more often. be able to In this case, it is desirable that the effect be executed as an effect that ends after the end of the effect acceptance period (preferably, the post-operation effect). On the other hand, as "another specific effect", for example, if it is executed as an effect that occurs after the start of the effect reception period (preferably, a sign effect) and ends before the end of the effect reception period, It becomes possible to recognize only immediately before whether the situation is such that the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a high rate, so that the effect can be provided in a tense atmosphere. In this regard, as "another specific effect", if it is to be generated before the start of the effect reception period (preferably, the sign effect), the "another specific effect" is repeated multiple times within one symbol variation. If it is done, it will be executed even when the production reception period does not occur, so the ratio of the automatic production function to function when "another specific production" is executed is high. It will be possible to create a sense of tension about whether the production acceptance period will occur.

In addition, when it is in a specific production state (automatic button production state), the loss variation corresponding to the result of the big hit determination is sequentially digested, and the number of times of execution is a specific value (for example, 999 times). Until reaching the 1000th loss variation), an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any of a plurality of operation means) based on the result of the big hit determination can be generated with a predetermined probability. In addition, even if the performance acceptance period occurs, when there is no operation by the player, the above automatic performance function may or may not function. On the other hand, when it is in a specific production state (automatic button production state), the loss variation according to the result of the big hit determination is sequentially digested, and the number of times of execution is a specific value (for example, 999 times). , and when reaching the 1000th loss variation), in the pattern variation (production pattern) that reaches the specific value, regardless of the result of the big hit determination, an operation opportunity for the operation means (any of a plurality of operation means) is always generated, and even if there is no operation by the player within the effect reception period, the above-mentioned automatic effect function is functioned, and there is an operation by the player within the effect reception period. A process for always generating the same post-operation effect as the time may be executed. According to such a configuration, when the number of consecutive executions of the losing variation reaches a specific value, "The player should be operated every time the effect acceptance period occurs while the losing variation is being continuously performed. As if he felt responsible for what he had done so far, the pachinko machine 1 itself always functioned automatically even if there was no operation by the player. Since it is realized as an effect to make the game play, the interest in the game can be preferably maintained. It should be noted that at this time, in the effect acceptance period that occurs when the losing variation is sequentially digested and the number of executions reaches a specific value (for example, the 1000th losing variation), the losing variation is sequentially digested and executed. A special display image (for example, It is desirable to make a message such as "If it is troublesome, I will operate it for you"). Further, even after the symbol variation (production pattern) reaching a specific value is digested, the symbol variation is repeated every time the symbol variation is digested until a specific condition (for example, the occurrence of a jackpot game state) is satisfied. Within (production pattern), regardless of the result of the big hit determination, the production acceptance period in which the operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any of the plurality of operation means) is always generated, and a special display image (for example, " If it is troublesome, I will operate it on your behalf." It is desirable to execute a process that always generates the post-operation effect.

In addition, when in a specific production state (automatic button production state), the loss variation according to the result of the big hit determination is sequentially digested, and the number of times of execution is a specific value (for example, 999 consecutive times). The number of remaining variations until reaching the 1000th lost variation) may be displayed.

In addition, while in a specific production state (automatic button production state), the loss variation according to the result of the big hit determination is sequentially digested and until the number of executions reaches a specific value, during the pattern variation, the first operation Both the effect receiving period for the means and the effect receiving period for the second operating means can occur. , the effect progress may be made so that only one of the effect receiving period for the first operating means and the effect receiving period for the second operating means always occurs, and the other side cannot occur. According to such a configuration, since the operation opportunity is always given to the same operation means, it is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of the effect reception period itself, which causes expectations. become nauseous. However, in this production example, ``Even though the player was urged to operate each time the production acceptance period occurred while the losing variation was being continuously executed, no results were obtained. As if he felt responsible for what he had done so far, even if there was no operation by the player, the pachinko machine 1 itself is realized as an effect that always functions the automatic effect function. In order not to have such expectations any longer, the effect reception period is generated for the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) with a relatively low degree of expectation at the time of occurrence, and the second operation means (for example, It is desirable not to generate an effect acceptance period for the sword ornament 5001).

Further, during the first effect reception period in which the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) of the plurality of operation means is provided with an operation opportunity, a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is controlled. Although it can occur both when it is not activated and when it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the second operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001) among the plurality of operation means Regarding the second effect acceptance period in which the operation opportunity is given to, it cannot occur when it is not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), and is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). It may be possible to generate it when According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance when being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), and when in the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) game interest can be maintained favorably.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when generating the effect reception period based on the result of the big hit determination,
Displaying a model image imitating the operating means (an operation target suggesting image suggesting the operating means to be operated) (model image display means),
When the player performs an operation while the model image is being displayed after the effect reception period has occurred, the post-operation effect can be executed based on the operation (player operation reception means),
・After the effect reception period has occurred, if a specific timing arrives while the model image is being displayed and the player has not performed an operation, the post-operation effect can be executed without receiving an operation by the player ( automatic production reception means)
However, the model image is displayed in one of a plurality of modes with different ratios (expectations) at which the post-operation effect is executed in a "mode advantageous to the player" when the effect is accepted. It is desirable to be able to According to such a configuration, the degree of expectation can be recognized in either case where the player operation receiving means generates the post-operation effect or the automatic effect receiving means generates the post-operation effect. It will be possible to generate a post-operation production while it is being done.

Further, when the post-operation effect is generated by the functioning of the above-described automatic effect function, the player does not get involved in the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) that is the object of operation. Since the effect is automatically generated, there is a concern that the player may not be able to grasp which operation means the automatically generated post-operation effect corresponds to. Therefore, when the above-described automatic effect function is activated to generate the post-operation effect, first, a model image (an operation target suggestive image that suggests the operation means to be operated) is displayed within the effect reception period, Even when the automatic effect function described above functions, it is desirable to generate a post-operation effect while the model image is displayed instead of being hidden. In this case, the display mode (for example, color or transmittance) of the operation target suggestion image before and after the post-operation effect is generated may not necessarily be the same. It suffices if it can be recognized even in the state where the post-operation effect has occurred. On the other hand, if the post-operation effect is generated by the player's operation within the effect reception period, the operation object suggesting image may be hidden in the state where the post-operation effect is generated, or the above-described automatic display may be performed. As in the case where the effect function functions, the post-operation effect may be generated in a state in which the operation target suggesting image is displayed instead of being hidden. The effect after the operation may be executed using an area of the effect display device 1600 that is different from at least the area where the simulated image is displayed, or may be performed by light emitted by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or by a movable decoration. may be executed as an operation by

At this time, if the model image is displayed in one of a plurality of modes with different expectations, the level of expectation (model image display mode) can be confirmed.

The model image that continues to be displayed in this manner is hidden after the post-operation effect occurs. However, the case where the automatic processing by the first automatic effect means is executed when the specific time has passed after the first side effect reception period has occurred, and the specific time after the first side effect reception period has occurred When the automatic processing is executed by the first automatic effect means when different time passes, the time from the execution of the post-operation effect to the non-display of the model image is also different from each other. is desirable. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize whether the post-operation effect has been generated by automatic processing when the specific time has passed, or whether the post-operation effect has been generated by automatic processing when a time different from the specific time has passed. Even if there is no post-operation effect, by checking the time from when the post-operation effect is executed until the model image is hidden, it becomes possible to recognize at what time the post-operation effect occurred. .

In addition, when a post-operation effect occurs by automatic processing when a specific time has passed, and when a post-operation effect occurs by automatic processing when a time different from the specified time has passed, a big hit is determined by the jackpot judgment. may be different.

In addition, when an effect reception period is generated in which an operation opportunity is given to the player while being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), two displays are displayed during the effect reception period. Either mode (for example, a low-expectation display mode with a relatively low degree of expectation for a big win, or a high-expectation display mode with a relatively high degree of expectation for a big win) can appear, and a high-expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image ) appears, even if no operation is performed within the effect acceptance period, the effect is always accepted (the automatic effect function always functions), and the effect after the operation corresponding to the effect acceptance is executed, but the low expectation is displayed. When a mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, an effect reception (automatic effect function functions) is performed when no operation is performed within the effect reception period, and a post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed. The production may be progressed so that there are cases where the production is not received (the automatic production function is functioned) and the production after the operation is not executed. That is, if you forget to operate when a high-expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) appears, it is inevitable that the effect after the operation will not be confirmed, which will inevitably reduce the interest in the game. When a display mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, it is assumed that even if an operation is forgotten, the interest in the game will not decrease so much, so a high-expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) has appeared. Sometimes, if you forget to operate it, the automatic production function will always function within the production acceptance period to avoid a decrease in the interest in the game due to forgetting to operate it. If you forget to operate when the image) appears, the automatic effect function will not necessarily function within the effect reception period so that you do not forget to operate. It is expected that the player's sense of participation will be enhanced. Note that when not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the low-expectation display mode (for example, blue operation image) appears, but the high-expectation display mode (for example, red operation image) appears. You may make it so that it cannot appear. In addition, any one of three or more display modes may appear during the effect acceptance period.

[Additional performance of simulated image display]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute variation pattern determination as to which of a plurality of variation patterns is to be executed based on the result of the jackpot determination. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern It is possible to execute a production judgment (such as advance notice judgment) as to which of the expected productions (such as advance notice production) is to appear selectively. It should be noted that depending on the result of this production determination, all of the plurality of expected productions prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern (notice production, etc.) may be sequentially executed, or None of the expected effects (notice effects, etc.) may be executed.

Then, when such production judgment (production pattern judgment, advance notice judgment, etc.) is performed, by performing control to display the production content according to the result of the production judgment on the production display device 1600, according to the result of the big hit judgment The variable production by the decorative pattern will be executed along with the expected production (preliminary production) related to the background depiction (background notice) and movable body operation (role production). As a result, as a result of execution of the variation effect by the decorative pattern together with the expected effect of the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, etc., when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed as a privilege for the player. become possible.

In such a configuration, the variable performance by the decorative pattern is provided as a performance having "a function indicating whether or not a big hit has been obtained as a result of the judgment of a big hit", and the background depiction, the movement of the movable body, etc. is provided as an effect having "a function of suggesting the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit has been obtained". That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as a result of the determination of the variation pattern, it is specified among the highly expected variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into SP reach (reach effects with background changes, etc.) If the variation pattern is selected, even if any result is obtained as the production determination (preliminary judgment etc.), when the pattern production based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach (predetermined condition is established), it is possible to generate an operation reception effect (effective period) in which reception of the effect is permitted. However, as will be described later, the form of the allowable reception sound that is output when the operation acceptance effect is generated is changed according to the result of the effect determination, so that the post-operation effect is executed in a highly anticipated manner. It is designed to suggest the ratio of winning and the ratio of stopping the jackpot pattern.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low-expectation variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) in which even the reach state is not formed as a result of the variation pattern determination, Even if there is, when a special result is obtained in the production determination (advance judgment etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, when the pattern production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (when a predetermined condition is established), It is possible to generate an operation reception effect (effective period) in which reception of effect is permitted. However, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected, unless a special result is obtained in the performance determination, even if the symbol performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing, no operation reception performance (effective period) occurs. . In addition, the operation reception effect (valid period) that occurs in a predetermined variation pattern is different from the operation reception effect (valid period) that occurs when the pattern effect based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach. It is executed as a performance.

In addition, even if any result is obtained as a notice effect judgment, at a predetermined timing during SP reach, the operation reception effect (effective period) will be generated. may also be provided. However, even if any result is obtained as a notice effect judgment, the fluctuation pattern that generates the operation reception effect (effective period) at the predetermined timing is included in the low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern). It is desirable to prevent it from being lost or to lower its selection ratio.

By the way, the operation reception effect (effective period) that can occur under these conditions is a predetermined effect for the effect member that is the object of the effect, as long as the operation is detected within the set time (effective period). (At least one of a display change in the effect display device 1600, a sound effect change in a speaker, a light emission change by a lamp, and a effect operation by a movable decorative body) is performed. The reception effect (effective period) itself is poor in effect, and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decrease until the effect is executed after the operation.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as an operation reception effect,
・During the execution period of the pattern production (production pattern) based on the low-expectation fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), the “BGM reproduction (specific type of production sound)” corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (production pattern) is in an unsuppressed mode. During the execution period of the pattern production (production pattern) based on the low-expectation unsuppressed reception production and high-expectation fluctuation pattern (specific fluctuation pattern) that gives an operation opportunity while being output, the fluctuation pattern (production pattern) Whether the corresponding "BGM playback (specific type of effect sound)" is output in a suppressed mode or silent, or in a non-output state (whether the playback period in which the audible sound is recorded in the sound data As mentioned above, various measures are taken, such as making it possible to at least generate a high-expectation suppression reception effect that gives an opportunity to operate while the game is being terminated.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the model image displayed in the operation acceptance effect is further displayed as an integrated model image that is integrated with the periphery decoration image that decorates the periphery of the model image. By doing so, it is intended to improve the amusement of the game when the operation acceptance effect (effective period) occurs. For such an integrated model image, the operation reception effect (effective period) that occurs when the pattern effect based on the specific variation pattern progresses to the specific timing during the SP reach, and the operation that occurs in the predetermined variation pattern It is desirable to display it both in the reception performance (effective period) and in both the low-expectation non-suppressed reception performance and the high-expectation suppressed reception performance. In addition, it is desirable to realize each of the above-described effect examples by replacing the display mode of the exemplified model image with one of the integrated model images described below in order to improve the amusement of the game. .

A case where the model image is displayed as the "integrated model image" will be described below.
First, to explain the "simulation image" again, the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given in the operation reception presentation includes the "operation receiving part" that receives the operation by the player, and the peripheral edge of the operation receiving part. A "peripheral decorative portion" for decoration is provided. In this regard, the "simulated image" means an image that imitates the "operation receiving section" of such operation means. The "operation receiving part" is usually provided so as to be displaced by the player's operation, and the "peripheral decorative part" is often provided as a non-movable member. For example, in the operation means (effect operation unit 400) illustrated in FIGS. will be equivalent to 124, 139, etc., the "operation receiving portion" corresponds to the sword portion 5010, and the "peripheral decorative portion" corresponds to the sheath portion 5020. Become.

FIG. 144 shows an "integrated model image" displayed when an operation reception effect (effective period) is generated for an operation means provided with an "operation receiving portion" that receives a "pressing operation" by a player. It is a figure which shows the example.

In this example of explanation, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that a push-type handle button 5014 is provided as an "operation receiving portion" on the upper surface of the handle portion 5012 of the sword ornament 5001. FIG. In other words, when the handle button 5014 is "pressed" by the player, it is pushed into the handle portion 5012 and detected by a predetermined sensor (detection means), and the detected information is used as an effect (such as a trigger for execution of effect after operation). ). According to such a configuration, the sword ornament 5001 as an operation unit includes a "handle button 5014" that can operate (vertically move) with respect to the handle 5012, and a "handle button 5014" that can operate (vertically move) with respect to the sheath 5020. Two operation receiving portions are provided with the possible “handle portion 5012”.

FIG. 144 explains the "integrated model image" when a specific operation acceptance effect (effective period) occurs in which an operation opportunity is given to the pattern button 5014 when a predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing. I decided to. However, in the examples described below, including FIG. It may be applied as an "integrated model image" when an operation reception effect (effective period) in which an opportunity is given occurs. That is, in this case, the “simulated image imitating the operation button 410” illustrated in each of the production examples described above can be replaced with the “integrated simulated image” described below. In this case, the pattern button 5014 is not provided and is omitted as a member.

As shown in FIGS. 144(a) to (d), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is provided with a specific operation reception. When an effect (effective period) is generated, in the effect display device 1600, the button model image BMG that imitates the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is integrated with the edge decoration image SSG that decorates the edge. The integrated model images IGa to IGd are displayed. In the examples shown in FIGS. 144(a) to (d), the button model image BMG and the border decoration image SSG are not separately prepared as image data, but are integrated into one image data (integrated image data). It is designed to be displayed only as simulated images (IGa to IGd). Further, when the integrated model images IGa to IGd are displayed, operation prompting displays such as "press" and "down arrow" are also displayed, but are omitted here for convenience of explanation.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the post-operation effects to be executed when an operation is accepted in a specific operation reception effect (effective period) are "relatively low expectation first effect mode" and "relative A plurality of production modes are prepared, including the second production mode, which is highly expected, and one of these production modes is executed based on the result of the big hit judgment (production judgment). . In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 144(a) to (d),
144(b) than when the mode (integrated model image IGa) shown in FIG. 144(a) appears in a specific operation reception presentation (effective period) When appears, the appearance ratio of the "relatively high expectation second effect mode" as a post-operation effect is higher,
144(c) (integrated model image IGc) than when the mode (integrated model image IGB) shown in FIG. When appears, the appearance ratio of the "relatively high expectation second effect mode" as a post-operation effect is higher,
144(d) (integrated model image IGd) than when the mode (integrated model image IGc) shown in FIG. When appears, as a post-operation production, the appearance ratio of "relatively high expectations for the second production mode" is higher. Any one of the simulated images IGa to IGd is displayed.

It is not necessary to prepare all of the four modes shown as integrated model images IGa to IGd. Even if at least two aspects are prepared, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation as a post-operation effect within the validity period. Moreover, it is also possible to further prepare modes different from the above four modes (integrated model images IGa to IGd) and display any one of the prepared modes.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
・Operating means (sword ornaments 5001, 5001, production operation unit 400),
integrated model image display means for displaying a model image imitating the operation receiving part as integrated model images IGa to IGd integrated with peripheral edge decoration images decorating the peripheral edge of the model image;
and an operation reception executing means capable of causing a display change (post-operation effect) when an operation is performed by the player while the integrated model image is displayed and a predetermined displacement occurs in the operation receiving portion, The integrated model image can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes (integrated model images IGa to IGd).

Details of the “integrated model images” shown in FIGS. 144(a) to (d) will be described separately for each aspect (integrated model images IGa to IGd).

First, the “integrated model image IGa” shown in FIG. 144(a) is composed of a normal button model image BMGa and a normal border decoration image SSGa that decorates the periphery of the normal button model image BMGa. However, in the "integrated simulated image IGa", the normal button simulated image BMGa is displayed as "an image imitating the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to which the opportunity to operate is given". On the other hand, the normal peripheral edge decoration image SSGa is "a peripheral edge decoration portion (handle portion 5012 or frame Unit 415) is not simulated, and as a virtual decoration on the display effect on the effect display device 1600, the periphery of the normal button model image BMGa is decorated.

According to such a configuration, even if a plurality of operation means are provided, it is possible to determine to which one of the operation means the operation opportunity is given. ) can be easily recognized by visually recognizing the normal button model image BMGa that imitates the button model image BMGa. Moreover, the normal button model image BMGa itself is not an actual peripheral edge decoration portion, but a gorgeous and large image (integrated model image IGa) integrated with a preferable peripheral edge decoration image for improving decorativeness and performance. ), the performance impact when the normal button model image BMGa is displayed is increased, and it is expected that the amusement of the game will be improved. In addition, there is no need to worry about the cost or installation space for making the existing peripheral decoration gorgeous, and it is possible to realize a highly flexible performance that is not bound by the shape of the existing peripheral decoration. become.

In the “integrated model image IGa” shown in FIG. 144(a), the normal border decoration image SSGa is represented as a base for installing a button (normal button model image BMGa). It is decorated with a predetermined decoration to warn that it is a button with a high degree of danger. As described above, the "pedestal" and the "predetermined decoration" have different shapes and are represented as different decorations from the actual peripheral edge decoration.

In this regard, in the "integrated model image IGa" according to this embodiment, a display target area for the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided for such a normal edge decoration image SSGa. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 145 and the like, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG can be displayed so that the display area within the display target area decreases with the lapse of time. More specifically, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced to a predetermined minimum value (including "0") from a predetermined maximum display area when no operation is accepted within the valid period. is displayed so as to decrease with the passage of time until the display area of . That is, in this case, the normal border decoration image SSGa not only has the function of suggesting the operation means to be operated, but also suggests the remaining time until the state (effective period) in which operation reception is permitted ends. It also has a remaining time suggesting function.

In the normal edge decoration image SSGa shown in FIG. 144(a), a partition image KG is provided to partition the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG from other areas in the normal edge decoration image SSGa. . The area surrounded by the partition image KG functions as the "display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG". However, the division image KG does not necessarily have to be displayed, and a predetermined range in the normal edge decoration image SSGa may be set as the "display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG".

In the example shown in FIG. 144(a), a predetermined decoration (here, "white and black striped pattern") is applied to the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. , a gauge image (here, a “gray” gauge image) GG having a predetermined transmittance is displayed so as to be superimposed on the display target area to which the predetermined decoration is applied. According to such a configuration, even in a portion where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed, the predetermined decoration is not hidden and can be visually recognized. It is possible to preferably maintain amusement in the game over the entire period until it becomes empty.

When realizing such a display mode in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, the gauge image GG having a predetermined transmittance is superimposed on the display target area to which the predetermined decoration is applied. In addition to the method of displaying the area with a predetermined decoration, it is also possible to employ a method of displaying the area itself to be displayed with a predetermined decoration by changing the color of the area with the gauge and the area without the gauge. In this case, the gauge image GG itself does not exist as image data alone, and the gauge image GG can be expressed only by the color change of the predetermined decoration in the display target area.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 144(a), the predetermined decoration (here, "white and black striped pattern") applied within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is replaced by the normal peripheral edge decoration. Since the image SSGa is applied so as to extend over other areas, the display target area itself of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG can be more highly integrated and decorative. Therefore, it is expected that the interest in the game will be improved when the "integrated model image IGa" is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 144(a), when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which the "integrated model image IGa" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 occurs, the pattern button to be operated is displayed. 5014 (or the operation button 410) is made to emit light in the same color (for example, "blue") as the normal button model image BMGa in the "integrated model image IGa". That is, as will be described later, a plurality of modes with different expectations are prepared for the button model image BMG, and as one of these modes, the normal button model image BMGa is displayed. , it is possible to recognize the mode (expectation) of the button model image BMG only by confirming the pattern button 5014 to be operated without visually recognizing the normal button model image BMGa.

The "button model image BMGa (FIG. 144(a))" does not necessarily have to be an exact model of the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated. What is necessary is just to be displayed with a copy level (deformation, etc.) to the extent that it is possible to recognize which operation means it is.

On the other hand, the “integrated model image IGb” shown in FIG. , and a peripheral edge decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge thereof. However, in the "integrated model image IGb", the border decoration image SSG is displayed as the same as the "normal border decoration image SSGa" described above, but the button model image BMG is displayed as the "button model image BMGa", but a "special button model image BMGb" having a different shape.

More specifically, in the “integrated model image IGb” shown in FIG. 144(b), the special button model image BMGb simulates the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated. 144(a)), which is displayed as an image having a different shape from the "button model image BMGa (FIG. 144(a))" that imitates the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410). However, if such a display method is simply adopted, there is a concern that it will be difficult to recognize which one of the plurality of operation means is the operation target when the "integrated model image IGb" is displayed.

However, as described above, in the "integrated model image IGa", the "button model image BMGa" imitating the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated is integrated with the "normal border decoration image SSGa" and displayed. Therefore, the "normal border decoration image SSGa" itself naturally has a function of suggesting that the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is the operation target. In this regard, in the "integrated model image IGb", the "special button model image BMGb" is integrated with the "normal border decoration image SSGa" for display. BMGb" does not properly simulate the operation target, the "integrated model image IGb" as a whole may suggest that the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is the operation target. become able to. In order to preferably obtain such a function and effect (a function of suggesting an operation target by the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa), an operation means different from the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is used for the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa". It can be said that it is important not to display when (handle 5012, etc.) is the object of operation.

According to this configuration, the button model image BMG that simulates the operation receiving portion and the peripheral edge decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge of the button image BMG are displayed as an integrated model image. The button model image BMG, which is only a part of the simulated image, can be displayed in a more flexible expression method that is not necessarily bound by the shape of the operation means to be operated, resulting in a more conspicuous effect. It came to be expected to improve the amusement and enjoyment of games through their sexiness and decorativeness.

In the "special button image BMGb" illustrated in FIG. 144(b), a button with a streamlined shape is depicted with a more stylish design than the "button model image BMGa". Words such as "DANGER" are applied. The appearance of the non-existent ``special button image BMGb'' as a component of the pachinko machine 1 makes it possible for the player to easily feel a sense of premium, and the ``button image BMGa'' appears. You will be expected to instinctively sense that expectations are higher than usual.

Also, as shown in FIG. 144(b), when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which the "integrated model image IGb" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 occurs, it is also made to be the object of operation. The handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is made to emit light in the same color (for example, "red") as the special button model image BMGb in the "integrated model image IGb". That is, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated can emit light in a mode corresponding to the type of the button model image BMG in the "integrated model image IG". Even without visually recognizing the image BMG, it is possible to recognize the mode (expectation) as the button model image BMG only by confirming the pattern button 5014 which is the operation target.

On the other hand, the “integrated model image IGc” shown in FIG. It is configured as an image integrated with a peripheral edge decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge. However, in the "integrated model image IGc", the button model image BMG is displayed as the same as the above-mentioned "normal button model image BMGa", but the border decoration image SSG is displayed as the above-mentioned "normal border decoration image". "Image SSGa" is displayed as "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" having a different shape.

However, the "special border decoration image SSGb" is similar to the "normal border decoration image SSGa" in the following points.
- "The peripheral decorative part (handle part 5012 or frame unit 415) actually provided around the peripheral edge of the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to which the operation opportunity is given is not modeled, and the performance display As a virtual decoration on the display effect of the device 1600, the periphery of the button model image BMG is decorated.
A display target area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided.

According to such "integrated model image IGc (FIG. 144(c))", when the "integrated model image IGa (FIG. 144(a))" is used as a reference, any operation means can be operated. It is possible to greatly change the overall shape of the “integrated model image IGc (Fig. 144(c))” without causing a change in shape of the “button model image BMG” that suggests whether the opportunity is granted. become able to. As a result, it is possible to achieve highly flexible decorativeness and performance by causing shape changes without sacrificing the function of suggesting the operation target.

Further, in the "special border decoration image SSGb" (FIG. 144(c)) according to this embodiment, at least a part of the image has the same decoration as the "normal border decoration image SSGa (FIG. 144(a))". is displayed as Therefore, the same post-operation effect is applied when the “integrated model image IGa (FIG. 144(a))” appears and when the “integrated model image IGc (FIG. 144(c))” appears. It becomes possible to suggest that it is a specific operation acceptance effect (effective period).

In particular, in the "special border decoration image SSGb" (Fig. 144(c)) according to this embodiment, a separate member having a special decoration is added to the "normal border decoration image SSGa (Fig. 144(a))". It is displayed as an enlarged image in its entirety in an expanded form. Therefore, it becomes easy to recognize that the "special border decoration image SSGb" is displayed as an advanced version of the "normal border decoration image SSGa", and the degree of expectation is higher than when the "button model image BMGa" appears. People are expected to instinctively perceive high things.

In addition, the "special edge decoration image SSGb" (Fig. 144(c)) has a different shape and decoration from the "normal edge decoration image SSGa" (Fig. 144(a)), but the gauge image (predetermined image) The GG display target area itself is not changed at all.

That is, when a part of the integrated model image IG is used as the display target area of the gauge image GG, is the display target area or the gauge image merely "a mere part of the decoration" or "the rest of the image?" It is difficult for the player side to distinguish whether it is a portion having a function of suggesting time. In this regard, the ``normal border decoration image SSGa (Fig. 144(a))'' and the ``special border decoration image SSGb (Fig. 144(c))'' are gauges that have an important function of ``indicating the remaining time''. The shape of the display target area of the image (predetermined image) GG is not changed, and the shape of the other portions is changed. It becomes possible to realize decorativeness and performance with a high degree of freedom by creating it.

Also, as shown in FIG. 144(c), when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which the “integrated model image IGc” is displayed on the effect display device 1600 occurs, it is also made to be an operation target. The pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is made to emit light in the same color (for example, "blue") as the normal button model image BMGa in the "integrated model image IGc". That is, the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated can emit light in a mode corresponding to the type of the button model image BMG in the "integrated model image IG". Even without visually recognizing the image BMG, it is possible to recognize the mode (expectation) of the button model image BMG only by confirming the pattern button 5014 to be operated. However, the normal button model image BMGa when the "integrated model image IGc" is displayed is displayed in a different color (for example, "green") than when the "integrated model image IGa" is displayed. can be In this case, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) also emits green light.

On the other hand, the “integrated model image IGd” shown in FIG. It is configured as an image integrated with a peripheral edge decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge. However, in the "integrated model image IGd", the button model image BMG is displayed not as the above-mentioned "normal button model image BMGa" but as a "special button model image BMGb" having a different shape. The border decoration image SSG is also displayed as a "special border decoration image SSGb" having a shape different from the "normal border decoration image SSGa" described above.

That is, in the "integrated model image IGd (FIG. 144(d))", the "special button model image BMGb" used in the "integrated model image IGB (FIG. 144(b))" and the "integrated model image IGc (Fig. 144(c))" is displayed as an image integrated with the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb". According to such a configuration, the operational effects of the “special button model image BMGb” described above with respect to the “integrated model image IGb (FIG. 144(b))” and the “integrated model image IGc (FIG. 144 ( c))” can be obtained by the above-described “special border decoration image SSGb”, and when the “integrated model image IGa (FIG. 144(a))” is used as a reference, Since the modes of both the button model image BMG and the border decoration image SSG are changed, it is expected that people will instinctively feel that the expectations are high.

On the other hand, while the modes of both the button model image BMG and the border decoration image SSG are changed, the same decoration and shape appear in a part of the border decoration image SSG. 144(a) and IGd (FIG. 144(d)). It will be possible to suggest that it is the operation acceptance effect (effective period).

Also, as shown in FIG. 144(d), when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which the “integrated model image IGd” is displayed on the effect display device 1600 occurs, it is also made to be an operation target. The pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is made to emit light in the same color (for example, "red") as the special button model image BMGb in the "integrated model image IGd". That is, the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated can emit light in a mode corresponding to the type of the button model image BMG in the "integrated model image IG". Even without visually recognizing the image BMG, it is possible to recognize the mode (expectation) of the button model image BMG only by confirming the pattern button 5014 to be operated. However, when the "integrated model image IGd" is displayed, the special button model image BMGb is displayed in a different color (for example, "rainbow color") than when the "integrated model image IGB" is displayed. You may do so. In this case, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) also emits light in rainbow colors.

As shown in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the pattern effect based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing, and the predetermined operation acceptance effect (effective period) is reached. occurs, the integrated model image IG in which the button model image BMG and the border decoration image SSG are integrated is displayed. Sometimes the other side can be displayed in one of multiple ways. For example, when the button model image BMG is displayed as a "normal button model image BMGa", the border decoration image SSG can be displayed as either a "normal border decoration image SSGa" or a "special border decoration image SSGb" ( Figure 144 (a), (c)). Further, when the button model image BMG is displayed as the "special button model image BMGb", the border decoration image SSG can be displayed as either the "normal border decoration image SSGa" or the "special border decoration image SSGb" ( Figure 144 (b), (d)). Further, when the border decoration image SSG is displayed as the "normal border decoration image SSGa", the button model image BMG can be displayed as either the "normal button model image BMGa" or the "special button model image BMGb" ( Figure 144 (a), (b)). Further, when the border decoration image SSG is displayed as the "special border decoration image SSGb", the button model image BMG can be displayed as either the "normal button model image BMGa" or the "special button model image BMGb" ( Figure 144 (a), (b)).

According to such a configuration, although the button model image BMG and the border decoration image SSG are displayed in an integrated manner, only one side thereof is displayed when the mode changes. Therefore, by looking at the one side whose aspect is not changed, it is possible to easily recognize that the predetermined operation reception effect (effective period) is being generated regardless of the aspect displayed on the other side. In addition, by looking at the other side whose aspect is changing, it becomes possible to appropriately recognize the degree of expectation. It should be noted that one side of the button model image BMG and the border decoration image SSG may not be changed in mode, and only the other side may be changed in mode.

In addition, in the integrated model image IG shown in FIGS. 144(a) to (d), the peripheral decoration image SSG includes the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Then, when the integrated model image IG is displayed during the operation reception effect (effective period), the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed so that the display area within the display target area decreases as time elapses. It is possible. That is, in this case, the "periphery decoration image SSG" has a remaining time suggesting function of suggesting the remaining time until the end of the state in which operation reception is permitted, and indicates which operation means the operation target is. By being displayed as an integrated model image IG that is integrated with the "button model image BMG" responsible for the suggesting function, it is possible to grasp the remaining time and the operation target and recognize which of the multiple modes has appeared. It is expected that the amusement of the game can be favorably maintained while the operation acceptance effect (effective period) is occurring.

Further, in the integrated model image IG shown in FIGS. 144(a) to (d), the peripheral decoration image SSG includes a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and a gauge image (predetermined image) GG. (there are both parts that have the remaining time suggesting function and parts that do not have the remaining time suggesting function). In other words, the margin decoration image SSG is not only intended to indicate the remaining time of the operation acceptance effect (effective period), but in the portion where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed, the "button model image BMG decoration Since it is possible to actively adopt a display mode for the purpose of "improving the performance," it is possible to suggest the remaining time, but at the same time, the performance when the operation reception performance, which is an important performance, occurs. can be improved significantly. In order to obtain such effects, it is more desirable to display the non-display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG as a larger area than the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. I can say.

144(a) to (d), the button model image BMG can be displayed in one of a plurality of modes when the border decoration image SSG is displayed in one mode. However, as a matter of fact, when the “handle portion 5012”, which is the peripheral decorative portion, is one aspect, the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410), which is the operation receiving portion, has multiple aspects (multiple emission colors). ). Therefore, when the button model image BMG changes, it can be confirmed only by confirming the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be copied.

144(a) to 144(d), the peripheral decoration image SSG can be displayed in one of a plurality of modes when the button model image BMG is displayed in one mode. However, as a matter of fact, the “handle portion 5012”, which is the peripheral decoration portion, is designed not to change into any one of the multiple modes. That is, as described above, the peripheral decoration image SSG decorates the peripheral edge of the model button image BMG as a virtual decoration that does not actually exist as a part of the pachinko machine 1 . Therefore, the peripheral edge decoration image SSG does not need to match the mode of the "pattern portion 5012", which is the peripheral edge decoration portion, and it is possible to perform a variety of depictions that are preferable for enlivening the presentation. Note that the "handle 5012", which is the peripheral decorative part, may be provided so as not to be changed in a plurality of modes, such as being non-luminous.

In addition, in the integrated model image IG shown in FIGS. 144(a) to (d), there is a case where both the button model image BMG and the border decoration image SSG are changed (FIG. 144(d)). However, as a matter of fact, it is desirable to change the mode of both the button model image BMG and the peripheral edge decoration image SSG when the "pattern portion 5012", which is the peripheral edge decoration portion, is one mode.

Different aspects appear in the "pattern portion 5012", which is the peripheral edge decoration portion, depending on whether the peripheral edge decoration image SSG is the "normal peripheral edge decoration image SSGa" or the "special peripheral edge decoration image SSGb". You may do so. However, the peripheral edge decoration image SSG changes at least in shape depending on whether the peripheral edge decoration image SSG is the "normal peripheral edge decoration image SSGa" or the "special peripheral edge decoration image SSGb". It is desirable that the "handle portion 5012" is allowed to cause only a mode change (for example, a change in the light emission mode) that does not involve a shape change. It can be said that it is desirable to provide the peripheral edge decoration part as one whose shape cannot be changed in order to emphasize the virtual rendering function of the peripheral edge decoration image SSG.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the model images include a button model image BMG that simulates the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410), and a pattern image that simulates the handle portion 5012. TMG is prepared, and the form of the margin decoration image SSG is changed according to which of these model images is displayed. That is, in this case, the peripheral edge decoration image SSGa,b that decorates the peripheral edge of the button model image BMG cannot be displayed when a model image different from the button model image BMG is displayed. The decorative images SSGa,b themselves can also be expected to have a function of suggesting which operation means the operation target is.

If the form of the peripheral decoration image SSG differs according to the form of the model image (button model image BMG, pattern image TMG), the form (thickness , length) should also be different. The operation reception effect in which the button model image BMG is displayed and the operation reception effect in which the pattern image TMG is displayed are effects that occur at the same timing within the same variation pattern (which one occurs is selected according to the effect determination). may be performed), or may be an effect that occurs at different fluctuation patterns or different timings. The border decoration image SSG that appears when the button pattern image BMG is a model image does not imitate the border decoration part. may However, even if the form (thickness, length) of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is different, it is desirable that the set time as the operation reception rendering (effective period) may be the same.

In the integrated model image IG shown in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d), the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and other areas in the margin decoration image SSG have A predetermined decoration (here, “striped pattern”) is applied to the area, and the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed so as to overlap the predetermined decoration. That is, in this case, as the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases, the display area of the exposed predetermined decoration increases, so that the interest in the game can be improved. become able to.

In particular, in this embodiment, a gauge image (here, a “gray” gauge image) GG having a predetermined transmittance is displayed in such a manner as to be superimposed on a display target area to which a predetermined decoration is applied. ing. According to such a configuration, even in a portion where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed, the predetermined decoration is not hidden and can be visually recognized. It is possible to preferably maintain amusement in the game over the entire period until it becomes empty.

However, the predetermined decoration does not necessarily have to be displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Alternatively, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself may have (also serve as) a predetermined decoration. In this case, the display area of the predetermined decoration decreases as the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases. is reduced, prompting the player who dislikes the reduction of the predetermined decoration to perform the operation early.

In the integrated model image IG shown in FIGS. 144(a) to (d), the peripheral edge decoration image SSG is the peripheral edge of the operation receiving portion (handle button 5014 or operation button 410) to be operated. The peripheral edge decorative portion (handle portion 5012 or frame unit 415) provided in the frame is not simulated, and the image represents an insubstantial object as a game machine component. Therefore, it is possible to achieve a higher degree of freedom in decorativeness and presentation without being bound by the substance of a game machine component.

In the integrated model image IG shown in FIGS. 144(a) to (d), at least the peripheral edge decoration image SSG out of the button model image BMG and the peripheral edge decoration image SSG has a plurality of shapes. That is, in this case, it is possible to change the shape of only the border decoration image SSG representing an insubstantial object without changing the shape of the button model image BMG. It is possible to appropriately suggest whether or not it is, and to change the shape of the integrated model image IG to realize a display with higher performance and decorativeness.

As for the border decoration image SSG, when the button model image BMG is in one mode, the shape may not necessarily be changed, and only the color may be changed. However, the reason why the shape change is allowed is that the border decoration image SSG expresses an insubstantial object and that the border decoration image SSG is displayed as an image integrated with the model button image BMG. That is why, in this sense, it can be said that changing the shape of the margin decoration image SSG has great technical value.

In the integrated model image IG shown in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d), the shape of the peripheral decoration image SSG is changed so as to increase its size. As will be described later, as a method of such a form change, there is a method of increasing the number of objects represented as an image (the number of decorations, etc.), or a plurality of modes with different outline shapes (rectangular parallelepiped, sphere, etc.). It is possible to employ a method such as one that is displayed by , or a method that widens the target range of a predetermined object that is represented as an image. Also, as will be described later, regarding the change in the form of the peripheral edge decoration image SSG, as a premonition effect, an effect is executed in which the expected form is changed in stages from a form with a low degree of expectation to a form with a high degree of expectation. It is also possible to allow operation reception in the operation reception presentation while the changed form is maintained.

Further, in the integrated model image IG shown in FIGS. 144(a) to (d), the gauge image ( Predetermined image) GG is displayed in the same form without being changed (at least in shape). Therefore, even if the form of the peripheral edge decoration image SSG changes, it is possible to preferably maintain the function of suggesting how much time remains, and thus the important function can be maintained. , the degree of expectation can also be suggested by a shape change in an area different from the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

Depending on which of the effects described above is intended to be achieved, the peripheral edge decoration image SSG may not necessarily represent an insubstantial object. It may be displayed as an image imitating the part.

The integrated model image IG shown in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d) can be displayed dynamically during the "effective period in which operation reception is permitted" such as a predetermined operation reception presentation. This prompts the player to perform an operation.

However, in the integrated model image IG according to this embodiment, the button model image BMG and the border decoration image SSG are displayed in an integrated manner. Only one side is displayed dynamically, and the other side is displayed so as not to move. According to such a configuration, one side contributes to improving the performance when the button performance, which is an important performance, is generated by the dynamic expression, while the other side is displayed so as to remain in place. By doing so, when the integrated model image IG is viewed as a whole, it does not move and is displayed, so visibility can be preferably ensured.

In the integrated model image IG shown in FIGS. 144(a) to (d), the button model image BMG is dynamically changed so as to depict how the operation receiving part to which the operation opportunity is given is displaced within its movable range. However, dynamic display of the border decoration image SSG is prohibited. Then, a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided on the non-dynamically displayed side (perimeter decoration image SSG), and when the integrated model image IG is displayed, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided. can be displayed so that the display area within the display target area is reduced with the lapse of time.

In this way, the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is included in the side of the integrated simulated image IG that secures suitable visibility (peripheral decoration image SSG that is not dynamically displayed). As a result, the performance when the operation reception performance, which is an important performance, occurs is improved by dynamic display by the button model image BMG, but how much time is left to allow the reception of the performance? can be easily recognized.

In addition, the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the gauge image ( Predetermined image) GG is also included in the area where it is not displayed. That is, in this case, when performing an effect suggesting the degree of expectation on the side of the integrated model image IG that has secured suitable visibility, the effect is performed in an area where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed. Thus, it is possible to prevent the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG from being adversely affected.

A region different from the display target region of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG in the margin decoration image SSG, the shape of the margin decoration image SSG itself, and the button model image BMG are provided with a plurality of aspects with different expectations. Although one of the modes is displayed based on the result of the big hit determination (performance determination), the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself have different expectations. A plurality of modes may be provided, and one of the modes may be displayed based on the result of the big hit determination (effect determination).

By the way, as shown in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d), when the button model image BMG is displayed as an integrated model image IG that is integrated with the peripheral edge decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge of the button image BMG, In addition, when the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is included in the peripheral edge decoration image SSG, is the gauge image (predetermined image) GG merely a decoration or pattern in the peripheral edge decoration image SSG? , or has a function of suggesting the remaining time. In addition, there is a concern that it will become difficult to grasp the position to which the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has decreased due to the mixture of the decorations and patterns applied to the peripheral edge decoration image SSG, which may reduce the interest in the game. .

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, at least when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced (within the valid period), the gauge image ( In the display target area where the predetermined image) GG can be displayed, an image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or an image obtained by partially changing the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG can be displayed.

More specifically, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image obtained by partially changing the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is added to the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. The gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed at or near the end of the display target area. Then, according to the displacement of the terminal portion of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or The display position of the "specific image" in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed is also displaced in the same manner.

According to such a configuration, the "specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or the specific image obtained by partially changing the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is displaced to a predetermined position. Then, since the valid period ends, even if it is not possible to recognize whether the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself is merely a decoration or suggests the remaining time, the position of the "specific image" By checking , the remaining time can be recognized. In this sense, when displaying such a "specific image", it can be said that the gauge image (predetermined image) GG does not necessarily have to be displayed.

FIG. 145 is a diagram showing a display example of the integrated model image IG from the start to the end of the effective period during which operation reception is permitted.

As shown in FIG. 145, if a timing A0 for starting an effective period (predetermined operation reception effect) within a predetermined variation pattern has arrived, effect display device 1600 , an integrated model image IG, and an operation prompting image such as "press!", "downward arrow", etc. are displayed.

In this example, the mode (integrated model image IGa) shown in FIG. 144(a) is displayed as the integrated model image IG. ) may be displayed in any of the modes shown in FIG. Even if the integrated model image IG is displayed in any manner, the display of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG within the effective period, the display of the "specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or The display of the "specific image in which the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" causes changes in the mode described below with the lapse of time.

As shown in FIG. 145(a), first, in the integrated model image IG at the timing A0 (the start timing of the effective period), the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the entire display target area. It will be done. By displaying the gauge image (predetermined image) GG in such a full state, it becomes possible to recognize that the valid period has just started.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 145(a), at timing A0, which is the start timing of the effective period, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or the gauge image (predetermined image) GG "Specific image whose mode is partially changed" is not displayed within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. According to such a configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not a "specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or a specific image obtained by partially changing the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is being displayed. Only by confirming, it becomes possible to easily grasp whether or not the predetermined time has already passed since the acceptance of the operation (the remaining crotch area is reduced).

However, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed," A gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in such a manner that "the display area increases by the amount corresponding to the elapsed time" until a predetermined time (the time required for the entire appearance of the specific image to finish appearing) passes. is displayed in the display target area of .

For example, in the integrated model image IG at timing A1, which is a short time after timing A0 (the start timing of the effective period), as shown in FIG. A ``specific image TG'' as a specific image different from the ``specified image'', or a ``specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed'' appears until about half of the image is visible. It can be seen that the display area is in the stage of increasing with the lapse of time.

In the integrated model image IG at timings A2 and A3 after a large amount of time has elapsed, as shown in FIGS. A ``specific image TG'' as a ``specific image obtained by partially changing the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG'' has already finished appearing in its entirety. (Predetermined image) It can be seen that there is a situation of displacement within the display target area of GG.

That is, as described above, the “specific image TG” is a gauge image (predetermined image) that is displaced when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced. Image) Displayed at or near the end of GG, and displayed such that its display position is displaced (continuously) in accordance with the displacement of the end of gauge image (predetermined image) GG. It has become.

The "specific image TG" according to this embodiment is displayed at a position connected to the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG as an image with a star-shaped mark in a blank square space. It has become a thing. However, the "specific image TG" may not be displayed as a separate image at a position connected to the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. The gauge image (predetermined image) GG may be displayed in such a manner that the terminal portion of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed, such as an image in which the image gradually fades over a predetermined length. Alternatively, it may be displayed as an effect image appearing at or near the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

In any case, the "specific image TG" originally functions as a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG that suggests that the remaining time has run out when the display area becomes the minimum value (here, "0"). Therefore, even when the remaining time runs out (when the valid period expires), at least a part (or all of them) will not be hidden and the display state will be maintained.

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. The display area of the image (predetermined image) GG is "0", and about half of the display area of the "specific image TG" is left. Then, when no operation is accepted until this state is reached, the period during which operation acceptance is permitted ends in this state, and the integrated model image IG is hidden.

However, as described above, the "specific image TG" originally does not function as a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Therefore, it is most desirable to display the integrated model image IG at timing A4, which is the expiration timing of the valid period, so that the entire display area of the "specific image TG" is left. You may make it

However, it is difficult to achieve a display in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG becomes exactly "0" at the end of the effective period. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the "specific image TG" is displayed at the display position in accordance with the displacement of the terminal part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG (in a continuous manner). is displayed so as to be displaced, when viewed from the player side, to what extent of the image displayed within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is the gauge image ( Predetermined image) GG can be ambiguous.

That is, even though the "specific image TG" is not hidden when the valid period expires and most of its display area (more than half or all) remains, the player cannot When viewed, it appears to be part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG whose display area is set to the minimum value (here, non-display) when the effective period expires. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the gauge image (predetermined image) GG appear to be an image longer than it actually is, so that it is possible to make it appear that the validity period remains longer than it actually is. Thus, it is possible to preferably maintain the interest in the game while the operation acceptance effect is being performed.

On the other hand, when the effective period of the operation acceptance effect expires, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed because at least a part of the "specific image TG" is left. Even if the period does not end immediately, it is possible to display the "specific image TG" so that the display area of the "specific image TG" is reduced. It is possible to make it difficult to cause a sense of incongruity due to a lag between the display timing and the end timing of the valid period. In other words, in this case, the "specific image TG" can be expected to play a role as a buffer capable of absorbing such a time lag.

By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 145, at the timing A0, which is the start timing of the valid period, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed. The "specified image" is not displayed within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. However, at timing A0, which is the start timing of the effective period, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image obtained by partially changing the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG" It may be displayed within the display target area of the image (predetermined image) GG.

According to such a configuration, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image obtained by partially changing the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is a part of the gauge image GG. Since it can be shown positively as if it were a It is hoped that improvements will be made.

[Acceptable period with at least one of configuration 1A to configuration 40A]
As explained by exemplifying FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, variation as to which one of a plurality of variation patterns is to be executed is based on the result of the jackpot determination according to the start winning (holding digestion). Pattern judgment can be executed. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern It is possible to execute a production judgment (such as advance notice judgment) as to which of the expected productions (such as advance notice production) is to appear selectively. It should be noted that depending on the result of the production determination, all of the plurality of expected productions prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern (notice production, etc.) may be sequentially executed. None of the expected effects (notice effects, etc.) may be executed.

And as described above, when such production determination (fluctuation pattern judgment, advance notice judgment, etc.) is performed, by performing control to display the production content according to the result of the production judgment on the production display device 1600, the big hit judgment The variable production by the decorative pattern according to the result is executed together with the expected production (preliminary production) related to the background depiction (background advance notice), movable body operation (role production), and the like. As a result, as a result of execution of the variation effect by the decorative pattern together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, etc., when the jackpot pattern (special pattern combination) is stopped and displayed, a privilege is given to the player. As a big hit game and a transition to a high probability game state can be executed.

In such a configuration, the variable performance by the decorative pattern is provided as a performance having "a function indicating whether or not a big hit has been obtained as a result of the judgment of the big hit", and the background depiction, the movement of the movable body, etc. is provided as an effect having "the function of suggesting the degree of expectation, that is, the ratio (including 0% and 100%) of the fact that a big hit is obtained". That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as a result of the determination of the variation pattern, it is specified among the highly expected variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into SP reach (reach effects with background changes, etc.) If the variation pattern is selected, even if any result is obtained as the production determination (preliminary judgment etc.), when the pattern production based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach (predetermined condition is established), it is possible to generate an acceptance acceptance state (effective period) in which the acceptance of the performance is allowed.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low-expectation variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) in which even the reach state is not formed as a result of the determination of the variation pattern. Even in the case, when a special result is obtained in the production determination (preliminary judgment etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, when the pattern production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (predetermined condition is established Then), it is possible to generate an acceptance allowable state (effective period) in which the performance acceptance is allowed. However, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected, if a special result is not obtained in the performance determination, even if the symbol performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing, the acceptability state (effective period) does not occur. . In addition, the reception acceptance state (valid period) that occurs in a predetermined variation pattern is different from the reception acceptance state (valid period) that occurs when the pattern effect based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach. It is executed as an effect (post-acceptance display, post-acceptance output sound, etc.).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to generate an acceptance allowable state in which an action (operation) by the player is allowed to be accepted. When an action (operation) by the player is accepted in , a post-acceptance change (display change, acceptance output sound, effect light emission, etc.) according to the type of acceptance acceptable state that has occurred can occur. .

In addition, the acceptance-allowed state can appear only when the operation unit is allowed to accept operations (acceptance-allowed period), or when the operation is allowed to be accepted (acceptance-allowed period). A display mode related to operation can be displayed. As such an operation-related display mode, for example, an object (operation means) to be operated (operated) by the player is often displayed as a simulated image display. Any image display may be used as long as it always gives the player an opportunity to operate when displayed. "Operation-related display (simulated image display)" has multiple modes with different expectations (for example, multiple color schemes such as white and red), and one of these multiple modes is selectively displayed. You may do so.

Furthermore, the "operation-related display mode" refers to a state in which acceptance of operations on the operation unit is allowed (acceptance acceptance period), or a state in which acceptance of operations is allowed (acceptance acceptance period). Since it can only appear occasionally, at least when the "operation-related display mode" is displayed, the acceptance acceptable state will always occur, or if it is in the acceptable state at the time of the display good. Therefore, while the "operation-related display mode" is being displayed, the reception acceptance state may end before this is hidden. In addition, a plurality of types of image displays may be prepared as such "operation-related display modes", and both of these image displays may be displayed in the reception permitted state.

In addition, in the acceptability state, it is possible to display a remaining time display indicating the remaining time during which the player is allowed to accept actions (operations). Such a remaining time display can be executed, for example, as a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image is reduced over time. As modes of at least one of the frame image and the gauge image, a plurality of modes (for example, speed of reduction of the display area of the gauge image, suggestion of the degree of expectation, suggestion of the type of operation means, etc.) are prepared, and these modes may be executed by either In this case, a different degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) may be suggested depending on which mode is executed.

In addition, when the acceptability state occurs, a pre-effect (foreshadowing effect) that suggests that an action opportunity will be given to the player before this (suggesting that the acceptability state will occur). is considered feasible. The pre-effect is, for example, executed by the effect display on the effect display device 1600 or the output of the corresponding effect sound.

In addition, even if any result is obtained as a notice production judgment, at a predetermined timing during SP reach, regarding the fluctuation pattern that causes the acceptance acceptable state (effective period), in addition to the above "specific fluctuation pattern" may also be provided. Further, it is also possible to provide a variation pattern for generating an acceptance allowable state (effective period) at a predetermined timing before the SP ready-to-win regardless of which result is obtained as the announcement performance determination.

In addition, including each example described above and each example described later, the "player's operation (action)" to be detected means that the player's It is not limited to those that are directly operated (pressing action or drawing action) by the touch sensor, but also the "player's contact action on a specific part" that is detected by the touch sensor, and the "in a specific space" that is detected by the non-contact sensor. It also means that the player's actions in The "operation means" is, in short, provided with one or a plurality of reception means (operation unit) for receiving actions by the player (pressing action, sword drawing action, touch action, non-contact action, etc.). Just do it.

By the way, as the acceptance acceptance state (effective period) according to this embodiment, the type of post-acceptance display, post-acceptance output sound, etc., the presence or absence of output, the audible output status of BGM, etc. are different. Various types of acceptability states, such as the number of times that operation acceptance is allowed within the allowable state (validity period), and whether or not the automatic continuous tapping function or the automatic button function is enabled or not. (validity period) is provided.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the following special effects are given between a plurality of acceptable acceptance states, so as to enhance the performance when the acceptable acceptance status occurs. or to preferably maintain the sense of tension when the reception acceptance state occurs. It should be noted that each of the effects (each configuration) described below does not necessarily have to include all of these configurations. It is possible to suppress the decrease of, or it may be selectively provided with some configurations that are considered necessary to obtain further effects, or it can be applied to another configuration ( Desirable application) may be adopted as appropriate. Furthermore, each effect (structure) described below is merely an example, and any one structure capable of suppressing a decline in the interest in the game related to the acceptance-permitting state may be provided.

[Configuration 1-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the state of the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) can be detected, and it is detected that the specific operation means is being operated. Then, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. Further, it is possible to display a message display prompting an operation for the specific operation means. In this respect, when the specific operation means is detected to be in the operation state, the operation valid state, which is a state in which the output of the post-operation output sound can be started, is allowed to detect the operation state a plurality of times. A multiple operation valid state is prepared in which the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times, and in the multiple operation valid state, both the message display and the message display are not displayed. There is Further, among such multiple-operation valid states, in the multiple-operation valid state of the type in which the message display is displayed, it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state, and a post-operation output corresponding to this is detected. In the case where a sound is output, when it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from an operation state to a non-operation state in which the post-operation output sound is being output, the output state is detected. Since the post-operation output sound in (1) can be changed with the detection as a trigger, it is possible to preferably maintain the sense of tension as to whether to continue the operation of the specific operation means when the message display is displayed. can be expected. It should be noted that the “specific operation means” related to the configuration 1-A is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 1-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means as the "specific operation means" according to other configurations, or may mean a different operation means. Also, it may mean the same "operation means" as the operation means with different names according to other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state in the multiple operation valid state of the type in which the message display is not displayed among the multiple operation valid states, and after the operation corresponding to this is detected. When the output sound is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from the operating state to the non-operating state in which the post-operation output sound is being output. , the post-operation output sound in the output state does not change with the detection as a trigger, and changes without the detection as a trigger (for example, it is output for a predetermined output time and then terminated. ). According to this configuration, in the multiple-operation valid state, whether or not the message display is displayed determines whether the post-operation output sound changes when the specific operation means is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state. It becomes possible to suggest whether or not, and it is expected that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained.

Further, as will be described later, in this case, it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state in the multiple operation valid state of the type in which the message display is not displayed, among the multiple operation valid states. When the corresponding post-operation output sound is output, it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state in which the post-operation output sound is being output. Even if it is, the end of the post-operation output sound in the output state is not triggered by the detection, and is performed without the detection (for example, output for a predetermined output time on the other hand, it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state in the multiple operation valid state of the type in which the message display is displayed among the multiple operation valid states, and in response to this, When the post-operation output sound is output, it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from the operating state to the non-operating state in which the post-operation output sound is being output. Then, the end of the post-operation output sound in the output state may be triggered by the detection or not triggered by the detection (for example, output for a predetermined output time and then ended). (if there is) and both. According to such a configuration, when no message display is displayed in the multiple-time operation valid state, it is preferably suggested that the post-operation output sound does not change when the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state. On the other hand, when the message display is displayed in the operation valid state multiple times, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the post-operation output sound changes when the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state. Therefore, it is expected that the sense of tension will be appropriately maintained.

It should be noted that ``when a message is displayed in a state where multiple operations are enabled, it is made difficult to recognize whether or not a change occurs in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state.'' In order to obtain the desired effect, it is necessary to change the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state when one mode is displayed as a message display. It is desirable that there are both cases where there is no change in the output sound after the operation. However, this configuration does not necessarily have to be adopted. Even if there are cases where the post-operation output sound changes and cases where the post-operation output sound does not change according to the mode, compared to the case where the message display itself is not displayed at all, It can be expected that it will be difficult for the player to recognize "whether or not the output sound changes after the operation" at a certain level. However, it is desirable that the display of a message prompting multiple operations be displayed in such a manner that it cannot appear in an operation valid state in which only one operation is accepted (this is not an essential configuration).

[Configuration 2-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the state of the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) can be detected, and it is detected that the specific operation means is being operated. Then, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this respect, when the specific operation means is detected to be in the operation state, the operation valid state, which is a state in which the output of the post-operation output sound can be started, is allowed to detect the operation state a plurality of times. A multiple-time operation valid state is prepared in which the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times. There is a multiple-operation valid state in which sound is not output multiple times, and a multiple-operation valid state in which a post-operation output sound is output multiple times only by keeping the specific operation means in the operation state. I'm trying Then, among the multiple-operation valid states, the specific operation is performed in the multiple-operation valid state of a type in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the operation is output multiple times only by maintaining the operation state of the specific operation means. When it is detected that the means is in the operating state and a post-operation output sound is output in accordance with this, the specific operating means is operated from the operating state while the post-operation output sound is being output. When it is detected that a non-operating state has been entered, the post-operation output sound in the output state can change with the detection as a trigger, so that the operating state of the specific operating means is maintained. It can be expected to favorably maintain a sense of tension about what to do. It should be noted that the “specific operation means” related to the configuration 2-A is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 2-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means as the "specific operation means" according to other configurations, or may mean a different operation means. In addition, it may mean the same "operation means" as operation means with different names according to other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, in the multiple-operation valid state of a type in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the specific operation means is not output a plurality of times only by maintaining the operation state of the specific operation means, the above-mentioned multiple-operation valid state will be described later. When it is detected that the specific operation means is in the above operation state and a post-operation output sound is output in response thereto, the specific operation means is in the state in which the post-operation output sound is being output. Even if it is detected that the operation state has changed to a non-operation state in which no operation is performed, the end of the post-operation output sound in the output state is not changed with the detection as a trigger, and the detection is performed. It may be changed without being triggered (for example, it may be output only for a predetermined output time and then terminated). According to this configuration, in the multiple-operation valid state, the post-operation output sound changes when the specific operation means is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state depending on whether or not the so-called auto repeated hitting function is enabled. It becomes possible to suggest whether or not will occur, and it is expected that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained.

Further, as will be described later, in this case, in particular, among the multiple-operation valid state, the multiple-time operation of a type in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the specific operation means is not output a plurality of times only by maintaining the operation state of the specific operation means. When it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operating state in the enabled state and a post-operation output sound is output in response thereto, the specific Even if it is detected that the operating means has changed from the operating state to the non-operating state in which it is not operated, the end of the post-operation output sound in the output state is not triggered by the detection. (for example, it is output only for a predetermined output time and is terminated), whereas only maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state in the multiple-time operation valid state When it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state in the multiple-operation valid state of the type in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is output multiple times, and the corresponding post-operation output sound is output, When it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from the operating state to the non-operating state in which the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound in the output state is output. Termination may be triggered by the detection or not triggered by the detection (for example, output for a predetermined output time and then terminated). good. According to such a configuration, when the so-called automatic continuous hitting function is not activated in the multiple-operation valid state, the after-operation output sound does not change when the specific operation means is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state. On the other hand, when the so-called auto repeated hitting function is activated in the multiple operation valid state, whether or not the post-operation output sound changes when the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state. Since it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not a person is in the situation, it is expected that the sense of tension will be preferably maintained.

In the configuration 2-A, the operation means when the so-called automatic repeated hitting function is not activated in the multiple operation valid state, and the operation means when the so-called automatic repeated hitting function is activated in the multiple operation valid state. , are assumed to be the same operation means as the "specific operation means", but this is not necessarily the case. For example, in the multiple-operation valid state, if a simulated image display that simulates an operation means that allows multiple operations is displayed, when the operation means corresponding to the simulated image display is maintained in the operated state A multiple operation valid state of the type in which the so-called auto-flick function is activated, and a multiple-time operation of the type in which the so-called auto-flick function is not activated when the operation means corresponding to the model image display is maintained in the operated state. It is also possible to employ a configuration related to "whether or not there is a change in the post-operation output sound" depending on the valid state.

[Configuration 3-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the state of the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) can be detected, and it is detected that the specific operation means is being operated. Then, it is possible to output a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection, and to display a simulated image display simulating the specific operation means. In this respect, when the specific operation means is detected to be in the operation state, the operation valid state, which is a state in which the output of the post-operation output sound can be started, is allowed to detect the operation state a plurality of times. A multiple operation valid state is prepared in which a post-operation output sound can be output multiple times, and the simulated image display can be displayed so that a periodic change appears in the multiple operation valid state. In some cases, the periodic change is displayed so that it appears in units of time equal to or shorter than the predetermined time, and in other cases it is displayed so that the periodic change appears in units of time longer than the predetermined time. Then, among the multiple-operation valid states, the specific operation means is operated in a multiple-operation valid state of a type in which a periodic change in the model image display appears in units of time longer than the predetermined time. state is detected and a post-operation output sound is output in accordance with this, the specific operation means is not operated from the operation state while the post-operation output sound is being output. When the non-operation state is detected, the post-operation output sound in the output state can be changed with the detection as a trigger. It can be expected to favorably maintain the tension when displayed to appear over long time units. It should be noted that the "specific operation means" and "predetermined time" related to the configuration 3-A are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 3-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means and time as the "specific operation means" and "predetermined time" related to other configurations, or may mean different operation means and time. In addition, it may mean the same “operation means” or “time” as operation means or time with different names related to other configurations. Also, as the "time longer than the predetermined time", only one time may be prepared, or a plurality of different times may be prepared.

In this case, as will be described later, the specific operation is performed in the multiple-operation valid state of the type in which periodic changes in the model image display appear in units of time equal to or shorter than the predetermined time, among the multiple-operation valid states. When it is detected that the means is in an operating state and a post-operation output sound is output in accordance with this, the specific operating means is in a state in which the post-operation output sound is being output, and the specific operating means is removed from the operating state. Even if it is detected that a non-operating state has been entered, the post-operation output sound in the output state is not changed with the detection as a trigger, and changes without the detection as a trigger. (For example, it may be output only for a predetermined output time and terminated). According to this configuration, in the multiple-operation valid state, the after-operation output sound is produced when the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state through the length of time required for the periodic change of the model image display. It becomes possible to suggest whether or not there will be a change, and it is expected that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained.

Also, as will be described later, in this case, among the multiple operation valid states, the multiple operation valid state of the type in which the periodic change of the model image display appears in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time When it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operating state and a post-operation output sound is output in response to this, the specific operation means is in a state in which the post-operation output sound is being output. Even if it is detected that the operation state has changed to a non-operation state in which no operation has been performed, the end of the post-operation output sound in the output state is not triggered by the detection, but is triggered by the detection. (for example, the output is completed for a predetermined output time), while in the multiple operation valid state, the periodic change of the model image display is a time unit longer than the predetermined time When it is detected that the above-mentioned specific operation means is in the operation state in the multiple operation valid state of the type displayed so as to appear in , and the post-operation output sound is output in response to this, the post-operation output sound is output. When it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from the operating state to the non-operating state in which the specific operating means is in the state of being operated, the end of the post-operation output sound in the output state is determined by the detection. There may be both a case where it is triggered and a case where it is not triggered by the detection (for example, a case where output is terminated after being output for a predetermined output time). According to such a configuration, when the time required for the periodic change of the model image display in the multiple-time operation valid state is relatively short, the post-operation output sound is produced when the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state. While it is preferable to suggest that no change occurs, when the time required for the periodic change of the model image display in the multiple-operation valid state is relatively long, when the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state. Since it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not there is a change in the output sound after the operation, it is expected that the sense of tension will be favorably maintained.

In the configuration 3-A, the operation means when the periodic change of the model image display in the multiple operation valid state appears in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time, and the periodic change of the model image display in the multiple operation valid state It is assumed that the operation means when the change appears in units of time longer than the predetermined time is the same operation means as the "specific operation means", but this is not necessarily the case. That is, even when the periodic change in the model image display appears in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time in the multiple-operation valid state, the periodic change in the model image display appears in units of time longer than the predetermined time. Even when there is an image display, the operation means corresponding to the model image display may be used as the operation target, and a configuration may be adopted in which "whether or not there is a change in the output sound after the operation".

Further, in the configuration 3-A, a plurality of times may be prepared as the "time equal to or less than the predetermined time", or only one time (for example, "predetermined time") may be prepared. good. Similarly, a plurality of times may be prepared for the "time longer than the predetermined time", or only one time may be prepared.

[Configuration 4-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the state of the operation means can be detected, and when it is detected that the operation means is being operated, an operation corresponding to the detection is detected. A post-output sound can be output, and a simulated image display imitating the operation means can be displayed. In this respect, when it is detected that the operating device, which is the target of the model image display, is in the operating state, the above operation state is set as the model image operation valid state, which is the state in which the output of the post-operation output sound can be started. is allowed to be detected multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times, and a first operation means and a second operation means are provided as the operation means. there is In addition, the first operating means is in an operating state in a multiple-operation valid state of a type in which at least a simulated image display imitating the first operating means is displayed among the multiple-time-operation valid states. is detected and the corresponding post-operation output sound is output, the non-operation state in which the first operation means is not operated from the operation state while the post-operation output sound is being output When it is detected that the state is changed, the post-operation output sound in the output state can be changed with the detection as a trigger. It can be expected to maintain a good sense of tension. The "first operating means" and "second operating means" of the configuration 4-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 4-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means as the "first operation means" or "second operation means" according to other configurations, or may mean different operation means. Also, it may mean the same "operation means" as the operation means with different names according to other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, the second operation means is put into the operation state in the multiple-time operation effective state of the type in which at least a simulated image display imitating the second operation means is displayed. When a post-operation output sound is output in response to the detection of a certain condition, the second operation means is not operated from the operation state while the post-operation output sound is being output. Even if it is detected that the non-operating state has been entered, the post-operation output sound in the output state does not change with the detection as a trigger, and changes without the detection as a trigger (for example, a predetermined output for the set output time and then terminated). According to this configuration, in the multiple-operation valid state, the post-operation output sound does not change when the operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state through the type of operation means that allows multiple-time operation. It will be possible to suggest whether or not it will occur, and it will be expected that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained.

Also, as will be described later, in this case, in particular, in the multiple-operation valid state of the type in which at least a simulated image display imitating the second operation means is displayed, the second operation means is in the multiple-operation valid state. When the operation state is detected and a post-operation output sound is output in response thereto, the second operation means is operated from the operation state while the post-operation output sound is being output. Even if it is detected that a non-operation state has been entered, the end of the post-operation output sound in the output state is not triggered by the detection, and is performed without the detection. (For example, output is completed for a predetermined output time). When it is detected that the first operation means is in the operation valid state and a post-operation output sound is output in response to this, the above-described operation is performed while the post-operation output sound is being output. When it is detected that the first operating means has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state in which it is not operated, the end of the post-operation output sound in the output state is triggered by the detection. There may be both a case where the output is performed without a trigger (for example, a case where the output is terminated after being output for a predetermined output time). According to such a configuration, in the multiple-time operation effective state, when the second operation means is the target of the simulated image display and the second operation means is operated, the second operation means is deactivated from the operation state. In contrast to suitably suggesting that the post-operation output sound does not change when entering the operation state, when the first operation means is targeted for the model image display and the first operation means is operated, Since it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not the post-operation output sound changes when the first operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state, it is possible to preferably maintain the sense of tension. come to be expected.

[Configuration 5-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the state of the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) can be detected, and it is detected that the specific operation means is being operated. Then, a post-operation change corresponding to the detection can be executed. In this regard, an operation effective state, which is a state in which the post-operation change can be started when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state, is allowed to detect that the specific operation means is in the operation state a plurality of times. A multiple-operation valid state is prepared in which the post-change can be executed multiple times. As one of the post-operation changes, a post-operation output sound can be output. When it is detected that the operation means is in the operation state and the post-operation output sound is output in response to this, the specific operation means is operated from the operation state while the post-operation output sound is being output. When it is detected that a non-operation state has been entered, the post-operation output sound in the output state may change in response to the detection or may not change in response to the detection. As such, it can be expected to favorably maintain the sense of tension when in the multiple-operation-enabled state. It should be noted that the “specific operation means” related to the configuration 5-A is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 5-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means as the "specific operation means" according to other configurations, or may mean a different operation means. In addition, it may mean the same "operation means" as operation means with different names according to other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, a first multiple-time operation valid state, a second multiple-time operation valid state, and a third multiple-time operation valid state are prepared as multiple-time operation valid states. In the effective state, the post-operation change corresponding to the detection can be executed multiple times only by maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state. The interval until the execution is started is an indefinite time, and the second multiple-time operation valid state is such that if the specific operation means is maintained in the operation state, a plurality of post-operation changes according to the detection will occur. In the third multiple-time operation valid state, the change after the operation according to the detection can be newly executed at regular intervals only by maintaining the operation state of the specific operation means. It may be assumed that Further, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state in the first multiple-time operation valid state and a post-operation output sound is output in response to this, the post-operation output sound is output. When it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from the operating state to the non-operating state in which the specific operating means is in the state of being on, the end of the post-operation output sound in the output state is triggered by the detection. When it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state in the second multiple-time operation valid state and a post-operation output sound is output in response to this, the post-operation output sound is output. Even if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from the operating state to the non-operating state in which the output sound is being output, the end of the post-operation output sound in the output state The third multiple-time operation valid state in the case where it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state and a post-operation output sound is output in response thereto, the specific operation means is in a state in which the post-operation output sound is being output. Even if it is detected that the operation state has changed to a non-operation state in which no operation has been performed, the end of the post-operation output sound in the output state is not triggered by the detection, but is triggered by the detection. (for example, output for a predetermined output time and then terminated). According to such a configuration, first, when the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection cannot be generated a plurality of times only by maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state, the specific operation means is moved from the operation state to the non-operation state. It is possible to suitably suggest that the post-operation output sound does not change when the state is changed. In this regard, when the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated a plurality of times only by maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state, this is the case when the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state. , there are both cases in which the post-operation output sound changes and cases in which the post-operation output sound does not change. Based on whether or not the post-output sound is output at regular time intervals, it is possible to suggest whether or not the post-operation output sound changes when the specific operation means is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state. As a result, it is expected that the game interest will be favorably maintained.

Note that in the configuration 5-A, the operation means when the so-called auto-flick function is not activated in the multiple-time operation valid state, and the operation means when the so-called auto-flick function is activated in the multiple-time operation valid state. , are assumed to be the same operation means as the "specific operation means", but this is not necessarily the case. In addition, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the first multiple-time operation valid state, the second multiple-time operation valid state, and the third multiple-time operation valid state are the same operation means, but this is not necessarily the case. can't For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means represented as a simulated image display and allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple-time operation valid state.

[Configuration 6-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the state of the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) can be detected, and it is detected that the specific operation means is being operated. Then, a post-manipulation change in response to the detection can be executed. In this respect, the operation effective state, which is a state in which the post-operation change can start to be executed when the specific operation means is detected to be in the operation state, is allowed to detect the operation state a plurality of times. A multiple operation valid state is prepared in which the post-change can be executed multiple times, and as one of the post-operation changes, a post-operation output sound can be output. As the multiple operation valid state, A first multiple-time operation valid state and a second multiple-time operation valid state are prepared. Further, the first multiple-time operation valid state is such that the post-operation change corresponding to the detection can be executed a plurality of times only by maintaining the operation state of the specific operation means. 2. The multiple-time operation effective state is a state in which the post-operation change corresponding to the detection cannot be executed multiple times only by maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state, and the specific operation is performed in the multiple-time operation effective state. When it is detected that the means is in the operating state and a post-operation output sound is output in accordance with this, the specific operating means is in the state in which the post-operation output sound is being output, and the specific operating means is removed from the operating state. When it is detected that a non-operating state has been entered, the post-operation output sound in the output state may change with the detection as a trigger, or may not change with the detection as a trigger. , it can be expected to favorably maintain the sense of tension when in the multiple-operation valid state. The “specific operation means”, “first multiple-time operation valid state”, and “second multiple-time operation valid state” related to the configuration 6-A are used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 6-A. It's just a nickname. Therefore, even if it means the same operation means or multiple-time operation valid state as the "specific operation means", the first multiple-time operation valid state, or the "second multiple-time operation valid state" according to other configurations Alternatively, it may mean a different operation means or a multiple-time operation valid state. In addition, it may mean the same “operating means” or “multiple operation valid state” as the operation means with different names or the multiple operation valid state according to other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, a first multiple-time operation valid state, a second multiple-time operation valid state, and a third multiple-time operation valid state are prepared as multiple-time operation valid states. In the valid state, the post-operation change corresponding to the detection can be executed multiple times only by maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state, and at that time, the post-operation change newly starts execution according to the detection. The interval until the operation is performed is always longer than the specific time, and the second multiple-time operation valid state is changed after the operation according to the detection by only maintaining the operation state of the specific operation means. is not executable multiple times, and the third multiple-time operation valid state is such that the post-operation change in response to the detection can be executed multiple times only by maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state, At that time, the interval until the post-operation change is newly started to be executed in response to the detection is always set to a time equal to or less than a specific time, and the specific operation means is operated in the first multiple-time operation valid state. state is detected and a post-operation output sound is output in accordance with this, the specific operation means is not operated from the operation state while the post-operation output sound is being output. When the non-operation state is detected, the end of the post-operation output sound in the output state can be triggered by the detection. When it is detected that the operating means is in the operating state and a post-operation output sound is output in response to this, the specific operating means is in the operating state while the post-operation output sound is being output. Even if it is detected that a non-operating state has been entered, the end of the post-operation output sound in the output state is not triggered by the detection, and is not triggered by the detection. (For example, the output is completed for a predetermined output time period). When the post-operation output sound is output, it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from the operating state to the non-operating state in which the post-operation output sound is being output. However, the end of the post-operation output sound in the output state is not triggered by the detection, and is performed without the detection (for example, output for a predetermined output time). terminated). According to such a configuration, first, when the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection cannot be generated a plurality of times only by maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state, the specific operation means is moved from the operation state to the non-operation state. It is possible to suitably suggest that the post-operation output sound does not change when the state is changed. In this regard, when the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated a plurality of times only by maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state, this is the case when the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state. , there are both cases in which the post-operation output sound changes and cases in which the post-operation output sound does not change. Depending on whether or not the interval between the output of the post-output sound and the new output of the post-output sound is longer than the specific time, the post-operation output sound changes when the specific operation means is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state. It becomes possible to suggest whether or not, and it is expected that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained.

Note that in the configuration 6-A, the operation means when the so-called auto-flick function is not activated in the multiple-time operation valid state, and the operation means when the so-called auto-flick function is activated in the multiple-time operation valid state. , are assumed to be the same operation means as the "specific operation means", but this is not necessarily the case. In addition, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the first multiple-time operation valid state, the second multiple-time operation valid state, and the third multiple-time operation valid state are the same operation means, but this is not necessarily the case. can't For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means represented as a simulated image display and allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple-time operation valid state. Also, the “specific time” related to the configuration 6-A is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 6-A. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "specific time" in other configurations, or it may mean a different time. Also, it may mean the same "time" as other names of time related to other configurations. Further, a plurality of "time longer than the specific time" related to the configuration 6-A may be prepared, or only one may be prepared. Similarly, there may be a plurality of "periods equal to or less than a specific period of time" for the configuration 6-A, or only one may be prepared.

[Configuration 7-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the state of the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) can be detected, and it is detected that the specific operation means is being operated. Then, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this respect, when the specific operation means is detected to be in the operation state, the operation valid state, which is a state in which the output of the post-operation output sound can be started, is allowed to detect the operation state a plurality of times. A multiple operation valid state is prepared in which the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times. Then, based on the fact that it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing in such a multiple-time operation valid state, the operation valid state is determined. In the multiple-operation valid state of the type in which the state can be ended, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state and a post-operation output sound is output in response to this, the post-operation output sound is output. When it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from the operating state to the non-operating state, the post-operation output sound in the output state changes with the detection as a trigger. Therefore, it can be expected that the sense of tension when in the multiple-operation valid state can be favorably maintained. It should be noted that the “specific operation means” related to the configuration 7-A is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 7-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means as the "specific operation means" according to other configurations, or may mean a different operation means. In addition, it may mean the same "operation means" as operation means with different names according to other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state before a predetermined end timing in the multiple-time operation valid state, the operation valid state is detected. When it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state in the multiple-operation valid state of the type in which the state is not terminated, and a post-operation output sound is output in response to this, the post-operation output sound is output. Even if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from the operating state to the non-operating state in which the specific operating means is in the state of being on, the post-operation output sound in the output state changes with the detection as a trigger. It may be changed without being triggered by the detection (for example, it may be output only for a predetermined output time and then terminated). According to such a configuration, in the multiple-time operation effective state, the specific operation means is determined based on whether or not the operation effective state is terminated based on detection that the specific operation means is in the operation state. It becomes possible to suggest whether or not the post-operation output sound will change when the operation state is changed to the non-operation state, and it is expected that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained.

Further, as will be described later, in this case, particularly, it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state before the arrival of the predetermined end timing in the multiple-time operation valid state. When it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state in the multiple-time operation valid state of the type in which the operation valid state is not terminated, and a post-operation output sound is output in response to this, the post-operation output sound is output. Even if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from the operating state to the non-operating state in which the output sound is being output, the end of the post-operation output sound in the output state The specific operation means is not triggered by detection, and is performed without being triggered by the detection, and the specific operation means is performed before a predetermined end timing in the multiple-time operation valid state. After detecting that the specific operating means is in an operating state in a multiple-time operation valid state of a type in which the operation valid state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means is in an operating state and an operation corresponding to this In the case where an output sound is output, in the state where the output sound is being output after the operation, if the specific operation means changes from the operation state to the non-operation state in which the operation is not performed, the operation in the output state The termination of the post-output sound may be triggered by the detection and may be terminated without the detection (not triggered). According to such a configuration, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state before the arrival of the predetermined end timing, the operation effective state is not terminated. In the operation valid state, it is suggested that the post-operation output sound does not change when the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state. In a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the operation valid state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means is in the operation state before, the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state. Since it is possible to sometimes make it difficult to recognize whether or not the post-operation output sound changes, it is expected that the sense of tension will be preferably maintained.

Note that in the configuration 7-A, there are a plurality of types in which the valid operation state is not terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means is in the operation state before the arrival of the predetermined termination timing. Based on the fact that the operating means to be operated a plurality of times in the single operation valid state and the specific operating means being in the operating state before the arrival of the predetermined end timing, the operation is performed. It is assumed that the operation means that can be operated multiple times in the effective state and the operation means that can be operated multiple times in the effective state are all the same operation means as the "specific operation means", but this is not necessarily the case. can't For example, in the multiple-time operation valid state, when the "operation means" expressed as a simulated image display is operated, the operation valid state can be terminated as a trigger. The configuration may be specified. In addition, even if the multiple operation valid state is not terminated before the predetermined end timing, depending on the result of the judgment of the big hit, etc., the predetermined result of the judgment of the big hit, etc. If the state may be terminated before the termination timing arrives, the multiple-operation valid state corresponds to the above-mentioned "multiple-operation valid state of a type in which the operation valid state can be terminated". is.

[Configuration 8-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the state of the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) can be detected, and it is detected that the specific operation means is being operated. Then, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output, and a message can be displayed to prompt an operation for the specific operation means. In this respect, when the specific operation means is detected to be in the operation state, the operation valid state, which is a state in which the output of the post-operation output sound can be started, is allowed to detect the operation state a plurality of times. A multiple operation valid state is prepared in which the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times, and in the multiple operation valid state, there are both cases in which the message display is displayed and in which the message display is not displayed. I'm trying Then, among the multiple-operation valid states, in the multiple-operation valid state of the type in which the message display is displayed, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state, the post-operation output sound "this When the specific operation means changes from the operation state to the non-operation state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound is output from the timing when the specific operation means changes to the non-operation state. Since it is possible to output a "sound for which the time until the is made inaudible is not a fixed time", when the post-operation output sound is in the output state and the message display is displayed, the above-mentioned specific operation means Even if the operation of the become. It should be noted that the “specific operation means” related to the configuration 8-A is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 8-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means as the "specific operation means" according to other configurations, or may mean a different operation means. Also, it may mean the same "operation means" as the operation means with different names according to other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state in the multiple-operation valid state of the type in which the message display is not displayed among the multiple-operation valid states, the post-operation output As a sound, "when the specific operation means changes from an operation state to a non-operation state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the operation is performed from the timing when the specific operation means changes to the non-operation state. After the output sound is made inaudible, only sounds whose time is not constant (sounds that are not processed as constant time and have an indefinite time) can be output, and can be operated multiple times. Among the valid states, in the multiple operation valid state of the type in which the message display is displayed, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state, the post-operation output sound "The post-operation output sound is output. If the specific operating means changes from the operating state to the non-operating state while the device is being operated, from the timing when the specific operating means changes to the non-operating state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible. and when the post-operation output sound is output, the specific operation means is not operated from the operation state while the post-operation output sound is being output. In the non-operating state, a sound is output for which the time from the timing when the above-mentioned specific operating means becomes the non-operating state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not constant. may be both.

According to such a configuration, when the post-operation output sound is in the output state and the message display is not displayed in the multiple-time operation valid state, when the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state, It is difficult to estimate how long it will take for the post-operation output sound in the output state to end after the non-operation state is reached. It becomes possible to suitably suggest that the notable performance is low under a situation where there is no such thing. On the other hand, in the multiple-time operation valid state, if the post-operation output sound is in the output state and the message display is displayed, it is in the output state when the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state. Since there are both cases where it is possible to estimate how long it will take for the post-operation output sound to end after the state of non-operation, and cases where it is difficult to estimate. , While suggesting the possibility that the performance after changing the above-mentioned specific operation means from the operating state to the non-operating state is worth noting, it is not necessarily output after a certain period of time has elapsed since the non-operating state. The post-operation output sound in the state is not necessarily terminated, and it is expected that the tension when the state is changed to the non-operation state will be preferably maintained.

It should be noted that, in order to preferably achieve such an effect, when one aspect of the message display appears, the post-operation output sound is set to "the above-mentioned specified post-operation output sound is being output." When the operating means changes from the operating state to the non-operating state in which it is not operated, the time from the timing when the above-mentioned specific operating means changes to the non-operating state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is constant. When "a sound processed as time" is output, and "when the above-mentioned specific operation means changes from an operation state to a non-operation state in which the above-mentioned specific operation means is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the non-operation state It is desirable that there is both a case where the time from the timing when the specific operation means is turned to the time when the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is not constant. However, this configuration does not necessarily have to be adopted. Even if one of the sounds is output according to the mode, it is expected that the above effects will be achieved at a certain level compared to the case where the message display itself is not displayed at all. can. However, it is desirable that the message prompting multiple operations be displayed in a mode that cannot appear in the operation valid state in which only one operation is accepted (this is not an essential configuration).

[Configuration 9-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the state of the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) can be detected, and it is detected that the specific operation means is being operated. Then, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this respect, when the specific operation means is detected to be in the operation state, the operation valid state, which is a state in which the output of the post-operation output sound can be started, is allowed to detect the operation state a plurality of times. A multiple-time operation valid state is prepared in which the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times, and among the multiple-time operation valid states, the post-operation output sound is generated only by maintaining the above-mentioned specific operation means in the operation state. is output multiple times, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state, the post-operation output sound is set to "While the post-operation output sound is being output, the above-mentioned When the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state where the operation is not performed, the time from the timing when the specific operation means changes to the non-operation state until the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is constant. Therefore, when it is possible to output the post-operation output sound multiple times just by maintaining the operation state of the specific operation means, the operation of the specific operation means can be performed. Even if it ends, it is possible to suggest that it is difficult to guess how long the post-operation output sound in the output state will end after the non-operation state. It should be noted that the “specific operation means” related to the configuration 9-A is merely a name used for explaining the technical idea of the configuration 9-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means as the "specific operation means" according to other configurations, or may mean a different operation means. In addition, it may mean the same "operation means" as operation means with different names according to other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, in the multiple-operation valid state of a type in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the specific operation means is not output a plurality of times only by maintaining the operation state of the specific operation means, the above-mentioned multiple-operation valid state will be described later. When it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state, the post-operation output sound is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state in which the specific operation means is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output. In this case, the time from the timing when the specific operation means changes to the non-operation state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not a fixed time (undefined time without being processed as a fixed time) A type in which only the sound that is time) can be output, and the post-operation output sound corresponding to the operation is output multiple times only by maintaining the above-mentioned specific operation means in the operation state in the multiple operation valid state. In the multiple-operation effective state, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state, the post-operation output sound "While the post-operation output sound is being output, the specific operation means is in the operation state When the non-operating state is entered, the sound ( and when the post-operation output sound is output, and when the specific operation means is not operated from the operation state while the post-operation output sound is being output. state, the time from the timing when the specific operation means changes to the non-operation state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not processed as a constant time (constant There may be both a case where a sound that is not the time of )” is output.

According to such a configuration, when the so-called automatic repeated hitting function is not activated in the multiple-time operation valid state, the post-operation output sound that is in the output state when the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state is output to the non-operation state. It is difficult to guess how long it will take to finish after entering the operating state. It becomes possible to preferably suggest low. On the other hand, when the so-called automatic continuous hitting function is activated in the multiple-time operation valid state, the post-operation output sound that is output when the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state is changed to the non-operation state. Since there are both cases where it is possible to guess how long it will take to finish after it has been changed, and cases where it is difficult to guess, While suggesting the possibility that the performance after being in the operation state is worth noting, the post-operation output sound in the output state does not necessarily end after a certain amount of time has passed since the non-operation state. In addition, it is expected that the sense of tension in the non-operating state will be preferably maintained.

In addition, in the configuration 9-A, the operation means when the so-called auto-flick function is not activated in the multiple-time operation valid state, and the operation means when the so-called auto-flick function is activated in the multiple-time operation valid state. , are assumed to be the same operation means as the "specific operation means", but this is not necessarily the case. For example, in the multiple-operation valid state, if a simulated image display that simulates an operation means that allows multiple operations is displayed, when the operation means corresponding to the simulated image display is maintained in the operated state A multiple operation valid state of the type in which the so-called auto-flick function is activated, and a multiple-time operation of the type in which the so-called auto-flick function is not activated when the operation means corresponding to the model image display is maintained in the operated state. A configuration related to the configuration 9-A may be adopted in the valid state.

[Configuration 10-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the state of the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) can be detected, and it is detected that the specific operation means is being operated. Then, it is possible to output a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection, and to display a simulated image display imitating the specific operation means. In this respect, when the specific operation means is detected to be in the operation state, the operation valid state, which is a state in which the output of the post-operation output sound can be started, is allowed to detect the operation state a plurality of times. A multiple operation valid state is prepared in which the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times. There are cases where the change appears in units of time equal to or shorter than a predetermined time, and cases in which the periodic changes appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time. Further, among the multiple-operation valid states, the multiple-operation valid state of the type in which the cyclical change of the simulated image display appears in units of time longer than the predetermined time, the specific operation means is detected to be in the operation state, the post-operation output sound is set to "when the specific operation means changes from the operation state to the non-operation state in which the operation is not performed while the post-operation output sound is being output. , the time from when the specific operation means is put into the non-operation state to when the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is not constant. When the periodic change is displayed so as to appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time, even if the operation of the specific operation means ends, how much time has elapsed since the non-operation state occurred. It is possible to suggest that it is difficult to guess whether the output sound will end after the operation in the output state. It should be noted that the "specific operation means" and "predetermined time" relating to the configuration 10-A are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 10-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means and time as the "specific operation means" and "predetermined time" related to other configurations, or may mean different operation means and time. In addition, it may mean the same “operation means” or “time” as operation means or time with different names related to other configurations. Also, as the "time longer than the predetermined time", only one time may be prepared, or a plurality of different times may be prepared.

In this case, as will be described later, in the multiple-operation valid state of the type in which the periodic change of the model image display appears in units of time equal to or shorter than the predetermined time, the above-described specific operation valid state is performed. When it is detected that the operation means is in the operation state, the post-operation output sound is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state in which the specific operation means is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output. In this case, the time from the timing when the above-mentioned specific operation means enters the non-operation state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not a fixed time (undefined time without being processed as a fixed time) A plurality of types displayed such that the periodic change in the display of the simulated image appears in units of time longer than the predetermined time in the multiple operation valid state. In the turn operation valid state, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state, the post-operation output sound is "while the specific operation means is being operated from the operation state while the post-operation output sound is being output." In the case of a non-operating state, the sound is processed as a constant period of time from the timing when the specific operating means changes to the non-operating state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible.” is output as the post-operation output sound, and when the above-mentioned post-operation output sound is "when the specific operation means changes from an operation state to a non-operation state in which the above-mentioned specific operation means is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the non-operation state is changed to The time from the timing when the specific operation means is activated until the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is not processed as a constant time, and an indeterminate sound (a sound that does not have a constant time) is output. You may make it have both cases.

According to such a configuration, when the time required for the periodic change of the model image display in the multiple-time operation enabled state is relatively short, the operation in the output state when the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state. It is difficult to estimate how long it will take for the post-output sound to end after the non-operating state. It becomes possible to suitably suggest that the notable performance is low. On the other hand, when the time required for the periodic change of the model image display is relatively long in the multiple-time operation valid state, the post-operation output sound that is in the output state when the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state. Since there are both cases where it is possible to estimate how long it will take to complete the operation after entering the non-operating state and cases where it is difficult to estimate, for example, the specific operation means While suggesting the possibility that the performance after switching from the operated state to the non-operated state may be worth noting, it is not necessarily the output state after a certain amount of time has passed since the non-operated state. The output sound is no longer necessarily terminated, and it is expected that the sense of tension in the non-operating state will be preferably maintained.

In addition, in the configuration 10-A, the operation means when the periodic change of the model image display appears in the time unit of the predetermined time or less in the multiple operation valid state, and the periodic change of the model image display in the multiple operation valid state It is assumed that the operation means when the change appears in units of time longer than the predetermined time is the same operation means as the "specific operation means", but this is not necessarily the case. That is, even when the periodic change in the model image display appears in units of time equal to or shorter than the predetermined time in the multiple-time operation enabled state, the periodic change in the model image display appears in units of time longer than the predetermined time. Even when there is a model image display, the operation means corresponding to the model image display may be used as the operation target, and the configuration related to the configuration 10-A may be adopted.

Further, in the configuration 10-A, a plurality of times may be prepared as the "time equal to or less than the predetermined time", or only one time (for example, "predetermined time") may be prepared. good. Similarly, a plurality of times may be prepared for the "time longer than the predetermined time", or only one time may be prepared.

[Configuration 11-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the state of the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) can be detected. , it is possible to output a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection, and to display a simulated image display simulating the operation means. In this respect, when it is detected that the operating means, which is the target of the model image display, is in the operating state, the model image operation valid state, which is a state in which the output of the post-operation output sound can be started, is in the operation state. is allowed to be detected multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times, and a first operation means and a second operation means are provided as the operation means. there is Further, among the multiple-operation effective states, the first operation means is in the operation state in the multiple-operation effective state of a type in which at least a model image display simulating the first operation means is displayed. is detected, as the post-operation output sound, "when the first operating means is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state while the post-operating output sound is being output, the non-operating state Since the time from the timing when the first operation means is turned to the time when the output sound is made inaudible after the operation is not constant, the operation is allowed to be operated multiple times. When the simulated image display simulating the first operating means is displayed as means, even if the operation of the first operating means is completed, the output will be output after how much time has passed since the non-operating state. It is possible to suggest that it is difficult to guess whether the post-operation output sound in the state will end. It should be noted that the "first operating means" and "second operating means" relating to the configuration 11-A are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 11-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means as the "first operation means" or "second operation means" according to other configurations, or may mean different operation means. In addition, it may mean the same "operation means" as operation means with different names according to other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, in a multiple-operation valid state of a type in which at least a simulated image display imitating the second operation means is displayed, the second operation means is in the operation state. When it is detected that there is a post-operation output sound, the post-operation output sound "when the second operating means changes from the operating state to the non-operating state in which the second operating means is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the non-operating means The time from the timing when the second operating means is put into the state until the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is not a fixed time (sound which is not processed as a fixed time and is indefinite) only" can be output, and in a multiple operation valid state of a type in which at least a model image display imitating the first operation means is displayed, when it is detected that the first operation means is in the operation state , as the post-operation output sound, "when the first operating means is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the first operating means is changed to the non-operating state. When the output sound after operation is output for a certain period of time from the timing when the sound goes off until the output sound after operation is made inaudible (sound processed as a certain period of time) "If the first operating means is changed from the operated state to the non-operated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the relevant post-operation means will be changed from the timing when the first operating means changes to the non-operated state. Even if there are both cases where the time until the output sound is made inaudible after the operation is not constant (sound that is not processed as a constant time and is indefinite) is output. good.

According to such a configuration, when the second operation means is the target of the simulated image display in the multiple-time operation enabled state and the second operation means is operated, the second operation means is disabled from the operation state. It is difficult to estimate how long it will take for the post-operation output sound, which is in the output state when the operation state is entered, to end after the non-operation state is entered. Therefore, it is possible to suitably suggest that the notable performance is low under the situation that the non-operating state has just been entered. On the other hand, when the first operating means is the target of the model image display and the first operating means is operated, the operation that is in the output state when the first operating means is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state Since there are both cases where it is possible to estimate how long it will take for the post-output sound to end after the non-operating state, and cases where it is difficult to estimate, for example, While suggesting the possibility that the performance after changing the first operating means from the operating state to the non-operating state is worth noting, it is not always output after the lapse of a certain time after the non-operating state. The post-operation output sound in the state is no longer necessarily terminated, and it is expected that the sense of tension when the state is changed to the non-operation state will be preferably maintained.

[Configuration 12-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the state of the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) can be detected, and it is detected that the specific operation means is being operated. Then, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this respect, when the specific operation means is detected to be in the operation state, the operation valid state, which is a state in which the output of the post-operation output sound can be started, is allowed to detect the operation state a plurality of times. A multiple-time operation valid state is prepared in which a post-operation output sound can be output multiple times. As an output sound, "when the specific operation means changes from an operation state to a non-operation state in which the post-operation output sound is being output, from the timing when the specific operation means changes to the non-operation state, In the case where the post-operation output sound is output for a certain period of time until the post-operation output sound is rendered inaudible, and in the case where "the above-mentioned specific operation means is operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, When the state changes to a non-operated state, the time from the timing when the above-mentioned specific operation means changes to the non-operated state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not a constant time.” is output, so for example, the performance after changing the specific operation means from the operation state to the non-operation state may be worth noting. However, the post-operation output sound in the output state does not necessarily end after a certain period of time has elapsed since the non-operation state was set, and this is also suitable for the feeling of tension when the operation state is set to the non-operation state. be expected to maintain. It should be noted that the “specific operation means” related to the configuration 12-A is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 12-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means as the "specific operation means" according to other configurations, or may mean a different operation means. Also, it may mean the same "operation means" as the operation means with different names according to other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, a first multiple-time operation valid state and a second multiple-time operation valid state are prepared as the multiple-time operation valid state. is maintained in the operated state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times. , the post-operation output sound is "when the specific operation means changes from an operation state to a non-operation state in which the operation output sound is being output, the specific operation means does not enter the non-operation state." It is possible to output as a sound (sound processed as a fixed time) that has a fixed time from the timing of the operation until the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation. In the turning operation valid state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated at predetermined time intervals only by maintaining the operation state of the specific operation means, but the post-operation output sound is " When the specific operation means changes from an operation state to a non-operation state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound is output from the timing when the specific operation means changes to the non-operation state. may be output as a sound whose time until is rendered inaudible is not constant (sound that is not processed as a constant time and is indefinite).

According to such a configuration, in the second multiple-time operation valid state among the multiple-time operation valid states, the post-operation output sound that is in the output state when the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state is It is difficult to guess how long it will take to finish after entering the operating state. It becomes possible to preferably suggest low. On the other hand, in the first multiple-operation valid state, the post-operation output sound, which is in the output state when the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state, is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state. Since it is possible to guess whether it will end, for example, it is possible to suggest the possibility that the performance after changing the specific operation means from the operating state to the non-operating state is worth noting. .

Also, as will be described later, in this case, in particular, in the first multiple-time operation valid state, the post-operation output sound is set as the post-operation output sound while the post-operation output sound is being output. When the specified operating means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state, the time from when the specified operating means changes to the non-operated state to when the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is constant. (Sound processed as a fixed time)", and "Non-operation in which the specific operation means is not operated from the operation state while the post-operation output sound is being output state, the time from the timing when the specific operation means becomes the non-operational state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not a fixed time (it is not processed as a fixed time) Indefinite sound)” may be output.

According to such a configuration, in the first multiple-time operation valid state among the multiple-time operation valid states, the post-operation output sound that is in the output state when the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state. Since there are both cases where it is possible to estimate how long it will take to complete the operation after entering the non-operating state and cases where it is difficult to estimate, for example, the specific operation means While suggesting the possibility that the performance after switching from the operated state to the non-operated state may be worth noting, it is not necessarily the output state after a certain amount of time has passed since the non-operated state. The output sound is no longer necessarily terminated, and it is expected that the sense of tension in the non-operating state will be preferably maintained.

In addition, in the configuration 12-A, the operation means when the so-called automatic repeated hitting function is not activated in the multiple operation valid state, and the operation means when the so-called automatic repeated hitting function is activated in the multiple operation valid state. , are assumed to be the same operation means as the "specific operation means", but this is not necessarily the case. In addition, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the first multiple-time operation valid state, the second multiple-time operation valid state, and the third multiple-time operation valid state are the same operation means, but this is not necessarily the case. can't For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means represented as a simulated image display and allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple-time operation valid state.

[Configuration 13-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), and when it is detected that the specific operation means is being operated, , a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this respect, when the specific operation means is detected to be in the operation state, the operation valid state, which is a state in which the output of the post-operation output sound can be started, is allowed to detect the operation state a plurality of times. A multiple-time operation valid state is prepared in which a post-operation output sound can be output multiple times. A post-output sound can be generated multiple times. In this regard, in the multiple-operation valid state, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state, the post-operation output sound is set to "the specific operation means while the post-operation output sound is being output. is changed from the operated state to the non-operated state, the time from the timing when the above-mentioned specific operation means changes to the non-operated state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is a constant time. A certain sound (sound processed as a fixed time)" is output, and "while the post-operation output sound is being output, the specific operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state where it is not operated. In this case, the time from the timing when the specific operation means changes to the non-operation state until the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is not a constant time (it is not processed as a constant time and is indefinite Since there are both cases where "sound)" is output, for example, it suggests the possibility that the performance after changing the above-mentioned specific operation means from the operation state to the non-operation state is worth noting. However, the post-operation output sound in the output state does not necessarily end after a certain period of time has elapsed since the operation was disabled. is expected to be well maintained. It should be noted that the “specific operation means” related to the configuration 13-A is merely a name used for explaining the technical idea of the configuration 13-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means as the "specific operation means" according to other configurations, or may mean a different operation means. In addition, it may mean the same "operation means" as operation means with different names according to other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, a first multiple-time operation valid state is prepared as the multiple-time operation valid state, and in the first multiple-time operation valid state, the specific operation means is maintained in the operation state. The post-operation output sound corresponding to the above-mentioned detection can be generated a plurality of times by only one time, and in this case, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always longer than the specific time, and The post-operation output sound is "when the specific operation means changes from an operation state to a non-operation state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the timing at which the specific operation means changes to the non-operation state. A sound (sound processed as a fixed time) whose time is a fixed time until the post-operation output sound is rendered inaudible may be output as a sound.

As will be described later, a second multiple-time operation valid state is prepared as the multiple-time operation valid state. The post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection is not allowed to be generated multiple times, and the post-operation output sound is "unless the specific operation means is operated from the operation state while the post-operation output sound is being output." In the case of an operation state, the time from the timing when the specific operation means changes to the non-operation state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not a constant time (not processed as a constant time) It may be so arranged that it can be output as "a sound that is indeterminate in

As will be described later, a third multiple-time operation valid state is prepared as the multiple-time operation valid state. The post-operation output sound can be generated a plurality of times in response to the detection, and in this case, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is set to a specific time or less, and the post-operation output sound "When the specific operation means changes from an operation state to a non-operation state while the post-operation output sound is being output, after the operation from the timing when the specific operation means changes to the non-operation state, The time until the output sound is rendered inaudible may be output as "sound that does not have a fixed time (sound that is not processed as a fixed time and is indefinite)".

In addition, in the configuration 13-A, the operation means when the so-called automatic repeated hitting function is not activated in the multiple operation valid state, and the operation means when the so-called automatic repeated hitting function is activated in the multiple operation valid state. , are assumed to be the same operation means as the "specific operation means", but this is not necessarily the case. In addition, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the first multiple-time operation valid state, the second multiple-time operation valid state, and the third multiple-time operation valid state are the same operation means, but this is not necessarily the case. can't For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means represented as a simulated image display and allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple-time operation valid state. Also, the “specific time” for the configuration 13-A is just a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 13-A. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "specific time" in other configurations, or it may mean a different time. Also, it may mean the same "time" as other names of time related to other configurations. Further, a plurality of "time longer than the specific time" related to the configuration 13-A may be prepared, or only one may be prepared. Similarly, there may be a plurality of "time equal to or less than a specific time" for the configuration 13-A, or only one.

[Configuration 14-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), and when it is detected that the specific operation means is being operated, , a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this respect, when the specific operation means is detected to be in the operation state, the operation valid state, which is a state in which the output of the post-operation output sound can be started, is allowed to detect the operation state a plurality of times. A multiple-time operation valid state in which a post-operation output sound can be output multiple times is prepared, and the specific operation means is executed before a predetermined end timing in the multiple-time operation valid state. In a multiple-time operation valid state of a type in which the operation valid state can be terminated based on detection of being in an operation state, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, the post-operation output As a sound, "when the specific operation means changes from an operation state to a non-operation state in which the post-operation output sound is being output, the operation is performed from the timing when the specific operation means changes to the non-operation state. Since it is possible to output a sound whose time until the post-output sound is made inaudible is not constant (sound that is not processed as a constant time and is indefinite), multiple operations of the type In the enabled state, it is difficult to guess how long it will take for the post-operation output sound, which is in the output state when the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state, to end after the non-operation state. For example, it is possible to preferably suggest that the performance to be noticed is low in a situation in which the specific operation means has just been changed from the operating state to the non-operating state. It should be noted that the “specific operation means” related to the configuration 14-A is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 14-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means as the "specific operation means" according to other configurations, or may mean a different operation means. Also, it may mean the same "operation means" as the operation means with different names according to other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state before a predetermined end timing in the multiple-time operation valid state, the operation valid state is detected. In the multiple-operation valid state of the type in which the state is not terminated, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state, the post-operation output sound is set to "While the post-operation output sound is being output, the specific When the operating means changes from the operating state to the non-operating state in which it is not operated, the time from the timing when the above-mentioned specific operating means changes to the non-operating state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is constant. A non-time sound (a sound that is indefinite without being processed as a constant time)" may be output. According to this configuration, in the non-terminated multiple-operation valid state, the post-operation output sound that is in the output state when the specific operation means is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state is changed to the non-operating state. It is preferable that it is difficult to estimate how much time will elapse after the operation is terminated. to be able to suggest

Further, as will be described later, in this case, particularly, it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state before the arrival of the predetermined end timing in the multiple-time operation valid state. In the multiple-time operation valid state of the type in which the operation valid state is not ended, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state, the post-operation output sound "The post-operation output sound is being output. Among them, when the specific operation means changes from the operation state to the non-operation state in which the operation is not performed, the period from the timing when the specific operation means changes to the non-operation state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible Only sounds whose time is not constant (sounds that are not processed as constant time and are indefinite) can be output, and when the predetermined end timing arrives in the multiple operation valid state It is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state in a multiple-time operation valid state of a type in which the operation valid state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means is in the operation state the previous time. Then, as a post-operation output sound, "If the specific operation means is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the specific operation means is changed to the non-operation state. A sound whose time is constant from the timing when the sound goes off until the post-operation output sound is made inaudible (sound processed as a constant time) is output, and the post-operation output sound "When the specific operation means changes from an operation state to a non-operation state while the post-operation output sound is being output, after the operation from the timing when the specific operation means changes to the non-operation state, There may be both a case where a sound whose time until the output sound is rendered inaudible is not constant (a sound that is not processed as a constant time and is indefinite) is output.

According to such a configuration, in the non-terminated multiple-operation valid state, the post-operation output sound that is in the output state when the specific operation means is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state is changed to the non-operating state. It is preferable that it is difficult to estimate how much time will elapse after the operation is terminated. On the other hand, in the terminated type multiple operation valid state, the post-operation output sound that is in the output state when the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state is Since there are both cases where it is possible to estimate how long it will take to end the operation after entering the operation state and cases where it is difficult to estimate, for example, the above-mentioned specific operation means is operated. While trying to suggest the possibility that the performance after changing from the state to the non-operating state may be worth noting, the post-operation output sound that is always output after a certain amount of time has passed since the non-operating state. is no longer necessarily terminated, and it is expected that the sense of tension when the user is in the non-operating state will be preferably maintained.

In addition, in the configuration 14-A, there are a plurality of types of types in which the valid operation state is not terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means is in the operation state before the arrival of the predetermined termination timing. Based on the fact that the operating means to be operated a plurality of times in the single operation valid state and the specific operating means being in the operating state before the arrival of the predetermined end timing, the operation is performed. It is assumed that the operation means that can be operated multiple times in the effective state and the operation means that can be operated multiple times in the effective state are all the same operation means as the "specific operation means", but this is not necessarily the case. can't For example, in the multiple-time operation valid state, when the "operation means" expressed as a simulated image display is operated, the operation valid state can be terminated as a trigger. The configuration may be specified. In addition, even if the multiple operation valid state is not terminated before the predetermined end timing, depending on the result of the judgment of the big hit, etc., the predetermined result of the judgment of the big hit, etc. If the state may be terminated before the termination timing arrives, the multiple-operation valid state corresponds to the above-mentioned "multiple-operation valid state of a type in which the operation valid state can be terminated". is.

[Configuration 15-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), and when it is detected that the specific operation means is being operated, , a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this respect, when the specific operation means is detected to be in the operation state, the operation valid state, which is a state in which the output of the post-operation output sound can be started, is allowed to detect the operation state a plurality of times. A multiple-time operation valid state is prepared in which the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times. As the multiple-time operation valid state, a first multiple-time operation valid state and a second multiple-time operation valid state having different generation conditions are provided. is to be prepared. Further, in both the first multiple-time operation effective state and the second multiple-time operation effective state, the specific operation means is in a non-operation state in which the specific operation means is not operated, and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. It is possible to play the game so as to cause the situation to appear, and in the situation where the specific operation means is in the non-operation state and the post-operation output sound is in the output state in the first multiple operation valid state. 2, when the specific operation means changes from the non-operation state to the operation state, the output state of the post-operation output sound may change with this as a trigger, but the specific operation means is in the operation state and the above If the specific operation means changes from the operating state to the non-operating state under the condition that the post-operation output sound is in the output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound does not change with this as a trigger. sell. That is, in this case, in the first multiple-time operation valid state, even if the specific operation means in the operation state is set to the non-operation state, the post-operation output sound that has been in the output state until then does not change triggered by this. Since it does not occur, it is expected that the operation will be interrupted casually. can be expected to favorably provide a sense of tension when re-operating. The “specific operation means”, “first multiple-time operation valid state”, and “second multiple-time operation valid state” related to the configuration 15-A are used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 15-A. It's just a nickname. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means and operation valid state as the "specific operation means", "first multiple-time operation valid state", and "second multiple-time operation valid state" according to other configurations. , may mean different operation means or operation valid states. In addition, it may mean the same “operation means” or “operation valid state” as the operation means or operation valid state with different names according to other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, when the specific operation means is in the non-operating state and the post-operation output sound is being output in the first multiple-time operation valid state, the post-operation output sound As a result, when the specific operation means temporarily changes from the non-operating state to the operating state, both the sound that can cause a change in the output state and the sound that does not cause a change in the output state will be output. However, when the specific operation means is in the operation state and the post-operation output sound is in the output state, the specific operation means has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state. In this case, regardless of the type of sound output as the post-operation output sound, the output state may not change with this as a trigger. According to such a configuration, in the first multiple-time operation valid state, even if the specific operation means in the operation state is set to the non-operation state, the post-operation output sound that has been in the output state until then is triggered by this. Since there is no such change, it is expected that the operation will be interrupted casually, but when the above specific operation means in the non-operating state is brought into the operating state, it has been in the output state until then. Since there are both cases where the output sound changes after the operation and cases where it does not change, it is possible that the output sound will change after the operation, even though the user is encouraged to perform the operation again. It can also be expected to favorably provide for the tension of re-manipulating.

Further, as will be described later, in this case, particularly, in the second multiple-operation valid state, under the condition that the specific operation means is in the non-operating state and the post-operation output sound is being output, As the post-operation output sound, when the specific operation means temporarily changes from the non-operating state to the operating state, there is a sound that does not cause a change in the output state triggered by this (the output state does not change). Although the sound that can be generated is not output as the post-operation output sound), the specific operation is performed under the condition that the specific operation means is in the operation state and the post-operation output sound is in the output state. When the means is changed from the operated state to the non-operated state, the sound output as the post-operation output sound may or may not change according to the type of sound output. may According to such a configuration, in the second multiple-time operation valid state, when the specific operation means in the operation state is put into the non-operation state, the post-operation output sound that has been in the output state may change. , Since there are both cases where there is no change, while prompting to interrupt the operation, there is a possibility that the output sound after the operation will change, so there is a sense of tension about interrupting the operation. is preferably provided, while the post-operation output sound, which has been in the output state until then, does not change when the specific operation means in the non-operating state is brought into the operating state. Therefore, it can be expected that the user will feel free to re-operate.

In the configuration 15-A, both the first multiple-time operation valid state and the second multiple-time operation valid state have the same operation means as the "specific operation means". However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means represented as a simulated image display and allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple-time operation valid state.

[Configuration 16-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of the operation means, and when it is detected that the operation means is being operated, a post-operation output corresponding to the detection It is possible to output sound and display a simulated image that imitates the operating means. In this respect, when it is detected that the operating means, which is the target of the model image display, is in the operating state, the model image operation valid state, which is the state in which the output of the post-operation output sound can be started, is detected as being in the operating state. A multiple-operation valid state is prepared in which detection is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times. A state and a second multiple-time operation valid state are prepared. The first multiple-time operation valid state is generated as an operation valid state in which at least a simulated image display imitating the first operation means among the operation means is displayed, and the first operation means is operated. The game is played so as to create a situation in which the output sound after the first side operation is in an output state in response to the detection of the operating state of the first side and in a non-operating state in which the first operating means is not operated. is possible, and the second multiple-operation valid state occurs as an operation valid state in which at least a simulated image display imitating the second operating means of the operating means is displayed, and the second multiple-operation valid state A situation appears in which the output sound is in an output state after the operation of the second side in response to the detection of the operating state in which the second operating means is operated, and the second operating means is in a non-operating state in which the second operating means is not operated. In addition, the first operating means is in the non-operating state in the first multiple-time operation valid state, and the output sound after the first side operation is output. If the first operating means is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state in the state of the state, the output state of the first side post-operation output sound may change with this as a trigger. 1 operation means is in the operation state and the output sound after the first side operation is in the output state, when the first operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state, the first side Since the output state of the post-operation output sound can be prevented from changing with this as a trigger, it is possible to positively prompt the user to put the first operating means in the non-operating state into the operating state. Become. In addition, the "first operation means", "second operation means", "first multiple-time operation valid state", and "second multiple-time operation valid state" according to the configuration 16-A are It is just a name used to explain the technical idea. Therefore, it means the same operation means and operation valid state as "first operation means", "second operation means", "first multiple-time operation valid state", and "second multiple-time operation valid state" according to other configurations. It may mean a different operation means or an operation valid state. In addition, it may mean the same “operation means” or “operation valid state” as the operation means or operation valid state with different names according to other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, when the first operating means is in the non-operating state and the output sound after the first side operation is being output in the first plural-time operation valid state, the first As the post-side operation output sound, only the sound that causes a change in the output state when the first operation means temporarily changes from the non-operating state to the operating state may be output ( However, under the condition that the first operation means is in the operation state and the output sound after the first side operation is in the output state, the above-mentioned When the first operating means changes from the operated state to the non-operated state, the output state of the post-first-side operation output sound does not change with this as a trigger (it is possible to change the sound in the output state). not). According to such a configuration, it is possible to more positively prompt the user to put the first operating means in the non-operating state into the operating state.

Also, as will be described later, in this case, particularly, in the second multiple-time operation valid state, under the condition that the second operating means is in the non-operating state and the output sound after the second side operation is in the output state. is output as the output sound after operation on the second side only a sound that does not cause a change in the output state when the second operation means temporarily changes from the non-operation state to the operation state. (the sound that can cause a change in the output state is not output as the post-second-side operation output sound), the second operation means is in the operation state and the post-second-side operation output sound is When the second operating means changes from the operated state to the non-operated state in the output state, the type of the sound output as the second side post-operation output sound is changed to There may be cases where it is changed accordingly and cases where it is not changed. According to such a configuration, when the second multiple-time operation valid state has occurred, it is possible to positively encourage the second operating means in the operated state to be in the non-operated state. , there is a possibility that a sound that does not cause a change is output in response to the non-operating state, so it can be expected that the sense of tension will also be favorably maintained.

[Configuration 17-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), and when it is detected that the specific operation means is being operated, , it is possible to execute a post-operation change according to the detection, and to display a simulated image display that imitates the operation means. In this respect, the operation effective state, which is a state in which the post-operation change can start to be executed when the specific operation means is detected to be in the operation state, is allowed to detect the operation state a plurality of times. A multiple operation valid state is prepared in which the post-change can be executed multiple times, and as one of the post-operation changes, a post-operation output sound can be output. As the multiple operation valid state, A first multiple-time operation valid state and a second multiple-time operation valid state having different occurrence conditions are prepared. The second multiple-time operation valid state can be ended when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing. However, the first multiple-time operation effective state is terminated when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state before the arrival of the predetermined termination timing. In addition, in the first multiple-time operation valid state, the specific operation means is in the non-operation state and the post-operation output sound is being output. When the specific operation means changes from the non-operation state to the operation state, the output state of the post-operation output sound may change with this as a trigger, but if the specific operation means is in the operation state and the post-operation output When the specific operation means changes from the operating state to the non-operating state in the state where the sound is output, the output state of the post-operation output sound can be prevented from changing with this as a trigger. As a result, it is possible to more positively prompt the user to bring the specific operation means in the non-operating state into the operating state. The “specific operation means”, “first multiple-time operation valid state”, and “second multiple-time operation valid state” related to the configuration 17-A are used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 17-A. It's just a nickname. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means and operation valid state as the "specific operation means", "first multiple-time operation valid state", and "second multiple-time operation valid state" according to other configurations. , may mean different operation means or operation valid states. In addition, it may mean the same “operation means” or “operation valid state” as the operation means or operation valid state with different names according to other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, the specific operation means is in a state in which the specific operation means is in the non-operation state and the post-operation output sound is being output in the first multiple-time operation valid state. changes from the non-operated state to the operated state, the output state of the post-operation output sound may change with this as a trigger, but the specific operation means is in the operated state and the post-operation output sound is in the output state. When the specific operation means changes from the operating state to the non-operating state under certain circumstances, the output state of the post-operation output sound does not change with this as a trigger. When the specific operation means is changed from the non-operation state to the operation state while the specific operation means is in the non-operation state in the valid state and the post-operation output sound is in the output state, the operation Although the output state of the post-output sound does not change with this as a trigger, the specific operation means is in the operation state and the post-operation output sound is in the output state. When the operating state changes to the non-operating state, this may be used as a trigger to change depending on the type of the sound output as the post-operation output sound, or not. good. According to such a configuration, when the "first multiple-time operation valid state" which is not terminated by the player's operation is generated, the specific operation means in the non-operating state is operated. You will be able to encourage more positively to create a state. In addition, when the "second multiple-time operation valid state" that can be terminated by the player's operation has occurred, it is more positive to put the specific operation means in the operation state into the non-operation state. Since there is a possibility that a sound that does not cause a change triggered by the non-operating state is output even though the user is encouraged to do so, it can be expected that the sense of tension will also be favorably maintained.

In the configuration 17-A, both the first multiple-time operation valid state and the second multiple-time operation valid state have the same operation means as the "specific operation means". However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means represented as a simulated image display and allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple-time operation valid state.

[Configuration 18-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), and when it is detected that the specific operation means is being operated, , a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this respect, when the specific operation means is detected to be in the operation state, the operation valid state, which is a state in which the output of the post-operation output sound can be started, is allowed to detect the operation state a plurality of times. A multiple-time operation valid state is prepared in which the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times. As the multiple-time operation valid state, a first multiple-time operation valid state and a second multiple-time operation valid state having different generation conditions are provided. is to be prepared. Further, in both the first multiple-time operation effective state and the second multiple-time operation effective state, the specific operation means is in a non-operation state in which the specific operation means is not operated, and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. The game can be played so as to cause a situation to appear, and the specific operation means is not operated while the specific operation means is in a non-operating state and the post-operation output sound is being output. When the state changes to the operation state, the time from entering the operation state to the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound may or may not be a fixed time. As a result, the effect is complicated when the operation for the specific operation means is completed, and it can be expected that the tension will be preferably maintained. The “specific operation means”, the “first multiple-time operation valid state”, and the “second multiple-time operation valid state” related to the configuration 18-A are used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 18-A. It's just a nickname. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means and operation valid state as the "specific operation means", "first multiple-time operation valid state", and "second multiple-time operation valid state" according to other configurations. , may mean different operation means or operation valid states. In addition, it may mean the same “operation means” or “operation valid state” as the operation means or operation valid state with different names according to other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, the specific operation means is in a state in which the specific operation means is in the non-operation state and the post-operation output sound is being output in the first multiple-time operation valid state. When the non-operating state changes to the operating state, the time from entering the operating state to the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound is fixed according to the type of the post-operation output sound in the output state. The specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state while the specific operation means is in the operation state and the post-operation output sound is in the output state, which may or may not be fixed. In this case, the time from the non-operation state to the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound may be indefinite. According to such a configuration, in the first multiple-time operation effective state, when the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state, the post-operation output sound that is in the output state is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state. This indicates that it is difficult to guess whether the operation will end after a certain amount of time elapses, for example, it preferably suggests that the notable performance is low under the circumstances where the specific operation means has just been changed from the operating state to the non-operating state. be able to On the other hand, it is possible to estimate how long it will take for the post-operation output sound, which is in the output state when the specific operation means is changed from the non-operation state to the operation state, to end after the operation state is changed. Since there are both cases where it is difficult to guess and cases where it is difficult to guess, for example, it suggests the possibility that the performance after the above-mentioned specific operation means is operated again is worth noting. However, the post-operation output sound in the output state does not necessarily end after a certain period of time has passed since the operation state is resumed. will be expected to remain at

Also, as will be described later, in this case, particularly, in the second multiple-time operation valid state, when the specific operation means is in the non-operation state and the post-operation output sound is being output. When the specific operation means changes from the non-operation state to the operation state, the time from the operation state to the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound is indefinite, but the specific operation means is If the specific operation means changes from the operating state to the non-operating state in the state of being in the operating state and the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound is output after entering the non-operating state. The time until the output state ends may be fixed or indefinite depending on the type of the post-operation output sound in the output state. According to such a configuration, in the second multiple-time operation effective state, when the specific operation means is changed from the non-operation state to the operation state, the post-operation output sound that is in the output state is changed after the operation state is changed. It is difficult to guess whether it will end after the elapse of this amount of time. be able to On the other hand, it is possible to estimate how long the post-operation output sound, which is in the output state when the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state, will end after the non-operation state. Since there are both cases where it is difficult to guess and cases where it is difficult to guess, for example, it suggests the possibility that the performance after the above-mentioned specific operation means is in a non-operated state is worth noting. However, the post-operation output sound in the output state does not necessarily end after a certain period of time has passed since the non-operation state is set, and this is also suitable for the tension when the non-operation state is set. will be expected to remain at

[Configuration 19-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of the operation means, and when it is detected that the operation means is being operated, a post-operation output corresponding to the detection A sound can be output, and a simulated image display imitating the operation means can be displayed. In this respect, when it is detected that the operating means, which is the target of the model image display, is in the operating state, the model image operation valid state, which is the state in which the output of the post-operation output sound can be started, is detected as being in the operating state. A multiple-operation valid state is prepared in which detection is allowed multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times, and the operation means includes a first operation means and a second operation means. As the multiple-time operation valid state, a first multiple-time operation valid state and a second multiple-time operation valid state having different occurrence conditions are prepared. The first multiple-time operation valid state occurs as an operation valid state in which at least a simulated image display imitating the first operation means is displayed, and an operation state in which the first operation means is operated. A game capable of creating a situation in which the output sound after the first side operation is in an output state in response to the detection of the state of being set and the first operation means is in a non-operating state in which the first operating means is not operated. The second multiple-operation valid state occurs as an operation valid state in which at least a simulated image display imitating the second operating means is displayed, and an operation in which the second operating means is operated A game can be played so as to create a situation in which the output sound after the second side operation is in an output state in response to the detection of the state being established and the second operation means is in a non-operation state in which the second operation means is not operated. In addition, in the first multiple-time operation valid state, the output sound after the first side operation is in the output state and the first operating means is in the non-operating state. Among them, when the first operation means is changed from the non-operated state to the operated state, the time from the change to the operated state to the end of the output state of the output sound after the first side operation is a constant time. Therefore, in a situation where the output sound after the first side operation is in the output state and the first operation means is in the non-operation state, it is difficult to determine at what timing the first operation means should be operated. It can be expected that it will be possible to impart performance, and that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained. In addition, the "first operation means", "second operation means", "first multiple-time operation valid state", and "second multiple-time operation valid state" according to the configuration 19-A are It is just a name used to explain the technical idea. Therefore, the same operation means and operation valid state as the "first operation means", "second operation means", "first multiple-time operation valid state", and "second multiple-time operation valid state" according to other configurations It may mean a different operation means or an operation valid state. In addition, it may mean the same “operation means” or “operation valid state” as the operation means or operation valid state with different names according to other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, in the second plural-time operation effective state, the above-described operation is performed while the output sound after the second side operation is in the output state and the second operation means is in the non-operating state. When the second operating means changes from the non-operating state to the operating state, the time from entering the operating state to ending the output state of the post-second-side operation output sound is not treated as a fixed time. ) may be indeterminate. According to such a configuration, in the second multiple-time operation effective state, the post-operation output sound that is in the output state when the second operation means is changed from the non-operation state to the operation state is output after the operation state is changed. It is preferable that it is difficult to guess how long it will take to finish, for example, the notable effect is low in a situation where the second operating means has just been changed from the non-operating state to the operating state. be able to suggest.

Also, as will be described later, in this case, in particular, the situation in which the output sound after the first side operation is in the output state and the first operating means is in the non-operating state in the first multiple-time operation valid state. When the first operating means changes from the non-operating state to the operating state in the lower part, the time from the change of the operating state to the end of the output state of the output sound after the first side operation is constant. Although it can be processed as time, the first operating means is changed from the operated state to the non-operated state while the output sound after the first side operation is in the output state and the first operating means is in the operated state. In this case, the time from the non-operation state to the end of the output state of the post-first side operation output sound may be indefinite (not processed as a fixed time). According to such a configuration, in the first multiple-time operation effective state, the post-operation output sound that is in the output state when the first operation means is changed from the non-operation state to the operation state is It is possible to estimate how long it will take to finish, and it is possible to suggest, for example, that there is a noteworthy performance even in a situation in which the first operating means has just been changed from the non-operating state to the operating state. On the other hand, it is difficult to estimate how long it will take for the post-operation output sound, which is output when the first operating means is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state, to end after the non-operating state. That is, for example, it is possible to preferably suggest that the notable effect is low under the situation that the first operating means has just been changed from the operating state to the non-operating state.

Also, as will be described later, in the second plural-time-manipulation valid state, when the output sound after the second side operation is in the output state and the second operation means is in the non-operating state. When the second operation means is changed from the non-operated state to the operated state, the time from the change to the operated state to the end of the output state of the output sound after the second side operation is indefinite. When the second operating means is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state under the condition that the post-second operation output sound is in the output state and the second operating means is in the operating state, the non-operating state is entered. The time from when the output state of the output sound after operation of the second side ends until the output state of the output sound after operation of the second side ends may be fixed or indefinite depending on the type of the output sound after operation of the second side in the output state. may According to this configuration, in the second multiple-time operation valid state, the post-operation output sound that is in the output state when the second operation means is changed from the non-operation state to the operation state is It is preferable that it is difficult to guess how long it will take to finish, for example, the notable effect is low in a situation where the second operating means is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state shortly after. While it can be suggested, when the second operating means is changed from the operated state to the non-operated state, the post-operation output sound in the output state will be terminated after the non-operated state. There are both cases where it is possible to guess whether or not, and there are cases where it is difficult to guess. While suggesting the possibility that there is a possibility that there is a possibility that it will be in the non-operating state, it is not necessarily the case that the post-operation output sound in the output state will end after a certain amount of time has passed since it is in the non-operating state. It is expected that the sense of tension will be appropriately maintained.

[Configuration 20-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), and when it is detected that the specific operation means is being operated, , a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this respect, when the specific operation means is detected to be in the operation state, the operation valid state, which is a state in which the output of the post-operation output sound can be started, is allowed to detect the operation state a plurality of times. A multiple-time operation valid state is prepared in which a post-operation output sound can be output multiple times. A plurality of operation effective states are prepared, and in each of these operation effective states, a situation appears in which the specific operation means is in a non-operation state in which the specific operation means is not operated and the post-operation output sound is output. It is made possible to play games. In the first multiple-time operation effective state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated a plurality of times only by maintaining the operation state of the specific operation means. The interval until a new output sound is generated is an indefinite time (not processed as a fixed time), and in the second multiple-time operation valid state, the specific operation means is maintained in the operation state. The post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection cannot be generated multiple times, and in the third multiple-time operation valid state, the specific operation means is only maintained in the operation state and the detection is performed. The corresponding post-operation output sound can be generated a plurality of times, and in this case, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated can be processed to be a constant time. , in the multiple-time operation valid state, the specific operation means is changed from the non-operation state to the operation state while the specific operation means is in the non-operation state and the post-operation output sound is being output. In this case, the output state of the post-operation output sound can be changed with this as a trigger. It becomes possible to suitably suggest that there is a nature. The "specific operation means", "first multiple-time operation valid state", "second multiple-time operation valid state", and "third multiple-time operation valid state" according to the configuration 20-A are It is just a name used to explain the technical idea of A. Therefore, the same operation means and operation valid state as the "specific operation means", "first multiple-time operation valid state", "second multiple-time operation valid state", and "third multiple-time operation valid state" according to other configurations It may mean a state, or it may mean a different operation means or an operation valid state. In addition, it may mean the same “operation means” or “operation valid state” as the operation means or operation valid state with different names according to other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, in a multiple-operation effective state in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation state of the specific operation means, the operation after the operation is performed. In the above-mentioned first plural-time operation valid state in which the interval until the output sound is newly generated is an indefinite time, the specific operation means is in a non-operating state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. When the specific operation means changes from the non-operating state to the operating state among the underlying devices, the output state of the post-operation output sound does not change with this as a trigger. In the third multiple-operation valid state in which the interval until new occurrence is a constant time, the specific operation means is in a non-operating state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. Among them, when the specific operation means changes from the non-operation state to the operation state, the output state of the post-operation output sound can be changed with this as a trigger, and the specific operation means is only maintained in the operation state. In the second multiple-operation valid state in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection is not allowed to be generated multiple times, the specific operation means is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. The output state of the post-operation output sound may be changed when the specific operation means changes from the non-operation state to the operation state among the underlying devices. According to such a configuration, when the player performs the operation again in the above-mentioned second multiple operation valid state in which the so-called automatic repeated hitting function is not activated, the so-called automatic repeated hitting function is activated at regular intervals. Since the output state of the post-operation output sound can be changed with this as a trigger, in both the case where the player performs the operation again in the above-mentioned third multiple-time operation valid state, the auto repeated operation can be performed. It is expected that the sense of tension will be favorably maintained by making it difficult to recognize whether or not the user is in a situation in which the function is to be activated. On the other hand, in the first plural-time operation valid state, if the specific operation means is re-operated under the condition that the post-operation output sound is being output, the so-called auto repeated operation function is valid. Since it is possible to recognize that it is not in a situation where it cannot be activated (second multiple operation valid state), that is, it is in a situation where the auto repeat function is activated, the so-called auto repeat function will be activated at regular intervals. Since it is not activated every time, it is made difficult to recognize ``whether the automatic repeated hitting function is to be activated'', and at the same time, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game due to the configuration.

In addition, in the configuration 20-A, the operating means for which multiple operations are permitted in the first multiple-time operation valid state, the second multiple-time operation valid state, and the third multiple-time operation valid state are all "specified Although it is assumed that the operation means is the same as the operation means, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means represented as a simulated image display and allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple-time operation valid state.

[Configuration 21-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), and when it is detected that the specific operation means is being operated, , a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this respect, when the specific operation means is detected to be in the operation state, the operation valid state, which is a state in which the output of the post-operation output sound can be started, is allowed to detect the operation state a plurality of times. A multiple-time operation valid state is prepared in which an output sound after operation can be output multiple times, and a first multiple-time operation valid state and a second multiple-time operation valid state are prepared as the multiple-time operation valid state. In any of these operation valid states, it is possible to play a game so as to create a situation in which the specific operation means is in a non-operation state in which the specific operation means is not operated and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. I'm trying In the first multiple-time operation effective state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated a plurality of times only by maintaining the operation state of the specific operation means. The interval until a new output sound is generated is an indefinite time, and in the second plural-time operation effective state, the post-operation output according to the detection is performed only by maintaining the operation state of the specific operation means. The sound can be generated multiple times. In that case, the interval until the output sound is newly generated after the operation can be processed as a constant time, and in the multiple operation valid state, , when the specific operation means changes from the non-operation state to the operation state in a situation where the specific operation means is in the non-operation state and the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound is Since the output state can be changed with this as a trigger, for example, when the specific operation means is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state again, it is suggested that there is a notable performance even in the immediate situation. be able to The “specific operation means”, “first multiple-time operation valid state”, and “second multiple-time operation valid state” related to the configuration 21-A are used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 21-A. It's just a nickname. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means and operation valid state as the "specific operation means", the "first multiple-time operation valid state", and the "second multiple-time operation valid state" according to other configurations. However, it may mean a different operation means or an operation valid state. In addition, it may mean the same “operation means” or “operation valid state” as the operation means or operation valid state with different names according to other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, in the first plural-time operation effective state in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is an indefinite time, the specific operation means is in the non-operating state and the When the specific operation means changes from the non-operating state to the operating state while the post-operation output sound is in the output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound does not change with this as a trigger. and in the second multiple-operation valid state in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is a constant time, the specific operation means is in a non-operating state and the post-operation output sound is generated. When the specific operation means changes from the non-operation state to the operation state in the output state, the type of the sound output as the post-operation output sound is changed according to the type of the sound output as the post-operation output sound. There may be cases where it is changed and cases where it is not changed. According to such a configuration, in the first plural-time operation valid state in which the so-called automatic continuous hitting function is not activated at regular intervals, even if the specific operation means is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state again, after the operation Since the output state of the output sound does not change with this as a trigger, in combination with the fact that the interval until the output sound is newly generated after the operation is an indefinite time, whether the operation by the player is properly accepted. It is expected that the sense of tension is preferably maintained by making it difficult to recognize the On the other hand, in the second multiple operation valid state, in which the so-called auto-flick function is activated at regular intervals, there is a possibility that the performance after the specific operation means is put into the operation state again is worth noting. However, by not necessarily changing the post-operation output sound in the output state when the operation state is resumed, the feeling of tension when returning to the operation state is also considered. It will be expected to keep well.

In the configuration 21-A, the operation means for which multiple operations are permitted in the first multiple-time operation valid state and the second multiple-time operation valid state are both the same operation means as the "specific operation means". A certain case was assumed, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means represented as a simulated image display and allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple-time operation valid state.

[Configuration 22-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), and when it is detected that the specific operation means is being operated, , a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this respect, when the specific operation means is detected to be in the operation state, the operation valid state, which is a state in which the output of the post-operation output sound can be started, is allowed to detect the operation state a plurality of times. A multiple-time operation valid state is prepared in which a post-operation output sound can be output multiple times. A plurality of operation effective states are prepared, and in each of these operation effective states, a situation appears in which the specific operation means is in a non-operating state in which the above-mentioned post-operation output sound is output. It is possible to play in In the first multiple-time operation effective state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated a plurality of times only by maintaining the operation state of the specific operation means. The interval until a new sound is generated is an indefinite time, and in the second multiple-time operation valid state, if the specific operation means is maintained in the operation state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection is generated. In the third multiple-operation valid state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation state of the specific operation means. However, at that time, the interval until the output sound is newly generated after the operation can be processed so as to be a constant time, so that the range of performance is widened and the game is interesting. It can be expected to remain favorable. The "specific operation means", "first multiple-time operation valid state", "second multiple-time operation valid state", and "third multiple-time operation valid state" according to the configuration 22-A are It is just a name used to explain the technical idea of A. Therefore, the same operation means and operation valid state as the "specific operation means", "first multiple-time operation valid state", "second multiple-time operation valid state", and "third multiple-time operation valid state" according to other configurations It may mean a state, or it may mean a different operation means or an operation valid state. In addition, it may mean the same “operation means” or “operation valid state” as the operation means or operation valid state with different names according to other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, the post-operation output sound is selected from the multiple-operation valid state in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state. In the above-mentioned first plural-time operation effective state in which the interval until the occurrence of a When the specific operation means is changed from the non-operated state to the operated state, the time from the operation state to the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound is indefinite (the fixed time is is not processed), on the other hand, in the third multiple-time operation valid state in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is a constant time, the specific operation means is in the non-operation state and the When the specific operation means changes from a non-operating state to an operating state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated after entering the operating state. can be processed as a fixed time rather than an indefinite time, and the above-mentioned second operation output sound cannot be generated a plurality of times according to the detection only by maintaining the operation state of the specific operation means. In the multiple operation valid state, when the specific operation means is changed from the non-operation state to the operation state while the specific operation means is in the non-operation state and the post-operation output sound is being output. Alternatively, the time from entering the operation state to the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound may be processed as a constant time. According to such a configuration, when the player performs the operation again in the above-mentioned second multiple operation valid state in which the so-called automatic repeated hitting function is not activated, the so-called automatic repeated hitting function is activated at regular intervals. In both cases where the player performs the operation again in the third multiple operation valid state, the time from when the player performs the operation again to when the output state of the post-operation output sound ends. is constant, it is expected that the sense of tension will be favorably maintained by making it difficult to recognize whether or not the player is in a situation in which the automatic repeated hitting function is to be activated. On the other hand, in the first plural-time operation valid state, if the specific operation means is re-operated under the condition that the post-operation output sound is being output, the so-called auto repeated operation function is valid. Since it can recognize that it is not in a situation where it cannot be activated (second multiple operation valid state), that is, it is in a situation where the auto repeat function is activated, the so-called auto repeat function will be activated at regular intervals. While making it difficult to recognize "whether the automatic repeated hitting function is to be activated" by not being activated, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to having the configuration.

In addition, in the configuration 22-A, the operating means for which multiple operations are permitted in the first multiple-time operation valid state, the second multiple-time operation valid state, and the third multiple-time operation valid state are all "specified Although the case where it is the same operation means as "operation means" was assumed, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means represented as a simulated image display and allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple-time operation valid state.

[Configuration 23-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), and when it is detected that the specific operation means is being operated, , a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this respect, when the specific operation means is detected to be in the operation state, the operation valid state, which is a state in which the output of the post-operation output sound can be started, is allowed to detect the operation state a plurality of times. A multiple-time operation valid state is prepared in which an output sound after operation can be output multiple times, and a first multiple-time operation valid state and a second multiple-time operation valid state are prepared as the multiple-time operation valid state. In any of these operation valid states, it is possible to play a game so as to create a situation in which the specific operation means is in a non-operation state in which the specific operation means is not operated and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. I'm trying In the first multiple-time operation effective state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated a plurality of times only by maintaining the operation state of the specific operation means. The interval until a new sound is generated is an indefinite time, and in the second multiple-time operation valid state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection is generated only by maintaining the operation state of the specific operation means. It can be generated multiple times, but in that case, it can be processed so that the interval until the output sound is newly generated after the operation is set to a fixed time, so that the range of performance is expanded. It can be expected that the game interest will be favorably maintained. The “specific operation means”, “first multiple-time operation valid state”, and “second multiple-time operation valid state” related to the configuration 23-A are used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 23-A. It's just a nickname. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means and operation valid state as the "specific operation means", the "first multiple-time operation valid state", and the "second multiple-time operation valid state" according to other configurations. However, it may mean a different operation means or an operation valid state. In addition, it may mean the same “operation means” or “operation valid state” as the operation means or operation valid state with different names according to other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, in the first plural-time operation effective state in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is an indefinite time, the specific operation means is in the non-operating state and the When the specific operation means changes from the non-operating state to the operating state in the state where the post-operation output sound is being output, the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated after entering the operating state. In the second multiple-operation valid state in which the time until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is fixed, the specific operation means is in the non-operation state. and the post-operation output sound is in the output state, when the specific operation means changes from the non-operation state to the operation state, the output state of the post-operation output sound after entering the operation state The time until is terminated may be an indefinite time or a fixed time. According to such a configuration, in the first plural-time operation valid state in which the so-called automatic continuous hitting function is not activated at regular intervals, even if the specific operation means is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state again, the operation state Since the time until the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated is indeterminate, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is an indeterminate time. It is expected that it will be difficult to recognize whether the operator's operation has been properly accepted, and that the sense of tension will be preferably maintained. On the other hand, in the second multiple operation valid state, in which the so-called auto-flick function is activated at regular intervals, there is a possibility that the performance after the specific operation means is put into the operation state again is worth noting. However, by making it so that the post-operation output sound in the output state does not necessarily end in a certain amount of time after being in the operation state again, the feeling of tension when returning to the operation state is also this. is expected to be well maintained.

In the configuration 23-A, the operating means for which multiple operations are permitted in the first multiple-time operation valid state and the second multiple-time operation valid state are both the same operation means as the "specific operation means". A certain case was assumed, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means represented as a simulated image display and allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple-time operation valid state.

[Configuration 24-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), and when it is detected that the specific operation means is being operated, , a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this respect, when the specific operation means is detected to be in the operation state, the operation valid state, which is a state in which the output of the post-operation output sound can be started, is allowed to detect the operation state a plurality of times. A multiple operation valid state is prepared in which the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times. Then, as the multiple-time operation valid state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times only by maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state, and at that time, the post-operation output sound is newly generated. an indefinite change multiple operation effective state that can be processed so that the interval until occurrence is an indefinite time; In that case, after preparing a constant change multiple operation valid state that can be processed so that the interval until the output sound is newly generated after the operation is a constant time, the above constant change The multiple-operation valid state is a type of multiple-operation valid state that can be terminated based on detection that the specific operation means is in the operation state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing. Regarding the possibility of terminating the state based on the detection that the specific operation means is in the operation state through the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated because the state can be generated will be able to make suggestions. The "specific operation means", "indefinite change multiple operation valid state", and "constant change multiple operation valid state" related to the configuration 24-A are used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 24-A. It's just a nickname. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means or operation valid state as "specific operation means", "indefinite change multiple operation valid state", and "constant change multiple operation valid state" according to other configurations. However, it may mean a different operation means or an operation valid state. In addition, it may mean the same “operation means” or “operation valid state” as the operation means or operation valid state with different names according to other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, the inconstant change multiple operation effective state is set based on the detection that the specific operation means is in the operation state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing. While the state can be generated as a multiple-operation valid state of a type that can be terminated, the constant-change multiple-operation valid state can be generated when the specific operation means operates before the arrival of a predetermined end timing. When the state occurs as a multiple-operation valid state of a type that is not terminated based on the state being detected, and when the specific operation means is in the operation state before the predetermined end timing arrives There may be both a case where the state is terminated as a multiple-operation valid state based on the detection that the state is in the state. According to such a configuration, when the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated when the specific operation means is maintained in the operation state is an indefinite time, the specific operation means is kept in the operation state. While it is possible to preferably suggest that the state is in a situation where the state can be terminated by detecting that the state is in the state of If the interval until a new occurrence is set to a constant time, whether the state can be terminated by detecting that the specific operation means is in the operation state, or whether the specific operation means Triggered by the detection that the is in the operating state, it is expected that the sense of tension will be preferably maintained by making it difficult to recognize whether the state is in an unfinished state.

In the configuration 24-A, the operating means for which multiple operations are permitted in the inconstant change multiple operation valid state and the constant change multiple operation valid state are all the same operation means as the "specific operation means". A certain case was assumed, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means represented as a simulated image display and allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple-time operation valid state.

[Configuration 25-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), and when it is detected that the specific operation means is being operated, , a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this respect, when the specific operation means is detected to be in the operation state, the operation valid state, which is a state in which the output of the post-operation output sound can be started, is allowed to detect the operation state a plurality of times. A multiple-time operation valid state is prepared in which a post-operation output sound can be output multiple times. A plurality of operation effective states are prepared, and in each of these operation effective states, a situation appears in which the specific operation means is in a non-operation state in which the specific operation means is not operated and the post-operation output sound is output. It is made possible to play games. In the first multiple-time operation valid state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated a plurality of times only by maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state. The interval until a new occurrence is always longer than the specific time, and the second multiple-time operation valid state is output after the operation according to the detection, if only the specific operation means is maintained in the operation state. The sound cannot be generated multiple times, and in the third multiple-operation valid state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times only by maintaining the operation state of the specific operation means. At that time, the interval until the output sound is newly generated after the operation is always set to the time equal to or less than the specific time, and in the multiple-time operation valid state, the specific operation means is put into the non-operation state. and the post-operation output sound is in the output state, if the specific operation means changes from the non-operation state to the operation state, the output state of the post-operation output sound can change with this as a trigger. As a result, it is possible to suggest the possibility that the performance after the specific operation means is put into the operation state again is worth noting. The "specific operation means", "first multiple-time operation valid state", "second multiple-time operation valid state", "third multiple-time operation valid state", and "specific time" related to the configuration 25-A are , are merely designations used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 25-A. Therefore, it is the same as the "specific operation means", "first multiple-time operation valid state", "second multiple-time operation valid state", "third multiple-time operation valid state", and "specific time" according to other configurations. It may mean an operation means, an operation effective state, or time, or may mean a different operation means, an operation effective state, or time. In addition, the same "operation means", "operation valid state", and "time" as operating means, operation valid state, and time with different names according to other configurations may be used. In addition, "a period of time less than or equal to a specific period of time" includes a "specific period of time," but only one period of time is prepared for each of "a period of time longer than a specific period of time" and "a period of time less than or equal to a specific period of time." may be available, or multiple different times may be provided.

In this case, as will be described later, the post-operation output is selected from the multiple-operation effective state in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation state of the specific operation means. In the first plural-time operation valid state in which the interval until the sound is newly generated is always longer than the specific time, the specific operation means is in a non-operating state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. When the specific operation means changes from the non-operating state to the operating state under certain circumstances, the output state of the post-operation output sound is not changed with this as a trigger, and the post-operation In the third multiple-operation valid state in which the interval until the new output sound is generated is always equal to or less than the specific time, the specific operation means is in a non-operating state and the post-operation output sound is output. When the specific operation means changes from the non-operation state to the operation state in the state of the state, the output state of the post-operation output sound can be changed with this as a trigger, and the specific operation means is operated. In the second multiple-operation valid state in which the state is maintained and the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection is not allowed to be generated a plurality of times, the specific operation means is in a non-operating state and the post-operation output sound is in the output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound may change when the specific operation means changes from the non-operation state to the operation state.

According to such a configuration, when the player performs the operation again in the above-mentioned second multiple operation valid state in which the so-called auto repeated hitting function is not activated, and when the output after the previous operation is started, the predetermined time or less When the player performs the operation again in the above-mentioned third multiple operation valid state, in which the so-called automatic continuous hitting function is activated and the output after a new operation is started only after the time of has passed, Since the post-operation output sound in the output state is changed when the player re-operates, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the automatic continuous hitting function is to be activated, thereby creating a sense of tension. It will be expected to keep well. On the other hand, in the first plural-time operation valid state, if the specific operation means is re-operated under the condition that the post-operation output sound is being output, the so-called auto repeated operation function is valid. Since it can be recognized that it is not in a situation where it cannot be activated (second multiple operation valid state), that is, it is in a situation where the auto repeated press function is activated, after the previous operation output is started A game by having the configuration while making it difficult to recognize ``that the automatic repeated hitting function is to be activated'' by not activating the so-called automatic repeated hitting function unless a time longer than a specific time has passed. A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, in the configuration 25-A, the operating means for which multiple operations are permitted in the first multiple-time operation valid state, the second multiple-time operation valid state, and the third multiple-time operation valid state are all "specified Although the case where it is the same operation means as "operation means" was assumed, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means represented as a simulated image display and allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple-time operation valid state.

[Configuration 26-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), and when it is detected that the specific operation means is being operated, , a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this respect, when the specific operation means is detected to be in the operation state, the operation valid state, which is a state in which the output of the post-operation output sound can be started, is allowed to detect the operation state a plurality of times. A multiple-time operation valid state is prepared in which an output sound after operation can be output multiple times, and a first multiple-time operation valid state and a second multiple-time operation valid state are prepared as the multiple-time operation valid state. In any of these operation valid states, it is possible to play a game so as to create a situation in which the specific operation means is in a non-operation state in which the specific operation means is not operated and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. I'm trying In the first multiple-time operation valid state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated a plurality of times only by maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state. The interval until a new occurrence is always longer than the specific time, and the second multiple-time operation effective state is set after the operation corresponding to the detection is performed only by maintaining the operation state of the specific operation means. The output sound can be generated multiple times, and in that case, the interval until the output sound is newly generated after the operation is always less than or equal to the above specific time, and in the multiple operation valid state, Output of the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means is changed from the non-operation state to the operation state under the condition that the specific operation means is in the non-operation state and the post-operation output sound is being output. Since the state can be changed with this as a trigger, it is possible to suggest the possibility that the performance after the specific operation means is put into the operation state again is of noteworthy value. The "specific operation means", "first multiple-time operation valid state", "second multiple-time operation valid state", and "specific time" related to the configuration 26-A are based on the technical concept of the configuration 26-A. It's just a nomenclature used for explanation. Therefore, it means the same operation means, operation valid state, and time as "specific operation means", "first multiple-time operation valid state", "second multiple-time operation valid state", and "specific time" related to other configurations. Alternatively, it may mean a different operation means, operation effective state, or time. In addition, the same "operation means", "operation valid state", and "time" as operating means, operation valid state, and time with different names according to other configurations may be used. In addition, "a period of time less than or equal to a specific period of time" includes a "specific period of time", and only one period of time is prepared for each of "a period of time longer than a specific period of time" and "a period of time less than or equal to a specific period of time". may be available, or multiple different times may be provided.

In this case, as will be described later, in the first plural-time operation valid state in which the interval until the output sound is newly generated after the operation is always longer than the specific time, the specific operation means is in the non-operating state. and the post-operation output sound is in the output state, when the specific operation means changes from the non-operation state to the operation state, the output state of the post-operation output sound changes with this as a trigger. and in the second plural-time operation valid state in which the interval until the output sound is newly generated after the operation is always equal to or less than the specific time, the specific operation means is in the non-operating state and the When the above-mentioned specific operation means changes from the non-operating state to the operating state under the condition that the post-operation output sound is in the output state, the type of sound that is output as the above-mentioned post-operation output sound triggered by this may or may not be changed depending on . According to such a configuration, unless a time longer than a specific time has elapsed since the output after the previous operation was started, the so-called auto repeated operation function does not start a new output after the operation. state, even if the specific operation means is changed from the non-operation state to the operation state again, the output state of the post-operation output sound does not change with this as a trigger. In combination with the fact that the so-called auto-flick function is not activated unless a long time has passed, it is expected that it will be difficult to recognize whether the player's operation has been properly accepted and that the tension will be maintained appropriately. be. On the other hand, in the second multiple operation valid state, in which the so-called auto-repetition function is activated and a new post-operation output is started only after a certain period of time or less has elapsed since the previous post-operation output was started. , The post-operation output sound in the output state is again in the operation state, while suggesting the possibility that the performance after the specific operation means is in the operation state again is worth noting. By not necessarily changing the state when the state is changed, it is expected that the feeling of tension when returning to the operation state will be preferably maintained.

In the configuration 26-A, the operation means for which multiple operations are permitted in the first multiple-time operation valid state and the second multiple-time operation valid state are both the same operation means as the "specific operation means". A certain case was assumed, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means represented as a simulated image display and allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple-time operation valid state.

[Configuration 27-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), and when it is detected that the specific operation means is being operated, , a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this respect, when the specific operation means is detected to be in the operation state, the operation valid state, which is a state in which the output of the post-operation output sound can be started, is allowed to detect the operation state a plurality of times. A multiple-time operation valid state is prepared in which a post-operation output sound can be output multiple times. A plurality of operation effective states are prepared, and in each of these operation effective states, a situation appears in which the specific operation means is in a non-operating state in which the above-mentioned post-operation output sound is output. It is designed to be possible to play at. In the first multiple-time operation valid state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated a plurality of times only by maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state. The interval until a new occurrence is always longer than the specific time, and the second multiple-time operation valid state is set after the operation corresponding to the detection is performed only by maintaining the operation state of the specific operation means. The output sound cannot be generated multiple times, and the third multiple-time operation valid state is such that the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times only by maintaining the operation state of the specific operation means. At that time, since the interval until the output sound is newly generated after the operation is always set to the time equal to or less than the specific time, the range of performance is widened, and the interest in the game is preferably maintained. can be expected. The "specific operation means", "first multiple operation valid state", "second multiple operation valid state", "third multiple operation valid state", and "specific time" related to the configuration 27-A are , are merely designations used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 27-A. Therefore, it is the same as the "specific operation means", "first multiple-time operation valid state", "second multiple-time operation valid state", "third multiple-time operation valid state", and "specific time" according to other configurations. It may mean an operation means, an operation effective state, or time, or may mean a different operation means, an operation effective state, or time. In addition, the same "operation means", "operation valid state", and "time" as operating means, operation valid state, and time with different names according to other configurations may be used. In addition, "a period of time less than or equal to a specific period of time" includes a "specific period of time", and only one period of time is prepared for each of "a period of time longer than a specific period of time" and "a period of time less than or equal to a specific period of time". may be available, or multiple different times may be provided.

In this case, as will be described later, the post-operation output sound is selected from the multiple-operation valid state in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state. In the first multiple-operation valid state in which the interval until the new occurrence of is always longer than the specific time, the specific operation means is in a non-operating state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. In a certain situation, when the high-level specific operation means changes from the non-operating state to the operating state, the time from the operation state to the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound is indefinite ( is not processed as a fixed time), whereas in the third multiple-time operation valid state in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always equal to or less than the specific time, the specific operation means is in the non-operating state and the post-operation output sound is in the output state, if the specific operation means changes from the non-operating state to the operating state, the post-operation output after entering the operating state The time until the sound output state ends can be processed as a fixed time instead of an indefinite time, and a plurality of post-operation output sounds corresponding to the detection are generated only by maintaining the operation state of the specific operation means. In the second multiple-time operation valid state in which multiple occurrences are not possible, the specific operation means is not operated while the specific operation means is in the non-operation state and the post-operation output sound is being output. When the state is changed to the operation state, the time from the change to the operation state to the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound can be processed as a constant time, and the specific operation means is maintained in the operation state. In the second multiple-operation valid state in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection is not allowed to be generated multiple times, the specific operation means is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. If the specific operation means changes from the non-operating state to the operating state under certain circumstances, the time from the operation state to the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound is a certain period of time. It may be possible to process as According to such a configuration, when the player performs the operation again in the above-mentioned second multiple operation valid state in which the so-called auto repeated hitting function is not activated, and when the output after the previous operation is started, the predetermined time or less When the player performs the operation again in the above-mentioned third multiple operation valid state, in which the so-called automatic continuous hitting function is activated and the output after a new operation is started only after the time of has passed, Since the time from the player's re-operation to the end of the output state of the output sound after the operation is constant, it is possible to determine whether or not the auto repeat function is activated. It becomes expected that it will be difficult to recognize and that the tension will be maintained appropriately. On the other hand, in the first plural-time operation valid state, if the specific operation means is re-operated under the condition that the post-operation output sound is being output, the so-called auto repeated operation function is valid. Since it can be recognized that it is not in a situation where it cannot be activated (second multiple operation valid state), that is, it is in a situation where the auto repeated press function is activated, after the previous operation output is started A game by having the configuration while making it difficult to recognize ``that the automatic repeated hitting function is to be activated'' by not activating the so-called automatic repeated hitting function unless a time longer than a specific time has passed. A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, in the configuration 27-A, the operating means for which multiple operations are permitted in the first multiple-time operation valid state, the second multiple-time operation valid state, and the third multiple-time operation valid state are all "specified Although the case where it is the same operation means as "operation means" was assumed, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means represented as a simulated image display and allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple-time operation valid state.

[Configuration 28-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), and when it is detected that the specific operation means is being operated, , a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this respect, when the specific operation means is detected to be in the operation state, the operation valid state, which is a state in which the output of the post-operation output sound can be started, is allowed to detect the operation state a plurality of times. A multiple-time operation valid state is prepared in which an output sound after operation can be output multiple times, and a first multiple-time operation valid state and a second multiple-time operation valid state are prepared as the multiple-time operation valid state. In any of these operation valid states, it is possible to play a game so as to create a situation in which the specific operation means is in a non-operation state in which the specific operation means is not operated and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. I'm trying In the first multiple-time operation valid state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated a plurality of times only by maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state. The interval until a new occurrence is always longer than the specific time, and the second multiple-time operation effective state is set after the operation corresponding to the detection is performed only by maintaining the operation state of the specific operation means. The output sound can be generated multiple times, and in that case, the interval until the output sound is newly generated after the operation is always set to the time equal to or less than the specific time, so that the range of performance is widened. , can be expected to favorably maintain amusement. The "specific operation means", "first multiple-time operation valid state", "second multiple-time operation valid state", and "specific time" related to the configuration 28-A are based on the technical concept of the configuration 28-A. It's just a nomenclature used for explanation. Therefore, it means the same operation means, operation valid state, and time as "specific operation means", "first multiple-time operation valid state", "second multiple-time operation valid state", and "specific time" related to other configurations. Alternatively, it may mean a different operation means, operation effective state, or time. In addition, the same "operation means", "operation valid state", and "time" as operating means, operation valid state, and time with different names according to other configurations may be used. In addition, "a period of time less than or equal to a specific period of time" includes a "specific period of time," but only one period of time is prepared for each of "a period of time longer than a specific period of time" and "a period of time less than or equal to a specific period of time." or multiple different times may be provided.

In this case, as will be described later, in the above-described first multiple operation valid state, in which the so-called auto repeated hitting function is not activated unless a time longer than a specific time has elapsed since the output after the previous operation was started, the specific operation is performed. When the specific operating means changes from the non-operating state to the operating state while the means is in the non-operating state and the post-operation output sound is in the output state, the above operation is performed after entering the operating state. The time until the output state of the post-output sound is terminated is set to be indefinite (not processed as a fixed time), so that the so-called auto In the second multiple operation valid state in which the continuous hitting function is activated and a new post-operation output is started, the specific operation means is in a non-operating state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. Among them, when the specific operation means is changed from the non-operated state to the operated state, the time from the operation state to the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound is an indefinite time (fixed There may be a case where the time is not processed as a fixed time) and a case where it is a fixed time (can be processed as a fixed time). According to such a configuration, in the first plural-time operation valid state, in which the so-called auto repeated hitting function is not activated unless a time longer than the specific time has elapsed since the output after the previous operation was started, the specific operation means is changed from the non-operated state to the operated state again, the time from when the operation state is entered until the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated is indefinite. To preferably maintain a sense of tension by making it difficult to recognize whether a player's operation is properly accepted, in combination with the fact that a so-called auto repeated hitting function is not activated unless a time longer than a specific time elapses. There is expected. On the other hand, in the second multiple operation valid state, in which the so-called auto-repetition function is activated and a new post-operation output is started only after a certain period of time or less has elapsed since the previous post-operation output was started. , While suggesting the possibility that the performance after the specific operation means is put into the operation state again is worth noting, the post-operation output sound in the output state is By not necessarily ending in a fixed time, it is expected that the sense of tension when returning to the operation state will be maintained appropriately.

In the configuration 28-A, the operation means for which multiple operations are permitted in the first multiple-time operation valid state and the second multiple-time operation valid state are both the same operation means as the "specific operation means". A certain case was assumed, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means represented as a simulated image display and allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple-time operation valid state.

[Configuration 29-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), and when it is detected that the specific operation means is being operated, , a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this respect, when the specific operation means is detected to be in the operation state, the operation valid state, which is a state in which the output of the post-operation output sound can be started, is allowed to detect the operation state a plurality of times. A multiple operation valid state is prepared in which the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times. Then, as the multiple-time operation valid state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated a plurality of times only by maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state. A long change multiple operation valid state in which the interval until the occurrence of the operation is always longer than the specific time, and a plurality of post-operation output sounds according to the detection just by maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state. In this case, after preparing a short change multiple operation valid state in which the interval until the output sound is newly generated after the operation is always equal to or less than the above specific time, The multiple-operation valid state is a multiple-operation valid state of a type that can be terminated based on detection that the specific operation means is in the operation state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing. Therefore, the possibility of terminating the state based on the detection that the specific operation means is in the operation state through the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated be able to make suggestions. The "specific operation means", "long change multiple operation valid state", "short change multiple operation valid state", and "specific time" related to the configuration 29-A are based on the technical concept of the configuration 29-A. It's just a nomenclature used for explanation. Therefore, it means the same operation means, operation valid state, and time as "specific operation means", "long change multiple operation valid state", "short change multiple operation valid state", and "specific time" related to other configurations Alternatively, it may mean a different operation means, operation effective state, or time. In addition, the same "operation means", "operation valid state", and "time" as operating means, operation valid state, and time with different names according to other configurations may be used. In addition, "a period of time less than or equal to a specific period of time" includes a "specific period of time," but only one period of time is prepared for each of "a period of time longer than a specific period of time" and "a period of time less than or equal to a specific period of time." or multiple different times may be provided.

In this case, as will be described later, the long change multiple operation valid state is set based on the detection that the specific operation means is in the operation state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing. The state can be generated as a multiple-operation valid state of a type that can be terminated, and the short-change multiple-operation valid state is such that the specific operation means is in the operation state before a predetermined end timing arrives. When the state is generated as a multiple-operation valid state of a type that is not terminated based on the detection of this, and when the specific operation means is in the operation state before the arrival of the predetermined end timing may be generated as a multiple-operation valid state of a type that can be terminated based on the detection of . According to such a configuration, even though the auto-repeat function is to be activated, the so-called auto-repeat function cannot be activated unless a time longer than a specific time has elapsed since the output was started after the previous operation. is capable of suitably suggesting that the specific operation means is in a situation where the state can be terminated by detecting that the specific operation means is in the operation state, whereas the output after the previous operation is started. When a so-called auto-flick function is activated and a new post-operation output is started only after a period of time equal to or less than the specified time has passed since then, the detection that the specified operation means is in the operating state triggers the relevant operation. It is difficult to recognize whether the state can be terminated or whether the state cannot be terminated by detecting that the specific operation means is in the operating state, and the tension is preferably felt. be expected to maintain.

In the configuration 29-A, the operation means for which multiple operations are permitted in the short change multiple operation valid state and the long change multiple operation valid state are all the same operation means as the "specific operation means". A certain case was assumed, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means represented as a simulated image display and allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple-time operation valid state.

[Configuration 30-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of the operation means, and when it is detected that the operation means is being operated, a post-operation output corresponding to the detection It is possible to output sound and display a simulated image that imitates the operating means. In this respect, when it is detected that the operating means, which is the target of the model image display, is in the operating state, it is detected that it is in the operating state as the model image operation valid state, which is the state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output. is allowed multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times. and the periodic change may be displayed in units of time equal to or less than a predetermined time, or may be displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time. A first multiple-time operation valid state, a second multiple-time operation valid state, and a third multiple-time operation valid state are prepared as the multiple-time operation valid states, and in these multiple-time operation valid states In both cases, it is possible to play the game so as to create a situation in which the operating means, which is the target of the simulated image display, is in a non-operating state in which the above-mentioned post-operation output sound is being output. ing. In the first multiple-time operation valid state, the periodic change of the model image display can be displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time, and the operating means, which is the target of the model image display, is in the operation state. A post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated a plurality of times only by being maintained, and in the second multiple-time operation valid state, the periodic change of the model image display is a time unit longer than the predetermined time. However, the output sound after the operation corresponding to the above detection cannot be generated multiple times only by maintaining the operation state of the operation means that is the target of the model image display. In the multiple-operation valid state, display is possible so that periodic changes in the model image display appear in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time, and the operation means that is the target of the model image display is simply maintained in the operation state. After being able to generate a post-operation output sound in response to the above detection multiple times, in the multiple-operation valid state, the operating means that is the target of the model image display is in a non-operating state and after the above operation When the operating means changes from the non-operating state to the operating state under the condition that the output sound is in the output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound can be changed with this as a trigger. It is possible to suggest the possibility that the performance after the operating means, which is the target of image display, is put into the operating state again is of noteworthy value. Note that the "first multiple-time operation valid state", "second multiple-time operation valid state", "third multiple-time operation valid state", and "predetermined time" related to the configuration 30-A It is just a name used to explain the technical idea of Therefore, the same operation valid state and time or a different operational valid state or time. In addition, it may mean an operation valid state with another name according to another configuration, an “operation valid state” same as time, or “time”. Also, as the "time equal to or less than the predetermined time" and the "time longer than the predetermined time", only one time may be prepared, or a plurality of different times may be prepared.

In this case, as will be described later, out of the multiple operation valid state in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times only by maintaining the operation state of the operation means for which the model image is to be displayed. , in the first multiple-operation valid state in which display is possible such that periodic changes in the model image display appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time, the operating means for which the model image is to be displayed is in the non-operating state. and the post-operation output sound is in the output state, if the operation means changes from the non-operation state to the operation state, the output state of the post-operation output sound changes with this as a trigger. In the above-mentioned third multiple-operation valid state in which display is possible so that periodic changes in the model image display appear in units of time equal to or less than the above-mentioned predetermined time, the operating means that is the target of the model image display is When the operating means is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state in the non-operating state and the post-operation output sound output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound is triggered by this. In addition to being able to change, the model image display can be displayed so that periodic changes appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time, but the operation means that is the target of the model image display is maintained in the operating state. In the second multiple-operation valid state in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection cannot be generated a plurality of times only by the operation being performed, the operation means is in a non-operating state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. When the operating means changes from the non-operating state to the operating state under certain circumstances, the output state of the post-operation output sound may be changed with this as a trigger.

According to such a configuration, of the multiple-operation valid states in which the so-called auto-flick function is activated for the operating means to be displayed as a model image, the first multiple-operation valid state is displayed as a model image. In that the periodic change of the display appears in units of time longer than the predetermined time, the automatic repeated hitting function can be achieved by using the same configuration as the second multiple operation valid state in which the so-called automatic repeated hitting function is not activated. While maintaining the tension by making it difficult to recognize whether the target of the Unlike , the output state of the post-operation output sound does not change with this as a trigger. It can be expected that a decrease in interest in games can be suppressed by suitably suggesting that there is something. In addition, among the multiple operation valid states in which the so-called automatic continuous tapping function is activated for the operation means that is the target of the model image display, in the above-mentioned third multiple operation valid state, the post-operation output sound is output. In the case where the operation is performed again in a certain state, the output state of the post-operation output sound can be changed with this as a trigger. By using the same configuration as the state, it is difficult to recognize whether it is the target of the automatic continuous hitting function and the tension is maintained. Unlike the case, it can be displayed so that it appears in units of time less than the predetermined time. It can be expected that the decrease in interest in gaming can be suppressed by appropriately suggesting that the player is in a situation where the player is

[Configuration 31-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of the operation means, and when it is detected that the operation means is being operated, a post-operation output corresponding to the detection It is possible to output sound and display a simulated image that imitates the operating means. In this respect, when it is detected that the operating means, which is the target of the model image display, is in the operating state, it is detected that it is in the operating state as the model image operation valid state, which is the state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output. is allowed multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times. and the periodic change may be displayed in units of time equal to or less than a predetermined time, or may be displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time. A first multiple-time operation valid state and a second multiple-time operation valid state are prepared as the multiple-time operation valid state. is in a non-operating state in which the operation means is not operated and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. In the first multiple-time operation valid state, the periodic change of the model image display can be displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time, and the operating means, which is the target of the model image display, is in the operation state. The post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated a plurality of times only by being maintained, and in the second multiple-time operation valid state, the periodic change of the simulated image display is performed in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time. The post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated a plurality of times only by maintaining the operation means, which is the target of the simulated image display, in the operation state, and In the multiple-operation effective state, the operation means is changed from the non-operation state to the operation state while the operation means to be displayed as the model image is in the non-operation state and the post-operation output sound is being output. When , the output state of the post-operation output sound can be changed with this as a trigger, so attention should be paid to the performance after the operation means, which is the target of the simulated image display, is put into the operation state again. You will be able to suggest the possibility of value. It should be noted that the "first multiple-time operation valid state", "second multiple-time operation valid state", and "predetermined time" related to the configuration 31-A are used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 31-A. It's just a nickname. Therefore, it may mean the same operation valid state or time as the "first multiple-time operation valid state", "second multiple-time operation valid state", and "predetermined time" according to other configurations. , may mean different operation valid states or times. In addition, it may mean an operation valid state with another name according to another configuration, an “operation valid state” same as time, or “time”. Also, as the "time equal to or less than the predetermined time" and the "time longer than the predetermined time", only one time may be prepared for each, or a plurality of different times may be prepared.

In this case, as will be described later, in the first multiple-time operation valid state, it is possible to display the model image so that periodic changes appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time, and the model image is displayed. The post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated a plurality of times only by maintaining the operation means in the operation state, and the operation means to be displayed as the model image is in the non-operation state. In addition, when the operating means changes from the non-operating state to the operating state under the condition that the post-operation output sound is in the output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound does not change with this as a trigger. In the second multiple-time operation valid state, display is possible so that periodic changes in the model image display appear in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time, and the operation means that is the target of the model image display is operated. A post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated a plurality of times only by maintaining the state, and the operating means that is the target of the simulated image display is in a non-operating state and after the operation. If the operating means changes from the non-operating state to the operating state while the output sound is being output, the type of the sound output as the post-operation output sound is triggered by this. The output state of the post-operation output sound may change and may not change. According to such a configuration, in the first plural-time operation valid state in which the cyclic change of the model image display appears in units of time longer than the predetermined time, the operation means is restarted from the non-operation state. To preferably maintain a sense of tension by making it difficult for a player to recognize whether or not an operation by a player is properly accepted because the output state of the post-operation output sound does not change even if the operation state is set. There is expected. On the other hand, in the second plural-operation valid state in which the cyclical change of the model image display appears in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time, the performance after the specific operation means is again in the operation state is improved. While trying to suggest the possibility that is worth noting, the post-operation output sound in the output state does not necessarily change when it is again in the operation state. It will be expected that this tension will be suitably maintained.

[Configuration 32-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of the operation means, and when it is detected that the operation means is being operated, a post-operation output corresponding to the detection It is possible to output sound and display a simulated image that imitates the operating means. In this respect, when it is detected that the operating means, which is the target of the model image display, is in the operating state, it is detected that it is in the operating state as the model image operation valid state, which is the state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output. is allowed multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times. and the periodic change may be displayed in units of time equal to or less than a predetermined time, or may be displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time. A first multiple-time operation valid state, a second multiple-time operation valid state, and a third multiple-time operation valid state are prepared as the multiple-time operation valid state. In any of the above, it is possible to play a game so as to create a situation in which the operating means, which is the target of the simulated image display, is in a non-operating state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. A first multiple-time operation valid state, a second multiple-time operation valid state, and a third multiple-time operation valid state are prepared as multiple-time operation valid states. The game can be played so as to create a situation in which the operating means, which is the target of image display, is in a non-operating state and the post-operation output sound is being output. Further, in the first multiple-time operation valid state, the operation means that is the target of the model image display is enabled to display such that periodic changes in the model image display appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time. The post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated a plurality of times only by maintaining the operation state, and in the second multiple-operation valid state, the periodic change of the simulated image display is longer than the predetermined time. It is possible to display so as to appear in long units of time, but the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection is not allowed to be generated multiple times only by maintaining the operation state of the operation means that is the target of the model image display. In the third multiple-time operation valid state, display is possible so that periodic changes in the model image display appear in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time, and the operating means, which is the target of the model image display, is maintained in the operable state. Since the post-operation output sound corresponding to the above-mentioned detection can be generated a plurality of times by simply pressing the button, the range of performance is widened, and it can be expected that the interest in the game can be favorably maintained. Note that the "first multiple-time operation valid state", "second multiple-time operation valid state", "third multiple-time operation valid state", and "predetermined time" related to the configuration 32-A It is just a name used to explain the technical idea of Therefore, the same operation valid state and time as the "first multiple-time operation valid state", "second multiple-time operation valid state", "second multiple-time operation valid state", and "predetermined time" according to other configurations It may mean a different operation valid state or time. In addition, it may mean an operation valid state with another name according to another configuration, an “operation valid state” same as time, or “time”. Also, as the "time equal to or less than the predetermined time" and the "time longer than the predetermined time", only one time may be prepared for each, or a plurality of different times may be prepared.

In this case, as will be described later, out of the multiple operation valid state in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times only by maintaining the operation state of the operation means for which the model image is to be displayed. , in the first multiple-operation valid state in which display is possible such that periodic changes in the model image display appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time, the operating means for which the model image is to be displayed is in the non-operating state. and the post-operation output sound is in the output state, if the operation means changes from the non-operation state to the operation state, the output state of the post-operation output sound is changed after entering the operation state. While the time until the end is indefinite (not treated as a fixed time), the above-mentioned first display is possible so that the periodic change of the model image display appears in units of time equal to or less than the above-mentioned predetermined time. 3. In the multiple operation effective state, the operating means to be displayed as the model image is in the non-operating state and the post-operation output sound is being output, and the operating means is operated from the non-operating state. When the state is entered, the time from entering the operation state to the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound can be processed as a fixed time (not an indefinite time), and the target of the model image display In the second multiple-time operation valid state in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection cannot be generated multiple times only by maintaining the operation means in the operation state, the operation means is in the non-operation state and When the operating means changes from the non-operating state to the operating state while the post-operation output sound is in the output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated after entering the operating state. The time up to the time may be processed as a fixed time (instead of an indefinite time).

According to such a configuration, in the multiple-operation valid state in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated a plurality of times only by maintaining the operation means, which is the target of the model image display, in the operation state As for the first multiple-time operation valid state, as in the second multiple-time operation valid state, periodic changes in the model image display appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time. While maintaining the tension by making it difficult to recognize whether the target of the , the time from the re-operation to the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound is indefinite (not treated as a fixed time). By confirming the output state of the post-operation output sound at the time of operation, it can be expected that it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest by appropriately suggesting that the automatic repeated hitting function is being activated. . Further, among the multiple-operation valid states in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times only by maintaining the operation means to be displayed as the model image in the operation state, the third multiple-time operation is performed. Regarding the operation valid state, similarly to the second multiple-time operation valid state, if the operation is performed again while the post-operation output sound is in the output state, the post-operation output sound will be output after the re-operation is performed. Since it is possible to process the time until the output state ends as a fixed time (not an indefinite time), it is difficult to recognize whether it is the target of the auto repeat function and maintains a sense of tension. However, unlike the case of the second multiple-time operation valid state, the periodic change of the model image display can be displayed in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time. It can be expected that the decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed by preferably suggesting that the auto repeated hit function is activated through the length of the periodic change of the model image display.

[Configuration 33-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of the operation means, and when it is detected that the operation means is being operated, a post-operation output corresponding to the detection It is possible to output sound and display a simulated image that imitates the operating means. In this respect, when it is detected that the operating means, which is the target of the model image display, is in the operating state, it is detected that it is in the operating state as the model image operation valid state, which is the state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output. is allowed multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times. and the periodic change may be displayed in units of time equal to or shorter than the predetermined time, or may be displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time. A first multiple-time operation valid state and a second multiple-time operation valid state are prepared as the multiple-time operation valid state. The game can be played so as to create a situation in which the operating means to be operated is in a non-operating state and the post-operation output sound is being output. Further, in the first multiple-time operation valid state, the operation means that is the target of the model image display is enabled to display such that periodic changes in the model image display appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time. A post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated a plurality of times simply by maintaining the operation state, and in the second multiple-time operation valid state, the periodic change of the model image display is not longer than the predetermined time. It is possible to display so as to appear in units of time, and the after-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated a plurality of times only by maintaining the operation state of the operation means that is the target of the model image display. Therefore, it can be expected that the range of performance will be widened and the interest in the game will be favorably maintained. The “first multiple-time operation valid state”, “second multiple-time operation valid state”, and “predetermined time” related to the configuration 33-A are used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 33-A. It's just a nickname. Therefore, it may mean the same operation valid state or time as the "first multiple-time operation valid state", "second multiple-time operation valid state", and "predetermined time" according to other configurations. , may mean different operational valid states or times. In addition, it may mean an operation valid state with another name according to another configuration, an “operation valid state” same as time, or “time”. Also, as the "time equal to or less than the predetermined time" and the "time longer than the predetermined time", only one time may be prepared for each, or a plurality of different times may be prepared.

In this case, as will be described later, out of the multiple operation valid state in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times only by maintaining the operation state of the operation means for which the model image is to be displayed. , in the first multiple-operation valid state in which display is possible such that periodic changes in the model image display appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time, the operating means for which the model image is to be displayed is in the non-operating state. and the post-operation output sound is in the output state, if the operation means changes from the non-operation state to the operation state, the output state of the post-operation output sound is changed after entering the operation state. While the time until the end is indefinite (not treated as a fixed time), the above-mentioned first display is possible so that the periodic change of the model image display appears in units of time equal to or less than the above-mentioned predetermined time. 2. In the multiple-time operation valid state, the operating means to be displayed as the model image is in the non-operating state and the post-operation output sound is being output, and the operating means is operated from the non-operating state. state, the time from entering the operation state to the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound is processed as a constant time, and the time is not processed as a constant time and is indefinite. There may be times when the time is set to .

According to such a configuration, in the multiple-operation valid state in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated a plurality of times only by maintaining the operation means, which is the target of the model image display, in the operation state In the first multiple-operation effective state in which the periodic change of the model image display can be displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time, the operating means for which the model image is to be displayed is moved from the non-operating state. Even if the player enters the operating state again, since the time from entering the operating state until the output state of the post-operation output sound ends is uncertain, it is possible to recognize whether the player's operation has been properly accepted. It is expected that it will be difficult to do so and the tension will be appropriately maintained. On the other hand, in the second multiple-operation valid state in which the periodic change of the model image display can be displayed in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time, the operating means for which the model image is to be displayed is again in the operation state. While suggesting the possibility that a new effect will appear after switching to the operation state, the post-operation output sound in the output state does not necessarily end in a certain amount of time after being in the operation state again. It will be expected that this tension will be maintained appropriately.

[Configuration 34-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of the operation means, and when it is detected that the operation means is being operated, a post-operation output corresponding to the detection It is possible to output sound and display a simulated image that imitates the operating means. In this respect, when it is detected that the operating means, which is the target of the model image display, is in the operating state, it is detected that it is in the operating state as the model image operation valid state, which is the state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output. is allowed multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times. There are cases where the periodic change is displayed so as to appear in units of time equal to or less than a predetermined time, and cases in which the periodic change is displayed so as to appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time, Among the multiple-operation valid states, in the multiple-operation valid state of the type in which the model image display is displayed such that periodic changes appear in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time, the operation that is the target of the model image display. When the means is maintained in the operating state, the post-operation output sound can be output a plurality of times in such a manner that the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is set to a constant time. is expected to be well maintained. It should be noted that the “predetermined time” for the configuration 34-A is merely a term used to describe the technical concept of the configuration 34-A. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "predetermined time" in other configurations, or it may mean a different time. Also, it may mean the same "time" as another name of time related to other configurations. Also, as the "time equal to or less than the predetermined time" and the "time longer than the predetermined time", only one time may be prepared for each, or a plurality of different times may be prepared.

In this case, as will be described later, in a multiple-operation valid state of a type in which a periodic change in the model image display appears in units of time equal to or shorter than the predetermined time, the model is displayed in the multiple-operation valid state. When the operation means that is the target of image display is maintained in an operating state, the post-operation output sound is newly generated (there is no case where the post-operation output sound cannot be output multiple times just by maintaining the operation state). The post-operation output sound can be output multiple times with the interval until it occurs at a fixed time. In the multiple operation valid state of the type displayed so as to appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time, when the operation means that is the target of the model image display is maintained in the operation state, (post-operation output sound is newly generated There is no case where the post-operation output sound is output multiple times in a form in which the interval until it occurs is a fixed time), and the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (output sound based on other data read based on detection ) In the case where the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times in a form in which the interval until a new occurrence is an indefinite time, and in the case where the above-mentioned post-operation output sound is output only by maintaining the operation state There may be both a case and a case where repeated output is not possible.

According to such a configuration, when the simulated image display is displayed such that the periodic change appears in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time, it is preferable that the so-called auto repeated hitting function is activated. In addition to being able to suggest, when the so-called auto-rolling function is activated, an output sound is output at regular intervals after acceptance, so the so-called auto-rolling function is activated. It has become easier to remember the actual feeling, and it is expected that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained. On the other hand, when the cyclical change of the model image display appears in units of time longer than the predetermined time, the so-called auto-flick function is to be activated, or it is activated. In addition to the fact that there are both cases where it is not targeted, even if the so-called auto-rolling function is activated, the output sound will only be output at an indefinite time interval after the reception, and the auto-rolling function is activated. Since it is difficult to perceive, it is expected that the tension will be well maintained.

[Configuration 35-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of the operation means, and when it is detected that the operation means is being operated, a post-operation output corresponding to the detection It is possible to output sound and display a simulated image that imitates the operating means. In this respect, when it is detected that the operating means, which is the target of the model image display, is in the operating state, it is detected that it is in the operating state as the model image operation valid state, which is the state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output. is allowed multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times. There are cases where the periodic change is displayed so as to appear in units of time equal to or less than a predetermined time, and cases in which the periodic change is displayed so as to appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time, Among the multiple-operation valid states, in the multiple-operation valid state of the type in which the model image display is displayed such that periodic changes appear in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time, the operation that is the target of the model image display. The post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated a plurality of times simply by maintaining the means in an operated state, and in this case, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated must be a specific time or less. Therefore, when the periodical change of the simulated image display is relatively fast, "under the condition that the post-operation output sound can be continuously output at relatively short intervals only by maintaining the operation means in the operation state" It becomes possible to suitably suggest that it is in It should be noted that the terms “predetermined time” and “specific time” regarding the configuration 35-A are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 35-A. Therefore, it may mean the same time as "predetermined time" or "specific time" in other configurations, or it may mean different time. Also, it may mean the same "time" as another name of time related to other configurations. Also, as the "time less than or equal to the predetermined time", "time longer than the predetermined time", or "time less than or equal to the specific time", only one time may be prepared for each, or a plurality of different times may be prepared. may be

In this case, as will be described later, among the multiple operation valid states, in the "multiple operation valid state of the type in which a periodic change in the model image display appears in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time", The post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated a plurality of times only by maintaining the operation means, which is the target of the model image display, in the operation state, and at that time, until the post-operation output sound is newly generated. is always set to a time less than or equal to the above-mentioned specific time. state", the operation means that is the object of the model image display is maintained in the operation state, and the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times, and the operation state is maintained. There are both cases where the post-operation output sound cannot be output multiple times with just the operation state, but if the post-operation output sound can be generated multiple times according to the detection above only by maintaining the operation state, The interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated may always be longer than the specific time. According to such a configuration, when the simulated image display is displayed such that the periodic change appears in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time, it is preferable that the so-called auto repeated hitting function is activated. In addition to being able to suggest, when the so-called auto-rolling function is activated, new output sounds are output one after another within a relatively short period of time, so the so-called auto-rolling function is It is easy to remember that the game is activated, and it is expected that the game interest will be favorably maintained. On the other hand, when the cyclical change of the model image display appears in units of time longer than the predetermined time, the so-called auto-flick function is to be activated, or it is activated. In addition to the case where it is not targeted, even if the so-called auto-rolling function is activated, a new output sound will not be output unless a relatively long time has passed after the reception, and the automatic rolling function is activated. Since it is difficult to perceive the real feeling of being under pressure, it is expected that the sense of tension will be appropriately maintained.

[Configuration 36-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of the operation means, and when it is detected that the operation means is being operated, a post-operation output corresponding to the detection It is possible to output sound and display a simulated image that imitates the operating means. In this respect, when it is detected that the operating means, which is the target of the model image display, is in the operating state, it is detected that it is in the operating state as the model image operation valid state, which is the state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output. is allowed multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times. There are cases where the periodic change is displayed so as to appear in units of time equal to or less than a predetermined time, and cases in which the periodic change is displayed so as to appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time, Among the multiple-operation valid states, in a multiple-operation valid state of a type in which a periodic change in the model image display appears in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time, a model image is displayed in the multiple-operation valid state. When the display is displayed such that the periodic change appears in units of time longer than the predetermined time, the operation means, which is the target of the model image display, is operated before the predetermined end timing arrives. Since the state can be terminated when it is detected to be in a state, it is detected that the operating means is in the operative state through the length of time required for the periodic change of the simulated image display. It becomes possible to suggest the possibility that the state will be terminated with this as an opportunity. It should be noted that the “predetermined time” for the configuration 36-A is merely a term used to describe the technical concept of the configuration 36-A. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "predetermined time" in other configurations, or it may mean a different time. Also, it may mean the same "time" as other names of time related to other configurations. Also, as the "time equal to or less than the predetermined time" and the "time longer than the predetermined time", only one time may be prepared for each, or a plurality of different times may be prepared.

In this case, as will be described later, when the simulated image display is displayed such that periodic changes appear in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time in the multiple-time operation valid state, the predetermined end timing is reached. A state in which a multiple-operation valid state of a type that can terminate the state is generated when it is detected that the operation means, which is the target of the model image display, is in the state of operation ( (Avoid situations in which a multiple-time operation valid state of a type that cannot be terminated occurs), and in the multiple-time operation valid state, periodic changes in the model image display appear in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time. , the state can be ended when it is detected that the operating means, which is the target of the model image display, is in the operating state before the arrival of the predetermined end timing. A situation in which a type of multiple-operation enabled state occurs, and a situation in which a multiple-time operation enabled state of a type that does not end when the state is detected as a trigger According to such a configuration, in the multiple-operation valid state, periodic changes in the model image display are displayed in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time. If there is, it is possible to suitably suggest that the state can be terminated by detecting that the operating means, which is the target of the model image display, is in the operating state. When the periodic change of the model image display appears in a time unit longer than the predetermined time in the operation valid state, it is detected that the operation means, which is the target of the model image display, is in the operation state. It is difficult to recognize whether the relevant state can be terminated as a trigger, or whether the relevant state cannot be terminated due to the detection that the operating means, which is the target of the simulated image display, is in the operating state. As a result, it is expected that the tension will be appropriately maintained.

[Configuration 37-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), and when it is detected that the specific operation means is being operated, , a post-manipulation change in response to detecting being in the manipulation state. In this regard, as an operation effective state, which is a state in which the post-operation change can start to be executed when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state, detection of the operation state is allowed a plurality of times, and the operation state is allowed a plurality of times. A multiple-operation valid state is prepared in which a change can be executed multiple times. Further, in the multiple-operation effective state, the predetermined type in which the post-operation change in response to the detection of the operation state being in the operation state is not allowed to be executed multiple times only by maintaining the operation state of the specific operation means. In the multiple-operation effective state, the post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, can be displayed based on the detection that the specific operation means is in the operation state, but the specific operation means is in the operation state In order to prevent the display of the post-non-operation display corresponding to the non-operation state when the specific operation means is not operated from, the specific operation means is maintained in the operation state only. In a specific type of multiple-operation valid state in which the post-operation change can be executed multiple times in response to detection of being in the state, the post-operation change is performed based on detection that the specific operation means is in the operation state. can be displayed, and when the specific operation means changes from the operating state to the non-operating state, the corresponding post-non-operating display can be displayed, In the specific type multiple-operation valid state, the specific operation means is in a non-operating state, and the post-non-operating display is displayed in response to detection of the non-operating state, and the post-operation change Of these, the situation in which the output sound after operation is maintained in the output state can appear by the player playing the game, so that the range of performance when the specific operation means is maintained in the operation state is widened. As a result, it can be expected that the game interest will be favorably maintained. It should be noted that the “specific operation means”, “predetermined type of multiple operations enabled state”, and “specific type of multiple operations enabled state” pertaining to the configuration 37-A are for explaining the technical idea of the configuration 37-A. It is just a name used for Therefore, it means the same operation means and operation valid state as "specific operation means", "predetermined type multiple operation valid state", and "specific type multiple operation valid state" according to other configurations. Alternatively, it may mean a different operation means or an operation valid state. In addition, it may mean the same “operation means” or “operation valid state” as the operation means or operation valid state with different names according to other configurations. Further, the ``predetermined type of multiple-operation valid state'' means ``the post-operation change can be executed multiple times in response to the detection that the specific operation means is in the operation state only by maintaining the operation state. It is possible to prepare a plurality of such multiple operation valid states with different occurrence conditions, or only one may be prepared. may Similarly, with regard to the "specific type of multiple operation valid state", "the post-operation change can be executed multiple times according to the detection that the specific operation means is in the operation state only by maintaining the operation state. It is possible to prepare a plurality of such multiple-operation valid states with different occurrence conditions, or only one may be prepared. .

In this case, as will be described later, in the specific type multiple-operation valid state, the specific operation means is in the non-operating state, and the post-non-operating display is displayed in response to detection of the non-operating state. and the post-operation output sound of the post-operation change is maintained in the output state, when it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state, the detection , the post-non-operation display that has been in the display state until then is changed, but the output state of the post-operation output sound that has been in the output state is not changed. may be maintained. According to such a configuration, when the specified type of multiple operations is valid, the specific operation means is in the non-operating state, and the post-non-operating display is displayed in response to detection of the non-operating state. In the situation where it is displayed and the post-operation output sound of the post-operation change maintains the output state, if the player performs the operation again while the post-operation change is being executed, While part of the post-operation change mode up to that point is continued to be executed, part of the change is caused to occur, so the expectation for the start of a new production is also suitable. be able to give.

Note that, in the configuration 37-A, the operating means for which multiple operations are permitted in the multiple operation valid state of the predetermined type and the multiple operation valid state of the specific type are only "specific operation means". Although the case is assumed, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means represented as a simulated image display and allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple-time operation valid state.

[Configuration 38-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), and when it is detected that the specific operation means is being operated, , a post-manipulation change in response to detecting being in the manipulation state. In this regard, as an operation effective state, which is a state in which the post-operation change can start to be executed when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state, detection of the operation state is allowed a plurality of times, and the operation state is allowed a plurality of times. A multiple-operation valid state is prepared in which a change can be executed multiple times. Further, the state is not ended when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state before the arrival of the predetermined end timing in the multiple-time operation valid state. In the multiple-operation effective state of the predetermined type, the post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, can be displayed based on the detection that the specific operation means is in the operation state. When the operation state changes from the operation state to the non-operation state in which no operation is performed, the post-non-operation display corresponding to this is not displayed. In a specific type of multiple-operation valid state that can be terminated when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state, the above operation is performed based on the detection that the specific operation means is in the operation state. A post-operation display, which is one of post-operation changes, can be displayed, and when the specific operation means changes from an operation state to a non-operation state, a corresponding post-non-operation display can be displayed. Above, in the specific type of multiple operation valid state, the specific operation means is in the non-operating state, and the post-non-operating display is displayed in response to detection of the non-operating state, and after the operation Since the situation in which the post-operation output sound, which is one of the changes, maintains the output state, can appear due to the game played by the player, when the situation appears, the specific operation means is in the operation state. is detected, it can be expected to favorably indicate that the situation is likely to be terminated. It should be noted that the "specific operation means", "predetermined type of multiple operations enabled state", and "specific type of multiple operations enabled state" pertaining to the configuration 38-A are for explaining the technical concept of the configuration 38-A. It is just a name used for Therefore, it means the same operation means and operation valid state as "specific operation means", "predetermined type multiple operation valid state", and "specific type multiple operation valid state" according to other configurations. Alternatively, it may mean a different operation means or an operation valid state. In addition, it may mean the same “operation means” or “operation valid state” as the operation means or operation valid state with different names according to other configurations. Further, the ``predetermined type of multiple-operation valid state'' means ``a state triggered by detecting that the specific operation means is in the operation state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing. It is possible to prepare a plurality of such multiple-operation valid states with different occurrence conditions, or only one may be prepared. You may do so. Similarly, with regard to the ``specific type multiple-operation valid state'', ``when the specific operation means is detected to be in the operation state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing, It is possible to prepare a plurality of such multiple-operation valid states with different occurrence conditions, or only one may be prepared. may

In this case, as will be described later, in the specific type multiple-operation valid state, the specific operation means is in the non-operating state, and the post-non-operating display is displayed in response to detection of the non-operating state. and the post-operation output sound of the post-operation change is maintained in the output state, when it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state, the detection , the post-non-operation display that has been in the display state until then is changed, but the output state of the post-operation output sound that has been in the output state is not changed. may be maintained. According to such a configuration, when the player performs a re-operation while the post-operation change is being executed, while the state of the post-operation change up to that point is partially continued, Since it is made to cause a change for a part, it is possible to suitably impart a sense of expectation for the start of a new production.

Note that, in the configuration 38-A, the operation means for which multiple operations are permitted in the multiple operation valid state of the predetermined type and the multiple operation valid state of the specific type are only "specific operation means". Although the case was assumed, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means represented as a simulated image display and allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple-time operation valid state.

[Configuration 39-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), and when it is detected that the specific operation means is being operated, , a post-manipulation change in response to detecting being in the manipulation state. In this regard, as an operation effective state, which is a state in which the post-operation change can start to be executed when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state, detection of the operation state is allowed a plurality of times, and the operation state is allowed a plurality of times. A multiple-operation valid state is prepared in which a change can be executed multiple times. Then, in the multiple-time operation valid state, when the specific operation means is maintained in the operation state, the interval until the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, is newly started to be output is a constant time. In the multiple-operation valid state of a predetermined type in which the post-operation change can be executed multiple times in the form of being executed, one of the post-operation changes is detected based on the detection that the specific operation means is in the operation state. Although the post-operation display can be displayed, even if the specific operation means changes from the operating state to the non-operating state, there is at least a case where the post-non-operating display corresponding to this state is not displayed. When the specific operation means is maintained in the operated state, the post-operation change occurs multiple times in such a manner that the interval until the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, is newly started to be output is an indefinite time. In the executable state of multiple operations of a specific type, only the post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, can be displayed based on detection that the specific operation means is in the operation state. In addition, even when it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from the operating state to the non-operating state, the post-non-operating display corresponding to the detection of the non-operating state can be displayed. and, in the specific type multiple operation valid state, the specific operation means is in a non-operating state, and the post-non-operating display is displayed in response to detection of the non-operating state, and Of the changes after operation, the state in which the post-operation output sound is maintained in the output state can appear through the game played by the player. It can be expected that it will become widespread and that the interest in gaming will be favorably maintained. It should be noted that the "specific operation means", "predetermined type of multiple operations enabled state", and "specific type of multiple operations enabled state" pertaining to the configuration 39-A are for explaining the technical idea of the configuration 39-A. It is just a name used for Therefore, it means the same operation means and operation valid state as "specific operation means", "predetermined type multiple operation valid state", and "specific type multiple operation valid state" according to other configurations. Alternatively, it may mean a different operation means or an operation valid state. In addition, it may mean the same “operation means” or “operation valid state” as the operation means or operation valid state with different names according to other configurations. In addition, the ``predetermined type of multiple operation valid state'' means ``an interval until a new post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, is started to be output when the specific operation means is maintained in the operation state. A multiple-time operation valid state in which the change after the operation can be executed multiple times in a form in which is a fixed time. You may make it prepare only one. Similarly, for the "specific type of multiple operation valid state", "when the specific operation means is maintained in the operation state, the post-operation output sound, which is one of the above-mentioned changes after the operation, is newly started to be output. It is a multiple-time operation valid state in which the change after the operation can be executed multiple times in the form of an indefinite time interval", and multiple operations with different occurrence conditions are prepared as such multiple-time operation valid states. may be provided, or only one may be prepared.

In this case, as will be described later, in the specific type multiple-operation valid state, the specific operation means is in the non-operating state, and the post-non-operating display is displayed in response to detection of the non-operating state. and the post-operation output sound in the post-operation change is maintained in the output state, when it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state, the detection , the post-non-operation display that has been in the display state until then is changed, but the output state of the post-operation output sound that has been in the output state is not changed. may be maintained. According to such a configuration, when the player performs a re-operation while the post-operation change is being executed, while the state of the post-operation change up to that point is partially continued, Since it is made to cause a change in part, it is possible to suitably give a sense of expectation for the start of a new production.

Note that in the configuration 39-A, the operating means for which multiple operations are permitted in the multiple operation valid state of the predetermined type and the multiple operation valid state of the specific type are only "specific operation means". Although the case was assumed, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means represented as a simulated image display and allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple-time operation valid state.

[Configuration 40-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect the state of the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), and when it is detected that the specific operation means is being operated, , a post-manipulation change in response to detecting being in the manipulation state. In this regard, as an operation effective state, which is a state in which the post-operation change can start to be executed when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state, detection of the operation state is allowed a plurality of times, and the operation state is allowed a plurality of times. A multiple-time operation valid state is prepared in which a change can be executed multiple times. Further, in the multiple-operation valid state, when the specific operation means is maintained in the operation state, the interval until the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, is newly started to be output is always equal to or less than the specific time. In a predetermined type of multiple-operation valid state in which the post-operation change can be executed multiple times in the form of time of , one of the post-operation changes is performed based on detection that the specific operation means is in the operation state However, even if the specific operation means changes from the operating state to the non-operating state, the corresponding post-non-operating display may not be displayed at least. On the other hand, when the specific operation means is maintained in the operated state, the interval until the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, is newly started to be output is always longer than the specific time. In the multiple-operation valid state of the specific type in which the post-operation change can be executed multiple times, a post-operation display that is one of the post-operation changes based on detection that the specific operation means is in the operation state not only can be displayed, but also when it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from the operating state to the non-operating state, the post-non-operating display corresponding to the detection of the non-operating state is displayed. In addition, in the specific type of multiple operation valid state, the specific operation means is in a non-operating state, and the post-non-operation display in response to detection that the specific operation means is in the non-operating state is displayed and the post-operation output sound of the post-operation change is maintained in an output state, which can appear through the game played by the player. It can be expected that the range of effects when maintaining is widened, and the amusement of the game can be favorably maintained. The "specific operation means", "predetermined type of multiple operation valid state", "specific type of multiple operation valid state", and "specific time" related to the configuration 40-A are the technology of the configuration 40-A. It is just a designation used to describe the idea. Therefore, the same operation means and operation valid state as the "specific operation means", "predetermined type multiple operation valid state", "specific type multiple operation valid state", and "special time" according to other configurations, It may mean time, or it may mean different operation means, operation effective state, or time. In addition, the same "operation means", "operation valid state", and "time" as operating means, operation valid state, and time with different names according to other configurations may be used. In addition, the ``predetermined type of multiple operation valid state'' means ``an interval until a new post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, is started to be output when the specific operation means is maintained in the operation state. is always less than or equal to a specific period of time, and the post-operation change can be executed multiple times", but the occurrence conditions are different for such a multiple-time operation valid state. A plurality of them may be prepared, or only one may be prepared. Similarly, for the "specific type of multiple operation valid state", "until the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, is newly started to be output when the specific operation means is maintained in the operation state. is always longer than the specific time, and the post-operation change can be executed multiple times." As such a multiple-time operation valid state, It is possible to prepare a plurality of conditions with different occurrence conditions, or to prepare only one. In addition, "a period of time less than or equal to a specific period of time" includes a "specific period of time", and only one period of time is prepared for each of "a period of time longer than a specific period of time" and "a period of time less than or equal to a specific period of time". or multiple different times may be provided.

In this case, as will be described later, in the specific type multiple-operation valid state, the specific operation means is in the non-operating state, and the post-non-operating display is displayed in response to detection of the non-operating state. and the post-operation output sound in the post-operation change is maintained in the output state, when it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state, the detection , the post-non-operation display that has been in the display state until then is changed, but the output state of the post-operation output sound that has been in the output state is not changed. may be maintained. According to such a configuration, when the player performs a re-operation while the post-operation change is being executed, while the state of the post-operation change up to that point is partially continued, Since it is made to cause a change in part, it is possible to suitably give a sense of expectation for the start of a new production.

In the configuration 40-A, the operation means for which multiple operations are permitted in the multiple operation valid state of the predetermined type and the multiple operation valid state of the specific type are only "specific operation means". Although the case was assumed, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means represented as a simulated image display and allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple-time operation valid state.

By the way, in the above configuration 1-A to configuration 40-A, there are some that claim "suggestion that the performance is worth noting" as an effect, but the performance that is worth noting It is not mandatory to actually have sex. It can be expected that the interest in the game can be maintained only by providing a performance such as "a valuable performance may be executed".

[Other configurations]
Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when an acceptable acceptance period (operating acceptable state) in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation unit occurs, an operation-related display (for example, , a simulated image that simulates the operation receiving part, and an image that is displayed according to the occurrence of the valid period (a friend character, an enemy character, etc.) are displayed. It may be displayed as an integrated model image display (see FIG. 144) that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image. Regarding such an integrated model image display, as a result of the advance notice judgment with the acceptance acceptance period (operating allowable state) that occurs when the pattern production progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, and the fluctuation pattern that does not develop into SP reach It is desirable to be displayed in both the acceptance acceptance period (operation acceptance state) that occurs, and to be displayed in both the low-expectation non-suppressed acceptance presentation and the high-expectation suppressed acceptance presentation. is desirable.

It should be noted that such an operation-related display has been described with reference to FIGS. 144 and 145, or has been described as another example or modification thereof, so details will be omitted. A display target area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided therein.
In addition, a plurality of modes (see FIG. 144) with different degrees of expectation are prepared as operation-related display, and it is also the same that the display is made in one of these modes. However, such a model image display does not necessarily have to be displayed as an integrated model image display that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image.

Also, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when an acceptable acceptance period (operation acceptable state) in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation unit occurs, an operation-related sound associated with the occurrence of the acceptable acceptance period (For example, acceptance acceptance sound, etc.) may be audibly output, thereby making it difficult to forget to operate. Here, "acceptable sound" means whether or not an acceptable acceptance period (acceptance period) always occurs while the sound is being output (while sound data is assigned) when the sound output is started. , is a sound that is in a state in which the acceptable acceptance period (acceptance period) has already occurred. In other words, the "acceptance acceptance sound" indicates that the operation reception is permitted or that the operation reception is permitted, and has nothing to do with the acceptance acceptance period (acceptance period). It can be said that it is a sound that is not output under a situation where an unintended production is being performed.

By the way, as described above, in this pachinko machine 1, the type (for example, conversation notice, cut-in notice, movable body notice etc.) are prepared. Occurrence conditions are defined for each acceptable acceptance period (operating acceptable state), and when any one of these occurrence conditions is satisfied, a type of accepting acceptable period (operating acceptable state) corresponding to the established occurrence condition is set. It is possible to occur.

Also, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a plurality of operation units (for example, the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001, etc.) as operation units for receiving operations by the player. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, it is possible to generate an acceptance period (multiple operation permissible period) during which not only one operation unit but also several (plurality) operation units can accept operations. and However, this configuration is not an essential configuration.

The details of the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described "Configuration 1-A" to "Configuration 40-A" will be described below with reference to the drawings. However, when realizing these inventions, it is only necessary to appropriately select and partially provide only the configurations necessary to obtain the desired effects from the respective configurations described below, and it is not necessary to include all of them. . For example, depending on the type (type of invention) of the problem to be solved (intended effect), the reception period (multiple operation permissible period) during which some (plural) operation units are allowed to accept operations does not necessarily have to be It may be one that does not occur (a reception period in which only one operation unit is allowed to accept operations), or it may not be equipped with an operation unit that allows multiple operations to be accepted. , it may be one that does not include an operation unit that allows only one operation reception, or one that does not activate the automatic button function or the automatic repeated hitting function. Also, with reference to FIG. 145 and above, each reception period described above may not necessarily be provided with these, or only the configurations necessary for obtaining desired effects from each configuration may be selected as appropriate. You may make it provide partially. That is, each configuration described in the specification described below corresponds to any one of the above "configuration 1-A" to "configuration 40-A" when it is desired to obtain further effects It is possible to arbitrarily select and adopt only the configuration that

First, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of generating a "first A reception permission state" as the reception permission period (operation permission state). FIG. 146 is a time chart showing an example of the contents of the effect when the player performs an operation with the occurrence of the ``1A acceptance allowable state'' based on the satisfaction of the ``condition 1A'' as the generation condition. is. FIG. 147 is a time chart showing an example of the content of the effect when the "1A acceptance permitted state" occurs and the player does not perform any operation. FIG. 148 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the "first A reception acceptable state" occurs.

Now, assuming that the starting condition is satisfied (suspended digestion) and the "1st A variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first selects the "1st A variation pattern". The corresponding effect determination (notice effect determination, etc.) is performed. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (effect depiction according to the 1A variable pattern, sound output of BGM reproduction according to the 1A variable pattern (normal BGM reproduction at non-reach time, etc.), etc.) is started, Within the execution period of the variable performance, the performance (forecast performance) corresponding to the result of the determination of the preliminary performance is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "1A variation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 146(c), within the execution period of the variation performance related to the "1st A variation pattern", timing tAa2 has arrived after the 1A time has passed since the variation performance of the decorative symbol SZ was started. (Based on the fact that "condition 1A" is satisfied), "Changes after reception of 1A (1A production situation suggestive display JA1, 1A continuous hitting display HA1, output sounds SA1, SB1 after 1A reception etc.) can occur (situation shown in FIG. 148(a)).

Here, in the 1A reception allowable state according to this embodiment, the "1A operation unit" which is allowed to accept operations is set as the operation button 410, and the 1A reception allowable state is terminated. It is permissible to accept the operation multiple times before.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, as shown in FIGS. a model image display MG-A1 that simulates the "operation button 410" as the 1A operation unit), a message display MA1 related to the operation of the operation target (here, the "operation button 410" as the 1A operation unit), A situation suggesting display JA1 suggesting an operation situation is displayed when a timing tAa1 before the occurrence of the 1A acceptance allowable state (before the acceptance of the operation on the 1A operation unit is allowed) has arrived. It is supposed to

However, the model image display MG-A1, the message display MA1, and the situation suggestive display JA1 may not necessarily be displayed before the 1A Acceptable State occurs. It may be displayed at the same time as it occurs or in a manner slightly delayed from its occurrence. In particular, the situation suggesting display JA1 may not be displayed until the first operation reception for the first A operation unit is made in the first A reception acceptance state. It may be realized by appearing and displaying with the event as a trigger. Also, the timing at which the model image display MG-A1 is displayed and the timing at which the message display MA1 is displayed may be different from each other. For example, the message display MA1 may be displayed before the model image display MG-A1 is displayed.

Regarding the model image display MG-A1, the message display MA1, and the situation suggestive display JA1, after the display starts, regardless of the operation state of the 1A operation unit, at least until the 1A acceptance allowable state ends. The interval is displayed continuously.

Here, the "model image display MG-A1" corresponding to the 1A reception acceptable state has "first color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on white)" and "second color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on white)" and "second color scheme (for example, red The basic color scheme)" is selectively used, and for example, the color scheme determined based on the result of the effect determination is used for display.

In addition, in the "simulated image display MG-A1" corresponding to the 1A acceptance allowable state, the part that imitates the "operation receiving part" to be operated is displayed in the manner shown in Fig. 144 (α). 144 (β) to (σ) are sequentially displayed in each of the modes shown in Fig. 144 ," as one periodic change, the periodic change is repeated in a form requiring a predetermined period of 1A time. It will appear. As will be described later, this cycle 1A time is set as a time (short cycle) that is shorter than the cycle time used in many of the other reception acceptance states. It will depict how the part moves quickly up and down its movable range.

147(b), the 1A acceptance allowable state is essentially continued until timing tAa3 arrives when there is no operation acceptance for the 1A operation unit, and timing tAa3 arrives. shall be terminated on the basis of Therefore, while the 1A acceptance allowable state continues, a gauge image indicating the remaining time until the arrival of the timing tAa3 at which the 1A acceptance allowable state ends (in this example, in the model image display MG-A1 image) is depicted to decrease over time, but this depiction may not necessarily be performed.

In addition, when the "simulated image display MG-A1" corresponding to the 1A reception acceptable state is started to be displayed before the timing tAa2 at which the 1A reception acceptable state occurs, the periodic change and the change in the gauge image is preferably started after waiting for the timing tAa2. That is, in this case, the "simulated image display MG-A1" corresponding to the 1A acceptance allowable state is displayed while maintaining the form shown in FIG. 144(α) until timing tAa2 arrives. becomes.

In addition, in the 1A reception allowable state according to this example, as shown in FIGS. , operation button 410) (here, message display MA1 displayed as "Kill the bat! Button 'Continuously hit'!!") is displayed.

In addition, in the 1A acceptance allowable state according to this example, as shown in FIGS. 146(e) and 148(a), as a situation suggestion display JA1 suggesting the operation situation in the 1A acceptability state, A friendly character (here, friend character YS-A1) corresponding to the type of the 1A acceptance acceptable state, and an enemy character (here, depicted as a giant bat) corresponding to the type of the 1A acceptance acceptable state An enemy character BOSS-A1) and a gauge image HP-A1 indicating its remaining HP gauge are displayed. In the 1A acceptability state, "whether or not the ally character YS-A1 can defeat the enemy character BOSS-A1 by accepting operations on the 1A operation unit a plurality of times (set the gauge image HP-A1 to 0). (whether or not it can be done)”, it can be suggested whether the expectation that a big hit is obtained is high or low. On the other hand, each time an operation (operation reception) is performed, an effect can be executed such that the "friend character YS-A1" attacks the "enemy character BOSS-A1". In this example, the ally character YS-A1, the enemy character BOSS-A1, and the gauge image HP-A1 are displayed as the situation suggestive display JA1, but not all of these displays are necessarily displayed. However, if at least one of the ally character YS-A1, the enemy character BOSS-A1, and the gauge image HP-A1 is displayed, it is possible to suggest the operation status.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 146, at the timing tAa2-A1 in the 1A acceptance allowable state (the production situation shown in FIG. On the other hand, it is assumed that the first operation is accepted.

In this example, when the first operation is accepted for the "1A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" at the timing tAa2-A1 within the 1A acceptance allowable state, FIG. As shown in (g), the "1A post-acceptance change (1A post-acceptance effect)" corresponding to the operation acceptance is caused (the effect situation shown in FIG. 148(b)).

More specifically, at timing tAa2-A1 in the 1A acceptance allowable state, if an operation is accepted for the "1A operation unit (here, operation button 410)", As shown in (g), as the post-1A acceptance change, the "1A post-acceptance output sound" corresponding to the acceptance of the operation on the "1A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" is audibly output. , and the “1A post-acceptance display” corresponding to the acceptance of the operation on the “1A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)” starts to be displayed.

That is, in the 1A acceptance allowable state, when an operation is accepted once for the ``1A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)'', the above ``1A post-acceptance display'' is displayed in FIG. 148(b). As shown, a one-time animation display is displayed in a manner in which "ally character YS-A1" attacks "enemy character BOSS-A1" with ice-based magic (smoke effect, generation of ice-based magic, etc.). It has become so. However, as will be described later, in the 1A acceptability state, the "enemy character BOSS-A1" may be injured, the strength of the ice magic may be increased, or the gauge image may be changed based on the result of the effect determination when the operation is accepted. There is a possibility that the remaining HP gauge of HP-A1 will decrease (the content of the production may progress depending on the production judgment etc.). When the content of the production progresses in this way, the state when the operation is accepted for the first A operation unit (here, "friend character YS-A1" is ice magic and "enemy character BOSS-A1" attack mode) will appear as one-time moving image display that has changed to the advanced effect content (see FIGS. 146(e), (f), FIG. 148(f), etc.). It should be noted that, after the content of the effect progresses in this way, the degree of progress of the content of the effect will not be returned to the level before the progress as long as the 1A acceptability state continues. Therefore, even when an operation is received again for the 1A operation unit after the end of the one-time moving image display in which the content of the effect has changed to the advanced effect content, when the operation is received for the 1A operation unit (here, the mode in which "friend character YS-A1" attacks "enemy character BOSS-A1" with ice-based magic) can appear as a one-time moving image display that has changed to the advanced production content. becomes. It may be suggested that the possibility (expectation) of getting a big hit is high every time the content of the performance progresses.

Further, in this example, in the 1A acceptance allowable state, when an operation is accepted once for the ``1A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)'', the above ``display after 1A acceptance'' is displayed. As the "first A post-reception output sound", as shown in FIG. 146(g), the first post-reception output sound SA1 can be output. It should be noted that the first post-reception output sound SA1 according to this example appears as the above-mentioned "first A post-reception display", which is "a form in which the friendly character YS-A1 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A1 with ice-based magic (smoke effects, the generation of ice-based magic, etc.). At this time, as will be described later, there is a possibility that the second post-reception output sound SB1 is further output as the "first A post-reception output sound". The second post-acceptance output sound SB1 according to this example is output when the effect content of the above-mentioned "first A post-acceptance display" progresses. Here, the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 is implemented as a sound effect corresponding to the post-acceptance display, but it may not necessarily function as a sound effect. Anything that can suggest that an operation has been accepted by the player can be used, and can suggest that the 1A operation unit is maintained in an operated state when the auto repeated hitting function is activated. Anything is fine.

In this manner, in the 1A acceptance allowable state, the ``friendly character YS-A1'' changes to the ``enemy character BOSS-A1'' each time the ``1A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)'' is operated. In other words, the HP of "enemy character BOSS-A1" decreases due to multiple attacks by "ally character YS-A1" (as the production progresses). As a result, when the HP becomes 0, it means that the "enemy character BOSS-A1" has been defeated, and this provides a performance suggesting that the expectations are high. However, in this case, if the HP does not become 0 even after performing multiple attacks and the "enemy character BOSS-A1" cannot be defeated, it is suggested that the degree of expectation is low.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 146(a), it is assumed that the player's operation (operation state of the first A operation section) started at timing tAa2-A1 continues until timing tAa2-A2. It has become a thing.

In this regard, the 1A reception allowable state is defined as "changes after reception only by maintaining the operation unit (1A operation unit) in the operation state (for example, display after reception, output sound after reception, light emission after reception, Accessory action after acceptance, etc.) is classified into the "multiple operation enabled state" of the type in which the type is executed multiple times (the type in which the so-called auto repeated hitting function is enabled). Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 146(a), during the period from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2 (the period during which the first A operation unit is maintained in the operated state), the first A operation unit is not accepted for operation. This is performed multiple times, and each time, post-acceptance changes (for example, post-acceptance display, post-acceptance output sound, post-acceptance light emission, post-acceptance accessory operation, etc.) are executed in accordance with the operation acceptance.

Here, when the first A operation section is operated once in the first A acceptance allowable state, the teammate character YS-A1 is displayed as the display after the first A acceptance, as shown in FIG. As described above, the aspect of attacking the enemy character BOSS-A1 with ice magic (smoke effect, generation of ice magic, etc.) is displayed (one-time video display). Therefore, during the period from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2 when the so-called automatic continuous tapping function is activated, first, such "single video display" is reproduced multiple times as many times as the number of times the operation is accepted. becomes.

In addition, when an operation is accepted once on the 1A operation unit in the 1A acceptance allowable state, the output sound after 1A acceptance appears as the ``display after 1A acceptance'', ``friendly character YS-A1 is output so as to function as a sound effect corresponding to the mode of attacking the enemy character BOSS-A1 with ice magic (smoke effect, generation of ice magic, etc.). Therefore, during the period from the timing tAa2-A1 to the timing tAa2-A2 when the so-called automatic continuous hit function is activated, in addition to the above "single motion picture display", sound effects corresponding to such "single motion picture display" However, it will be reproduced a plurality of times as many times as the number of times the operation has been accepted.

However, in the 1A accepting allowable state, if the operation unit (1A operation unit) is maintained in the operating state and the auto continuous hit function is activated, the ally character YS-A1 uses ice magic to cast the enemy character BOSS-A1. and the sound effect corresponding to the "single video display" (output sound after 1A reception) is changed after the reception for a certain period of time (predetermined time ), the execution is newly started.

In addition, in the 1A accepting allowable state, if the operation unit (1A operation unit) is maintained in the operating state and the auto continuous hit function is activated, the ally character YS-A1 can be activated by the enemy character BOSS-A1 with ice magic. (movie display for one time) and the sound effect corresponding to the "movie display for one time" (output sound after 1st A reception) can be executed multiple times as the above-mentioned change after reception, In this case, the interval until the post-acceptance change is newly started in response to the detection (the interval from the start of the previous change after acceptance to the start of the next change after-acceptance) must be It is supposed to be a time less than or equal to a specific time.

That is, in this case, from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2 according to the example shown in FIG. Execution is newly started at regular time intervals by the automatic repeated hitting function, and such repeated display of "one-time moving image display" is expressed as "display during repeated hitting HA1a" in the figure.

Similarly, in the period from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2 according to the example shown in FIG. A new output is started at regular time intervals by the continuous hitting function, and such repeated output of the "sound effect" is expressed as "first post-acceptance output sound SA1a" in the figure.

In this regard, during the period from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2 according to the example shown in FIG. This assumes that no progress has been made.

Therefore, within this period, the "situation suggestive display JA1 (see FIG. 146(e))" which suggests the operation status in the 1A acceptance allowable state, and the operation status in the 1A acceptance allowable state are suggested. None of the “second post-acceptance output sound (see FIG. 146(h))” changes or starts to be executed when the operation is accepted.

According to such a configuration, during the period from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2 according to the example shown in FIG. and the output of the corresponding sound effect are repeatedly executed at regular time intervals by the auto repeated hitting function (display during repeated hitting HA1a, output sound after first reception SA1a), but the "situation suggestive display JA1 (see FIG. 146(e))” does not change. As a result, it is possible to confirm the same performance contents as when the monotonous repetitive operation is performed or that the performance contents have not progressed, so that the interest in the game can be preferably maintained. is expected.

As for the "situation suggestive display JA1 (see FIG. 146(e))", at least one of the ally character YS-A1, the enemy character BOSS-A1, and the gauge image HP-A1 is activated by accepting the operation. You may make it change as. However, in this case, it is necessary to change to a mode different from the "mode when the performance content progresses", and the period from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2 without progressing the performance content (first A operation unit is maintained in the operating state) is terminated (when the operation is interrupted), this triggers the return to the "pre-operation display mode". In addition, regarding the "situation suggestive display JA1 (see FIG. 146(e))" such as ally character YS-A1, enemy character BOSS-A1, and gauge image HP-A1, until the operation is accepted, It is not displayed, but may be realized by appearing and displaying (until the effective period expires or for a predetermined period of time) triggered by the acceptance of the operation. As I said.

In addition, during the period from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2, the "situation suggestive display JA1 (see FIG. 146(e))" that suggests the operation status in the 1A acceptance allowable state, and the 1A acceptability The "second post-acceptance output sound (see FIG. 146(h))" that suggests the state of the operation in the state does not change or start to be executed when the operation is accepted. is not progressing.

However, in a situation where the continuous-hit display HA1a is executed by such an automatic continuous-hitting function (period from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2), the continuous-hitting display is displayed as shown in FIG. 148(b). As HA1a, ``a mode in which ally character YS-A1 attacks enemy character BOSS-A1 with ice magic (smoke effect, generation of ice magic, etc.)'' appears repeatedly at regular intervals. In some cases, the suggestive display JA1' is made difficult to see or becomes inconspicuous, making it difficult to recognize the operation status in the 1A acceptance permitted state (this configuration is not essential).

In this regard, the example effects shown in FIGS. 146 and 148 are designed to allow the player to more positively confirm the status of the operation in the 1A acceptance allowable state by operating the 1A operating unit at the timing tAa2-A2. It is assumed that the is temporarily interrupted and the auto repeated hit function is disabled.

146(f) and 148(c), the operating state of the 1A operating unit is temporarily interrupted (non-operating state) at timing tAa2-A2. Even if the automatic repeated hitting function is invalidated, the repeated hitting display HA1a which has been in the execution state until then will not be turned off. That is, in this case, the continuous-hit display HA1a is set in advance from the timing tAa2-A2 (even after the 1A operation unit is in the non-operating state), for example, to the above-mentioned "single motion picture display" that was in the execution state. The execution state is continued until the display is completed after being executed for the predetermined display time, or for a predetermined time from the non-operating state.

According to such a configuration, even if the operation state of the 1A operation unit is temporarily interrupted (to the non-operating state) to invalidate the automatic repeated hitting function, the continuous hitting display HA1a that has been in the execution state until then is displayed. is not immediately hidden, it takes time until the operation status in the 1A acceptance allowable state becomes easy to recognize. This means that the remaining time in the 1A acceptance allowable state is greatly consumed. It is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably given to the action to be confirmed.

Further, in this example, if the operation of the 1A operation unit is interrupted while the continuous-hit display HA1a is being displayed to put it in the non-operating state, the continuous-hitting display HA1a is hidden after the non-operating state is set. The time until the state is set is not set as a fixed time, but is set to be indefinite.

According to such a configuration, after the operation state of the 1A operation unit is temporarily interrupted (in a non-operating state) to disable the automatic repeated hitting function, after how much time elapses, the continuous hitting operation will start. It becomes difficult to predict whether a situation will arise in which the state of operation in the 1A acceptance allowable state will be easily recognized when the display HA1a is turned off. This means that it is difficult to predict how much of the remaining time will be consumed in the 1A acceptance allowable state. It is expected that the action of trying to more easily confirm the operation status in the acceptance-permitting state will be appropriately given a sense of tension.

In addition, in the 1A acceptance allowable state, as shown in FIG. 146(g), the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a which has been in the execution state up to that point is also executed at timing tAa2, similarly to the repeated hitting display HA1a. - In A2, when the operation state of the 1st A operation unit is temporarily interrupted (to the non-operation state) to invalidate the auto repeated tapping function, the inaudible state is not triggered by this. That is, in this case, the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a corresponds to the above-mentioned "one-time moving image display" that was in the execution state even after the timing tAa2-A2 (even after the first A operation unit is in the non-operation state). The output state is continued until the "sound effect" is executed for a predetermined output time and is completely output, or for a predetermined time from the non-operating state.

According to such a configuration, even if the operation state of the 1A operation unit is temporarily interrupted (to the non-operation state) to invalidate the auto repeated hitting function, the first reception that has been in the execution state until then is disabled. The post-output sound SA1a will not be put into a non-output state immediately, and in this case, it can be expected that the sense of tension will be preferably maintained because it seems as if the auto repeated hitting function is still effective.

Further, in this example, if the operation of the first A operation unit is interrupted while the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a is being output and this is put into the non-operating state, the first reception The time until the post-output sound SA1a is put into a non-output state is not set as a fixed time, but is indefinite.

According to such a configuration, how much time elapses after the operation state of the 1A operation unit is temporarily interrupted (made into a non-operation state) to disable the automatic repeated hitting function, the first It becomes difficult to predict whether the output sound SA1a will be in a non-output state after reception of , that is, whether it will be possible to more reliably confirm that the automatic repeated tapping function has been disabled. This means that it is difficult to predict how much time will be consumed remaining in the 1A acceptability state, so the act of temporarily interrupting the operation state of the 1A operation unit It will be expected that a sense of tension will be suitably given to it.

In addition, in the 1A reception allowable state according to this embodiment, when the operation state of the 1A operation unit is interrupted (non 146(f), (g), etc.), the timing at which the continuous hitting display HA1a is turned off and the first post-receipt output sound SA1a are displayed. The timing to be set to the non-output state is different from each other. In the figure, the timing at which the repeated hitting display HA1a is turned off is before the timing at which the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a is turned off. You can set it so that Alternatively, due to the above-mentioned property that the time until the non-display or non-output state is set is indefinite, the timing at which the repeated hit display HA1a is set to the non-display state is the timing when the first post-receipt output sound SA1a is non-display. There may be both a case before the timing of the output state and a case after the timing. Also, the timing may be the same.

According to such a configuration, in the 1A reception allowable state according to this embodiment, the operation state of the 1A operation unit is changed while the repeated hitting display HA1a and the first post-reception output sound SA1a are both in the execution state. When the game is interrupted (in the non-operating state), as shown in FIGS. 146(f) and (g) and FIG. In the midst of this, a situation appears in which the continuous hitting display HA1a continues to be displayed and the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a continues to be output. However, after this, due to the passage of time after the 1A operating unit was put into the non-operating state, as shown in FIGS. 146(f), (g) and FIG. The display HA1a is put into a non-display state, and the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a is put into a non-output state. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the automatic repeated hitting function is disabled, and the player character YS-A1, the enemy character BOSS-A1, and the gauge image can be displayed. It becomes possible to easily recognize the mode (here, mode JA1a) of the situation suggestive display JA1 (here, mode JA1a) that suggests the operating situation, such as HP-A1 (see FIG. 148(d)).

However, as described above, during the period from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2 according to the example shown in FIG. It is assumed that the content has not progressed.

Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 148(d), the mode of the situation suggestive display JA1 (here, mode JA1a) can be easily recognized, but their aspects are the same as before the operation (see FIG. 148(a)), and the content of the effect has not progressed due to this. is suggested. It should be noted that, regarding the mode of the situation suggestive display JA1 that suggests the operation situation, such as the ally character YS-A1, the enemy character BOSS-A1, the gauge image HP-A1, etc., if it is possible to suggest that the production content is not progressing. 148(a), and does not necessarily have to be the same as before the operation (see FIG. 148(a)).

In this example, as shown in FIG. 146(a), at the timing tAa2-B1 in the 1A acceptance allowable state (the effect situation shown in FIG. 148(e)), the "1A operation unit (here It is assumed that the operation button 410)" is put into the operation state again.

In this example, at timing tAa2-B1 within the 1A reception allowable state, when the "1A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is put into the operation state again and the operation is accepted, this triggers the following: As shown in FIGS. 146(f) and 146(g), the "1A post-acceptance change (1A post-acceptance effect)" corresponding to the acceptance of the operation is caused again (shown in FIG. 148(e)). production situation).

More specifically, at timing tAa2-B1 in the 1A acceptance allowable state, if an operation is accepted for the "1A operation unit (here, operation button 410)", As shown in (g), as the post-1A reception change, the post-1st reception output sound SA1 (one video Sound effect corresponding to the display)" is audibly output again, and "Display after reception of 1A (display of moving image for one time)" corresponding to the reception of operation on the ``1A operation unit (here, operation button 410)'' is displayed. starts to appear again.

In this example, it is assumed that even when the operation of the 1A operation unit is started again at the timing tAa2-B1 within the 1A reception allowable state, the effect content corresponding to the 1A reception allowable state does not progress. It has become a thing. Therefore, the situation shown in FIG. 148(e) is the same as when the 1A post-acceptance change is first started based on the acceptance of the operation on the 1A operation unit at the timing tAa2-A1. Execution of the 1A post-reception change (1A post-reception display, 1A post-reception output sound, etc.) is started. The details of the presentation are as described above, so the explanation is omitted here.

In this regard, in the examples of effects shown in FIGS. 146 and 148, the player's operation (operation state of the first A operation section) started at timing tAa2-B1 is maintained until timing tAa2-B3. It is assumed that the auto repeated hit function is activated.

Therefore, even during the "period from timing tAa2-B1 to timing tAa2-B3 (the period in which the first A operation unit is maintained in the operated state again)", the operation reception for the first A operation unit is performed multiple times by the auto repeated hitting function. Each time, a post-acceptance change (for example, a post-acceptance display, a post-acceptance output sound, a post-acceptance light emission, a post-acceptance accessory action, etc.) is executed in accordance with the operation acceptance.

Also during the "period from timing tAa2-B1 to timing tAa2-B3 (the period during which the first A operation unit is maintained in the operating state again)", such post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times by the auto repeated hitting function. With respect to the aspect of time (the aspect of the continuous hitting display HA1a, the first after-accepting output sound SA1a, etc.), unless the effect content progresses, the above-mentioned "period from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2" (see FIG. 148(b)). The details of the presentation are as described above, so the explanation is omitted here.

However, during the period from timing tAa2-B1 to timing tAa2-B3 according to the example shown in FIG. Based on this, it is assumed that the production content corresponding to the 1A acceptance allowable state progresses (the production situation shown in FIG. 148(f)).

Therefore, in the period from timing tAa2-B1 to timing tAa2-B3 according to the example shown in FIG. 1A post-acceptance effect)” is executed in a state in which the content of the effect is not progressing, whereas in the period from timing tAa2-B2 to timing tAa2-B3, “1A post-acceptance change (second 1A Effect after acceptance)” is executed in a state in which the content of the effect has progressed.

More specifically, in the period from timing tAa2-B2 to timing tAa2-B3, at "timing tAa2-B2", which is the timing at which the content of the production progresses, the timing shown in FIGS. 146(e) and 148(f) so that the mode of the situation suggesting display JA1 suggesting the operation status is changed from the "mode JA1a" that has appeared until then to the different "mode JA1b" based on the reception of the operation on the 1A operation unit. A display change that causes Here, as shown in FIG. 148(f), the enemy character BOSS-A1 is changed into a wounded state, the ice magic by the ally character YS-A1 is changed into a state of higher strength, and the gauge image is changed. HP-A1 will be changed to a state in which the remaining HP gauge has decreased. According to such a configuration, through such a change in the situation suggestive display JA1, the effect content corresponding to the 1A reception allowable state is changed to the reception of the operation (by the automatic continuous hitting function) performed at the timing tAa2-B2. Based on the result of the production judgment), it will be suggested that progress has been made.

Then, after the content of the effect has progressed in this way, when the operation reception is performed on the 1A operation unit once, the above "1A display after reception" is performed, as shown in FIG. 148(f). In a mode in which the content of the production has progressed, such as "the ally character YS-A1 uses ice magic with increased strength to attack the injured enemy character BOSS-A1". "movie display" will be displayed.

It should be noted that, in this example of the effect, after the effect progresses, the degree of progress of the effect will not be returned to the level before the progress as long as the 1A acceptability state continues. Therefore, even when an operation is received again for the 1A operation unit after the end of the one-time moving image display in which the content of the effect has changed to the advanced effect content, when the operation is received for the 1A operation unit mode (here, mode in which "ally character YS-A1" attacks "enemy character BOSS-A1" with ice-based magic) appears as a one-time moving image display that has changed to the advanced production content.

That is, in this case, in the period from the timing tAa2-B1 when the so-called auto repeated hitting function is activated to the timing tAa2-B3, in the period after the timing tAa2-B2 when the content of the effect progresses, such a mode change occurs " One-time video display" will be reproduced a plurality of times as many times as the number of times the operation has been accepted by the automatic continuous hitting function.

Also, during the period after the timing tAa2-B2 when the content of the production progresses, the manner in which the ally character YS-A1 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A1 with ice-based magic (movie display for one time) will change after the reception. , the execution is newly started at regular time intervals (predetermined time intervals). Therefore, the "single motion picture display" in which the content of the effect progresses is also newly started at regular time intervals by the automatic continuous hitting function. In the drawing, the repeated display of .

Thus, in the effect display device 1600 according to this example, when the "timing tAa2-B2", which is the timing at which the content of the effect is advanced, is reached, FIGS. As shown in (f), the mode of the situation suggestive display JA1 changes from "mode JA1a" to "mode JA1b", and the mode of the repeated hitting display HA1 also changes from "mode HA1a" to "mode HA1b". It will happen. Thereafter, while the automatic repeated hitting function is activated (timings tAa2-B2 to tAa2-B3), while the situation suggestive display JA1 is displayed in the "mode JA1b", the continuous hitting display HA1 changes to the "mode HA1b".

In this example, the form of the continuous hitting display HA1 is changed according to the progress of the effect, but it may not be changed according to the progress of the effect. That is, even if the continuous-hit display HA1 is continued to be executed in one mode regardless of the progress of the effect content, the player can confirm that the automatic continuous-hit function is activated through the continuous-hit display HA1. It is possible to confirm that the player is in a situation where the player is in a state where the player is in a state where the player is in a state where the operation is being accepted (frequency).

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation is accepted once for the "1A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the 1A acceptance allowable state, the above " In addition to the 1A post-acceptance display, a first post-acceptance output sound can be output as the 1A post-acceptance output sound, as shown in FIG. 146(g). In addition to the first post-reception output sound SA1 functioning as a sound effect corresponding to the "one-time moving image display" as the "first A post-reception output sound", as shown in FIG. 146(h), In addition, as described above, the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 suggesting that the performance content corresponding to the 1A acceptability state has progressed can be output.

Therefore, in the period from timing tAa2-B1 to timing tAa2-B3 according to the example shown in FIG. Then, based on the acceptance of the operation (development of the effect) at the timing tAa2-B2, the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 is started in the mode SB1b-1. As a result, the player can recognize that the content of the effect has progressed through the output mode of the post-reception output sound. It is desirable to set the output time of the second post-reception output sound SB1 to be longer than the output time of the first post-reception output sound SA1 corresponding to one operation reception.

However, in this production example, the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 that functions as a sound effect corresponding to the "one-time moving image display" is output in the same manner before and after the production content progresses. It is supposed to be realized as Therefore, when the timing tAa2-B2, which is the timing at which the content of the effect is advanced, is reached, the output of the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 as a new "sound effect" is started based on the acceptance of the operation. However, the mode is the same as when the operation is accepted before the timing tAa2-B2 (the execution is the same whether or not the production progress occurs at the timing tAa2-B2). are the same).

That is, in this case, over the entire period from timing tAa2-B1 to timing tAa2-B3 at which the so-called automatic repeated hitting function is activated, the effect sound (output after the first acceptance The sound SA1) is newly output in the same manner at regular time intervals by the automatic continuous hitting function. is expressed as Note that the output mode of the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a during this period is the same as the case of the above-described "period from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2", so a description thereof will be omitted here. and

In this example, the mode of the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a is not changed according to the progress of the content of the presentation, but it may be changed according to the progress of the content of the presentation.

However, even in a situation where the continuous-hit display HA1b is executed by such an automatic continuous-hit function (period from timing tAa2-B2 to timing tAa2-B3), as shown in FIG. As the display HA1b, "a form in which the ally character YS-A1 attacks the wounded enemy character BOSS-A1 with high-strength ice-based magic (smoke effect, generation of ice-based magic, etc.)" is displayed for a certain period of time. Since it appears repeatedly every time, this may make it difficult to see the "situation suggestive display JA1" or make it less conspicuous, making it difficult to recognize the operation situation in the 1A acceptance allowable state (this configuration is essential). not).

In this regard, the example effects shown in FIGS. 146 and 148 are designed to allow the player to more positively confirm the state of the operation in the 1A acceptance allowable state by performing the operation on the 1A operation unit at the timing tAa2-B3. It is assumed that the is interrupted again and the auto repeated hit function is disabled.

Here, as described above, in the 1A acceptance allowable state, while the 1A acceptance allowable state continues, the operation state of the 1A operation unit is interrupted (in a non-operated state) and the auto repeated hitting function is activated. Even if it is invalidated, the continuous hitting display HA1 that has been in the execution state until then will not be turned off. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 146(f) and 148(g), even if the operation state of the 1A operation unit is once interrupted at timing tAa2-B3, the continuous-hit display HA1b is displayed after timing tAa2-B3. Also (even after the 1A operation unit is in the non-operating state), for example, the above-mentioned "one time moving image display" in the execution state is executed for a predetermined display time and is displayed. , or the execution state is continued only for a predetermined time from the non-operating state.

Also, as in the case of the continuous-hit display HA1a, when the continuous-hit display HA1b is displayed and the operation of the 1A operation unit is interrupted to put it in the non-operating state, the non-operating state is set. The time until the repeated hitting display HA1b is turned off is not set as a fixed time, but is indefinite.

In addition, as described above, in the 1A reception allowable state, the operation state of the 1A operation unit is interrupted (in a non-operated state) while the 1A reception allowable state is continued, and the auto repeat function is disabled. Even if it is turned on, the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a, which has been in the output state until then, will not be put into the non-output state with this as a trigger. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 146(g) and the like, even if the operating state of the 1A operation section is temporarily interrupted at timing tAa2-B3, the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a continues to be produced after timing tAa2-B3 ( Even after the 1A operation unit is in the non-operating state), the "sound effect corresponding to the moving image display for one time" that was in the execution state is executed for the predetermined output time until the output is completed. The output state is continued for a predetermined period of time from the non-operating state.

However, at the timing tAa2-B3 shown in FIG. 146, while the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 started to be output at the timing tAa2-B2 continues to be output, the operation state of the first A operation unit is changed. It is assumed that it is interrupted.

In this regard, in the 1A acceptance allowable state, the operating state of the 1A operation section is interrupted (into the non-operating state) for the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 as well as for the first post-acceptance output sound SA1. ), the output state is not terminated (made inaudible). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 146(h) and the like, even if the operation state of the 1A operation unit is temporarily interrupted at timing tAa2-B3, the second post-acceptance output sound SB1b-1 is not output after timing tAa2-B3. Also (after the 1A operation unit is in the non-operating state), it is executed for the predetermined output time until the output is completed, or for the predetermined time from the non-operating state. The output state will continue.

Further, in this example, if the operation of the first A operation unit is interrupted while the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 is being output and this is put into the non-operating state, the first reception The time until the post-output sound SA1a is put into a non-output state is not set as a fixed time, but is indefinite. Similarly, with respect to the second post-reception output sound SB1, if the operation of the first A operation unit is interrupted while the second post-reception output sound SB1 is being output and this is placed in the non-operating state, The time from when the operation state is set to when the second post-reception output sound SB1 is set to the non-output state is not set as a fixed time, but is set to be indefinite.

According to such a configuration, how much time elapses after the operation state of the 1A operation unit is temporarily interrupted (made into a non-operation state) to disable the automatic repeated hitting function, the first It predicts whether the second post-acceptance output sound SA1 and the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 will be inaudible, that is, whether it will be possible to more reliably confirm that the automatic continuous tapping function has been disabled. it gets harder. This means that it is difficult to predict how much time will be consumed remaining in the 1A acceptability state, so the act of temporarily interrupting the operation state of the 1A operation unit It will be expected that a sense of tension will be suitably given to it.

In addition, in the 1A reception allowable state according to this embodiment, when the operation state of the 1A operation unit is interrupted (non 146(f), (g), etc., the timing at which the repeated hitting display HA1b is turned off and the first post-receipt output sound SA1a are displayed. The timing to be set to the non-output state is different from each other. In the figure, the timing at which the repeated hitting display HA1b is turned off is before the timing at which the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a is turned off. You can set it so that Alternatively, due to the above-mentioned property that the time until the non-display or non-output state is set is indefinite, the timing at which the repeated hit display HA1b is set to the non-display state is the timing when the first post-receipt output sound SA1a is non-display. There may be both a case before the timing of the output state and a case after the timing. Also, the timing may be the same. It should be noted that the relationship between the continuous-hit display HA1b and the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a is determined between the continuous-hit display HA1b and the second post-acceptance output sound SB1, and the relationship between the continuous-hit display HA1b and the second post-acceptance output sound SA1a. and the second post-acceptance output sound SB1, and the same can be said for other examples.

According to such a configuration, in the 1A acceptance allowable state according to this embodiment, the continuous hitting display HA1b, the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a, and the second post-acceptance output sound SB1b-1 are each in the execution state. 146(f), (g), (h) and FIG. 148(g) , etc., while the 1A operation unit is in the non-operating state, the repeated hitting display HA1b continues to be displayed, and the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a continues to be output. and the second post-acceptance output sound SB1b-1 continues to be output. However, after this, as shown in FIG. 146(f), FIG. The continued continuous hitting display HA1b is turned off. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the automatic repeated hitting function is disabled, and the player character YS-A1, the enemy character BOSS-A1, and the gauge image can be displayed. It becomes possible to easily recognize the aspect of the situation suggestive display JA1 (here, the aspect JA1b in which the contents of the production have progressed) that suggests the operating situation such as HP-A1 (see FIG. 148(h)).

In addition, originally, the first post-reception output sound SA1a and the second post-reception output sound SB1 are also generated after the lapse of time since the first A operation unit is put into the non-operating state (time lapse from timing tAa2-B3). ) terminates (makes inaudible) any continued output states.

However, in this example, as shown in FIG. 146(a), it is after the timing tAa2-B3 when the first A operation unit is put into the non-operating state, and the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a and the second post-acceptance output sound SA1a At timing tAa2-C1 (presentation situation shown in FIG. 148(i)) when all of the output sounds SB1 are in an audible state (before the output state is ended), the 1A operation unit is again put into the operation state. Assuming the case.

In this example, at timing tAa2-C1 within the 1A reception allowable state, even if the "1A operation unit (in this case, operation button 410)" is put into the operation state again and the operation is accepted, the above-described timing tAa2- As in the case of B1, with this as a trigger, as shown in FIGS. 146(f) and 146(g), the "1A post-acceptance change (1A post-acceptance effect)" corresponding to the acceptance of the operation is caused again. This is the case (the effect situation shown in FIG. 148(i)).

More specifically, at timing tAa2-C1 in the 1A acceptance allowable state, if an operation is accepted for the "1A operation unit (here, operation button 410)", As shown in (g), as the post-1A reception change, the post-1st reception output sound SA1 (one video Sound effect corresponding to the display)" is audibly output again, and "Display after reception of 1A (display of moving image for one time)" corresponding to the reception of operation on the ``1A operation unit (here, operation button 410)'' is displayed. starts to appear again.

In this example, when the operation of the 1A operation unit is started again at the timing tAa2-C1 within the 1A reception allowable state, the effect contents corresponding to the 1A reception allowable state are shown in FIG. 148(h). It assumes the case where it does not progress from the mode (development mode of the first stage). Therefore, the situation shown in FIG. 148(i) is the same as when the first A post-acceptance change is first started based on the acceptance of the operation on the first A operation unit at the timing tAa-B2. Execution of the 1A post-reception change (1A post-reception display, 1A post-reception output sound, etc.) is started. The details of the presentation are as described above, so the explanation is omitted here.

However, as described above, in this example, both the first post-reception output sound SA1 and the second post-reception output sound SB1 are in an audible state at the timing tAa2-C1 at which the operation on the first A operation unit is restarted. It is assumed that it will arrive in the middle of the day.

In this regard, regarding the first post-acceptance output sound SA1, the output state up to that point is ended based on the fact that the operation of the first A operation unit is restarted (that the operation is accepted) at timing tAa2-C1. At the same time, a new output is started when the new operation is accepted. On the other hand, the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 is changed in some way based on the fact that the operation of the 1A operation unit is restarted (that the operation is accepted) at the timing tAa2-C1. , the output state up to that point is continued.

According to such a configuration, in the 1A acceptance allowable state, while the 1A post-acceptance output sound corresponding to the operation acceptance is being output, the 1A operation unit that has been in the non-operating state until then When the operation is accepted, both the case where the 1A post-acceptance output sound is ended (first post-acceptance output sound SA1) and the case where it is not ended (second post-acceptance output sound SB1) are triggered by this as a trigger. Therefore, it is possible to preferably provide a sense of tension when the 1A operating portion, which has been in the non-operating state, is brought into the operating state again.

It should be noted that the repeated hitting display HA1 may also continue to be displayed at the timing tAa2-C1. In this case, with regard to the continuous-hit display HA1, when an operation is accepted for the 1A operation unit which has been in a non-operating state until then, the previous "single motion picture display" which was in the middle of execution is displayed. It is desirable to end the process halfway and start a new display (a moving image display for one time) triggered by the reception of the new operation in a form that replaces this.

Further, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 146 and 148, the player's operation (operation state of the 1st A operation unit) started at timing tAa2-C1 is maintained until timing tAa2-C2, and the operation state is maintained automatically. It is assumed that the continuous hit function is activated.

Therefore, even during the "period from timing tAa2-C1 to timing tAa2-C2 (the period in which the first A operation unit is maintained in the operated state again)", the operation reception for the first A operation unit is performed multiple times by the auto repeated hitting function. Each time, a post-acceptance change (for example, a post-acceptance display, a post-acceptance output sound, a post-acceptance light emission, a post-acceptance accessory action, etc.) is executed in accordance with the operation acceptance.

Also during the "period from timing tAa2-C1 to timing tAa2-C2 (the period during which the first A operation unit is maintained in the operating state again)", such post-receipt change is executed multiple times by the auto repeat function. With respect to the aspect of time (the aspect of the continuous hitting display HA1b, the first after-accepting output sound SA1a, etc.), unless further development of the effect content occurs, the above-mentioned “from timing tAa2-B2 to timing tAa2-B3 period” (see FIG. 148(f)). The details of the presentation are as described above, so the explanation is omitted here.

However, in the period from timing tAa2-C1 to timing tAa2-C2 according to the example shown in FIG. Based on (the result of the production determination, etc.), it is assumed that the production content corresponding to the 1A reception acceptance state has further progressed (the second stage progress has been made) (Fig. 148 (j ). In particular, at the timing tAa2-C2 according to this example, it is assumed that the effect progresses to the final stage of the effect contents corresponding to the 1A reception allowable state, and the 1A reception allowable state 146(a) and 148(j)).

Therefore, during the period from timing tAa2-C1 to timing tAa2-C2 according to the example shown in FIG. 148(i)), whereas from timing tAa2-C2 onwards, while the acceptance of operations on the 1A operation section is not permitted, the "first 1A post-acceptance change (1A post-acceptance effect)” is executed in a mode in which the content of the effect has further developed (a final stage effect mode) (see FIG. 148(j)).

More specifically, at timing tAa2-C2, as shown in FIGS. 146(e) and 148(j), based on the operation reception for the 1A operation unit, a situation suggesting display JA1 suggesting the operation situation is displayed. is changed from the "mode JA1b" that has appeared so far to a different "mode JA1c". Here, as shown in FIG. 148(j), the enemy character BOSS-A1 is changed to be defeated, and the ice magic by the ally character YS-A1 explodes around the enemy character BOSS-A1. The gauge image HP-A1 is changed to a mode (here, "0") in which the remaining HP gauge is further reduced. According to such a configuration, through the change in the mode of the situation suggestive display JA1, the effect content corresponding to the 1A acceptance allowable state is changed to the operation acceptance (by the auto repeated hitting function) performed at the timing tAa2-C2. Based on the result of the production judgment), it will be suggested that progress has been made.

However, as described above, the "mode JA1c" as such a situation suggestive display JA1 corresponds to the "final stage effect mode" of the effect contents corresponding to the 1A reception acceptable state, and It appears only when the 1A acceptance allowable state is terminated with the operation acceptance as a trigger. Therefore, after the execution of the "mode JA1c" as the situation suggestive display JA1 is started based on the reception of the operation performed at the timing tAa2-C1, regardless of whether or not there is an operation by the player within the execution period, After being executed for a predetermined amount of time, it will be put into a non-display state. It should be noted that here, only the "mode JA1c" is prepared as the final stage effect mode of the situation suggestive display JA1, but a plurality of modes with different expectations for winning a big hit are prepared. (according to the result of the production determination) may be made to appear selectively.

Also, when the operation is accepted at the timing tAa2-C2, the auto repeated hit function that has been enabled until then will be invalidated as the 1st A acceptability state will be ended with this as a trigger. . In this regard, when the automatic repeated hitting function is invalidated at the timing tAa2-A2 or the timing tAa2-B3, the repeated hitting display HA1, which had been displayed by the automatic repeated hitting function until then, is hidden. (Although it was set to be hidden for an indeterminate amount of time after the auto-rolling function was disabled), when the auto-rolling function was disabled at timing tAa2-C2, it The repeated hitting display HA1, which had been displayed by the automatic repeated hitting function until now, is turned off (in a certain time (for example, 0 seconds) after the operation is accepted).

Further, in this example, when the automatic repeated hitting function is disabled at the timing tAa2-A2 or the timing tAa2-B3, the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a that has been output by the automatic repeated hitting function until then is replaced with this. I made it so that it would not be inaudible as a trigger (I set it to be inaudible at an indeterminate time after the auto-rolling function was disabled), but at timing tAa2-C2, the auto-rolling function was turned off. When invalidated, the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a, which has been in an output state until then by the auto repeated hitting function, is turned into an inaudible state (at a certain time after the operation is accepted) with this as a trigger. I'm trying According to such a configuration, it is possible to indicate whether or not the first A acceptance allowable state has ended through the output state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a after the auto repeated hitting function is disabled. Become.

However, with respect to the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a, when the automatic continuous tapping function is disabled at timing tAa2-C2, this triggers the non-audible state (for a certain period of time after the operation is accepted). There may be both a case where it is on and a case where it is not on the inaudible state. For example, if the state of non-audibility is set when the expectation of a big win is high, but the state of non-audibility is not set when the expectation of a big win is low, the final mode does not appear. Coupled with not being made inaudible at timing tAa2-A2 (where high expectations cannot be suggested) and timing tAa2-B3, the first post-acceptance output sound after the auto repeat function is disabled Through the output state of SA1a, it becomes possible to suggest the degree of expectation that a big hit is obtained.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the first post-reception output sound SA1 as the 1A post-reception output sound in response to operation reception, as shown in FIG. , a second post-acceptance output sound SB1 suggesting that the performance content corresponding to the 1A acceptability state has progressed can be output.

Therefore, in the period from timing tAa2-C1 to timing tAa2-C2 according to the example shown in FIG. Then, the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 is started in the mode SB1b-2 based on the acceptance of the operation (development of the effect) at the timing tAa2-C2. As a result, the player can recognize the degree of progress of the contents of the effect through the output mode of the post-acceptance output sound. It is desirable to set the output time of the second post-reception output sound SB1 to be longer than the output time of the first post-reception output sound SA1 corresponding to one operation reception.

In this example, it is assumed that timing tAa2-C2 arrives after the second post-acceptance output sound SB1b-1, which started to be output at timing tAa2-B2, becomes inaudible. The post-acceptance output sound SB1b-1 may arrive while it is being audibly output. In this case, the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 changes from "mode SB1b-1" to "mode SB1b-2" at timing tAa2-C2 (ends mode SB1b-1). , form SB1b-2) may be output instead.

Further, as described above, the 1A acceptance allowable state is originally continued until the timing tAa3 when there is no operation acceptance for the 1A operation unit as shown in FIG. 147(b). It is terminated based on what has arrived. In this regard, the 1A acceptance allowable state occurs as an acceptability state in which the automatic button function described above is activated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 147, when the operation of the 1A operating unit is not accepted until the timing tAa3 arrives in the 1A acceptance permitted state, the 1A acceptance is permitted based on the arrival of the timing tAa3. In addition to ending the state, as a post-1A reception change that appears when an operation is performed on the 1A operation unit, the final stage production mode ( 147(e), (h) and FIG. 148(j)) is started to be executed.

Note that the 1A acceptance acceptable state may be generated as an acceptance acceptable state in which the automatic button function described above is not activated. In other words, in this case, the 1A acceptance allowable state is simply ended based on the arrival of the timing tAa3, and the execution of the 1A post-acceptance change that appears when an operation is performed on the 1A operation unit is started. will no longer occur.

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of generating a "2A reception permission state" as the reception permission period (operation permission state). FIG. 149 is a time chart showing an example of the contents of the effect when the "2A acceptance allowable state" occurs based on the satisfaction of the "condition 2A" as the occurrence condition and the player performs an operation. is. FIG. 150 is a time chart showing an example of the contents of the effect when the "2A reception permitted state" occurs and the player does not perform any operation. FIG. 151 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the "2A acceptance permitted state" occurs.

Now, assuming that the starting condition is satisfied (suspended digestion) and the "2nd A variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first selects the "2nd A variation pattern". The corresponding effect determination (notice effect determination, etc.) is performed. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (effect depiction according to the 2A variable pattern, sound output of BGM reproduction according to the 2A variable pattern (normal BGM reproduction at non-reach time, etc.), etc.) is started, Within the execution period of the variable performance, the performance (forecast performance) corresponding to the result of the determination of the preliminary performance is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "2A variation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 149(c), within the execution period of the variation performance related to the "2nd A variation pattern", the timing tAb2 has arrived after the 2A time has passed since the variation performance of the decorative symbol SZ was started. (Based on the fact that "condition 2A" is satisfied), "change after reception of 2A (2A production situation suggestive display JA2, 2A continuous hitting display HA2, output sound SA2, SB2 after 2A reception etc.) can occur (situation shown in FIG. 151(a)).

Here, in the 2A reception allowable state according to this embodiment, the "2A operation unit" which is allowed to accept operations is set as the same operation means (operation button 410) as in the 1A reception allowable state. , and it is possible to accept a plurality of operation acceptances until the 2A acceptability state ends. However, the 2A operation section may be set as an operation means different from the 1A acceptance allowable state.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, as shown in FIGS. a model image display MG-A2 that simulates the "operation button 410" as the 2A operation unit), a message display MA2 related to the operation of the operation target (here, the "operation button 410" as the 2A operation unit), A situation suggesting display JA2 suggesting the operation situation is displayed when a timing tAb1 before the occurrence of the 2A acceptance allowable state (before the acceptance of the operation on the 2A operation unit is allowed) has arrived. It is supposed to

However, the model image display MG-A2, the message display MA2, and the situation suggestive display JA2 may not necessarily be displayed before the occurrence of the 2A Acceptable State. It may be displayed at the same time as it occurs, or in a manner slightly delayed from its occurrence. In particular, the situation suggesting display JA2 may not be displayed until the first operation reception for the 2A operation unit is performed in the 2A reception permission state. It may be realized by appearing and displaying with the event as a trigger. Also, the timing at which the model image display MG-A2 is displayed and the timing at which the message display MA2 is displayed may be different from each other. For example, the message display MA2 may be displayed before the model image display MG-A2 is displayed.

Regarding the model image display MG-A2, the message display MA2, and the situation suggestive display JA2, after the display starts, regardless of the operation state of the 2A operation unit, at least until the 2A acceptance allowable state ends. The interval is displayed continuously.

Here, the "model image display MG-A2" corresponding to the 2A reception acceptable state has "first color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on white)" and "second color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on white)" and "second color scheme (for example, red The basic color scheme)" is selectively used, and for example, the color scheme determined based on the result of the effect determination is used for display. However, these color schemes may be different from the above-described 1A reception acceptable state.

In addition, in the ``simulated image display MG-A2'' corresponding to the 2A reception allowable state, the part that imitates the ``operation receiving part'' to be operated is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144 (α). 144 (β) to (σ) are sequentially displayed in each of the modes shown in Fig. 144," is regarded as one periodic change, the periodic change is repeated in a form requiring a predetermined period of 2A time. It will appear. However, since this cycle 2A time is set as a time (long cycle) longer than the cycle 1A time that appears in the 1A reception allowable state, in the 2A reception allowable state, the above-mentioned 1A reception allowable state and By comparison, the "operation receiving part" is depicted as slowly moving up and down within its movable range.

Further, the 2A acceptance allowable state originally means that, as shown in FIG. 150(b), when there is no operation acceptance for the 2A operating unit, it continues until timing tAb3 arrives, and timing tAb3 comes. shall be terminated on the basis of Therefore, while the 2A acceptance allowable state continues, a gauge image (in this example, in the model image display MG-A2 image) is depicted to decrease over time, but this depiction may not necessarily be performed.

In addition, when the "simulated image display MG-A2" corresponding to the 2A reception acceptable state is started to be displayed before the timing tAb2 at which the 2A reception acceptable state occurs, the periodic change and the change in the gauge image is preferably started after waiting for the timing tAb2. In other words, in this case, the “simulated image display MG-A2” corresponding to the 2A acceptance allowable state is displayed while maintaining the form shown in FIG. 144(α) until timing tAb2 arrives. becomes.

In addition, in the 2A acceptance acceptance state according to this example, as shown in FIGS. , operation button 410) is displayed (here, message display MA2 displayed as "Kill the tiger! Button 'Continuous hits'!!").

Further, in the 2A reception-allowed state according to this example, as shown in FIGS. 149(e) and 151(a), as a situation suggestive display JA2 suggesting the operation situation in the 2A reception-allowed state, An ally character (here, ally character YS-A2) corresponding to the type of the 2A acceptance acceptable state, and an enemy character (here, an enemy depicted as a tiger) corresponding to the type of the 2A acceptance acceptable state A character BOSS-A2) and a gauge image HP-A2 showing its remaining HP gauge are displayed. In the 2A acceptance allowable state, "whether or not the ally character YS-A2 can defeat the enemy character BOSS-A2 by accepting operations on the 2A operation unit a plurality of times (the gauge image HP-A2 is set to 0 (whether or not it can be done)”, it can be suggested whether the expectation that a big hit is obtained is high or low. On the other hand, each time an operation (acceptance of operation) is performed, an effect can be executed such that "friend character YS-A2" attacks "enemy character BOSS-A2". In this example, the ally character YS-A2, the enemy character BOSS-A2, and the gauge image HP-A2 are displayed as the situation suggestive display JA2, but not all of these displays are necessarily displayed. However, if at least one of the ally character YS-A2, the enemy character BOSS-A2, and the gauge image HP-A2 is displayed, it is possible to suggest the operation status. Note that the teammate character YS-A2 may be displayed as an image display different from that of the teammate character YS-A1 that appears in the 1A acceptable state.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 149, at the timing tAb2-A1 in the 2A acceptance allowable state (the production situation shown in FIG. On the other hand, it is assumed that the first operation is accepted.

In this example, when the first operation is accepted for the "2A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tAb2-A1 within the 2A acceptance allowable state, the operation shown in FIG. As shown in (g), the "2A post-acceptance change (2A post-acceptance effect)" corresponding to the operation acceptance is caused (the effect situation shown in FIG. 151(b)).

More specifically, at timing tAb2-A1 in the 2A acceptance allowable state, if an operation is accepted for the "2A operation unit (here, operation button 410)", As shown in (g), as the post-2A reception change, a "post-2A reception output sound" corresponding to the reception of operation on the "2A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is audibly output. , the “2A post-acceptance display” corresponding to the acceptance of the operation on the “2A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)” starts to be displayed.

That is, when the "2A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is operated once in the 2A acceptance allowable state, the above "2A post-acceptance display" is displayed as shown in FIG. 151(b). As shown, one animation display is displayed in a mode (smoke effect, generation of flame magic, etc.) in which "friend character YS-A2" attacks "enemy character BOSS-A2" with fire magic. It has become so. However, as will be described later, in the 2A acceptability state, the "enemy character BOSS-A2" may be injured, the strength of the flame magic may increase, or the gauge image may be changed based on the result of the effect determination when the operation is accepted. There is a possibility that the remaining HP gauge of HP-A2 will decrease (the content of the production may progress depending on the production judgment etc.). When the content of the production progresses in this way, the state when the operation is accepted for the 2A operation unit (here, "friend character YS-A2" is a flame magic and "enemy character BOSS-A2" attack mode) will appear as one-time moving image display that has changed to the content of the advanced effect (see FIGS. 149(e), (f), FIG. 151(e), etc.). It should be noted that, after the content of the effect progresses in this way, as long as the 2A acceptance acceptance state continues, the degree of progress of the content of the effect does not return to the level before the progress. Therefore, even when an operation is accepted again for the 2A operation unit after the one-time moving image display that has changed to the advanced effect content is completed, when the operation is accepted for the 2A operation unit (here, the mode in which "friend character YS-A2" attacks "enemy character BOSS-A2" with fire magic) can appear as a one-time moving image display that has changed to the advanced production content. becomes. It may be suggested that the possibility (expectation) of getting a big hit is high every time the content of the performance progresses.

Further, in this example, in the 2A acceptance allowable state, when an operation is accepted once with respect to the "2A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)", in addition to the above "2A post-acceptance display", the above As the "second A post-reception output sound", the first post-reception output sound SA2 can be output as shown in FIG. 149(g). Note that the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 according to this example appears as the above-mentioned "second A post-acceptance display", "a mode in which the friendly character YS-A2 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A2 with fire-based magic (smoke Effect, generation of flame-based magic, etc.)”, and is different from the above-mentioned “first post-acceptance output sound SA1”. At this time, as will be described later, there is a possibility that the second post-reception output sound SB2 is further output as the "2A post-reception output sound". The second post-acceptance output sound SB2 according to this example is output when the effect content of the above-mentioned "2A post-acceptance display" progresses. Here, the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 is implemented as a sound effect corresponding to the post-acceptance display, but it may not necessarily function as a sound effect. Anything that can suggest that an operation has been accepted by the player can be used, and it is possible to suggest that the 2A operation unit is maintained in an operated state when the auto-repeating function is activated. Anything is fine.

In this manner, in the 2A acceptance allowable state, the ``friendly character YS-A2'' changes to the ``enemy character BOSS-A2'' each time the ``2A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)'' is operated. In other words, the HP of "enemy character BOSS-A2" decreases due to multiple attacks by "ally character YS-A2" (as the production progresses, As a result, when the HP becomes 0, it means that the "enemy character BOSS-A2" has been defeated. However, in this case, if the HP does not become 0 even after performing multiple attacks, and the "enemy character BOSS-A2" cannot be defeated, it is suggested that the degree of expectation is low.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 149(a), it is assumed that the player's operation (operation state of the 2A operation section) started at timing tAb2-A1 continues until timing tAb2-A2. It has become a thing.

In this regard, the 2A acceptance allowable state is defined as "changes after acceptance (for example, post-acceptance display, post-acceptance output sound, post-acceptance light emitting, Accessory action after acceptance, etc.) is classified into the "multiple operation enabled state" of the type in which the type is executed multiple times (the type in which the so-called auto repeated hitting function is enabled). Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 149(a), during the period from the timing tAb2-A1 to the timing tAb2-A2 (the period during which the 2A operation unit is maintained in the operated state), the 2A operation unit is not accepted for operation. This is performed multiple times, and each time, post-acceptance changes (for example, post-acceptance display, post-acceptance output sound, post-acceptance light emission, post-acceptance accessory operation, etc.) are executed in accordance with the operation acceptance.

Here, when the 2A operation unit is operated once in the 2A acceptance allowable state, the teammate character YS-A2 is displayed as the display after the 2A acceptance, as shown in FIG. 151(b). As described above, the mode of attacking the enemy character BOSS-A2 with fire magic (smoke effect, generation of fire magic, etc.) is displayed (one-time video display). Therefore, during the period from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2 when the so-called automatic continuous tapping function is activated, first, such "single video display" is reproduced a plurality of times as many times as the number of times the operation is accepted. becomes.

In addition, when an operation is accepted once on the 2A operation unit in the 2A acceptance allowable state, the output sound after the 2A acceptance appears as the "display after the 2A acceptance", and the "friend character YS-A2 is output so as to function as a sound effect corresponding to the mode of attacking the enemy character BOSS-A2 with fire magic (smoke effect, generation of fire magic, etc.). Therefore, during the period from the timing tAb2-A1 to the timing tAb2-A2 when the so-called automatic continuous hitting function is activated, in addition to the above-mentioned "single motion picture display", sound effects corresponding to such "single motion picture display" However, it will be reproduced a plurality of times as many times as the number of times the operation is accepted.

However, in the 2A reception allowable state, if the operation unit (2A operation unit) is maintained in the operation state and the automatic continuous tapping function is activated, such changes after reception (one-time video display, sound effect ( 2A post-acceptance output sound), etc.) are executed multiple times, but their execution intervals (intervals from the start of the previous post-acceptance change to the start of the next post-acceptance change) are undefined. (a non-predetermined time).

In addition, in the 2A accepting allowable state, if the operation unit (2A operation unit) is maintained in the operating state and the auto continuous hit function is activated, the ally character YS-A2 will be activated by the enemy character BOSS-A2 with fire magic. (single video display) and the sound effect corresponding to the "single video display" (2A post-acceptance output sound) can be executed multiple times as the post-acceptance change, At this time, the interval until the post-acceptance change is newly started in response to the detection (the interval from the start of the previous change after acceptance to the start of the next change after-acceptance) must be This time is set to be longer than the specific time (the time used in the 1A reception permitted state and the 3A reception permitted state).

That is, in this case, from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2 according to the example shown in FIG. Execution is newly started at an undefined interval by the automatic repeated hitting function, and such repeated display of "moving image display for one time" is expressed as "during repeated hitting display HA2a" in the figure.

Similarly, in the period from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2 according to the example shown in FIG. A new output is started at irregular intervals by the continuous hitting function, and such repeated output of the "sound effect" is expressed as "first post-acceptance output sound SA2a" in the figure.

In this regard, during the period from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2 according to the example shown in FIG. This assumes that no progress has been made.

Therefore, within this period, the "situation suggestive display JA2 (see FIG. 149(e))" which suggests the operation status in the 2A acceptance allowable state, and the operation status in the 2A acceptance allowable state are suggested. None of the “second post-acceptance output sound (see FIG. 149(h))” is changed or started to be executed (in a manner in which the presentation progresses) triggered by the operation acceptance.

According to such a configuration, during the period from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2 according to the example shown in FIG. and the output of the corresponding sound effect are repeatedly executed at unfixed intervals by the auto repeated hitting function (indicating during repeated hitting HA2a, output sound SA2a after first acceptance), but the "situation indicating display JA2 (see FIG. 149(e))" does not change. As a result, only by maintaining the operation state, it becomes possible to confirm the contents of the performance corresponding to the reception of the operation a plurality of times and the fact that the contents of the performance have not progressed, so that the interest in the game can be preferably maintained. is expected.

As for the "situation suggestive display JA2 (see FIG. 149(e))", at least one of the ally character YS-A2, the enemy character BOSS-A2, and the gauge image HP-A2 is activated by accepting the operation. You may make it change as. However, in this case, it is necessary to change to a mode different from "the mode when the content of the production progresses", and the period from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2 without progressing the content of production (second A operation unit is maintained in the operating state) is terminated (when the operation is interrupted), this triggers the return to the "pre-operation display mode". Also, regarding the "situation suggestive display JA2 (see FIG. 149(e))" such as friend character YS-A2, enemy character BOSS-A2, and gauge image HP-A2, until the operation is accepted, It is not displayed, but may be realized by appearing and displaying (until the effective period expires or for a predetermined period of time) triggered by the acceptance of the operation. As I said.

In addition, during the period from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2, a “situation suggestive display JA2 (see FIG. 149(e))” that suggests the operation status in the 2A acceptance allowable state, and the 2A acceptability The "second post-acceptance output sound (see FIG. 149(h))" that suggests the operation status in the state does not change or start to be executed when the operation is accepted. is not progressing.

However, in a situation where the continuous-hit display HA2a is executed by such an automatic continuous-hit function (period from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2), the continuous-hit display is displayed as shown in FIG. As HA2a, "a mode in which ally character YS-A2 attacks enemy character BOSS-A2 with fire magic (smoke effect, generation of fire magic, etc.)" appears repeatedly at irregular intervals. In some cases, the suggestive display JA2" is made difficult to see or becomes inconspicuous, making it difficult to recognize the state of operation in the 2A acceptance permitted state (this configuration is not essential).

In this regard, the example effects shown in FIGS. 149 and 151 are designed to allow the player to more positively confirm the state of the operation in the 2A acceptance allowable state by operating the 2A operating unit at the timing tAb2-A2. It is assumed that the is temporarily interrupted and the auto repeated hit function is disabled.

Here, in the 2A reception allowable state, as shown in FIGS. 149(f) and 151(c), the operation state of the 2A operation unit is temporarily interrupted (non-operation state) at timing tAb2-A2. Then, when the automatic repeated hitting function is invalidated, the repeated hitting display HA2a, which has been in the execution state until then, is turned into a non-display state. That is, in this case, the continuous-hit display HA2a ends its execution state when the timing tAb2-A2 arrives (when the 2A operation section is put into the non-operating state).

According to such a configuration, when the operation state of the 2A operation unit is temporarily interrupted (to the non-operating state) to invalidate the automatic repeated hitting function, the repeated hitting display HA2a which has been in the execution state until then is displayed. Since the non-display state is immediately set, the operation status in the 2A acceptance allowable state can be easily recognized at an early stage. This means that the remaining time in the 2A acceptance allowable state is not consumed much, so that the operating state of the 2A operation unit can be temporarily interrupted to make it easier to operate in the 2A acceptability state. It will be expected to facilitate the act of trying to confirm

Further, in this example, if the operation of the 2A operation unit is interrupted while the continuous-hit display HA2a is being displayed to put it in the non-operating state, the continuous-hitting display HA2a is hidden after the non-operating state is set. The time until the state is set is set as a constant time (here, "0 seconds").

According to such a configuration, after the operation state of the 2A operation unit is temporarily interrupted (in a non-operating state) to disable the automatic repeated hitting function, after how much time elapses, the continuous hitting operation will start. With the display HA2a turned off, it becomes easier to predict whether a situation will arise in which the operation situation in the 2A acceptance allowable state will be easily recognized. This means that it becomes easy to predict how much time will be consumed in the 2A accepting allowable state. It will be expected to facilitate the act of trying to more easily check the status of operations in the reception-allowed state. Since this function and effect can be obtained even when "one second" is set as the certain time, it is possible to obtain the effect from the non-operating state to the non-display state of the repeated hitting display HA2a. The time does not necessarily have to be set to "0 seconds".

In addition, in the 2A acceptance allowable state, as shown in FIG. 149G, etc., the first post-acceptance output sound SA2a which has been in the execution state until then is also executed at the timing tAb2, similarly to the repeated hitting display HA2a. - In A2, when the operation state of the 2nd A operation unit is temporarily interrupted (in a non-operated state) to disable the auto repeated hitting function, this triggers the non-audible state. That is, in this case, the output state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2a is terminated when the timing tAb2-A2 arrives (when the 2A operation unit is set to the non-operating state). It will happen.

According to such a configuration, when the operation state of the 2A operation unit is temporarily interrupted (to the non-operation state) to invalidate the auto repeated hitting function, after the first reception that has been in the execution state until then. The output sound SA2a will soon be put into a non-output state, and in this case, it can be expected to favorably indicate that the auto repeated hitting function has been disabled.

Further, in this example, if the operation of the 2A operation unit is interrupted while the first post-acceptance output sound SA2a is being output and the second A operating unit is put into the non-operating state, the first reception is performed after the non-operating state. The time until the post-output sound SA2a is put into a non-output state is set as a constant time (here, "0 seconds").

According to such a configuration, how much time elapses after the operation state of the 2A operation unit is temporarily interrupted (to the non-operation state) to disable the automatic repeated hitting function, the first It becomes easy to predict whether the output sound SA2a will be in a non-output state after reception of the . This means that it becomes easy to predict how much time will be consumed remaining in the 2A acceptance allowable state, so a game technique of temporarily interrupting the operation state of the 2A operation unit. It is expected to facilitate the This action and effect can be obtained even if, for example, "0.5 seconds" is set as the certain period of time. It is not necessary to set the time until the output state is set to "0 seconds".

Moreover, in the 2A reception allowable state according to this example, as shown in FIGS. ), when the automatic continuous hitting function is invalidated, a new display change is generated with this as a trigger.

Here, the change in display triggered by the non-operating state of the 2A operation unit means that "the continuous hitting display HA2a, which had been displayed until then, is changed to a non-display state, so that the rear side of the The display image that was originally displayed is made visible," but some new aspect emerges by performing processing triggered by the fact that the 2A operation unit is in a non-operated state. The display change in this example appears by performing the process of newly starting to display the “post-non-operation display HB2” as the cut-in image shown in FIG. 151(c). According to such a configuration, it is possible to more reliably suggest that the 2A operation section is in a non-operating state and that the automatic repeated hitting function is disabled.

Note that the "post-non-operation display HB2" according to this example has a plurality of modes that differ depending on the degree of development of the effect, and at timing tAb2-A2, the mode HB2a that suggests that the effect is not progressing is displayed. It has become so. However, as for the “post-non-operation display HB2”, it is not always necessary to prepare a plurality of modes suggesting the degree of development of the effect. Alternatively, a first post-non-operation display of a type that is displayed in one of a plurality of modes suggesting the degree of progress of production, and a second post-non-operation display of a type that is displayed only in one mode that does not suggest the degree of progress of production. Both the display and the display may be displayed as the “post-non-operation display HB2”.

In this respect, in the 2A reception allowable state according to this example, when the 2A operation unit is put into the non-operation state, a new display (post-non-operation display HB2) is displayed with this as a trigger, but the display does not change. The corresponding sound is not newly started to be output.

In addition, in the situation shown in FIG. 151(c), the mode of the situation suggestive display JA2 (here, mode JA2a) is the same as the state before the operation (see FIG. 151(a)), which also suggests that the effect content has not progressed. It should be noted that, regarding the mode of the situation suggestive display JA2 that suggests the operation situation, such as the ally character YS-A2, the enemy character BOSS-A2, the gauge image HP-A2, etc., it is possible to suggest that the production content is not progressing. 151(a), and does not necessarily have to be the same as before the operation (see FIG. 151(a)).

In this example, the gauge image HP-A2 of the situation suggestive display JA2 is not obscured by the "post-non-operation display HB2". It is possible to easily grasp the degree of progress of the content of the production through the display. The ally character YS-A2 and the enemy character BOSS-A2 may also be prevented from becoming difficult to see by the "post-non-operation display HB2".

In this regard, regardless of the mode, the "post-non-operation display HB2" may be hidden when a predetermined time has elapsed since the 2A operation unit was placed in a non-operation state. In this example, the display state is continued while the 2A reception allowable state continues, and when the timing tAb3 at which the 2A reception allowable state ends has arrived, or when the operation acceptance by the player is newly received, the display state is continued. It is hidden as a result of what happened in According to such a configuration, even if the player loses the will to continue the operation while the 2A acceptance allowable state is continuing, the display state of the post-non-operation display HB2 remains the same. Since it is continued until the timing tAb3 when the 2A acceptance allowable state is terminated, it is possible to make it appear as if the performance result of the operation up to that time is appearing, and the game interest can be preferably maintained. come to be expected.

Then, in this example, as shown in FIG. 149(a), at the timing tAb2-B1 in the 2A acceptance allowable state (the production situation shown in FIG. It is assumed that the operation button 410)" is put into the operation state again.

In this example, at timing tAb2-B1 within the 2A reception allowable state, when the "2A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" is again put into the operation state and the operation is accepted, this triggers the following: As shown in FIGS. 149(f) and 149(g), the "2A post-acceptance change (2A post-acceptance effect)" corresponding to the acceptance of the operation is caused again (shown in FIG. 151(d)). production situation).

More specifically, at timing tAb2-B1 in the 2A acceptance allowable state, when an operation is accepted for the "2A operation unit (here, operation button 410)", As shown in (g), after hiding the post-non-operation display HB2 (mode HB2a), as a change after receiving 2A, operation reception for "2A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is performed. ``First post-acceptance output sound SA2 (sound effect corresponding to one-time moving image display)'' is audibly output again, and the ``second A operation unit (here, operation button 410)'' is accepted for operation. The display of "display after reception of 2A (movie display for one time)" corresponding to the request is started again.

In this example, it is assumed that even when the operation of the 2A operation unit is started again at the timing tAb2-B1 within the 2A reception allowable state, the effect content corresponding to the 2A reception allowable state does not progress. It has become a thing. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 151(d), it is the same as when the change after receiving the second A is first started based on the reception of the operation on the second A operation unit at the timing tAb-A1. Execution of the post-2A reception change (display after reception of 2A, output sound after reception of 2A, etc.) is started. The details of the presentation are as described above, so the explanation is omitted here.

In this regard, in the examples of effects shown in FIGS. 149 and 151, the player's operation (operation state of the 2A operation section) started at timing tAb2-B1 is maintained until timing tAb2-B3. It is assumed that the auto repeated hit function is activated.

Therefore, even during the "period from timing tAb2-B1 to timing tAb2-B3 (the period during which the 2A operation unit is maintained in the operated state again)", the operation reception for the 2A operation unit is performed multiple times by the auto repeated hitting function. Each time, a post-acceptance change (for example, a post-acceptance display, a post-acceptance output sound, a post-acceptance light emission, a post-acceptance accessory action, etc.) is executed in accordance with the operation acceptance.

Also during the "period from timing tAb2-B1 to timing tAb2-B3 (the period during which the 2A operation unit is maintained in the operation state again)", such post-acceptance change is executed multiple times by the auto repeated hitting function. With respect to the aspect of time (such as the display HA2a during continuous hitting and the aspect of the output sound SA2a after the first reception), the above-mentioned "period from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2" is used as long as the content of the effect does not progress. (see FIG. 151(b)). The details of the presentation are as described above, so the explanation is omitted here.

However, in the period from timing tAb2-B1 to timing tAb2-B3 according to the example shown in FIG. Based on this, it is assumed that the production content corresponding to the 2A acceptance allowable state progresses (the production situation shown in FIG. 151(e)).

Therefore, in the period from timing tAb2-B1 to timing tAb2-B3 according to the example shown in FIG. 2A post-acceptance effect)” is executed in a state in which the content of the effect is not progressing, whereas in the period from timing tAb2-B2 to timing tAb2-B3, “2A post-acceptance change (second 2A Effect after acceptance)” is executed in a state in which the content of the effect has progressed.

More specifically, in the period from timing tAb2-B2 to timing tAb2-B3, at "timing tAb2-B2", which is the timing at which the content of the production progresses, shown in FIGS. 2A, the mode of the situation suggestive display JA2 suggesting the operation status is changed from the "mode JA2a" that has appeared so far to the different "mode JA2b" based on the reception of the operation on the 2A operation unit. A display change that causes Here, as shown in FIG. 151(e), the enemy character BOSS-A2 is changed into a wounded state, the fire magic by the ally character YS-A2 is changed into a state of higher strength, and the gauge image is changed. HP-A2 will be changed to a state where the remaining HP gauge has decreased. According to such a configuration, through the change in the mode of the situation suggestive display JA2, the effect content corresponding to the 2A reception allowable state is changed to the reception of the operation (by the automatic continuous hitting function) performed at the timing tAb2-B2. Based on the result of the production judgment), it will be suggested that progress has been made.

Then, after the content of the effect has progressed in this way, when the 2A operation unit is operated once, the above "2A post-reception display", as shown in FIG. 151(e), In a mode where the performance content has progressed, such as "The ally character YS-A2 uses fire magic with increased strength to attack the injured enemy character BOSS-A2." "movie display" will be displayed.

It should be noted that, in this example of the effect, after the effect progresses, the degree of progress of the effect does not return to the level before the progress as long as the 2A acceptability state continues. Therefore, even when an operation is accepted again for the 2A operation unit after the one-time moving image display that has changed to the advanced effect content is completed, when the operation is accepted for the 2A operation unit mode (here, the mode in which "friend character YS-A2" attacks "enemy character BOSS-A2" with fire magic) appears as a one-time moving image display that has changed to the advanced production content.

That is, in this case, in the period from the timing tAb2-B1 when the so-called auto repeated hitting function is activated to the timing tAb2-B3, in the period after the timing tAb2-B2 when the content of the effect progresses, such a mode change occurs " One-time video display" will be reproduced a plurality of times as many times as the number of times the operation has been accepted by the automatic continuous hitting function.

Also, during the period after the timing tAb2-B2 when the content of the production progresses, the manner in which the ally character YS-A2 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A2 with fire-based magic (movie display for one time) will change after the reception. , the execution is newly started at irregular intervals (unpredetermined time). Therefore, the above-mentioned "single motion picture display" in which the content of the effect progresses is also newly started at an undefined interval by the automatic continuous hitting function. In the figure, the repeated display of .

Thus, in the effect display device 1600 according to this example, when the "timing tAb2-B2", which is the timing at which the content of the effect is advanced, is reached, FIGS. As shown in (e), the mode of the situation suggestive display JA2 changes from the "mode JA2a" to the "mode JA2b", and the mode of the repeated hitting display HA2 also changes from the "mode HA2a" to the "mode HA2b". It will happen. After that, while the automatic repeated hitting function is activated (timings tAb2-B2 to tAb2-B3), while the situation suggestive display JA2 is displayed in the "mode JA2b", the continuous hitting display HA2 is changed to the "mode HA2b".

In this example, the form of the continuous hitting display HA2 is changed according to the progress of the effect, but it may not be changed according to the progress of the effect. In other words, even if the continuous-hit display HA2 is kept in one mode regardless of the progress of the effect, the player can confirm that the automatic continuous-hit function is enabled through the continuous-hit display HA2. It is possible to confirm that the player is in a situation where the player is in a state where the player is in a state where the player is in a state where the player is in a state where the operation is being accepted (frequency).

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation is accepted once for the "second A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the second A acceptance permitted state, the above " In addition to the 2A post-acceptance display, the first post-acceptance output sound can be output as the 2A post-acceptance output sound, as shown in FIG. 149(g). In addition to the first post-reception output sound SA2 that functions as a sound effect corresponding to the "moving image display for one time" as such a "second A post-reception output sound", as shown in FIG. 149(h), In addition, as described above, the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 suggesting that the performance content corresponding to the 2A acceptability state has progressed can be output.

Therefore, in the period from timing tAb2-B1 to timing tAb2-B3 according to the example shown in FIG. Then, the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is started in the mode SB2b-1 based on the acceptance of the operation (development of the effect) at the timing tAb2-B2. As a result, the player can recognize that the content of the effect has progressed through the output mode of the post-reception output sound. It is desirable to set the output time of the second post-reception output sound SB2 to be longer than the output time of the first post-reception output sound SA2 corresponding to the operation reception.

However, in this production example, the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 that functions as a sound effect corresponding to the "one-time moving image display" is output in the same manner before and after the production content progresses. It is supposed to be realized as Therefore, when the timing tAb2-B2, which is the timing at which the contents of the effect are advanced, is reached, the output of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 as a new "sound effect" is started based on the acceptance of the operation. However, the mode is the same as when the operation is accepted before the timing tAb2-B2 (the execution is the same whether or not the production progress occurs at the timing tAb2-B2). are the same).

That is, in this case, over the entire period from timing tAb2-B1 to timing tAb2-B3 at which the so-called automatic continuous hitting function is activated, the effect sound (output after the first acceptance) corresponding to the above-mentioned "one time video display" The sound SA2) is newly started to be output in the same manner at unfixed intervals by the automatic continuous hitting function. is expressed as Note that the output mode of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2a during this period is the same as the case of the above-described "period from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2", so description is omitted here. and

In this example, the mode of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2a is not changed according to the progress of the content of the presentation, but it may be changed according to the progress of the content of the presentation.

However, even in a situation where the continuous-hit display HA2b is executed by such an automatic continuous-hit function (period from timing tAb2-B2 to timing tAb2-B3), as shown in FIG. As the display HA2b, "a form in which the ally character YS-A2 attacks the wounded enemy character BOSS-A2 with high-strength flame-based magic (smoke effect, generation of flame-based magic, etc.)" is displayed at an irregular interval. Since it appears repeatedly every time, this may make it difficult to see the "situation suggestive display JA2" or make it less conspicuous, making it difficult to recognize the operation situation in the 2A acceptance allowable state (this configuration is essential). not).

In this regard, the example effects shown in FIGS. 149 and 151 are designed to allow the player to more positively check the status of the operation in the 2A acceptance allowable state. It is assumed that the is interrupted again and the auto repeated hit function is disabled.

Here, as described above, in the 2A reception allowable state, the operation state of the 2A operation unit is interrupted (in a non-operated state) while the 2A reception allowable state is continued, and the auto repeated hitting function is activated. When the game is invalidated, the consecutive hitting display HA2, which has been in the execution state until then, is turned into the non-display state with this as a trigger. That is, in this case, the continuous-hit display HA2b ends its execution state when the timing tAb2-B3 arrives (when the 2A operation unit is put into the non-operating state).

Similarly to the continuous-hit display HA2a, when the continuous-hit display HA2b is displayed and the operation of the 2A operating unit is interrupted to put it in the non-operating state, it is put into the non-operating state. The time until the repeated hitting display HA2b is hidden is set as a fixed time (here, "0 seconds").

In addition, in the 2A acceptability state according to this example, when the operation state of the 2A operation unit is temporarily interrupted (to the non-operating state) to invalidate the auto repeated hitting function, the display changes triggered by this. as described above. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 149(f) and 151(f), at timing tAb2-B3, the operation state of the 2A operation unit is temporarily interrupted (to the non-operation state) to disable the auto repeated hitting function. 151(f), the process of newly starting to display the "post-non-operation display HB2" as a cut-in image shown in FIG. 151(f) is performed. As described above, the "post-non-operation display HB2" in this example has a plurality of modes that differ depending on the degree of development of the effect. It is represented in suggestive mode HB2b.

In the situation shown in FIG. 151(f), the mode of the situation suggestive display JA2 (here, mode JA2b) that suggests the operation situation, such as friend character YS-A2, enemy character BOSS-A2, and gauge image HP-A2. also suggests that the content of the production has progressed by one step.

In addition, as described above, in the 2A acceptance allowable state, the operation state of the 2A operation unit is interrupted while the 2A acceptance allowable state continues (into a non-operating state) to disable the auto repeated hitting function. Then, the first post-acceptance output sound SA2, which has been in the output state until then, is turned into the inaudible state with this as a trigger. That is, in this case, the output state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2a is terminated when the timing tAb2-B3 arrives (when the 2A operation section is put into the non-operating state). It will happen.

However, at the timing tAb2-B3 shown in FIG. 149, while the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 started to be output at the timing tAb2-B2 continues to be output, the operation state of the 2A operation unit is changed. It is assumed that it is interrupted.

In this respect, in the 2A acceptance allowable state, the operating state of the 2A operating unit is interrupted (non-operating state) for the second post-acceptance output sound SB2, unlike the case of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2. ), the output state is not terminated (inaudible state). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 149(h) and the like, even if the operation state of the 2A operation unit is temporarily interrupted at timing tAb2-B3, the second post-acceptance output sound SB2b-1 is not output after timing tAb2-B3. Also (after the 2A operation unit is in the non-operating state), it is executed for the predetermined output time until the output is completed, or for the predetermined time from the non-operating state. The output state will continue.

Further, in this example, if the operation of the 2A operation unit is interrupted while the first post-acceptance output sound SA2a is being output and the second A operating unit is put into the non-operating state, the first reception is performed after the non-operating state. The time until the post-output sound SA2a is put into a non-output state is set as a constant time (here, "0 seconds"). On the other hand, with respect to the second post-reception output sound SB2, if the operation of the second A operation section is interrupted while the second post-reception output sound SB2 is being output and this is placed in the non-operating state, The time from when the non-operation state is set to when the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is set to the non-output state is not set as a fixed time, but is indefinite. That is, in this case, when the operation of the 2A operation unit is interrupted, different effects are provided between the first post-reception output sound SA2 and the second post-reception output sound SB2 that have been output until then. .

According to such a configuration, even in the 2A reception allowable state according to this embodiment, the 2A operation section is operated while the 2A post-reception output sound (second post-reception output sound SB2b) is in the execution state. When the game is played so as to interrupt the operation state (in the case of non-operation state), as shown in FIG. A situation appears in which the post-output sound (second post-reception output sound SB2b) continues to be executed. However, after this, due to the passage of time after the 2A operation unit was put into the non-operating state (the passage of time from timing tAb2-B3), as shown in FIG. The post-output sound (second post-reception output sound SB2b) is put into a non-output state.

In this respect, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 149(a), the output sound (second reception At the timing tAb2-C1 (the production situation shown in FIG. 151(g)) when the post-output sound SB2b) is in an audible state (before the output state is ended), the 2A operation section is again put into the operation state. Assuming the case.

In this example, at timing tAb2-C1 within the 2A acceptance allowable state, even if the "2A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is put into the operation state again and the operation is accepted, the above-described timing tAb2- As in the case of B1, with this as a trigger, as shown in FIGS. 149(f) and 149(g), the "2A post-acceptance change (2A post-acceptance effect)" corresponding to the acceptance of the operation is caused again. This is the case (the effect situation shown in FIG. 151(g)).

More specifically, at timing tAb2-C1 within the 2A acceptance allowable state, when an operation is accepted for the "2A operation unit (here, operation button 410)", As shown in (g), after hiding the post-non-operation display HB2 (mode HB2b), as a change after receiving 2A, operation reception for "2A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is performed. ``First post-acceptance output sound SA2 (sound effect corresponding to one-time moving image display)'' is audibly output again, and the ``second A operation unit (here, operation button 410)'' is accepted for operation. The display of "display after reception of 2A (movie display for one time)" corresponding to the request is started again.

In this example, at timing tAb2-C1 within the 2A acceptability state, when the operation of the 2A operation unit is started again, the effect content corresponding to the 2A acceptability state is changed from the first step progress mode. This assumes that no progress has been made. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 151(g), when the 2A post-acceptance change is first started based on the acceptance of the operation on the 2A operation unit at the timing tAb2-B2 (FIG. 151(g)). 151(e)), the 2A post-reception change (2A post-reception display, 2A post-reception output sound, etc.) is started. The details of the presentation are as described above, so the explanation is omitted here.

However, as described above, in this example, it is assumed that the timing tAb2-C1 at which the operation of the second A operation unit is restarted arrives while the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is in an audible state. ing.

In this case, the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 does not cause any change based on the fact that the operation on the 2A operation unit is restarted (that the operation is accepted) at the timing tAb2-C1. , continue the output state up to that point. Note that the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 corresponding to the 2A acceptance allowable state is made inaudible when the 2A operation unit is brought into the non-operating state. It is never audible at the time the part is re-operated.

According to this configuration, in the 2A acceptance allowable state, while the 2A post-acceptance output sound corresponding to the operation acceptance is being output, the 2A operation unit that has been in the non-operating state until then is When the operation is accepted, the second A post-acceptance output sound is never ended (second post-acceptance output sound SB2).

As with the first post-receipt output sound SA2, the repeated hitting display HA2 is also hidden when the 2A operation unit is set to the non-operation state. It is not in the display state when the part is re-operated.

Further, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 149 and 151, the player's operation (operation state of the 2A operation unit) started at timing tAb2-C1 is also maintained until timing tAb2-C2 and the operation state is maintained automatically. It is assumed that the continuous hit function is activated.

Therefore, even during the "period from timing tAb2-C1 to timing tAb2-C2 (the period in which the 2A operation unit is maintained in the operated state again)", the operation reception for the 2A operation unit is performed multiple times by the automatic continuous hitting function. Each time, a post-acceptance change (for example, a post-acceptance display, a post-acceptance output sound, a post-acceptance light emission, a post-acceptance accessory action, etc.) is executed in accordance with the operation acceptance.

Also during the "period from timing tAb2-C1 to timing tAb2-C2 (the period during which the 2A operation unit is maintained in the operation state again)", such post-acceptance change is executed multiple times by the auto repeated hitting function. With respect to the aspect of time (the aspect of the continuous hitting display HA2b, the first post-reception output sound SA2a, etc.), unless further development of the effect content occurs, the above-mentioned “from timing tAb2-B2 to timing tAb2-B3 period” (see FIG. 151(f)). The details of the presentation are as described above, so the explanation is omitted here.

However, in the period from timing tAb2-C1 to timing tAb2-C2 according to the example shown in FIG. Based on the result of the production determination, etc., it is assumed that the production content corresponding to the 2A reception acceptance state has further progressed (the second stage progress has been made) (Fig. 151 (h ). In particular, at the timing tAb2-C2 according to this example, it is assumed that the effect progresses to the final stage of the effect contents corresponding to the 2A reception allowable state, and the 2A reception allowable state 149(a) and 151(h)).

Therefore, during the period from timing tAb2-C1 to timing tAb2-C2 according to the example shown in FIG. 151(h)), whereas from timing tAb2-C2 onwards, while the acceptance of operations on the 2A operation unit is not permitted, the "second 2A Post-acceptance change (2A post-acceptance effect)” will be executed in a mode in which the content of the effect has further developed (the effect mode of the final stage) (see FIG. 151(h)).

More specifically, at timing tAb2-C2, as shown in FIGS. 149(e) and 151(h), based on the operation reception for the 2A operation unit, a situation suggestion display JA2 suggesting the operation situation is displayed. is changed from the "mode JA2b" that has appeared so far to a different "mode JA2c". Here, as shown in FIG. 151(h), the enemy character BOSS-A2 is changed to be defeated, and the flame magic by the ally character YS-A2 explodes around the enemy character BOSS-A2. The gauge image HP-A2 is changed to a further decreased mode of the remaining HP gauge. According to such a configuration, through the change in the mode of the situation suggestive display JA2, the effect content corresponding to the 2A reception allowable state is changed to the reception of the operation (by the automatic continuous hitting function) performed at the timing tAb2-C2. Based on the result of the production judgment), it will be suggested that progress has been made.

However, as described above, the "mode JA2c" as such a situation suggestive display JA2 corresponds to the "final stage effect mode" among the effect contents corresponding to the 2A acceptance allowable state, and It appears only when the 2A acceptance allowable state is terminated with the operation acceptance as a trigger. Therefore, after the execution of the "mode JA2c" as the situation suggestive display JA2 is started based on the reception of the operation performed at the timing tAb2-C1, regardless of whether or not there is an operation by the player within the execution period, After being executed for a predetermined amount of time, it will be put into a non-display state. Here, only the "mode JA2c" is prepared as the final stage performance mode of the situation suggestive display JA2, and multiple modes with different degrees of expectation for winning a big hit are not prepared.

Also, when the operation is accepted at the timing tAb2-C2, the auto repeated hit function that has been enabled up to that point will be invalidated as the 2A acceptability state will end with this as a trigger. . In this respect, even when the automatic repeated hitting function is invalidated at the timing tAb2-C2, the repeated hitting display HA2, which had been displayed by the automatic repeated hitting function until then, is turned off.

Also, in this example, when the automatic repeated hitting function is invalidated at timing tAb2-C2, the first post-acceptance output sound SA2a, which has been output by the automatic repeated hitting function until then, is turned on (operation for a certain period of time from the time the reception is made) to an inaudible state.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the first post-reception output sound SA2 as the second A post-reception output sound in response to operation reception, as shown in FIG. , it is possible to output a second post-reception output sound SB2 suggesting that the effect content corresponding to the 2A acceptance permitted state has progressed.

Therefore, in the period from timing tAb2-C1 to timing tAb2-C2 according to the example shown in FIG. Then, based on the reception of the operation (development of the effect) at the timing tAb2-C2, the output of the second post-reception output sound SB2 is started in the mode SB2b-2. As a result, the player can recognize the degree of progress of the contents of the effect through the output mode of the post-acceptance output sound. It is desirable to set the output time of the second post-reception output sound SB2 to be longer than that of the first post-reception output sound SA2.

In this example, it is assumed that timing tAb2-C2 arrives after the second post-acceptance output sound SB2b-1, which started to be output at timing tAb2-B2, becomes inaudible. The post-acceptance output sound SB2b-1 may arrive while it is being audibly output. In this case, the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 changes from "mode SB2b-1" to "mode SB2b-2" at timing tAb2-C2 (ends mode SB2b-1). , form SB2b-2) may be output instead.

Further, as described above, the 2A acceptance allowable state is originally continued until the timing tAb3 when there is no operation acceptance for the 2A operation unit as shown in FIG. 150(b). It is terminated based on what has arrived. In this regard, the 2A acceptance allowable state occurs as an acceptability state in which the automatic button function described above is activated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 150, when the operation of the 2A operation unit is not accepted until the timing tAb3 arrives in the 2A acceptance permitted state, the 2A acceptance is permitted based on the arrival of the timing tAb3. In addition to ending the state, as a post-2A reception change that appears when an operation is performed on the 2A operation unit, the final stage production mode ( 150(e), (h) and FIG. 151(h)) is started to be executed.

Note that the 2A acceptance allowable state may be generated as an acceptability state in which the automatic button function described above is not activated. That is, in this case, the 2A acceptance allowable state is simply ended based on the arrival of the timing tAb3, and the execution of the 2A post-acceptance change that appears when an operation is performed on the 2A operation unit is started. will no longer occur.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of generating the "3rd A reception permitted state" as the reception permitted period (operation permitted state). FIG. 152 is a time chart showing an example of the effect content when the "3A acceptance allowable state" occurs based on the satisfaction of the "condition 3A" as the occurrence condition and the player performs an operation. is. FIG. 153 is a time chart showing an example of the contents of the effect when the "3A acceptance permitted state" occurs and the player does not perform any operation. FIG. 154 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the "3A acceptance permitted state" occurs.

Now, assuming that the starting condition is satisfied (suspended digestion) and the "3rd A variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first selects the "3rd A variation pattern". The corresponding effect determination (notice effect determination, etc.) is performed. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (effect depiction according to the 3A variable pattern, sound output of BGM reproduction according to the 3A variable pattern (normal BGM reproduction at non-reach time, etc.), etc.) is started, Within the execution period of the variable performance, the performance (forecast performance) corresponding to the result of the determination of the preliminary performance is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "3A variation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 152(c), within the execution period of the variation performance related to the "3rd A variation pattern", the timing tAc2 has arrived after the 3A time has passed since the variation performance of the decorative symbol SZ was started. (based on the satisfaction of "Condition 3A"), "change after reception of 3A (3A production situation suggestive display JA3, 3A continuous hitting display HA3, output sounds SA3, SB3 after 3A reception etc.) can occur (situation shown in FIG. 154(a)).

Here, in the 3A acceptance allowable state according to this embodiment, the "3A operation unit" that allows operation acceptance is set as the operation button 410, and the 3A acceptance allowable state is terminated. It is permissible to accept the operation multiple times before.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, as shown in FIGS. "Operation button 410" as the 3A operation unit), and the situation suggestion display JA3, which suggests the operation situation, are displayed before the 3A reception allowable state occurs (3A This is displayed when the timing tAc1 (before acceptance of operation on the operation unit is permitted) arrives.

However, the model image display MG-A3 and the situation suggestive display JA3 do not necessarily have to be displayed before the occurrence of the 3A acceptable state. It may be displayed at the same time or slightly after its occurrence. In particular, the situation suggesting display JA3 may not be displayed until the first operation reception for the 3A operation unit is performed in the 3A reception permission state. It may be realized by appearing and displaying with the event as a trigger.

Regarding the model image display MG-A3 and the situation indication display JA3, once they are displayed, regardless of the operating state of the 3A operation unit, they will continue at least until the 3A acceptable state ends. is displayed.

Here, the "model image display MG-A3" corresponding to the 3A accepting state has "first color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on white)" and "second color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on white)" and "second color scheme (for example, red The basic color scheme)" is selectively used, and for example, the color scheme determined based on the result of the effect determination is used for display.

In addition, in the ``simulated image display MG-A3'' corresponding to the 3A acceptance allowable state, the part that imitates the ``operation receiving part'' to be operated is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144 (β) to (σ) are sequentially displayed in each of the modes shown in Fig. 144," is regarded as one periodic change, the periodic change is repeated in a form requiring a predetermined period of 3A time. It will appear. The period of 3A is set as a time (short cycle) shorter than the period of 2A, and may be set to be the same as the period of 1A, for example. Therefore, in the 3A reception allowable state, the "operation receiving section" is depicted as quickly moving up and down within its movable range.

As shown in FIG. 153(b), the 3A acceptance allowable state is continued until timing tAc3 when no operation is accepted for the 3A operation unit, and is based on the arrival of timing tAc3. is terminated. Therefore, while the 3A acceptance allowable state continues, a gauge image (in this example, in the model image display MG-A3 image) is depicted to decrease over time, but this depiction may not necessarily be performed.

In addition, when the "simulated image display MG-A3" corresponding to the 3A accepting acceptable state is started to be displayed before the timing tAc2 at which the 3A accepting acceptable state occurs, the periodic change and the change of the gauge image is preferably started after waiting for the timing tAc2. That is, in this case, the "simulated image display MG-A3" corresponding to the 3A accepting state is displayed while maintaining the form shown in FIG. 144(α) until timing tAc2 arrives. becomes.

152(d) and 154(a), in the 3A reception allowable state according to this example, unlike the 1A reception allowable state and the 2A reception allowable state, the 3A operation section ( Here, the message display related to the reception of the operation on the operation button 410) is not displayed.

Further, in the 3A acceptance allowable state according to this example, as shown in FIGS. 152(e) and 154(a), as a situation suggestive display JA3 suggesting the operation situation in the 3A acceptability state, An ally character (here, ally character YS-A3) corresponding to the type of the 3A acceptance acceptable state and an enemy character (here, an enemy depicted as a ghost) corresponding to the type of the 3A acceptance acceptable state A character BOSS-A3) and a gauge image HP-A3 showing its remaining HP gauge are displayed. In the 3A acceptance allowable state, "whether or not the ally character YS-A3 can defeat the enemy character BOSS-A3 by accepting operations on the 3A operation unit a plurality of times (the gauge image HP-A3 is set to 0 (whether or not it can be done)", it can be suggested whether the expectation that a big hit is obtained is high or low. On the other hand, each time an operation (operation reception) is performed, an effect can be executed such that "friend character YS-A3" attacks "enemy character BOSS-A3". In this example, the ally character YS-A3, the enemy character BOSS-A3, and the gauge image HP-A3 are displayed as the situation suggestive display JA3, but not all of these displays are necessarily displayed. However, if at least one of the friend character YS-A3, the enemy character BOSS-A3, and the gauge image HP-A3 is displayed, it is possible to suggest the operation status.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 152, at the timing tAc2-A1 in the 3A acceptance allowable state (the production situation shown in FIG. On the other hand, it is assumed that the first operation is accepted.

In this example, when the first operation is accepted for the "3A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tAc2-A1 within the 3A acceptance allowable state, the operation shown in FIG. As shown in (g), the "3A post-acceptance change (3A post-acceptance effect)" corresponding to the operation acceptance is caused (the effect situation shown in FIG. 154(b)).

More specifically, at timing tAc2-A1 in the 3A acceptance allowable state, if an operation is accepted for the "3A operation unit (here, operation button 410)", As shown in (g), as a post-3A acceptance change, a "3A post-acceptance output sound" is audibly output in response to the acceptance of operation on the "3A operation unit (here, operation button 410)". , "3A post-acceptance display" corresponding to the acceptance of operation on the "3A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" starts to be displayed.

That is, when the "3A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is operated once in the 3A acceptance allowable state, the above "3A post-acceptance display" is displayed as shown in FIG. 154(b). As shown, the animation display for one time is displayed in a manner in which "friend character YS-A3" attacks "enemy character BOSS-A3" with lightning-based magic. However, as will be described later, in the 3A acceptability state, the "enemy character BOSS-A3" may be injured, the strength of lightning-based magic may be increased, or the gauge image may be changed based on the result of the effect determination when the operation is accepted. There is a possibility that the remaining HP gauge of HP-A3 will decrease (the content of the production may progress depending on the production judgment etc.). When the content of the production progresses in this way, the state when the operation is accepted for the 3A operation unit (here, "friend character YS-A3" is lightning magic and "enemy character BOSS-A3" attack mode) will appear as one-time moving image display that has changed to the content of the advanced effect (see FIGS. 152(e), (f), FIG. 154(f), etc.). It should be noted that, after the content of the effect progresses in this way, the degree of progress of the content of the effect will not be returned to the level before the progress as long as the 3A acceptability state continues. Therefore, even when the operation is accepted again for the 3A operation unit after the one-time moving image display that has changed to the advanced effect content is completed, when the operation is accepted for the 3A operation unit (here, the mode in which "friend character YS-A3" attacks "enemy character BOSS-A3" with lightning-based magic) can appear as a one-time moving image display that has changed to the advanced production content. becomes. It may be suggested that the possibility (expectation) of getting a big hit is high every time the content of the performance progresses.

Further, in this example, in the 3A acceptance allowable state, when an operation is accepted once with respect to the "3A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)", in addition to the above "3A post-acceptance display", the above As the "3A post-reception output sound", the first post-reception output sound SA3 can be output as shown in FIG. 152(g). Note that the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 according to this example appears as the above-mentioned "3A post-acceptance display", which is the mode in which the friendly character YS-A3 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A3 with lightning-based magic (thunder It functions as a sound effect corresponding to the generation of system magic, etc.). At this time, as will be described later, there is a possibility that the second post-reception output sound SB3 is further output as the "3A post-reception output sound". The second post-acceptance output sound SB3 according to this example is output when the effect content of the above-mentioned "3A post-acceptance display" progresses. Here, the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 is implemented as a sound effect corresponding to the post-acceptance display, but it may not necessarily function as a sound effect. Anything that can suggest that an operation has been accepted by the player can be used, and it can suggest that the 3A operation unit is maintained in an operated state when the automatic repeated hitting function is activated. Anything is fine.

As described above, in the 3A acceptance allowable state, the ``friendly character YS-A3'' changes to the ``enemy character BOSS-A3'' every time the ``3A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)'' is operated. In other words, the HP of "enemy character BOSS-A3" decreases due to multiple attacks by "ally character YS-A3" (as the production progresses). As a result, when the HP becomes 0, it means that the "enemy character BOSS-A3" has been defeated. However, in this case, if the HP does not become 0 even after performing multiple attacks and the "enemy character BOSS-A3" cannot be defeated, it is suggested that the degree of expectation is low.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 152(a), it is assumed that the player's operation (operation state of the 3A operation unit) started at timing tAc2-A1 continues until timing tAc2-A2. It has become a thing.

In this regard, the 3A acceptance allowable state is defined as "changes after acceptance (for example, post-acceptance display, post-acceptance output sound, post-acceptance emission, and Accessory action after acceptance, etc.) is classified into the "multiple operation enabled state" of the type in which the type is executed multiple times (the type in which the so-called auto repeated hitting function is enabled). Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 152(a), during the period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2 (the period during which the 3A operation unit is maintained in the operated state), the 3A operation unit is not accepted for operation. This is performed multiple times, and each time, post-acceptance changes (for example, post-acceptance display, post-acceptance output sound, post-acceptance light emission, post-acceptance accessory operation, etc.) are executed in accordance with the operation acceptance.

Here, when the 3A operation section is operated once in the 3A acceptance allowable state, the friendly character YS-A3 is displayed as the display after the 3A acceptance, as shown in FIG. 154(b). As described above, the mode of attacking the enemy character BOSS-A3 with lightning-based magic is displayed (one-time video display). Therefore, during the period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2 when the so-called automatic continuous tapping function is activated, first, such "one video display" is reproduced multiple times as many times as the number of times the operation is accepted. becomes.

Further, when the 3A operation section is operated once in the 3A reception allowable state, the output sound after the 3A reception appears as the "display after reception of the 3A", and the "friend character YS-A3 is output so as to function as a sound effect corresponding to the mode of attacking the enemy character BOSS-A3 with thunder-based magic (smoke effect, generation of thunder-based magic, etc.). Therefore, in the period from the timing tAc2-A1 to the timing tAc2-A2 when the so-called auto-flick function is activated, in addition to the above-mentioned "single motion picture display", sound effects corresponding to such "single motion picture display" However, it will be reproduced a plurality of times as many times as the number of times the operation is accepted.

However, in the 3A acceptability state, if the operation unit (3A operation unit) is maintained in the operable state and the auto continuous hit function is activated, the ally character YS-A3 will be activated by the enemy character BOSS-A3 with lightning magic. and the sound effect corresponding to the "single video display" (output sound after receiving the 3rd A reception) for a certain period of time (predetermined time ), the execution is newly started.

In addition, in the 3A acceptability state, if the operation unit (3A operation unit) is maintained in the operation state and the automatic continuous hitting function is activated, the ally character YS-A1 can be activated by the enemy character BOSS-A3 with lightning magic. (single video display) and the sound effect corresponding to the "single video display" (output sound after 3A acceptance) can be executed multiple times as the above post-acceptance change, At this time, the interval until the post-acceptance change is newly started in response to the detection (the interval from the start of the previous change after acceptance to the start of the next change after-acceptance) must be It is supposed to be a time less than or equal to a specific time.

That is, in this case, from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2 according to the example shown in FIG. Execution is newly started at regular time intervals by the automatic repeated hitting function, and such repeated display of "one-time moving image display" is expressed as "display during repeated hitting HA3a" in the figure.

Similarly, in the period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2 according to the example shown in FIG. A new output is started at regular time intervals by the continuous hitting function, and such repeated output of the "sound effect" is expressed as "first post-acceptance output sound SA3a" in the figure.

In this regard, in the period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2 according to the example shown in FIG. This assumes that no progress has been made.

Therefore, within the period, the "situation suggestive display JA3 (see FIG. 152(e))" that suggests the operation status in the 3A acceptance allowable state, and the operation status in the 3A acceptance allowable state are suggested. None of the “second post-acceptance output sound (see FIG. 152(h))” changes or starts to be executed when the operation is accepted.

According to such a configuration, in the period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2 according to the example shown in FIG. Although the output of the corresponding sound effect is repeatedly executed at regular intervals by the auto repeated hitting function (during repeated hitting display HA3a, first reception output sound SA3a), the "situation suggestive display JA3" (see FIG. 152 ( e))” does not change. As a result, it is possible to confirm the same performance contents as when the monotonous repetitive operation is performed or that the performance contents have not progressed, so that the interest in the game can be preferably maintained. is expected.

As for the "situation suggestive display JA3 (see FIG. 152(e))", at least one of the ally character YS-A3, the enemy character BOSS-A3, and the gauge image HP-A3 is activated by accepting the operation. You may make it change as. However, in this case, it is necessary to change to a mode different from the "mode when the performance content progresses", and the period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2 without progressing the performance content (3A operation unit is maintained in the operating state) is terminated (when the operation is interrupted), this triggers the return to the "pre-operation display mode". In addition, regarding the "situation suggestive display JA3 (see FIG. 152(e))" such as friend character YS-A3, enemy character BOSS-A3, and gauge image HP-A3, until the operation is accepted, It is not displayed, but may be realized by appearing and displaying (until the effective period expires or for a predetermined period of time) triggered by the acceptance of the operation. As I said.

In addition, during the period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2, a “situation suggestive display JA3 (see FIG. 152(e))” that suggests the operation status in the 3A reception allowable state, and the 3A reception allowable The "second post-acceptance output sound (see FIG. 152(h))" that suggests the operation status in the state does not change or start to be executed when the operation is accepted. is not progressing.

However, in a situation where the continuous-hit display HA3a is executed by such an automatic continuous-hit function (period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2), the continuous-hit display is displayed as shown in FIG. As HA3a, ``Since the mode in which the ally character YS-A3 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A3 with lightning-based magic appears repeatedly at regular intervals, this makes the ``situation suggestive display JA3'' difficult to see or inconspicuous. As a result, it may be difficult to recognize the operation status in the 3A acceptance allowable state (this configuration is not essential).

In this regard, the example effects shown in FIGS. 152 and 154 are designed to allow the player to more positively confirm the state of the operation in the 3A acceptance allowable state by operating the 3A operating unit at the timing tAc2-A2. It is assumed that the is temporarily interrupted and the auto repeated hit function is disabled.

Here, in the 3A reception allowable state, as shown in FIGS. 152(f) and 154(c), the operation state of the 3A operation unit is temporarily interrupted (non-operation state) at timing tAc2-A2. Even if the automatic repeated hitting function is invalidated, the repeated hitting display HA3a, which has been in the execution state until then, will not be turned off. That is, in this case, the continuous-hit display HA3a is set in advance to, for example, the above-mentioned "one-time moving image display" that was in the execution state even after the timing tAc2-A2 (even after the 3A operation unit is in the non-operation state). The execution state is continued until the display is completed after being executed for the predetermined display time, or for a predetermined time from the non-operating state.

According to such a configuration, even if the operation state of the 3A operation unit is temporarily interrupted (to the non-operating state) to invalidate the automatic repeated hitting function, the continuous hitting display HA3a that has been in the execution state until then is displayed. is not immediately hidden, it takes time to easily recognize the operation status in the 3A acceptance allowable state. This means that the remaining time in the 3A acceptance allowable state is greatly consumed. It is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably given to the action to be confirmed.

Further, in this example, if the operation of the 3A operation unit is interrupted while the continuous-hit display HA3a is being displayed to put it in the non-operating state, the continuous-hitting display HA3a is hidden after the non-operating state is set. The time until the state is set is not set as a fixed time, but is set to be indefinite.

According to such a configuration, after the operation state of the 3A operation unit is temporarily interrupted (to the non-operating state) and the automatic repeated hitting function is invalidated, how much time will elapse before the continuous hitting function is activated? It becomes difficult to predict whether a situation will arise in which the state of operation in the 3A acceptance permitted state can be easily recognized when the display HA3a is turned off. This means that it is difficult to predict how much time will be consumed remaining in the 3A acceptability state. It is expected that the action of trying to more easily confirm the operation status in the acceptance-permitting state will be appropriately given a sense of tension.

In addition, in the 3A acceptance allowable state, as shown in FIG. 152(g), the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a which has been in the execution state up to that time is also executed at the timing tAc2 in the same manner as the repeated hitting display HA3a. - In A2, when the operation state of the 3A operation unit is temporarily interrupted (to the non-operation state) to invalidate the auto repeated tapping function, the inaudible state is not triggered by this. That is, in this case, the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a corresponds to the above-mentioned "one-time moving image display" that was in the execution state even after the timing tAc2-A2 (even after the 3A operation unit is in the non-operation state). The output state is continued until the "sound effect" is executed for a predetermined output time and is completely output, or for a predetermined time from the non-operating state.

According to such a configuration, even if the operation state of the 3A operation unit is temporarily interrupted (to the non-operation state) to invalidate the auto repeated hitting function, the first reception that has been in the execution state until then is disabled. The post-output sound SA3a will not be put into a non-output state immediately, and in this case, it can be expected that the sense of tension is preferably maintained because it seems as if the auto repeated hitting function is still effective.

Further, in this example, if the operation of the 3A operation unit is interrupted while the first post-receipt output sound SA3a is being output and the 3A operation unit is put into the non-operating state, the first reception is performed after the non-operating state. The time until the post-output sound SA3a is put into a non-output state is not set as a fixed time, but is set to be indefinite.

According to such a configuration, how much time elapses from the time when the operation state of the 3A operation unit is temporarily interrupted (in a non-operation state) and the automatic repeated hitting function is disabled, before the first It becomes difficult to predict whether the output sound SA3a will be in a non-output state after reception of , that is, whether it will be possible to more reliably confirm that the automatic repeated tapping function has been disabled. This means that it is difficult to predict how much time will be consumed remaining in the 3A acceptance allowable state. It will be expected that a sense of tension will be suitably given to it.

Further, in the 3A reception allowable state according to this embodiment, when the operation state of the 3A operation unit is interrupted (non 152(f), (g), etc.), the timing at which the repeated hitting display HA3a is turned off and the first post-receipt output sound SA3a are displayed. The timing to be set to the non-output state is different from each other. In the figure, the timing at which the repeated hitting display HA3a is turned off is before the timing at which the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a is turned off. You can set it so that Alternatively, due to the above-mentioned property that the time until the non-display or non-output state is set is indefinite, the timing at which the continuous hitting display HA3a is set to the non-display state is the same as when the first post-receipt output sound SA3a is non-display. There may be both a case before the timing of the output state and a case after the timing. Also, the timing may be the same.

According to such a configuration, in the 3A acceptance allowable state according to this embodiment, the operating state of the 3A operating unit is changed while the repeated hitting display HA3a and the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a are both in the execution state. When the game is interrupted (in the non-operating state), the 3A operation section is in the non-operating state, as shown in FIGS. In the midst of this, a situation appears in which the continuous hitting display HA3a continues to be displayed and the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a continues to be output. However, after this, due to the passage of time after the 3A operation unit was put into the non-operating state, as shown in FIGS. 152(f) and (g) and FIG. The display HA3a is put into a non-display state, and the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a is put into a non-output state. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the automatic continuous hit function is disabled, and the player character YS-A3, the enemy character BOSS-A3, and the gauge image can be displayed. It becomes possible to easily recognize the aspect of the situation suggestive display JA3 (here, aspect JA3a) that suggests the operation situation, such as HP-A3 (see FIG. 154(d)).

However, as described above, during the period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2 according to the example shown in FIG. It is assumed that the content has not progressed.

Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 154(d), the aspect of the situation suggestive display JA3 (here, aspect JA3a) can be easily recognized, but their aspects are the same as before the operation (see FIG. 154(a)), and the content of the effect has not progressed due to this. is suggested. It should be noted that, regarding the mode of the situation suggestive display JA3 that suggests the operation situation, such as the ally character YS-A3, the enemy character BOSS-A3, the gauge image HP-A3, etc., if it is possible to suggest that the production content is not progressing. 154(a), and does not necessarily have to be the same as before the operation (see FIG. 154(a)).

Then, in this example, as shown in FIG. 152(a), at the timing tAc2-B1 in the 3A reception allowable state (the effect situation shown in FIG. 154(e)), the "3A operation section (here It is assumed that the operation button 410)" is put into the operation state again.

In this example, at timing tAc2-B1 within the 3A reception allowable state, when the "3A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is put into the operation state again and the operation is accepted, with this as a trigger, As shown in FIGS. 152(f) and 152(g), the "3A post-acceptance change (3A post-acceptance effect)" corresponding to the acceptance of the operation is caused again (shown in FIG. 154(e)). production situation).

More specifically, at timing tAc2-B1 in the 3A acceptance allowable state, if an operation is accepted for the "3A operation unit (here, operation button 410)", As shown in (g), as a post-3A reception change, "first post-reception output sound SA3 (one video Sound effect corresponding to the display)" is audibly output again, and "3A post-acceptance display (1-time video display)" corresponding to the acceptance of operation on the "3A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is displayed. starts to appear again.

In this example, it is assumed that even when the operation of the 3A operation unit is started again at the timing tAc2-B1 within the 3A reception allowable state, the effect content corresponding to the 3A reception allowable state does not progress. It has become a thing. Therefore, the situation shown in FIG. 154(e) is the same as when the 3A post-acceptance change is first started based on the acceptance of the operation on the 3A operation unit at the timing tAc2-A1. Execution of the 3A post-reception change (3A post-reception display, 3A post-reception output sound, etc.) is started. The details of the presentation are as described above, so the explanation is omitted here.

In this regard, in the example effects shown in FIGS. 152 and 154, the player's operation (operation state of the 3A operation unit) started at timing tAc2-B1 is maintained until timing tAc2-B3. It is assumed that the auto repeated hit function is activated.

Therefore, even during the "period from timing tAc2-B1 to timing tAc2-B3 (the period in which the 3A operation unit is maintained in the operated state again)", the operation acceptance for the 3A operation unit is performed multiple times by the auto repeated hitting function. Each time, a post-acceptance change (for example, a post-acceptance display, a post-acceptance output sound, a post-acceptance light emission, a post-acceptance accessory action, etc.) is executed in accordance with the operation acceptance.

Also during the "period from timing tAc2-B1 to timing tAc2-B3 (the period during which the 3A operation unit is maintained in the operating state again)", such post-receipt change is executed multiple times by the auto repeat function. With respect to the aspect of time (the aspect of the continuous hitting display HA3a, the first after-accepting output sound SA3a, etc.), unless the effect content progresses, the above-mentioned "period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2" (see FIG. 154(b)). The details of the presentation are as described above, so the explanation is omitted here.

However, in the period from timing tAc2-B1 to timing tAc2-B3 according to the example shown in FIG. Based on this, it is assumed that the production content corresponding to the 3A acceptance allowable state progresses (the production situation shown in FIG. 154(f)).

Therefore, in the period from timing tAc2-B1 to timing tAc2-B3 according to the example shown in FIG. 3A Post-acceptance production)” is executed in a state in which the content of the production is not progressing, whereas in the period from timing tAc2-B2 to timing tAc2-B3, “3A post-acceptance change (second 3A Effect after acceptance)” will be executed in a state in which the content of the effect has progressed.

More specifically, in the period from timing tAc2-B2 to timing tAc2-B3, at “timing tAc2-B2”, which is the timing at which the content of the production progresses, the timing shown in FIGS. so that the mode of the situation suggestive display JA3 suggesting the operation status is changed from the "mode JA3a" that has appeared until then to the different "mode JA3b" based on the reception of the operation on the 3A operation unit. A display change that causes Here, as shown in FIG. 154(f), the enemy character BOSS-A3 is changed into a wounded state, the thunder-based magic by the ally character YS-A3 is changed into a state of higher strength, and the gauge image is changed. HP-A3 will be changed to a state in which the remaining HP gauge has decreased. According to such a configuration, through the change in the mode of the situation suggestive display JA3, the effect content corresponding to the 3A reception allowable state is changed to the operation reception (by the automatic continuous hitting function) performed at the timing tAc2-B2. Based on the result of the production judgment), it will be suggested that progress has been made.

Then, after the content of the effect has progressed in this way, when the 3A operation unit is operated once, the above "3A display after reception" is performed, as shown in FIG. 154(f). In the above-mentioned "one time" mode, the content of the production has progressed, such as "the ally character YS-A3 attacks the injured enemy character BOSS-A3 using lightning magic with increased strength." "movie display" will be displayed.

It should be noted that, in this example of effect, after the effect progresses, as long as the 3A acceptability state continues, the degree of progress of the effect will not return to the level before progress. Therefore, even when the operation is accepted again for the 3A operation unit after the one-time moving image display that has changed to the advanced effect content is completed, when the operation is accepted for the 3A operation unit mode (here, mode in which "friend character YS-A3" attacks "enemy character BOSS-A3" with lightning-based magic) appears as a one-time moving image display that has changed to the advanced production content.

That is, in this case, in the period from the timing tAc2-B1 when the so-called automatic repeated hitting function is activated to the timing tAc2-B3, in the period after the timing tAc2-B2 when the content of the effect progresses, such a mode change occurs " One-time video display" will be reproduced a plurality of times as many times as the number of times the operation has been accepted by the automatic continuous hitting function.

Also, during the period after the timing tAc2-B2 when the content of the production has progressed, the manner in which the ally character YS-A3 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A3 with lightning-based magic (movie display for one time) will change after the reception. , the execution is newly started at regular time intervals (predetermined time intervals). Therefore, the "single motion picture display" in which the content of the effect progresses is also newly started at regular time intervals by the automatic continuous hitting function. In the drawing, the repetitive display of .

In this way, in the effect display device 1600 according to this example, when the "timing tAc2-B2", which is the timing at which the content of the effect is advanced, is reached, FIGS. As shown in (f), the mode of the situation suggestive display JA3 changes from "mode JA3a" to "mode JA3b", and the mode of the repeated hitting display HA3 also changes from "mode HA3a" to "mode HA3b". It will happen. After that, while the automatic repeated hitting function is activated (timings tAc2-B2 to tAc2-B3), while the situation suggestive display JA3 is displayed in the "mode JA3b", the repeated hitting display HA3 is changed to the "mode HA3b".

In this example, the form of the continuous hitting display HA3 is changed according to the progress of the effect, but it may not be changed according to the progress of the effect. That is, even if the continuous-hit display HA3 is continued to be executed in one mode regardless of the progress of the performance content, the player can confirm that the automatic continuous-hit function is activated through the continuous-hit display HA3. It is possible to confirm that the player is in a situation where the player is in a state where the player is in a state where the player is in a state where the operation is being accepted (frequency).

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation is accepted once for the "3A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the 3A acceptance permitted state, the above " In addition to the 3A post-acceptance display, the first post-acceptance output sound can be output as the 3A post-acceptance output sound, as shown in FIG. 152(g). In addition to the first post-reception output sound SA3 functioning as a sound effect corresponding to the "moving image display for one time" as such a "3A post-reception output sound", as shown in FIG. 152(h), In addition, as described above, the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 can be output to suggest that the effect content corresponding to the 3A acceptability state has progressed.

Therefore, in the period from timing tAc2-B1 to timing tAc2-B3 according to the example shown in FIG. Then, based on the acceptance of the operation (development of the effect) at the timing tAc2-B2, the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 is started in the mode SB3b-1. As a result, the player can recognize that the content of the effect has progressed through the output mode of the post-reception output sound. It is desirable to set the output time of the second post-reception output sound SB3 to be longer than the output time of the first post-reception output sound SA3 corresponding to one operation reception.

However, in this production example, the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 that functions as a sound effect corresponding to the "one-time moving image display" is output in the same manner before and after the production content progresses. It is supposed to be realized as Therefore, when the timing tAc2-B2, which is the timing at which the contents of the effect are advanced, is reached, the output of the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 as a new "sound effect" is started based on the acceptance of the operation. However, the mode is the same as when the operation is accepted before the timing tAc2-B2 (the execution is the same whether or not the production progress occurs at the timing tAc2-B2). are the same).

That is, in this case, for the entire period from timing tAc2-B1 to timing tAc2-B3 at which the so-called automatic repeated hitting function is activated, the effect sound (output after the first acceptance The sound SA3) is newly output in the same manner at regular time intervals by the automatic continuous hitting function. is expressed as Note that the output mode of the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a during this period is the same as the case of the above-described "period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2", so a description thereof will be omitted here. and

In this example, the mode of the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a is not changed according to the progress of the content of the presentation, but it may be changed according to the progress of the content of the presentation.

However, even in a situation where the continuous-hit display HA3b is executed by such an automatic continuous-hit function (period from timing tAc2-B2 to timing tAc2-B3), as shown in FIG. As the display HA3b, "mode of ally character YS-A3 attacking injured enemy character BOSS-A3 with high-strength thunder-based magic" appears repeatedly at regular intervals. JA3" may become difficult to see or become inconspicuous, making it difficult to recognize the operation status in the 3A acceptance permitted state (this configuration is not essential).

In this regard, the examples of effects shown in FIGS. 152 and 154 are designed to allow the player to more positively confirm the state of the operation in the 3A acceptance allowable state. It is assumed that the is interrupted again and the auto repeated hit function is disabled.

Here, as described above, in the 3A reception allowable state, the operation state of the 3A operation unit is interrupted (in a non-operated state) while the 3A reception allowable state is continued, and the auto repeated hitting function is activated. Even if it is invalidated, the continuous hitting display HA3 which has been in the execution state until then will not be turned off. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 152(f) and 154(g), even if the operating state of the 3A operating unit is temporarily interrupted at timing tAc2-B3, the continuous-hit display HA3b is displayed after timing tAc2-B3. Also (even after the 3A operation unit is in the non-operating state), for example, the above-mentioned "one-time moving image display" that has been in the execution state is executed for a predetermined display time and is displayed. , or the execution state is continued only for a predetermined time from the non-operating state.

Also, as in the case of the continuous-hit display HA3a, if the operation of the 3A operation unit is interrupted while the continuous-hit display HA3b is being displayed and this is put into the non-operating state, it is put into the non-operating state. The time until the continuous hitting display HA3b is turned off is not set as a fixed time but is indefinite.

Also, as described above, in the 3A accepting allowable state, the operation state of the 3A operating unit is interrupted (in a non-operating state) while the 3A accepting allowable state continues, and the auto repeated hitting function is disabled. Even if it is turned on, the first post-receipt output sound SA3a which has been in the output state until then will not be put in the non-output state with this as a trigger. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 152(g) and the like, even if the operating state of the 3A operation unit is temporarily interrupted at timing tAc2-B3, the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a continues to be output after timing tAc2-B3 ( Even after the 3A operation unit is in the non-operating state), the "sound effect corresponding to the moving image display for one time" that was in the execution state is executed for the predetermined output time until the output is completed. The output state is continued for a predetermined period of time from the non-operating state.

However, at timing tAc2-B3 shown in FIG. 152, while the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 started to be output at timing tAc2-B2 continues to be output, the operation state of the 3A operation unit is changed. It is assumed that it is interrupted.

In this regard, in the 3A acceptance allowable state, the operating state of the 3A operating section is interrupted (into the non-operating state) for the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 as well as for the first post-acceptance output sound SA3. ), the output state is not terminated (made inaudible). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 152(h) and the like, even if the operation state of the 3A operation unit is once interrupted at timing tAc2-B3, the second post-acceptance output sound SB3b-1 is not output after timing tAc2-B3. Also (after the 3A operation unit is in the non-operating state), it is executed for the predetermined output time until the output is completed, or for the predetermined time from the non-operating state. The output state will continue.

Further, in this example, if the operation of the 3A operation unit is interrupted while the output sound SA3 after the first reception is being output and the 3A operation unit is put into the non-operation state, the first reception is performed after the operation is put into the non-operation state. The time until the post-output sound SA3a is put into a non-output state is not set as a fixed time, but is set to be indefinite. Similarly, with respect to the second post-reception output sound SB3, if the operation of the 3A operation unit is interrupted while the second post-reception output sound SB3 is being output and this is put into a non-operating state, The time from when the operation state is set to when the second post-reception output sound SB3 is set to the non-output state is not set as a fixed time, but is set to be indefinite.

According to such a configuration, how much time elapses from the time when the operation state of the 3A operation unit is temporarily interrupted (in a non-operation state) and the automatic repeated hitting function is disabled, before the first It predicts whether the second post-acceptance output sound SA3 and the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 will be inaudible, that is, whether it will be possible to more reliably confirm that the automatic continuous tapping function has been disabled. it gets harder. This means that it is difficult to predict how much time will be consumed remaining in the 3A acceptance allowable state. It will be expected that a sense of tension will be suitably given to it.

Further, in the 3A reception allowable state according to this embodiment, when the operation state of the 3A operation unit is interrupted (non 152(f), (g), etc., the timing at which the continuous hitting display HA3b is turned off and the first post-receipt output sound SA3a are displayed. The timing to be set to the non-output state is different from each other. In the figure, the timing at which the repeated hitting display HA3b is turned off is before the timing at which the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a is turned off. You can set it so that Alternatively, due to the above-mentioned property that the time until the non-display or non-output state is set is indefinite, the timing at which the repeated hitting display HA3b is set to the non-display state is the same as when the first post-reception output sound SA3a is non-display. There may be both a case before the timing of the output state and a case after the timing. Also, the timing may be the same. Note that the relationship between the continuous-hit display HA3b and the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a is determined between the continuous-hit display HA3b and the second post-acceptance output sound SB3, and the relationship between the continuous-hit display HA3b and the second post-acceptance output sound SA3a. and the second post-acceptance output sound SB3, and the same can be said for other examples.

According to such a configuration, in the 3A acceptance allowable state according to this embodiment, the continuous hitting display HA3b, the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a, and the second post-acceptance output sound SB3b-1 are each in the execution state. 152 (f), (g), (h) and FIG. 154 (g) , etc., while the 3A operation unit is in the non-operating state, the repeated hitting display HA3b continues to be displayed, and the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a continues to be output. and the second post-acceptance output sound SB3b-1 continues to be output. However, after this, as shown in FIG. 152(f), FIG. The continued continuous hitting display HA3b is turned off. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the automatic continuous hit function is disabled, and the player character YS-A3, the enemy character BOSS-A3, and the gauge image can be displayed. It becomes possible to easily recognize the aspect of the situation suggestive display JA3 (here, the aspect JA3b in which the contents of the production have progressed), such as HP-A3, which suggests the operation situation (see FIG. 154(h)).

In addition, originally, the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a and the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 are also generated after the lapse of time since the 3A operation unit is put in the non-operating state (time lapse from timing tAc2-B3). ) terminates (makes inaudible) any continued output states.

However, in this example, as shown in FIG. 152(a), it is after the timing tAc2-B3 when the 3A operation unit is put into the non-operating state, and the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a and the second post-acceptance output sound SA3a At the timing tAc2-C1 (the rendering situation shown in FIG. 154(i)) when all the output sounds SB3 are in an audible state (before the output state is terminated), the 3A operation section is again put into the operation state. Assuming the case.

In this example, even if the "3A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is put into the operation state again at the timing tAc2-C1 in the 3A acceptance allowable state and the operation is accepted, the timing tAc2- As in the case of B1, with this as a trigger, as shown in FIGS. 152(f) and 152(g), the "3A post-acceptance change (3A post-acceptance effect)" corresponding to the acceptance of the operation is caused again. This is the case (the effect situation shown in FIG. 154(i)).

More specifically, at the timing tAc2-C1 within the 3A acceptance allowable state, when an operation is accepted for the "3A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)", FIG. As shown in (g), as a post-3A reception change, "first post-reception output sound SA3 (one video Sound effect corresponding to the display)" is audibly output again, and "3A post-acceptance display (1-time video display)" corresponding to the acceptance of operation on the "3A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is displayed. starts to appear again.

In this example, at timing tAc2-C1 within the 3A acceptability state, when the operation of the 3A operation unit is started again, the effect contents corresponding to the 3A acceptability state are shown in FIG. 154(h). It assumes the case where it does not progress from the mode (development mode of the first stage). Therefore, the situation shown in FIG. 154(i) is the same as when the post-receipt change of 3A starts to be executed for the first time based on the reception of the operation to the 3A operation unit at the timing tAc-B2. Execution of the 3A post-reception change (3A post-reception display, 3A post-reception output sound, etc.) is started. The details of the presentation are as described above, so the explanation is omitted here.

However, as described above, in this example, the first post-reception output sound SA3 and the second post-reception output sound SB3 are both audible at the timing tAc2-C1 at which the operation on the 3A operation unit is restarted. It is assumed that it will arrive in the middle of the day.

In this regard, regarding the first post-acceptance output sound SA3, the output state up to that point is ended based on the fact that the operation of the 3A operation unit is restarted (that the operation is accepted) at timing tAc2-C1. At the same time, a new output is started when the new operation is accepted. On the other hand, the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 is changed in some way based on the fact that the operation of the 3A operation unit is restarted (that the operation is accepted) at the timing tAc2-C1. , the output state up to that point is continued.

According to such a configuration, in the 3A acceptance allowable state, while the 3A post-acceptance output sound corresponding to the operation acceptance is being output, the 3A operation unit that has been in the non-operating state until then is output. When the operation is accepted, both the case where the 3A post-acceptance output sound is ended (first post-acceptance output sound SA3) and the case where it is not ended (second post-acceptance output sound SB3) are triggered by this as a trigger. Therefore, it is possible to preferably provide a sense of tension when the 3A operating portion, which has been in the non-operating state, is brought into the operating state again.

It should be noted that the repeated hitting display HA3 may also continue to be displayed at the timing tAc2-C1. In this case, with respect to the continuous-hit display HA3, when an operation is accepted for the 3A operation unit that has been in a non-operating state until then, the previous "single-time moving image display" that was in the middle of execution is displayed. It is desirable to end the process halfway and start a new display (a moving image display for one time) triggered by the reception of the new operation in a form that replaces this.

152 and 154, the player's operation (operation state of the 3A operation section) started at timing tAc2-C1 is continued until timing tAc3 when the 3A acceptance allowable state ends. It is assumed that the operation state is maintained and the auto repeated hit function is activated.

Therefore, even during the "period from timing tAc2-C1 to timing tAc3 (the period in which the 3A operation unit is maintained in the operated state again)", the operation acceptance for the 3A operation unit is performed multiple times by the auto repeated pressing function, and the Each time, post-acceptance changes corresponding to the operation acceptance (for example, post-acceptance display, post-acceptance output sound, post-acceptance light emission, post-acceptance accessory operation, etc.) are executed.

Also during the "period from timing tAc2-C1 to timing tAc3 (the period during which the 3A operation unit is maintained in the operating state again)", such post-receipt changes are executed multiple times by the auto repeat function. With respect to the aspect of time (the aspect of the continuous hitting display HA3b, the first post-accepting output sound SA3a, etc.), unless further development of the effect content occurs, the above-mentioned “from timing tAc2-B2 to timing tAc2-B3” period” (see FIG. 154(f)). The details of the presentation are as described above, so the explanation is omitted here.

However, in the period from timing tAc2-C1 to timing tAc3 according to the example shown in FIG. (result of judgment, etc.), it is assumed that the production content corresponding to the 3A acceptance acceptable state has further progressed (the second stage progress has been made) (see FIG. 154 (j) production situation shown). In particular, at timing tAc2-C2 according to this example, it is assumed that the effect progresses to the final stage of the effect contents corresponding to the 3A reception acceptable state.

In this regard, the 3A acceptance acceptance state is different from the above-mentioned 1A acceptance acceptance state and 2A acceptance acceptance state, and progresses to the final stage of the production contents corresponding to the 3A acceptance acceptance state. 152(a), (152(a), ( e) and FIG. 154(j), etc.).

Therefore, during the period from timing tAc2-C1 to timing tAc2-C2 according to the example shown in FIG. 154(i)), in contrast, during the period from timing tAc2-C2 to timing tAc3, the state in which acceptance of operations on the 3A operation unit is permitted continues. Originally, the "3A post-acceptance change (3A post-acceptance effect)" will be executed in a mode in which the content of the effect has progressed further (the effect mode of the final stage) (see FIG. 154(j)). .

More specifically, at timing tAc2-C2, as shown in FIGS. 152(e) and 154(j), based on the reception of the operation to the 3A operation section, a situation suggesting display JA3 suggesting the operation situation is displayed. is changed from "mode JA3b" that has appeared so far to "mode JA3c" that is different from this. Here, as shown in FIG. 154(j), the enemy character BOSS-A3 is changed to be defeated, and the thunder magic by the ally character YS-A3 explodes around the enemy character BOSS-A3. The gauge image HP-A3 is changed to a mode (here, "0") in which the remaining HP gauge is further reduced. According to such a configuration, through the change in the mode of the situation suggestive display JA3, the effect content corresponding to the 3A reception allowable state is changed to the reception of the operation (by the automatic continuous hitting function) performed at the timing tAc2-C2. Based on the result of the production judgment), it will be suggested that progress has been made.

As described above, the "mode JA3c" as the situation suggestive display JA3 corresponds to the "final stage effect mode" among the effect contents corresponding to the 3A acceptance allowable state.

After the content of the effect has been further developed in this way, when the 3A operation unit is operated once, the "3A post-reception display" will be displayed as shown in FIG. 154(j). , "The ally character YS-A3 defeats the enemy character BOSS-A3 using lightning-based magic with increased strength." will be displayed.

In this production example, after the production content has progressed further, as long as the 3A acceptability state continues, the progress level of the production content will not return to the level prior to progress. Therefore, even when an operation is accepted again for the 3A operation unit after the end of the moving image display for one time in which the content of the effect has been changed to the further developed content, the operation is accepted for the 3A operation unit. The mode of time (here, the mode in which the ally character YS-A3 defeats the enemy character BOSS-A3 using thunder-based magic whose strength has increased further) is changed to the more advanced production content for one time. Appears as a video display.

That is, in this case, in the period from the timing tAc2-C1 to the timing tAc3 when the so-called automatic repeated hitting function is activated, in the period after the timing tAc2-C2 when the production content progresses, the "one-shot animation Display" will be reproduced multiple times as many times as the number of times that the operation has been accepted by the auto repeated hitting function.

Also, in the period after timing tAc2-C2 as well, the form (one-time animation display) in which the ally character YS-A3 destroys the enemy character BOSS-A3 using lightning-based magic with an even higher strength is , the execution is newly started every fixed time (predetermined time) as a change after the reception. Therefore, the above-mentioned "single motion picture display" in which the content of the effect has progressed further is also newly started at regular time intervals by the automatic continuous hitting function. ' is expressed as 'continuous hit display HA3c' in the drawing.

Thus, in the effect display device 1600 according to this example, when the "timing tAc2-C2", which is the timing at which the content of the effect is further developed, is reached, FIGS. , (j), the mode of the situation suggestive display JA3 changes from "mode JA3b" to "mode JA3c", and the mode of the repeated hitting display HA3 also changes from "mode HA3b" to "mode HA3c". It will be done. Thereafter, while the automatic repeated hitting function is activated (timing tAc2-C2 to tAc3), while the situation suggesting display JA3 is displayed in the "mode JA3c", the continuous hitting display HA3 is displayed in the "mode HA3c". will be executed with

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation is accepted once for the "3A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the 3A acceptance permitted state, the above " In addition to the 3A post-acceptance display, the first post-acceptance output sound can be output as the 3A post-acceptance output sound, as shown in FIG. 152(g). In addition to the first post-reception output sound SA3 functioning as a sound effect corresponding to the "moving image display for one time" as such a "3A post-reception output sound", as shown in FIG. 152(h), In addition, as described above, the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 can be output to suggest that the effect content corresponding to the 3A acceptability state has progressed.

Therefore, in the period from timing tAc2-C1 to timing tAc3 according to the example shown in FIG. Based on the acceptance of the operation (development of the effect) at the timing tAc2-C2, the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 is started in the mode SB3b-2. As a result, the player can recognize that the content of the effect has progressed through the output mode of the post-reception output sound.

However, in this production example, the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 that functions as a sound effect corresponding to the "one-time moving image display" is output in the same manner before and after the production content progresses. It is supposed to be realized as Therefore, when the timing tAc2-C2, which is the timing at which the contents of the effect are advanced, is reached, the output of the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 as a new "sound effect" is started based on the acceptance of the operation. However, the mode is the same as when the operation is accepted before the timing tAc2-C2 (the execution is the same whether or not the production progress occurs at the timing tAc2-C2). are the same).

That is, in this case, the effect sound corresponding to the above-mentioned "one-time moving image display" (the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 ) is newly started to be output in the same manner at regular time intervals by the auto repeated hitting function, and such repeated output of "sound effect" is referred to as "first post-acceptance output sound SA3a" in the figure. I am trying to express. Note that the output mode of the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a during this period is the same as the case of the above-described "period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2", so a description thereof will be omitted here. and

In this regard, in the example effects shown in FIGS. 152 and 154, timing tAc3 arrives while the automatic repeated hitting function activated at timing tAc2-C1 is continued, and the 3rd A acceptability state ends. It assumes the case.

That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 152(e) to 152(h), in the 3A-th reception acceptable state, the situation suggesting display JA3 and the repeated hitting display HA3 are displayed, and the first post-reception output sound SA3 is displayed. And the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 is being output.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 152(e) and 154(k), the situation-suggestive display JA3 is hidden when the 3A reception acceptance state ends. ing. In the examples shown in FIGS. 152(e) and 154(k), the non-display state is set at the timing when the 3A acceptance permitted state ends, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the termination of the 3A accepting allowable state is used as a trigger to turn off the display after a certain period of time (time greater than 0 seconds) has elapsed from the termination timing tAc3, Even when the performance progresses just before the end of the 3A acceptance allowable state, the time for confirming it can be suitably secured. In this case, it is desirable that the timing at which the situation suggesting display JA3 is hidden is always later than the timing at which the continuous hitting display HA3, which will be described later, is hidden.

In addition, unlike the 1st A acceptable state (continuous hits display HA1) and the 2nd A acceptable state (continuous hits display HA2), the 3rd A acceptable state is terminated. As a result, it is not hidden. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 152(f) and 154(k), the continuous-hit display HA3b was in the execution state even after the timing tAc3 (even after the 3rd A acceptance allowable state ended). The execution state is continued until the above-mentioned "moving image display for one time" is executed for a predetermined display time until the display is finished, or for a predetermined time from the non-operating state. Become.

In addition, if the 3rd A acceptance allowable state is terminated while the continuous hitting display HA3 is displayed, the 1st A acceptance acceptable state (continuous hitting display HA1) or the 2A acceptance acceptable state (continuous hitting display HA2 ), the time from the end of the 3A acceptability state to the non-display of the continuous hitting display HA3 is not set as a fixed time, but is indefinite. ing.

Regarding the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a, unlike the 1A reception allowable state (continuous hit display HA1) and the 2A reception allowable state (continuous hit display HA2), the 3A reception allowable state is not set to a non-output state when the is terminated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 152(g) and the like, the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a remains in the output state after timing tAc3 (even after the 3A acceptance allowable state is ended). The output state continues for a predetermined period of time from the non-operating state until the "sound effect corresponding to the video display for each batch" is executed for a predetermined output time and is completely output. It will happen.

As for the second post-acceptance output sound SB3, the 3A acceptability state is the same as in the case of the 1A acceptability state (continuous hitting display HA1) and the 2A acceptability state (continuous hitting indication HA2). It is designed not to be put into a non-output state with the termination as a trigger. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 152(h) and the like, the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 is output for a predetermined output time even after timing tAc3 (even after the 3A acceptance allowable state is ended). The output state is continued until it is executed and the output is completed, or for a predetermined time from the non-operating state.

Further, in this example, when the 3A acceptance acceptable state is terminated while the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 is being output, the first after-acceptance output sound SA3a is output from the termination of the 3A acceptance acceptable state. is set to the non-output state is not set as a fixed time but is indefinite. Similarly, with respect to the second post-reception output sound SB3, if the 3A reception allowable state ends while the second post-reception output sound SB3 is being output, the 3A reception allowable state ends. The time from when the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a is set to the non-output state is not set as a fixed time, but is indefinite.

In addition, in the 3A reception allowable state according to this embodiment, even if the 3A reception allowable state ends while the continuous hitting display HA3 and the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a are both in the execution state, FIG. As shown in 152(f), (g), etc., the timing at which the continuous hitting display HA3 is turned off and the timing at which the first post-receipt output sound SA3a is turned off correspond to each other. doing it differently. In the figure, the timing at which the repeated hitting display HA3 is turned off is before the timing at which the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a is turned off. You can set it so that Alternatively, due to the above-mentioned property that the time until the non-display or non-output state is set is indefinite, the timing at which the repeated hitting display HA3 is set to the non-display state is the time when the first post-reception output sound SA3a is non-display. There may be both a case before the timing of the output state and a case after the timing. Also, the timing may be the same. It should be noted that the relationship between the continuous-hit display HA3 and the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a is not limited to the relationship between the continuous-hit display HA3 and the second post-acceptance output sound SB3, or the relationship between the continuous-stroke indication HA3 and the second post-acceptance output sound SA3a and the second post-acceptance output sound SB3, and the same can be said for other examples.

According to such a configuration, in the 3A acceptance permitted state according to the present embodiment, the repeated hitting display HA3c, the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a, and the second post-acceptance output sound SB3b-2 are each in the execution state. 152 (f), (g), (h) and FIG. 154 (k) , the continuous hitting display HA3c continues to be displayed, the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a continues to be output, and the second post-acceptance output sound SB3b-2 is output. A situation that continues the state will appear. However, after this, the continued continuous hitting display HA3b is turned off due to the passage of time (elapsed time from timing tAc3) after the end of the 3A acceptance allowable state, and the first post-acceptance output is displayed. The sound SA3a and the second post-acceptance output sound SB3b-2 are put into a non-output state.

In this example, it is assumed that timing tAc2-C2 arrives after the second post-acceptance output sound SB3b-1, which started to be output at timing tAc2-B2, becomes inaudible. The post-acceptance output sound SB3b-1 may arrive while it is being audibly output. In this case, the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 changes from "mode SB3b-1" to "mode SB3b-2" at timing tAc2-C2 (ends mode SB3b-1). , form SB3b-2) may be output instead.

In addition, the 3A acceptability state occurs as an acceptability state in which the automatic button function described above is not activated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 153, when the operation of the 3A operation unit is not accepted until the timing tAc3 arrives in the 3A acceptance permitted state, the 3A acceptance is permitted based on the arrival of the timing tAc3. The state is simply ended, and the execution of the 3A post-receipt change that appears when an operation is performed on the 3A operation unit is not started.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of generating a "4th A reception permitted state" as the reception permitted period (operation permitted state). FIG. 155 is a time chart showing an example of the effect content when the "4th A reception acceptable state" occurs based on the satisfaction of the "condition 4A" as the occurrence condition and the player performs an operation. is. FIG. 156 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the "4th A acceptance permitted state" occurs and the player does not perform any operation. FIG. 157 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the "4th A acceptance permitted state" occurs.

Now, assuming that the starting condition is established (suspended digestion) and the "4th A variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first selects the "4th A variation pattern". The corresponding effect determination (notice effect determination, etc.) is performed. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (effect depiction according to the 4th A variable pattern, sound output of BGM reproduction according to the 4th A variable pattern (normal BGM reproduction at non-reach time, etc.), etc.) is started, Within the execution period of the variable performance, the performance (forecast performance) corresponding to the result of the determination of the preliminary performance is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "4th A variation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 155(c), within the execution period of the variation performance related to the "4th A variation pattern", timing tAd2 has arrived after the 4th A time has passed since the variation performance of the decorative symbol SZ was started. (Based on the fact that "condition 4A" is satisfied), "change after reception of 4th A (4th A production situation suggestive display JA4, 4th A single-shot display TA4, 4th A post-reception output sound SA4, SB4, etc. ) can occur (situation shown in FIG. 157(a)).

Here, in the 4A acceptance allowable state according to this embodiment, the "4A operation unit" that allows operation acceptance is set as the operation button 410, and the 4A acceptance allowable state is terminated. It is permissible to accept the operation multiple times before.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, as shown in FIGS. a model image display MG-A4 that simulates the "operation button 410" as the 4A operation unit), a message display MA4 related to the operation of the operation target (here, the "operation button 410" as the 4A operation unit), A situation suggesting display JA4 suggesting an operation situation is displayed when a timing tAd1 before the occurrence of the 4th A acceptance allowable state (before the acceptance of an operation on the 4th A operation unit is allowed) has arrived. It is supposed to

However, the model image display MG-A4, the message display MA4, and the situation suggestive display JA4 may not necessarily be displayed before the occurrence of the 4A Acceptable State. It may be displayed at the same time as it occurs, or in a manner slightly delayed from its occurrence. However, in this example, in particular, it is desirable that the situation suggesting display JA4 is displayed before the first acceptance of operation on the 4A operation unit in the 4A acceptance allowed state. Also, the timing at which the model image display MG-A4 is displayed and the timing at which the message display MA4 is displayed may be different from each other. For example, the message display MA4 may be displayed before the model image display MG-A4 is displayed.

Regarding the model image display MG-A4, the message display MA4, and the situation suggestive display JA4, after the display is started, regardless of the operation state of the 4A operation unit, at least until the 4A acceptance allowable state ends The interval is displayed continuously.

Here, the "model image display MG-A4" corresponding to the 4A reception permitted state uses only the "first color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on white)" as its color scheme.

In addition, in the ``simulated image display MG-A4'' corresponding to the 4A acceptance allowable state, the part that imitates the ``operation receiving part'' to be operated is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144 (α). 144 (β) to (σ) are sequentially displayed in each of the modes shown in Fig. 144 ," is regarded as one periodic change, the periodic change is repeated in a form requiring a predetermined period of 5A time. It will appear. However, this cycle 5A time is set as a time (long cycle) longer than the cycle 1A time that appears in the 1A acceptance allowable state, and for example, it may be set as the same time as the cycle 2A time. Therefore, in the 4A reception allowable state, the "operation receiving section" is depicted as slowly moving up and down within its movable range.

As shown in FIG. 156(b), the 4A acceptance allowable state continues until the timing tAd3 when there is no operation acceptance for the 4A operation unit, and is based on the arrival of the timing tAd3. is terminated. Therefore, while the 4A acceptance allowable state continues, a gauge image (in this example, in the model image display MG-A4 image) is depicted to decrease over time, but this depiction may not necessarily be performed.

In addition, when the "simulated image display MG-A4" corresponding to the 4th A reception acceptable state is started to be displayed before the timing tAd2 at which the 4th A reception acceptable state occurs, the periodic change and the change in the gauge image is preferably started after waiting for the timing tAd2. In other words, in this case, the "simulated image display MG-A4" corresponding to the 4A acceptance allowable state is displayed while maintaining the form shown in FIG. 144(α) until timing tAd2 arrives. becomes.

In addition, in the 4A reception permission state according to this example, as shown in FIGS. , operation button 410) is displayed (here, message display MA4 displayed as "Defeat the demon! Button 'Consecutive hits'!!").

In addition, in the 4A acceptance allowable state according to this example, as shown in FIGS. 155(e) and 157(a), as a situation suggestion display JA4 suggesting the operation situation in the 4A acceptability state, A friendly character (here, friendly character YS-A4) corresponding to the type of the 4A acceptance acceptable state, and an enemy character (here, an enemy depicted as a demon) corresponding to the type of the 4A acceptance acceptable state A character BOSS-A4) and a gauge image HP-A4 showing its remaining HP gauge are displayed. In the 4A acceptance allowable state, "whether or not the ally character YS-A4 can defeat the enemy character BOSS-A4 by accepting operations on the 4A operation unit a plurality of times (set the gauge image HP-A4 to 0 (whether or not it can be done)", it can be suggested whether the expectation that a big hit is obtained is high or low. On the other hand, each time an operation (operation acceptance) is performed, an effect can be executed such that the "friend character YS-A4" attacks the "enemy character BOSS-A4". In this example, the ally character YS-A4, the enemy character BOSS-A4, and the gauge image HP-A4 are displayed as the situation suggestive display JA4, but not all of these displays are necessarily displayed. However, if at least one of the ally character YS-A4, the enemy character BOSS-A4, and the gauge image HP-A4 is displayed, it is possible to suggest the operation status.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 155, at the timing tAd2-A1 in the 4A acceptance allowable state (the production situation shown in FIG. On the other hand, it is assumed that the first operation is accepted.

In this example, when the first operation is accepted for the "4A operation unit (in this case, operation button 410)" at timing tAd2-A1 within the 4A acceptance allowable state, FIG. As shown in (g) and (h), "change after reception of 4A (effect after reception of 4A)" corresponding to the reception of the operation is caused (effect situation shown in FIG. 157(b) ).

More specifically, at timing tAd2-A1 in the 4A acceptance allowable state, when an operation is accepted for the "4A operation unit (here, operation button 410)", As shown in (g), as a post-4A reception change, a "post-4A reception output sound" is audibly output in response to the reception of operation on the "4A operation unit (here, operation button 410)". , "4A post-acceptance display" corresponding to the acceptance of operation on the "4A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" starts to be displayed.

That is, when the "4A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" is operated once in the 4A acceptance allowable state, the above "4A post-acceptance display" is displayed as shown in FIG. 157(b). As shown, one animation display is displayed in a manner in which "friend character YS-A4" attacks "enemy character BOSS-A4" with wind magic (smoke effect, generation of wind magic, etc.). It has become so. However, as will be described later, in the 4A acceptability state, each time an operation is accepted, the "enemy character BOSS-A4" will be injured, the strength of the wind magic will increase, and the remaining HP gauge of the gauge image HP-A4 will be displayed. is decreasing (the content of the production is progressing). When the content of the production progresses in this way, the state when the operation is accepted for the 4A operation unit (here, "friend character YS-A4" is wind magic and "enemy character BOSS-A4" mode of attacking) will appear as a single animation display that has changed to the content of the advanced production (FIGS. 155(e), (f) and FIGS. 157(d), (f), (h) etc.).

However, although this will also be described later, the 4th A acceptance acceptable state according to this example is similar to the above-described third acceptance acceptable state (before the timing tAd3 at which the 4th A acceptance acceptable state ends due to the passage of time). It occurs as a valid period of a type that does not cause early termination triggered by operation acceptance. That is, in this case, during the validity period of such a type (4A acceptance acceptable state), every time an operation is accepted, the content of the effect corresponding to the 4A acceptance acceptable state must be changed (progressed). If there is, the processing when the content of the effect progresses to the final mode becomes a problem.

In this regard, in the above-described 3A acceptance acceptable state, when an operation is further accepted in a situation where the effect content corresponding to the 3A acceptance acceptable state has progressed to the final mode, each time the operation is accepted, the final It was decided to repeatedly cause changes after acceptance according to the aspect. On the other hand, in the 4A reception acceptable state according to this example, when the operation reception is further performed in a situation where the effect content corresponding to the 4A reception acceptable state has progressed to the final mode, the operation reception is triggered. (predetermined performance mode) appears, and the performance is restarted from the situation in which the first performance mode (predetermined performance mode) appears. The first effect mode (predetermined effect mode) may be a mode that appears when the 3A reception allowable state occurs, or the first operation reception is performed after the 3A reception allowable state occurs. It may also refer to a mode that appears based on the event. According to such a configuration, even after the content of the presentation has progressed to the final mode, it is possible to repeatedly enjoy the progress of the presentation from the first presentation mode to the final mode. It may be suggested that the possibility (expectation) of getting a big hit is high every time the content of the performance progresses. In this case, when the big hit is not obtained, the first production mode (predetermined production mode) is caused to appear at the stage before progressing to the final mode with the operation reception as a trigger, and the first production mode (predetermined The production mode) is to be redone from the situation where the production mode) is appearing.

Further, in this example, when an operation is accepted once for the "4A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the 4A acceptance allowable state, the above "4A post-acceptance display" is displayed. As the "fourth A post-reception output sound", as shown in FIG. 155(g), the first post-reception output sound SA4 can be output. It should be noted that the first post-reception output sound SA4 according to this example appears as the above-mentioned "4th A post-reception display", "a form in which the friendly character YS-A4 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A4 with wind-based magic (smoke effects, generation of wind magic, etc.). At this time, as will be described later, there is a possibility that the second post-reception output sound SB4 is further output as the "4A post-reception output sound". The second post-acceptance output sound SB4 according to this example is output when the effect content of the above-mentioned "4A post-acceptance display" progresses. Here, the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 is implemented as a sound effect corresponding to the post-acceptance display, but it may not necessarily function as a sound effect. Anything that can suggest that an operation has been accepted by the player may be used.

In this way, in the 4A acceptance allowable state, the ``friend character YS-A4'' changes to the ``enemy character BOSS-A4'' each time the ``4A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)'' is operated. In other words, the HP of the “enemy character BOSS-A4” decreases due to multiple attacks by the “ally character YS-A4” (as the production progresses, As a result, when the HP becomes 0, it means that the "enemy character BOSS-A4" has been defeated. However, in this case, if the HP does not become 0 even after performing multiple attacks, and the "enemy character BOSS-A4" cannot be defeated, it is suggested that the degree of expectation is low.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 155(a), it is assumed that the player's operation (operation state of the 4th A operation unit) started at timing tAd2-A1 continues until timing tAd2-A2. It has become a thing.

However, unlike the 1A reception permission state, the 2A reception permission state, the 3A reception permission state, etc., the 4A reception permission state is different from the 1A reception permission state, the 2A reception permission state, and the 3A reception permission state. A type that does not perform multiple post-reception changes (for example, post-reception display, post-reception output sound, post-reception light emission, post-reception accessory movement, etc.) It is classified as "operation valid state". Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 155(a), during the period from the timing tAd2-A1 to the timing tAd2-A2 (the period during which the 4A operation unit is maintained in the operated state), the operation acceptance for the 4A operation unit is It is performed only once at timing tAd2-A1, and changes after reception for one time according to the operation reception at timing tAd2-A1 (for example, post-reception display, post-reception output sound, post-reception light emission, post-reception role item motion, etc.) will be executed.

Therefore, in this production example, at timing tAd2-A1, as shown in FIG. 157(b), as the display after receiving the 4th A, the ally character YS-A4 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A4 with wind magic. A display (one-time video display) of a mode (smoke effect, generation of wind magic, etc.) is started.

More specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 157(b), as the display after reception of the 4th A, the enemy character BOSS-A4 is changed to a state in which it has received the first stage of damage, and the ally character YS-A4 The wind magic is displayed as a single-shot display TA4 (mode TA4a), the gauge image HP-A4 remains, and the HP gauge is reduced by one step. That is, in this case, the situation suggestive display JA4 (enemy character BOSS-A4, ally character YS-A4, gauge image HP-A4) changes from "mode JA4a" before operation to "mode JA4b". It is suggested that the performance content corresponding to the 4th A acceptance allowable state progresses based on the operation acceptance made at the timing tAd2-A1.

Further, as described above, the situation suggesting display JA4 whose mode has changed in this way is continuously displayed at least until the 4th A acceptance allowable state is terminated. , the player can easily recognize what kind of operating situation the player is currently in.

On the other hand, the one-shot display TA4 depicted as wind magic by the ally character YS-A4 is hidden after a predetermined time (fixed time) elapses. The production examples shown in FIGS. 155 and 157 are based on the assumption that the time tAd2-A2 has passed and the one-shot display TA4 (mode TA4a) is hidden. It's becoming In this example, the one-time display TA4 is displayed in different modes depending on the degree of progress of the content of the production. good too. Alternatively, in the 4A-acceptance allowable state according to this example, when an operation is accepted, the state suggestion display JA4 always changes in form, and this can suggest that the operation has been accepted. In view of this, the one-shot display TA4 may not necessarily be displayed.

Further, at timing tAd2-A1, the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 (4A post-acceptance output sound) is output so as to function as a sound effect corresponding to such a 4A post-acceptance display (attack mode). As soon as it is started, the second post-acceptance output sound SB4 (4A post-acceptance output sound) is changed to mode SB4b to suggest that the effect content corresponding to the 4A acceptance allowable state has progressed to the first stage mode. Output is started at -1.

In this regard, the second post-acceptance output sound SB4 corresponding to the 4A acceptance acceptable state is continuously output until at least the 4A acceptance acceptable state ends. As long as the 4A acceptance allowable state continues, the player can easily recognize what kind of operating situation the game is currently in through this mode. However, the output state of the second post-acceptance output sound SB4 does not necessarily have to be terminated while the 4th A reception allowable state continues. Alternatively, the output may be output for a period of time shorter than the timings tAd2 to tAd3, and then set to a non-output state.

On the other hand, the first post-reception output sound SA4 is put into a non-output state after a predetermined time (fixed time) elapses. In the example of effect shown in FIG. 155, it is assumed that the time tAd2-A2 has passed and the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 is put into a non-output state.

That is, in this case, the timing tAd2-A2 arrives while both the first post-reception output sound SA4 and the second post-reception output sound SB4 are in the output state. However, both the first post-reception output sound SA4 and the second post-reception output sound SB4 according to this example indicate that the 4A operation unit is put into the non-operating state (timing tAd2-A2 arrives). As a trigger, no change occurs.

In this example, the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 is implemented as a sound effect corresponding to the post-acceptance display. may be anything that can suggest that an operation has been accepted by the player. In addition, the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 is output in one mode (same mode) regardless of the degree of development of the content of the production, but it may be output in a different mode according to the degree of progress of the content of the production. can be Alternatively, in the 4th A acceptance acceptance state according to this example, when an operation is accepted, the second post-acceptance output sound SA4 is always output, which may suggest that the operation has been accepted. If possible, the first post-reception output sound SA4 may not necessarily be output.

Here, in the 4A acceptance allowable state, before the time required for the "one-time moving image display (single-shot display TA4)" corresponding to the operation acceptance elapses (while the single-shot display TA4 is being displayed), There may be a case where the player performs an operation to put the 4A operation unit in the non-operating state and an operation to bring it back into the operating state from the non-operating state. In this case, the above-mentioned "single-shot display TA4" is executed after the above-mentioned "fixed period of time" has elapsed at a timing before the end of the "one-time moving image display" in response to the operation reception. It will be executed in such a manner that "one time of moving image display" is started, but at this time, the new "one time of moving image display" is the previous " It is also possible to terminate the "moving image display for one time" in the middle and execute it in an alternative manner.

Similarly, in the 4A reception allowable state, before the time required for the "sound effect corresponding to the moving image display for one time (first post-reception output sound SA4)" in response to the operation reception elapses ( While the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 is being output, there are cases where the player performs an operation to put the 4A operation unit into a non-operating state and an operation from the non-operating state to an operating state again. can occur. In this case, the above-mentioned "first post-acceptance output sound SA4" is generated at a timing before the end of the "single effect sound" corresponding to the operation acceptance. After a lapse of time, a new "sound effect" is started to be executed. The previous "single sound effect" that was present may be terminated in the middle and executed in a form that replaces it.

"Situation suggestive display JA4 (see FIG. 155(e))" such as ally character YS-A4, enemy character BOSS-A4, and gauge image HP-A4 are displayed until the operation is accepted. As described above, it may be realized by appearing and displaying when the operation is accepted (until the validity period expires or for a predetermined time). is.

According to the pachinko machine 1 according to such an effect example, the effect situation shown in FIG. The presentation situation is not triggered by the fact that the 4A operation section is put into the non-operating state. Simply, the 4th A post-reception display and the 4th A post-reception output sound (situation suggestive display JA4, single-shot display TA4, first post-reception output sound SA4, second post-reception output sound SB4 ), the execution state continues if the conditions for terminating the execution state have not been met even at the time when the timing tAd2-A2 arrives (situation suggestive display JA4, first post-acceptance output sound SA4, second post-acceptance output sound SB4), if the condition for terminating the execution state is satisfied before timing tAd2-A2 arrives, at that time (before timing tAd2-A2) It just exits the running state.

Further, in this example, if the operation of the 4th A operation unit is interrupted while the one-shot display TA4 is being displayed to put it in the non-operating state, the one-shot display TA4 is put into the non-display state after the non-operating state. The time until it is done is not set as a fixed time, but is indeterminate.

Further, in this example, if the operation of the 4A operation unit is interrupted while the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 is being output and this is put in the non-operating state, the first reception is performed after the non-operating state. The time until the post-output sound SA4 is put into a non-output state is not set as a fixed time, but is set to be indefinite.

In addition, in the 4A acceptance allowable state according to this embodiment, when the operation state of the 4A operation unit is interrupted (non-operation ), the timing at which the one-shot display TA4 is turned off and the timing at which the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 is turned off are different from each other. In this example, the relationship regarding which of the one-shot display TA4 and the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 ends first is not reversed. , is always terminated before the first post-acceptance output sound SA4.

According to such a configuration, in the 4A reception permitted state according to this embodiment, the operation state of the 4A operation unit is interrupted while the one-shot display TA4 and the first post-reception output sound SA4 are in the execution state. When the game is played (in the non-operating state), the one-shot display TA4 continues to be displayed while the 4A operating unit is in the non-operating state, and the output after the first reception is performed. A situation appears in which the sound SA4 continues to be output.

Then, in this example, as shown in FIG. 155(a), at the timing tAd2-B1 in the 4A acceptance allowable state (the production situation shown in FIG. 157(d)), the "4A operation section (here It is assumed that the operation button 410)" is put into the operation state again and this operation state continues until timing tAd2-B2.

In this example, at timing tAd2-B1 in the 4th A acceptance allowable state, when the "4th A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" is put into the operation state again and the operation is accepted, with this as a trigger, As shown in FIGS. 155(e) to 155(h), the "4A post-acceptance change (4A post-acceptance effect)" in response to the operation acceptance is caused again for the amount corresponding to one operation acceptance. (the production situation shown in FIG. 157(d)).

However, as described above, in this example, even when the operation of the 4A operation unit is started again at the timing tAd2-B1 within the 4A reception allowable state, the effect content corresponding to the 4A reception allowable state is advanced. The Rukoto. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 157(d), the change after receiving the 4th A (4th A After-acceptance display, 4th A post-acceptance output sound, etc.) are started to be executed.

Therefore, in this production example, at timing tAd2-B1, as the display after reception of the 4th A, as shown in FIG. , the mode of attacking the enemy character BOSS-A4 (smoke effect, generation of wind magic, etc.) starts to be displayed (movie display for one time).

More specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 157(d), as the display after reception of the 4th A, the enemy character BOSS-A4 is changed to a state in which it is wounded in the second stage, and the enemy character YS-A4 is injured. The wind magic is displayed as a single-shot display TA4 in the second stage mode TA4b, and the gauge image HP-A4 remains and the HP gauge is changed to a mode in which the HP gauge has decreased by two stages. That is, in this case, the situation suggestive display JA4 (enemy character BOSS-A4, ally character YS-A4, gauge image HP-A4) changes from "mode JA4b" before the re-operation to "mode JA4c". It is suggested that the effect content corresponding to the 4A acceptance allowable state progresses based on the operation acceptance performed at timing tAd2-B1.

Further, at timing tAd2-B1, the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 (4A post-acceptance output sound) is output so as to function as a sound effect corresponding to such a 4A post-acceptance display (attack mode). As soon as it is started, the second post-reception output sound SB4 (4A post-reception output sound) is changed to mode SB4b-2 in order to suggest that the effect content corresponding to the 4A reception allowable state has progressed to the second stage. Output starts with .

Here, in this production example, the timing tAd2-B1 arrives while the second post-acceptance output sound SB4 (4th A post-acceptance output sound) that started to be output at the timing tAd2-A1 is in an output state. Become. At this time, at the timing tAd2-B1, the second post-acceptance output sound SB4 (4A post-acceptance output sound) terminates the first-stage mode SB4b-1 that was in the output state and replaces it. , the output in the second stage mode SB4b-2 is started.

Further, at timing tAd2-B2, it is assumed that the operation of the 4A operation unit is interrupted while the one-shot display TA4 is being displayed and this is put into a non-operating state. At this time, as described above, the time from the non-operation state to the non-display state of the one-shot display TA4 is not set as a fixed time but is indefinite.

Then, at the timing tAd2-B2 when the 4A operation unit is put into the non-operating state again, the effect situation shown in FIG. 157(e) appears. It did not appear as a result of being forced to do so. Simply, the 4th A post-acceptance display and the 4th A post-acceptance output sound (situation indication JA4, single-shot display TA4, first post-acceptance output sound SA4, second post-acceptance output sound SB4 ) continues its execution state because the conditions for terminating its execution state have not yet been satisfied even when the timing tAd2-B2 arrives.

Also, in this example, as shown in FIG. 155(a), at the timing tAd2-C1 in the 4A acceptance allowable state (the effect situation shown in FIG. 157(f)), the "4A operation section (here It is assumed that the operation button 410)" is put into the operation state again and this operation state is continued until timing tAd2-C2.

In this example, when the "4th A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is put into the operation state and the operation is accepted at timing tAd2-C1 in the 4th A acceptance allowable state, this triggers the operation shown in FIG. As shown in 155 (e) to (h), the "4A post-acceptance change (4A post-acceptance effect)" corresponding to the operation acceptance is generated once again for the amount corresponding to one operation acceptance. This is the case (the effect situation shown in FIG. 157(f)).

However, as described above, in this example, even when the operation of the 4A operation unit is started again at the timing tAd2-C1 within the 4A acceptance allowable state, the effect content corresponding to the 4A acceptability state is advanced. The Rukoto. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 157(f), the change after receiving the 4th A (4th A After-acceptance display, 4th A post-acceptance output sound, etc.) are started to be executed.

Therefore, in this production example, at timing tAd2-C1, as the display after reception of the 4th A, as shown in FIG. , the mode of attacking the enemy character BOSS-A4 (smoke effect, generation of wind magic, etc.) starts to be displayed (movie display for one time).

More specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 157(f), as the display after reception of the 4th A, the enemy character BOSS-A4 is changed to a state in which it is wounded in the third stage, and the enemy character YS-A4 is injured. The wind magic is displayed as a single-shot display TA4 in the third stage mode TA4c, and the gauge image HP-A4 remains and the HP gauge is changed to a mode that has decreased by three stages. That is, in this case, the situation suggestive display JA4 (enemy character BOSS-A4, ally character YS-A4, gauge image HP-A4) changes from "mode JA4c" before the re-operation to "mode JA4d". It is suggested that the effect content corresponding to the 4th A acceptance allowable state progresses based on the operation acceptance performed at timing tAd2-C1.

Further, at timing tAd2-C1, the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 (4A post-acceptance output sound) is output so as to function as a sound effect corresponding to such a 4A post-acceptance display (attack mode). As soon as it is started, the second post-reception output sound SB4 (4A post-reception output sound) changes to mode SB4b-3 in order to suggest that the effect content corresponding to the 4A reception allowable state has progressed to the third stage. Output starts with .

Here, in this production example, the timing tAd2-C1 arrives while both the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 and the second post-acceptance output sound SB4 that started to be output at the timing tAd2-B1 are in an output state. It will be done. At this time, at the timing tAd2-C1, the second post-acceptance output sound SB4 (4A post-acceptance output sound) terminates the second-stage mode SB4b-2 that was in the output state and replaces it. , the output in the second stage mode SB4b-3 is started. Also, for the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 (4th A post-acceptance output sound), the sound that was in the output state is terminated, and the output is restarted from the beginning in place of this.

Then, at the timing tAd2-C2 when the 4A operation unit is put into the non-operating state again, the effect situation shown in FIG. 157(g) appears. It did not appear as a result of being forced to do so. Simply, the 4th A post-acceptance display and the 4th A post-acceptance output sound (situation indication JA4, single-shot display TA4, first post-acceptance output sound SA4, second post-acceptance output sound SB4 ), the execution state continues if the conditions for terminating the execution state have not been satisfied even at the time when the timing tAd2-C2 arrives (situation suggestive display JA4, first post-acceptance output sound SA4, second post-acceptance output sound SB4), if the condition for terminating the execution state is satisfied before timing tAd2-C2 arrives, at that time (before timing tAd2-C2) It just exits the running state.

Also, in this example, as shown in FIG. 155(a), at the timing tAd2-D1 in the 4A acceptance allowable state (effect situation shown in FIG. It is assumed that the operation button 410)" is put into the operation state again and this operation state is continued at least until timing tAd3.

In this example, when the "4th A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" is put into the operation state and the operation is accepted at the timing tAd2-D1 in the 4th A acceptance allowable state, this triggers the operation shown in FIG. As shown in 155 (e) to (h), the "4A post-acceptance change (4A post-acceptance effect)" corresponding to the operation acceptance is generated once again for the amount corresponding to one operation acceptance. This is the case (the effect situation shown in FIG. 157(h)).

However, as described above, in this example, even when the operation to the 4A operation unit is started again at the timing tAd2-D1 within the 4A reception allowable state, the effect content corresponding to the 4A reception allowable state progresses. It will be done. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 157(h), the change after receiving the 4th A (4th A After-acceptance display, 4th A post-acceptance output sound, etc.) are started to be executed.

In this production example, at timing tAd2-D1, as the display after reception of the 4th A, as shown in FIG. A mode of attacking the enemy character BOSS-A4 with magic (smoke effect, generation of wind magic, etc.) is started to be displayed (movie display for one time).

More specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 157(h), as the display after reception of the 4th A, the enemy character BOSS-A4 is changed to be defeated, and the ally character YS-A4 performs a single wind magic. The display TA4 is displayed in the final mode TA4d, and the gauge image HP-A4 is changed to the mode in which the remaining HP gauge is 0. That is, in this case, the situation suggestive display JA4 (enemy character BOSS-A4, ally character YS-A4, gauge image HP-A4) changes from "mode JA4d" before the re-operation to "mode JA4e". It is suggested that the performance content corresponding to the 4th A acceptance allowable state progresses based on the operation acceptance performed at timing tAd2-D1.

Further, at timing tAd2-D1, the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 (4A post-acceptance output sound) is output so as to function as a sound effect corresponding to such a 4A post-acceptance display (attack mode). As soon as it is started, the second post-acceptance output sound SB4 (4A post-acceptance output sound) indicates that the effect content corresponding to the 4A acceptance allowable state has progressed to the final stage (fourth stage). Output is started in mode SB4b-4.

Here, in this production example, the timing tAd2-D1 arrives while the second post-acceptance output sound SB4, which started to be output at the timing tAd2-C1, is in an output state. At this time, at the timing tAd2-D1, the second post-acceptance output sound SB4 (4A post-acceptance output sound) terminates the third-stage mode SB4b-3 that was in the output state and replaces it. , the output in mode SB4b-4 of the final stage (fourth stage) is started.

155 and 157 are the 4th A post-acceptance display and the 4th A post-acceptance output sound (situation suggestive display JA4, single-shot display TA4, first reception Of the post-acceptance output sound SA4 and the second post-acceptance output sound SB4), while the situation suggestive display JA4, the first post-acceptance output sound SA4, and the second post-acceptance output sound SB4 are in the execution state, It is assumed that the timing tAd3 at which the 4th A acceptance allowable state ends has arrived.

That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 155(e) to 155(h), the 4A reception acceptable state is such that the situation suggestive display JA4 is displayed, and the first post-reception output sound SA4 and the second reception It will be terminated while the post-output sound SB4 is being output.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 155(e) and 157(i), the situation suggestive display JA4 is changed to the form JA4e that has been in the display state until then based on the end of the 4A acceptance allowable state. is set to be hidden.

However, as shown in FIG. 155 and FIG. 157(i), regarding the situation suggestive display JA4, when the timing tAd3 arrives, the form that was in the display state until then changes to the form JA4L (advancement). Then, the mode JA4L may be displayed for a predetermined period of time even after the 4A reception acceptance state ends.

Then, for the aspect JA4L of the situation suggestive display JA4, a plurality of types (JA4La to JA4Le) are prepared as necessary to correspond to the aspects (JA4a to JA4e) of the situation suggestive display JA4 that can be displayed at timing tAd3. Then, when the timing tAd3 arrives, the aspect JA4L corresponding to the aspect displayed at that time may be selectively executed. Incidentally, in the examples shown in FIGS. 155 and 157, in response to the mode JA4e of the situation suggestive display JA displayed when the timing tAd3 arrives, the situation suggestive display is triggered by the arrival of the timing tAd3. It assumes a case where JA4 "mode JA4e" is changed (developed) to "mode JA4Le".

In the examples shown in FIGS. 155 and 157(i), the one-shot display TA4 is in a non-display state. Then, when the 4th A reception acceptance state is ended, the state is not changed to the non-display state. That is, in this case, the one-time display TA4 is displayed for a predetermined display time even after the timing tAd3 (even after the 4th A acceptance allowable state is terminated). The execution state continues until the display is completed, or for a predetermined time from the non-operation state.

In addition, when the 4th A acceptance acceptable state is terminated while the single indication TA4 is being displayed, the time from the termination of the 4th A acceptance acceptable state to the non-display state of the single indication TA4 is As for the time, it is not set as a fixed time, but is made to be indefinite.

Further, the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 is not put into a non-output state when the 4th A acceptance allowable state ends. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 155(g) and the like, the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 remains in the output state after timing tAd3 (even after the 4th A acceptance allowable state is ended). The output state continues for a predetermined period of time from the non-operating state until the "sound effect corresponding to the video display for each batch" is executed for a predetermined output time and is completely output. It will happen.

Further, the second post-acceptance output sound SB4 is not put into a non-output state when the 4th A acceptance allowable state ends. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 155(h) and the like, the second post-acceptance output sound SB4 is output only for a predetermined output time after timing tAd3 (even after the 4th A acceptance allowable state is ended). The output state is continued until it is executed and the output is completed, or for a predetermined time from the non-operating state.

Further, in this example, when the 4th A reception acceptable state is terminated while the first post-reception output sound SA4 is being output, the first post-reception output sound SA4 is output from the end of the 4A reception permitted state. is set to the non-output state is not set as a fixed time but is indefinite. Similarly, with respect to the second post-reception output sound SB4, if the 4th A reception allowable state ends while the second post-reception output sound SB4 is being output, the 4th A reception allowable state ends. The time from when the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 is set to the non-output state is not set as a fixed time, but is indefinite.

In addition, in the 4A reception allowable state according to this embodiment, even if the 4A reception allowable state ends while the one-shot display TA4 and the first post-reception output sound SA4 are in the execution state, the single-shot display The timing at which TA4 is turned off and the timing at which the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 is turned off are different from each other. In this example, the relationship regarding which of the one-shot display TA4 and the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 ends first is not reversed. , is always terminated before the first post-acceptance output sound SA4. Note that the relationship between the single-shot display TA4 and the first post-reception output sound SA4 is as follows: between the single-shot display TA4 and the second post-reception output sound SB4; 2 and the post-acceptance output sound SB4 of No. 2, and the same can be said for another example thereof.

In addition, the 4A acceptance acceptable state occurs as an acceptance acceptable state in which the automatic button function described above is not activated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 156, when the operation of the 4A operation unit is not accepted until the timing tAd3 arrives in the 4A acceptance permitted state, the 4A acceptance is permitted based on the arrival of the timing tAd3. The state is simply terminated, and the execution of the 4th A post-receipt change that appears when an operation is performed on the 4th A operation unit is not started.

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of generating the "5A reception permission state" as the reception permission period (operation permission state). FIG. 158 is a time chart showing an example of the effect content when the "5A acceptance allowable state" occurs based on the satisfaction of the "condition 5A" as the occurrence condition and the player performs an operation. is. FIG. 159 is a time chart showing an example of the contents of the effect when the "5A acceptance permitted state" occurs and the player does not perform any operation. FIG. 160 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the "5A acceptance acceptable state" occurs.

Now, assuming that the starting condition is established (suspended digestion) and the "5A variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first selects the "5A variation pattern". The corresponding production judgment (notice production judgment, etc.) is performed. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (such as effect depiction according to the 5A variable pattern, sound output of BGM reproduction according to the 5A variable pattern (normal BGM reproduction at non-reach time, etc.), etc.) is started, Within the execution period of the variable performance, the performance (forecast performance) corresponding to the result of the determination of the preliminary performance is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "5A variation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 158(c), within the execution period of the variation performance related to the "5A variation pattern", timing tAe2 has arrived after the 5A time has elapsed since the start of the variation performance of the decorative symbol SZ. (Based on the fact that "condition 5A" is satisfied), "5A change after reception (5A production situation suggestive display JA5, 5A single-shot display TA5, 5A post-reception output sound SA5, SB5, etc. ) can occur (situation shown in FIG. 160(a)).

Here, in the 5A acceptance allowable state according to this embodiment, the "5A operation unit", which is allowed to accept operations a plurality of times, is set not as the operation button 410 but as the sword decoration 5001. It is possible to accept a plurality of operations until the 5A acceptability state ends.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, as shown in FIGS. A model image display MG-A5 imitating the 5A operation section "sword decoration 5001"), and a message display MA5 related to the operation of the operation target (here, "sword decoration 5001" as the 5A operation section). and a situation suggesting display JA5 suggesting the operation situation when timing tAe1 comes before the occurrence of the 5A acceptance allowable state (before acceptance of operation on the 5A operation section is allowed). is to be displayed on the

However, the model image display MG-A5, the message display MA5, and the situation suggestive display JA5 may not necessarily be displayed before the occurrence of the 5A Acceptable State. It may be displayed at the same time as it occurs or in a manner slightly delayed from its occurrence. Also, the timing at which the model image display MG-A5 is displayed and the timing at which the message display MA5 is displayed may be different from each other. For example, the message display MA5 may be displayed before the model image display MG-A5 is displayed.

In this example, after the display of the model image display MG-A5 and the message display MA5 is started, regardless of the operation state of the 5A operation unit, at least until the 5A acceptance allowable state is terminated. is continuously displayed, but the situation suggestive display JA5 is hidden after a predetermined time has passed since it was displayed.

Here, the "model image display MG-A5" corresponding to the 5A reception acceptable state uses only the "specific color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on white)" as its color scheme.

In addition, in the ``simulated image display MG-A5'' corresponding to the 5A acceptance allowable state, the part that imitates the ``operation receiving part'' to be operated is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144 (β) to (σ) are sequentially displayed in each of the modes shown in Fig. 144 ," is regarded as one periodic change, the periodic change is repeated in a form requiring a predetermined period of 5A time. It will appear. This cycle 5A time is set as a time (long cycle) that is longer than the cycle 1A time that appears in the 1A acceptance allowable state, and may be set as the same time as the cycle 2A time, for example. Therefore, in the 5A acceptance allowable state, the "operation receiving section" is depicted as slowly moving up and down within its movable range.

However, as described above, in the 5A acceptance permitted state, an image simulating the sword decoration 5001 is displayed as the "simulated image display MG-A5" instead of the operation button 410. Therefore, the “model image display MG-A5” is not actually displayed in the “form shown in FIG. 144(α)”, and the “form shown in FIG. Instead, it appears as a form replaced with an image imitating the sword decoration 5001.

As shown in FIG. 159(b), the 5A acceptance allowable state is continued until timing tAe3 when there is no operation acceptance for the 5A operation unit, and is based on the arrival of timing tAe3. is terminated. Therefore, while the 5A acceptance allowable state continues, a gauge image indicating the remaining time until the arrival of the timing tAe3 at which the 5A acceptance allowable state ends (in this example, in the model image display MG-A5 image) is depicted to decrease over time, but this depiction may not necessarily be performed.

In addition, when the "model image display MG-A5" corresponding to the 5A acceptance acceptable state is started to be displayed before the timing tAe2 at which the 5A acceptance acceptable state occurs, the periodic change and the change in the gauge image is preferably started after waiting for the timing tAe2. In other words, in this case, the “simulated image display MG-A5” corresponding to the 5A acceptance allowable state is in the form shown in FIG. The image is displayed in a form that maintains the aspect replaced with the image that was created).

In addition, in the 5A reception allowable state according to this example, as shown in FIGS. , sword ornament 5001) is displayed (here, message display MA5 is displayed as "Kill the goblins! Hit the sword repeatedly!").

In addition, in the 5A acceptance allowable state according to this example, as shown in FIGS. 158(e) and 160(a), as a situation suggestion display JA5 suggesting the operation situation in the 5A acceptability state, A friendly character (here, friendly character YS-A5) corresponding to the type of the 5A acceptance acceptable state, and an enemy character (here, an enemy depicted as a goblin) corresponding to the type of the 5A acceptance acceptable state A character BOSS-A5) and a gauge image HP-A5 indicating its remaining HP gauge are displayed. In the 5A acceptance allowable state, "whether or not the ally character YS-A5 can defeat the enemy character BOSS-A5 by accepting a plurality of operations on the 5A operation unit (the gauge image HP-A5 is set to 0 (whether or not it can be done)", it is possible to suggest whether the expectation of a big hit is high or low. Each time an operation (acceptance of operation) is performed on the character YS-A5, an effect can be executed so that the "friend character YS-A5" attacks the "enemy character BOSS-A5". In this example, the ally character YS-A5, the enemy character BOSS-A5, and the gauge image HP-A5 are displayed as the situation suggestive display JA5, but not all of these displays are necessarily displayed. However, if at least one of the friend character YS-A5, the enemy character BOSS-A5, and the gauge image HP-A5 is displayed, it is possible to suggest the operation status.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 158, at the timing tAe2-A1 in the 5A acceptance allowable state (the effect situation shown in FIG. 160(b)), the ``5A operation section (here, the sword ornament 5001)'' is displayed. It is assumed that the first operation is accepted for .

In this example, if the first operation is accepted for the ``5A operation section (here, the sword decoration 5001)'' at the timing tAe2-A1 within the 5A acceptance allowable state, FIG. 160(h), the "5A post-acceptance change (5A post-acceptance effect)" corresponding to the acceptance of the operation is caused (the effect situation shown in FIG. 160(b)).

More specifically, at the timing tAe2-A1 within the 5A acceptance allowable state, when the operation is accepted for the ``5A operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)'', the operation is performed as shown in FIG. 158(f). , (g), as a change after accepting the 5A, an audible output of the "output sound after accepting the 5A" corresponding to the acceptance of the operation on the "5A operating unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is output. At the same time, the display of the "5A post-acceptance display" corresponding to the acceptance of the operation on the "5A operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" starts to be displayed.

That is, in the 5A acceptance allowable state, when an operation is accepted once for the ``5A operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)'', the above ``5A post-acceptance display'' is displayed as shown in FIG. 160(b). As shown in , one animation display is displayed in a manner in which "friendly character YS-A5" attacks "enemy character BOSS-A5" using swordsmanship (generation of smoke effect, slashing effect, etc.). It has become so. However, as will be described later, in the 5A acceptability state, every time an operation is accepted, the "enemy character BOSS-A5" will be injured, the intensity of the swordsmanship will increase, and the remaining HP gauge of the gauge image HP-A5 will decrease. (The content of the production is designed to progress). When the content of the production progresses in this way, the state when the operation is accepted for the 5A operation unit (here, "friend character YS-A5" uses swordsmanship to control "enemy character BOSS-A5"). Attack mode) will appear as one-time moving image display that has changed to the content of the advanced production (FIGS. 158(e), (f), FIGS. 160(d), (f), (h), etc.). ).

However, although this will also be described later, the 5A reception allowable state according to this example is similar to the above-described third reception allowable state and fourth reception allowable state (the 5A reception allowable state ends with the passage of time It occurs as a validity period of a type that does not cause early termination triggered by operation acceptance (before timing tAe3). That is, in this case, during the validity period of such a type (5A acceptance acceptable state), every time an operation is accepted, the content of the effect corresponding to the 5A acceptance acceptable state must be changed (progressed). If there is, the processing when the content of the effect progresses to the final mode becomes a problem.

In this regard, in the above-described 3A acceptance acceptable state, when an operation is further accepted in a situation where the effect content corresponding to the 3A acceptance acceptable state has progressed to the final mode, each time the operation is accepted, the final It was decided to repeatedly cause changes after acceptance according to the aspect. On the other hand, in the 5A acceptance acceptable state according to this example, when an operation is further accepted in a situation where the effect content corresponding to the 5A acceptance acceptable state has progressed to the final mode, each time the operation is accepted , can repeatedly cause post-acceptance changes according to the final aspect. However, as will be described later, in the 5A acceptance allowable state according to this example, when the operation acceptance is further performed while the post-acceptance display (5A post-acceptance display) is being displayed due to the post-acceptance change according to the final mode, The display state of the displayed post-reception display is maintained and continued without re-displaying the post-reception display related to the final mode. Regarding the post-reception output sound (5A post-reception output sound), once it is output in the final mode, regardless of the output status of the post-reception output sound according to the final mode, it is assumed that the operation is further received. This is also used as a trigger to prevent the start of output. According to such a configuration, after the content of the effect has progressed to the final mode, even if the operation is further accepted, the post-acceptance change related to the final mode is made difficult to occur, or the execution mode is restricted ( At least the output sound is not output after acceptance), so that the "5A operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" can be suppressed from being handled unnecessarily.

Also, in this example, when an operation is accepted once for the "5A operation unit (here, sword ornament 5001)" in the 5A acceptability state, in addition to the above "5A post-acceptance display", As the “5A post-reception output sound”, the first post-reception output sound SA5 can be output as shown in FIG. 158(g). It should be noted that the first post-reception output sound SA5 according to this example appears as the above-mentioned "5A post-reception display", "a mode in which the friendly character YS-A5 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A5 using swordsmanship (smoke effect , the occurrence of a slashing effect, etc.). At this time, as will be described later, there is a possibility that the second post-reception output sound SB5 is further output as the "5A post-reception output sound". The second post-acceptance output sound SB5 according to this example is output when the effect content of the above-mentioned "5A post-acceptance display" progresses. Here, the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 is implemented as a sound effect corresponding to the post-acceptance display, but it may not necessarily function as a sound effect. Anything that can suggest that an operation has been accepted by the player may be used.

In this way, in the 5A acceptance allowable state, every time an operation is accepted for the ``5A operation unit (here, the sword decoration 5001)'', the ``friend character YS-A5'' changes to the ``enemy character BOSS-A5''. ” and its sound effect appear, that is, the HP of “enemy character BOSS-A5” decreases due to multiple attacks by “ally character YS-A5” (the production content progresses As a result, when the HP becomes 0, it means that the "enemy character BOSS-A5" has been defeated. . However, in this case, if the HP does not become 0 even after performing multiple attacks and the "enemy character BOSS-A5" cannot be defeated, it is suggested that the degree of expectation is low.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 158(a), it is assumed that the player's operation (operation state of the 5A operation unit) started at timing tAe2-A1 continues until timing tAe2-A2. It has become a thing.

However, unlike the 1A reception allowable state, the 2A reception allowable state, the 3A reception allowable state, etc., the 5A reception allowable state is different from the 1A reception allowable state, the 2A reception allowable state, and the 3A reception allowable state. A type that does not perform multiple post-reception changes (for example, post-reception display, post-reception output sound, post-reception light emission, post-reception accessory movement, etc.) It is classified as "operation valid state". Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 158(a), during the period from timing tAe2-A1 to timing tAe2-A2 (the period during which the 5A operation unit is maintained in the operated state), the 5A operation unit is not accepted for operation. It is performed only once at timing tAe2-A1, and changes after reception for one time according to the operation reception at timing tAe2-A1 (for example, post-reception display, post-reception output sound, post-reception light emission, post-reception role item motion, etc.) will be executed.

Therefore, in this production example, at timing tAe2-A1, as the 5A post-acceptance display, as shown in FIG. A mode (occurrence of a smoke effect, a slashing effect, etc.) will start to be displayed (movie display for one time).

More specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 160(b), as the display after receiving the 5A, the enemy character BOSS-A5 is changed to a state in which it has received the first stage of damage, and the ally character YS-A5 An attack using swordsmanship is displayed as a single-shot display TA5 (mode TA5a), the gauge image HP-A5 remains, and the HP gauge is reduced by one step. That is, in this case, the situation suggestive display JA5 (enemy character BOSS-A5, ally character YS-A5, gauge image HP-A5) changes from "mode JA5a" before the operation to "mode JA5b". It is suggested that the effect content corresponding to the 5A acceptance allowable state progresses based on the operation acceptance performed at the timing tAe2-A1.

However, as described above, the situation suggesting display JA5 whose mode has changed in this way is not necessarily continuously displayed until the 5th A acceptance acceptance state is terminated. It is displayed for a predetermined period of time (fixed period of time) and then hidden.

In addition, the one-shot display TA5, which is depicted as an attack by swordsmanship by the ally character YS-A5, is also hidden after a predetermined period of time (fixed period of time) elapses. The production examples shown in FIGS. 158 and 160 are based on the assumption that the time tAe2-A2 elapses before the timing tAe2-A2 arrives and the one-shot display TA5 (mode TA5a) is turned off. It's becoming In this example, the one-shot display TA5 is displayed in different modes depending on the degree of progress of the content of the production, but it is displayed in one mode (same mode) regardless of the degree of progress of the content of the production. good too. Alternatively, in the 5A acceptability state according to this example, when an operation is accepted, the mode of the situation suggestion display JA5 always changes, and it is possible to suggest that the operation has been accepted. In view of this, the one-shot display TA5 may not necessarily be displayed.

Further, at timing tAe2-A1, the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 (5A post-acceptance output sound) is output so as to function as a sound effect corresponding to such a 5A post-acceptance display (attack mode). As soon as it is started, the second post-reception output sound SB5 (5A post-reception output sound) is changed to mode SB5b in order to suggest that the effect content corresponding to the 5A acceptance allowable state has progressed to the first stage mode. Output is started at -1.

In this regard, the second post-acceptance output sound SB5 corresponding to the 5A acceptability state is set for a predetermined time (timing tAe2 to After being output for a certain period of time shorter than the time tAe3, it is put into a non-output state. Similarly, the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 is also put into a non-output state after a predetermined time (fixed time) elapses.

In the production example shown in FIG. 158, it is assumed that the first post-reception output sound SA5 and the second post-reception output sound SB5 are put into a non-output state after the timing tAe2-A2. ing.

That is, in this case, the timing tAe2-A2 arrives while both the first post-reception output sound SA5 and the second post-reception output sound SB5 are in the output state. However, both the first post-reception output sound SA5 and the second post-reception output sound SB5 according to this example indicate that the 5A operation section is put into a non-operating state (timing tAe2-A2 arrives). As a trigger, no change occurs.

In this example, the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 is implemented as a sound effect corresponding to the post-acceptance display. may be anything that can suggest that an operation has been accepted by the player. In addition, the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 is output in one mode (same mode) regardless of the degree of development of the content of the production, but it may be output in a different mode according to the degree of progress of the content of the production. can be Alternatively, in the 5A acceptance acceptance state according to this example, when an operation is accepted, the second post-acceptance output sound SA5 is always output, which may suggest that the operation has been accepted. If possible, the first post-reception output sound SA5 may not necessarily be output.

Here, in the 5A acceptance allowable state, before the time required for "one-time moving image display (single-shot display TA5)" corresponding to the operation acceptance has passed (while the single-shot display TA5 is being displayed), There may be cases where the player performs an operation to put the 5A operation section into the non-operating state and an operation to bring it back into the operating state from the non-operating state. In this case, the above-mentioned "single-shot display TA5" is executed after the above-mentioned "fixed period of time" has passed at a timing before the end of the "one-time moving image display" in response to the operation reception. It will be executed in such a manner that "one time of moving image display" is started, but at this time, the new "one time of moving image display" is the previous " It is also possible to terminate the "moving image display for one time" in the middle and execute it in an alternative manner.

Similarly, in the 5A reception allowable state, before the time required for the "sound effect corresponding to the moving image display for one time (first post-reception output sound SA5)" in response to the operation reception elapses ( While the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 is being output, there are cases where the player performs an operation to put the 5A operation unit into a non-operating state and an operation from the non-operating state to an operating state again. can occur. In this case, the above-mentioned "first post-acceptance output sound SA5" is set to the above-mentioned "fixed time" at a timing before the end of the "single effect sound" corresponding to the operation acceptance. After a lapse of time, a new "sound effect" is started to be executed. The previous "single sound effect" that was present may be terminated in the middle and executed in a form that replaces it.

"Situation suggestive display JA5 (see FIG. 158(e))" such as ally character YS-A5, enemy character BOSS-A5, and gauge image HP-A5 are displayed until the operation is accepted. As described above, it may be realized by appearing and displaying when the operation is accepted (until the validity period expires or for a predetermined time). is.

According to the pachinko machine 1 according to such an effect example, the effect situation shown in FIG. The presentation situation is not triggered by the fact that the 5A operating section is put into the non-operating state. Simply, the 5A post-acceptance display and the 5A post-acceptance output sound (situation indication JA5, single-shot display TA5, first post-acceptance output sound SA5, second post-acceptance output sound SB5 ), the execution state continues if the conditions for terminating the execution state have not been met even at the time when the timing tAe2-A2 arrives (situation suggestive display JA5, first post-acceptance output sound SA5, second post-acceptance output sound SB5), if the condition for terminating the execution state is satisfied before timing tAe2-A2 arrives, at that time (before timing tAe2-A2) It just exits the running state.

Further, in this example, if the operation of the 5A operation unit is interrupted while the one-shot display TA5 and the situation suggesting display JA5 are being displayed and this is put in the non-operating state, the single-shot display TA5 and the situation indication JA5 are displayed after the non-operating state is set. The time until the suggestive display JA5 is hidden is not set as a fixed time, but is indefinite.

Further, in this example, if the operation of the 5A operation unit is interrupted while the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 or the second post-acceptance output sound SB5 is being output, and the operation unit 5A is put into a non-operating state, The time from when the state is set to when the first after-reception output sound SA5 and the second after-reception output sound SB5 are set to the non-output state is not set as a fixed time but is indefinite. .

In addition, in the 5A acceptance allowable state according to this embodiment, while the one-time display TA5, the situation suggestive display JA5, the first post-reception output sound SA5, and the second post-reception output sound SB5 are each in the execution state, When the operation state of the 5A operation unit is interrupted (when it is put into a non-operation state), the single-shot display TA5, the situation suggestive display JA5, the first post-reception output sound SA5, and the second post-reception output sound The timing at which SB5 is put into a non-execution (non-display, non-output) state is different for each. In this example, the order in which they are finished is not changed, and for example, the one-shot display TA5 is finished earliest among them.

According to such a configuration, in the 5A acceptance allowable state according to this embodiment, the single indication TA5, the situation suggestive indication JA5, the first post-acceptance output sound SA5, and the second post-acceptance output sound SB5 are respectively generated. When the game is played so as to interrupt the operation state of the 5A operation unit (in the case of non-operation state) while the 5A operation unit is in the execution state, the one-shot display TA5 is displayed while the 5A operation unit is in the non-operation state. In addition, a situation appears in which the situation suggesting display JA5, the first post-reception output sound SA5, and the second post-reception output sound SB5 continue to be executed.

However, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 158(a) and 160(d), the single-shot display TA5, the situation-suggestive display JA5, the first post-reception output sound SA5, and the second post-reception output sound SB5. It is assumed that no new operation is accepted for the 5A operation unit even at the time when all of them end the execution state.

In this example, while all of the one-time display TA5, the situation suggestive display JA5, the first post-reception output sound SA5, and the second post-reception output sound SB5 are in the non-execution state, FIG. As shown in a), at the timing tAe2-B1 in the 5A acceptance allowable state (the production situation shown in FIG. 160(e)), the ``5A operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)'' is activated again. It is assumed that the operation state is set and this operation state continues until timing tAe2-B2.

In this example, at timing tAe2-B1 within the 5A acceptability state, if the "5A operation unit (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is put into the operation state again and the operation is accepted, this will be used as a trigger. , As shown in FIGS. 158(e) to (h), the "5A post-acceptance change (5A post-acceptance effect)" corresponding to the operation acceptance is generated again for the amount corresponding to one operation acceptance. This is the case (the effect situation shown in FIG. 160(e)).

However, as described above, in this example, even when the operation of the 5A operation unit is started again at the timing tAe2-B1 within the 5A acceptance allowable state, the effect content corresponding to the 5A acceptability state is advanced. The Rukoto. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 160(e), the change after accepting the 5A (5A display after reception, output sound after reception No. 5A, etc.) are started to be executed.

Therefore, in this production example, at timing tAe2-B1, as the display after reception of the 5A, as shown in FIG. A mode of attacking the enemy character BOSS-A5 (generation of smoke effect, slashing effect, etc.) will start to be displayed (movie display for one time).

More specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 160(e), as the display after reception of the 5A, the enemy character BOSS-A5 is changed to a state in which it has received a second-stage injury, and the ally character YS-A5 An attack using swordsmanship is displayed as a single-shot display TA5 in a second stage mode TA5b, and the gauge image HP-A5 remains and the HP gauge is changed to a mode in which the HP gauge has decreased by two stages. That is, in this case, the situation suggestive display JA5 (enemy character BOSS-A5, ally character YS-A5, gauge image HP-A5) changes from "mode JA5b" before the re-operation to "mode JA5c". It is suggested that the effect content corresponding to the 5A acceptance allowable state progresses based on the operation acceptance performed at the timing tAe2-B1.

Further, at timing tAe2-B1, the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 (5A post-acceptance output sound) is output so as to function as a sound effect corresponding to such a 5A post-acceptance display (attack mode). As soon as it is started, the second post-reception output sound SB5 (5A post-reception output sound) is changed to mode SB5b-2 in order to suggest that the effect content corresponding to the 5A reception allowable state has progressed to the second stage. Output starts with .

Here, the timing tAe2-B1 may arrive while the second post-acceptance output sound SB5 (5A post-acceptance output sound) started to be output at the timing tAe2-A1 is being output. In this case, at the timing tAe2-B1, the second post-acceptance output sound SB5 (5A post-acceptance output sound) terminates the first stage mode SB5b-1 that was in the output state and replaces it. Alternatively, the output in the second stage mode SB5b-2 may be started.

Further, at timing tAe2-B2, it is assumed that the operation of the 5A operation unit is interrupted while the one-shot display TA5 is being displayed and this is put into a non-operating state. At this time, as described above, the time from the non-operation state to the non-display state of the single-shot display TA5 is not set as a fixed time but is indefinite.

At the timing tAe2-B2 when the 5A operation unit is put into the non-operating state again, the 5A post-acceptance display and the 5A post-acceptance output sound (situation suggestive display JA5, single-shot display TA5) started at timing tAe2-B1. , the first post-acceptance output sound SA5, and the second post-acceptance output sound SB5) continue their execution state because the conditions for terminating their execution state are not yet satisfied, and timing tAe2- No change occurs with B2 as a trigger.

Also, in this example, as shown in FIG. 158(a), at the timing tAe2-C1 in the 5A acceptance allowable state (the production situation shown in FIG. Sword ornament 5001)" is put into the operation state again, and this operation state is continued until timing tAe2-C2.

In this example, at timing tAe2-C1 within the 5A acceptance allowable state, when the ``5A operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)'' is put into the operation state and the operation is accepted, with this as a trigger, As shown in FIGS. 158(e) to 158(h), the "5A post-acceptance change (5A post-acceptance effect)" corresponding to the operation acceptance is generated once again for the amount corresponding to one operation acceptance. (the effect situation shown in FIG. 160(f)).

However, as described above, in this example, even when the operation of the 5A operation unit is started again at the timing tAe2-C1 within the 5A reception allowable state, the effect content corresponding to the 5A reception allowable state is advanced. The Rukoto. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 160(f), the third stage progress (here, the final stage progress) is performed based on the reception of the operation to the 5A operation unit. , 5A post-reception changes (5A post-reception display, 5A post-reception output sound, etc.) are started to be executed.

Therefore, in this production example, at timing tAe2-C1, as the display after reception of the 5A, as shown in FIG. is used to defeat the enemy character BOSS-A5 (generation of smoke effect, slashing effect, etc.) is started to be displayed (movie display for one time).

More specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 160(f), as the display after the reception of the 5A, the enemy character BOSS-A5 is changed to be defeated, and the ally character YS-A5 performs an attack using swordsmanship. is displayed as a single-shot display TA5 in the third stage mode TA5c, and the gauge image HP-A5 is changed to a mode in which the remaining HP gauge is reduced to 0. That is, in this case, the situation suggestive display JA5 (enemy character BOSS-A5, ally character YS-A5, gauge image HP-A5) changes from "mode JA5c" before the re-operation to "mode JA5d". It is suggested that the performance content corresponding to the 5A acceptance allowable state progresses based on the operation acceptance performed at timing tAe2-C1.

Further, at timing tAe2-C1, the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 (5A post-acceptance output sound) is output so as to function as a sound effect corresponding to such a 5A post-acceptance display (attack mode). As soon as it is started, the second post-reception output sound SB5 (the 5A post-reception output sound) is changed to mode SB5b-3 in order to suggest that the effect content corresponding to the 5A reception permission state has progressed to the third stage. Output starts with .

Here, in this production example, the timing tAe2-C1 arrives while both the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 and the second post-acceptance output sound SB5, which started to be output at the timing tAe2-B1, are in an output state. It will be done. At this time, at the timing tAe2-C1, the second post-acceptance output sound SB5 (the 5A post-acceptance output sound) terminates the second stage mode SB5b-2 that was in the output state and replaces it. , the output in the second stage mode SB5b-3 is started. Also, for the first post-acceptance output sound SA5 (5A post-acceptance output sound), the sound that was in the output state is ended, and the output is restarted from the beginning in place of this.

Then, at the timing tAe2-C2 when the 5A operation unit is put into the non-operating state again, the effect situation shown in FIG. 160(g) appears. It did not appear as a result of being forced into it. Simply, the 5A post-acceptance display and the 5A post-acceptance output sound (situation indication JA5, single-shot display TA5, first post-acceptance output sound SA5, second post-acceptance output sound SB5 ), the execution state continues if the conditions for terminating the execution state have not yet been met at the timing tAe2-C2 (situation suggestive display JA5, first post-acceptance output sound SA5, second post-acceptance output sound SB5), if the condition for terminating the execution state is satisfied before timing tAe2-C2 arrives, at that point (before timing tAe2-C2) It just exits the running state.

However, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 158(a) and 160(h), the single-shot display TA5, the situation-suggestive display JA5, the first post-reception output sound SA5, and the second post-reception output sound SB5. It is assumed that no new operation is accepted for the 5A operation unit even at the time when all of them end the execution state.

In this example, while all of the one-shot display TA5, the situation suggestive display JA5, the first post-acceptance output sound SA5, and the second post-acceptance output sound SB5 are in a non-execution state, FIG. As shown in a), at the timing tAe2-D1 in the 5A acceptance allowable state (the production situation shown in FIG. 160(i)), the ``5A operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)'' It is assumed that the operation state is made again and this operation state continues at least until timing tAe3.

Here, as described above, the effect content corresponding to the 5A acceptance allowable state is in a situation where it has already progressed to the final mode by accepting the operation performed at the timing tAe2-C1. In this production example, even if the operation is further accepted at the timing tAe2-D1 under such circumstances, as shown in FIGS. As for the display JA5 and the one-time display TA5, execution is started in response to one reception of operation in the same mode (final mode) as when execution was started at timing tAe2-C1.

However, as described above, in this production example, the 5A post-reception output sound (first post-reception output sound SA5, second post-reception output sound SB5) is output once in the final mode. , regardless of the output status of the post-acceptance output sound according to the final mode, even if the operation acceptance is further performed, the output will not be started with this as a trigger. Therefore, when the operation is accepted at timing tAe2-D1, the 5A post-acceptance display (single-shot display TA5, situation suggestive display JA5) is started to be executed with the operation acceptance as a trigger, but the 5A post-acceptance output sound (the The first post-reception output sound SA5 and the second post-reception output sound SB5) are never executed.

Here, in this production example, it is assumed that timing tAe2-D1 arrives after the situation suggestive display JA5d (final mode) that started to be displayed at timing tAe2-C1 is hidden, but timing tAe2-C1 is assumed. Timing tAe2-D1 may arrive (operation acceptance occurs) while the situation suggesting display JA5d (final mode) started to be displayed in . At this time, at the timing tAe2-D1, the situation suggesting display JA5d (final mode) that has been displayed until then is not hidden and redisplayed, and the display state is continued. can be In this case, the time for which the display state is maintained and continued may be reset based on the timing tAe2-D1 instead of the timing tAe2-C1. In this case, at the timing tAe2-D1, not only is the post-5A reception output sound not newly output, but also the situation suggestive display JA5d (final mode) is not newly displayed again.

158 and 160, the display after the 5th A reception started at the timing tAe2-D1 is changed to a non-execution state, and the timing at which the 5th A reception permission state is ended. It is assumed that tAe3 arrives.

However, the timing tAe3 may come while the display after receiving the 5th A is in the display state. In this case, based on the arrival of the timing tAe3, the post-receipt display of the 5th A, which had been displayed until then, may be turned off.

Also, there is a possibility that the timing tAe3 arrives while the post-5A reception output sound is being output. In this case, based on the arrival of the timing tAe3, the post-5A reception output tone, which has been in the output state until then, may be put in the non-output state. However, based on the arrival of the timing tAe3, the post-reception display of the 5th A that has been displayed until then is hidden, but the post-reception output sound of the 5th A that has been output until then is not displayed. , may be continued without the non-output state.

In addition, the 5A acceptance acceptable state occurs as an acceptance acceptable state in which the automatic button function described above is not activated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 159, when the operation of the 5A operation section is not accepted until the timing tAe3 arrives in the 5A acceptance allowed state, the 5A acceptance is accepted based on the arrival of the timing tAe3. The state is simply ended, and the execution of the 5A post-receipt change that appears when an operation is performed on the 5A operation unit is not started.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of generating a "6th A reception permitted state" as the reception permitted period (operation permitted state). FIG. 161 is a time chart showing an example of the contents of the effect when the "6th A acceptance allowable state" occurs based on the satisfaction of the "condition 6A" as the occurrence condition and the player performs an operation. is. FIG. 162 is a time chart showing an example of the content of the effect when the "6th A acceptance permitted state" occurs and the player does not perform any operation. FIG. 163 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the "6th A acceptance acceptable state" occurs.

Now, assuming that the starting condition is satisfied (suspended digestion) and the "6th A variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first selects the "6th A variation pattern". The corresponding production judgment (notice production judgment, etc.) is performed. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (effect depiction according to the 6A variable pattern, BGM reproduction according to the 6A variable pattern (normal BGM reproduction at non-reach time, etc.) sound output, etc.) is started, Within the execution period of the variable performance, the performance (forecast performance) corresponding to the result of the determination of the preliminary performance is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "6th A variation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 161(c), within the execution period of the variation effect related to the "6th A variation pattern", the timing tAf2 has arrived after the 6A time has passed since the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ was started. Based on (based on the fact that "condition 6A" is satisfied), "6A post-reception change (6A production situation suggestive display JA6, 6A single-shot display TA6, 6A post-reception output sounds SA6, SB6, etc. ) can occur (situation shown in FIG. 163(a)).

Here, the 6A acceptance allowable state according to this embodiment allows one operation acceptance for the "6A operation unit" until the 6A acceptance allowable state ends. The operation button 410 is set as the "6th A operation unit".

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, as shown in FIGS. a model image display MG-A6 imitating the "operation button 410" as the 6A operation unit), a message display MA6 related to the operation of the operation target (here, the "operation button 410" as the 6A operation unit), A situation suggesting display JA6 suggesting an operation situation is displayed when a timing tAf1 before the occurrence of the 6A acceptance allowable state (before acceptance of operation on the 6A operation unit is allowed) has arrived. It is supposed to

However, the model image display MG-A6, the message display MA6, and the situation suggestion display JA6 may not necessarily be displayed before the occurrence of the 6A Acceptable State. It may be displayed at the same time as it occurs or in a manner slightly delayed from its occurrence. Also, the timing at which the model image display MG-A6 is displayed and the timing at which the message display MA6 is displayed may be different from each other. For example, the message display MA6 may be displayed before the model image display MG-A6 is displayed.

Here, the “model image display MG-A6” corresponding to the 6A reception acceptable state has “first color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on white)” and “second color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on white)” and a “second color scheme (for example, red The basic color scheme)” is now selectively used.

In addition, in the ``simulated image display MG-A6'' corresponding to the 6A acceptance allowable state, the part that imitates the ``operation receiving part'' to be operated is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144 (α). 144 (β) to (σ) are sequentially displayed in each of the modes shown in Fig. 144," is regarded as one periodic change, the periodic change is repeated in a form requiring a predetermined period of 6A time. It will appear. This cycle 6A time is set as a time (long cycle) that is longer than the cycle 1A time that appears in the 1A acceptable state, and may be set as the same time as the cycle 2A time, for example. Therefore, in the 6A acceptance allowable state, the "operation receiving section" is depicted as slowly moving up and down within its movable range.

As shown in FIG. 162(b), the 6A acceptance allowable state continues until timing tAf3 when no operation is accepted for the 6A operation unit, and is based on the arrival of timing tAf3. is terminated. Therefore, while the 6A acceptance allowable state continues, a gauge image (in this example, in the model image display MG-A6 image) is depicted to decrease over time, but this depiction may not necessarily be performed.

In addition, when the "simulated image display MG-A6" corresponding to the 6A reception allowable state is started to be displayed before the timing tAf2 at which the 6A reception allowable state occurs, the periodic change and the gauge image change is preferably started after waiting for the timing tAf2. In other words, in this case, the “simulated image display MG-A6” corresponding to the 6A acceptance allowable state is displayed in the form shown in FIG. It will be displayed in a form that maintains the aspect replaced by the image).

In addition, in the 6A reception allowable state according to this example, as shown in FIGS. , operation button 410) is displayed (here, message display MA6 is displayed as "Defeat the wizard! Hit the hammer!").

In addition, in the 6A acceptance allowable state according to this example, as shown in FIGS. 161(e) and 163(a), as a situation suggestion display JA6 that suggests the operation situation in the 6A acceptability state, An ally character (here, ally character YS-A6) corresponding to the type of the 6A acceptance acceptable state and an enemy character (here, an enemy depicted as a wizard) corresponding to the type of the 6A acceptance acceptable state A character BOSS-A6) and a gauge image HP-A6 indicating its remaining HP gauge are displayed. In the 6A acceptability state, "whether or not the ally character YS-A6 can defeat the enemy character BOSS-A6 by accepting a single operation on the 6A operating unit (the gauge image HP-A6 is set to 0 (whether or not it can be done)”, it can be suggested whether the expectation that a big hit is obtained is high or low. On the other hand, when an operation (acceptance of operation) is performed, an effect can be executed such that "ally character YS-A6" attacks "enemy character BOSS-A6". In this example, the ally character YS-A6, the enemy character BOSS-A6, and the gauge image HP-A6 are displayed as the situation suggestive display JA6, but not all of these displays are necessarily displayed. However, if at least one of the ally character YS-A6, the enemy character BOSS-A6, and the gauge image HP-A6 is displayed, it is possible to suggest the operation status.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 161, at the timing tAf2-A1 in the 6A acceptance allowable state (the production situation shown in FIG. On the other hand, it is assumed that the first operation is accepted.

In this example, if an operation is accepted for the "6A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" at timing tAf2-A1 within the 6A acceptance allowable state, 163(b), the "6A post-acceptance change (6A post-acceptance effect)" corresponding to the operation acceptance is generated (the effect situation shown in FIG. 163(b)).

More specifically, at the timing tAf2-A1 in the 6A acceptance allowable state, when the operation is accepted for the ``6A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)'', FIG. As shown in (h), as the post-6A acceptance change, the "6A post-acceptance output sound" corresponding to the acceptance of the operation on the "6A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" is audibly output. , "6A post-reception display (single-shot display TA6, situation suggestive display JA6)" corresponding to the reception of operation on the "6A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" starts to be displayed.

That is, when the "6A operation unit (here, operation button 410)" is operated once in the 6A acceptance allowable state, the above "6A post-acceptance display" is displayed as shown in FIG. 163(b). As shown, the animation display for one time is displayed in a manner in which "friend character YS-A6" uses a hammer to attack "enemy character BOSS-A6" (occurrence of impact effect, etc.). .

In the one-time moving image display according to this example, first, an attack using a hammer by the teammate character YS-A6 is displayed as a single-shot display TA6. As a result, a mode in which the enemy character BOSS-A6 was defeated and a mode in which the enemy character BOSS-A6 was not defeated are prepared. It is assumed that the display shows that the enemy character BOSS-A6 has been defeated.

More specifically, in the example shown in FIGS. 161 and 163, the "enemy character BOSS-A6" is defeated, the strength of the hammer increases, and the remaining HP gauge of the gauge image HP-A6 changes to 0. be done. That is, in this case, the situation suggestive display JA6 (enemy character BOSS-A6, ally character YS-A6, gauge image HP-A6) changes from "mode JA6a" before the operation to "mode JA6b". It is suggested that the character BOSS-A6 could be beaten (it is suggested that there is a high possibility of winning a big hit).

Although illustration is omitted, an attack using a hammer by friendly character YS-A6 is displayed as single-shot display TA6. , the "enemy character BOSS-A6" survives, the strength of the hammer is lowered, and the remaining HP gauge of the gauge image HP-A6 is partially left. That is, in this case, the situation suggestive display JA6 (enemy character BOSS-A6, ally character YS-A6, gauge image HP-A6) changes from "mode JA6a" before operation to a mode different from "mode JA6b". , thereby suggesting that the player is under an operating condition in which the enemy character BOSS-A6 cannot be beaten (it is suggested that the possibility of obtaining a big hit is low).

Further, in this example, when an operation is accepted for the "6A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the 6A acceptance allowable state, the above "6A post-acceptance display" As the 6A post-reception output sound, a first post-reception output sound SA6 can be output as shown in FIG. 161(g). Note that the first post-acceptance output sound SA6 according to this example appears as the above-mentioned "sixth A post-acceptance display", "a mode in which a friend character YS-A6 uses a hammer to attack an enemy character BOSS-A6 (single-shot display TA6)” functions as a sound effect. In this example, the first post-acceptance output sound SA6 is implemented as a sound effect corresponding to the post-acceptance display. may be anything that can suggest that an operation has been accepted by the player.

At this time, the second post-reception output sound SB6 is further output as the "sixth A post-reception output sound". The second post-acceptance output sound SB6 according to this example is used when there is a state in which the enemy character BOSS-A6 can be defeated (when the expectation is high), and when the enemy character BOSS-A6 cannot be defeated. Different modes are prepared depending on when the mode appears (when the degree of expectation is low), and output is made in one of these modes.

In this way, in the 6A acceptance allowable state, when the ``6A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)'' is operated and accepted, the ``friendly character YS-A6'' becomes the ``enemy character BOSS-A6''. When the HP of "enemy character BOSS-A6" becomes 0 by one attack by "ally character YS-A6", "enemy character BOSS-A6" appears. It is said that it was possible to defeat , and this provides a performance that suggests that expectations are high. However, in this case, if the HP does not become 0 even after performing multiple attacks and the "enemy character BOSS-A6" cannot be defeated, it is suggested that the degree of expectation is low.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 161(a), it is assumed that the player's operation (operation state of the 6th A operation unit) started at timing tAf2-A1 continues until timing tAf2-A2. It has become a thing.

However, in the 6A reception allowable state, only one operation reception for the 6A operation unit is permitted. Therefore, the second operation is not accepted during the period from the timing tAf2-A1 to the timing tAf2-A2, and the performance in the execution state does not change in any way with the timing tAf2-A2 as a trigger.

Further, the one-shot display TA6, the situation suggestive display JA6, the first post-acceptance output sound SA6, and the second post-acceptance output sound SB6, which are started at timing tAf2-A1, are each executed for a predetermined time. After that, it is put into a non-executing state. These effects are executed for different time periods, and the timings at which the execution states are ended are different.

In addition, each execution state of the one-shot display TA6, the situation suggestive display JA6, the first post-acceptance output sound SA6, and the second post-acceptance output sound SB6 that started execution at timing tAf2-A1 is undefined from timing tAf2-A2. will end at the time of

In this production example, the single-shot display TA6 is the same display for the case where the enemy character BOSS-A6 was successfully defeated and the case where the enemy character BOSS-A6 was not defeated. It is displayed as a mode. However, the one-time display TA6 may not necessarily be displayed. Further, the first post-reception output sound SA6 is the same in the case where the enemy character BOSS-A6 can be defeated and in the case where the enemy character BOSS-A6 cannot be defeated. It is to be output in the form. However, the first post-acceptance output sound SA6 may not necessarily be output.

Also, the 6A acceptance allowable state occurs as an acceptability state in which the above-described automatic button function is activated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 162, when the operation of the 6A operation unit is not accepted until the timing tAf3 arrives in the 6A acceptance allowed state, the 6A acceptance is accepted based on the arrival of the timing tAf3. Not only is the state terminated, but the execution of the 6A post-acceptance change is initiated in a manner that appears when an operation is performed on the 6A operation unit.

Note that the 6A acceptance allowable state may be generated as an acceptability state in which the automatic button function described above is not activated. In other words, in this case, the 6A acceptance allowable state is simply ended based on the arrival of the timing tAb3, and the execution of the 6A post-acceptance change that appears when an operation is performed on the 6A operation unit is started. will no longer occur.

Further, the "first A operation section", the "second A operation section", the "third A operation section", the "fourth A operation section", and the "sixth A operation section" according to the above-described production examples are all "operation buttons 410". However, some of these operating units may include those implemented as operating units different from the “operation buttons 410”. For example, it may be replaced with a configuration in which an operating unit represented as a simulated image display is operated in each acceptable acceptance state. That is, the "first A operation section", the "second A operation section", the "third A operation section", and the "fourth A operation section" are displayed as simulated images and are allowed to be operated multiple times. As for the "6th A operation unit", it is sufficient if it is displayed as a model image display and accepts only one operation. However, "1st A operation part", "2nd A operation part", "3rd A operation part", "4th A operation part", and "6th A operation part" are all different operations from "5th A operation part". It will be prepared as a part.

In addition, the "post-acceptance change (post-acceptance display)" corresponding to the operation acceptance during each acceptance period (acceptance acceptable state) according to the above-mentioned example of production does not necessarily suggest the degree of expectation that a big win can be obtained. It doesn't have to be. For example, during the execution period of the jackpot game, it may occur as a reception period for whether or not the probability variation function will be activated, and may be executed as a display after the reception. It may be generated as a mere reception period in a mini-game that has nothing to do with it, and may be executed as a display after the reception. Alternatively, it may be generated based on the establishment of a predetermined condition in various interval periods, etc., and executed as a display after receiving the condition. Therefore, the acceptance period according to the example of the effect described above does not necessarily have to occur within the period during which the symbol variation is executed. In addition, even in the case where the post-acceptance indication is displayed without suggesting the degree of expectation, a plurality of modes are prepared for displaying the post-acceptance indication, and the indication is displayed in one of the plurality of modes. You may do so.

In addition, when the cyclical change of the model image is displayed in units of "longer than the predetermined time", and when the cyclical change of the model image is displayed in units of "predetermined time" , the model image can be displayed in the same form (or similar form). However, when the model image display is displayed so that the periodic change appears in units of "time longer than the predetermined time", the model image display is displayed in the first form and in the second form. When the model image display is displayed so that periodic changes appear in units of "predetermined time", there is no case where it is displayed in the second form (or a similar form), and the second form is not displayed. It may be displayed in one form (or a similar form).

By the way, the periodic change of the model image display is a phenomenon that occurs with the passage of time, unlike the color scheme and light emission, so it takes a relatively long time to distinguish the merits and demerits. In other words, it can be said that it is difficult to distinguish with certainty whether the periodic changes in the currently appearing model display are long or short (both long and short cycles are not displayed). For). However, on the other hand, if players can distinguish between them, they will be able to enjoy the value as a new source of information. , it will be possible to provide new performance.

In addition, in the 2A reception allowable state according to the above-described production example, for the first post-reception output sound SA2a when the automatic repeated hitting function is activated, the timing tAb2-B2, which is the timing at which the production content progresses, is generated. A new "sound effect" will start to be output when the arrival of the However, instead of this, the arrival of the timing tAb2-B2 may not be used as a trigger to start outputting a new "sound effect", and the output (sound effect) may be continued in the form that has been executed up to that point. .

That is, the first post-acceptance output sound SA2a does not necessarily have to be realized as repeated output of sound effects. (Based on the judgment of the operation acceptance detected each time) to continue on the condition that the operation state is maintained (condition that the auto repeated hit function is enabled), and when the operation state is no longer maintained It may be realized by outputting in a form such as "terminate". In this case, even if the timing tAb2-B2, which is the timing at which the content of the effect is advanced by the so-called auto repeated hitting function, arrives while the first post-acceptance output sound SA2a is being output, this is the trigger. Alternatively, the output mode of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2a (effect sound based on one data) may be kept unchanged without any change. In this sense, it can be said that the automatic repeated hitting function according to this example of presentation is a function in which it is periodically determined that the operation state is present only by maintaining the operation state. Even if the 2A acceptance allowable state is realized with such a configuration, a new post-acceptance change (second post-acceptance output sound SB2) is generated at an indefinite interval and from a specific time, at least for the number of times the performance has progressed. will also occur multiple times at long intervals.

It should be noted that the interval at which it is determined whether or not it is in the operation state by the auto repeated tapping function in the accepting allowable state is any of 1A time period, 2A time period, 3A time period, 4A time period, 5A time period, and 6A time period. It is desirable to set the time to be shorter than . However, the interval at which it is determined whether or not it is in the operation state by the automatic continuous tapping function in the acceptability state may differ depending on the type of the acceptability state. For example, the interval at which it is determined whether or not it is in the operation state (acceptance of operation) by the auto repeated hit function in the 2A reception allowable state is the same as the interval at which the automatic repeat operation state in the 1A reception allowable state or the 3A reception allowable state. It may be different from the interval at which it is determined whether or not there is (operation acceptance). Further, in the 1A accepting allowable state and the 3A accepting allowable state, the interval at which it is determined whether or not the player is in the operating state (accepting the operation) by the auto repeated hitting function may be the same.

In addition, if the operation target for which the so-called auto repeated hit function is activated is maintained in the operation state, the change after reception is a type of reception allowable state (second 1A acceptance acceptance state, 3A acceptance acceptance state, etc.), the type of acceptance acceptance state (2A acceptance acceptance state etc.), it is desirable to increase the number of times the post-acceptance change occurs within the acceptance-allowed state.

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described effect example displays the post-acceptance display on the effect display device 1600 as one of the post-acceptance changes. It is not an essential configuration as one. For example, it is possible to realize the same effect mode as the post-reception change by the above-described post-reception display by changing the light emission mode of the effect lamp or by changing the driving of the movable body.

In addition, as described above, the 1st A reception acceptable state and the 2nd A reception acceptable state are “a type of reception in which the reception acceptable state can be terminated early based on the acceptance of the operation (the final presentation mode appears). It is prepared as "allowable state". However, in the 1st A acceptance acceptance state and the 2nd A acceptance acceptance state, for example, when a predetermined judgment result is not obtained as a result of a big hit judgment or a performance judgment, no matter how many operations are accepted (the final The performance mode does not appear) so that the acceptance acceptance state is not terminated early, and only when a predetermined judgment result is obtained as a result of a big hit judgment or production judgment, and the operation reception is triggered (final ) appears), and the acceptance acceptance state may be terminated early. Even with such a configuration, it can be said that it is realized as ``a type of reception-allowed state in which the relevant reception-allowed state can be terminated early based on the fact that the operation is accepted (the final presentation mode appears)''. .

In addition, in the 1A reception allowable state and the 3A reception allowable state, the interval at which it is determined whether or not it is in the operation state (operation reception) by the auto repeated hitting function (when the operation state is maintained, the change after reception is new) intervals) may be different from each other.

Further, when the operation button 410 is maintained in the operated state in the 2A acceptance allowable state, the number of times the post-2A acceptance output sound can be generated in the 2A acceptance allowable state When the operation button 410 is maintained in the operated state, the number of times the post-1A reception output sound can be generated a plurality of times within the 1A reception allowable state may be set to be less than the number of times.

Further, when the operation button 410 is maintained in the operated state in the 2A acceptance allowable state, the number of times the output sound after the 2A acceptance can be generated multiple times in the 2A acceptance allowable state is determined by the 3A acceptance allowable state. When the operation button 410 is maintained in the operated state, the number of times the post-3A reception output sound can be generated a plurality of times within the 3A reception allowable state may be set to be less than the number of times.

Further, in the 2A acceptance allowable state, the upper limit number of times that the post-2A acceptance output sound can be generated multiple times by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state is It may be set so as to be less than the upper limit number of times that the post-2A reception output sound can be generated multiple times by repeating the operation without maintaining.

In addition, in the 1A reception allowable state, the upper limit number of times that the operation button 410 can be maintained in the operation state to generate the post-1A reception output sound multiple times is determined by repeatedly operating the operation button 410 without maintaining the operation state. It may be set to be equal to or greater than the upper limit number of times that the post-1A reception output sound can be generated a plurality of times by doing so.

In addition, in the 3A acceptance allowable state, the upper limit number of times that the operation button 410 is maintained in the operated state to generate the post-3A reception output sound multiple times is determined by repeatedly operating the operation button 410 without maintaining the operation state. It may be set to be equal to or greater than the upper limit number of times that the post-3A reception output sound can be generated multiple times.

Further, in the above-described effect example, the type of post-operation output sound (the first acceptance sound shown in FIG. Post-output sound SA2) is a type of post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output shown in FIG. The output of the sound SB2) can be started under any of the conditions of being in the output state and not being in the output state. The type of post-operation output sound (the second post-reception output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that is not accepted is changed (finished) when the operation button 410 changes from the operated state to the non-operated state. When the type of post-operation output sound (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. Output may be started.

In addition, in the 2A reception allowable state according to the above-described production example, even if the output condition of the second post-reception output sound SB2 is satisfied while the operation button 410 is maintained in the operated state ( At the timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149, the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 starts based on the acceptance of the operation performed at the timing tAb2-B2. 1 post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, one-time sound effect) is set so as not to terminate its output state or start a new output based on the operation acceptance performed at the timing tAb2-B2. can be That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, the effect sound for one time) that was in the output state at the timing tAb2-B2 is continued. The output of sound (sound effect for one time) based on new data due to the midway termination does not start, and the reproduction is not restarted.

In addition, in the 1A reception permission state according to the above-described production example, when the output condition of the first post-reception output sound SB1 is satisfied while the operation button 410 is maintained in the operation state (shown in FIG. 146). at the timing tAa2-B2), the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 starts based on the acceptance of the operation performed at the timing As for the output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect), the output state may be ended and a new output may be started based on the reception of the operation performed at the timing tAa2-B2. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 (here, the effect sound for one time) that was in the output state when the timing tAa2-B2 arrived is interrupted, and new data (here, Output of the sound (sound effect for one time) based on the sound effect data for one time is started.

Further, in the 3A acceptance allowable state according to the above-described effect example, when the output condition of the third post-acceptance output sound SB3 is satisfied while the operation button 410 is maintained in the operated state (shown in FIG. 152). at the timing tAc2-B2), the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 is started based on the acceptance of the operation performed at the timing tAc2-B2, whereas the output of the third post-acceptance output sound SB3 which has been in the output state until then is started. As for the output sound SA3 (here, one sound effect), the output state may be ended and a new output may be started based on the reception of the operation performed at the timing tAc2-B2. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 (here, the effect sound for one time) that was in the output state when the timing tAc2-B2 arrived is interrupted, and new data (here, Output of the sound (sound effect for one time) based on the sound effect data for one time is started.

Further, the phrase "post-operation output sound is generated multiple times" means that there are multiple times when the post-operation output sound is newly started to be output only by maintaining the operation state. That is, when the operation state is maintained, it can be said that only one post-operation output sound is generated while the post-operation output sound is being reproduced based on one piece of data.

In addition, the model image display does not necessarily have to be displayed in the acceptability state. For example, the model image may not be displayed in at least one of the reception acceptance states (1A acceptance acceptance state to 6A acceptance acceptance state) described above. For example, the model image display may not be displayed in the 1A acceptance permitted state. Alternatively, the model image display may not be displayed in the 3A reception allowable state instead of the 1A reception allowable state.

In addition, in each of the acceptance acceptance states described above (1A acceptance acceptance state to 6A acceptance acceptance state), two types of sounds (after the first acceptance output sound and second post-reception output sound) can be output at the same time, but both types of sounds (first post-reception output sound, second post-reception output sound) Instead, only one of the sounds may be selectively output when the operation is accepted, or only one of the sounds may be output and the other may not necessarily be output. You can choose not to prepare.

In addition, in the 2A acceptability state, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is not processed to be a fixed time, but is only processed to be an indefinite time. In the 1st A acceptance acceptable state and the 3rd A acceptance acceptable state, it is sufficient that at least a process is executed in which the interval until a new post-operation output sound is generated is set to a constant time. A process in which the interval until a new output sound is generated is a fixed time (first post-reception output sound), and a process in which the interval until a new output sound is generated after an operation is set to an indefinite time (second output sound after acceptance) may be executed.

In the acceptance acceptance state described above, the continuous-hitting display and the single-shot display may not necessarily be displayed.

Moreover, the above-mentioned "time equal to or less than the specific time" includes the specific time, and only the specific time may be prepared as the "time equal to or less than the specific time". Alternatively, only one time period may be prepared as the above-mentioned "longer time period than the specific time period".

Further, the above-mentioned "time equal to or less than the predetermined time" includes the predetermined time, and only the predetermined time may be prepared as the "time equal to or less than the predetermined time". Also, only one time may be prepared as the above-mentioned "time longer than the predetermined time".

It is preferable that the specific time is shorter than the predetermined time, and the "time equal to or shorter than the specific time" is shorter than the "time equal to or shorter than the predetermined time". On the other hand, it is desirable that the "time longer than the specific time" is longer than the "time longer than the predetermined time". Alternatively, if the "time longer than the specified time" is set as an indefinite time, depending on the indefiniteness, the time may be "longer than the specified time" or "longer than the specified time". and both may occur.

149(g), the operation button 410 is changed from the operated state to the non-operated state while the post-2A reception output sound is being output. When detected, the 2nd A post-reception output sound (first post-reception output sound SA2) in the output state is terminated with the detection as a trigger. It is also possible to change the volume/tone quality, change the mode of the output sound, etc.).

The post-operation output sound (post-acceptance output sound) may or may not suggest the degree of expectation. In fact, the first post-acceptance output sound SA and the like are sounds that do not suggest the degree of expectation.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 may further include an acceptance acceptance state different from the above-described 1A acceptance acceptance state to the 6th A acceptance acceptance state. For example, in the case of the 1A acceptance acceptance state, the performance related to the operation or non-operation is the same, but the types of enemy characters that appear are different, or the 2A acceptance acceptance state and the operation , and non-operation are the same, but the effects for operation and non-operation are the same as in the case of another acceptable acceptance state in which the types of enemy characters that appear are different, and in the case of the 3A acceptance acceptable state. However, it is also possible to provide a different acceptability state or the like in which the types of enemy characters that appear are different.

In addition, although the pachinko machine 1 is provided with all of the above-mentioned 1A reception permission state to the 6th A reception permission state, it is not necessarily provided with all of these reception permission states. Rather, it is desirable to have only some of these acceptable acceptance states in an appropriate combination in view of the desired effect. Excellent effects can be obtained by providing "appropriate combinations" described separately in the following configurations. It should be noted that, in each configuration below, among the configurations shown in the above-described production examples, a combination of reception acceptance states that should be provided in order to achieve the effect is exemplified, but the combination is illustrated. The combination is not limited to those listed above, and any combination not illustrated may be used as long as the desired effect can be achieved. In addition, if it does not adversely affect the performance of the desired effect, it may be appropriately provided with a configuration adopted by another reception permission state that is not related to the desired effect.

For example, as the first configuration A1, a multiple-time operation valid state is provided in which a plurality of operations on the specific operation means (operation button 410) are permitted. A multiple-operation valid state (1A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 146, 2A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 149, FIG. 4A accepting allowable state shown in ) and a multiple operation valid state (3A accepting allowable state shown in FIG. 152) of a type in which the message display is not displayed, the type in which the message display is displayed In the multiple-operation valid state (1A reception allowable state, 2A reception allowable state, 4A reception allowable state), it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state and responds to this. When a post-operation output sound (1A post-acceptance output sound, 2A post-acceptance output sound, 4A post-acceptance output sound) is output, the specific operation is performed while the post-operation output sound is being output. When it is detected that the means (operation button 410) has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state, the post-operation output sound in the output state can change with the detection as a trigger (Fig. 149 ( g), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state in a multiple-operation valid state (3A acceptance acceptable state) of a type in which no message display is displayed, in contrast to the 2A post-acceptance output sound shown in g). is detected and a corresponding post-operation output sound (3A post-acceptance output sound) is output, the specific operation means (operation Even if it is detected that the button 410) has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state, the post-operation output sound in the output state is prevented from being changed as a result of the detection. (3A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIGS. 152(g) and (h)). In the above example, the post-receipt output sound 3A shown in FIGS. 152(g) and (h) is not triggered by the detection, but is output for a predetermined output time and is terminated. there is According to this configuration, in the multiple-operation valid state, whether or not the message display is displayed determines whether the post-operation output sound changes when the specific operation means is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state. It becomes possible to suggest whether or not, and it is expected that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained.

In addition, in the first configuration A1 according to the above-described effect example, the specific operation means ( When it is detected that the operation button 410) is in an operated state and a corresponding post-operation output sound (3A post-reception output sound) is output, the post-operation output sound (3A post-reception output sound) is output. is being output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state in which the operation button 410 is not operated, the post-operation output in the output state The change (end) of the sound (output sound after reception of 3A) is not triggered by the detection, and is performed without the detection (for example, output for a predetermined output time). is terminated), and among the above multiple-operation valid states, the multiple-operation valid states (1A reception permitted state, 2A reception permitted state, state, 4A acceptance allowable state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is detected to be in the operating state, and the corresponding post-operation output sound (1A post-acceptance output sound, 2A post-acceptance output sound) , 4A post-acceptance output sound) is output, a non-operation state in which the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not operated from the operation state while the post-operation output sound is being output. When it is detected that it has become, the change (end) of the post-operation output sound in the output state is triggered by the detection (second A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149 (g)) 146 and 4A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146). According to such a configuration, when the message display is not displayed in the multiple-time operation valid state, the post-operation output sound does not change when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state. On the other hand, when the message display is displayed in the multiple-time operation valid state, the post-operation output sound changes when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state. Since it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not to occur, it is expected that the sense of tension will be preferably maintained.

Moreover, in the first configuration A1 according to the example of presentation described above, when one mode (message display MA2) is displayed as a message display, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state. When the post-operation output sound (2A post-acceptance output sound) sometimes changes (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)), the post-operation output sound (2A post-acceptance output sound ) does not change (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)). It becomes difficult to recognize whether or not a change occurs in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state. . However, this configuration does not necessarily have to be adopted. Even if there are cases where the post-operation output sound changes and cases where the post-operation output sound does not change according to the mode, compared to the case where the message display itself is not displayed at all, It can be expected that it will be difficult for the player to recognize "whether or not the output sound changes after the operation" at a certain level. However, it is desirable that the display of a message prompting multiple operations be displayed in such a manner that it cannot appear in an operation valid state in which only one operation is accepted (this is not an essential configuration).

Further, in the eighth configuration A8, among the multiple operation valid states, the multiple operation valid state (1A acceptance acceptable state, 2A acceptance acceptable state) of the type in which the message display is displayed, and the message display is not displayed. For each type of multiple operation valid state (3A reception allowable state), "multiple operation valid state in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the specific operation means is output multiple times just by maintaining the operation state ” may be prepared. In other words, in this case, if the message display is not displayed even though it is in the "multi-operation valid state in which the post-operation output sound is output multiple times only by maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state", the output state The change (end) of the post-operation output sound in , will not be triggered by the detection, and will be done without the detection, and when the message display is displayed, the operation in the output state The change (end) of the post-output sound may be triggered by the detection or not triggered by the detection.

Further, it is possible to determine whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state, and whether or not the change occurs when changing from the non-operating state to the operating state. It goes without saying that the configuration is based on the premise that the reception valid state is continued.

In addition, as described above, among the multiple operation valid states of the type in which the message display is displayed, in the special multiple operation valid state (2A reception allowable state), it becomes a non-operating state even though it is valid for one period. A post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2) whose output state is not terminated upon detection of a non-operation state is triggered, and the output state is terminated upon detection of a non-operation state. Since there are both cases where the post-operation output sound (the first post-reception output sound SA2) is output, in the 2A reception permission state, "the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not operated from the operation state. It becomes difficult to recognize whether or not a change occurs in the post-operation output sound when the state is changed."

Note that in the 1st A acceptance acceptable state, the 3rd A acceptance acceptable state, and the 4th A acceptance acceptable state according to the above-described production examples, the post-operation output sound that terminates the output state triggered by the detection of the non-operation state. is not output, and there is only a case where the post-operation output sound is output when the post-operation output sound is not terminated when the non-operation state is detected.

Further, with respect to the first configuration A1, the specific operation means may be realized as "an operation means that is targeted for display of a simulated image and that is allowed to receive operations multiple times".

Further, in order to realize the first configuration A1, the 4th A acceptance allowable state does not necessarily have to be provided, and even in this case, it is possible to obtain the configurations and effects described above.

Further, for example, as the second configuration A2, a multiple-time operation valid state is provided in which acceptance of operation on the specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and the multiple-time operation valid state includes the specific operation means (operation button 410 ) in the operation state, the corresponding post-operation output sound is not output multiple times (the 4th A reception acceptance state shown in FIG. 155), and the specific operation means (operation button 410 ) is maintained in the operation state and the corresponding post-operation output sound is output multiple times. 152), the post-operation output sound corresponding to the specific operation means (operation button 410) is output multiple times by simply maintaining the operation state. It is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state in the multiple operation valid state of the type (1A reception allowable state, 2A reception allowable state, 3A reception allowable state), and responds to this. When a post-operation output sound (post-1A reception output sound, 2A post-reception output sound, or 3A post-reception output sound) is output, the above operation output sound is output while the post-operation output sound is being output. When it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from the operating state to the non-operating state, the post-operation output sound in the output state can change with the detection as a trigger. On the other hand, (second A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)) is a plurality of types of post-operation output sounds that are not output multiple times only by maintaining the operation state of the specific operation means (operation button 410). It is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the above operation state in the turn operation valid state (4A acceptance allowable state), and a post-operation output sound (4A post-acceptance output sound) corresponding to this is output. In this case, even if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from the operating state to the non-operating state in which the post-operation output sound is being output. , the end of the post-operation output sound (the 4th A post-acceptance output sound) in the output state is not changed with the detection as a trigger (shown in FIGS. 155(g) and (h)). Output sound after reception of 4th A). In the above example, the 4th A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIGS. 155(g) and (h) is not triggered by the detection, but is output for a predetermined output time and then terminated. there is According to this configuration, in the multiple-operation valid state, the post-operation output sound changes when the specific operation means is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state depending on whether or not the so-called auto repeated hitting function is enabled. It becomes possible to suggest whether or not will occur, and it is expected that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained.

In addition, in the second configuration A2 according to the above-described effect example, particularly, in the multiple-operation valid state, if the specific operation means (operation button 410) is only maintained in the operation state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to it is generated. It is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state in the multiple operation valid state (4A reception allowable state) of the type that is not output multiple times, and the post-operation output sound (4A reception permission state) corresponding to this is detected. When the post-operation output sound) is output, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state in which the post-operation output sound is being output. Even if this is detected, the change (end) of the post-operation output sound in the output state is not triggered by the detection, and is performed without the detection (for example, a predetermined In contrast, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state in the multiple operation valid state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to it is generated. It is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state in the multiple-operation valid state (1A acceptance allowable state, 2A acceptance allowable state, 3A acceptability state) of the type output multiple times. If the corresponding post-operation output sound (post-1A reception output sound, 2A post-reception output sound, 3A post-reception output sound) is output according to this, it means that the post-operation output sound is being output. Among them, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state in which the operation is not performed, the change (end) of the post-operation output sound in the output state is 149(g)) and without detection (first A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146, FIG. 152 3A (output sound after reception) shown). According to such a configuration, when the so-called automatic continuous hitting function is not activated in the multiple-time operation valid state, the sound output changes after the operation when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state. However, when the so-called auto repeated hitting function is activated in the multiple operation valid state, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state Since it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not a change occurs in the post-operation output sound, it is expected that the sense of tension will be preferably maintained.

In addition, in the second configuration A2 according to the above-described effect example, the multiple-operation valid state of the type in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the specific operation means (operation button 410) is only maintained in the operation state is output multiple times. In (1A accepting acceptable state, 2A accepting accepting state, and 3A accepting accepting state), there are both cases in which the model image display is displayed in the first color scheme and in the second color scheme (Fig. 146). (c), FIG. 149(c), FIG. 152(c), etc.) is a type in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not output multiple times only by maintaining the operation state. In the multiple operation valid state (4th A acceptance acceptance state), there is at least a case where the model image display is displayed in the first color scheme (always the first color scheme is fine), but there is no case where it is displayed in the second color scheme. You may do so.

In this case, a multiple-operation valid state (1A acceptance allowable state, 2A acceptance state, etc.) of a type in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the operation is output multiple times only by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state Allowable state, 3A acceptance allowable state), it is sufficient that the model image display is displayed in both the first color scheme and the second color scheme. The states may include a predetermined multi-touch enabled state in which the simulated representation is displayed only in the first color scheme, or a specific state in which the simulated representation is displayed in neither the first nor the second color scheme. A multiple operation valid state may be included.

Further, as described above, among the multiple-operation valid states of the type in which the post-operation output sound is generated multiple times only by keeping the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operating state, the special multiple-operation valid state In the (2A acceptance acceptable state), a post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2) whose output state is not terminated upon detection of a non-operation state is generated even though there is only one effective period. and a case of generating a post-operation output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA2) for ending the output state triggered by the detection of the non-operation state. In the 2A acceptance allowable state, it is more preferable to have the effect of "making it difficult to recognize whether or not the post-operation output sound changes when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state." It will be played in

Further, it is possible to determine whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state, and whether or not the change occurs when changing from the non-operating state to the operating state. As for the configuration, it goes without saying that the configuration is based on the premise that the acceptance valid state is continued.

In addition, among the multiple operation valid states of the type in which the post-operation output sound is generated multiple times only by keeping the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state, a special multiple operation valid state (second In the 1A accepting allowable state or the 3A accepting allowable state), there is no case of outputting the post-operation output sound that terminates the output state triggered by the detection of the non-operating state. There is only a case where the post-operation output sound is output in such a way that the post-operation output sound is not terminated when the detection is triggered.

In addition, in the second configuration A2 according to the above-described effect example, the multiple-time operation valid state of the type in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the specific operation means (the operation button 410) is kept in the operation state is generated multiple times. is a post-operation output sound whose output state does not change (end) upon detection of a non-operation state even though it has only one effective period (2A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(h)) and a post-operation output sound (2A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)) whose output state changes (ends) triggered by the detection of the non-operation state. A multiple-time operation valid state (2A acceptance allowable state) of a type that has both cases and cases is provided. Also, a type in which only post-operation output sounds (post-1A reception output sound, 3A post-reception output sound) whose output state is not ended when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is detected to be in a non-operation state are generated. multiple-time operation valid state (1A reception allowable state, 3A reception allowable state). However, the multiple-operation valid state of the type in which only the post-operation output sound is generated, in which the output state ends when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is detected to be in the non-operation state, shall not be provided. becomes.

Further, with regard to the second configuration A2, the specific operation means may be realized as "an operation means which is a target of model image display and is allowed to accept operations a plurality of times".

In addition, in order to realize the second configuration A2, only one of the first A reception acceptance state and the third A reception acceptance state may be provided. It is possible to obtain an effect.

Further, for example, as the third configuration A3, a multiple-time operation valid state is provided in which a plurality of operation receptions for the specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted, and the multiple-time operation valid state includes periodic changes in the model image display. A type of multiple-operation valid state (2A-acceptable state shown in FIG. 149, 4A-acceptable state shown in FIG. 155) displayed so as to appear in units of time longer than a predetermined time, and a model image display. A multiple-time-operation valid state (1A reception-allowed state shown in FIG. 146, 3A reception-allowed state shown in FIG. 152) of a type displayed such that periodic changes appear in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time. If it is provided, in the multiple operation valid state (2A acceptance acceptable state, 4A acceptance acceptable state) of the type displayed so that the periodic change of the model image display appears in units of time longer than the predetermined time, the above specified When it is detected that the operating means (operation button 410) is in an operating state and a corresponding post-operation output sound (2A post-acceptance output sound, 4A post-acceptance output sound) is output, after the operation When it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state in which the output sound is being output, after the operation in the output state is detected. While the output sound can change with the detection as a trigger (second A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. It is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the above operation state in the multiple operation valid state (1A reception allowable state, 3A reception allowable state) of the type displayed in , and the operation corresponding to this is detected. When a post-output sound (1A post-acceptance output sound, 3A post-acceptance output sound) is output, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is pressed while the post-operation output sound is being output. Even if it is detected that the operating state has changed to a non-operating state in which no operation has been performed, the end of the post-operation output sound (post-4A reception output sound) in that output state is changed with the detection as a trigger. (1A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146, 3A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 152). In the above example, the first A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146 and the third A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. It is designed to be According to such a configuration, in the multiple-operation valid state, the after-operation output sound is produced when the specific operation means is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state through the length of time required for the periodic change of the model image display. It becomes possible to suggest whether or not a change will occur, and it is expected that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained.

Further, in the third configuration A3 according to the above-described effect example, in particular, among the above-described multiple-operation valid state, a plurality of types of types displayed such that the periodic change of the model image display appears in units of time equal to or less than the above-described predetermined time. It is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state in the turn operation valid state (1A reception allowable state, 3A reception allowable state), and a post-operation output sound (after 1A reception If the post-operation output sound, 3A post-reception output sound) is output, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not operated from the operation state while the post-operation output sound is being output. Even if it is detected that the non-operation state has been entered, the change (end) of the post-operation output sound in the output state is not triggered by the detection, and is performed without the detection. (For example, the output is terminated after being output for a predetermined output time). It is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state in the displayed type of multiple operation valid state (2A reception allowable state, 4A reception allowable state), and output after operation corresponding to this. When a sound (2A post-acceptance output sound, 4A post-acceptance output sound) is output, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state while the post-operation output sound is being output. 149(g), the change (end) of the post-operation output sound in the output state is triggered by the detection (shown in FIG. 149(g)). 2A post-acceptance output sound) and a case where the detection is not triggered (4A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 155). According to such a configuration, when the time required for the periodic change of the model image display in the multiple-operation valid state is relatively short, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state, While it is suggested that there is no change in the post-operation output sound, when the time required for the periodic change of the model image display in the multiple-time operation valid state is relatively long, the specific operation means is removed from the operation state. Since it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not the post-operation output sound changes when the operation state is set, it is expected that the sense of tension will be preferably maintained.

Further, in the third configuration A3 according to the above-described effect example, the multiple-time operation of the type displayed such that the periodic change of the model image display appears in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time in the multiple-time operation valid state. The effective state (1A acceptance acceptable state, 3A acceptance acceptable state) is defined as "a post-operation output sound (1A post-acceptance output sound, 1A post-acceptance output sound, 3A post-acceptance output sound, responsive to a specific operation means (operation button 410) being maintained in an operating state). 3A output sound after reception) is generated multiple times "Multiple operation valid state", but the type of multiple operation valid that is displayed so that periodic changes in the model image display appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time The state (2A acceptance acceptable state, 4A acceptance acceptable state) is a “multiple operation valid state in which a post-operation output sound is generated multiple times only by keeping the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state. (2A acceptance acceptable state), and "multiple operation valid state in which output sound after operation does not occur multiple times only by keeping the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state". If the time required for the cyclical change of the model image display is short, it suggests that the so-called auto-flick function is to be activated. In addition, when it takes a long time to periodically change the display of the model image, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the so-called auto repeated hitting function is activated. In this regard, even if the time required for the periodic change of the model image display is long, the post-operation output sound changes (end) when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state. When is generated, it is suggested that the so-called auto repeated hitting function is to be activated, so it can be expected that the amusement of the game is favorably maintained.

Further, as described above, among the types of multiple operation valid states (2A acceptance acceptable state, 4A acceptance acceptable state) that are displayed such that periodic changes in the model image display appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time, In the special multiple-time operation valid state (2A acceptance allowable state), the output state after operation is not terminated when the non-operation state is detected even though it is in one valid period (second acceptance state). Both the case of generating the post-output sound SB2) and the case of generating the post-operation output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA2) whose output state is terminated with the detection of the non-operation state as a trigger. Therefore, in the 2A reception permission state, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the post-operation output sound changes when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state. ” will be more favorably exhibited.

Of the types of multiple-operation valid states (2A-acceptable state, 4A-acceptable state) that are displayed such that periodic changes in the model image display appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time, special plural In the turn operation valid state (4th A reception allowable state), there is no case where the post-operation output sound that terminates the output state triggered by the detection of the non-operation state is detected, and the non-operation state is detected. There is only a case where the detection triggers the generation of the post-operation output sound that does not end the output state.

Further, a configuration for determining whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and a configuration for determining whether or not a change occurs when changing from a non-operating state to an operating state. As for the configuration, it goes without saying that the configuration is based on the premise that the acceptance valid state is continued.

Further, with regard to the third configuration A3, the specific operation means may be realized as "an operation means which is targeted for display of a model image and is allowed to accept operations a plurality of times".

Further, in the third configuration A3, a plurality of times may be prepared as the above-mentioned "time equal to or less than the predetermined time", or only one time (for example, "predetermined time") may be prepared. good. Similarly, a plurality of times may be prepared for the "time longer than the predetermined time", or only one time may be prepared.

Further, in order to realize the third configuration A3, the 3A acceptance allowable state does not necessarily have to be provided, and even in this case, it is possible to obtain the configurations and effects described above.

Further, for example, as a fourth configuration A4, a multiple-time operation valid state is provided in which multiple operation receptions for the operation means to be displayed as a model image are allowed multiple times, and the first operation means (operation button 410) and A second operating means (sword ornament 5001) is prepared, and as the multiple operation valid state, a multiple operation valid state of a type in which at least a simulated image display imitating the first operating means (operation button 410) is displayed. (1st A Acceptable State shown in FIG. 146, 2nd A Acceptable State shown in FIG. 149, 3rd A Acceptable State, 4th A Acceptable State shown in FIG. 149) and the second operation means (sword ornament 5001) are simulated. 158, and a multiple-operation valid state (5A-acceptance-allowed state shown in FIG. 158) of the type in which the simulated image display is displayed at least. The first operation means (operation button 410) in the multiple operation valid state (1A reception allowable state, 2A reception allowable state, 3A reception allowable state, 4A reception allowable state) of the type in which at least the image display is displayed is in the operating state, and corresponding post-operation output sounds (post-reception 1A output sound, post-reception 2A output sound, post-reception 3A output sound, post-reception 4A output sound) are output. In this case, when it is detected that the first operation means (operation button 410) has changed from the operating state to the non-operating state in which the post-operation output sound is being output. , the post-operation output sound in the output state can change with the detection as a trigger (second A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. ) is displayed at least in a multiple-operation valid state (5A acceptance acceptable state), it is detected that the second operating means (sword ornament 5001) is in the above-described operating state. When the post-operation output sound (post-5A reception output sound) corresponding to is output, the second operation means (sword ornament 5001) is operated while the post-operation output sound is being output. Even if it is detected that the state has changed to a non-operated state in which no operation has been performed, the end of the post-operation output sound (5A post-acceptance output sound) in the output state is changed with the detection as a trigger. (5A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 158). In the above example, the 5A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 158 is not triggered by the detection, but is output for a predetermined output time and is terminated. According to such a configuration, in the multiple-operation valid state, the operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state through the type of operation means for which the multiple-time operation is permitted and which is the target of the simulated image display. It becomes possible to suggest whether or not a change occurs in the post-operation output sound when the game is played, and it is expected that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained.

In addition, in the fourth configuration A4 according to the above-described production example, in particular, in the multiple-operation valid state, at least a model image display imitating the second operation means (sword ornament 5001) is displayed. It is detected that the second operating means (sword decoration 5001) is in the operating state in the turning operation valid state (5A acceptance allowable state), and a post-operation output sound (post-5A acceptance output sound) corresponding to this is detected. If it is output, it is detected that the second operating means (sword decoration 5001) has changed from the operating state to the non-operating state in which the post-operation output sound is being output. Even if the change (end) of the post-operation output sound in the output state is not triggered by the detection, it is not triggered by the detection (for example, the output time is set in advance). is output for a minute and terminated), whereas, among the multiple operation valid states, a multiple operation valid state of a type in which at least a simulated image display imitating the first operation means (operation button 410) is displayed. It is detected that the first operating means (operation button 410) is in the operating state in (1A reception allowable state, 2A reception allowable state, 3A reception allowable state, 4A reception allowable state), and responds to this. When a post-operation output sound (post-1A reception output sound, 2A post-reception output sound, 3A post-reception output sound, 4A post-reception output sound) is output, the state in which the post-operation output sound is output. When it is detected that the first operating means (operation button 410) has changed from the operating state to the non-operating state in which the operation button 410 is not operated, the post-operation output sound in the output state changes (end) is triggered by the detection (second A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)) and when not triggered by the detection (first A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146, 152, and the 4th A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 155). According to such a configuration, when the second operation means is the target of the simulated image display in the multiple-time operation enabled state and the second operation means is operated, the second operation means is disabled from the operation state. In contrast to suitably suggesting that no change occurs in the post-operation output sound when entering the operation state, when the first operation means is the target of the simulated image display and the first operation means is operated, Since it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not a change occurs in the post-operation output sound when the first operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state, it is possible to preferably maintain the sense of tension. come to be expected.

In addition, as described above, the multiple operation valid state (1A reception allowable state, 2A reception allowable state, 3A reception allowable state) in which at least a model image display imitating the first operation means (operation button 410) is displayed. In the special multiple operation valid state (2A acceptance allowable state), the output state is triggered by the detection of the non-operation state even though it is only one valid period. A case in which a post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2) that is not terminated is generated, and a post-operation output sound (first post-acceptance output sound) in which the output state is terminated with the detection of a non-operation state as a trigger Therefore, in the 2A reception permission state, the output sound SA2) is generated. It becomes difficult to recognize whether or not a change occurs in "."

In addition, in the multiple operation valid state (5A acceptance acceptable state) of the type in which at least a model image display imitating the second operation means (sword ornament 5001) is displayed, it is possible to detect that it has become a non-operating state. There is no case where the post-operation output sound that ends the output state is generated as a trigger, and there is only a case where the detection of the non-operation state is triggered and the post-operation output sound that does not end the output state is generated.

Further, a configuration for determining whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and a configuration for determining whether or not a change occurs when changing from a non-operating state to an operating state. As for the configuration, it goes without saying that the configuration is based on the premise that the acceptance valid state is continued.

Further, in order to realize the fourth configuration A4, the fourth A reception allowable state does not necessarily have to be provided, and even in this case, it is possible to obtain the respective configurations and effects described above.

In addition, in order to realize the fourth configuration A4, only one of the first A acceptance acceptable state and the third A acceptance acceptable state may be provided. It is possible to obtain an effect.

Further, for example, as the fifth configuration A5, a multiple-time operation valid state is provided in which a plurality of operation receptions for the specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted, and the multiple-time operation valid state is a first multiple-time operation valid state ( 2A acceptability state shown in FIG. 149), a second multiple-time operation valid state (fourth A acceptability state shown in FIG. 155), and a third multiple-time operation valid state (first A acceptability shown in FIG. 146). state) is prepared, and the first plural-time operation valid state (2A reception allowable state) is obtained after the operation corresponding to the detection is performed only by maintaining the operation state of the specific operation means (operation button 410). The change can be executed a plurality of times, but in this case, the interval until the post-manipulation change is newly started in response to the detection is an indefinite time. The state (4A acceptability state) is a state in which the post-operation change corresponding to the detection cannot be executed multiple times only by maintaining the operation state of the specific operation means (operation button 410). In the turn operation valid state (1A reception allowable state), the change after the operation according to the detection can be newly started at regular time intervals only by maintaining the operation state of the specific operation means. In this case, it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state in the first multiple-time operation valid state (2A acceptance allowable state), and a post-operation output sound (after 2A acceptance output sound) is output, it means that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from the operating state to the non-operating state in which the post-operation output sound is being output. When detected, the change (end) of the post-operation output sound in the output state can be triggered by the detection (second A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)), It is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operating state in the second multiple-time operation valid state (4A acceptance allowable state), and a post-operation output sound (4A post-acceptance output sound) corresponding to this is detected. is output, it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from the operating state to the non-operating state in which the post-operation output sound is being output. However, the change (end) of the post-operation output sound in the output state is not triggered by the detection, and is performed without the detection (for example, only for a predetermined output time (4A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 155), and the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the third plural-time operation valid state (1A acceptance allowable state) is detected to be in an operating state and a corresponding post-operation output sound (1A post-acceptance output sound) is output, while the post-operation output sound is being output, the specified Even if it is detected that the operating means (operation button 410) has changed from the operating state to the non-operating state, the change (end) of the post-operation output sound in the output state is triggered by the detection. 146).

According to such a configuration, first, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is kept in the operated state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection cannot be generated a plurality of times. It is possible to suitably suggest that the post-operation output sound (4A post-reception output sound) does not change when the operation state is changed to the non-operation state. In this respect, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operated state and the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated a plurality of times, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is operated. When changing from the state to the non-operating state, there is a change in the post-operation output sound (2A post-reception output sound) and a case where there is no change in the post-operation output sound (1A post-reception output sound). ), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is controlled by whether or not the post-operation output sound is output at regular time intervals when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operated state. It is expected that it will be possible to suggest whether or not a change occurs in the post-operation output sound when the operating means (operation button 410) is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state, and that the enjoyment of the game will be favorably maintained. Become so.

Further, it is possible to determine whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state, and whether or not the change occurs when changing from the non-operating state to the operating state. It goes without saying that the configuration is based on the premise that the reception valid state is continued.

In addition, in the fifth configuration A5, the operation means when the so-called auto-flick function is not activated in the multiple-time operation valid state and the operation means when the so-called auto-flick function is activated in the multiple-time operation valid state , are assumed to be the same operation means as the "specific operation means", but this is not necessarily the case. In addition, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the first multiple-time operation valid state, the second multiple-time operation valid state, and the third multiple-time operation valid state are the same operation means, but this is not necessarily the case. can't For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means represented as a simulated image display and allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple-time operation valid state.

Further, in order to realize the fifth configuration A5, the multiple-operation valid state is provided with the 3A acceptance allowable state instead of the 1A acceptance allowable state. 3 It may be realized as a multiple-time operation valid state. Alternatively, both the 1st A acceptance allowable state and the 3rd A acceptability state may be provided as the multiple-time operation valid state.

Further, for example, as the sixth configuration A6, a multiple-time operation valid state is provided in which acceptance of operation on the specific operation means (operation button 410) is allowed multiple times, and the multiple-time operation valid state is a first multiple-time operation valid state ( 2A acceptability state shown in FIG. 149), a second multiple-time operation valid state (fourth A acceptability state shown in FIG. 155), and a third multiple-time operation valid state (first A acceptability shown in FIG. 146). state) is prepared, and the first plural-time operation valid state (2A reception allowable state) is obtained after the operation corresponding to the detection is performed only by maintaining the operation state of the specific operation means (operation button 410). The change can be executed a plurality of times, and the interval until the post-operation change is newly started in response to the detection is always longer than the specific time. The operation valid state (4A acceptance allowable state) is a state in which the post-operation change corresponding to the detection cannot be executed multiple times only by maintaining the operation state of the specific operation means (operation button 410). In the 3-multiple operation valid state (1A acceptance allowable state), the post-operation change corresponding to the detection can be executed multiple times only by maintaining the operation state of the specific operation means (operation button 410), At that time, if the interval until the post-operation change is newly started to be executed in response to the detection is always set to a time equal to or less than a specific time, the first multiple-time operation valid state (2A acceptability state), when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operating state and a post-operation output sound (2A post-acceptance output sound) corresponding to this is output, the post-operation output sound is When it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state in which the operation button 410 is in the output state, the post-operation output sound in the output state is detected. The change (end) can be triggered by the detection (2A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)), and the above-mentioned second multiple operation valid state (4A acceptance allowable state). When it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state and a corresponding post-operation output sound (4A post-reception output sound) is output, the post-operation output sound is output. Even if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state in which the operation button 410 is in the state of being in the state of being operated, the change in the post-operation output sound in the output state (End) is not triggered by the detection, and is done without the detection (for example, output for a predetermined output time is terminated) (Fig. 4A post-acceptance output sound shown in 155), it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state in the above-mentioned third multiple operation valid state (first A reception allowable state). When the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) is output, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is operated from the operation state while the post-operation output sound is being output. Even if it is detected that a non-operational state has been entered, the change (end) of the post-operation output sound in the output state is not triggered by the detection, and is not triggered by the detection. (For example, it is output for a predetermined output time and terminated) (first A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146).

According to such a configuration, first, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is kept in the operated state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection cannot be generated a plurality of times. It is possible to suitably suggest that the post-operation output sound (4A post-reception output sound) does not change when the operation state is changed to the non-operation state. In this regard, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operated state and the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated a plurality of times, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is operated. When changing from the state to the non-operating state, there is a change in the post-operation output sound (2A post-reception output sound), and there is no change in the post-operation output sound (1A post-reception output sound). ), the interval from the output of the post-operation output sound to the new output when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state is a specific time. It is possible to suggest whether or not a change occurs in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state, depending on whether or not it is longer than or not. Good maintenance of interest becomes expected.

Further, a configuration for determining whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and a configuration for determining whether or not a change occurs when changing from a non-operating state to an operating state. As for the configuration, it goes without saying that the configuration is based on the premise that the acceptance valid state is continued.

In addition, in the sixth configuration A6, the operation means when the so-called auto-flick function is not activated in the multiple-time operation valid state and the operation means when the so-called auto-flick function is activated in the multiple-time operation valid state , are assumed to be the same operation means as the "specific operation means", but this is not necessarily the case. In addition, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the first multiple-time operation valid state, the second multiple-time operation valid state, and the third multiple-time operation valid state are the same operation means, but this is not necessarily the case. can't For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means represented as a simulated image display and allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple-time operation valid state.

Further, in order to realize the sixth configuration A6, the multiple-operation valid state is provided with the 3A acceptance allowable state instead of the 1A acceptance allowable state. 3 It may be realized as a multiple-time operation valid state. Alternatively, both the 1st A acceptance allowable state and the 3rd A acceptability state may be provided as the multiple-time operation valid state.

Further, for example, as a seventh configuration A7, a multiple-time operation valid state is provided in which a plurality of operation receptions for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted, and a predetermined end timing arrives as the multiple-time operation valid state. 146. A multiple-time operation valid state of a type in which the operation valid state can be terminated based on the fact that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is detected to be in the operation state before the operation is performed (second operation shown in FIG. 146). 1A accepting allowable state, 2A accepting allowable state shown in FIG. 149), and that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operating state before the arrival of the predetermined end timing. Based on this, if a multiple-time operation valid state (3A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 152, 4A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 155) of a type in which the operation valid state is not terminated, A multiple-operation valid state of a type in which the operation valid state can be terminated based on detection that the specific operation means (the operation button 410) is in the operation state before the arrival of the predetermined end timing. It is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operating state in (1A reception allowable state, 2A reception allowable state), and a post-operation output sound (1A post-acceptance output sound, 1A post-acceptance output sound, 2A post-acceptance output sound) is output, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state in which the post-operation output sound is being output. When it is detected that it is not, the post-operation output sound in the output state can change with the detection as a trigger (second A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)), If it is detected that the specific operation means (the operation button 410) is in the operation state before the end timing set is reached, a multiple-time operation valid state (second In the 3A acceptance acceptable state, 4A acceptance acceptable state), it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state, and the post-operation output sound (3A post-acceptance output sound, 4A When the post-acceptance output sound) is output, the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from the operating state to the non-operating state in which the post-operation output sound is being output. Even if this is detected, the end of the post-operation output sound in the output state (3A post-acceptance output sound, 4A post-acceptance output sound) will not be changed with the detection as a trigger. (3A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 152, 4A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 155). In the above example, the 3rd A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 152 and the 4th A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. It is designed to be According to such a configuration, in the multiple-time operation effective state, the specific operation means is determined based on whether or not the operation effective state is ended based on the detection that the specific operation means is in the operation state. It becomes possible to suggest whether or not the post-operation output sound will change when the operation state is changed to the non-operation state, and it is expected that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained.

Further, in the seventh configuration A7 according to the above-described effect example, particularly, the specific operation means (the operation button 410) is set to the operation state before the predetermined end timing of the multiple operation valid state. The specific operation means (operation button 410) is operated in a multiple operation valid state (3A acceptance acceptable state, 4A acceptance acceptable state) of a type in which the operation valid state is not terminated based on the fact that the operation valid state is detected to be state is detected and a corresponding post-operation output sound (3A post-reception output sound, 4A post-reception output sound) is output, the post-operation output sound is being output. Among them, even if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state in which it is not operated, the change (end) of the post-operation output sound in the output state is , is not triggered by the detection, and is performed without the detection (for example, output for a predetermined output time is terminated), whereas the multiple-time operation valid state Among them, a plurality of times of a type that can end the operation effective state based on detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state before the arrival of the predetermined end timing. It is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state in the operation valid state (1A reception allowable state, 2A reception allowable state), and a post-operation output sound (1A post-acceptance output) is generated in response to this detection. 2A post-acceptance output sound) is output, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not operated from the operation state while the post-operation output sound is being output. When the state is detected, the change (end) of the post-operation output sound in the output state is triggered by the detection (2A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(g) ) and a case where the detection is not triggered (1A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146). According to such a configuration, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state before the arrival of the predetermined end timing, the operation effective state is not terminated. In the operation valid state, it is suggested that the post-operation output sound does not change when the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state. In a multiple operation valid state of a type in which the operation valid state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means is in the operation state before, the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state. Since it is possible to sometimes make it difficult to recognize whether or not the post-operation output sound changes, it is expected that the sense of tension will be preferably maintained.

In addition, in the seventh configuration A7, there are a plurality of types of types in which the valid operation state is not terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means is in the operation state before the arrival of the predetermined termination timing. Based on the fact that the operating means to be operated a plurality of times in the single operation valid state and the specific operating means being in the operating state before the arrival of the predetermined end timing, the operation is performed. It is assumed that the operation means that can be operated multiple times in the effective state and the operation means that can be operated multiple times in the effective state are all the same operation means as the "specific operation means", but this is not necessarily the case. can't For example, in the multiple-time operation effective state, when the "operation means" expressed as a simulated image display is operated, the operation effective state can be terminated as a trigger. A7 may be specified.

Further, the "multiple operation valid state" related to the seventh configuration A7 may be a valid period that occurs during symbol variation based on the big hit determination.

Further, in the seventh configuration A7 according to the above-described effect example, the specific operation means (the operation button 410) is in the operation state before the predetermined end timing arrives in the multiple operation valid state. The multiple-time operation valid state (1A acceptance acceptable state, 2A acceptance acceptable state) of the type in which the operation valid state can be terminated based on the detection of the Only by maintaining the state, the corresponding post-operation output sound (post-1A reception output sound, 2A post-reception output sound) is generated multiple times. A multiple-time-operation valid state (3A reception-permitting state , 4th A acceptance allowable state) is a case where it occurs as a "multiple operation valid state in which a post-operation output sound is generated multiple times only by keeping the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state" (4th 3A acceptance allowable state), and "multiple operation valid state in which output sound after operation is not generated multiple times only by keeping the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state" (4A reception allowable state). allowable state) and both.

In addition, as described above, the operation enabled state can be ended based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state before the arrival of the predetermined end timing. Among the multiple operation valid states (1A acceptance allowable state, 2A acceptance allowable state), in the special multiple operation enable state (2A acceptance allowable state), even though it is valid for one period, it is in a non-operating state. Triggered by the detection of a non-operating state, a post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2) is generated for which the output state is not terminated, and the output state is terminated upon detection of a non-operating state. In the 2A acceptance allowable state, it is possible to generate the post-operation output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA2). This makes it difficult to recognize whether or not a change occurs in the post-operation output sound when entering the operation state.

On the other hand, there is a type in which the operation effective state can be terminated based on detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state before the arrival of the predetermined termination timing. In the special multiple operation valid state (1A acceptance allowable state) among the multiple operation valid states (1A acceptance allowable state, 2A acceptance allowable state), it is output triggered by the detection of the non-operation state. There is no case where the post-operation output sound that ends the state is generated, and there is only a case where the detection of the non-operation state is triggered to generate the post-operation output sound that does not end the output state.

Further, in the seventh configuration A7, the operation valid state is changed based on the detection that the specific operation means (the operation button 410) is in the operation state before the predetermined end timing arrives. In the multiple-operation valid state (1A acceptance acceptable state, 2A acceptance acceptable state) of the type that can be terminated, the message display MA is always displayed (message displays MA1, MA2), but the predetermined end timing is A multiple-time operation valid state (3A acceptability state, In the 4th A acceptable state), there are cases where the message display MA is displayed (4th A acceptable state) and cases where the message display MA is not displayed (3A acceptable state).

Further, a configuration for determining whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and a configuration for determining whether or not a change occurs when changing from a non-operating state to an operating state. It goes without saying that the configuration is based on the premise that the reception valid state is continued.

Further, with regard to the seventh configuration A7, the specific operation means may be realized as "an operation means that is targeted for display of a model image and that is allowed to receive operations multiple times".

Further, in order to realize the seventh configuration A7, only one of the 3A reception allowable state and the 4A reception allowable state may be provided. It is possible to obtain at least some of the effects.

Further, for example, as the eighth configuration A8, a multiple-time operation valid state in which acceptance of operation on the specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times is provided, and the multiple-time operation valid state includes the specific operation means (operation button 410). 146, the second A acceptance allowable state shown in FIG. 155) and a multiple operation valid state (3A reception acceptable state shown in FIG. 152) of a type in which the message display is not displayed, the message display is not displayed. In the multiple-operation valid state (3A acceptance allowable state) of the type, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operating state, the post-operation output sound is set as the post-operation output sound. When the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operation state to the non-operation state in which the operation button 410 is being output, the post-operation output sound from the timing when the specific operation means changes to the non-operation state. Only sounds that do not take a fixed amount of time until they are rendered inaudible (sounds that are not processed as a fixed amount of time and have an indefinite amount of time) can be output (after reception of 3A shown in FIG. 152). output sound), in the multiple operation valid state (1A reception allowable state, 2A reception allowable state, 4A reception allowable state) of the type in which the message display is displayed, the specific operation means (operation button 410 ) is in the operating state, the post-operation output sound is "non-operating state in which the specific operating means (operation button 410) is not operated from the operating state while the post-operation output sound is being output." state, the time from the timing when the above-mentioned specific operation means changes to the non-operation state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible, is processed as a fixed time". (No. 2A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)) and “non-operation in which the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not operated from the operation state while the post-operation output sound is being output. state, the time from the timing when the above-mentioned specific operation means changes to the non-operation state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not constant (sound with undefined time)." can be output (first A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146, fourth A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 155). In the example described above, the post-reception output sound 2A shown in FIG. "0 second" is set as the time of

According to such a configuration, when the post-operation output sound is in the output state and the message display is not displayed in the multiple-time operation valid state, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state. It is difficult to guess how long it will take for the post-operation output sound that is in the output state to end after being in the non-operation state. is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state, it is possible to preferably suggest that the notable performance is low. On the other hand, in the multiple-time operation enabled state, when the post-operation output sound is in the output state and the message display is displayed, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state There are both cases where it is possible to guess how long it will take for the post-operation output sound in the output state to end after it has entered the non-operation state, and there are cases where it is difficult to guess. Therefore, for example, while suggesting the possibility that the performance after changing the specific operation means (operation button 410) from the operating state to the non-operating state is worth noting, The post-operation output sound in the output state does not necessarily end after a certain amount of time has elapsed since the operation was performed, and it is expected that the sense of tension when switching to the non-operation state will be preferably maintained. Become so.

Moreover, in the first configuration A1 according to the above-described effect example, when one mode (message display MA2) appears as the message display, the post-operation output sound is "While the post-operation output sound is being output, When the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operation state to the non-operation state in which the operation button 410 is not operated, the post-operation output sound is disabled from the timing when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes to the non-operation state. 149(g) is output (second post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)), and “post-operation output sound is being output, when the specified operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operated state to the non-operated state, from the timing when the specified operation means (operation button 410) changes to the non-operated state When the post-operation output sound is rendered inaudible for a period of time for which the time is not constant" is output (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) I made it so. With such a configuration, for example, even under a situation in which one mode (message display MA2) is displayed as a message display, after the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state, While suggesting the possibility that the performance may be worth noting, try not to necessarily end the post-operation output sound that is in the output state after a certain amount of time has passed after being in the non-operation state. Therefore, it is expected that the sense of tension in the non-operating state can be suitably maintained.

Further, in the eighth configuration A8, among the multiple operation valid states, the multiple operation valid state (1A acceptance acceptable state, 2A acceptance acceptable state) of the type in which the message display is displayed, and the message display is not displayed. For each type of multiple operation valid state (3A reception allowable state), "multiple operation valid state in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the specific operation means is output multiple times just by maintaining the operation state ” can be prepared as In other words, in this case, if the message display is not displayed even though it is in the "multi-operation valid state in which the post-operation output sound is output multiple times only by maintaining the specific operation means in the operation state", the output state The change (end) of the post-operation output sound in , will not be triggered by the detection, and will be done without the detection, and when the message display is displayed, the operation in the output state The change (end) of the post-output sound may be triggered by the detection or not triggered by the detection.

Further, it is possible to determine whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state, and whether or not the change occurs when changing from the non-operating state to the operating state. It goes without saying that the configuration is based on the premise that the reception valid state is continued.

In addition, as described above, among the multiple operation valid states of the type in which the message display is displayed, in the special multiple operation valid state (2A reception allowable state), even though it is only one valid period, the post-operation output sound "When the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operation state to the non-operation state in which the post-operation output sound is being output, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed to the non-operation state. ) is output until the post-operation output sound is rendered inaudible. Post-output sound SA2) and "When the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the non-operating state is changed to the non-operating state. If the time from the timing when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is turned to the time when the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is not a constant time" is output (shown in FIG. 149(h) 2nd post-acceptance output sound SB2), for example, in the 2A reception-permitting state, the performance after changing the specific operation means (operation button 410) from the operating state to the non-operating state While suggesting the possibility that is worth noting, the post-operation output sound that is in the output state does not necessarily end after a certain amount of time has passed since it is in the non-operation state. It will be expected that the tension in the non-operating state will be preferably maintained.

Note that in the 1st A acceptance acceptable state, the 3rd A acceptance acceptable state, and the 4th A acceptance acceptable state according to the above-described production examples, the post-operation output sound that terminates the output state triggered by the detection of the non-operation state. is not output, and there is only a case where the post-operation output sound is output when the post-operation output sound is not terminated when the non-operation state is detected.

Also, "the time from the timing when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is put into the non-operation state until the post-operation output sound is made inaudible" is set as any time. It may be "0 seconds".

Further, with respect to the eighth configuration A8, the specific operation means may be realized as "an operation means that is targeted for display of a model image and that is allowed to receive operations multiple times".

Further, in order to realize the eighth configuration A8, the fourth A acceptance allowable state does not necessarily have to be provided, and even in this case, it is possible to obtain the above configurations and effects.

Further, for example, as a ninth configuration A9, a multiple-time operation valid state is provided in which acceptance of operation on a specific operation means (operation button 410) is allowed multiple times, and the multiple-time operation valid state includes the specific operation means (operation button 410 ) is maintained in the operation state and the corresponding post-operation output sound is output multiple times. 152), and a multiple operation valid state (see FIG. 155) in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is not output multiple times only by maintaining the operation state of the specific operation means. 4A acceptance allowable state shown), a type of multiple operation valid in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not output multiple times only by maintaining the operation state In the state (4A acceptance allowable state), when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operating state, the post-operation output sound "While the post-operation output sound is being output, When the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operation state to the non-operation state in which the operation button 410 is not operated, the post-operation output sound is made inaudible from the timing when the specific operation means changes to the non-operation state. Only the sound for which the time until the time is not constant (the sound that is not processed as a constant time and has an indefinite time) can be output (the 4th A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 155). , a multiple-operation valid state (1A reception allowable state, 2A reception allowable state) of a type in which a corresponding post-operation output sound is output a plurality of times only by maintaining the above-mentioned specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state. , 3A Acceptable State), when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operating state, the post-operation output sound is set to "the specific operation means while the post-operation output sound is output. When the operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state in which the operation button 410 is not operated, from the timing when the specific operation means is changed to the non-operation state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible. 149(g)) is output, and when the above specified post-operation output sound is being output, When the operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state in which the operation button 410 is not operated, from the timing when the specific operation means is changed to the non-operation state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible. If the time is not a constant time (sound with an indefinite time)" can be output (1A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146, 3A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 152) I made it so that there is In the above example, the post-2A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. "0 second" is set as the time of

According to such a configuration, when the so-called auto repeated hitting function is not activated in the multiple-operation valid state, the post-operation state in the output state when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state. It is difficult to estimate how long it will take for the output sound to end after the non-operating state. It becomes possible to preferably suggest that the notable performance is low under the situation where there is no such effect. On the other hand, when the so-called auto repeated hitting function is activated in the multiple operation valid state, the post-operation output sound that is in the output state when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state. Since there are both cases where it is possible to estimate how long it will take to complete the operation after entering the non-operating state and cases where it is difficult to estimate, for example, the specific operation means While suggesting the possibility that the performance after switching from the operated state to the non-operated state may be worth noting, it is not necessarily the output state after a certain amount of time has passed since the non-operated state. The output sound is no longer necessarily terminated, and it is expected that the sense of tension in the non-operating state will be preferably maintained.

Further, in the ninth configuration A9 according to the above-described effect example, the multiple-operation valid state of the type in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the specific operation means (the operation button 410) is kept in the operation state is output multiple times. In (1A acceptance acceptable state, 2A acceptance acceptance state, 3A acceptance acceptance state), there are both cases in which the model image display is displayed in the first color scheme and in the second color scheme (Fig. 146). (c), FIG. 149(c), FIG. 152(c), etc.) is a type in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not output multiple times only by maintaining the operation state. In the multiple operation valid state (4th A reception acceptance state), there is at least a case where the model image display is displayed in the first color scheme (always the first color scheme is fine), but there is no case where it is displayed in the second color scheme. You may do so.

In this case, a multiple-operation valid state (1A reception allowable state, 2A reception permission state, etc.) of a type in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the operation is output multiple times only by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state Allowable state, 3A accepting allowable state), it is sufficient if the model image display is displayed in both the first color scheme and the second color scheme. The states may include a predetermined multi-touch enabled state in which the simulated representation is displayed only in the first color scheme, or a specific state in which the simulated representation is displayed in neither the first nor the second color scheme. A multiple operation valid state may be included.

Further, as described above, in the ninth configuration A9 according to the above-described effect example, a plurality of types of post-operation output sounds are generated a plurality of times according to the specific operation means (operation button 410) only by maintaining the operation state. Among the multiple operation valid states, in the special multiple operation valid state (2A reception allowable state), although it is only one valid period, the post-operation output sound is "While the post-operation output sound is being output, the above-mentioned When the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operation state to the non-operation state in which the operation button 410 is not operated, the post-operation output sound is made inaudible from the timing when the specific operation means changes to the non-operation state. 149 (first post-reception output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) and “while the post-operation output sound is being output. When the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operation state to the non-operation state in which the operation button 410 is not operated, the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible from the timing when the specific operation means changes to the non-operation state. 149 (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)). Therefore, in the special multiple-operation valid state (2A reception-permitting state), it seems to suggest the possibility that the performance after changing the above-mentioned specific operation means from the operating state to the non-operating state is worth noting. However, the post-operation output sound in the output state does not necessarily end after a certain amount of time has elapsed since the operation was disabled. It will be expected to keep well.

Further, it is possible to determine whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state, and whether or not the change occurs when changing from the non-operating state to the operating state. As for the configuration, it goes without saying that the configuration is based on the premise that the acceptance valid state is continued.

Further, in the ninth configuration A9 according to the above-described effect example, the multiple-time operation of the type in which the post-operation output sound is generated multiple times only by maintaining the operation state of the specific operation means (operation button 410). Of the valid states, in a special multiple-operation valid state (1A acceptance acceptable state or 3A acceptance acceptable state), as the post-operation output sound, "While the post-operation output sound is being output, the specific operation means ( When the operation button 410) changes from the operated state to the non-operated state, the time from the timing when the specific operation means changes to the non-operated state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible. A non-operation state in which the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not operated from the operation state while the post-operation output sound is being output. , the time from the timing when the above-mentioned specific operation means changes to the non-operation state until the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is not a constant time (sound with an undefined time)" There is only a case to output.

Also, "the time from the timing when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is put into the non-operation state until the post-operation output sound is made inaudible" is set as any time. It may be "0 seconds".

Further, with regard to the ninth configuration A9, the specific operation means may be realized as "an operation means that is targeted for display of a model image and that is allowed to receive operations multiple times".

In addition, in order to realize the ninth configuration A9, only one of the first A reception allowable state and the third A reception allowable state may be provided. It is possible to obtain an effect.

Further, for example, as the tenth configuration A10, a multiple-time operation valid state is provided in which acceptance of operation on the specific operation means (operation button 410) is allowed multiple times, and the multiple-time operation valid state includes periodic changes in the model image display. A type of multiple-operation valid state (2A-acceptable state shown in FIG. 149, 4A-acceptable state shown in FIG. 155) displayed so as to appear in units of time longer than a predetermined time, and a model image display. A multiple-time-operation valid state (1A reception-allowed state shown in FIG. 146, 3A reception-allowed state shown in FIG. 152) of a type displayed such that periodic changes appear in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time. If it is provided, in the multiple-operation valid state (1A reception permitted state, 3A reception permitted state) of the type displayed so that the periodic change of the model image display appears in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time, the above When it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operating state, the post-operation output sound is "while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is being operated while the post-operation output sound is output." When the state changes to a non-operating state, the time from the timing when the specific operation means changes to the non-operating state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not a constant time ( 146 and 3A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146). On the other hand, in the multiple-operation valid state (2A acceptance acceptable state, 4A acceptance acceptable state) of the type displayed such that periodic changes in the model image display appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time, the specific operation means When it is detected that (the operation button 410) is in the operating state, the post-operation output sound is "while the specific operation means (the operation button 410) is being operated from the operating state while the post-operation output sound is being output." sound that is processed as a fixed period of time from the timing when the above-mentioned specific operation means enters the non-operating state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible when the non-operating state is entered. 149(g)), and "While the post-operation output sound is being output, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is operated from the operation state. In the case of a non-operating state, the time from the timing when the above-mentioned specific operating means changes to the non-operating state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not a fixed time (in a non-fixed time) A certain sound)” can be output (the 4th A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 155). In the above example, the post-2A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. "0 second" is set as the time of

According to such a configuration, when the time required for the periodic change of the model image display in the multiple-time operation enabled state is relatively short, the operation in the output state when the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state. It is difficult to estimate how long it will take for the post-output sound to end after the non-operating state. It becomes possible to suitably suggest that the notable performance is low. On the other hand, when the time required for the periodic change of the model image display is relatively long in the multiple-time operation valid state, the post-operation output sound that is in the output state when the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state. Since there are both cases where it is possible to estimate how long it will take to complete the operation after entering the non-operating state and cases where it is difficult to estimate, the specific operation means is operated. While trying to suggest the possibility that the performance after changing from the state to the non-operating state may be worth noting, the post-operation output sound that is always output after a certain amount of time has passed since the non-operating state. is no longer necessarily terminated, and it is expected that the sense of tension when the user is in the non-operating state will be preferably maintained.

Further, in the tenth configuration A10 according to the above-described effect example, in the multiple-operation valid state, the multiple-operation of the type displayed such that the periodic change of the model image display appears in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time. The effective state (1A acceptance acceptable state, 3A acceptance acceptable state) is defined as "a post-operation output sound (1A post-acceptance output sound, 1A post-acceptance output sound, 3A post-acceptance output sound, responsive to a specific operation means (operation button 410) being maintained in an operating state). 3A output sound after reception) is generated multiple times "Multiple operation valid state", but the type of multiple operation valid that is displayed so that periodic changes in the model image display appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time The state (2A acceptance acceptable state, 4A acceptance acceptable state) is a “multiple operation valid state in which a post-operation output sound is generated multiple times only by keeping the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operation state. (2A acceptance acceptable state), and "multiple operation valid state in which output sound after operation does not occur multiple times only by keeping the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state". If the time required for the cyclical change of the model image display is short, it suggests that the so-called auto-flick function is to be activated. In addition, when it takes a long time to periodically change the display of the model image, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the so-called auto repeated hitting function is activated. In this regard, even if the time required for the periodic change of the model image display is long, the post-operation output sound is "when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is operated while the post-operation output sound is being output." When the state changes to a non-operating state in which no operation is performed, the time from the timing when the specific operation means changes to the non-operating state until the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is processed as a constant time. When the "sound of hitting" is output, it is suggested that the so-called auto repeated hitting function is to be activated.

Further, in the tenth configuration A10 according to the above-described effect example, in the multiple-time operation valid state, the multiple-time operation of the type displayed such that the periodic change of the model image display appears in units of time longer than the predetermined time. In the valid state, the model image display may be displayed in the first color scheme or in the second color scheme. In the multiple operation enabled state of the type that does not generate multiple sounds, the model image display may at least be displayed in the first color scheme (always the first color scheme is fine), but it may not be displayed in the second color scheme. .

Further, as described above, among the types of multiple operation valid states (2A acceptance acceptable state, 4A acceptance acceptable state) that are displayed such that periodic changes in the model image display appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time, In the special multiple-operation valid state (2A reception-permitting state), the post-operation output sound "while the post-operation output sound is being output, the specific operation means (operation button 410 ) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state, the time from the timing when the above-mentioned specific operating means changes to the non-operating state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is a certain period of time. (the first post-reception output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)), and in the case where the post-operation output sound is output, the specific operation means (operation When the button 410) changes from the operated state to the non-operated state, the time from the timing when the specific operation means changes to the non-operated state until the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is constant. 149 (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)). In the operation valid state (2A reception permission state), for example, while suggesting the possibility that the performance after changing the specific operation means from the operation state to the non-operation state may be worth noting, To prevent a post-operation output sound in an output state from being necessarily terminated after a lapse of a fixed time after being put into an operation state, and to suitably maintain the sense of tension when making a non-operation state. is expected.

Of the types of multiple operation valid states (2A acceptance acceptable state, 4A acceptance acceptable state) that are displayed so that periodic changes in the model image display appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time, a special multiple In the turn operation valid state (4A acceptance allowable state), the post-operation output sound is "non-operation in which the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not operated from the operation state while the post-operation output sound is being output. state, the time from the timing when the above-mentioned specific operation means becomes the non-operation state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is output as a fixed time. "When the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state in which the post-operation output sound is being output, the specific operation means is in the non-operation state. There is only a case where a sound whose time is not fixed (sound whose time is indefinite) from the timing when the output sound is made inaudible after the operation is output.

Further, a configuration for determining whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and a configuration for determining whether or not a change occurs when changing from a non-operating state to an operating state. It goes without saying that the configuration is based on the premise that the reception valid state is continued.

Further, with regard to the tenth configuration A10, the specific operation means may be realized as "an operation means that is targeted for display of a model image and that is allowed to receive operations multiple times".

Further, in the tenth configuration A10, a plurality of times may be prepared as the above-mentioned "time equal to or less than the predetermined time", or only one time (for example, "predetermined time") may be prepared. good. Similarly, a plurality of times may be prepared for the "time longer than the predetermined time", or only one time may be prepared.

Further, in order to realize the tenth configuration A10, the third A acceptance allowable state does not necessarily have to be provided.

Further, for example, as the eleventh configuration A11, a multiple-time operation valid state is provided in which multiple operations are permitted for the operation means to be displayed as a model image, and the first operation means (operation button 410) and A second operating means (sword ornament 5001) is prepared, and as the multiple operation valid state, a multiple operation valid state of a type in which at least a simulated image display imitating the first operating means (operation button 410) is displayed. (the first A acceptance allowable state shown in FIG. 146, the second A acceptance allowable state shown in FIG. 149, the third A acceptance allowable state shown in FIG. 152, the fourth A acceptance allowable state shown in FIG. 155), and the second and a multiple-time operation valid state (5A acceptability state shown in FIG. 158) in which at least a model image display imitating the operation means (sword ornament 5001) is displayed, the above-mentioned second operation The second operation means (sword decoration 5001) is in an operation state in a multiple-time operation valid state (5A reception permission state) of a type in which at least a model image display imitating the means (sword decoration 5001) is displayed. is detected, as the post-operation output sound, "when the second operating means (sword ornament 5001) is operated from the operating state while the post-operation output sound is being output, it becomes a non-operating state where it is not operated , the time from the timing when the second operating means (sword ornament 5001) is put into the non-operating state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not a constant time (it is processed as a constant time). 158) can be output (5A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 158). is displayed at least in the multiple operation valid state (1A reception allowable state, 2A reception allowable state, 3A reception allowable state, 4A reception allowable state), the first operation means (operation button 410) is operated When the state is detected, the post-operation output sound is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state in which the first operation means (operation button 410) is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output. sound processed as a constant time from the timing when the first operating means (operation button 410) is put into the non-operating state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible. 149(g)), and "While the post-operation output sound is being output, the first operation means (operation button 410) is operated from the operation state. When a non-operating state is entered, the time from the timing when the first operation means (operation button 410) is changed to the non-operating state until the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is a certain period of time. 146, output sound after 3A reception shown in FIG. 152, output sound after 4A reception shown in FIG. output sound) and both. In the above example, the second A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. "0 second" is set as a fixed time until the time is changed.

According to such a configuration, in the multiple-operation valid state, the second operation means (sword decoration 5001) is the target of the simulated image display and the second operation means (sword decoration 5001) is operated. Sometimes, the post-operation output sound, which is output when the second operation means (sword ornament 5001) is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state, ends after how much time elapses from the non-operating state. For example, it preferably suggests that the notable performance is low in a situation where the second operation means (sword ornament 5001) has just been changed from the operation state to the non-operation state. will be able to On the other hand, when the first operation means (operation button 410) is the target of the simulated image display and the first operation means (operation button 410) is operated, the first operation means (operation button 410) is In some cases, it is possible to estimate how long it will take for the post-operation output sound, which is in the output state when the operation state is changed to the non-operation state, to end after the non-operation state is reached, and in other cases, it is difficult to estimate. For example, it suggests the possibility that the performance after changing the first operating means (operation button 410) from the operating state to the non-operating state is worth noting. However, the post-operation output sound in the output state does not necessarily end after a certain amount of time has passed since the operation was disabled, and the tension when the operation is disabled is also improved. It would be expected to maintain this well.

In addition, as described above, the multiple operation valid state (1A reception allowable state, 2A reception allowable state, 3A reception allowable state) in which at least a model image display imitating the first operation means (operation button 410) is displayed. state, 4A acceptance allowable state), in a special multiple operation valid state (2A acceptance allowable state), the post-operation output sound is output as "the post-operation output sound is When the first operating means (operation button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state while the operation button 410 is being operated, the operation is started from the timing when the first operating means (operation button 410) changes to the non-operating state. 149(g), the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g) is output; When the first operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operation state to the non-operation state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the first operation means (operation button 410) changes to the non-operation state. 410) until the post-operation output sound is rendered inaudible. and the second post-acceptance output sound SB2) shown in FIG. While trying to suggest the possibility that the production performance after changing from the operation state to the non-operation state may be worth noting, the post-operation output that is in the output state after a certain amount of time has passed since the operation state is changed to the non-operation state. The sound is not necessarily terminated, and it is expected that the sense of tension when the device is put into the non-operating state will be maintained appropriately.

In addition, in the multiple operation valid state (5th A reception acceptance state) of the type in which at least the model image display imitating the second operation means (sword ornament 5001) is displayed, the post-operation output sound is "output after this operation When the second operation means (sword decoration 5001) changes from the operation state to the non-operation state in which the sound is being output, the second operation means (sword decoration 5001) is changed to the non-operation state. The time from when the sound goes off until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is processed as a constant time," and "the post-operation output sound is output Among them, when the second operation means (sword decoration body 5001) changes from the operation state to the non-operation state in which it is not operated, the second operation means (sword decoration body 5001) is changed from the timing when the second operation means (sword decoration body 5001) changes to the non-operation state. There is only a case where the time until the output sound is made inaudible after the operation is not fixed (sound with an indefinite time) is output.

Further, it is possible to determine whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state, and whether or not the change occurs when changing from the non-operating state to the operating state. It goes without saying that the configuration is based on the premise that the reception valid state is continued.

Further, in order to realize the eleventh configuration A11, the fourth A acceptance allowable state does not necessarily have to be provided.

In addition, in order to realize the eleventh configuration A11, only one of the first A acceptance acceptable state and the third A acceptance acceptable state may be provided. It is possible to obtain an effect.

Further, for example, as the twelfth configuration A12, a multiple-time operation valid state is provided in which a plurality of operation acceptances for the specific operation means (operation button 410) are allowed, and the multiple-time operation valid state is a first multiple-time operation valid state ( 149) and a second multiple-time operation valid state (first A acceptance-allowed state shown in FIG. 146) are prepared. state), the post-operation output sound (post-1A reception output sound) corresponding to the detection can be generated at predetermined time intervals simply by maintaining the operation state of the specific operation means (operation button 410). However, the post-operation output sound is "when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operation state to the non-operation state in which the operation output sound is being output, the non-operation output sound is output. The time from the timing when the above-mentioned specific operation means enters the state until the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is output as a sound that does not have a fixed time (a sound that is not processed as a fixed time and is indefinite). 146 (first A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146), in the first plural-time operation valid state (second A acceptance allowable state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operated state. A post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) corresponding to the detection can be generated a plurality of times, and the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is an indefinite time. However, the post-operation output sound is "when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state in which the operation button 410 is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the non-operation state The time from the timing when the above-mentioned specific operation means is turned to the time when the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is a fixed time (sound processed as a fixed time)". (2A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)), "Non-operation state in which the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not operated from the operation state while the post-operation output sound is being output. , the time from the timing when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is put into the non-operation state to the time when the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is not constant (undefined time) A certain sound)” (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)). In the above example, the post-acceptance output sound 2A shown in FIG. "0 seconds" is set as a fixed time until the

According to such a configuration, in the second multiple-time operation valid state (1A reception-permitting state) among the multiple-time operation valid states, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state, It is difficult to estimate how long it will take for the post-operation output sound (1A post-reception output sound) in the output state to end after entering the non-operation state. In a situation in which the operation button 410) has just been changed from the operating state to the non-operating state, it is possible to suitably suggest that the notable performance is low. In addition, in the first plural-time-operations valid state (2A reception-permitting state) among the multiple-time-operations valid state, it is in the output state when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state. There are both cases where it is possible to estimate how long it will take for the post-operation output sound (2A post-acceptance output sound) to end after entering the non-operation state, and where it is difficult to estimate. Therefore, for example, while suggesting the possibility that the performance after changing the operation state of the specific operation means (operation button 410) from the operation state to the non-operation state may be worth noting, To prevent a post-operation output sound in an output state from being necessarily terminated after a lapse of a fixed time after being put into an operation state, and to suitably maintain the sense of tension when making a non-operation state. is expected.

Further, in the twelfth configuration A12, a third multiple-time operation valid state (4A reception-allowing state) is further prepared as the multiple-time operation valid state. state), the post-operation output sound (4A post-acceptance output sound) corresponding to the detection cannot be generated a plurality of times only by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state, The output sound is "when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operation state to the non-operation state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes to the non-operation state. The time from the timing when the button 410) is clicked until the post-operation output sound is rendered inaudible is not processed as a fixed time, and can be output as an indefinite sound. According to such a configuration, when the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection cannot be generated a plurality of times only by keeping the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operated state, the post-operation output sound is " When the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operation state to the non-operation state in which the post-operation output sound is being output, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed to the non-operation state. It is possible to preferably suggest that the time from the timing when the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation is not processed as a constant time and is output as an indefinite sound. .

Further, a configuration for determining whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and a configuration for determining whether or not a change occurs when changing from a non-operating state to an operating state. As for the configuration, it goes without saying that the configuration is based on the premise that the acceptance valid state is continued.

Further, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state in the first multiple-time operation valid state (2A acceptance allowable state), the post-operation output sound (2A post-acceptance output sound) is generated multiple times. The interval between the operations is an indefinite time, but when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state in the second multiple-time operation valid state (1A reception allowable state), the post-operation output sound ( The 1A post-acceptance output sound) is not generated at intervals shorter than a predetermined time (constant time) which is an interval at which it is generated a plurality of times, and is generated only at intervals longer than the predetermined time. That is, in this case, the post-operation output sound (2A post-reception output sound) corresponding to the first multiple-time operation valid state (2A acceptance-allowed state) is changed to the second multiple-time operation valid state (1A-acceptance acceptance state). Unlike the corresponding post-operation output sound (first A post-acceptance output sound), the interval between repeated outputs by the auto-repeat function is indefinite, and the time required for that interval (minimum time) is also lengthened. , it becomes difficult to recognize whether the automatic continuous tapping function is activated or not. It is expected that the sense of tension will be preferably maintained by making it difficult to recognize which is occurring.

In addition, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state in the first multiple-time operation valid state (2A acceptance-allowing state), the first multiple-time operation valid state (2A acceptance-allowing state) The number of times that the post-operation output sound (2A post-acceptance output sound) can be generated multiple times is the number of times that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state in the 2nd multiple-time operation valid state (1A acceptance permitted state). less than the number of times that the post-operation output sound (1A post-reception output sound) can be generated multiple times within the second multiple-time operation valid state (1A reception allowable state) when maintained at bottom. That is, in this case, in the first multiple-operation valid state (2A reception-allowed state), it becomes even more difficult to recognize whether the automatic continuous-hit function is activated or not, and the first multiple-operation valid state becomes even more difficult. It is expected that it will be difficult to recognize which of the state (2A reception allowable state) and the 3rd multiple operation valid state (4A reception allowable state) is occurring, and the tension will be preferably maintained. Become so.

In addition, in the first multiple-time operation valid state (2A reception allowable state), the post-operation output sound (2A post-reception output sound) is generated multiple times by maintaining the operation state of the specific operation means (operation button 410). The upper limit number of times that can be performed is set to be smaller than the upper limit number of times that the post-operation output sound can be generated multiple times by repeatedly operating the specific operation means (operation button 410) without maintaining the operation state. . According to such a configuration, the property related to the effect as the first multiple operation valid state (2A reception allowable state) is the third multiple operation valid state (4A reception allowable state) in which the so-called auto repeated hit function is not activated. state), and it is difficult to recognize which of the first multiple-time operation valid state (2A acceptance acceptable state) and the third multiple-time operation valid state (4A acceptance acceptable state) is occurring. As a result, it is expected that the tension will be appropriately maintained.

In addition, in the second multiple-time operation valid state (1A reception allowable state), the post-operation output sound (1A post-reception output sound) is generated multiple times by maintaining the operation state of the specific operation means (operation button 410). The maximum number of times that can be performed is the maximum number of times that the post-operation output sound (post-1A reception output sound) can be generated multiple times by repeatedly operating the specific operation means (operation button 410) without maintaining the operation state. or set to be greater than the upper limit number of times.

In addition, in the second multiple-time operation valid state (1A reception allowable state) and the third multiple-time operation valid state (4A reception allowable state), the post-operation output sound is output. Among them, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operation state to the non-operation state in which the operation button 410 is not operated, the post-operation output sound is inaudible from the timing when the specific operation means changes to the non-operation state. It is not output as a sound whose time until it is turned on is constant (sound processed as constant time).

Further, in the twelfth configuration A12, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the first multiple-time operation valid state, the second multiple-time operation valid state, and the third multiple-time operation valid state are the same operation means. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means represented as a simulated image display and allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple-time operation valid state.

Further, in order to realize the twelfth configuration A12, the multiple-operation valid state is provided with the 3A acceptance allowable state instead of the 1A acceptance allowable state. 2 It may be realized as a multiple-time operation valid state. Alternatively, both the 1st A acceptance allowable state and the 3rd A acceptability state may be provided as the multiple-time operation valid state.

Further, for example, as the thirteenth configuration A13, a multiple-operation valid state in which multiple operations are allowed to be accepted for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is provided, and the multiple-operation valid state is a first multiple-operation valid state ( 2A acceptable state), 2nd multiple operation valid state (4A acceptable state shown in FIG. 155), and 3rd multiple operation valid state (1A acceptable state shown in FIG. 146) are prepared. In the above-mentioned first plural-time operation valid state (second A reception-permitting state shown in FIG. 149), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is only maintained in the operation state, and after the operation corresponding to the detection, The output sound (post-2A reception output sound) can be generated a plurality of times. The post-output sound (post-2A reception output sound) is defined as "when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state while the post-operation output sound is being output, A sound (sound processed as a fixed time )” (output sound after reception of 2A shown in FIG. 149(g)). ) is maintained in the operating state, the post-operation output sound (4A post-acceptance output sound) corresponding to the above detection cannot be generated multiple times, and the post-operation output sound (2A post-acceptance output sound) cannot be generated. "When the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operation state to the non-operation state in which the post-operation output sound is being output, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed to the non-operation state. ) to the time when the output sound is made inaudible after the relevant operation, so that it can be output as "sound that is not constant time (sound that is not processed as constant time and is indefinite)" ( 4A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 155), and in the above-mentioned third multiple-operation valid state (first-A acceptance allowable state), the above-mentioned detection is performed simply by maintaining the above-mentioned specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operated state. The post-operation output sound (1A post-acceptance output sound) corresponding to the can be generated multiple times, in which case, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is set to a specific time or less, In addition, the post-operation output sound (first A post-acceptance output sound) is "while the post-operation output sound is output, the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state in which it is not operated. In this case, the time from the timing when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is put into the non-operation state to the time when the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is processed as a non-constant time (constant time). (sound that is indeterminate and undefined)” (1A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146). In the above example, the second A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. "0 second" is set as a fixed time until the time is changed.

According to such a configuration, first, when the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection cannot be generated a plurality of times only by maintaining the operation state of the specific operation means (operation button 410), the post-operation output sound "When the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operation state to the non-operation state in which the post-operation output sound is being output, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed to the non-operation state. ) to the time when the output sound is made inaudible after the operation, it is suggested that the time is output as a sound that is not constant (a sound that is not processed as a constant time and is indefinite). will be In this regard, when the post-operation output sound corresponding to the above-mentioned detection can be generated a plurality of times only by maintaining the operation state of the specific operation means (operation button 410), the post-operation output sound is "the post-operation output When the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operation state to the non-operation state while sound is being output, the timing at which the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes to the non-operation state. 149(g), where the output sound is output as a sound (sound processed as a fixed time) whose time is a fixed time until the output sound is made inaudible after the operation (the second shown in FIG. 149(g) 2A post-acceptance output sound), and "when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state in which the operation button 410 is not operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, the non-operation state is changed. A sound in which the time from the timing when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is pressed until the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is not constant (sound that is not processed as a constant time and is indefinite) ” (1st A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146), and after the operation when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operated state. Based on whether or not the interval from the output sound to the new output is longer than a specific time, it is possible to suggest the nature of the post-operation output sound to be output. , and it is expected that the game interest will be favorably maintained.

Further, in the thirteenth configuration A13, particularly, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the first multiple-time operation valid state (second A reception-permitting state) is "the specific operation while the post-operation output sound is being output. When the means (operation button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state where the operation button 410 is not operated, the period from the timing when the specific operating means changes to the non-operating state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible When outputting as a sound whose time is a constant time (sound processed as a constant time)" (2A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149 (g)), "output after the operation When the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operation state to the non-operation state while the operation button 410 is being operated, the operation is performed from the timing when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes to the non-operation state. When the post-output sound is output as a sound whose time until the post-output sound is rendered inaudible is not a fixed time (a sound with an indefinite time) (the second post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(h) SB2) and both. That is, in this case, in the first plural-time operation valid state (2A acceptance allowable state), the post-operation output sound (second 2A post-acceptance output sound) can be estimated in both cases where it is possible to estimate how long it will take after the non-operating state is entered, and where it is difficult to estimate. For example, while suggesting the possibility that the performance after changing the specific operation means (operation button 410) from the operating state to the non-operating state is worth noting, The post-operation output sound in the output state does not necessarily end after a certain period of time has passed, and it is expected that the tension when the operation is not performed will be maintained appropriately. Become.

Further, a configuration for determining whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and a configuration for determining whether or not a change occurs when changing from a non-operating state to an operating state. It goes without saying that the configuration is based on the premise that the reception valid state is continued.

Further, in the thirteenth configuration A13, when the specific operation means (the operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state in the first multiple-time operation valid state (2A acceptance allowable state), the post-operation output sound (after 2A acceptance The interval at which the output sound) is generated multiple times is an indefinite time, and when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state in the third multiple-time operation valid state (1A reception allowable state) , the interval between multiple post-operation output sounds is set to a constant time. That is, in this case, the post-operation output sound (2A post-reception output sound) corresponding to the first multiple-time operation valid state (2A acceptance-allowed state) is changed to the third multiple-time operation valid state (1A-acceptance acceptance state). Unlike the corresponding post-operation output sound (first A post-acceptance output sound), the interval between repeated outputs by the auto-repeat function is indefinite, and the time required for that interval (minimum time) is also lengthened. , it becomes difficult to recognize whether the automatic continuous tapping function is activated or not. It is expected that the sense of tension will be preferably maintained by making it difficult to recognize which is occurring.

Further, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state in the first multiple-time operation valid state (2A acceptance-allowing state), the The number of times that the post-operation output sound (2A post-reception output sound) can be generated multiple times is the number of times that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state in the 3rd multiple-time operation valid state (1A reception allowable state). less than the number of times that the post-operation output sound (post-1A reception output sound) can be generated multiple times within the third multiple-time operation valid state (1A reception allowable state) when maintained at bottom. That is, in this case, in the first multiple-operation valid state (2A reception-allowed state), it becomes even more difficult to recognize whether the automatic continuous-hit function is activated or not, and the first multiple-operation valid state becomes even more difficult. It is expected that it will be difficult to recognize which of the state (2A reception allowable state) and the 2nd multiple operation valid state (4A reception allowable state) is occurring, and the tension will be preferably maintained. Become so.

In addition, in the first multiple-time operation valid state (2A reception allowable state), the post-operation output sound (2A post-reception output sound) is generated multiple times by maintaining the operation state of the specific operation means (operation button 410). The upper limit number of times that can be performed is set to be smaller than the upper limit number of times that the post-operation output sound can be generated multiple times by repeatedly operating the specific operation means (operation button 410) without maintaining the operation state. . According to such a configuration, the property related to the effect as the first multiple operation valid state (2A reception allowable state) is the second multiple operation valid state (4A reception allowable state) in which the so-called auto repeated hit function is not activated. state), and it is difficult to recognize which of the first multiple-time operation valid state (2A acceptance acceptable state) and the second multiple-time operation valid state (4A acceptance acceptable state) is occurring. As a result, it is expected that the tension will be appropriately maintained.

In addition, in the third multiple-time operation valid state (1A reception allowable state), the post-operation output sound (1A post-reception output sound) is generated multiple times by maintaining the operation state of the specific operation means (operation button 410). The maximum number of times that can be performed is the maximum number of times that the post-operation output sound (post-1A reception output sound) can be generated multiple times by repeatedly operating the specific operation means (operation button 410) without maintaining the operation state. or set to be greater than the upper limit number of times.

In addition, in the third multiple-time operation valid state (1A acceptance allowable state) and the second multiple-time operation valid state (4A acceptance allowable state), the post-operation output sound is "The post-operation output sound is being output. Among them, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operation state to the non-operation state in which the operation button 410 is not operated, the post-operation output sound is inaudible from the timing when the specific operation means changes to the non-operation state. It is not output as a sound whose time until it is turned on is a fixed time (sound processed as a fixed time).

Further, in the thirteenth configuration A13, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the first multiple-time operation valid state, the second multiple-time operation valid state, and the third multiple-time operation valid state are the same operation means. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means represented as a simulated image display and allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple-time operation valid state.

Further, in order to realize the thirteenth configuration A13, the multiple-operation valid state is provided with the 3A acceptance allowable state instead of the 1A acceptance allowable state. 3 It may be realized as a multiple-time operation valid state. Alternatively, both the 1st A acceptance allowable state and the 3rd A acceptability state may be provided as the multiple-time operation valid state.

Further, for example, as a fourteenth configuration A14, a multiple-time operation valid state is provided in which acceptance of an operation for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and a predetermined end timing arrives as the multiple-time operation valid state. 146. A multiple-time operation valid state of a type in which the operation valid state can be terminated based on the fact that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is detected to be in the operation state before the operation is performed (second operation shown in FIG. 146). 1A accepting allowable state, 2A accepting allowable state shown in FIG. 149), and that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operating state before the arrival of the predetermined end timing. Based on this, if a multiple-time operation valid state (3A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 152, 4A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 155) of a type in which the operation valid state is not terminated, Based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state before the arrival of the predetermined end timing, a multiple-time operation valid state ( In the 3A acceptance acceptable state and the 4A acceptance acceptable state), when it is detected that the specific operation means (the operation button 410) is in the operating state, the post-operation output sound is output as the post-operation output sound. When the specific operating means changes from the operating state to the non-operating state during operation, the post-operation output sound is made inaudible from the timing when the specific operating means changes to the non-operating state. 152 (3A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 152, the 3rd sound shown in FIG. 4A post-acceptance output sound), the operation enabled state is terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operating state before the arrival of the predetermined termination timing. When it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state in the multiple operation valid state (1A reception allowable state, 2A reception allowable state) of the possible type, as the post-operation output sound "When the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operation state to the non-operation state in which the post-operation output sound is being output, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed to the non-operation state. ) is output until the output sound is made inaudible after the operation (sound processed as a constant time)” is output (Fig. 149 (g ), and as the post-operation output sound, "the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not operated from the operation state while the post-operation output sound is being output. When the operation state is entered, the time from the timing when the specific operation means (operation button 410) becomes the non-operation state until the post-operation output sound is made inaudible is not constant (constant In this case, there is both a case in which a sound that is not processed as time and is indefinite) is output (the first A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146). In the above example, the second A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. "0 second" is set as a fixed time until the time is changed.

According to such a configuration, in the non-terminated multiple-operation valid state (3A acceptance acceptable state, 4A acceptance acceptable state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state. It is difficult to guess how long it will take for the post-operation output sound that is in the output state to end after entering the non-operation state. While it is possible to suitably suggest that the notable performance is low under the situation immediately after changing from the state to the non-operating state, the above-mentioned multiple operation valid state of the type that can be terminated (first A reception permitted state, 2A accepting allowable state), the post-operation output sound that is in the output state when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state is how long after the non-operating state. Since there are both cases where it is possible to guess whether it will end with the lapse of time and cases where it is difficult to guess, for example, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not operated from the operating state. While suggesting the possibility that the performance after being in the state is worth noting, the post-operation output sound in the output state will necessarily end after a certain amount of time has passed since the non-operation state. This is not always the case, and it is expected that the tension in the non-operating state will be preferably maintained.

In addition, as described above, the type in which the operation valid state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state before the arrival of the predetermined termination timing. Among the multiple operation valid states (1A reception allowable state, 2A reception allowable state), in the special multiple operation enable state (2A reception allowable state), even though it is only one effective period, the post-operation output sound ``When the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state in which the post-operation output sound is being output, the specific operation means has changed to the non-operation state. 149(g), the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g) is output. ) and "When the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state in which the post-operation output sound is being output, the specific operation means is changed to the non-operation state. When the time from the timing when the output sound becomes inaudible after the operation is not constant (sound with an indefinite time) can be output (the second sound shown in FIG. 149(h) 2 post-acceptance output sound SB2), in the special multiple-operation valid state (2A acceptance-permitting state), for example, after the specific operation means is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state, While trying to suggest the possibility that the performance of is worth noting, it is not necessarily the case that the post-operation output sound in the output state will end after a certain amount of time has passed since the non-operation state. As a result, it is expected that the sense of tension in the non-operating state will be preferably maintained.

It should be noted that, before the arrival of the predetermined end timing, the operation effective state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state. Among the operation valid states (1A reception allowable state, 2A reception allowable state), in the special multiple-time operation enable state (1A reception allowable state), the post-operation output sound is "The post-operation output sound is output. When the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operation state to the non-operation state while the operation button 410 is being operated, the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible from the timing when the specific operation means changes to the non-operation state. There is no case where "a sound that is processed as a fixed time until the state is set" is output, and "the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state while the post-operation output sound is being output. , the time from the timing when the specific operation means changes to the non-operating state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not constant (indefinite There is only a case where a sound that is the time of )” is output.

Further, it is possible to determine whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state, and whether or not the change occurs when changing from the non-operating state to the operating state. As for the configuration, it goes without saying that the configuration is based on the premise that the acceptance valid state is continued.

Further, in the fourteenth configuration A14, it is detected that the specific operation means (the operation button 410) is in the operation state before the predetermined end timing arrives in the multiple-time operation valid state. The multiple-time operation valid state (first A acceptance acceptable state, second A acceptance acceptable state) of the type in which the operation valid state can be terminated based on the above is "only by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state. "multiple-operation valid state in which an output sound is generated multiple times after the corresponding operation", but the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state before the predetermined end timing arrives. The multiple-time operation valid state (3A acceptance acceptable state, 4A acceptance acceptable state) of the type in which the operation valid state is not terminated based on the detection of is "when a specific operation means (operation button 410) is put into an operation state In the case of "multiple operation valid state in which output sound is generated multiple times only by maintaining the corresponding operation output sound", and in the case of "multiple operation enabled state in which the output sound corresponding to it is generated multiple times only by maintaining it," Since there is both a case where the output sound is not generated multiple times as a "multiple operation valid state", the specific operation means (operation button 410) is operated before the predetermined end timing arrives. It can be expected that it will be difficult to recognize whether or not the auto repeated tapping function is activated in the multiple operation valid state of the type in which the operation valid state is not terminated based on the detection of the operation state. .

Further, in the fourteenth configuration A14, the operation valid state is changed based on the detection that the specific operation means (the operation button 410) is in the operation state before the arrival of the predetermined end timing. In the multiple-operation valid state (1A acceptance acceptable state, 2A acceptance acceptable state) of the type that can be terminated, the message display MA is always displayed (message displays MA1, MA2), but the predetermined end timing is A multiple-time operation valid state (3A acceptability state, In the 4th A acceptable state), there are cases where the message display MA is displayed (4th A acceptable state) and cases where the message display MA is not displayed (3A acceptable state). When the display MA is displayed, it can be expected that it is difficult to recognize which type of multiple-operation enabled state is occurring as the above-mentioned type, and that the sense of tension is preferably maintained.

Further, with regard to the fourteenth configuration A14, the specific operation means may be realized as "an operation means that is targeted for display of a model image and that is allowed to receive operations multiple times".

In addition, the "multiple operation valid state" related to the fourteenth configuration A14 may be a valid period that occurs during symbol variation based on the big hit determination.

Further, in order to realize the 14th configuration A14, only one of the 3A acceptance allowable state and the 4A acceptability state may be provided. It is possible to obtain an effect.

Further, for example, as a fifteenth configuration A15, a multiple-time operation valid state in which a plurality of operation acceptances for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted is provided. 146) and a second multiple operation valid state (second A reception acceptable state shown in FIG. 149) are prepared, and the first multiple operation valid state ( 1A acceptance allowable state) and the second multiple operation valid state (2A acceptability state) are both in a non-operating state in which the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not operated, and output after operation. A situation in which the sound (the first A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146, the second A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. Timing tAb2-B3 to tAb2-C1 of FIG. 149, etc.) can be played so as to appear, and the specific In a situation where the operating means (operation button 410) is in a non-operating state and the post-operation output sound (1A post-acceptance output sound) is in an output state, the post-operation output sound (1A post-acceptance output sound) As a result, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the non-operation state to the operation state, the sound (shown in FIG. The first post-reception output sound SA1 (timing tAa2-C1)) and the sound that does not cause a change in its output state (the second post-reception output sound SB1 shown in FIG. 146(h)) are both output. However, in a situation where the specific operation means is in the operation state and the post-operation output sound is in the output state, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not in the operation state. When an operation state is entered, regardless of the type of sound output as the post-operation output sound (1A post-acceptance output sound), the output state does not change with this as a trigger (for example, , timing tAa2-A2, timing tAa2-B3, etc. in FIGS. 146(g) and (h)), and the second multiple-time operation enable state (2A acceptability state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operating state and the post-operation output sound (1A post-acceptance output sound) is in an output state, the post-operation output sound (2A post-acceptance output sound) is set to the specific operation When the means (operation button 410) temporarily changes from the non-operating state to the operating state (see, for example, timing tAb-C1 shown in FIG. 149), a sound ( Although the second post-reception output sound SB2) shown in FIG. 149(h) is in an output state (although no sound that can cause a change in the output state is output as the post-operation output sound), The specific operation means (operation button 410) is operated while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state and the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) is in the output state. When the state changes to the non-operating state, this triggers a change in accordance with the type of the sound output as the post-operation output sound (the first post-accepting state shown in FIG. 149(g)). There are both the output sound SA2) and the case of no change (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) (see, for example, timing tAb2-B3).

According to such a configuration, in the first plural-time operation valid state (1A reception allowable state), even if the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state is put into the non-operation state, the output state is maintained until then. Since there is no change (end) in the post-operation output sound (output sound after 1A reception) that was in , it is expected that the operation will be interrupted with a casual feeling. When the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the non-operating state is brought into the operating state, a change (end) occurs in the post-operation output sound (post-1A reception output sound) that has been in the output state until then; Since there are both cases where there is no change (end), while encouraging re-operation, there is also a possibility that the output sound will change after the operation, so re-operation It can also be expected to provide a sense of tension about what to do. On the other hand, in the second plural-time-operation valid state (2A reception-permitting state), when the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state is put into the non-operation state, after the operation that has been in the output state until then, Since there are both cases where the output sound (output sound after receiving 2A) changes and cases where it does not change (end), it is possible to prompt the interruption of the operation, but the output after the operation Since there is a possibility that the sound (the output sound after receiving the 2nd A reception) may change, the sense of tension for interrupting the operation is preferably provided. When the button 410) is put into the operable state, the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound), which has been in the output state until then, does not change (end). It can be expected that they will come to re-operate.

In addition, in the second multiple-time operation valid state (2A acceptance allowable state), when the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state is put into the non-operation state, this is used as a trigger to 151(c), (( f), etc.), it becomes possible to more positively prompt the user to interrupt the operation.

In addition, in the second plural-time operation valid state (2A reception allowable state), when the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state is put into the non-operation state, the post-non-operation display HB2 is triggered by this. However, at this time, since the effect sound corresponding to the post-non-operation display HB2 is not newly output, the post-non-operation display HB2 is displayed when it is put into the operation state. It is possible to suggest that the display is triggered by the non-operating state instead of the display.

Further, in the fifteenth configuration A15, the specific operation means (the operation button 410) is operated as the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) corresponding to the second multiple-time operation valid state (2A reception allowable state). A type of post-operation output sound (first post-reception output sound SA2 shown in FIG. A type of post-operation output sound (second post-reception output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) whose output state does not change (end) when the button 410) changes from the operated state to the non-operated state. and are prepared so that a situation can occur in which both of the post-operation output sounds are in an output state. That is, in this case, when the operation is interrupted, only a part of the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) that has been in the output state until then is changed (finished), resulting in a moderate tension. While providing the

Further, in the fifteenth configuration A15, the post-operation output sound of the type that changes (ends) when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state (see FIG. 149(g) The first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. The output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB2) shown in h) can be started in either the output state or the non-output state. The type of post-operation output sound (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that does not change (end) when the state changes to the non-operation state is the specific operation means (the operation button 410 ) is changed (finished) when the operation state changes from the operation state to the non-operation state (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is not in the output state. Since it is possible to start output when the output is in the output state (or at the same time) instead of starting the output independently, it is possible to prompt the interruption of the operation while providing a moderate sense of tension. .

In addition, in the second plural-time operation valid state (2A reception allowable state) of the fifteenth configuration A15, while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state, the second post-reception output sound Even when the output condition of SB2 is satisfied (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 starts based on the operation reception performed at timing tAb2-B2. On the other hand, the output state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, the sound effect for one time) which has been in the output state up to that time is changed based on the operation reception performed at the timing tAb2-B2. may not end or start a new output. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, the effect sound for one time) that was in the output state at the time when the timing tAb2-B2 arrived is continued, and the reproduction state is continued. There is no possibility that the output of a sound (sound effect for one time) based on new data due to the midway termination will not be started or that the reproduction will be restarted.

In addition, in the first plural-time operation valid state (1A reception allowable state) of the fifteenth configuration A15, while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state, the first post-reception output sound When the output condition of SB1 is satisfied (timing tAa2-B2 shown in FIG. 146), the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 is started based on the operation reception performed at timing tAa2-B2. On the other hand, the output state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 (here, the sound effect for one time) that has been in the output state until then is terminated based on the operation acceptance performed at the timing tAa2-B2, A new output may be started. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 (here, the effect sound for one time) that was in the output state when the timing tAa2-B2 arrived is interrupted, and new data (here, Output of the sound (sound effect for one time) based on the sound effect data for one time is started.

Further, with respect to the fifteenth configuration A15, the specific operation means may be realized as "an operation means that is targeted for display of a model image and that is allowed to receive operations multiple times".

Further, the "multiple operation valid state" related to the fifteenth configuration A15 may be a valid period that occurs during symbol variation based on the big hit determination.

Further, in order to realize the fifteenth configuration A15, the 3A reception allowable state may be provided as the first multiple operation valid state instead of the 1A reception allowable state. Alternatively, both the 1A acceptance allowable state and the 3A acceptance allowable state may be provided.

Further, for example, as a sixteenth configuration A16, a multiple-time operation valid state is provided in which multiple operation receptions are allowed for the operation means to be displayed as a model image, and the multiple-time operation valid states have different occurrence conditions. A first multiple-time operation valid state (5A acceptability state shown in FIG. 158) and a second multiple-time operation valid state (2A acceptability state shown in FIG. 149) are prepared. The operation valid state (5A acceptance allowable state) occurs as an operation valid state in which at least a simulated image display imitating the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) of the operation means is displayed. The first side post-operation output sound (5A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 158) is in an output state in response to the detection that the operating means (sword ornament 5001) is being operated, and Playing a game in such a way that the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is in a non-operating state (for example, the period from timing tAe2-B2 to tAe2-C1 shown in FIG. 158). In the second plural-time operation valid state (2A acceptance acceptance state), at least a model image display simulating the second operation means (operation button 410) of the operation means is displayed. 149. This is generated as an operation valid state in which the second operation means (operation button 410) is operated, and the second side post-operation output sound (shown in FIG. 149 2A post-acceptance output sound) is in an output state and the second operating means (operation button 410) is in a non-operating state (for example, timings tAb2-B3 to tAb2-C1 shown in FIG. 149). period, etc.).

In this regard, in the sixteenth configuration A16, the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is in the non-operating state in the first plural-time operation valid state (5A reception permitting state), and after the first side operation Under the condition that the output sound (output sound after reception of 5A) is in the output state, as the output sound after the first side operation, if the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) changes from the non-operation state to the operation state (for example, when timing tAe-C1 arrives), the sound (5A reception shown in FIGS. Although there are cases where only the post-output sound is being output (although it is possible to perform a process that changes the output sound), the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is in the operating state. In addition, when the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state while the first side post-operation output sound (5A post-acceptance output sound) is in the output state. , the output state of the output sound after the first side operation (sword ornament 5001) does not change with this as a trigger (processing that causes a change in the sound in the output state is not possible) (for example, FIG. See timing tAe2-A2 shown in 158(g), (h)).

According to such a configuration, in the first plural-time operation valid state (5A acceptance allowable state), even if the first operation means (sword decoration body 5001) in the operation state is put into the non-operation state, Since there is no change (end) in the post-operation output sound (post-5A reception output sound) that was in the output state, it is expected that the operation will be interrupted casually. However, when the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) in the non-operating state is brought into the operating state, the post-operation output sound (post-5A reception output sound) that has been in the output state until then changes (ends). It can be expected to provide a favorable sense of tension when re-operating, as it is intended to occur.

Further, in the sixteenth configuration A16, in the second plural-time operation valid state (2A acceptance allowable state), the second operating means (operation button 410) is in the non-operating state and the post-second-side-operation output sound In a situation where (second A post-acceptance output sound) is in an output state, it is assumed that the second operating means (operation button 410) temporarily changes from the non-operating state to the operating state as the second side post-operation output sound. Occasionally (for example, when timing tAb-C1 arrives), only the sound (2A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(h)) that does not cause a change (end) in its output state is output. (A sound that can cause a change in the output state is not output as the output sound after the second side operation), but the second operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state and the When the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state while the second side post-operation output sound (2A post-reception output sound) is in the output state, this is changed (finished) according to the type of sound output as the post-second-side-operation output sound (post-2A-reception output sound) (the first sound shown in FIG. 149(g)). There may be both a post-reception output sound SA2) and a case of no change (end) (second post-reception output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)).

According to such a configuration, in the second multiple-time operation valid state (2A reception allowable state), while prompting the interruption of the operation, the post-operation output sound (2A post-reception output sound) changes (ends). ) is likely to occur, so that a sense of tension is preferably provided for interrupting the operation, while the second operating means (operation button 410) in the non-operating state is brought into the operating state. , the post-operation output sound (2A post-acceptance output sound), which has been output until then, does not change (end), so it is possible to perform the operation again with a casual feeling. can be expected.

In addition, in the second multiple-time operation valid state (2A acceptance allowable state), when the above-mentioned second operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state is put into the non-operation state, this is used as a trigger to bring it into the display state until then. The post-operation display (during repeated hits HA2) is changed (finished). (f), etc.), it becomes possible to more positively prompt the user to interrupt the operation.

In addition, in the second plural-time operation valid state (2A acceptance allowable state), when the second operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state is put into the non-operation state, the post-non-operation display is triggered by this. HB2 is displayed. At this time, since the effect sound corresponding to the post-non-operation display HB2 is not newly output, the post-non-operation display HB2 is displayed when it is put into the operation state. It is possible to suggest that the display is triggered by the non-operating state, rather than the one that was displayed.

Further, in the sixteenth configuration A16, the second operation means (operation button 410) is used as the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) corresponding to the second multiple-time operation valid state (2A reception acceptance state). A post-operation output sound of a type whose output state changes when the operation state changes to a non-operation state (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)), and a second operation means. A type of post-operation output sound (the second post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(h)) whose output state does not change (end) when the (operation button 410) changes from the operated state to the non-operated state SB2) and SB2) are prepared so that a situation can occur in which both post-operation output sounds are in an output state. That is, in this case, when the operation is interrupted, only a part of the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) that has been in the output state until then is changed (finished), resulting in a moderate tension. While providing the

In addition, in the second multiple-operation valid state (2A reception-permitting state) related to the sixteenth configuration A16, the change ( The post-operation output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) of the type to be terminated is generated when the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state. The type of post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that does not change (end) with , but the type of post-operation output sound (shown in FIG. The second post-acceptance output sound SB2) is a type of post-operation output sound (Fig. 149 Since the first post-acceptance output sound SA2) shown in (g) does not start to be output independently when it is not in the output state, but can be started to be output when it is in the output state (or at the same time), It is possible to prompt the user to interrupt the operation while providing an appropriate sense of tension.

In addition, in the second plural-time operation valid state (2A reception allowable state) of the sixteenth configuration A16, while the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state, the output after the second reception is performed. Even if the output condition of the sound SB2 is satisfied (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is output based on the operation reception performed at the timing tAb2-B2. The first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, the effect sound for one time) that has been output until then is output based on the operation acceptance performed at the timing tAb2-B2. It may not end the state or start a new output. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, the effect sound for one time) that was in the output state at the timing tAb2-B2 is continued. The output of sound (sound effect for one time) based on new data due to the midway termination does not start, and the reproduction is not restarted.

Further, for example, as the seventeenth configuration A17, a multiple-time operation valid state is provided in which a plurality of operation acceptances for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted, and as the multiple-time operation valid state, first multiple operation valid states having different occurrence conditions are provided. 152) and a second multiple-operations valid state (second A-reception-allowed state shown in FIG. 149). The 2A acceptance allowable state) can be ended when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operating state before the arrival of the predetermined end timing. However, in the first multiple-time operation valid state (3A reception allowable state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) may be in the operation state before the predetermined end timing arrives. It is assumed that there is no case where the relevant state is terminated by the fact that it is detected. Then, in the first multiple-time operation valid state (3A reception allowable state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the non-operation state and the post-operation output sound (3A post-reception output When the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the non-operating state to the operating state in the state where the sound is being output, the output state of the post-operation output sound changes (end ) (the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 shown at timing tAc2-C1 in FIG. 3A post-acceptance output sound) is in an output state, and if the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operation state to the non-operation state, the output state of the post-operation output sound is this. 152(g) and (h), the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 and the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 shown at timing tAc2-B3 in FIGS. etc.), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the non-operating state and the post-operation output sound (first A post-acceptance output (sound) is in an output state, the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) is assumed to be when the specific operation means (operation button 410) temporarily changes from the non-operation state to the operation state. (See, for example, timing tAb-C1 shown in FIG. 149) A sound that does not cause a change (end) in its output state with this as a trigger (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) is in the output state (although no sound that can cause a change (end) in the output state is output as the post-operation output sound), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state In addition, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state while the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) is in the output state, this is triggered. , the post-operation output sound is changed (finished) according to the type of the sound output (the first post-reception output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) and not changed (FIG. 149 (h) and second post-acceptance output sound SB2) (see, for example, timing tAb2-B3).

According to such a configuration, when the "first multiple-time operation valid state (3A reception allowable state)" which is not terminated by the player's operation is generated, the non-operation state is set. It becomes possible to more positively prompt the user to put the certain specific operation means into the operation state. Further, when the "second multiple-time operation valid state (second A reception allowable state)" which can be terminated by the player's operation is generated, the specific operation means in the operation state is changed to the non-operation state. It is possible that a sound that does not cause a change (end) is output when the non-operation state is triggered, so it is expected that the sense of tension will also be maintained appropriately. can be

In addition, in the second multiple-time operation valid state (2A reception allowable state), when the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state is to be put in the non-operation state, this will be used as a trigger to 151(c), (( f), etc.), it becomes possible to more positively prompt the user to interrupt the operation.

In addition, in the second plural-time operation valid state (2A reception allowable state), when the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state is put into the non-operation state, the post-non-operation display HB2 is triggered by this. However, at this time, since the effect sound corresponding to the post-non-operation display HB2 is not newly output, the post-non-operation display HB2 is displayed when it is put into the operation state. It is possible to suggest that the display is triggered by the non-operating state instead of the display.

Further, in the seventeenth configuration A17, the specific operation means (the operation button 410) is operated as the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) corresponding to the second multiple-time operation valid state (2A reception allowable state). A post-operation output sound (first post-reception output sound SA2 shown in FIG. A type of post-operation output sound (second post-reception output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) whose output state does not change (end) when the button 410) changes from the operated state to the non-operated state. and are prepared so that a situation can occur in which both of the post-operation output sounds are in an output state. That is, in this case, when the operation is interrupted, only a part of the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) that has been in the output state until then is changed (finished), so a moderate tension is generated. While providing the

Further, in the seventeenth configuration A17, the post-operation output sound of the type that changes (ends) when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state (see FIG. 149(g) The first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. The output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB2) shown in h) can be started in either the output state or the non-output state. The type of post-operation output sound (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that does not change (end) when the state changes to the non-operation state is the specific operation means (the operation button 410 ) is changed (finished) when the operation state changes from the operation state to the non-operation state (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is not in the output state. Since it is possible to start output when the output is in the output state (or at the same time) instead of starting the output independently, it is possible to prompt the interruption of the operation while providing a moderate sense of tension. .

In addition, in the second multiple-operation valid state (2A reception-permitting state) of the seventeenth configuration A17, while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state, the second post-reception output sound Even if the output condition of SB2 is satisfied (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 starts based on the operation reception performed at timing tAb2-B2. On the other hand, the output state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, the sound effect for one time) which has been in the output state until then is changed based on the operation reception performed at the timing tAb2-B2. may not end or start a new output. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, the effect sound for one time) that was in the output state at the timing tAb2-B2 is continued. The output of sound (sound effect for one time) based on new data due to the midway termination does not start, and the reproduction is not restarted.

In addition, in the first plural-time operation valid state (3A reception allowable state) of the seventeenth configuration A17, while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state, the first post-reception output sound When the output condition of SB3 is satisfied (timing tAc2-B2 shown in FIG. 152), the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 is started based on the operation reception performed at timing tAc2-B2. On the other hand, the output state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 (here, one-time sound effect) that has been in the output state until then is terminated based on the operation reception performed at the timing tAc2-B2, A new output may be started. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 (here, the effect sound for one time) that was in the output state when the timing tAc2-B2 arrived is interrupted, and new data (here, Output of the sound (sound effect for one time) based on the sound effect data for one time is started.

Further, with respect to the seventeenth configuration A17, the specific operation means may be realized as "an operation means which is targeted for display of a model image and which is permitted to receive operations multiple times".

In addition, the "multiple operation valid state" related to the seventeenth configuration A17 may be a valid period that occurs during symbol variation based on the big hit determination.

Further, for example, as an eighteenth configuration A18, a multiple-time operation valid state in which a plurality of operation acceptances for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted is provided, and as the multiple-time operation valid state, a first plurality of states having different occurrence conditions are provided. 146) and a second multiple operation valid state (second A reception acceptable state shown in FIG. 149) are prepared, and the first multiple operation valid state ( 1A acceptance allowable state) and the second multiple operation valid state (2A acceptability state) are both in a non-operating state in which the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not operated, and output after operation. A situation in which the sound (the first A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146, the second A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. Timing tAb2-B3 to tAb2-C1 of FIG. 149, etc.) can be played so as to appear, and the specific When the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the non-operation state while the operation means (operation button 410) is in the non-operation state and the post-operation output sound (post-1A reception output sound) is in the output state , the time from entering the operation state to the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound (1A post-reception output sound) is the type of post-operation output sound in the output state There are a constant case (first post-reception output sound SA1 shown in FIG. 146(g)) and an indefinite case (second post-reception output sound SB1 shown in FIG. 146(h)) depending on the (See timing tAa2-C1 shown in FIGS. 146(g) and (h)), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operating state and the post-operation output sound (1A post-reception output sound) is When the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state in the output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated after the non-operating state. 146(g) and (h)), the second multiple-time operation valid state (2A reception allowable state) Of these, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the non-operation state and the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) is in the output state, and the specific operation means (operation button 410 ) is changed from a non-operated state to an operated state, the time from the transition to the operated state to the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) is indeterminate (Fig. 149(h), see timing tAb2-C1), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operating state and the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) is in the output state. , when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state, the output state of the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) ends after entering the non-operating state. Depending on the type of the post-operation output sound in the output state, the time until is fixed (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) or indefinite (FIG. 149(h ) (see timing tAa2-B3 shown in FIGS. 149(g) and (h)). In the above example, "0 second" is set as the fixed time.

According to such a configuration, in the first plural-time operation valid state (first A reception allowable state), the post-operation output sound that is in the output state when the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state is the non-operation state. It is difficult to estimate how long it will take to finish after the state is entered. It becomes possible to preferably suggest that. On the other hand, it is possible to estimate how long it will take for the post-operation output sound, which is in the output state when the specific operation means is changed from the non-operation state to the operation state, to end after the operation state is changed. Since there are both cases where it is difficult to guess and cases where it is difficult to guess, for example, it suggests the possibility that the performance after the above-mentioned specific operation means is operated again is worth noting. However, the post-operation output sound in the output state does not necessarily end after a certain period of time has passed since the operation state is resumed. will be expected to remain at

In addition, in the second multiple-operation valid state (2A reception-permitting state), the post-operation output sound that is in the output state when the specific operation means is changed from the non-operation state to the operation state is changed to It is difficult to guess how much time it will take to finish, for example, it preferably suggests that the notable effect is low in the situation where the specific operation means has just been changed from the non-operating state to the operating state. be able to On the other hand, it is possible to estimate how long the post-operation output sound, which is in the output state when the specific operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state, will end after the non-operation state. Since there are both cases where it is difficult to guess and cases where it is difficult to guess, for example, it suggests the possibility that the performance after the above-mentioned specific operation means is in a non-operated state is worth noting. However, the post-operation output sound in the output state does not necessarily end after a certain period of time has passed since the non-operation state is set, and this is also suitable for the tension when the non-operation state is set. will be expected to remain at

In addition, in the second multiple-time operation valid state (2A reception allowable state), when the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state is to be put in the non-operation state, this will be used as a trigger to 151(c), (( f), etc.), it becomes possible to more positively prompt the user to interrupt the operation.

In addition, in the second plural-time operation valid state (2A reception allowable state), when the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state is put into the non-operation state, the post-non-operation display HB2 is triggered by this. However, at this time, since the effect sound corresponding to the post-non-operation display HB2 is not newly output, the post-non-operation display HB2 is displayed when it is put into the operation state. It is possible to suggest that the display is triggered by the non-operating state instead of the display.

Further, in the eighteenth configuration A18, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is operated as the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) corresponding to the second multiple-time operation valid state (2A reception allowable state). A type of post-operation output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. A type of post-operation output sound (the second post-acceptance output shown in FIG. SB2) are prepared, and a situation can occur in which both post-operation output sounds are in an output state. That is, in this case, when the operation is interrupted, only part of the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) that has been output until then is terminated within a certain period of time. While providing the information, it becomes possible to prompt the user to interrupt the operation.

Further, in the eighteenth configuration A18, the type of post-operation output sound (shown in FIG. The first post-acceptance output sound SA2) is a type of post-operation output sound (Fig. 149(h), the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB2) shown in FIG. The type of post-operation output sound (the second post-reception output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that ends in an undefined period of time instead of a fixed period of time after the is changed from the operated state to the non-operated state is a specific A type of post-operation output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. Since it is possible to start outputting while in the output state (or at the same time) instead of starting the output independently when not in the output state, it is possible to encourage interruption of the operation while providing a moderate sense of tension. become able to.

In addition, in the second plural-time operation valid state (2A reception allowable state) of the eighteenth configuration A18, while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state, the second post-reception output sound Even when the output condition of SB2 is satisfied (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 starts based on the operation reception performed at timing tAb2-B2. On the other hand, the output state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, the sound effect for one time) which has been in the output state up to that time is changed based on the operation reception performed at the timing tAb2-B2. may not end or start a new output. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, the effect sound for one time) that was in the output state at the time when the timing tAb2-B2 arrived is continued, and the reproduction state is continued. There is no possibility that the output of a sound (sound effect for one time) based on new data due to the midway termination will not be started or that the reproduction will be restarted.

In addition, in the first plural-time operation valid state (1A reception allowable state) of the eighteenth configuration A18, while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state, the first post-reception output sound When the output condition of SB1 is satisfied (timing tAa2-B2 shown in FIG. 146), the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 is started based on the operation reception performed at timing tAa2-B2. On the other hand, the output state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 (here, the sound effect for one time) that has been in the output state until then is terminated based on the operation acceptance performed at the timing tAa2-B2, A new output may be started. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 (here, the effect sound for one time) that was in the output state when the timing tAa2-B2 arrived is interrupted, and new data (here, Output of the sound (sound effect for one time) based on the sound effect data for one time is started.

Further, with regard to the eighteenth configuration A18, the specific operation means may be realized as "an operation means that is targeted for display of a model image and that is allowed to receive operations a plurality of times".

Further, the "multiple operation valid state" relating to the eighteenth configuration A18 may be a valid period that occurs during symbol variation based on the big hit determination.

Further, in order to realize the eighteenth configuration A18, the 3A acceptance allowable state may be provided as the first multiple operation valid state instead of the 1A acceptability state. Alternatively, both the 1A acceptance allowable state and the 3A acceptance allowable state may be provided.

Further, for example, as a nineteenth configuration A19, a multiple-time operation valid state is provided in which multiple operation receptions are allowed for the operation means to be displayed as a model image, and the multiple-time operation valid states have different occurrence conditions. A first multiple-time operation valid state (5A acceptability state shown in FIG. 158) and a second multiple-time operation valid state (2A acceptability state shown in FIG. 149) are prepared. The operation valid state (5A acceptance allowable state) occurs as an operation valid state in which at least a simulated image display imitating the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) of the operation means is displayed. The first side post-operation output sound (5A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 158) is in an output state in response to the detection that the operating means (sword ornament 5001) is being operated, and Playing a game in such a way that the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is in a non-operating state (for example, a period of timing tAe2-B2 to tAe2-C1 shown in FIG. 158). In the second plural-time operation valid state (2A acceptance acceptance state), at least a model image display simulating the second operation means (operation button 410) of the operation means is displayed. 149. This is generated as an operation valid state in which the second operation means (operation button 410) is operated, and the second side post-operation output sound (shown in FIG. 149 2A post-acceptance output sound) is in an output state and the second operating means (operation button 410) is in a non-operating state (for example, timings tAb2-B3 to tAb2-C1 shown in FIG. 149). period, etc.).

In this respect, in the 19th configuration A19, the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is in the non-operating state in the first plural-time operation valid state (5A acceptance-permitting state), and after the first side operation When the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) changes from the non-operating state to the operating state while the output sound (the output sound after receiving 5A) is in the output state, the operating state is entered. to the end of the output state of the output sound after the first side operation (the output sound after receiving the 5th A) can be processed as a constant time. The first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state while the second output sound is in the output state and the first operating means (sword decoration 5001) is in the operating state. , the time from entering the non-operation state to the end of the output state of the output sound after the first side operation (the output sound after the 5th A reception) is indefinite (not processed as a fixed time). (See, for example, timing tAe2-A2 shown in FIGS. 158(g) and (h)). In the above example, "0 second" is set as the fixed time.

According to such a configuration, in the first plural-time operation valid state (5A acceptance acceptance state), when the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state, it is in the output state. The post-operation output sound (5A post-acceptance output sound) can be estimated how long it will take after the operation state is entered. While the first operating means (sword decoration body 5001) is changed from the non-operating state to the non-operating state It is difficult to estimate how long it will take for the post-operation output sound (5A post-acceptance output sound) that is in the output state when the Under the circumstances in which the operating means (sword ornament 5001) has just been changed from the operating state to the non-operating state, it is possible to suitably suggest that the notable performance is low.

Further, in the nineteenth configuration A19, the output sound after the second side operation (the output sound after the second A reception) is in the output state in the second multiple-time operation valid state (the second A reception acceptance state), and the When the second operation means (operation button 410) is in the non-operation state and the second operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the non-operation state to the operation state, the Although the time until the output state of the output sound after the second side operation (the output sound after the 2A reception) ends is indeterminate, the output sound after the second side operation (the output sound after the 2A reception) is output. state and the second operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state, when the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operation state to the non-operation state, the non-operation state The time until the output state of the second side post-operation output sound (2A post-acceptance output sound) ends after it becomes a constant according to the type of the second side post-operation output sound in the output state A case (first post-reception output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) and an undefined case (first post-reception output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) are provided.

According to such a configuration, in the second multiple-time operation valid state (2A reception allowable state), when the second operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the non-operation state to the operation state, the operation in the output state is performed. It is difficult to guess how long it will take for the post-output sound (2A post-acceptance output sound) to end after entering the operation state. In a situation in which the operation state has just been changed from the non-operating state to the operating state, it is possible to suitably suggest that the performance to be noticed is low. When , it is possible to guess how long the post-operation output sound (operation button 410) in the output state will end after entering the non-operating state, and it is difficult to guess. Therefore, for example, while suggesting the possibility that the performance after the second operating means is in the non-operating state is worth noting, the non-operating state The post-operation output sound in the output state does not necessarily end after a certain period of time has elapsed since the operation is turned on, and it is expected that this tension will be preferably maintained even when the operation is switched to the non-operation state. become.

In addition, in the second multiple-time operation valid state (2A acceptance allowable state), when the above-mentioned second operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state is put into the non-operation state, this is used as a trigger to bring it into the display state until then. 151(c) and (f). etc.), it will be possible to more actively prompt the user to interrupt the operation.

In addition, in the second plural-time operation valid state (2A acceptance allowable state), when the second operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state is put into the non-operation state, the post-non-operation display is triggered by this. HB2 is displayed. At this time, since the effect sound corresponding to the post-non-operation display HB2 is not newly output, the post-non-operation display HB2 is displayed when it is put into the operation state. It is possible to suggest that the display is triggered by the non-operating state, rather than the one that was displayed.

Further, in the 19th configuration A19, the second operation means (operation button 410) is used as the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) corresponding to the second multiple-time operation valid state (2A reception permission state). A post-operation output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) of a type whose output state ends after a certain period of time from the operation state to the non-operation state, and the second operation A type of post-operation output sound (the second sound shown in FIG. 149(h)) whose output state ends not at a fixed time but at an undefined time after the means (operation button 410) changes from the operated state to the non-operated state. and the post-reception output sound SB2) are prepared, and a situation can occur in which both of these post-operation output sounds are in an output state. That is, in this case, when the operation is interrupted, only a part of the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) that has been output until then is terminated within a certain period of time. While providing the information, it becomes possible to prompt the user to interrupt the operation.

In addition, the second multiple-time operation valid state (2A acceptance allowable state) according to the nineteenth configuration A19 ends after a certain period of time after the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state. The type of post-operation output sound (the first post-reception output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is a constant after the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state. The type of post-operation output sound (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that ends in an indefinite time rather than time is in an output state or not in an output state. Although the output can be started under certain circumstances, the type of post-operation output sound (Fig. The second post-acceptance output sound SB2) shown in 149(h) is a type of post-operation output that ends in a certain period of time after the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state. The output of the sound (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) does not start independently when it is not in the output state, but can be started when it is in the output state (or at the same time). Therefore, it becomes possible to prompt the user to interrupt the operation while providing an appropriate sense of tension.

In addition, in the second plural-time operation valid state (2A reception allowable state) of the nineteenth configuration A19, while the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state, the output after the second reception Even if the output condition of the sound SB2 is satisfied (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is output based on the operation reception performed at the timing tAb2-B2. The first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, the effect sound for one time) that has been output until then is output based on the operation acceptance performed at the timing tAb2-B2. It may not end the state or start a new output. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, the effect sound for one time) that was in the output state at the time when the timing tAb2-B2 arrived is continued, and the reproduction state is continued. There is no possibility that the output of a sound (sound effect for one time) based on new data due to the midway termination will not be started or that the reproduction will be restarted.

Further, for example, the twentieth configuration A20 includes a multiple-operation valid state in which a plurality of operation acceptances for the specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted, and the multiple-operation valid state is a first multiple-operation valid state ( 2A acceptability state shown in FIG. 149), a second multiple-time operation valid state (fourth A acceptability state shown in FIG. 155), and a third multiple-time operation valid state (first A acceptability shown in FIG. 146). state), and in each of these multiple-operation valid states, a state in which the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state in which the operation button 410 is not operated and a post-operation output sound is output. In the first plural-time operation valid state (second A acceptance allowable state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is only maintained in the operation state. The post-operation output sound (2A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149) corresponding to the above detection can be generated multiple times. is set to an indefinite time (not processed as a fixed time), and in the second multiple-time operation valid state (4A reception allowable state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state. 155, the post-operation output sound (4A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 155) corresponding to the detection cannot be generated multiple times. state), the post-operation output sound (first A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146) corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation state of the specific operation means (operation button 410). However, at that time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated can be processed to be a constant time. Then, of the multiple-operation valid state in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times only by maintaining the operation state of the specific operation means (operation button 410), the above-mentioned In the first plural-time operation valid state (2A reception allowable state) in which the interval until a new output sound is generated after operation is an indefinite time, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state. and the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) is in an output state, and the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the non-operation state to the operation state, the operation The output state of the post-output sound (post-2A reception output sound) does not change (end) with this as a trigger (for example, timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIGS. 149(g) and (h)). etc.), and in the third multiple-time operation valid state (1A reception allowable state) in which the interval until the output sound is newly generated after the operation is a constant time, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the non-operating state and the post-operation output sound (1A post-reception output sound) is in the output state, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state. 146(g), the output state of the post-operation output sound (post-1A reception output sound) can be changed (finished) with this as a trigger (for example, timing tAa2-C1 shown in FIG. 146(g)). ), the second multiple operation valid state (4th A reception allowable state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the non-operation state and the post-operation output sound (post-4A reception output sound) is in the output state, and the specific operation means When the (operation button 410) changes from the non-operating state to the operating state, the output state of the post-operation output sound can be changed (finished) with this as a trigger (for example, FIG. 155(g), (h) ), timing tAd2-C1, etc.).

According to such a configuration, when the player performs the operation again in the above-mentioned second multiple-time operation valid state (4th A reception allowable state) in which the so-called automatic repeated hitting function is not activated, the so-called automatic repeated hitting function is fixed. In both the case where the player performs the operation again in the third multiple operation valid state (1A acceptance acceptance state) which is validated at each interval, the output state of the post-operation output sound changes to this. Since it can be changed (finished) as a trigger, it is expected that it will be difficult to recognize whether or not it is in a situation where the automatic repeated hitting function is activated, and the tension will be maintained appropriately. Become so. On the other hand, in the first plural-time operation valid state (2A reception allowable state), if the specific operation means is re-operated while the post-operation output sound is being output, , that it is not in a situation in which the so-called auto-flick function is not activated (second multiple-time operation valid state (fourth A reception allowable state)), i.e., in a situation in which the auto-flick function is to be activated. Since it can be recognized, the so-called automatic repeated hitting function is not activated at regular intervals, making it difficult to recognize "whether the automatic repeated hitting function is to be activated". A decrease in amusement interest can be suppressed.

In addition, in the first multiple-time operation valid state (second A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 149), the post-operation output sound (FIG. 149 2A post-acceptance output sound shown in (h)), and a post-operation output sound (Fig. 149 (g) 2A output sound after reception shown in ) is output. That is, in this case, the post-operation output sound (2A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)) whose output state changes (ends) with the detection of the non-operation state as a trigger is replayed afterwards. Even if an operation is performed, it will not be in the output state at that time, and the output state after operation will not change (end) when the non-operation state is detected (Fig. 149 Only the 2nd A post-acceptance output sound shown in (h)) can be put into an output state as a sound that is not changed (finished) by the re-operation at the time when the re-operation is performed.

In addition, in the above-described effect example, it corresponds to the second multiple-time operation valid state (4th A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 155) and the third multiple-time operation valid state (1A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 146). The post-operation output sound is a post-operation sound that changes (ends) the output state without maintaining the output state when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operation state to the non-operation state. No output sound is prepared, and only a type of post-operation output sound that does not change (end) the output state when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state is prepared.

Further, it is possible to determine whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state, and whether or not the change occurs when changing from the non-operating state to the operating state. As for the configuration, it goes without saying that the configuration is based on the premise that the acceptance valid state is continued.

Note that in the twentieth configuration A20, the operation means when the so-called auto-flick function is not activated in the multiple-time operation valid state and the operation means when the so-called auto-flick function is activated in the multiple-time operation valid state , are assumed to be the same operation means as the "specific operation means", but this is not necessarily the case. In addition, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the first multiple-time operation valid state, the second multiple-time operation valid state, and the third multiple-time operation valid state are the same operation means, but this is not necessarily the case. can't For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means represented as a simulated image display and allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple-time operation valid state.

Further, in order to realize the twentieth configuration A20, the multiple-operation valid state is not the first A acceptance allowable state, but the 3A acceptability state. 3 It may be realized as a multiple-time operation valid state. Alternatively, both the 1st A acceptance allowable state and the 3rd A acceptability state may be provided as the multiple-time operation valid state.

Further, for example, as the 21st configuration A21, a multiple-operation valid state is provided in which a plurality of operation receptions for the specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted, and the multiple-operation valid state is a first multiple-operation valid state ( 149) and a second multiple-time operation valid state (first A acceptance-allowed state shown in FIG. 146) are prepared. It is possible to play a game so as to create a situation in which the operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operating state in which the operating means (operation button 410) is not operated and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, and the first multiple operations are performed. In the enabled state (2A reception allowable state), the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound shown in FIG. ) can be generated multiple times, but the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is an indefinite time (not treated as a fixed time), and the second plural In the turning operation valid state (1A acceptance allowable state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is only maintained in the operation state, and the post-operation output sound (after 1A acceptance shown in FIG. 146) corresponding to the detection The post-operation output sound) can be generated a plurality of times, and in this case, processing can be performed so that the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is set to a constant time. In addition, in the first plural-time operation valid state (second A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 149) in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is an indefinite time, the specific operation is performed. When the means (operation button 410) is in the non-operation state and the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) is in the output state, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the non-operation state. 149(g), (for example, FIG. 149(g), ( (see timing tAb2-C1, etc. shown in h)), the second multiple-operation effective state (first A shown in FIG. acceptance allowable state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operating state and the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, and the specific operation means When the (operation button 410) is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state, the sound output as the post-operation output sound (1A post-reception output sound) is changed according to the type of the sound output. 146(g)) and no change (1A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146(h)).

According to such a configuration, in the first plural-time operation valid state (2A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 149) in which the so-called auto repeated hitting function is not activated at regular intervals, the specific operation means (operation button 410 ) from the non-operating state to the operating state again, the output state of the post-operation output sound (2A post-acceptance output sound) does not change (end) with this as a trigger, so the post-operation output sound is newly generated. Combined with the fact that the interval until the occurrence is set to an indefinite time, it is expected that it will be difficult to recognize whether the player's operation has been properly accepted, and that the sense of tension will be preferably maintained. On the other hand, in the second multiple operation valid state (1A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 146) in which the so-called auto repeated hitting function is activated at regular intervals, for example, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is While suggesting the possibility that the performance after being in the operation state again has a worth noting, the post-operation output sound in the output state (output sound after receiving 1A) is changed to the operation state again. By not necessarily changing (finishing) using the event as a trigger, it is expected that the sense of tension when returning to the operating state will be maintained appropriately.

Further, as a post-operation output sound (2A post-reception output sound) corresponding to the first multiple-time operation valid state (2A reception acceptance state shown in FIG. 149), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is A type of post-operation output sound (2A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 410) is changed from the operated state to the non-operated state as a trigger for post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(h)) whose output state does not change (end). and both post-operation output sounds are in the output state. That is, in this case, when the operation is interrupted, only a part of the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) that has been in the output state until then is changed (finished), resulting in a moderate tension. While providing the

In addition, in the first plural-time operation valid state (2A reception-permitting state shown in FIG. 149), when the operation button 410 changes from the operated state to the non-operated state, the post-operation type changes (ends). The output sound (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is a post-operation output sound that does not change (end) when the operation button 410 changes from the operated state to the non-operated state. (Second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) can be started to be output either when it is in the output state or when it is not in the output state. A post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that does not change (end) when the operation button 410 changes from the operation state to the non-operation state. When the type of post-operation output sound (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) that is changed (finished) when the operation state is entered is not in the output state, the output starts independently. The output may be started when (or at the same time) in the output state without being output.

In addition, in the first multiple-operation valid state (2A reception-permitting state) of the 21st configuration A21, while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state, the second post-reception output sound Even if the output condition of SB2 is satisfied (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 starts based on the operation reception performed at timing tAb2-B2. On the other hand, the output state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, the sound effect for one time) which has been in the output state until then is changed based on the operation reception performed at the timing tAb2-B2. may not end or start a new output. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, the effect sound for one time) that was in the output state at the timing tAb2-B2 is continued. The output of sound (sound effect for one time) based on new data due to the midway termination does not start, and the reproduction is not restarted.

In addition, in the second plural-time operation valid state (1A reception allowable state) of the twenty-first configuration A21, while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state, the first post-reception output sound When the output condition of SB1 is satisfied (timing tAa2-B2 shown in FIG. 146), the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 is started based on the operation reception performed at timing tAa2-B2. On the other hand, the output state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 (here, the sound effect for one time) that has been in the output state until then is terminated based on the operation acceptance performed at the timing tAa2-B2, A new output may be started. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 (here, the effect sound for one time) that was in the output state when the timing tAa2-B2 arrived is interrupted, and new data (here, Output of the sound (sound effect for one time) based on the sound effect data for one time is started.

Further, a configuration for determining whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and a configuration for determining whether or not a change occurs when changing from a non-operating state to an operating state. As for the configuration, it goes without saying that the configuration is based on the premise that the acceptance valid state is continued.

In the twenty-first configuration A21, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the first multiple-time operation valid state and the second multiple-time operation valid state are the same operation means, but this is not necessarily the case. do not have. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means represented as a simulated image display and allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple-time operation valid state.

Further, the "multiple operation valid state" related to the 21st configuration A21 may be a valid period that occurs during symbol variation based on the big hit determination.

Further, in order to realize the twenty-first configuration A21, the multiple-time operation valid state is provided with the 3A acceptance allowable state instead of the 1A acceptance allowable state. 2 It may be realized as a multiple-time operation valid state. Alternatively, both the 1st A acceptance allowable state and the 3rd A acceptability state may be provided as the multiple-time operation valid state.

Further, for example, as the twenty-second configuration A22, a multiple-time operation valid state is provided in which a plurality of operation acceptances for the specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted, and the multiple-time operation valid state is a first multiple-time operation valid state ( 2A acceptability state shown in FIG. 149), a second multiple-time operation valid state (fourth A acceptability state shown in FIG. 155), and a third multiple-time operation valid state (first A acceptability shown in FIG. 146). state), and in each of these multiple-operation valid states, a state in which the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state in which the operation button 410 is not operated and a post-operation output sound is output. In the first plural-time operation valid state (second A acceptance allowable state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is only maintained in the operation state. The post-operation output sound (2A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149) corresponding to the above detection can be generated multiple times. is set to an indefinite time (not processed as a fixed time), and in the second multiple-time operation valid state (4A reception allowable state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state. 155, the post-operation output sound (4A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 155) corresponding to the detection cannot be generated multiple times. state), the post-operation output sound (first A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146) corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation state of the specific operation means (operation button 410). However, at that time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated can be processed to be a constant time. Then, of the multiple-operation valid state in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times only by maintaining the operation state of the specific operation means (operation button 410), the above-mentioned In the first plural-time operation valid state (2A reception allowable state) in which the interval until a new output sound is generated after operation is an indefinite time, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state. and the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) is in the output state, and the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the non-operation state to the operation state, the operation The time from entering the state to ending the output state of the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) is indefinite (for example, timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIG. 149(h)). etc.), and in the third multiple-time operation valid state (1A reception allowable state) in which the interval until the output sound is newly generated after the operation is a constant time, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the non-operating state and the post-operation output sound (1A post-reception output sound) is in the output state, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state. In this case, the time from entering the operation state to the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound (1A post-acceptance output sound) can be processed as a fixed time instead of an indefinite time (for example, , timing tAa2-C1 shown in FIG. 146(g), etc.), the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection is generated multiple times only by maintaining the operation state of the specific operation means (operation button 410). In the second multiple-operation valid state (4A reception allowable state) where it is not possible, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound (4A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the non-operating state to the operating state, the output state of the post-operation output is terminated after entering the operating state. 155(g), (h), etc.). In the example described above, "0 seconds" is set as the fixed time from when the operation state is entered until the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated.

According to such a configuration, when the player performs the operation again in the above-mentioned second multiple operation valid state (4th A reception allowable state) in which the so-called automatic repeated hitting function is not activated, the so-called automatic repeated hitting function is fixed. In both the case where the player performs the operation again in the third multiple-time operation valid state (the 1A acceptability state) that is validated at intervals, the above operation is performed after the player performs the operation again. Since the time until the output state of the output sound is terminated after the operation is constant, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the automatic continuous tapping function is activated or not, and the sense of tension is preferably maintained. be expected to do so. On the other hand, in the first plural-time operation valid state (2A acceptance allowable state), if the specific operation means is re-operated under the condition that the post-operation output sound is being output, , that it is not in a situation where the so-called auto-flick function is not activated (second multiple-time operation valid state (fourth A reception allowable state)), that is, it is in a situation where the auto-flick function is to be activated. Since it can be recognized, the so-called automatic repeated hitting function is not activated at regular intervals, so that it is difficult to recognize "whether the automatic repeated hitting function is to be activated". Decrease can be suppressed.

In addition, in the first plural-time operation valid state (2A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 149) in which the interval until the new output sound is generated after operation is an indefinite time, the specific operation means (operation button 410 ) is in an operating state and a corresponding post-operation output sound (2A post-reception output sound) is output, the post-operation output sound is generated when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is operated. When the time from the state to the non-operating state to the end of the output state is treated as indefinite (see, for example, timing tAb2-B3 shown in FIG. 149(h)) and the output state is processed as a constant time (see, for example, timing tAb2-B3 shown in FIG. 149(g)). That is, in this case, when the operation is interrupted, only a part of the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) that has been output until then is terminated within a certain period of time. While providing the information, it becomes possible to prompt the user to interrupt the operation.

In addition, in the above-described effect example, it corresponds to the second multiple operation valid state (4th A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 155) and the 3rd multiple operation valid state (1A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 146). As the post-operation output sound, a type of post-operation output sound is prepared in which the time from when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the non-operation state to the operation state until the output state ends is indefinite. First, only the type of post-operation output sound that can be processed as a constant time from when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the non-operation state to the operation state until the output state ends is prepared. there is

Further, a configuration for determining whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and a configuration for determining whether or not a change occurs when changing from a non-operating state to an operating state. It goes without saying that the configuration is based on the premise that the reception valid state is continued.

Note that in the twenty-second configuration A22, the operation means when the so-called auto-flick function is not activated in the multiple-time operation valid state and the operation means when the so-called auto-flick function is activated in the multiple-time operation valid state. , are assumed to be the same operation means as the "specific operation means", but this is not necessarily the case. In addition, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the first multiple-time operation valid state, the second multiple-time operation valid state, and the third multiple-time operation valid state are the same operation means, but this is not necessarily the case. can't For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means represented as a simulated image display and allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple-time operation valid state.

Further, in order to realize the twenty-second configuration A22, the multiple-operation valid state is not the first A acceptance allowable state, but the third A acceptability state. 3 It may be realized as a multiple-time operation valid state. Alternatively, both the 1st A acceptance allowable state and the 3rd A acceptability state may be provided as the multiple-time operation valid state.

Further, for example, as the twenty-third configuration A23, a multiple-time operation valid state is provided in which a plurality of operation acceptances for the specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted, and the multiple-time operation valid state is a first multiple-time operation valid state ( 149) and a second multiple-time operation valid state (first A acceptance-allowed state shown in FIG. 146) are prepared. It is possible to play a game so as to create a situation in which the operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operating state in which the operating means (operation button 410) is not operated and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, and the first multiple operations are performed. In the enabled state (2A reception allowable state), the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound shown in FIG. ) can be generated multiple times, but the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is an indefinite time (not treated as a fixed time), and the second plural In the turning operation valid state (1A acceptance allowable state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is only maintained in the operation state, and the post-operation output sound (after 1A acceptance shown in FIG. 146) corresponding to the detection The post-operation output sound) can be generated a plurality of times, and in this case, processing can be performed so that the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is set to a constant time. In addition, in the first plural-time operation valid state (second A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 149) in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is an indefinite time, the specific operation is performed. When the means (operation button 410) is in the non-operation state and the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) is in the output state, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the non-operation state. , the time from entering the operation state to the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) is indeterminate (for example, , timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIGS. 149(g) and (h), etc.), and the second multiple-operation valid state in which the interval until the output sound after the operation is newly generated is a constant time. In (1A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 146), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound (1A post-reception output sound) is in an output state. 2, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the non-operating state to the operating state, the output state of the post-operation output sound (post-1A reception output sound) after entering the operating state is The time until the end is an indefinite time (1A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146(h)) or a fixed time (1A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146(g) sound). In the example described above, "0 seconds" is set as the fixed time from when the operation state is entered until the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated.

According to such a configuration, in the first plural-time operation valid state (2A reception allowable state) in which the so-called auto repeated hitting function is not activated at regular intervals, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is set to the non-operation state. Even if the operating state is changed again from the above, the time from entering the operating state to the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound is indefinite, so the interval until the above-mentioned post-operation output sound is newly generated is set to an indefinite time, it is expected that it will be difficult to recognize whether the player's operation has been properly accepted, and that the sense of tension will be preferably maintained. On the other hand, in the second plural-time operation valid state (1A reception allowable state) in which the so-called auto repeated hitting function is activated at regular intervals, for example, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is put into the operation state again. While suggesting the possibility that the directing from the beginning is worth noting, the post-operation output sound that is in the output state is not necessarily ended in a certain amount of time after being in the operation state again. Therefore, it is expected that the feeling of tension when returning to the operating state will be preferably maintained.

In addition, as the post-operation output sound corresponding to the first multiple-operation valid state (2A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 149), after the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state, A type of post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) whose time until the output state ends is not processed as a fixed time and is indefinite, and its output state The type of post-operation output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) processed as a constant time (0 seconds in the above example) until the end of is in the output state.

In addition, in the first multiple-operation valid state (2A reception-permitting state shown in FIG. 149), the operation ends after a certain period of time (0 seconds in the example described above) after the operation button 410 changes from the operating state to the non-operating state. The type of post-operation output sound (the first post-reception output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) does not end within a certain period of time after the operation button 410 changes from the operated state to the non-operated state, and is indefinite. The type of post-operation output sound (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that ends at the time of is in an output state or in an output state. A type of post-operation output sound that can be started, but does not end in a fixed time after the operation button 410 changes from the operated state to the non-operated state, but ends in an indefinite time (the second sound shown in FIG. 149(h)). 2 post-acceptance output sound SB2) is a type of post-operation output sound (Fig. 149 (g ) does not start to be output independently when it is not in the output state, but may be started to be output when it is in the output state (or at the same time).

In addition, in the first plural-time operation valid state (2A reception allowable state) of the twenty-third configuration A23, while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state, the second post-reception output sound Even when the output condition of SB2 is satisfied (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 starts based on the operation reception performed at timing tAb2-B2. On the other hand, the output state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, the sound effect for one time) which has been in the output state up to that time is changed based on the operation reception performed at the timing tAb2-B2. may not end or start a new output. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, the effect sound for one time) that was in the output state at the time when the timing tAb2-B2 arrived is continued, and the reproduction state is continued. There is no possibility that the output of a sound (sound effect for one time) based on new data due to the midway termination will not be started or that the reproduction will be restarted.

In addition, in the second plural-time operation valid state (first A reception allowable state) of the twenty-third configuration A23, while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state, the first post-reception output sound When the output condition of SB1 is satisfied (timing tAa2-B2 shown in FIG. 146), the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 is started based on the operation reception performed at timing tAa2-B2. On the other hand, the output state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 (here, the sound effect for one time) that has been in the output state until then is terminated based on the operation acceptance performed at the timing tAa2-B2, A new output may be started. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 (here, the effect sound for one time) that was in the output state when the timing tAa2-B2 arrived is interrupted, and new data (here, Output of the sound (sound effect for one time) based on the sound effect data for one time is started.

Further, it is possible to determine whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state, and whether or not the change occurs when changing from the non-operating state to the operating state. It goes without saying that the configuration is based on the premise that the reception valid state is continued.

In the twenty-third configuration A23, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the first multiple-time operation valid state and the second multiple-time operation valid state are the same operation means, but this is not necessarily the case. do not have. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means represented as a simulated image display and allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple-time operation valid state.

Further, the "multiple operation valid state" related to the twenty-third configuration A23 may all be valid periods that occur during symbol fluctuations based on the big hit determination.

Further, in order to realize the twenty-third configuration A23, the multiple-time operation valid state is provided with the 3A acceptance allowable state instead of the 1A acceptance allowable state. 2 It may be realized as a multiple-time operation valid state. Alternatively, both the 1st A acceptance allowable state and the 3rd A acceptability state may be provided as the multiple-time operation valid state.

Further, for example, as the twenty-fourth configuration A24, a multiple-time operation valid state in which acceptance of operation on the specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times is provided, and the multiple-time operation valid state includes the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operated state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated a plurality of times, and in this case, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is an indefinite time. Processable inconstant change multiple operation effective state (2A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 149) and post-operation output sound in response to the above detection only by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state can be generated a plurality of times, and at that time, a constant change multiple operation valid state (first A shown in FIG. 152) are prepared. While the state is generated as a multiple-time operation valid state of a type that can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state before, the constant change multiple-time The operation valid state (first A acceptance acceptable state, third A acceptance acceptable state) is entered based on the detection that the specific operating means is in the operating state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing. When the state occurs as a multiple-operation valid state of a type that is not terminated (3A acceptance acceptable state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) enters the operation state before the predetermined end timing arrives. Based on the detection of a certain condition, there is both a case where the state occurs as a multiple-operation valid state of a type that can be terminated (3A reception allowable state).

According to such a configuration, when the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operated state is an indefinite time, the specific While it is possible to preferably suggest that the state is likely to be terminated by detecting that the operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state, the specific operation means (operation button 410) 410) is maintained in the operated state, the interval until the output sound is newly generated after the operation is set to be a constant time, it is detected that the specific operation means (the operation button 410) is in the operated state. , or whether the state cannot be terminated by detecting that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operating state. By making it difficult to perceive, it becomes expected to maintain a sense of tension well.

In the inconstant change multiple operation valid state (2A acceptance acceptance state), the interval until the output sound is newly generated after the operation is not processed to be a constant time, but an indefinite time. However, in the constant change multiple operation valid state (1A reception allowable state, 3A reception allowable state), the interval until the new output sound is generated after the operation is processed as a constant time. is executed at least, and the processing (first post-acceptance output sound) in which the interval until the new post-operation output sound is generated is a constant time, and the post-operation output sound is newly generated Both the processing (the second post-reception output sound) having an indefinite time interval until the reception is performed may be executed.

In the inconstant change multiple operation valid state (2A acceptability state), when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state and a post-operation output sound is output in accordance with this, the operation is performed. The post-output sound is a case in which the output state is maintained when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operation state to the non-operation state (2A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(h)), There is both a case where the output state is not maintained and the output state is ended with this as a trigger (2A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)). That is, in this case, when the operation is interrupted, only a part of the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) that has been in the output state until then is changed (finished), so a moderate tension is generated. While providing the

In the constant change multiple operation valid state (1A acceptance acceptable state, 3A acceptance acceptable state), the post-operation output sound is generated when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state. Since there is no case in which the output state is terminated with the

In addition, in the inconstant change multiple operation valid state (2A reception allowable state), there is no case where the message display is not displayed, and the message display is always displayed. , 3A Acceptable State), since there are both cases in which the message is displayed and cases in which the message is not displayed, it can be expected to maintain a sense of tension. .

Further, it is possible to determine whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state, and whether or not the change occurs when changing from the non-operating state to the operating state. It goes without saying that the configuration is based on the premise that the reception valid state is continued.

In the twenty-fourth configuration A24, the constant change multiple operation valid state (1A acceptance acceptable state, 3A acceptance acceptable state) and the inconstant change multiple operation valid state (2A acceptance acceptable state) are targeted for operation. Although it is assumed that the operation means to be used are the same operation means, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means represented as a simulated image display and allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple-time operation valid state.

Further, the "multiple operation valid state" related to the twenty-fourth configuration A24 may be a valid period that occurs during symbol variation based on the big hit determination.

Further, for example, as the twenty-fifth configuration A25, a multiple-time operation valid state is provided in which a plurality of operation acceptances for the specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted, and the multiple-time operation valid state is a first multiple-time operation valid state ( 2A acceptability state shown in FIG. 149), a second multiple-time operation valid state (fourth A acceptability state shown in FIG. 155), and a third multiple-time operation valid state (first A acceptability shown in FIG. 146). state), and in each of these multiple-operation valid states, a state in which the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state in which the operation button 410 is not operated and a post-operation output sound is output. In the first plural-time operation valid state (second A acceptance allowable state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is only maintained in the operation state. The post-operation output sound (2A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149) corresponding to the above detection can be generated multiple times. is always a long time. The post-operation output sound (4th A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 155) cannot be generated multiple times. Only by maintaining the operation means (operation button 410) in the operated state, the post-operation output sound (first A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146) corresponding to the above detection can be generated a plurality of times. The interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always set to a time equal to or less than the specific time. Then, of the multiple-operation valid state in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times only by maintaining the operation state of the specific operation means (operation button 410), the above-mentioned In the first multiple-time operation valid state (2A reception allowable state) in which the interval until the output sound is newly generated after the operation is always longer than the specific time, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the non-operating state and the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) is in the output state, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state. 149(g) and (h), the output state of the post-operation output sound (2A post-reception output sound) does not change (end) with this as a trigger (for example, as shown in FIGS. 149(g) and (h) Timing tAb2-C1, etc.), in the above-mentioned third multiple-time operation valid state (1A acceptance allowable state) in which the interval until the output sound is newly generated after the operation is always equal to or less than the above-mentioned specific time. , the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound (post-1A reception output sound) is in an output state. is changed from a non-operating state to an operating state, the output state of the post-operation output sound (1A post-acceptance output sound) can be changed (finished) with this as a trigger (for example, in FIG. 146(g) shown timing tAa2-C1, etc.), the second plurality in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection cannot be generated a plurality of times only by maintaining the operation state of the specific operation means (operation button 410). In the turn operation valid state (4A reception allowable state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound (post-4A reception output sound) is in an output state. 2, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the non-operating state to the operating state, the output state of the post-operation output sound can be changed (finished) with this as a trigger (for example, See the timing tAd2-C1 shown in FIGS. 155(g) and (h)).

According to such a configuration, when the player performs the operation again in the above-mentioned second multiple operation valid state (4th A reception allowable state) in which the so-called auto repeated hitting function is not activated, the output after the previous operation is The player is in the third multiple operation valid state (1A acceptance acceptable state) in which the so-called auto repeated hitting function is activated only after a specific time or less has elapsed since the start, and a new post-operation output is started. In both cases, the re-operation by the player changes (ends) the post-operation output sound that was in the output state when the player re-operates, so the auto repeat function is activated. It will be expected that the sense of tension will be preferably maintained by making it difficult to recognize whether or not the person is in a situation where he or she is in a situation where he or she is in a situation where he/she is in a situation where he or she is in a situation where he/she is in a situation where he or she is in a situation where he/she is in a situation where he or she is in a situation where he or she is in a situation where he/she is in a situation where he/she is in a situation where he or she is in a situation where he/she is in a situation where he/she is in a situation. On the other hand, in the first plural-time operation valid state (2A acceptance allowable state), if the specific operation means is re-operated under the condition that the post-operation output sound is being output, , that it is not in a situation where the so-called auto-flick function is not activated (second multiple-time operation valid state (fourth A reception allowable state)), that is, it is in a situation where the auto-flick function is to be activated. Since it can be recognized, if a longer time than a specific time has elapsed since the output was started after the previous operation, the so-called auto repeat function will not be activated. While making it difficult to play, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game due to having the configuration.

In addition, in the first multiple-time operation valid state (second A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 149), the post-operation output sound (FIG. 149 2A post-acceptance output sound shown in (h)) is output, and the post-operation output sound (FIG. 149 (g) 2A output sound after reception shown in ) is output. That is, in this case, the post-operation output sound (post-acceptance output sound 2A shown in FIG. 149(g)) whose output state changes (ends) triggered by the detection of the non-operation state is subsequently replayed. Even if an operation is performed, it will no longer be in the output state at that time, and the output state after operation will not change (end) when the non-operation state is detected (Fig. 149 Only the second A post-acceptance output sound shown in (h)) can be put into an output state as a sound that is not changed (finished) by the re-operation at the time when the re-operation is performed.

In addition, in the above-described effect example, it corresponds to the second multiple-time operation valid state (4th A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 155) and the third multiple-time operation valid state (1A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 146). The post-operation output sound is a post-operation sound that changes (ends) the output state without maintaining the output state when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operation state to the non-operation state. No output sound is prepared, and only a type of post-operation output sound that does not change (end) the output state when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state is prepared.

Further, a configuration for determining whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and a configuration for determining whether or not a change occurs when changing from a non-operating state to an operating state. As for the configuration, it goes without saying that the configuration is based on the premise that the acceptance valid state is continued.

In the twenty-fifth configuration A25, the operation means when the so-called auto-flick function is not activated in the multiple-time operation valid state and the operation means when the so-called auto-flick function is activated in the multiple-time operation valid state. , are assumed to be the same operation means as the "specific operation means", but this is not necessarily the case. In addition, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the first multiple-time operation valid state, the second multiple-time operation valid state, and the third multiple-time operation valid state are the same operation means, but this is not necessarily the case. can't For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means represented as a simulated image display and allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple-time operation valid state.

In addition, in order to realize the twenty-fifth configuration A25, the multiple-operation valid state is provided with the 3A acceptance allowable state instead of the 1A acceptance allowable state. 3 It may be realized as a multiple-time operation valid state. Alternatively, both the 1st A acceptance allowable state and the 3rd A acceptability state may be provided as the multiple-time operation valid state.

Further, for example, as the twenty-sixth configuration A26, a multiple-operation valid state is provided in which a plurality of operation receptions for the specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted, and the multiple-operation valid state is a first multiple-operation valid state ( 149) and a second multiple-time operation valid state (first A acceptance-allowed state shown in FIG. 146) are prepared. It is possible to play a game so as to create a situation in which the operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operating state in which the operating means (operation button 410) is not operated and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, and the first multiple operations are performed. In the enabled state (2A reception allowable state), the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound shown in FIG. ) can be generated multiple times, and the interval until the output sound is newly generated after the operation is always longer than the specific time. In the acceptability state), the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection (1A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146) is generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation state of the specific operation means (operation button 410). In that case, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always set to the time equal to or less than the specific time. In addition, in the above-described first multiple-time operation valid state (second A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 149) in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always longer than the specific time. , the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) is in an output state. is changed from a non-operating state to an operating state, the output state of the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) does not change (finish) with this as a trigger (for example, FIG. 149 ( g), see the timing tAb2-C1 shown in (h)), the second multiple operation valid state in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always equal to or less than the specific time. In (1A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 146), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound (1A post-reception output sound) is in an output state. , when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the non-operating state to the operating state, the sound output as the post-operation output sound (first A post-acceptance output sound) is triggered by this. 146(g) shown in FIG. 146(g)) and not changed (1A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146(h)). I made it

According to such a configuration, the first plural-time operation valid state in which a new post-operation output is not started by the so-called auto repeated hitting function unless a time longer than the specific time has elapsed since the output after the previous operation was started. In the (2A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 149), even if the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the non-operation state to the operation state again, the post-operation output sound (2A post-reception output sound) Since the output state does not change (end) with this as a trigger, the so-called auto repeated hit function will not be activated (functioned) unless a longer time than a specific time has passed since the output started after the previous operation. It is expected that the sense of tension is preferably maintained by making it difficult to recognize whether the player's operation has been properly accepted. On the other hand, a second multiple-time operation in which a so-called auto-flick function is enabled (functions) only when a specific time or less has elapsed since the output after the previous operation was started, and a new output after the operation is started. In the effective state (1A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146), for example, it suggests the possibility that the performance after the specific operation means (operation button 410) is put into the operation state again is of noteworthy value. However, the post-operation output sound in the output state (1A post-reception output sound) is not necessarily changed (finished) when the operation state is re-entered, so that the operation state is resumed. It is expected that this tension will be appropriately maintained.

Further, as a post-operation output sound (2A post-reception output sound) corresponding to the first multiple-time operation valid state (2A reception acceptance state shown in FIG. 149), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is A type of post-operation output sound (2A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 410) is changed from the operated state to the non-operated state as a trigger for post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(h)) whose output state does not change (end). and both post-operation output sounds are in the output state. That is, in this case, when the operation is interrupted, only a part of the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) that has been in the output state until then is changed (finished), resulting in a moderate tension. While providing the

In addition, in the first plural-time operation valid state (2A reception-permitting state shown in FIG. 149), when the operation button 410 changes from the operated state to the non-operated state, the post-operation type changes (ends). The output sound (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is a post-operation output sound that does not change (end) when the operation button 410 changes from the operated state to the non-operated state. (Second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) can be started to be output either when it is in the output state or when it is not in the output state. The post-operation output sound (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that does not change (end) when the operation button 410 changes from the operation state to the non-operation state. When the type of post-operation output sound (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) that is changed (finished) when the operation state is entered is not in the output state, the output starts independently. The output may be started when (or at the same time) in the output state without being turned off.

In addition, in the first plural-time operation valid state (2A reception allowable state) of the twenty-sixth configuration A26, while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state, the second post-reception output sound Even when the output condition of SB2 is satisfied (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 starts based on the operation reception performed at timing tAb2-B2. On the other hand, the output state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, the sound effect for one time) which has been in the output state up to that time is changed based on the operation reception performed at the timing tAb2-B2. may not end or start a new output. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, the effect sound for one time) that was in the output state at the time when the timing tAb2-B2 arrived is continued, and the reproduction state is continued. There is no possibility that the output of a sound (sound effect for one time) based on new data due to the midway termination will not be started or that the reproduction will be restarted.

In addition, in the second multiple-operation valid state (1A reception-permitting state) of the twenty-sixth configuration A26, while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state, the first post-reception output sound When the output condition of SB1 is satisfied (timing tAa2-B2 shown in FIG. 146), the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 is started based on the operation reception performed at timing tAa2-B2. On the other hand, the output state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 (here, the sound effect for one time) that has been in the output state until then is terminated based on the operation acceptance performed at the timing tAa2-B2, A new output may be started. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 (here, the effect sound for one time) that was in the output state when the timing tAa2-B2 arrived is interrupted, and new data (here, Output of the sound (sound effect for one time) based on the sound effect data for one time is started.

Further, it is possible to determine whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state, and whether or not the change occurs when changing from the non-operating state to the operating state. As for the configuration, it goes without saying that the configuration is based on the premise that the acceptance valid state is continued.

In the twenty-sixth configuration A26, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the first multiple-time operation valid state and the second multiple-time operation valid state are the same operation means, but this is not necessarily the case. do not have. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means represented as a simulated image display and allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple-time operation valid state.

Further, the "multiple operation valid state" related to the twenty-sixth configuration A26 may all be valid periods that occur during symbol fluctuations based on the big hit determination.

Further, in order to realize the twenty-sixth configuration A26, the multiple-operation valid state is provided with the 3A acceptance allowable state instead of the 1A acceptance allowable state. 2 It may be realized as a multiple-time operation valid state. Alternatively, both the 1st A acceptance allowable state and the 3rd A acceptability state may be provided as the multiple-time operation valid state.

Further, for example, as the twenty-seventh configuration A27, a multiple-time operation valid state is provided in which a plurality of operation receptions for the specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted, and the multiple-time operation valid state is a first multiple-time operation valid state ( 2A acceptability state shown in FIG. 149), a second multiple-time operation valid state (fourth A acceptability state shown in FIG. 155), and a third multiple-time operation valid state (first A acceptability shown in FIG. 146). state), and in each of these multiple-operation valid states, a state in which the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state in which the operation button 410 is not operated and a post-operation output sound is output. In the first plural-time operation valid state (second A acceptance allowable state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is only maintained in the operation state. The post-operation output sound (2A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149) corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times, and the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is set to a specific time. is always a long time, and in the second multiple-time operation valid state (4A reception allowable state), if the specific operation means (operation button 410) is only maintained in the operation state, it will not respond to the detection. The post-operation output sound (4th A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 155) cannot be generated multiple times. Only by maintaining the operation state of the means (operation button 410), the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146) corresponding to the detection can be generated a plurality of times. The interval until a new post-output sound is generated is always set to be equal to or less than the specific time. Then, of the multiple-operation valid state in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times only by maintaining the operation state of the specific operation means (operation button 410), the above-mentioned In the first multiple-time operation valid state (2A reception allowable state) in which the interval until the output sound is newly generated after the operation is always longer than the specific time, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the non-operating state and the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) is in the output state, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state. 149(h), the time from the operation state to the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound (2A post-acceptance output sound) is indefinite (for example, as shown in FIG. 149(h) Timing tAb2-C1, etc.), in the above-mentioned third multiple-time operation valid state (1A reception allowable state) in which the interval until the output sound is newly generated after the operation is always equal to or less than the above-mentioned specific time. , the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound (post-1A reception output sound) is in an output state. is changed from a non-operated state to an operated state, the time from the change to the operated state to the end of the output state of the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (1A post-reception output sound) is not an indefinite time but a fixed time. It can be processed as time (see, for example, the timing tAa2-C1 shown in FIG. 146(g)), and the above-mentioned specific operating means (operating button 410) is only maintained in the operated state, and the above-mentioned In the second multiple-time operation valid state (4th A acceptance acceptance state) in which the post-operation output sound cannot be generated multiple times, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operating state and the post-operation output sound When the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state under the condition that (the 4th A post-reception output sound) is in the output state, after entering the operating state, after the above-mentioned operation The time until the output state of the output ends can be processed as a constant time (for example, see timing tAd2-C1 shown in FIGS. 155(g) and (h)). In the example described above, "0 seconds" is set as the fixed time from when the operation state is entered until the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated.

According to such a configuration, when the player performs the operation again in the above-mentioned second multiple operation valid state (4th A reception allowable state) in which the so-called automatic repeated hitting function is not activated, the so-called automatic repeated hitting function is fixed. In both the cases where the player performs the re-operation in the third multiple-time operation valid state (1A acceptability state) which is activated (functions) at intervals, the player performs the re-operation. Since the time from the above operation to the end of the output state of the output sound is constant, it is difficult to recognize whether the automatic continuous hitting function is activated or not, which creates a sense of tension. It will be expected to keep well. On the other hand, in the first plural-time operation valid state (2A acceptance allowable state), if the specific operation means is re-operated under the condition that the post-operation output sound is being output, , that it is not in a situation where the so-called auto-flick function is not activated (second multiple-time operation valid state (fourth A reception allowable state)), that is, it is in a situation where the auto-flick function is to be activated. Since it can be recognized, the so-called automatic repeated hitting function is not activated at regular intervals, so that it is difficult to recognize "whether the automatic repeated hitting function is to be activated". Decrease can be suppressed.

In addition, in the first plural-time operation valid state (2A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 149) in which the interval until the output sound is newly generated after the operation is always longer than the specific time, the specific operation means When it is detected that (operation button 410) is in an operated state and a corresponding post-operation output sound (2A post-reception output sound) is output, the post-operation output sound is the specific operation means (operation button 410) is processed as an indeterminate time from when it changes from the operated state to the non-operated state until the output state ends (see, for example, timing tAb2-B3 shown in FIG. 149(h)). , and a case where the time until the output state is terminated is processed as a constant time (see, for example, timing tAb2-B3 shown in FIG. 149(g)). That is, in this case, when the operation is interrupted, only part of the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) that has been output until then is terminated within a certain period of time. While providing the information, it becomes possible to prompt the user to interrupt the operation.

In addition, in the above-described effect example, it corresponds to the second multiple operation valid state (4th A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 155) and the 3rd multiple operation valid state (1A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 146). As the post-operation output sound, a type of post-operation output sound is prepared in which the time from when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the non-operation state to the operation state until the output state ends is indefinite. First, only the type of post-operation output sound that can be processed as a constant time from when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the non-operation state to the operation state until the output state ends is prepared. there is

Further, it is possible to determine whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state, and whether or not the change occurs when changing from the non-operating state to the operating state. It goes without saying that the configuration is based on the premise that the reception valid state is continued.

In the twenty-seventh configuration A27, the operation means when the so-called auto-flick function is not activated in the multiple-time operation valid state, and the operation means when the so-called auto-flick function is activated in the multiple-time operation valid state. , are assumed to be the same operation means as the "specific operation means", but this is not necessarily the case. In addition, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the first multiple-time operation valid state, the second multiple-time operation valid state, and the third multiple-time operation valid state are the same operation means, but this is not necessarily the case. can't For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means represented as a simulated image display and allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple-time operation valid state.

Further, in order to realize the twenty-seventh configuration A27, the multiple-time operation valid state is provided with the 3A acceptance allowable state instead of the 1A acceptance allowable state. 3 It may be realized as a multiple-time operation valid state. Alternatively, both the 1st A acceptance allowable state and the 3rd A acceptability state may be provided as the multiple-time operation valid state.

Further, for example, as the twenty-eighth configuration A28, a multiple-operation valid state is provided in which a plurality of operation acceptances for the specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted, and the multiple-operation valid state is a first multiple-operation valid state ( 149) and a second multiple-time operation valid state (first A acceptance-allowed state shown in FIG. 146) are prepared. It is possible to play a game so as to create a situation in which the operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operating state in which the operating means (operation button 410) is not operated and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, and the first multiple operations are performed. In the enabled state (2A reception allowable state), the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound shown in FIG. ) can be generated multiple times, and the interval until the output sound is newly generated after the operation is always longer than the specific time. In the acceptability state), the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection (1A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146) is generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation state of the specific operation means (operation button 410). In that case, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always set to the time equal to or less than the specific time. On top of this, the above-described first multiple operation valid state (second A shown in FIG. 149) in which the so-called auto repeated hitting function is not activated unless a time longer than a specific time has elapsed since the output after the previous operation was started. acceptance allowable state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operating state and the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, and the specific operation means When the (operation button 410) changes from the non-operating state to the operating state, the time from when the operation state is changed until the output state of the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) ends is indeterminate. (See, for example, the timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIGS. 149(g) and (h)), and the time equal to or less than the specific time has elapsed since the output after the previous operation was started. In the above-mentioned second multiple operation valid state (first A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 146) in which the so-called auto repeated hitting function is validated and a new post-operation output is started, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the non-operating state and the post-operation output sound (1A post-reception output sound) is in the output state, the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the non-operating state to the operating state. 146(h), the time from the operation state to the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound (1A post-acceptance output sound) is an indefinite time. 1A post-acceptance output sound) and a fixed time (1A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146(g)). In the example described above, "0 seconds" is set as the fixed time from when the operation state is entered until the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated.

According to such a configuration, the so-called auto repeated operation function is activated only when a time longer than a specific time has elapsed since the output after the previous operation was started. ), even if the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state again, the time from the operation state to the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound is indefinite. Therefore, in combination with the fact that the interval until the output sound is newly generated after the operation is an indefinite time, it is difficult to recognize whether the operation by the player has been properly accepted, and the tension is preferably felt. expected to maintain. On the other hand, a second multiple-operations valid state ( In the 1A reception acceptance state), for example, while suggesting the possibility that the performance after the specific operation means (operation button 410) is again in the operation state is worth noting, the output state By making it so that the output sound after a certain operation does not necessarily end within a certain period of time after being put into the operation state again, it is expected that the sense of tension when returning to the operation state will be preferably maintained. become.

Further, as the post-operation output sound corresponding to the first multiple-time operation valid state (2A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 149), after the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state, A type of post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) in which the time until the output state ends is not processed as a fixed time but is indefinite, and its output state The type of post-operation output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) processed as a constant time (0 seconds in the above example) until the end of is in the output state.

In addition, in the first multiple-operation valid state (2A reception-permitting state shown in FIG. 149), the operation ends after a certain period of time (0 seconds in the example described above) after the operation button 410 changes from the operating state to the non-operating state. The type of post-operation output sound (the first post-reception output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) does not end within a certain period of time after the operation button 410 changes from the operated state to the non-operated state, and is indefinite. The type of post-operation output sound (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that ends at the time of is in an output state or in an output state. A type of post-operation output sound that can be started, but does not end in a fixed time after the operation button 410 changes from the operated state to the non-operated state, but ends in an indefinite time (the second sound shown in FIG. 149(h)). 2 post-acceptance output sound SB2) is a type of post-operation output sound (Fig. 149 (g ) does not start to be output independently when it is not in the output state, but may be started to be output when it is in the output state (or at the same time).

In addition, in the first multiple-operation valid state (2A reception-permitting state) of the twenty-eighth configuration A28, while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state, the second post-reception output sound Even when the output condition of SB2 is satisfied (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 starts based on the operation reception performed at timing tAb2-B2. On the other hand, the output state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, the sound effect for one time) which has been in the output state up to that time is changed based on the operation reception performed at the timing tAb2-B2. may not end or start a new output. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, the effect sound for one time) that was in the output state at the time when the timing tAb2-B2 arrived is continued, and the reproduction state is continued. There is no possibility that the output of a sound (sound effect for one time) based on new data due to the midway termination will not be started or that the reproduction will be restarted.

In addition, in the second multiple-operation valid state (first-A reception-allowing state) of the twenty-eighth configuration A28, while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state, the first post-reception output sound When the output condition of SB1 is satisfied (timing tAa2-B2 shown in FIG. 146), the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 is started based on the operation reception performed at timing tAa2-B2. On the other hand, the output state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 (here, the sound effect for one time) that has been in the output state until then is terminated based on the operation acceptance performed at the timing tAa2-B2, A new output may be started. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 (here, the effect sound for one time) that was in the output state when the timing tAa2-B2 arrived is interrupted, and new data (here, Output of the sound (sound effect for one time) based on the sound effect data for one time is started.

Further, a configuration for determining whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and a configuration for determining whether or not a change occurs when changing from a non-operating state to an operating state. As for the configuration, it goes without saying that the configuration is based on the premise that the acceptance valid state is continued.

In the twenty-eighth configuration A28, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the first multiple-time operation valid state and the second multiple-time operation valid state are the same operation means, but this is not necessarily the case. do not have. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means represented as a simulated image display and allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple-time operation valid state.

In addition, the "multiple operation valid state" related to the twenty-eighth configuration A28 may all be valid periods that occur during symbol fluctuations based on the big hit determination.

Further, in order to realize the twenty-eighth configuration A28, the multiple-operation valid state is provided with the 3A acceptance allowable state instead of the 1A acceptance allowable state. 2 It may be realized as a multiple-time operation valid state. Alternatively, both the 1st A acceptance allowable state and the 3rd A acceptability state may be provided as the multiple-time operation valid state.

Further, for example, as the twenty-ninth configuration A29, a multiple-time operation valid state in which a plurality of operation acceptances for the specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted is provided, and the multiple-time operation valid state includes the specific operation means (operation button 410). is maintained in the operated state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times, and in this case, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always longer than the specific time. and a post-operation output sound corresponding to the above detection only by maintaining the operation state of the specific operation means (operation button 410) can be generated multiple times, and the interval until the output sound is newly generated after the operation is always less than or equal to the specific time. 152) are prepared, and the above-mentioned long change multiple operation valid state (2A acceptance allowable state) is established before a predetermined end timing arrives. While the state is generated as a multiple-time operation enabled state of a type that can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state before, the short change multiple-time The operation valid state (first A acceptance acceptable state, third A acceptance acceptable state) is entered based on the detection that the specific operating means is in the operating state before the arrival of a predetermined end timing. When the state occurs as a multiple-operation valid state of a type that is not terminated (3A acceptance acceptable state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) enters the operation state before the predetermined end timing arrives. Based on the detection of a certain condition, there is both a case where the state occurs as a multiple-operation valid state of a type that can be terminated (3A reception allowable state).

According to such a configuration, even though the auto-repeat function is to be activated, the so-called auto-repeat function cannot be activated unless a time longer than a specific time has elapsed since the output was started after the previous operation. is capable of suitably suggesting that the state can be terminated by detecting that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state, whereas the previous operation When a so-called auto-flick function is activated and a new post-operation output is started only after a period of time equal to or less than a specific time has elapsed since the post-output was started, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is operated. Whether the state can be terminated by detecting that it is in the state, or the state cannot be terminated by detecting that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operating state. By making it difficult to recognize the situation, it is expected that the sense of tension will be appropriately maintained.

In the long change multiple operation valid state (2A accepting state), the interval until the output sound after the operation is newly generated is not processed to be a fixed time, but an indefinite time. However, in the short change multiple operation valid state (1A acceptance acceptable state, 3A acceptance acceptable state), the interval until the new output sound is generated after the operation is processed as a constant time. is executed at least, and the processing (first post-acceptance output sound) in which the interval until the new post-operation output sound is generated is a constant time, and the post-operation output sound is newly generated Both the processing (the second post-acceptance output sound) may be executed at an indefinite time interval.

In the long change multiple operation valid state (2A accepting state), when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state and a post-operation output sound is output according to this, the operation is performed. The post-output sound is a case in which the output state is maintained when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state (second A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(h)), There are both a case where the output state is not maintained and the output state is ended with this as a trigger (2A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)). That is, in this case, when the operation is interrupted, only a part of the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) that has been in the output state until then is changed (finished), resulting in a moderate tension. While providing the

In the short-change multiple-operation valid state (1A acceptance acceptable state, 3A acceptance acceptable state), the post-operation output sound is generated when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state. Since there is no case where the output state is terminated with the

In addition, in the long change multiple operation valid state (2A acceptance acceptable state), there is no case where the message display is not displayed, and the message display is always displayed. , 3A Acceptable State), since there are both cases in which the message is displayed and cases in which the message is not displayed, it can be expected to maintain a sense of tension. .

Further, a configuration for determining whether or not a change occurs when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and a configuration for determining whether or not a change occurs when changing from a non-operating state to an operating state. As for the configuration, it goes without saying that the configuration is based on the premise that the acceptance valid state is continued.

In the twenty-ninth configuration A29, the short change multiple operation valid state (1A acceptance acceptable state, 3A acceptance acceptable state) and the long change multiple operation valid state (2A acceptance acceptable state) are targeted for operation. Although it is assumed that the operation means to be used are the same operation means, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means represented as a simulated image display and allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple-time operation valid state.

In addition, the "multiple operation valid state" related to the twenty-ninth configuration A29 may be a valid period that occurs during symbol variation based on the big hit determination.

Further, for example, as the thirtieth configuration A30, a multiple-operation valid state is provided in which multiple operation receptions for the operation means (operation button 410) to be displayed as a model image are permitted. 149), the second multiple-operation valid state (4A-acceptable state shown in FIG. 155), and the third multiple-operation valid state (see FIG. 146). In each of these multiple operation valid states, the operating means (operation button 410) to be displayed as a model image is in a non-operating state in which it is not operated, and It is possible to play the game so that the state in which the post-operation output sound is output appears, and in the above-mentioned first multiple-time operation valid state (2A reception allowable state), the model image display is periodically performed. A post-operation output corresponding to the above detection can be displayed so that the change appears in units of time longer than a predetermined time, and the operation means (operation button 410), which is the target of the simulated image display, is maintained in an operated state. The sound (2A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 149) can be generated a plurality of times, and in the above-mentioned second multiple operation valid state (4A reception permitted state), periodic changes in the model image display are made. Although it can be displayed so as to appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time, if the operation means (operation button 410), which is the object of the model image display, is maintained in the operation state, the post-operation output according to the detection is performed. The sound (the 4th A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 155) is prevented from being generated multiple times, and in the above-mentioned third multiple-time operation valid state (1A-acceptance allowed state), the periodic change in the model image display is It can be displayed so as to appear in units of time equal to or less than a predetermined time, and the post-operation output sound (Fig. The 1st A post-acceptance output sound indicated by 146) can be generated multiple times. Further, a multiple-time operation valid state is provided in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times only by maintaining the operation state of the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the simulated image display. Among the states, in the above-mentioned first plural-time operation valid state (2A reception allowable state) in which it is possible to display such that the periodic change of the model image display appears in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time, the model image is displayed. The operation means (operation button 410) to be operated is in the non-operation state and the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) is in the output state. is changed from a non-operated state to an operated state, the output state of the post-operation output sound (2A post-reception output sound) does not change (end) with this as a trigger (for example, FIG. 149 (see timing tAb2-C1 shown in (g) and (h)), the above-mentioned third multiple-time operation is enabled so that periodic changes in the model image display appear in units of time equal to or less than the above-mentioned predetermined time. In the state (1A reception allowable state), the operation means (operation button 410) to be displayed as a model image is in a non-operation state, and the post-operation output sound (1A post-reception output sound) is in an output state. When the operating means (operation button 410) changes from the non-operating state to the operating state under certain circumstances, the output state of the post-operation output sound (post-1A reception output sound) changes (end ) (see, for example, the timing tAa2-C1 shown in FIG. 146(g)), and the periodic change in the model image display can be displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time. is the second multiple-operation valid state ( In the 4th A reception acceptance state), the operation means (operation button 410) for which the model image is to be displayed is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound (4th A post-reception output sound) is in an output state. 2, when the operation means (operation button 410) changes from the non-operating state to the operating state, the output state of the post-operation output sound can be changed (finished) with this as a trigger (for example, FIG. 155(g), (h), timing tAd2-C1, etc.).

According to such a configuration, among the multiple-operation valid states in which the so-called automatic continuous-hit function is activated for the operating means to be displayed as the model image, the first multiple-operation valid state (2A acceptance acceptance state), in that periodic changes in the model image display appear in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time, the so-called auto repeated operation function is not activated in the second multiple operation valid state (4th A reception allowable state), it is difficult to recognize whether it is the target of the auto repeated hitting function and the tension is maintained, but after the operation output sound is in the output state, the operation can be performed again. 155 (see timing tAd2-C1 shown in FIGS. 155(g) and (h)), the post-operation output sound 149 (see timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIG. 149(h)). It can be expected to suppress the decline in gaming interest by suitably suggesting that it is under the situation. In addition, among the multiple operation valid states in which the so-called auto-flick function is activated for the operating means to be displayed as a model image, the above-mentioned third multiple operation valid state (1A reception allowable state) If the operation is performed again while the post-output sound is in the output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound can change with this as a trigger, so that the so-called auto repeated hitting function is enabled. By adopting the same configuration as the second multiple-operation valid state (4th A acceptable state), which is not performed, it is difficult to recognize whether the automatic continuous-hit function is intended or not, while maintaining a sense of tension (Fig. 146 ( (see timing tAa2-C1 shown in g)), the periodic change of the model image display is different from the case of the second multiple operation valid state (4th A acceptance acceptance state), in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time. Since it can be displayed so that it appears as if it appears, it is possible to suggest that the game is under the condition that the automatic repeated hitting function is to be activated through the length and shortness of the periodic change of the simulated image display. It can be expected to suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, in the first plural-time operation valid state (2A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 149) in which periodic changes in the model image display appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time, the non-operation state is changed. A case of outputting a post-operation output sound (2A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(h)) whose output state does not change (end) triggered by the detection of a state of non-operation, and a case of outputting a non-operation state. There are both cases of outputting a post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)) whose output state changes (ends) with detection as a trigger. That is, in this case, the post-operation output sound (post-acceptance output sound 2A shown in FIG. 149(g)) whose output state changes (ends) triggered by the detection of the non-operation state is subsequently replayed. Even if an operation is performed, it is already in a non-output state at that time, that is, it is no longer in an output state, and the output state changes when the non-operation state is detected. Only the post-operation output sound that is not (finished) (2A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(h)) is put into an output state as a sound that is not changed (finished) by the re-operation at the time when the re-operation is performed. It is possible to make it possible.

In addition, in the above-described effect example, it corresponds to the second multiple-time operation valid state (4th A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 155) and the third multiple-time operation valid state (1A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 146). The post-operation output sound is a type that changes (ends) the output state without maintaining the output state when the operation means that is the target of the model image display changes from the operation state to the non-operation state. No post-operation output sound is prepared, and only a post-operation output sound of a type that does not change (end) the output state when the operation means changes from the operation state to the non-operation state is prepared.

Further, in the thirtieth configuration A30, the first multiple-operation valid state (the second A-acceptance allowable state shown in FIG. 149) is displayed so that the periodic change of the model image display appears in units of time longer than the predetermined time. ) corresponding to the post-operation output sound (2A post-acceptance output sound), the output state changes (end) when the operation means targeted for the model image display changes from the operating state to the non-operating state. (the first post-reception output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)), and that the operation means targeted for the model image display has changed from the operating state to the non-operating state. A type of post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) whose output state does not change (end) as a trigger is prepared, and both of these post-operation output sounds is in the output state. In other words, in this case, when the operation is interrupted, only a part of the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) that has been in the output state until then becomes the non-operation state, so that it is not terminated. , it is possible to prompt interruption of the operation while providing an appropriate sense of tension.

In addition, in the first multiple-time operation valid state (second A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 149) related to the thirtieth configuration A30, the operation means targeted for model image display has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state. The type of post-operation output sound (the first post-reception output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) that changes (ends) with this as a trigger is when the operating means changes from the operating state to the non-operating state. The type of post-operation output sound (the second post-reception output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that does not change (end) with , but the type of post-operation output sound (in FIG. 149(h) The second post-acceptance output sound SB2) shown is a post-operation output sound ( The output of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2) shown in FIG. 149(g) is not started independently when it is not in the output state, but can be started when it is in the output state (or at the same time). Therefore, it is possible to prompt the user to interrupt the operation while providing an appropriate sense of tension.

In addition, in the first multiple-operation valid state (the second A reception-allowing state shown in FIG. 149) related to the thirtieth configuration A30, while the operation means targeted for model image display is maintained in the operation state, , even if the output condition of the second post-reception output sound SB2 is satisfied (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the second post-reception output sound SB2 is made at the timing tAb2-B2. The output of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, the sound effect for one time) that has been output until then is started at the timing tAb2-B2. The output state may be ended or new output may not be started based on the reception of the operation. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, the effect sound for one time) that was in the output state at the time when the timing tAb2-B2 arrived is continued, and the reproduction state is continued. There is no possibility that the output of a sound (sound effect for one time) based on new data due to the midway termination will not be started or that the reproduction will be restarted.

Further, the "multiple operation valid state" related to the thirtieth configuration A30 may be a valid period that occurs during symbol variation based on the big hit determination.

In addition, whether or not a change occurs when the operation means (operation button 410) to be displayed as a model image is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state, and whether or not the change occurs when the non-operation state is changed to the operation state. Needless to say, the configuration for determining whether or not occurs is based on the premise that the reception valid state is continued.

Note that in the thirtieth configuration A30, the operating means when the so-called auto-flick function is not activated in the multiple-time operation valid state and the operation means when the so-called auto-flick function is activated in the multiple-time operation valid state , are assumed to be the same operating means, but this is not necessarily the case. In addition, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the first multiple-time operation valid state, the second multiple-time operation valid state, and the third multiple-time operation valid state are the same operation means, but this is not necessarily the case. can't For example, in order to realize the thirtieth configuration A30, the multiple-operation valid state is not the 4th A acceptance allowed state, but the 5th A acceptance allowed state (see FIGS. 158 to 160), The 5A acceptability state may be realized as the second multiple-time operation valid state.

In addition, a second multiple operation valid state (4th A acceptable state, Alternatively, in the 5A acceptance allowable state), a specific type of output sound may be prepared as the post-operation output sound corresponding to the second multiple-time operation valid state. The output sound of the specific type may change (end) the output state when the operating means, which is the target of the model image display, changes from the non-operating state to the operating state, although the output sound is of one type. , and when the output state does not change (end). In this case, the presence or absence of such a change (end) of the output state may be determined based on the determination (determination determination) according to the operation reception, or may be determined based on the number of times the operation reception is performed. Alternatively, it may be determined according to the type of display mode that appears as a display after reception.

Further, for example, the thirty-first configuration A31 includes a multiple-operation valid state in which multiple operations are permitted for the operation means (operation button 410) to be displayed as a model image, and the multiple-operation valid state includes the first 149) and a second multiple-operations valid state (first A-acceptance state shown in FIG. 146) are prepared. In both cases, it is possible to play a game so as to create a situation in which the operation means (operation button 410), which is the target of the simulated image display, is in a non-operating state in which the above-mentioned post-operation output sound is being output. In the above-mentioned first plural-time operation valid state (2A acceptance acceptance state), the model image can be displayed so that periodic changes appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time. The post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound shown in FIG. 149) corresponding to the above-described detection can be generated a plurality of times only by maintaining the operation means (operation button 410) to be displayed in the operated state. In the second plural-time-operation valid state (first A accepting state), the model image display can be displayed so that periodic changes appear in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time. The post-operation output sound (first A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146) corresponding to the above detection can be generated a plurality of times only by maintaining the target operation means (operation button 410) in the operated state. to Further, in the above-mentioned first plural-time operation valid state (2A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 149), it is possible to display such that periodic changes in the model image display appear in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time. Then, the operation means (operation button 410) for which the model image is to be displayed is in the non-operating state and the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) is in the output state. When the means (operation button 410) changes from the non-operating state to the operating state, the output state of the post-operation output sound (2A post-acceptance output sound) does not change (end) with this as a trigger. (See, for example, timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIGS. 149(g) and (h).) In the above-described second multiple-operation valid state (1A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 146), the model image display When the operation means (operation button 410), which is the object of the simulated image display, is in the non-operating state and the post-operation output sound (1st A When the operating means (operation button 410) changes from the non-operating state to the operating state in the situation where the post-acceptance output sound is in the output state, the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (1st A Depending on the type of the sound output as the post-acceptance output sound), the output state is changed (finished) (first A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146(g)) and not changed (finished). 146(h) (output sound after reception of 1st A shown in FIG. 146(h)).

According to such a configuration, the first plural-time-operation valid state (the second A reception-permitting state shown in FIG. 149) is displayed such that periodic changes in the model image display appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time. ), even if the operating means (operation button 410) is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state again, the output state of the post-operation output sound (2A post-acceptance output sound) does not change (end) with this as a trigger. Therefore, it is expected that the sense of tension is preferably maintained by making it difficult to recognize whether the player's operation has been properly accepted. On the other hand, in the above-mentioned second plural-time-operation valid state (first-A reception-permitting state shown in FIG. 146) in which periodic changes in the model image display appear in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time, for example, While suggesting the possibility that the performance after the operation means (operation button 410) is again in the operation state is worth noting, the output sound after operation in the output state (output after receiving the first A By not necessarily changing (finishing) the sound when it is put into the operating state again, it is expected that the feeling of tension when returning to the operating state will be appropriately maintained. Become.

In addition, in the first plural-time operation valid state (2A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 149) in which periodic changes in the model image display appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time, the non-operation state is changed. A case of outputting a post-operation output sound (2A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(h)) whose output state does not change (end) triggered by the detection of a state of non-operation, and a case of outputting a non-operation state. There are both cases of outputting a post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)) whose output state changes (ends) with detection as a trigger. That is, in this case, the post-operation output sound (post-acceptance output sound 2A shown in FIG. 149(g)) whose output state changes (ends) triggered by the detection of the non-operation state is subsequently replayed. Even if an operation is performed, it will no longer be in the output state at that time, and the output state after operation will not change (end) when the non-operation state is detected (Fig. 149 Only the second A post-acceptance output sound shown in (h)) can be put into an output state as a sound that is not changed (finished) by the re-operation at the time when the re-operation is performed.

Note that, in the above-described effect example, as the post-operation output sound corresponding to the second multiple-time operation valid state (1A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. There is no type of post-operation output sound that changes (ends) the output state when the operation means changes from the operation state to the non-operation state without maintaining the output state. Only the type of post-operation output sound that does not change (end) the output state when the operation is performed is prepared.

Further, in the thirty-first configuration A31, the first multiple-operation valid state (the second A reception-permitting state shown in ) corresponding to the post-operation output sound (2A post-acceptance output sound), the output state changes (end) when the operation means targeted for the model image display changes from the operating state to the non-operating state. (the first post-reception output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)), and that the operation means targeted for the model image display has changed from the operating state to the non-operating state. A type of post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) whose output state does not change (end) as a trigger is prepared, and both of these post-operation output sounds is in the output state. That is, in this case, when the operation is interrupted, the output state changes ( Therefore, it is possible to prompt the user to interrupt the operation while providing an appropriate sense of tension.

In addition, in the first plural-time operation valid state (2A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 149) related to the 31st configuration A31, the operation means targeted for model image display has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state. The type of post-operation output sound (the first post-reception output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) that changes (ends) with this as a trigger is when the operating means changes from the operating state to the non-operating state. The type of post-operation output sound (the second post-reception output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that does not change (end) with , but the type of post-operation output sound (in FIG. 149(h) The second post-acceptance output sound SB2) shown is a post-operation output sound ( The output of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2) shown in FIG. 149(g) is not started independently when it is not in the output state, but can be started when it is in the output state (or at the same time). Therefore, it is possible to prompt the user to interrupt the operation while providing an appropriate sense of tension.

In addition, in the first plural-time operation valid state (second A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 149) related to the thirty-first configuration A31, while the operation means targeted for model image display is maintained in the operation state, , even if the output condition of the second post-reception output sound SB2 is satisfied (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the second post-reception output sound SB2 is made at the timing tAb2-B2. The output of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, the sound effect for one time) that has been output until then is started at the timing tAb2-B2. The output state may be ended or new output may not be started based on the reception of the operation. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, the effect sound for one time) that was in the output state at the time when the timing tAb2-B2 arrived is continued, and the reproduction state is continued. There is no possibility that the output of a sound (sound effect for one time) based on new data due to the midway termination will not be started or that the reproduction will be restarted.

In addition, in the second multiple-operation valid state (1A reception-permitting state) of the 31st configuration A31, while the operation means (operation button 410) targeted for model image display is maintained in the operation state, When the output condition of the first post-acceptance output sound SB1 is satisfied (timing tAa2-B2 shown in FIG. 146), the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 is generated based on the operation reception performed at the timing tAa2-B2. The output of the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 (here, the sound effect for one time) that has been output until then is based on the operation acceptance performed at the timing tAa2-B2. The output state may be terminated and a new output initiated. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 (here, the effect sound for one time) that was in the output state when the timing tAa2-B2 arrived is interrupted, and new data (here, Output of the sound (sound effect for one time) based on the sound effect data for one time is started.

In addition, whether or not a change occurs when the operation means (operation button 410) to be displayed as a model image is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state, and whether or not the change occurs when the non-operation state is changed to the operation state. Needless to say, the configuration for determining whether or not occurs is based on the premise that the reception valid state is continued.

Further, the "multiple operation valid state" related to the 31st configuration A31 may all be valid periods that occur during symbol variations based on the big hit determination.

In the 31st configuration A31, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the first multiple-time operation valid state and the second multiple-time operation valid state are the same operation means, but this is not necessarily the case. do not have.

Further, for example, as the thirty-second configuration A32, a multiple-operation valid state is provided in which multiple operation receptions for the operation means (operation button 410) to be displayed as a model image are permitted. 149), the second multiple-operation valid state (4A-acceptable state shown in FIG. 155), and the third multiple-operation valid state (see FIG. 146). In each of these multiple operation valid states, the operating means (operation button 410) to be displayed as a model image is in a non-operating state in which it is not operated, and It is possible to play the game so that the state in which the post-operation output sound is output appears, and in the above-mentioned first multiple-time operation valid state (2A reception allowable state), the model image display is periodically performed. After the operation according to the detection, the operation means (operation button 410), which is the target of the simulated image display, is maintained in the operating state, and the change appears in units of time longer than the predetermined time. The output sound (2A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149) can be generated multiple times, and in the above-mentioned second multiple operation valid state (4A acceptance allowable state), the periodic change of the model image display can be displayed so as to appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time. The output sound (the 4th A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 155) is prevented from being generated multiple times, and in the above-mentioned 3rd multiple-time operation valid state (1A reception permitted state), periodic changes in the model image display are It can be displayed so as to appear in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time, and the output sound after operation corresponding to the detection ( The first A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146) can be generated multiple times. Further, a multiple-time operation valid state is provided in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times only by maintaining the operation state of the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the simulated image display. Among the states, in the above-mentioned first plural-time operation valid state (2A reception allowable state) in which it is possible to display such that the periodic change of the model image display appears in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time, the model image is displayed. The operation means (operation button 410) to be operated is in the non-operation state and the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) is in the output state. is changed from a non-operated state to an operated state, the time from entering the operated state to the end of the output state of the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) is indefinite, whereas ( For example, see the timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIG. 149(h), etc.), the above-mentioned third multiple-time operation valid that can be displayed so that the periodic change of the model image display appears in units of time equal to or less than the above-mentioned predetermined time. In the state (1A reception allowable state), the operation means (operation button 410) to be displayed as a model image is in a non-operation state, and the post-operation output sound (1A post-reception output sound) is in an output state. When the operating means (operation button 410) is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state under certain circumstances, the output state of the post-operation output sound (1A post-acceptance output sound) is changed after entering the operating state. The time until the end can be processed as a constant time instead of an indefinite time (see, for example, timing tAa2-C1 shown in FIG. 146(g)), and the operation means ( In the second multiple operation valid state (4th A reception allowable state) in which the operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state and the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection is not allowed to be generated multiple times, the operation is enabled. In a situation where the means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound (4A post-acceptance output sound) is in an output state, the operation means (operation button 410) to be displayed as a model image 410) is changed from a non-operated state to an operated state, the time from entering the operated state to the end of the output state of the post-operation output can be processed as a constant time (for example, See the timing tAd2-C1 shown in FIGS. 155(g) and (h)). In the example described above, "0 seconds" is set as the fixed time from when the operation state is entered until the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated.

According to such a configuration, among the multiple-operation valid states in which the so-called automatic continuous-hit function is activated for the operating means to be displayed as the model image, the first multiple-operation valid state (2A acceptance acceptance state), in that periodic changes in the model image display appear in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time, the so-called auto repeated operation function is not activated in the second multiple operation valid state (4th A reception allowable state), it is difficult to recognize whether it is the target of the auto repeated hitting function and the tension is maintained, but after the operation output sound is in the output state, the operation can be performed again. 155 (see timing tAd2-C1 shown in FIGS. 155(g) and (h)), unlike the case of the second multiple-time operation valid state (4A reception allowable state) (see timing tAd2-C1 shown in FIGS. 155(g) and (h)), Since the time until the output state of the post-operation output sound (output sound after 2A acceptance) is terminated is not processed as a fixed time but is an indefinite time (timing tAb2 shown in FIG. 149(h)). -C1), through such a processing mode at the time of re-operation, it is expected that it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game by appropriately suggesting that the automatic repeated hitting function is being activated. sell. In addition, among the multiple operation valid states in which the so-called auto-flick function is activated for the operating means to be displayed as a model image, the above-mentioned third multiple operation valid state (1A reception allowable state) When a re-operation is performed while the post-output sound is in the output state, the time from the re-operation to the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound can be processed as a constant time. In that respect, by making the configuration the same as the second multiple operation valid state (4th A acceptance acceptance state) in which the so-called automatic repeated hitting function is not activated, it is difficult to recognize whether it is the target of the automatic repeated hitting function. While trying to maintain a sense of tension (see timing tAa2-C1 shown in FIG. 146(g)), the periodic change in the display of the simulated image indicates that the second multiple-time operation valid state (4th A acceptance allowable state) Unlike the case, it can be displayed so that it appears in units of time less than the predetermined time. It can be expected that the decrease in interest in gaming can be suppressed by appropriately suggesting that the player is in a situation where the player is

In addition, in the first plural-time operation valid state (2A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 149) in which periodic changes in the model image display appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time, the non-operation state is changed. A post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(h)) whose type of post-operation output sound (post-acceptance output sound 2A shown in FIG. 149(h)) is processed as a constant time from when the output state is completed until the output state is terminated; The type of post-operation output sound (2A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)) in which the time from entering the operation state to ending the output state is not processed as a fixed time and is indefinite. I made it possible to have both when to output . In the example described above, "0 seconds" is set as the fixed time from when the operation state is changed to when the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated.

In addition, in the above-described effect example, it corresponds to the second multiple-time operation valid state (4th A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 155) and the third multiple-time operation valid state (1A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 146). As for the post-operation output sound, when the operating means to be displayed as a model image changes from the operating state to the non-operating state, the time from the non-operating state to the end of the output state is constant. A type of post-operation output sound that is processed as time is not prepared, and processing is not performed so that the time from when the operation means changes from the operation state to the non-operation state until the output state ends is constant. Only post-operation output sounds for each type are provided.

Further, in the thirty-second configuration A32, the first multiple-operation valid state (the second A reception-permitting state shown in FIG. 149) is displayed such that periodic changes in the model image display appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time. ) corresponding to the post-operation output sound (2A post-acceptance output sound), the time from when the operation means targeted for the model image display changes from the operating state to the non-operating state until the output state ends A type of post-operation output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) that is processed so as to have a constant time, and an operation means to be displayed as a model image is changed from the operation state to the operation state. A type of post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that is not processed so that the time from entering the non-operation state to ending the output state is a constant time ) are prepared, and a situation can occur in which both of the post-operation output sounds are in an output state. That is, in this case, when the operation is interrupted, only part of the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) that has been output until then is terminated within a certain period of time. While providing the information, it becomes possible to prompt the user to interrupt the operation.

In addition, in the first plural-time operation valid state (second A reception acceptance state shown in FIG. 149) related to the thirty-second configuration A32, the operation means targeted for model image display is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state. The type of post-operation output sound (first post-reception output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) that can be processed so that the time from when the output state is terminated to a constant time is A type of post-operation output sound (shown in FIG. 149(h)) that cannot be processed is set so that the time from when the operation means changes from the operation state to the non-operation state until the output state ends is constant. The output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB2) can be started in either the output state or the non-output state. A type of post-operation output sound that cannot be processed so that the time from entering the non-operation state to ending the output state is a constant time (second post-acceptance output shown in FIG. 149(h)) The sound SB2) is a type that can be processed so that the time from when the operating means to be displayed as a model image changes from the operating state to the non-operating state until the output state ends is constant. The post-operation output sound (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is not started alone when it is not in the output state, and is output when it is in the output state (or at the same time). Since it can be started, it becomes possible to encourage interruption of the operation while providing an appropriate sense of tension.

In addition, the "multiple operation valid state" related to the thirty-second configuration A32 may all be valid periods that occur during symbol fluctuations based on the big hit determination.

In addition, whether or not a process for changing (finishing) is executed when the operating means (operation button 410) to be displayed as a model image is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state, and whether or not the non-operating state Needless to say, the configuration for determining whether or not the processing related to the change (end) is executed when changing from to the operation state is based on the premise that the acceptance valid state is continued.

Note that in the thirty-second configuration A32, the operating means when the so-called auto-flick function is not activated in the multiple-time operation valid state and the operation means when the so-called auto-flick function is activated in the multiple-time operation valid state , are assumed to be the same operating means, but this is not necessarily the case. In addition, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the first multiple-time operation valid state, the second multiple-time operation valid state, and the third multiple-time operation valid state are the same operation means, but this is not necessarily the case. can't For example, in order to realize the thirty-second configuration A32, the multiple-operation valid state is not the 4th A acceptance allowed state, but the 5th A acceptance allowed state (see FIGS. 158 to 160), The 5A acceptability state may be realized as the second multiple-time operation valid state.

In addition, a second multiple operation valid state (4th A acceptable state, Alternatively, in the 5A acceptance allowable state), a specific type of output sound may be prepared as the post-operation output sound corresponding to the second multiple-time operation valid state. Although the output sound of the specific type is of one type, the time from when the operating means, which is the target of the model image display, changes from the non-operating state to the operating state until the output state ends is constant. There may be both a case where the processing is performed so that the time is set and a case where the processing is not performed so that the time until the output state is terminated is a fixed time. In this case, whether or not to execute processing related to such a change (end) of the output state may be determined based on the determination (determination determination) according to the operation reception, or may be determined based on the operation reception. It may be determined based on the number of times received, or may be determined according to the type of display mode that appears as a display after reception.

Further, for example, as the thirty-third configuration A33, a multiple-operation valid state in which multiple operations are permitted for the operation means (operation button 410) to be displayed as a model image is provided, and the multiple-operation valid state includes the first 149) and a second multiple-operations valid state (first A-acceptance state shown in FIG. 146) are prepared. In both cases, it is possible to play a game so as to create a situation in which the operation means (operation button 410), which is the target of the simulated image display, is in a non-operating state in which the above-mentioned post-operation output sound is being output. In the above-mentioned first plural-time operation valid state (2A acceptance acceptance state), the model image can be displayed so that periodic changes appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time. The post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound shown in FIG. 149) corresponding to the above-described detection can be generated a plurality of times only by maintaining the operation means (operation button 410) to be displayed in the operated state. In the second plural-time-operation valid state (first A accepting state), the model image display can be displayed so that periodic changes appear in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time. The post-operation output sound (first A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146) corresponding to the above detection can be generated a plurality of times only by maintaining the target operation means (operation button 410) in the operated state. to Further, in the above-mentioned first plural-time operation valid state (2A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 149), it is possible to display such that periodic changes in the model image display appear in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time. Then, the operation means (operation button 410) for which the model image is to be displayed is in the non-operating state and the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) is in the output state. When the means (operation button 410) is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state, the time from entering the operating state to the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) is ( 149 (see, for example, timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIGS. 149(g) and (h)), and the second multiple-time operation valid state ( In the 1A accepting acceptance state shown in FIG. 146, the periodic change of the model image display can be displayed in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time, and the operation means (operation button) which is the object of the model image display 410) is in the non-operating state and the post-operation output sound (1A post-acceptance output sound) is in the output state, the operating means (operation button 410) is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state. 146(g), the time from the operation state to the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound (1A post-reception output sound) is treated as a constant time (shown in FIG. 146(g)). 146 (first A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146(h)) and a case where the time is not processed as a constant time and is treated as an indefinite time (first A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146(h)). bottom.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to generate a post-operation output sound a plurality of times in accordance with the above-described detection simply by maintaining the operation means (operation button 410), which is the target of the simulated image display, in the operation state. Among the operation valid states, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 149) in which periodic changes in the model image display appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time, , Even if the operation means (operation button 410), which is the target of the simulated image display, is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state again, the time from when the operating state is entered until the output state of the post-operation output sound is terminated. is indefinite, it is expected that it will be difficult for the player to recognize whether the player's operation has been properly accepted, and that the sense of tension will be favorably maintained. On the other hand, in the above-mentioned second plural-time-operation valid state (first-A reception-permitting state shown in FIG. 146) in which periodic changes in the model image display appear in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time, for example, While suggesting the possibility that the performance after the operation means (operation button 410) is again in the operation state is worth noting, the output sound after operation in the output state (output after receiving the first A Since the sound is not necessarily terminated within a certain period of time after being put into the operating state again, it is expected that the feeling of tension when returning to the operating state will be preferably maintained.

In addition, in the first plural-time operation valid state (2A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 149) in which periodic changes in the model image display appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time, the non-operation state is changed. A post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. A post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(g)) that can be processed so that the time from entering the operation state to ending the output state is constant. I made it possible to have both when to output.

In the above-described effect example, as the post-operation output sound corresponding to the second multiple-time operation valid state (1A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. The type of post-operation output sound that can be processed is not prepared so that the time from the time when the operation state is changed to the non-operation state until the output state is terminated is a fixed time, and the operation means is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state. Only the type of post-operation output sound that is not processed is prepared so that the time from entering the operation state to ending the output state is constant.

Further, in the thirty-third configuration A33, the first multiple-operation valid state (the second A reception-permitting state shown in ) corresponding to the post-operation output sound (2A post-acceptance output sound), the time from when the operation means targeted for the model image display changes from the operating state to the non-operating state until the output state ends A type of post-operation output sound (first post-reception output sound SA2 shown in FIG. A post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output shown in FIG. 149(h)) that is not processed so that the time from the state to the non-operation state to the end of the output state is constant. SB2) are prepared, and a situation can occur in which both post-operation output sounds are in an output state. That is, in this case, when the operation is interrupted, only part of the post-operation output sound (post-2A reception output sound) that has been output until then is terminated within a certain period of time. While providing the information, it becomes possible to prompt the user to interrupt the operation.

In addition, in the first plural-time operation valid state (second A reception-allowing state shown in FIG. 149) related to the thirty-third configuration A33, the operation means targeted for model image display is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state. The type of post-operation output sound (first post-reception output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) that can be processed so that the time from the start to the end of the output state is a constant time is A post-operation output sound of a type that is not processed so that the time from when the operation means changes from the operation state to the non-operation state until the output state ends is constant The output of the post-acceptance output sound SB2) in 2) can be started in either the output state or the non-output state. A type of post-operation output sound that is not processable (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) is set so that the time from entering the state to ending the output state is a constant time. ) is a type of operation that can be processed so that the time from when the operation means to be displayed as a model image changes from the operating state to the non-operating state until the output state ends is a constant time. The post-output sound (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) does not start to be output independently when it is not in the output state, but is started to be output when it is in the output state (or at the same time). Since it was made possible, it became possible to encourage interruption of the operation while providing an appropriate sense of tension.

In addition, in the first multiple-operation valid state (2A reception-permitting state shown in FIG. 149) related to the thirty-third configuration A33, while the operation means targeted for model image display is maintained in the operation state, , even if the output condition of the second post-reception output sound SB2 is satisfied (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the second post-reception output sound SB2 is made at the timing tAb2-B2. The output of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, the sound effect for one time) that has been output until then is started at the timing tAb2-B2. The output state may be ended or new output may not be started based on the reception of the operation. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, the effect sound for one time) that was in the output state at the time when the timing tAb2-B2 arrived is continued, and the reproduction state is continued. There is no possibility that the output of a sound (sound effect for one time) based on new data due to the midway termination will not be started or that the reproduction will be restarted.

In addition, in the second multiple-operation valid state (1A reception-permitting state) of the thirty-third configuration A33, while the operation means (operation button 410) targeted for model image display is maintained in the operation state, When the output condition of the first post-acceptance output sound SB1 is satisfied (timing tAa2-B2 shown in FIG. 146), the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 is generated based on the operation reception performed at the timing tAa2-B2. The output of the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 (here, the sound effect for one time) that has been output until then is based on the operation acceptance performed at the timing tAa2-B2. The output state may be terminated and a new output initiated. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 (here, the effect sound for one time) that was in the output state when the timing tAa2-B2 arrived is interrupted, and new data (here, Output of the sound (sound effect for one time) based on the sound effect data for one time is started.

In addition, whether or not a change occurs when the operation means (operation button 410) to be displayed as a model image is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state, and whether or not the change occurs when the non-operation state is changed to the operation state. Needless to say, the configuration for determining whether or not occurs is based on the premise that the reception valid state is continued.

Further, the "multiple operation valid state" related to the thirty-third configuration A33 may all be valid periods that occur during symbol fluctuations based on the big hit determination.

In the 33rd configuration A33, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the first multiple-time operation valid state and the second multiple-time operation valid state are the same operation means, but this is not necessarily the case. do not have.

Further, for example, as a thirty-fourth configuration A34, a multiple-time operation valid state is provided in which an operation acceptance for an operation means that is a target of model image display is allowed multiple times, and the model image display is periodically performed in the multiple-time operation valid state. In the multiple-operation valid state (for example, the 1A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 146) of the type displayed so that the change appears in units of time equal to or less than a predetermined time, the operation means that is the target of the model image display is operated. By simply maintaining the state, the post-operation output sound (1A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146) can be output multiple times, and the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is constant. While the post-operation output sound (1A post-acceptance output sound) can be output multiple times in the form of the time of The multiple operation valid state of the type displayed so as to appear in units of time longer than time (for example, the 2A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 149, the 4A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 155, the In the 5A acceptance allowable state, etc.), when the operating means that is the target of the model image display is maintained in the operating state, the post-operation output sound (1A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146) can be output multiple times. However, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is not processed to be a constant time, but is set to an indefinite time. ) can be output multiple times (2A acceptance acceptable state), and if only the operation state is maintained, the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (4A post-acceptance output sound, 5A post-acceptance output sound) will be generated multiple times. There are both cases (4th A reception permitted state, 5th A reception permitted state) where it is not possible to output repeatedly.

According to such a configuration, when the simulated image display is displayed such that the periodic change appears in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time, it is preferable that the so-called auto repeated hitting function is activated. In addition to being able to suggest, when the so-called auto-rolling function is activated, an output sound is output at regular intervals after acceptance, so the so-called auto-rolling function is activated. It is easy to remember the real feeling, and it is expected that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained. On the other hand, when the cyclical change of the model image display appears in units of time longer than the predetermined time, the so-called auto-flick function is to be activated, or it is activated. In addition to the fact that there are both cases where it is not targeted, even if the so-called auto-rolling function is activated, the output sound will only be output at an indefinite time interval after the reception, and the auto-rolling function is activated. Since it is difficult to perceive, it is expected that the tension will be properly maintained.

Further, in the multiple-operation valid state of the type in which the periodic change of the model image display appears in units of time longer than the predetermined time, the operation means for which the model image is to be displayed is maintained in the operation state. While the above-mentioned post-operation output sound is being output, if the operating means that is in the operating state is put into the non-operating state, after the operating means that has been in the output state until then becomes the non-operating state. The time until the end of the output sound was not always processed so that it was a fixed time, but always an indefinite time (output sound after reception of 4th A shown in FIG. 155, output sound shown in FIG. 158). output sound after reception of 5th A). On the other hand, in the multiple operation effective state of the type in which the periodic change of the model image display appears in units of time longer than the predetermined time, the operation means for which the model image is displayed is maintained in the operation state. As a result, while the post-operation output sound (1A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146) is being output a plurality of times at irregular intervals, if the operating means in the operating state is put in the non-operating state, , when processing is performed so that the time from the non-operation state to the end of the post-operation output sound that has been in the output state until then is a constant time (second A reception shown in FIG. 149(g)) post-output sound), and when the time from entering the non-operation state until the end of the post-operation output sound that was in the output state until then is not processed to be a constant time and is set to an indeterminate time ( 2A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(h)). In the example described above, "0 seconds" is set as the fixed time from when the device enters the non-operation state to when the output state of the post-operation output sound ends.

According to such a configuration, when the operating means in the operative state is put into the non-operating state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound that has been in the output state since the non-operating state is reached. When the time until the output sound ends is processed to be a certain time (predetermined time), so that it can be suggested that the so-called auto repeat function is to be activated. Become. However, even if the so-called automatic continuous hitting function is to be activated (2A acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 149), the post-operation output sound that has been in the output state until then ends after entering the non-operation state. Since the processing is not necessarily performed so that the time until the operation is performed is a constant time, it is possible to preferably maintain the tension when the non-operation state is set.

Note that in the multiple-operation valid state of the type in which the periodic change of the model image display appears in units of time longer than the predetermined time, the operation means that is the target of the model image display is maintained in the operation state, As a result, when the post-operation output sound (1A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146) is output a plurality of times at irregular intervals, and the operating means in the operating state is brought into the non-operating state, the simulated image A type of post-operation output sound (Fig. The first post-acceptance output sound SA2) shown in 149(g) is set so that the time from when the operating means changes from the operating state to the non-operating state until the output state ends is constant. The output of the unprocessed type of post-operation output sound (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) can be started in either the output state or the non-output state. However, the post-operation output of the type that cannot be processed so that the time from when the operation means that is the target of the model image display changes from the operation state to the non-operation state until the output state ends is constant The sound (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) is produced from the time when the operation means for which the model image is to be displayed changes from the operating state to the non-operating state until the output state ends. 149(g) is not in an output state, the output is started independently. The output may be started when (or at the same time) in the output state without being output.

In addition, whether or not a change occurs when the operating means to be displayed as a model image is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when switching from a non-operating state to an operating state It goes without saying that the configuration of (1) is based on the premise that the reception valid state is continued.

Further, the "multiple operation valid state" related to the thirty-fourth configuration A34 may all be valid periods that occur during symbol variations based on the big hit determination.

Further, in order to realize the 34th configuration A34, only one of the 4th A acceptance acceptable state and the 5th A acceptance acceptable state may be provided. It is possible to obtain an effect.

Further, for example, as a thirty-fifth configuration A35, a multiple-time operation valid state is provided in which an operation acceptance for the operation means that is the target of the model image display is permitted multiple times, and the model image display is periodically performed in the multiple-time operation valid state. In the type of multiple operation valid state (for example, the 1A acceptance permitted state shown in FIG. 146) in which a change appears in units of time equal to or less than a predetermined time, the operation means that is the target of the model image display is operated. The post-operation output sound (post-1A reception output sound) corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times only by maintaining the state, and in this case, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated must be While the period of time is set to be equal to or less than the specific time, in the multiple operation valid state of the type in which the periodic change of the model image display appears in units of time longer than the predetermined time, the model image is displayed. When the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated a plurality of times only by maintaining the operation means to be displayed in the operation state (for example, the 2A reception permission state shown in FIG. 149), Both the case where the post-operation output sound cannot be output a plurality of times only by maintaining the operation state (for example, the 4th A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 155 and the 5A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 158) However, if the post-operation output sound can be generated multiple times in response to the above-mentioned detection just by maintaining the operation state (2A reception allowable state), the post-operation output sound will be generated until the new output sound is generated. The interval is set to be always longer than the specific time.

According to such a configuration, when the simulated image display is displayed such that the periodic change appears in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time, it is preferable that the so-called auto repeated hitting function is activated. In addition to being able to suggest, when the so-called auto-rolling function is activated, new output sounds are output one after another within a relatively short period of time, so the so-called auto-rolling function is It is easy to remember that the game is activated, and it is expected that the game interest will be favorably maintained. On the other hand, when the cyclical change of the model image display appears in units of time longer than the predetermined time, the so-called auto-continuous-hit function is to be activated. In addition to the case where it is not targeted, even if the so-called auto-repeat function is activated, a new output sound will not be output until a relatively long time has passed after the reception, and the auto-repeat function is activated. Since it is difficult to perceive the real feeling of being under pressure, it is expected that the sense of tension will be appropriately maintained.

Further, in the thirty-fifth configuration A35, a multiple-operation valid state (for example, the 1A reception permission state shown in FIG. state), when the operating means for which the model image is to be displayed is maintained in the operating state, the interval until the output sound is newly generated after the operation is a time unit equal to or less than the above-mentioned predetermined time. It may be made shorter than the time required for the periodic change of display. In other words, in this case, under the operating condition, the repeated changes appear in shorter time units than under the non-operating condition, so it is assumed that the so-called auto repeat function is activated. It is possible to provide a performance advantage that is easy to recognize.

Further, in the thirty-fifth configuration A35, in the multiple-operation valid state of the type in which the periodic change of the model image display appears in units of time longer than the predetermined time, the operation means that is the target of the model image display is When the post-operation output sound can be generated multiple times in response to the above-described detection only by maintaining the operation state (2A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 149), until the post-operation output sound is newly generated can be set to a time longer than the time required for the periodic change of the model image display appearing in units of time longer than the predetermined time. In other words, in this case, even if it is in an operating state, only repeated changes appear in units of a longer time than in a non-operating state, so the so-called auto-repeat function is activated. It becomes possible to suggest that while suitably maintaining a sense of tension.

Note that in the multiple-operation valid state of the type in which the periodic change in the model image display appears in units of time longer than the predetermined time, only the operation means that is the target of the model image display is maintained in the operation state. When the post-operation output sound corresponding to the above detection can be generated a plurality of times (second A reception acceptance state shown in FIG. 149), the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is "predetermined time It may be arranged that both cases of "time longer than" and "time longer than predetermined time" may occur. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it possible to easily recognize that the so-called auto-repeating function is activated in both cases, and cases where it is difficult to recognize.

Further, the "multiple operation valid state" related to the thirty-fifth configuration A35 may be a valid period that occurs during symbol variation based on the big hit determination.

Further, in order to realize the 35th configuration A35, only one of the 4th A acceptance acceptable state and the 5th A acceptance acceptable state may be provided. It is possible to obtain an effect.

Further, for example, as a thirty-sixth configuration A36, a multiple-operation valid state is provided in which multiple operations are allowed for the operating means to be displayed as a model image, and in the multiple-operation valid state, the model image display periodically changes. is displayed so as to appear in units of time equal to or less than a predetermined time, "It is detected that the operation means for which the model image is to be displayed is in the operation state before the predetermined end timing arrives. 146 (for example, the 1A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 146)" (for example, the 1A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 146)" occurs (multiple types of In the multiple-operation valid state, periodic changes in the simulated image display are displayed in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time. In the case of "a plurality of types of states that can be terminated when it is detected that the operating means, which is the target of the model image display, is in the operating state before the arrival of the predetermined termination timing. 149)" is occurring, and the state is not terminated when the operation state is detected as a trigger. 155 or 5A acceptance state shown in FIG. 158) is occurring. may

According to such a configuration, when the periodic change of the model image display in the multiple-time operation enabled state is displayed so as to appear in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time, the operating means that is the target of the model image display is While it is possible to suitably suggest that the state is likely to be terminated by detecting that it is in the operation state, the periodical change of the model image display in the multiple-time operation valid state is the above-mentioned. If it is displayed so as to appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time, whether the state can be terminated by detecting that the operation means, which is the target of the model image display, is in the operation state, or Alternatively, it is expected that the sense of tension will be preferably maintained by making it difficult to recognize whether the state is not terminated when it is detected that the operating means, which is the target of the model image display, is in the operating state. Become so.

Needless to say, when the 36th configuration A36 is provided, basically the 3A acceptance allowable state is not provided. However, with respect to the 3A Acceptable State, for example, it is possible to modify the periodic change of the model image display to one that appears in units of time longer than the predetermined time, and then prepare it. is. Alternatively, the 3A acceptability state may be prepared as an acceptability state in which the model image display itself does not appear.

Further, in the above-described effect example, when the multiple-time operation valid state occurs, an acceptance acceptance sound may be output to suggest that the operation acceptance is allowed. Then, in the multiple-time operation valid state, the periodic change in the model image display appears in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time, and in the multiple-time operation valid state, the periodic change in the model image display is displayed for the predetermined time. The acceptable reception sound can be output in the same manner as in the case where it is displayed so as to appear in units of time longer than the time unit, but in the multiple-time operation valid state, the periodic change of the simulated image display is longer than the predetermined time. In the case where it is displayed so as to appear in increments, the reception is performed in a manner that cannot be output in the case where the periodic change of the simulated image display appears in units of time equal to or less than a predetermined time in the multiple operation valid state. Allowable sound may be output in some cases. Alternatively, on the contrary, when the cyclic change of the model image display appears in the multiple operation valid state in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time, the periodic change of the model image display in the multiple operation valid state The acceptable reception sound may be output in a manner that cannot be output when the change is displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time. In addition, in the multiple-operation valid state, when the simulated image display is displayed such that periodic changes appear in units of time equal to or less than a predetermined period of time, the acceptance acceptance sound is always output, but the simulation is performed in the multiple-operation valid state. When the image display is displayed such that the periodic change appears in units of time longer than the predetermined time, the acceptable reception sound may be output and may not be output.

Further, in the above-described production examples, in the multiple-operation valid state, periodic changes in the model image display appear in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time, and in the multiple-operation valid state, the cycle of the model image display Even if there is no operation acceptance until the multiple-time operation enabled state is terminated, the operation can The same post-reception changes as when there is a reception can occur (see, for example, FIG. 147, FIG. 150, etc.). In this regard, if the periodic change in the simulated image display appears in units of time equal to or less than the predetermined time in the multiple-operation valid state, the operation reception is not performed until the multiple-operation valid state ends. Even if there is no operation reception, the same post-acceptance change as when the operation is accepted always occurs. In the case where there is no operation reception until the operation valid state is terminated multiple times, the same change occurs after reception as when the operation reception was performed, and the same reception as when the operation reception was performed. There may be both a case and a case where no post-change occurs.

Further, the "multiple operation valid state" related to the thirty-sixth configuration A36 may be a valid period that occurs during symbol variation based on the big hit determination.

Further, in order to realize the 36th configuration A36, only one of the 4th A acceptance acceptable state and the 5th A acceptance acceptable state may be provided. It is possible to obtain an effect.

Further, for example, as a thirty-seventh configuration A37, a multiple-time operation valid state is provided in which acceptance of operation on a specific operation means (operation button 410) is allowed multiple times, and in the multiple-time operation valid state, the specific operation means (operation button 410) 410) is maintained in an operational state, there is no possibility that the post-operation change in response to the detection of being in the operational state can be executed multiple times. In the 4th A acceptability state), the post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, can be displayed based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state. When the operating means (the operation button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state in which it is not operated, the post-non-operating display corresponding to this is not displayed (FIG. 155(e)). , (f), and FIGS. 157(c), (e), (g), etc.), the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state only by maintaining the operation state. A specific type of multiple operation valid state (1A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 146, 2A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 149, 2A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 149, In the 3A accepting allowable state shown), the post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, can be displayed based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state, When the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state, the corresponding post-non-operating display HB2 (see FIG. 149(f), FIGS. 151(c) and (f), etc.) ) can be displayed, and in a specific type of multiple operation valid state (1A reception allowable state, 2A reception allowable state, 3A reception allowable state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operating state, the post-non-operating display (post-non-operating display HB2) is displayed in response to detection of the non-operating state, and the post-operating output of the post-operating change A situation in which the sound (output sound after reception of 2A) maintains an output state (for example, timings tAb2-B3 to tAb2-C1 shown in FIG. 149) can appear as the player plays the game. In this situation, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from the non-operating state to the operating state, the detection triggers the post-non-operating display (non-operating state) that has been in the display state until then. The post-operation display HB2) is changed (finished), but the post-operation output sound (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that has been output until then is 149(f) and (h) and FIG. 151(g)).

According to such a configuration, the post-operation change can be executed a plurality of times in response to detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state only by maintaining the operation state. 146, the 2A acceptance state shown in FIG. 149, and the 3A acceptance state shown in FIG. 152), post-operation change is executed. When the player performs a second operation while the game is being played, part of the post-operation changes may be continued, but part of the changes (end) may occur. Therefore, it is possible to provide a sense of anticipation for the start of a new performance while providing a sense of tension when performing the operation again.

In addition, in the specific type multiple-operation valid state (1A reception allowable state, 2A reception allowable state, 3A reception allowable state) according to the thirty-seventh configuration A37, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state. When the non-operation state is changed from , the case where the corresponding post-non-operation display is displayed (2nd A reception acceptable state) and the case where the post-non-operation display is not displayed (1A reception acceptance state, 3A reception acceptance state) state), it is possible to preferably provide a sense of tension when the non-operating state is set.

Further, in the thirty-seventh configuration A37, the specific operation means (the operation button 410) is is in a non-operation state, the post-non-operation display (post-non-operation display HB2) is displayed in response to detection of the non-operation state, and the post-operation output sound of the post-operation change maintains the output state (for example, timings tAb2-B3 to tAb2-C1 shown in FIG. 149), it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from the non-operating state to the operating state. Then, with the detection as a trigger, the post-non-operation display (post-non-operation display HB2) that has been in the display state up to that point is always changed (finished), while the display that has been in the output state up to that time is always caused to change (end). The post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 149(h)) does not change in its output state and is always maintained. is in a non-operation state, the post-non-operation display corresponding to the detection of the non-operation state is not displayed, and the post-operation output sound out of the post-operation changes maintains the output state; (for example, timings tAa2-B3 to tAa2-C1 shown in FIG. 146), when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from the non-operating state to the operating state, the detection 146, the output state of the post-operation output sound (1A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146), which has been in the output state until then, is changed according to its type (FIG. 146 ( 146(h)) and the case where the output state is maintained without causing a change (the 1st A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146(h)). made it

According to such a configuration, the post-operation change can be executed a plurality of times in response to detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state only by maintaining the operation state. 146, the second A acceptance state shown in FIG. 149, and the third A acceptance state shown in FIG. Even in the multiple-operation valid state (1A reception-permitting state shown in FIG. 146, 3A reception-permitting state shown in FIG. 152), which is not displayed, the player can re-operate while the post-operation change is being executed. is performed, part of the post-operation changes will continue to be performed, but part of the changes may occur, so there is a sense of tension when re-operating. While providing the , it is possible to suitably impart a sense of expectation for the start of a new production.

It should be noted that, in the above-described effect example, the 1A acceptance allowable state is the same as the 2A acceptability state, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state where it is not operated. It may also be possible to generate an acceptability state in which a post-non-operation display corresponding to this is displayed. In this case, the conditions for displaying the display after non-operation and the conditions for hiding the display may be the same as those for the display after non-operation HB2 described in the 2A acceptance allowable state. However, even in this case, the 3A reception permission state is such that when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operation state to the non-operation state in which the operation is not performed, the post-non-operation display corresponding to this state is displayed. It is desirable to generate it as an undisplayed acceptability state.

Further, in the above-described effect example, when the display after non-operation is displayed, the sound corresponding to this is not output, so the display after non-operation is displayed triggered by the operation state. It is possible to suggest that the display is triggered by the non-operating state instead of the display.

Further, in the above-described effect example, the post-operation change can be executed multiple times in response to detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state only by maintaining the operation state. 146, the 2A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 149, and the 3A reception allowable state shown in FIG. A state (first A acceptance acceptable state or third A acceptance acceptable state) and a second acceptance acceptable state (second A acceptance acceptable state) are included.

In the second acceptance allowable state (2A acceptance allowable state), the type of post-operation output that changes (ends) when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state. The sound (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is of a type that does not change (end) when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state. Output of the post-operation output sound (the second post-reception output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) can be started in either the output state or the non-output state. The type of post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that does not change (end) when the means (operation button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state is , the type of post-operation output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) that ends when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state. The output is not started independently when the is not in the output state, but can be started when the is in the output state (or at the same time). will be able to

Further, in the second acceptance allowable state (2A acceptance allowable state) of the thirty-seventh configuration A37, the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is generated while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operated state. is satisfied (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is started based on the operation reception performed at timing tAb2-B2. On the other hand, the output state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, one-time sound effect) that has been in the output state until then is changed based on the operation reception performed at the timing tAb2-B2. It may not end or start a new output. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, the effect sound for one time) that was in the output state at the time when the timing tAb2-B2 arrived is continued, and the reproduction state is continued. There is no possibility that the output of a sound (sound effect for one time) based on new data due to the midway termination will not be started or that the reproduction will be restarted.

Further, when the first acceptance allowable state of the thirty-seventh configuration A37 is the "first A acceptability state", the operation button 410 is maintained in the operated state in the first acceptability state (first A acceptability state). When the output condition for the first post-reception output sound SB1 is satisfied (timing tAa2-B2 shown in FIG. 146), the second post-reception output sound SB1 is output at the timing tAa2-B2. The output of the first post-receipt output sound SA1 (here, the effect sound for one time) that has been output until then is started at the timing tAa2-B2. The output state may be ended and a new output may be started based on the reception of the operation. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 (here, the effect sound for one time) that was in the output state when the timing tAa2-B2 arrived is interrupted, and new data (here, Output of the sound (sound effect for one time) based on the sound effect data for one time is started.

Further, when the first reception allowable state of the thirty-seventh configuration A37 is the "3A reception allowable state", the operation button 410 is maintained in the operated state in the first reception allowable state (3A reception allowable state). When the output condition for the third post-acceptance output sound SB3 is satisfied (timing tAc2-B2 shown in FIG. 152), the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 is output at the timing tAc2-B2. The output of the third post-receipt output sound SA3 (here, one sound effect) that has been output until then is started at the timing tAc2-B2. The output state may be ended and a new output may be started based on the reception of the operation. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 (here, the effect sound for one time) that was in the output state when the timing tAc2-B2 arrived is interrupted, and new data (here, Output of the sound (sound effect for one time) based on the sound effect data for one time is started.

In the thirty-seventh configuration A37, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the multiple-time operation enabled state are the same operation means, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means represented as a simulated image display and allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple-time operation valid state.

Further, the "multiple operation valid state" related to the thirty-seventh configuration A37 may be a valid period that occurs during symbol variation based on the big hit determination.

Further, in order to realize the thirty-seventh configuration A37, only one of the first A acceptance acceptable state and the third A acceptance acceptable state may be provided. It is possible to obtain an effect.

Further, for example, as the thirty-eighth configuration A38, a multiple-time operation valid state is provided in which acceptance of operation on the specific operation means (operation button 410) is allowed multiple times, and the predetermined end timing of the multiple-time operation valid state is A predetermined type of multiple-operation valid state (see FIG. 152) that does not end when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operating state before the arrival of the state. 155) is one of the post-operation changes based on detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state. Although the post-operation display can be displayed, there are cases where the post-non-operation display is displayed when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state in which it is not operated. 152(e), (f) and FIGS. 154(c), (g), FIGS. 155(e), (f) and FIGS. 157(c), (e), ( g), etc.), the state can be ended by detecting that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operating state before the arrival of the predetermined end timing. 146, the second A reception permission state shown in FIG. Based on this, it is possible to display a post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, and when the specific operation means changes from an operation state to a non-operation state, a corresponding post-non-operation display HB2 is displayed. 146, the second A acceptance allowable state shown in FIG. 149), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operating state, the post-non-operating display (post-non-operating display HB2) is displayed in response to detection of the non-operating state, and the post-operating output sound of the post-operating change A situation in which (output sound after reception of 2A) is maintained in an output state (for example, timings tAb2-B3 to tAb2-C1 shown in FIG. 149) can appear as a result of a game played by a player. , in this situation, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from the non-operating state to the operating state, the detection is triggered by the post-non-operating display ( The post-non-operation display HB2) is changed (finished), but the post-operation output sound (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that has been output until then is 149(f) and (h) and FIG. 151(g)).

According to such a configuration, the state can be ended when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operating state before the arrival of the predetermined end timing. In a specific type of multiple operation valid state (1A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146, 2A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 149), the player performs a re-operation while the post-operation change is being executed. If this is done, some of the post-operation change modes that have been performed so far may be continued, but some changes (ends) may occur, so there is tension when re-operating. While providing a sense of excitement, it is possible to suitably impart a sense of expectation for the start of a new performance.

In addition, in the specific type of multiple-operation valid state (1A reception-allowed state or 2A reception-allowed state) according to the thirty-eighth configuration A38, the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state. , there are both cases in which the corresponding post-non-operation display is displayed (2nd A acceptance acceptable state) and cases in which the non-operation indication is not displayed (1A acceptance acceptable state). It is possible to preferably provide a sense of tension when the user is in a non-operating state.

Further, in the thirty-eighth configuration A38, the specific operation means (the operation button 410) is in the non-operating state in the specific type multiple-operation valid state (the first A reception-permitting state or the second A reception-permitting state), Further, the post-non-operation display (post-non-operation display HB2) corresponding to the detection of the non-operation state is displayed, and the post-operation output sound among the post-operation changes maintains the output state. 149 (for example, timings tAb2-B3 to tAb2-C1 shown in FIG. 149), when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from the non-operating state to the operating state, the detection With this as a trigger, the post-non-operation display (post-non-operation display HB2) that was in the display state until then is always changed (end), while the post-operation output sound that was in the output state until then (Fig. 149(h), the output state of the 2A post-acceptance output sound shown in 149(h)) is not changed and is always maintained, but the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the non-operating state, In addition, the post-non-operation display corresponding to the detection of the non-operation state is not displayed, and the post-operation output sound among the post-operation changes maintains the output state (for example, At timings tAa2-B3 to tAa2-C1 shown in FIG. 146, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from the non-operating state to the operating state, the detection is triggered and For the post-operation output sound (first A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146) that was in the output state, the output state is changed according to its type (the first sound shown in FIG. 146(g)). 1A post-acceptance output sound) and the case of maintaining the output state without causing a change (1A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146(h)).

According to such a configuration, the post-operation change can be executed a plurality of times in response to detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state only by maintaining the operation state. Among the multiple operation valid states (the first A acceptance acceptable state shown in FIG. 146 and the second A acceptance acceptable state shown in FIG. 149), the multiple operation valid state in which the display after non-operation is not displayed (see FIG. 146 Even in the 1A acceptance allowable state shown), if the player performs the operation again while the post-operation change is being executed, the state of the post-operation change up to that point is partially continued. While doing so, some changes may occur, so while providing a sense of tension when re-operating, there is also a sense of anticipation for the start of a new production. It becomes possible to apply it suitably.

It should be noted that, in the above-described effect example, the 1A acceptance allowable state is the same as the 2A acceptability state, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state where it is not operated. It may also be possible to generate an acceptability state in which a post-non-operation display corresponding to this is displayed. In this case, the conditions for displaying the display after non-operation and the conditions for hiding the display may be the same as those for the display after non-operation HB2 described in the 2A acceptance allowable state. In the specific type multiple-operation valid state (1A acceptance acceptable state or 2A acceptance acceptable state) according to the thirty-eighth configuration A38 adopting such a modified example, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state. When the non-operation state is changed from , the corresponding post-non-operation display is always displayed, and the case where the post-non-operation display is not displayed is eliminated. Even in this case, the 3A acceptance allowable state and the 4A acceptability state are changed according to when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state in which no operation is performed. It is desirable to generate an acceptable acceptance state in which the post-non-operation display is not displayed.

Further, in the above-described effect example, when the display after non-operation is displayed, the sound corresponding to this is not output, so the display after non-operation is displayed triggered by the operation state. It is possible to suggest that the display is triggered by the non-operating state instead of the display.

Further, in the example of the effect described above, the state can be ended when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operating state before the arrival of the predetermined end timing. In the specific type of multiple operation valid state (1A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 146 and 2A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 149), there is a first reception allowable state (1A reception allowable state), A second acceptance acceptable state (2A acceptance acceptable state) is included.

In the second acceptance allowable state (2A acceptance allowable state), the type of post-operation output that changes (ends) when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state. The sound (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is of a type that does not change (end) when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state. Output of the post-operation output sound (the second post-reception output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) can be started in either the output state or the non-output state. The type of post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that does not change (end) when the means (operation button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state is , the type of post-operation output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) that ends when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state. The output is not started independently when the is not in the output state, but can be started when the is in the output state (or at the same time). will be able to

In addition, in the second acceptance allowable state (2A acceptance allowable state) of the thirty-eighth configuration A38, while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operated state, the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is satisfied (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is started based on the operation reception performed at timing tAb2-B2. On the other hand, the output state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, one-time sound effect) that has been in the output state until then is changed based on the operation reception performed at the timing tAb2-B2. It may not end or start a new output. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, the effect sound for one time) that was in the output state at the time when the timing tAb2-B2 arrived is continued, and the reproduction state is continued. There is no possibility that the output of a sound (sound effect for one time) based on new data due to the midway termination will not be started or that the reproduction will be restarted.

Further, in the first acceptance acceptable state (1A acceptance acceptable state) of the thirty-eighth configuration A38, while the operation button 410 is maintained in the operated state, the output condition of the first post-acceptance output sound SB1 is satisfied. 146 (timing tAa2-B2 shown in FIG. 146), the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 is started based on the operation reception performed at timing tAa2-B2. The output state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 (here, the sound effect for one time) that was in the timing tAa2-B2 is terminated based on the operation acceptance performed at the timing tAa2-B2, and a new output is started. You may do so. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 (here, the effect sound for one time) that was in the output state when the timing tAa2-B2 arrived is interrupted, and new data (here, Output of the sound (sound effect for one time) based on the sound effect data for one time is started.

In addition, in the thirty-eighth configuration A38, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the multiple-time operation enabled state are the same operation means, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means represented as a simulated image display and allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple-time operation valid state.

Further, the "multiple operation valid state" related to the thirty-eighth configuration A38 may be a valid period that occurs during symbol variation based on the big hit determination.

Further, in order to realize the thirty-eighth configuration A38, only one of the 3A reception-permitting state and the 4th A reception-permitting state may be provided. It is possible to obtain an effect.

Further, for example, as a thirty-ninth configuration A39, a multiple-time operation valid state is provided in which acceptance of operation on a specific operation means (operation button 410) is allowed multiple times, and in the multiple-time operation valid state, the specific operation means (operation button 410) 410) is maintained in the operated state, the post-operation change can be executed multiple times in such a manner that the interval until the output of the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, starts to be newly output is set to a constant time. 146 and the 3A reception permission state shown in FIG. 152), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state. The post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, can be displayed based on the detection of a certain event. While there is at least a case where the corresponding post-non-operation display is not displayed (see FIGS. 146(e), (f) and FIGS. 148(c), (g), etc.), the specific operation means ( When the operation button 410) is maintained in the operated state, a plurality of post-operation changes are performed in such a manner that the interval until the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, starts to be newly output is an indefinite time. In the specific type of multiple-operation valid state (2A reception-permitting state shown in FIG. 149) that can be executed multiple times, the operation is performed based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state. Not only can the post-operation display, which is one of the post-changes, be displayed, but also when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from the operating state to the non-operating state, the non-operating state is displayed. After the non-operation display HB2 (see Fig. 149(f), Figs. In the multiple-operation valid state (2A acceptance allowable state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the non-operating state, and the post-non-operating display ( The post-non-operation display HB2) is displayed, and the post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound) of the post-operation changes maintains an output state (for example, the timing shown in FIG. 149). tAb2-B3 to tAb2-C1, etc.) can appear as a result of a game played by the player. When it is detected, with the detection as a trigger, the post-non-operation display (post-non-operation display HB2) that has been in the display state until then is changed (finished), but the output state has been in the output state until then. The post-operation output sound (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) is not changed (finished) and its output state can be maintained (FIG. 149(f)). ), timing tAb2-C1 shown in (h), FIG. 151 (g), etc.).

According to such a configuration, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operated state, the interval until the output of the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, is newly started is indefinite. In a specific type of multiple operation valid state (second A reception allowable state shown in FIG. 149) in which the post-operation change can be executed multiple times in the form of time , the post-operation change is being executed. When the player performs a re-operation in , part of the post-operation change mode up to that point may be continued, but part of the change (end) may occur. Therefore, it is possible to provide a sense of anticipation for the start of a new performance while providing a feeling of tension when performing the operation again.

It should be noted that, in the above-described effect example, the 1A acceptance allowable state is the same as the 2A acceptance allowable state, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state where it is not operated. It may also be possible to generate an acceptability state in which a post-non-operation display corresponding to this is displayed. In this case, the conditions for displaying the display after non-operation and the conditions for hiding the display may be the same as those for the display after non-operation HB2 described in the 2A acceptance allowable state. However, even in this case, the above-mentioned 3A reception permission state is such that when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operation state to the non-operation state in which the operation is not performed, the post-non-operation display corresponding to this state is displayed. It is desirable to generate it as an undisplayed acceptability state.

According to such a configuration, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state in the multiple-operation valid state according to the thirty-ninth configuration A39, the post-operation change, which is one of the post-operation changes, is performed. A predetermined type of multiple operation valid state (1A reception shown in FIG. In the allowable state and the 3A acceptance allowable state shown in FIG. 152, a post-operation display, which is one of post-operation changes, can be displayed based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state. However, even if the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operation state to the non-operation state, the corresponding post-non-operation display is not displayed (3A acceptance allowable state), and the specific operation means ( Based on the detection that the operation button 410) is in the operating state, not only is it possible to display the post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, but it is also possible to change the specific operation means (operation button 410) from the operating state to the non-operating state. There are both cases in which the post-non-operation display corresponding to the detection of the non-operation state can be displayed even when the state is detected. In this case, even in a predetermined type of multiple-operation valid state (first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146 or third A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 152) related to the thirty-ninth configuration A39, the specific operation means ( The operation button 410) is in the non-operating state, the post-non-operating display is displayed in response to detection of the non-operating state, and the post-operation output sound among the changes after the operation maintains the output state. This situation can appear as a result of a game played by the player, and when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from the non-operating state to the operating state in this situation, the detection is triggered. , while always causing a change to the post-non-operation display that was in the display state until then, the output state of the post-operation output sound that was in the output state until then changes to its output state according to its type. (the 1st A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146(g)) and the case of maintaining this without causing a change in its output state (the 1st A post-reception output sound shown in FIG. 146(h) sound).

In addition, in the above-described effect example, when the display after non-operation is displayed, the sound corresponding to this is not output, so the display after non-operation is displayed when the operation state is set. It is possible to suggest that the display is triggered by the non-operating state instead of the display.

Further, in the above-described effect example, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operated state, the interval until the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, is newly started to be output is indefinite. A special acceptance allowable state (2A acceptance allowable state) is included in the specific type of multiple operation valid state in which the post-operation change can be executed multiple times in the form of time.

In the special acceptance acceptable state (2A acceptance acceptable state), the type of post-operation output sound that changes (ends) when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state. (First post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is a type of operation that does not change (end) when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state. The output of the post-output sound (the second post-reception output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) can be started in either the output state or the non-output state. The type of post-operation output sound (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that does not change (end) when the (operation button 410) changes from the operated state to the non-operated state is The type of post-operation output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. Since it is possible to start outputting while in the output state (or at the same time) instead of starting the output independently when not in the output state, it is possible to encourage interruption of the operation while providing a moderate sense of tension. become able to.

Further, in the special acceptance allowable state (2A acceptance allowable state) of the thirty-ninth configuration A39, while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operated state, the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is Even if the output condition is satisfied (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is started based on the operation reception performed at timing tAb2-B2. On the other hand, the output state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, the sound effect for one time), which has been in the output state until then, is terminated based on the operation acceptance performed at the timing tAb2-B2. or not start a new output. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, the effect sound for one time) that was in the output state at the time when the timing tAb2-B2 arrived is continued, and the reproduction state is continued. There is no possibility that the output of a sound (sound effect for one time) based on new data due to the midway termination will not be started or that the reproduction will be restarted.

In the thirty-ninth configuration A39, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the multiple-time operation enabled state are the same operation means, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means represented as a simulated image display and allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple-time operation valid state.

Further, the "multiple operation valid state" related to the thirty-ninth configuration A39 may be a valid period that occurs during symbol variation based on the big hit determination.

In addition, in order to realize the thirty-ninth configuration A39, only one of the first A acceptance acceptable state and the third A acceptance acceptable state may be provided. It is possible to obtain at least part of the effect.

Further, for example, the 40th configuration A40 includes a multiple-time operation valid state in which acceptance of operation on a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and in the multiple-time operation valid state, the specific operation means (operation button 410) 410) is maintained in the operated state, the interval until the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, is newly started to be output is always less than or equal to a specific time. In a multiple-time operation valid state of a predetermined type that can be executed multiple times (the 1A reception-permitting state shown in FIG. 146 and the 3A reception-permitting state shown in FIG. 152), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operating state, the post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, can be displayed. 146(e), (f), and FIGS. 148(c), (g), etc.), the above When the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operated state, the interval until the output of the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, is newly started is always longer than the specific time. In a specific type of multiple-operation valid state (2A acceptability state shown in FIG. 149) in which the post-operation change can be executed multiple times, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state. Not only is it possible to display the post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, based on the detection of a certain event, but also that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from the operating state to the non-operating state. Even when it is detected, the post-non-operation display HB2 (see FIG. 149(f), FIGS. 151(c), (f), etc.) can be displayed in response to the detection of the non-operation state. In addition, in the specific type of multiple operation valid state (2A acceptance allowable state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operating state, and it is detected that it is in the non-operating state. The post-non-operation display (post-non-operation display HB2) corresponding to is displayed, and the post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound) of the post-operation changes maintains the output state. (For example, timings tAb2-B3 to tAb2-C1 shown in FIG. 149, etc.) can appear as a result of a game played by the player. When it is detected that the state has changed to the operation state, the detection is used as a trigger to cause a change (end) to the post-non-operation display (post-non-operation display HB2) that has been in the display state until then. However, the post-operation output sound (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)), which has been in the output state until then, does not change (finish) and maintains the output state. (see timing tAb2-C1 shown in FIGS. 149(f) and (h) and FIG. 151(g)).

According to such a configuration, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operated state, the interval until the output of the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, is newly started is the above. In a specific type of multiple-operations valid state (2A reception-allowed state shown in FIG. 149) in which the post-operation change can be executed multiple times in a form that is always longer than the specific time, the post-operation change is When the player performs another operation while the game is being executed, part of the post-operation change mode up to that point is continued to be executed, but part of the change (end) is caused. Therefore, it is possible to provide a sense of anticipation for the start of a new performance while providing a feeling of tension when performing the operation again.

It should be noted that, in the above-described effect example, the 1A acceptance allowable state is the same as the 2A acceptability state, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state where it is not operated. It may also be possible to generate an acceptability state in which a post-non-operation display corresponding to this is displayed. In this case, the conditions for displaying the display after non-operation and the conditions for hiding the display may be the same as those for the display after non-operation HB2 described in the 2A acceptance allowable state. However, even in this case, the 3A reception permission state is such that when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operation state to the non-operation state in which the operation is not performed, the post-non-operation display corresponding to this state is displayed. It is desirable to generate it as an undisplayed acceptability state.

According to such a configuration, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state in the multiple-time operation valid state according to the fortieth configuration A40, the operation that is one of the post-operation changes is performed. A predetermined type of multiple operation valid state (shown in FIG. 146) in which the post-operation change can be executed multiple times in such a manner that the interval until the output of the post-output sound is newly started is always less than or equal to a specific time. 152), the post-operation change, which is one of the post-operation changes, based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state. The display can be displayed, but even if the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state, the corresponding post-non-operating display is not displayed (3A acceptance acceptable state); Based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operating state, not only can the post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, be displayed, but also the operation of the specific operation means (operation button 410) Even when it is detected that the state has changed to the non-operating state, the post-non-operating display corresponding to the detection of the non-operating state can be displayed. In this case, even in a predetermined type of multiple-operation valid state (first A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 146 or third A reception permitted state shown in FIG. 152) related to the fortieth configuration A40, the specific operation means ( The operation button 410) is in the non-operating state, the post-non-operating display is displayed in response to detection of the non-operating state, and the post-operation output sound among the changes after the operation maintains the output state. This situation can appear as a result of a game played by the player, and when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from the non-operating state to the operating state in this situation, the detection is triggered. , while always causing a change to the post-non-operation display that was in the display state until then, the output state of the post-operation output sound that was in the output state until then changes to its output state according to its type. (first A post-acceptance output sound shown in FIG. 146(g)) and maintaining this without causing a change in its output state (first A post-acceptance output shown in FIG. 146(h) sound).

Further, in the above-described effect example, when the display after non-operation is displayed, the sound corresponding to this is not output, so the display after non-operation is displayed triggered by the operation state. It is possible to suggest that the display is triggered by the non-operating state instead of the display.

Further, in the above-described effect example, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operated state, the interval until the output of the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, is newly started is the above. A specific type of multiple operation valid state in which the post-operation change can be executed multiple times in a form that is always longer than the specific time includes a special acceptance acceptable state (2A acceptance acceptable state). I made it

In the special acceptance acceptable state (2A acceptance acceptable state), the type of post-operation output sound that changes (ends) when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state. (First post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. 149(g)) is a type of operation that does not change (end) when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state. The output of the post-output sound (the second post-reception output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) can be started in either the output state or the non-output state. The type of post-operation output sound (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in FIG. 149(h)) that does not change (end) when the (operation button 410) changes from the operated state to the non-operated state is The type of post-operation output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in FIG. Since it is possible to start outputting while in the output state (or at the same time) instead of starting the output independently when not in the output state, it is possible to encourage interruption of the operation while providing a moderate sense of tension. become able to.

Further, in the special acceptance allowable state (2A acceptance allowable state) of the fortieth configuration A40, while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operated state, the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is Even if the output condition is satisfied (timing tAb2-B2 shown in FIG. 149), the output of the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 is started based on the operation reception performed at timing tAb2-B2. On the other hand, the output state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, the sound effect for one time), which has been in the output state until then, is terminated based on the operation acceptance performed at the timing tAb2-B2. or not start a new output. That is, in this case, the reproduction state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 (here, the effect sound for one time) that was in the output state at the time when the timing tAb2-B2 arrived is continued, and the reproduction state is continued. There is no possibility that the output of a sound (sound effect for one time) based on new data due to the midway termination will not be started or that the reproduction will be restarted.

In the fortieth configuration A40, it is assumed that the operation means to be operated in the multiple-time operation valid state is the same operation means, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the "specific operation means" may be replaced with "an operation means represented as a simulated image display and allowed to be operated multiple times" in each multiple-time operation valid state.

Further, the "multiple operation valid state" related to the 40th configuration A40 may be a valid period that occurs during the symbol variation based on the big hit determination.

Further, in order to realize the 40th configuration A40, only one of the 1A acceptance acceptable state and the 3A acceptance acceptable state may be provided. It is possible to obtain at least part of the effect.

By the way, in the first configuration A1 to the 40th configuration A40, there are some that claim "suggestion that the performance is worth noting" as an effect, but there is a performance worth noting It is not mandatory to actually have sex. It can be expected that the interest in the game can be maintained simply by providing a performance such as "a valuable performance may be executed".

Further, the configurations of the first configuration A1 to the 40th configuration A40 may be partly applied to each other.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to several embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements and design changes are possible.

In the acceptance period according to the above-described production example, if the operation of the operation unit is not accepted, the same post-acceptance display as when the operation of the operation unit is accepted is not displayed (the same post-acceptance change is not caused). In addition to ``do not generate the production itself related to the reception period'', ``the same display after reception as when the operation reception is performed (although it does not cause the same change after reception), A post-acceptance display that is different from when the operation is accepted may be displayed (a different post-acceptance change may occur).

If a plurality of operating units are prepared that are permitted to accept operations during the acceptance period according to the above-described production example, these operating units may be provided as different operating units. , may be provided as different parts in one operation unit.

Further, in the above-described production example, the display imitating the operation unit may be an image display in which at least the relevant portion is expressed as an image, and a portion different from the operation unit is also expressed in the same image display. It can be anything that exists.

In addition, in the above-described production example, depending on the type of reception period, when the reception period occurs, the reception acceptance sound is output in one of multiple modes with different expectations (expectations for granting benefits such as big hits). Although there are cases, in the reception period of the type in which the acceptable acceptance sound is output in such a manner, if an operation is performed on a specific operation unit while the acceptable acceptance sound is being output, this is triggered. (This is not an essential configuration). In other words, in this case, if the operation is performed at an early stage after the acceptance period occurs, there is a risk that the expectation level information provided by the acceptance acceptance sound cannot be recognized early, so the acceptance period occurs. It can be expected to suppress playing a rough game, such as performing repeated hitting operations from before.

Also, in the example of the effect described above, depending on the type of reception period, there is a case where the reception acceptance sound is always output in the same manner when the reception period occurs, but the reception acceptance sound is output in such a manner. In the acceptance period for each type, if an operation is performed on a specific operation unit while the acceptable acceptance sound is being output, the acceptance acceptable sound is made inaudible, and In some cases, allowable sounds may not be rendered inaudible (this is not a mandatory configuration). That is, in this case, if the acceptable acceptance sound is not made inaudible, it is possible to recognize that the acceptance acceptable sound was not of the type that suggests the degree of expectation when the user has mistakenly operated early. Therefore, it can be expected to suppress the decline in gaming interest. In addition, when the reception acceptable sound is made inaudible, it is not a type of reception acceptable sound that suggests the degree of expectation in the first place, so there is no disadvantage in operating early, but the player side does not have the expectation level. Since it is possible that the reception acceptable sound is of the suggested type, it is expected that even if such a type of reception acceptable sound is used, the above-described miscellaneous game will be suppressed. sell.

For example, in each of the above-described examples of effects related to the automatic effect function, there are cases where a display such as "Auto button is being set" is displayed, but this display does not necessarily have to be performed. In particular, if the pachinko machine 1 is not a pachinko machine set to an automatic performance mode, but a pachinko machine 1 in which the automatic performance function can always be activated and the processing itself such as "setting to the performance state" is not installed, It is desirable to prevent the display such as "Auto button being set" from being displayed. In the pachinko machine 1, which does not have a process itself such as "setting to the effect state", the effective period during which the automatic effect function is performed and the automatic effect function are determined according to the type of operation reception effect that the player's operation is permitted. A period of validity that is not played may occur.

Further, in each of the production examples described above, "operation-related display (for example, display of a model image)" means a state in which reception of operations on the operation unit is permitted (reception permitted period), or a state in which reception of operations on the operation unit is permitted Since it can only appear when it is in the state (acceptance permissible period), at least when the "operation-related display" is displayed, the permissible reception period will always occur, or at the time when it is displayed It is acceptable as long as it is in an allowable state. Therefore, while the "operation-related display" is being displayed, the allowable acceptance period may end before the "operation-related display" is hidden.

Further, in each of the examples of effects described above, the "simulated image" may be realized as an image prompting the player to perform an operation. It does not have to be displayed as an image that imitates the target operating means.

Further, in each of the production examples described above, the "player's operation (action)" to be detected refers to the player's direct operation (pressing action) such as the "operation button 410" or the "sword decoration 5001". or drawing a sword), the touch sensor detects "a player's contact action on a specific part", and the non-contact sensor detects a "player's action in a specific space". etc. is also included. In short, it is only necessary to have one or a plurality of receiving means (operation units) for receiving actions (pressing action, drawing action, touch action, non-contact action, etc.) by the player.

Also, when adopting the automatic effect function in each of the above-described effect examples, regarding the timing of automatically generating (automatically accepting) the operation acceptance within the operation valid period, any timing is set within the operation valid period. may be In order to appropriately provide the player with an opportunity to operate, it is necessary to detect an operation when an operation is not detected until a predetermined timing arrives after half or more of the operation valid period has elapsed. It is desirable that the reception is automatically generated (automatic reception), and the post-operation production is started based on the automatically generated operation reception. In this sense, an operation reception is automatically generated (automatic reception) when an operation is not detected until the remaining time within the operation valid period reaches one frame, and a post-operation effect is produced based on the automatically generated operation reception. It can be said that it is the most desirable to start. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned production examples related to the automatic production function, if the bar display is not hidden even after the effective period ends and this is maintained, the operation is performed in accordance with the timing when the effective period ends. It is desirable to perform an effect that changes the mode of the means (for example, vibration, turning off the LED, etc.). As a result, even if the bar display is not hidden and is displayed continuously, it is expected to prevent players from misrecognising that the valid period is continuing. Become so.

In each of the production examples described above, when "period", "time", and "state" are described, they may be "period", "time", and "state", which are the minimum units for control. For example, it includes a period, time, state, etc. for one frame.

In addition, the "post-acceptance change (post-acceptance display)" in response to the operation acceptance during each acceptance period (operation-allowed state) according to the above-mentioned production example and its modifications does not necessarily increase the expectation that a big hit can be obtained. It does not have to be suggestive. For example, during the execution period of the jackpot game, it may occur as a reception period as to whether or not the probability variation function is to be activated, and may be executed as a display after the reception. It may occur as a reception period in a mini-game that has nothing to do with it, and may be executed as a display after the reception. Alternatively, it may be generated based on the establishment of a predetermined condition in various interval periods, etc., and may be executed as a display after receiving the condition. Therefore, the acceptance period according to the above-described example of effect and its modification does not necessarily have to occur within the period during which the symbol variation is executed. In addition, even in the case where the post-acceptance indication is displayed without suggesting the degree of expectation, a plurality of modes are prepared for displaying the post-acceptance indication, and the indication is displayed in one of the plurality of modes. You may do so. In addition, each reception period (operation permitted state) according to the above-mentioned production example and its modification is not a finite one in which a predetermined set time is set, and unless a predetermined condition irrelevant to the passage of time is satisfied may include a type of reception period (operation permitted state) that continues indefinitely.

In each of the above-described production examples, the production sounds such as "BGM production sound" and "BMG playback sound" are those that can start audible output based on the start winning, and can be used according to a plurality of symbol fluctuations. It is a sound that can be output so as to maintain its audible state across.

A model image that imitates an operation receiving part that receives an operation and a border decoration image that decorates the periphery of the model image may be separately prepared as image data, and the image data may be combined and displayed as an integrated model image. good.

In the example shown in FIG. 144, when an operation opportunity is given to one operation means, the "normal button model image BMGa" is displayed (FIGS. 144(a) and (c)), and 144(b) and (d)). However, when the "normal button model image BMGa" is displayed (FIGS. 144(a) and (c)), the first operating means (first operation receiving unit) is given an opportunity to operate, and the "special button When a model image BMGb' is displayed (FIGS. 144(b) and (d)), for a second operating means (second operation receiving section) different from the first operating means (first operation receiving section) You may make it give an operation opportunity.

In each of the explanation examples described above, the members (operating means) prepared as operation targets include items that require a pressing operation (pressing action) (such as buttons) and items that require an inserting/removing operation (inserting/extracting action) (a Decoration, etc.), or may be realized as a device (proximity sensor, etc.) that requires a player's action such as non-contact or touch.

The peripheral edge decoration image SSG does not imitate the peripheral edge decoration part actually provided on the periphery of "the operation receiving part to which the operation opportunity is given", but at least part of it imitates the peripheral edge decoration part. It is acceptable as long as it does not have a rim, and there may be a part that imitates the peripheral decorative part.

When displaying the specific image TG within the effective period, the gauge image GG does not necessarily have to be displayed.

Regarding the "automatic reception effect (reception period in which the automatic button function is activated)" described in Fig. 144 and later, any of the implementation methods related to the "automatic reception effect" exemplified before it is adopted. You may make it Any of the above-described realization methods may be adopted as to how the model image and the gauge image are displayed when the automatic reception presentation is performed. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a reception effect occurs, the type of effect state at the time of occurrence, or the type of the reception effect (effect after operation) itself, or the reception effect Even if there is no operation by the player within the effective period, the same post-operation effect as when there was an operation is executed ("automatic effect function" is activated) depending on the conditions under which If there is no operation by the player within the validity period, the post-operation effect may not be executed (the "automatic effect function" may not be activated). The timing at which the automatic effect function is activated may be at a predetermined timing within the effective period, at the end of the effective period, or after a short period of time has passed after the effective period ends. may be

The acceptance period (operation permitting state) exemplified in each example of effect described above does not necessarily have to occur within the effect pattern corresponding to the result of the big hit determination (determination determination). For example, during the period in which the symbol variation is not performed (for example, the period in which the jackpot game is performed, various interval periods, etc.) (predetermined conditions are (based on what was established).

In addition, the acceptance period illustrated in each of the production examples described above does not necessarily have to set the termination condition of the acceptance period as "a predetermined time value has passed", and the predetermined termination condition is satisfied. (For example, when 10 game balls are accepted in the big winning opening), the acceptance period may be terminated.

Also, in each production example described above, the disappearance EF production (disappearance effect image, duplicate production display, etc.) is the production after reception (a conversation notice that suggests the degree of expectation depending on which conversation appears, a movable body It is common to multiple reception periods with different types such as a movable effect that suggests the degree of expectation depending on whether or not it operates, a cut-in notice that indicates the degree of expectation depending on which mode the cut-in display appears, etc.) (executed in the same presentation mode), and this makes it possible to recognize that the action reception (operation reception) is properly performed (state that the reception period has ended). be. In other words, since the performance after acceptance differs depending on the type of acceptance period, when you see the content of the presentation, is it being performed within the acceptance period, or is the acceptance period over? It is difficult to recognize whether this is done in conjunction with In this respect, regardless of the type of reception period, by preparing a disappearing EF effect that can appear in a common (same) production mode when the reception period ends, the operation reception (operation reception) is properly performed and the post-reception production is performed. is being executed. However, as a gaming machine (pachinko machine 1), it is sufficient if there is a case where a common disappearance EF effect (disappearance effect image, duplicate effect display, etc.) is executed in multiple types of post-acceptance effects. A dedicated annihilation EF effect (duplicate effect display) that can be executed only when an effect occurs may be prepared.

Unless otherwise specified, the configuration of each of the above-described production examples is for the case where the game is being executed in a normal state, not for the case where some abnormal state has occurred.

The reception acceptance state according to each of the production examples described above does not have to be generated based on the judgment, for example, it occurs with the passage of time, and the display after reception is, for example, a mini game during the big hit, and the judgment It does not have to be indicative of the results of

The term "simulation (simulation image)" used when describing each of the above-described production examples is synonymous with "simulation (simulation image)."

The above-described "multiple operation permitted state" may be a state in which a selection target (for example, a character or the like) is switched each time an operation is performed.

In addition, the above-mentioned "automatic continuous tapping function" can be realized as a continuous tapping mode in which a new change after acceptance occurs at a certain interval just by maintaining the operation state. It is also possible to realize a long-press mode in which the change is continued without ending (extending the execution time).

In addition, regarding the items described as "preferable" in the above-mentioned production examples, modifications, notes, etc., it only describes further effects when the same configuration is provided, and the same configuration , needless to say.

That is, in the embodiment, the game machine is applied to the pachinko machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and can be applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine formed by combining a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Also in this case, the same effects can be obtained.

1 pachinko machine 2 outer frame 3 door frame 4 main body frame 5 game board 5a game area 1402 normal symbol indicator 1403 first special symbol indicator 1404 first special reservation number indicator 1405 second special symbol indicator 1406 second special reservation Number indicator 1407 Round indicator 1500 Peripheral control unit 1510 Peripheral control board 2001 General winning opening 2002 First starting opening 2003 Gate section 2004 Second starting opening 2005 Big winning opening

Claims (1)

a specific operation means operable by a player;
a determination means for determining;
privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege to a player based on the fact that a predetermined result is obtained in the judgment by the judging means;
an operation state detection means capable of detecting the state of the specific operation means;
post-operation sound output means capable of outputting a post-operation output sound in response to the detection by the operation state detection means that the specific operation means is in an operation state in which the specific operation means is being operated;
message display means capable of displaying a message display prompting an operation on the specific operation means,
Detection of being in the operation state is permitted a plurality of times as an operation valid state, which is a state in which output of the post-operation output sound can be started when it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state, and the operation is performed. A multiple operation valid state is prepared in which the post-output sound can be output multiple times, and in the multiple operation valid state, both the message display and the message display are not displayed. A game machine
Among the multiple-operation valid states, it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state in the multiple-operation valid state of the type in which the message display is displayed, and a post-operation output sound is output in accordance with this detection. In this case, when it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from the operation state to a non-operation state in which the post-operation output sound is being output, the output sound is output. The post-operation output sound in the state can change with the detection as a trigger,
In the multiple operation valid state of the type in which the message display is displayed, a model image display imitating the specific operation means can be displayed,
When it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state in the multiple operation valid state of the type in which the message display is displayed, a plurality of types of post-operation output sounds can be output,
When it is detected that the specific operation means is in the operation state in the multiple operation valid state of the type in which the message display is displayed, the post-operation display can be displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by having another operation means different from the specific operation means as an operation means operable by a player.

Images